Lia 





THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


Ql  'dloM^^'^^ 


{S^-"^ 


x:.C.. -...:/    n- 


A  HANDBOOK  AND  GRAMMAR 


OF  THE 


TAGALOG  LANGUAGE, 


BY 


First  Lieut.  W.  E.  W.  MacKINLAY, 

First  Ca-valry,  U.  S.  Army, 
Member  American  Oriental  Society. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT   PRINTING   OFFICE. 

1905. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

Document  No.  260. 

OFFICE  OF  CHIEF  OF  STAFF. 


.  f.' 


ERRATA. 

Page  29,  ninth  line  from  bottom.     For  "(Sp.)"  read  ''(Sp. :  from 
A-ztec.)-' 
Page  45.  twenty -seventh  line  from   bottom.      For  ''^  Loiigos--  read 

Page  &2,  eleventh  line  from  bottom.    For  '"'' pmuiing "  read  '"'' paxiang.'''^ 


fiUCKAMMEX 

PL 
(oo£3 


[Extract.] 

War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 

Washington,  August  30,  1905. 
Sir:  I  have  the  honor  to  transmit  herewith  the  manuscript  of  a  work 
entitled  "A  Handbook  and  Grammar  of  the  Tagalog  Language,"  consist- 
ing of  399  pages  of  typewriting,  which  I  estimate  will  make  about  200  pages 
in  print.  I  would  suggest  that  the  work  be  bound  in  a  substantial  water- 
proof cover,  similar  to  that  used  for  the  latest  edition  of  the  "Soldier's 
Handbook,"  and  that  the  size  be  8  by  5|  inches,  or  approximately  so. 

I  would  also  invite  attention  to  the  folders  accompanying.  *  *  *  it 
would  be  best  to  have  the  left-hand  edge  of  the  folders  begin  at  the  outside 
margin  of  the  printed  page,  so  that  when  extended  the  student  could  read 
the  corresponding  text  to  the  synopsis  at  the  same  time  and  not  be  obhged 
to  turn  the  pages  back  and  forth. 

*  *  ^  *  *  *  * 

Very  respectfully, 

William  E.  W.  MacKinlay, 
First  Lieutenant,  First  Cavalry. 
Maj.  William  D.  Beach, 

Chief,  Second  {Military  Information)  Division, 

Washington,  D.  C. 

3 


688209 


:  r».'«iXlLDiJr 


PREFACE. 


Shortly  after  the  arrival  of  the  author  in  the  Philippines  he,  in  common 
with  inanj'  others,  felt  the  need  of  a  work  upon  the  Tagalog  language  in 
English,  and  began  to  prepare  this  compendium,  working  upon  it  from 
time  to  time  as  other  military  duties  permitted,  and,  upon  being  ordered  to 
duty  in  Washington  for  the  purpose  of  having  better  facilities  for  the  c(jm- 
pletionof  the  work,  has  been  enabled  to  bring  it  to  such  completion,  under 
the  direction  of  Maj.  W.  D.  Beach,  Fifteenth  Cavalry,  chief  of  the  Second 
Division,  General  Staff. 

As  the  Tagalog,  belonging  to  a  very  different  family  of  languages  from 
those  with  which  Americans  are  familiar,  has  extremely  dissimilar  char- 
acteristics from  English  or  any  Aryan  tongue,  the  writer  has  devised  a 
type  scheme,  presented  in  the  folder  herewith,  by  which  the  salient  points 
of  difference  may  be  seen  at  a  glance  and  vividly  retained  in  the  memory, 
thus  enabling  the  student  to  use  correct  and  intelligible  Tagalog. 

Supplemented  by  that  constant  practice  necessary  for  the  ear,  it  is  believed 
that  the  copious  index  to  this  work,  together  with  the  type  scheme,  selected 
vocabularies,  and  plain  nontechnical  (as  far  as  possible)  explanations  of 
the  grammatical  structure  of  Tagalog,  will  prove  to  be  of  value  to  those 
whose  duty  or  inclination  may  lead  them  to  consult  this  book.  Such,  at 
least,  is  the  hope  of  the  writer. 

The  Tagalog  language  is  easily  pronounced,  regular  in  its  forms,  and 
although  its  structure  is  complex,"  yet  when  once  grasped  it  is  so  plain  that 
it  is  not  only  clearly  comprehended,  but  is  a  key  to  all  the  INIalayan  tongues, 
especially  to  those  of  the  Philippines.  It  is  an  idiom  which  builds  up  its 
sentence's  and  parts  of  speech  from  roots  by  means  of  particles  which 
are  prefixed,  infixed,  or  suffixed  to  the  roots.  Several  of  these  particles 
may  l)e  combined  with  the  same  root,  each  having  its  share  in  the  modifi- 
cation of  the  inherent  idea  of  the  root. 

Attention  is  also  invited  to  the  great  use  of  the  "definite"  in  Tagalog, 
the  so-called  "passive"  of  the  Spanish  writers  upon  this  subject. 

The  index,  which  has  been  made  very  full  and  copious,  should  be  con- 
sulted, as  every  probable  combination  of  particles  has  been  noted,  as  well 
as  Tagalog  roots  and  English  words  occurring  in  the  work.  For  example, 
every  word  preceded  by  the  compound  particle  ipinag  has  been  listed,  thus 
enabling  the  root  to  be" found  at  once,  and  so  on  in  like  manner. 

The  writer  desires  to  express  his  appreciation  for  assistance  received 
from  the  militarv  authorities  both  in  the  Philippine  Islands  and  the  United 
States,  from  maiiv  of  his  brother  oflicers,  and  from  Profs.  Friedrich  Hirth, 
of  Columbia;  E.  W.  Hopkins,  of  Yale  (secretary  of  the  American  Oriental 
Societv) ;  Paul  Haupt  and  F.  \V.  Blake,  of  Johns  Hopkins;  Otis  T.  INIason, 
of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  and  the  late  John  W.  Huett,  of  Luther 
College,  Illinois.  Valuable  suggestions  were  also  received  from  Messrs. 
Pedro  Serrano  Laktaw,  author  of  a  Tagalog-Spanish  dictionary;  Luis 
Torres,  and  Vicente  Albert,  all  of  Manila. 


A  HANDBOOK  AND  GRAMMAR  OF  THE  TAGALOG 
LANGUAGE. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY    OI^    TAGALOG. 
BOOKS  CONSULTED  IN  THE   PREPARATION   OF  THIS   WORK. 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  mention  that  authorities  upon  Tagalog  have 
not  been  very  plentiful,  even  with  the  great  revival  of  interest  in  the 
Malayo-Polynesian  languages  which  has  taken  place  within  the  last  few 
years.  The  number  of  works,  old  and  new,  large  and  small,  upon  this 
subject,  or  bearing  upon  it,  is  very  close  to  forty,  and  many  of  these  are 
of  little  value  or  are  obsolete.  The  number  of  reprints,  however,  brings 
the  aggregate  up  to  about  one  hundred,  but  this  has  no  bearing  upon  the 
material  available  for  study. 

The  isolation  of  the  Philippine  Islands  under  the  Spanish  regime  also 
contributed  to  the  neglect  of  the  Philippine  languages,  and  it  seems  almost 
as  if  Spanish  and  foreign  workers  in  this  field  studiously  avoided  consulting 
one  another's  researches,  or  else  were  ignorant  of  them.  In  the  review 
of  books  written  upon  Tagalog,  or  containing  notices  of  it,  works  written 
to  teach  Spanish  to  the  Tagalogs,  novels — generally  romances  of  the  type 
current  in  the  middle  ages  in  Europe — lives  of  saints,  and  miscellaneous 
works,  which  make  up  what  may  be  called  the  Tagalog  literature,  have 
been  omitted.  The  total  number  of  works  in  Tagalog  may  be  estimated 
at  from  four  to  five  hundred,  and  very  few  can  be  said  to  have  a  literary 
value. 

The  energy  of  those  who  are  able  to  write  Tagalog  well  has  mainly  been 
absorbed  in  newspaper  work,  and  no  great  work  has  as  yet  appeared  in  the 
language. 

It  can  scarcely  be  doubted  that  if  some  of  the  great  works  of  the  world 
were  translated  into  Tagalog  and  placed  where  they  would  be  accessible  to 
the  common  })eop]e,  who  do  not  speak  or  read  Spanish,  and  are  almost  too 
old  to  learn  English  well,  that  the  results  would  be  of  great  and  immediate 
importance  in  the  mental  development  of  the  race. 

The  honor  of  the  first  written  treatise  upon  the  Tagalog  language  prob- 
ably belongs  to  the  Friar  Agustin  de  Alburquenjue,  who  arrived  at  Manila 
from  Nueva  Espafia  (^lexico)  in  1571,  and  after  three  years'  residence  in 
Taal,  Balayan,  and  other  parts  of  Batangas,  became  Prior  of  Tondoin  1575, 
holding  the  position  until  his  death  in  1580.  This  treatise  has  neter  been 
published,  and  the  assertion  is  opposed  by  the  Franciscan  order,  which 
claims  the  credit  for  the  first  work  upon  this  subject.  (See  Vol.  II,  p. 
563,  "  Estadismo de  las  Islas  Filipinas,  de  Zufiiga,"  edited  by  W.  E.  Retana, 
^Madrid,  1893;  "  La  Poh'tica  de  Espafia  en  Filipinas,"  ano  VI,  niim.  134;  and 
the  "Cattilogo  Bio-Bibliografico  de  los  Religiosos  Agustinos,"  Perez, 
Manila,  1901.) 

To  the  Franciscan  friar  Juan  de  Plasencia,  or  Portocarrero,  who  came 
to  the  Philippines  with  the  first  mission  of  his  order  in  1577,  is  attril)uted 
an  '*  Arte  y  Diccionario  "  of  Tagalog  in  1581,  which  has  remained  in  manu- 
script. (See  "  Catalogo  Biografico  de  los  Religiosos  Franciscanos, "  Moya, 
Manila,  1880.) 


8  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

However,  the  most  important  point  is  when  the  first  printed  work  upon 
the  language  was  published,  and  this  was  undoubtedly  in  the  year  KilO, 
when  an  "  Arte  y  Reglas  de  la  Lengua  Tagala,"  by  Friar  Francisco  de  San 
Jose  of  the  Dominican  order,  and  who  arrived  in  the  Philippines  in  1595, 
was  printed  in  the  "Fartido  de  Bataan,"  probaljly  by  Tomtts  Pinpi'n,  a 
Tagalog.  The  book  is  a  quarto  of  327  pages  of  rice  paper.  One  copy 
exists  in  the  ]\Iaseo-Biblioteca  de  Ultramar  at  Madrid.  Other  editions  of 
this  book  were  printed  at  Manila  in  1752  and  1832.  (See  Retana' sedition 
of  Zuniga,  pp.  101-105.) 

This  work  was  followed  in  1612  by  the  "Yocabulario  de  la  Lengua 
Tagala,"  by  Friar  Pedro  de  Ran  Buenaventura  of  the  Franciscan  onler, 
who  was  in  charge  of  parishes  in  the  present  province  of  La  Laguna,  and 
whose  work  was  printed  in  Pila  by  Tomas  Pinpin  and  Domingo  Loag, 
Tagalogs.  The  book  is  described  by  Medina  in  his  "La  Imprenta  en 
Manila,"  Santiago  de  Chile,  1896,  and  a  facsimile  of  the  title-page  is  given. 

The  Franciscan  friar  Juan  de  Oliver,  who  died  in  the  Camarines  in 
1597,  is  said  to  have  written  a  treatise  upon  the  Tagalog,  but  his  work 
seema  to  have  been  limited  to  correcting  and  adding  to  the  "Arte  y  Diccio- 
nario"  of  Plasencia.  Another  of  the  same  order,  Francisco  de  San  Anto- 
nio, who  was  in  charge  of  Baler  from  1611  to  1616,  and  from  that  time 
until  his  death  in  1624  resided  in  the  present  La  Laguna,  wrote  an 
"  Arte  "  and  a  Tagalog-Spanish  vocabulary,  which  works  existed  in  manu- 
script in  1745,  the  author  being  known  also  as  "Orejita."  (See  Cat. 
Biog.  Rel.  Fran.,  Manila,  1880;  and  the  preface  to  the  "Arte"  of  Totanes.) 

The  Augustinian  friar  Juan  de  Quinones,  who  died  in  Manila  in  1587, 
also  left  a  work  ui^on  the  Tagalog,  which  is  said  by  Beristain  to  have  been 
printed  in  Manila  in  1581.  (See  Beristain,  Biblioteca  Hispano-Americana 
Setentrional,  Amecameca,  Mexico,  1883-1887,  2d  ed. )  The  first  edition 
was  printed  in  Mexico  City  in  1816.  (See  Vol.  II,  p.  464.)  The  matter 
seems  to  be  doubtful. 

The  Franciscan  friar  Geronimo  Monte  y  Escamilla,  who  died  in  1614, 
is  said  to  have  left  in  manuscript  an  "Arte"  and  "Diccionario"  in  Taga- 
log, but  the  work,  if  extant,  is  in  the  archives  of  his  order.  (See  Cat. 
Rel.  Fran.,  Manila,  1880,  p.  60.)  A  similar  manuscript  is  said  to  have 
been  written  by  Francisco  de  San  Antonio,  of  the  same  order,  who  came 
to  the  Philippines  in  1606  and  died  at  Pila,  La  Laguna,  in  1624.  (See  Id., 
p.  139.) 

The  third  printed  work  upon  Tagalog  was  the  "Arte  de  Idioma  Taga- 
log," by  the  Franciscan  Agustin  de  la  Magdalena,  who  arrived  in  the 
islands  in  1665  and  lived  in  Tayabas  and  Laguna  for  some  years.  Return- 
ing to  Mexico  he  there  gave  his  manuscripts  to  the  press  in  1679,  and  in 
1684  returned  to  Manila,  dying  in  Santa  Cruz  de  La  Laguna  in  1689.  (See 
La  Imprenta  en  Mexico,  Medina,  Sevilla,  1893,  No.  1784;  and  Cat.  Rel. 
Fran.,  Manila,  1880,  p.  292.) 

The  Dominican  friar  Teodoro  (Quiros)  de  la  Madre  de  Dios,  who  came 
to  the  islands  in  1627  and  died  in  1662,  has  been  credited  with  an  "Arte" 
of  Tagalog  by  some  bibliographers  of  Philippine  literature,  but  ]\Iedina 
marks  such  a  work  as  doubtful,  as  far  as  the  printing  is  concerned. 

The  eighteenth  century  witnessed  a  revival  of  interest  in  the  language, 
and  in  1703  two  works,  both  of  which  have  been  reprinted,  were  printed. 

The  first  was  the  "Compendio  de  la  Arte  de  la  lengua  Tagala,"  printed 
in  Manila.  This  excellent  treatise  was  reprinted  at  Sampaloc  in  1787,  and 
in  Manila  proper  in  1879.  Both  the  early  editions  are  now  rare.  The 
author  was  the  Augustinian  friar  Gaspar  de  San  Agustin,  who  came  to  the 
Philippines  in  1668,  and  died  in  Manila  in  1724.  He  is  better  known  as 
the  author  of  the  work  "Conquistas  de  las  Islas  Filipinas,"  Part  I,  Mad- 
rid, 1698;  Part  II,  Valladolid,  1890.  The  third  edition,  however,  retains 
many  obsolete  words. 

The  second  work  was  a  "Yocabulario,"  or  dictionary  of  the  Tagalog, 
written  by  the  Franciscan  friar  Domingo  de  los  Santos,  who  came  to  the 
Philippines  in  1665,  and  after  administering  parishes  mainly  in  La  Laguna, 


('^ 


%c 


(Facsimile  ot  llrjt  T«g.lo»  inmnur  written.) 


VOCABVLARIODELEN^ 
*    GVATAGALA.   * 

•fELROMANCECASTE-J. 

►!<  LLANO PVESTO   ^i 

CO  PRIMERO.  r^ 

f  PRliMBFA,  Y  SEGVNDA  PARTE,  rj 

f-  PorFr.  Pedro  de^anBucna  Ventura->inuiil  e  In 

rodignoReligioroFrancifcanodefcalzo.oo 

(s)i^(s)iH^(s)i^(s) 

DIRIGIDO  A.D.I  VAN  D  E  SI  L  VA  CAVA 


(ro 


LLERO  DEL  ORDEN  DE  .S.  FJAGO  GOVERNADOR  Y  CAPITAN 
Gcnnal  drfbi  Kks^y  pttfidntt  dt  fu  Autl'^ncia  y  Chancillciia  Real. 

(     ^  ^   ^    )    jSJs,    ^) 

Jh      rt»      •{<      *♦      «i* 


«  Con  Tiewti»  Impreflb  «oTi  noble  Villad*  Pila,  Pot  Thomat  Pinpi'n,  y  Domui jo  Lo^ 
cv     T^lot.    Anode. ifR.      o» 


-cprint  by  Medina,  Santiago  de  Chile.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  9 

died  in  Majayjay  in  1695.  His  work  was  printed  in  the  town  of  Taya])as 
in  1703,  and  but  two  copies  seem  to  be  known.  One  is  from  the  Marsden 
collection,  and  is  in  the  library  of  King's  College,  London,  and  the  other 
in  the  archives  of  the  Franciscan  order.  Some  leaves  of  a  manuscript 
"Arte"  by  the  same  author  are  also  preserved  in  the  archives.  This  dic- 
tionary was  reprinted  in  Samp;iloc  in  1794  and  in  INIanila  in  1835.  It  is 
now  obsolete.  (See  Cat.  Kel.  Fran.,  Manila,  1880,  p.  294;  Biblioteca  Fili- 
pina,  Retana,  Madrid,  1898  [referred  to  hereafter  as  R.];  Nos.  77  and  148; 
Id.,  Nos.  26  note,  66  note,  66  and  594;  and  Cat.  Bio.-Bib.  Rel.  Agustinos' 
Manila,  1901,  pp.  133-134.) 

The  next  work  upon  this  subject  was  the  "Arte  y  Reglas  de  la  lengua 
Tagala,"  by  the  Augustinian  friar  Tomus  Ortiz,  printed  at  the  convento 
of  Sampaloc  in  1740.  The  author  came  to  tlie  Philippines  in  1690,  was  a 
missionary  in  China  until  about  1712,  and  died  in  ^Manila  in  1742.  (See 
Medina,  La  Imprenta  en  Manila  and  Cat.  Rel.  Agustinos,  p.  169.) 

In  1742  the  Franciscan  friar  IMelchor  Oyanguren  de  Santa  Ines,  who 
had  lived  in  the  Philippines,  mainly  at  Los  Baiios  and  Sariaya,  from  1717 
to  1736,  gave  a  work  to  the  press  in  Mexico  entitled  "Tagalysmo."  This 
interesting  book,  which  has  never  been  reprinted,  compares  with  Tagalog 
the  Mandarin  dialect  of  Chinese,  Hebrew,  and  Greek,  the  Tagalog  being 
reduced  as  far  as  possible  to  a  Latin  basis.     (R.,  39.) 

In  1745  the  work  of  the  Franciscan  Sebastian  de  Totanes  was  printed 
at  Sampaloc.  This  valuable  treatise,  entitled  "Arte  de  la  lengua  Tagala  y 
Manual  Tagalog,"  was  rei)rinted  at  Sampaloc  in  1796,  at  Manila  in  1850, 
and  in  Binondo  ( Manila)  in  1865.  (R.,  42,  79,  202,  and  329. )  The  author 
came  to  the  Philippines  in  1717  and  remained  twenty-nine  years  in  the 
islands.  During  his  residence  at  Lilio  and  Pagsanhan,  La  Laguna,  from 
1732  to  1738,  he  wrote  the  foregoing  book.  He  died  in  ^Madrid  in  1748, 
having  left  the  Philippines  in  1746.  (Cat.  Rel.  Fran.,  Manila,  1880,  pp. 
390-391.) 

In  1754  the  great  "  Vocabulario,"  or  dictionary,  of  the  Tagalog,  explained 
in  Spanish,  was  printed  at  Manila  by  the  Jesuits.  The  main  authors  were 
Juan  de  Noceda,  S.  J.,  and  Pedro  de  San  Lucar,  S.  J.  A  second  edition, 
with  a  Spanish-Tagalog  api:)endix,  was  printed  in  Valladolid  in  1832,  which 
is  now  very  rare,  nearly  all  copies  having  been  lost  by  shipwreck  en  route 
to  the  islands.  There  is  a  copy  in  the  Library  of  Congress.  Another 
edition,  with  additions,  was  printed  by  the  Augustinian  order  at  ^lanila 
in  1860.  This  work,  although  many  words  are  obsolete,  is  the  standard 
on  Tagalog  as  yet.     It  is  also  becoming  rare.     (R.,  48,  136,  and  268. ) 

The  next  work  containing  a  notice  of  Tagalog  is  in  English.  In  Johann 
Reinhold  Forster's  "Observations  made  during  a  Voyage  round  the 
World"  (London,  1778;  German  translation  by  his  son,  Georg  Forster, 
Berlin,  1783)  a  list  of  47  English  words  is  given,  with  their  equivalents  in 
Tagalog,  Pampango,  Malay,  and  several  Polynesian  dialects.  From  some 
rare  words  the  Tagalog  would  appear  to  have  been  taken  from  Noceda 
and  San  Lucar.  Forster  was  born  in  Germany  in  1729,  a  descendant  of 
the  Forester  family  of  Scotland,  and  accompanied  Captain  Cook  in  his 
second  voyage  to  tlie  South  Sea  (1772-1775).  After  his  return  he  became 
professor  at  Halle,  Germany,  where  he  died  in  1798.  His  book  is  espe- 
cially valuable  concerning  the  Polynesian  races  and  islands. 

A  few  years  later  the  German  naturalist  Peter  Simon  Pallas  (born  17-11, 
died  1811),  who  had  become  professor  of  natural  history  in  the  Imperial 
Academy  of  Sciences  at  St.  Petersburg  in  1768,  published  there  in  1787- 
1789  the' work  known  as  the  "  Vocabularium  Catharina\"  from  its  patron- 
ess, Catharine  II.  Written  in  Russian,  it  gives  the  corresponding  word 
for  nearlv  200  terms  in  200  languages.  In  this  list  Pampango  is  No.  186 
and  Tagalog  No.  187.  The  source  is  not  given,  but  that  for  the  Tagalog  is 
evidently  the  same  as  that  of  Forster.  Tlie  Latin  equivalent  for  the  Rus- 
sian words  is  given  in  the  preface.  The  full  title  of  the  work  is  "  Linguarum 
totius  Orbis  Vocabularia  comparativa. "     It  is  in  two  quarto  volumes. 


10  TAQALOG    LANGUAGE. 

At  the  .same  time  the  Spanish  author  Lorenzo  Hervas  y  Panduro  (born 
1735,  died  1809),  of  the  Society  of  Jesus,  ])ul)Ushed  two  works  bearing 
upon  Tagalogto  a  slight  extent,  but  of  importance  as  ins])irinu;  other  work 
upon  the  same  line.  The  first  Mas  his  "Aritmetica,"  published  in  Cesena, 
Italy,  in  1785,  and  the  second,  his  "  Vocabolario  Poliglotto,"  pul)Ushed  at 
the  same  place  in  1787,  both  in  Italian.  In  the  latter  he  gives  specimens 
of  the  language  of  1593,  of  1604,  and  his  own  time.  The  Spanish  edition, 
printed  at  Madrid  in  two  volumes  in  1801,  has  his  observations  upon 
Tagalog  in  the  second  volume. 

In  1803  Prof.  Franz  Carl  Alter,  librarian  of  the  Imperial  and  Royal 
University  of  Vienna,  published  a  work  of  60  i:)ages  upon  the  Tagalog, 
with  the  title  "Ueber  die  tagalische  Sprache."  This  work  seems  based 
upon  a  manuscript  vocabulary  from  the  library  of  Count  Wrbna  at  Vienna, 
supplemented  by  words  from  Pallas  and  the  works  of  the  Abbe  Hervas. 
The  latter  seems  to  have  corresponded  with  Alter,  who  speaks  of  Hervas 
in  the  preface  to  his  book,  and  also  of  Miss  Knight,  of  England,  probably 
a  sister  of  Thomas  Payne  Knight,  the  numismatist,  as  being  interested  in 
his  researches. 

A  work  which  is  yet  of  value  to  the  student  is  that  of  Johann  Christoph 
Adelung  (born  in  Germany  in  1731,  died  in  Dresden,  Saxony,  1806), 
entitled  "^Nlithridates,  oder  Allgemeine  Sprachenkunde."  In  the  first 
volume,  which  appeared  at  Berlin  in  1806,  on  pages  127  and  128,  two  ver- 
sions of  the  Lord's  Prayer  are  given — one  of  1593  and  the  other  of  current 
form — with  an  explanation  of  the  granunatical  forms  as  deduced  from  the 
W'Ords.  The  author,  who  gives  specimens  from  over  500  languages,  is  best 
remembered  for  his  great  work  in  (German  philology,  and  at  the  time  of 
his  death  was  principal  librarian  of  the  Elector  of  Saxony,  at  Dresden, 

Adriano  Balbi  (born  in  Venice  in  1782,  died  there  1848)  published  an 
"Atlas  Ethnographique  du  Globe"  at  Paris  in  1826.  (See  Table  No.  364 
and  pp.  246  to  249,  for  remarks  upon  Tagalog.) 

The  catalogue  of  "William  Marsden,  the  eminent  orientalist  (born  in 
England  in  1754,  died  there  1836),  puV)lished  at  London  in  1827,  contains 
mention  of  some  manuscript  "Artes"  of  Tagalog  not  known  to  have  been 
printed.  One  is  an  "Arte"  by  a  Dominican  friar,  dated  1736,  and  the 
other  a  "  Vocabulario"  by  the  Dominican  INIiguel  Ruiz,  dated  1580.  This, 
however,  must  be  an  error,  as  the  Dominicans  did  not  arrive  in  the  Phil- 
ippines until  1587.  Miguel  Ruiz  was  one  of  their  early  friars,  but  little 
seems  to  have  been  recorded  about  him.  In  Marsden's  Miscellaneous 
Works  (London,  1834),  page  94,  are  also  some  observations  upon  Tagalog. 

To  the  genius  of  the  German  author  Wilhelm  von  Humboldt  the  world 
is  indebted  for  his  magnificent  work  upon  the  Malayo-Polynesian  languages, 
which  was  published  by  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences  at  Berlin,  in  three 
volumes,  in  1838,  under  the  title  "Ueber  die  Kawi-Sprache  auf  der  Insel 
Java."  His  dissertation  upon  the  Tagalog  verbal  system  and  formations 
in  Volume  II,  pages  347  to  396,  clearly  establishes  the  fact  that  the  Tagalog 
and  allied  tongues  of  the  Philippines  have  preserved  the  verbal  modifying 
particles  to  a  greater  extent  than  any  other  members  of  this  great  linguistic 
family,  and  on  page  288  of  the  same  volume  he  goes  so  far  as  to  say  that  at 
first  view  the  student  of  Tagalog  seems  to  have  come  into  a  wholly  new 
system.  This  noted  philologist,  who  was  l)orn  in  1767  and  died  in  1835, 
has  evidently  taken  the  greater  part  of  his  material  upon  the  Tagalog  from 
the  second  (1796)  edition  of  Totanes,  and  hence  lacked  the  advantage  of 
having  been  upon  the  ground. 

The  Augustinian  friar  Manuel  Buzeta,  better  known  as  the  author  of  the 
"Geographical  Dictionary"  or  Gazetteer  of  the  Philippines  (in  cooperation 
with  Bravo),  published  a  Tagalog  grammar  at  Madrid  in  1850.  (R.,  199.) 
The  author,  whose  name  is  spelled  "Buceta"  in  the  Cat.  Rel.  Agustinos, 
came  to  the  Philippines  in  1827,  where  he  was  in  charge  of  the  church  at 
Guiguinto  in  1832  and  of  ]\Ialate  in  1848.  He  returned  to  Spain  in  1849, 
and  resided  at  iladrid  until  1854,  in  which  year  he  left  the  order  and 
returned  to  secular  life. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  ]  1 

The  work  of  Sinibaldo  de  I\Ia,s  upon  the  islands,  pubHshed  at  Madrid  in 
two  vohiines  in  1843,  contains  a  short  comparative  vocabulary  (jf  Tagalog, 
Visayan,  Ilocano,  Ibanaji  (Cagayan),  and  Malay.     (R.,  180.) 

In  1854  the  "Tagalog-Spanish  Dictionary"  of  Rosalio  Serrano,  a  Tagalog 
of  Bulacau  Province,  was  jjrinted  atilanifa,  and  second  and  third  editions 
have  appeared,  the  third  being  printed  in  Binondo  (]\huiila)  in  1869.  A 
Spanish-Tagalog  dictionary  bv  the  same  author  was  printed  in  Manila  in 
1872.     (K.,  227,  370,  426.) 

In  1855  Carlos  Cuarteron,  a  priest  who  had  also  been  a  pilot  in  the 
Southern  Islands,  published  a  work  at  Rome  entitled  "  Sp^gazione  e  tra- 
duzione,"  at  the  end  of  which  there  is  a  vocabularv  of  Italian,  Malay, 
Tagalog,  iind  Joloano.     (R.,  229. ) 

In  1872  the  grammar  of  Joaquin  de  Coria  (Gil  y  Montes  de  Santo 
Domingo)  was  published  at  Madrid,  where  the  author  had  accepteii  the 
position  of  professor  of  Tagalog  in  the  Central  University.  The  work 
shows  the  careful  study  of  the  author,  who  came  to  the  islands  in  1831 
and  resided  in  the  Tagalog  region  until  his  return  to  Spain  in  1866.  On 
account  of  his  accepting  the  chair  of  Tagalog  against  the  wish  of  the  prel- 
ate of  his  (jrder,  he  was  dropped  from  its  rolls;  ):>ut,  unfortunately,  the  plan 
of  Minister  ]\Ioret  did  not  succeed,  and  the  jiosition  to  which  he  was 
elected  never  became  active.  The  author  was  bjrn  in  1815  and  entered 
the  Franciscan  Order  in  1830.      (R.,  411;  also  Cat.  Biog.  Rel.  Fran.,  p.  656. ) 

The  same  year,  1872,  appeared  the  popular  Spanish-Tagalog  "Lessons 
upon  the  (irammar"  of  Bishop  Jose  Hevia  Camponianes,  bishop  of  Xueva 
vSegovia  (Vigan).  A  second  edition  appeared  in  1877,.  the  third  in  1883, 
the  fourtl;  in  1888,  and  the  sixth  in  1901.  All  the  editions  were  printed 
at  ^Manila  and  are  alike,  no  corrections  or  additions  having  been  made. 
(R.,  1133.) 

Here  should  be  mentioned  the  interesting  work  of  V.  M.  de  Abella,  the 
"Vade-mecum  Filii:)ino,"  a  manual  of  Spanish-Tagalog  dialogues.  It  con- 
tains a  vocaV)ulary  of  INIanila  local  words  and  phrases.  The  first  edition 
was  published  in  1868  (T.  H.  Pardo  de  Tavera,  Bib.  Fil.,  No.  9),  and  other 
editions  were  published  in  1809  and  1871,  and  the  ninth  had  been  reached 
in  1873.      (  R.,  2524. )     Alf  editions  were  printed  in  Manila. 

The  most  practical  of  all  Tagalog-Spanish  grammars  appeared  in  Manila 
in  1878,  the  work  of  the  Recoleto  friar  Tori  bio  Minguella.  Interlinear 
translations,  simplicity  of  arrangement,  and  clearness  of  explanation  make 
this  little  book  of  great  value,  and  many  of  its  suggestions  and  ideas  have 
been  very  useful  in  the  preparation  of  this  present  work. 

In  1880  Prof.  H.  Kern,  a  Javan-born  Hollander,  made  a  valuable  con- 
tribution to  philology  by  his  list  of  words  in  Tagalog  which  are  derived 
from  the  Sanskrit.  This  article,  which  appeared  in  the  "Bijdragen  tot 
de  Taal-,  Land-  en  Volkenkunde  van  Nederland-Indie  "  at  The  Hague,  volg. 
(series)  4,  deel  (volume)  4,  pages  535  to  564,  shows  the  large  number  of 
such  words  and  their  importance  in  expressing  some  most  necessary  ideas 
of  civilization.  This  field  was  further  explored  by  T.  H.  Pardo  de  Tavera, 
who  published  a  pamphlet  of  55  pages  at  Paris  in  1887,  in  which  the  San- 
skrit words  which  have  passed  into  Pampango  are  also  noted.  (R.,  1066. ) 
Kern  remarks  in  his  article  that  the  scarcity  of  Sanskrit  words  in  the  dia- 
lects of  northern  Celelies  indicates  that  the'Tagalog  received  this  element 
directly  from  Cambodia  and  Sumatra,  and  not  by  Avay  of  Celebes.  This  is 
an  interesting  suggestion,  which  might  lead  to  something  if  studied  upon. 
Dr.  F.  R.  Blake.'teacher  of  Tagalog  and  Visayan  at  Johns  Hopkins  I'ni- 
versity,  Baltimore,  Md.,  also  read  an  article  on  "Sanskrit  loan-words  in 
Tagalog"  at  the  April,  1903,  meeting  of  the  American  Oriental  Society,  at 
Baltimore,  Md.  Doctor  Blake  has  also  written  articles  upon  "Analogies 
between  Semitic  and  Tagalog"  and  the  "Differences  between  Tagalog  and 
Bisavan." 

In  1882  appeared  the  second  edition  of  a  Spanish-Tagalog  and  Pampango 
vocabularv  by  E.  Fernandez,   printed  at  Manila.     This  was  followed  in 


12  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

1883  by  his  Tagaiog-Spanish  vocabulary,  both  of  which  are  very  useful 
books.     (P.  T.,  1061,  and  R.,  756.) 

The  valuable  "rapport"  of  Dr.  Joseph  Montano,  Paris,  1885,  to  the 
French  minister  of  public  instruction,  contains  several  Philippine  vocabu- 
laries, some  of  them  of  little  known  languages,  and  also  Cjuite  an  analysis 
of  the  Tagalog.     (R.,  885.) 

Under  the  pseudonym  of  Julius  Miles,  an  unknown  author  published  a 
small  Tagalog-Spanish  grammar  and  phrase  book  at  Barcelona,  Spain,  in 
1887.     (R.,  1054.) 

In  1889  Friar  Toribio  Minguella,  Recoleto,  published  a  work  in  Madrid 
upon  the  unity  of  the  human  race  as  proved  by  philology.  In  this  work 
he  makes  some  comparisons  between  Semitic  and  Tagalog. 

The  same  year  Dr.  Pardo  de  Tavera  published  his  pamphlet  upon  the 
oingin  of  the  names  of  the  Tagalog  numerals,  at  Manila.  W.  G.  Seiple,  of 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  also  i)ublished  an  article  upon  the  Tagalog 
numerals  in  the  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circular,  No.  163,  June,  1903, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

In  1889  also  appeared  the  "Spanish-Tagalog  Dictionary"  of  Pedro  Serrano 
Laktaw,  son  of  Rosalio  Serrano,  and  in  1903  director  of  the  Spanish  paper. 
El  Pueblo,  of  Manila.  It  is  understood  that  the  author  is  now  working 
upon  a  Tagalog-English  dictionary.     (R.,  1260.) 

In  1890  a  most  valuable  little  work  was  published  in  Manila,  under  the 
title  "Coleccion  de  Refranes,  Frases  y  Modismos  Tagalos,"  translated  and 
explained  in  Spanish  by  the  Franciscan  Friars  Gregorio  Martin  and  Mariano 
Martinez  Cuadrado,  and  edited  by  the  Friar  Miguel  Lucio  y  Bustamente. 
The  first  came  to  the  Philippines  in  1874,  the  second  in  1875,  and  the 
editor  in  1860.  All  administered  parishes  mainly  in  J^a  Laguna  Province, 
Friar  IVIartfnez  also  serving  for  many  years  at  Binangonan  de  Lampon,  on 
the  Pacific.  This  collection  comprises  879  proverl)s,  phrases,  and  idiomatic 
ex]iressions  as  used  in  the  vicinity  of  Tanay  and  Pililla,  where  the  authors 
resided,  and  embraces  but  a  part  of  the  wealth  of  the  language  in  this 
regard.  Many  of  these  expressions,  marked  "T.  P."  (Tagalog  proverbs) 
have  been  quoted  in  the  explanation  of  the  language.     (R.,  1318. ) 

In  1893  Dr.  Ferd.  Blumentritt,  of  Leitmeritz,  Bohemia,  published  a 
translation  of  a  sketch  of  Tagalog  orthography  by  Doctor  Rizal,  at  The 
Hague,  under  the  title  "Die  Transcription  des  Tagalog,"  von  Dr.  Jose  Rizal. 

The  advent  of  the  United  States  forces  at  Manila  and  the  occupation  of 
the  Tagalog  region  led  to  several  small  ]:)amphlets  being  issued  with  the 
English,  Spanish,  and  Tagalog  in  parallel  columns.  One  of  these  was 
written  by  Capt.  John  Bordman,  jr.,  Twenty-sixth  U.  S.  Volunteer 
Infantry. 

In  1902  Constantino  Lendoyro,  a  Spanish  gentleman  of  more  than 
twenty  years'  residence  in  the  Philippines,  published  his  work,  entitled 
"The  Tagalog  Language,"  at  Manila.  It  is  a  very  good  book,  but  is  full 
of  typographical  errors,  and  in  many  places  the  English  is  not  idiomatic. 
The  author  deserves  much  credit  for  his  labor,  and  a  corrected  edition 
would  be  of  great  value.  At  any  rate,  he  is  entitled  to  commendation  for 
having  written,  in  a  foreign  language,  a  work  upon  the  Tagalog  which 
shows  his  thorough  knowledge  of  the  Philippine  tongue. 

In  1902  R.  Brandstetter  issued  a  work  upon  the  Tagalog  and  Malagasy 
languages  at  Lucerne,  which  is  of  interest  as  showing  the  resemblance 
between  these  two  languages  spoken  at  such  distant  points. 

In  1903  the  "  English-Tagalog  Pocket  Dictionary,"  of  P.  D.  Neilson,  was 
published  at  Manila,  and,  while  merely  giving  the  Tagalog  equivalent  for 
the  English  word,  is  of  considerable  value.  The  Tagalog-English  part  has 
also  been  published. 

i\Iention  should  also  be  made  of  ' '  Crawfurd's  Grammar  of  the  Malay  Lan- 
guage," which  has  also  a  dictionary  attached,  London,  1852.  Many  valu- 
able comparisons  are  made  between  Tagalog  and  other  Malayan  languages. 

For  a  grammatical  discussion  of  authority  upon  the  Malayan  languages 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  13 

the  student  is  referred  to  the  "Grundriss  der  Spraohwissenschaft,"  of  F. 
Muller,  II.  Band,  II.  Abtheilung,  pages  87-160  ( Vienna,  1887) . 

THE   TAGALOG    LANGUAGK. 

The  Tagalog  is  the  most  important  of  the  many  tongues  and  dialects  of 
the  Phihpi^ines,  which  seem  to  number  well  over  threescore,»  on  account 
of  its  being  the  most  widely  understood,  the  most  euphonious,  and  the 
most  developed  by  contact  with  foreign  idioms.  It  thus  occupies  a  similar 
position  to  that  held  by  Malay  farther  to  the  south,  and  to  English  in  the 
world  at  large.  Spoken  by  over  a  million  and  a  half  of  the  most  energetic 
race  in  the  islands,  occupying  the  city  of  Manila,  eight  provinces  surround- 
ing the  metropolis,  and  a  number  of  outlying  islands  and  districts  beyond 
these  limits,  it  is  also  generally  understood  by  many  far  beyond  its  own 
territory,  especially  in  seaport  towns  throughout  the  archipelago. 

The  language  seems  to  be  divided  into  a  northern  and  a  southern  dia- 
lect, the  former  being  si)oken  in  Bulacan,  Bataan,  Nueva  Ecija,  Rizal,  and 
Tarlac,  and  the  latter  occupying  La  Laguna,  Batangas,  Cavite,  Tayabas, 
Marinduque,  the  coast  of  Mindoro,  and  part  of  Ambos  Camarines.  '  Each 
of  these  dialects  is  more  or  less  split  up,  each  town  almost  having  local 
mannerisms  by  which  the  people  of  one  neighborhood  easily  dintinguish 
a  stranger.  Yet  the  region  above  described  is  clearly  the  territory  of  one 
and  the  same  language,  which  is  different  and  distinguishable  from  the 
Pampangan  language  on  the  north  and  the  Bicol  on  the  south  by  the  test 
of  intelligibility. 

Philologically,  Tagalog  belongs  to  the  Malayan  branch  of  the  great 
Malayo-Polynesian  linguistic  family,  which  extends  from  Hawaii  to  Mada- 
gascar and  from  Formosa  to  Easter  Island  west  of  Chile,  including  New 
Zealand,  Tonga,  and  Samoa,  as  well  as  Borneo,  Celebes,  Java,  Sumatra, 
the  Malay  Peninsula,  and  the  Philippines,  from  east  to  west,  a  distance  of 
180°,  or  half  the  circumference  of  the  earth. 

Considering  the  rudimentary  state  of  culture  existing  up  to  compara- 
tively recent  times  of  the  majority  of  the  peoples  speaking  the  languages 
of  this  family,  its  unity  is  remarkable,  and  a  thorough  knowledge  of  one 
tongue  is  found  to  be  of  great  utility  in  the  acquirement  of  any  other  of  the 
great  group,  especially  in  the  same  branch. 

Tagalog,  together  with  other  civilized  tongues  of  the  Philippines,  such 
as  Visayan,  Pampangan,  Ilocano  and  Bicol,  has  preserved  the  verbal  system 
better  than  any  other,  and  the  basis  for  the  comparative  study  of  the 
family  must  be  taken  from  the  Philippine  tongues  and  not  from  the  more 
cultivated  Malay,  Kawi,  or  modern  Javanese,  all  three  of  which  have  been 
profoundly  affected  by  Sanskrit  and  to  a  lesser  degree  by  Arabic,  some- 
thing as  English  has  been  affected  by  Latin  and  French  elements. 

The  number  of  roots  or  primitive-itlea  words  in  Tagalog  seems  to  be 
about  17,000,  there  being  16,842  words  in  the  Noceda  and  Sanlucar  dic- 
tionary of  1832,  according  to  Crawfurd,  the  distinguished  INIalay  scholar. 
("Malay  Grammar,"  p.  cxiv. )  Of  these  some  284  are  derived  from  the 
Sanskrit,  and  are  evidently  borrowed  through  the  Malay.  Many  of  these 
are  names  for  things  unknown  to  the  primitive  Malayan  peoples,  but 
others  are  abstracts  and  various  words,  some  of  which  would  seem  to  have 
supplanted  a  primitive  Malayan  word.  Thus  in  many  cases  American  and 
Tagalog  u.se  words  in  their  own  languages  wliich  are  from  the  same  remote 
source  in  India,  and  coming  around  the  earth  east  and  west  meet  again 
in  the  Philippines.  Such  a  word  is  pad,  "foot,"  from  the  Sanskrit  j)ada, 
whidi  has  descended  into  English  "foot"  and  Spanish  "pie."  The  origin 
of  these  words  is  marked  after  each  in  the  handbook.  The  names  of  the 
chief  workers  in  this  field  have  been  given  in  the  list  of  books  consulted. 

«The  Philippine  Bureau  of  EthDologv,  however,  has  given  out  as  a  result  of  its  re- 
searches, that  the  number  of  distinct  tongues  is  not  over  15  or  16,  the  larger  number  being 
made  up  by  counting  very  similar  dialects. 


14  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

The  Japanese  languacje  seeuis  to  have  furnished  no  words  to  the  Taga- 
log,  although  many  Japanef^e  came  to  the  inlands  during  the  f-eventeenth 
century,  owing  to  the  expuli^ion  of  Japanese  converts^  to  Catholicism,  who 
found  a  refuge  in  Manila  and  the  adjoining  iirovinces,  mainly  in  Pam- 
panga,  Avhere  it  is  said  many  of  them  settled  around  Macabebe.  It  is 
thought  that  some  Japanese  expressions  still  exist  in  the  Macabebe  dialect 
of  the  Pamj)angan  language. 

Notwithstanding  a  com])aratively  close  contact  with  the  Chinese  for 
several  centuries,  and  certainly  antedating  the  Spanish  conquest  by  many 
hundred  years,  very  few  words  seem  to  have  come  into  Tagalog  from  any 
of  the  numerous  dialects  of  that  Empire.  The  Chinese  element  in  Tagalog 
seems  limited  to  a  few  conmifrc'ial  terms,  some  household  implements, 
and  a  few  miscellaneous  terms,  some  of  which  are  confined  in  their  use  to 
Sangley  or  Chinese-]\Iestizo  iamilies.  These  words  are  noted  wherever 
they  occur  in  the  handbook.  Professor  Hirth,  the  Chinese  scholar,  thinks 
that  the  tirst  notices  of  the  Philii)i)ines  are  to  be  found  in  the  work  of 
Chao  Ju-kua,  collector  of  customs  of  Chuan-chou,  a  city  in  Fo-Kien  Prov- 
ince, between  1210  and  1240.  In  this  work  he  speaks  of  the  islands  of 
Po-ni  (Borneo),  Ma-i  (Mindoro?  or  Panay?),  and  of  the  Pi-Sho-y6  of 
Taiwan  (Formosa).  This  latter  name  sounds  something  like  "Bisaya," 
the  native  name  for  Yisava.  The  l)ook  speaks  also  of  the  San-sii,  or 
"  Three  Islands."  Book  325  of  the  "  History  of  the  Ming  Dynasty  ( 1368- 
1643)  of  China,"  as  abstracted  by  Groeneveldt,  speaks  of  the  Kings  (Sultans) 
of  Sulu  as  attacking  Puni  ( Borneo )  in  1368,  and  of  the  King  of  Sulu,  Paduka 
(Javanese  "  Lord  " )  Pahala  as  dying  while  on  a  visit  to  the  Emperor  at  Te 
Chou  on  the  Grand  Canal  (Shantung  Province).  The  Emperor  then 
recognized  his  eldest  son,  Tumohan,  as  Sultan  of  Sulu,  in  1417.  The 
brother  of  Pahala,  who  was  named  Suli,  made  a  visit  to  China  in  1421, 
but  a  few  years  after  this  no  more  was  heard  from  this  Kingdom.  From 
this  and  other  extracts  it  would  seem  that  the  Chinese  knew  of  the  Moham- 
medan settlements  at  Manila  and  Tondo  ])rior  to  the  arrival  of  the  Span- 
iards, and  must  have  carried  on  a  lucrative  trade  with  them,  otherwise  the 
pirate  Li-Ma-hong  would  not  have  made  such  a  desperate  attempt  t<  >  take 
the  city  so  soon  after  its  foundation  in  1571. 

The  Arabic  words  in  Tagalog,  which  are  hardly  more  than  a  dozen  in 
numV)er,  evidently  came  in  with  the  Mohammedan  religion,  and  upon  the 
extinction  of  that  faith  around  the  mouth  of  the  Pa^ig,  all  but  a  few  words 
fell  into  disuse.  INIohammedanism  could  have  hardly  become  established 
in  the  Tagalog  region  before  1450  to  1500,  as  it  came  very  slowly  from  India 
or  Arabia  to  Java,  and  thence  l\v  way  of  Borneo  and  Sulu  to  the  Bay  of 
Manila  and  the  Pasig  Valley.  It  had  apparently  not  extended  to  the 
inland  provinces,  its  farthest  northern  point  appearing  to  have  been  Hago- 
noy.  Arabic  words  which  were  adopted  by  the  Spanish  and  thus  brought 
into  Tagalog  are  not  included  in  the  above  remarks. 

Spanish,  as  a  matter  of  course,  has  contributed  a  great  number  of  words 
to  Tagalog,  many  of  which  have  been  thoroughly  naturalized.  They  are 
mainly  religious,  governmental,  social,  legal,  and  abstract  terms,  including 
also  terms  for  foreign  articles  and  luxuries.  Some  names  for  Mexican 
articles  are  not  Spanish  but  Nahuatl  or  Aztec,  owing  to  the  intimate  con- 
nection between  JNIexico  and  the  Philippines  for  more  than  two  centuries, 
and  there  are  even  some  Arawak  words  from  the  tongue  of  CuT)a,  Haiti, 
and  Puerto  Rico  among  these. 

English  has  as  yet  given  but  few  words  to  Tagalog.  Of  these  the  news- 
papers use  four,  which  seem  to  have  no  exact  native  or  Spanish  equiva- 
lents, viz:  "Self-government,"  "high  life,"  "sport,"  and  "besbol,"  or 
baseball.  The  latter  has  been  verbalized  and  taken  into  the  language 
bodily,  while  the  others  are  still  quoted. 

The  construction  of  Tagalog  does  not  seem  to  have  been  influenced  by 
any  of  the  foregoing,  but  to  have  retained  its  Malayan  structure. 


TAGALOG  LANGUAGE.  15 

THE  PRONUNCIATION  OF  TAGALOG. 

The  most  succinct  statement  upon  the  above  subject  is  that  given  by- 
Rev.  W.  A.  Goodell,  of  the  Methodist  mission  in  the  Philippines,  as  printed 
in  Stuntz's  "The  Philippines  and  the  Far  East,"  page  483: 

"II.  The  pronunciation  of  Tagalog  is  very  simple,  and  there  are  no  sounds 
to  which  the  American  vocal  organs  are  not  accustomed.  Theletter  (sound) 
most  difficult  to  get  is  'rig,'  which  has  exactly  the  sound  which  it  has  in 
the  middle  of  the  word  'ringing,'  but  which  becomes  difficult  when  at  the 
beginning  of  a  word,  as  in  the  word(s)  'riguni't,'  one  of  the  words  (terms) 
translating  the  conjunction  '  but,'  and  which  often  occurs  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence. 

"But  although  so  simple  in  word  pronunciation,  Tagalog  is  extremely 
difficult  in  utterance,  for  one  reason  because  of  the  great  number  of  Ion» 
words  (compounds)  it  contains,  and  for  another  and  more  important  still, 
because  of  the  rhythmic  movement  of  the  language,  a  quality  that  can  not 
be  described  and  a  characteristic  for  which  no  rules  whatever  can  be  given, 
but  which  is  entirely  as  much  a  part  of  the  Tagalog  language  as  are  its 
words  themselves." 

The  "rhythmic  movement"  spoken  of  by  the  Rev.  Mr.  Goodell,  who  is 
an  excellent  speaker  of  Tagalog,  is  what  may  be  called  the  "national 
"^accent,"  and,  like  the  tones  of  Chinese  and  other  allied  tongues,  can  only 
be  acquired  by  long  practice. 

The  vowels  are  really  but  three  in  number,  although  a,  e,  i,  o,  and  u, 
with  their  Spanish  values,  are  printed  (ah,  a,  e,  o,  oo).  Of  these  "e"  and 
"i"  are  habitually  confused,  and  "e"  can  hardly  be  said  to  exist  in  pure 
Tagalog.  "O"  and  "u"  are  also  confused,  the  tendency  being  to  drop 
"  o  "  and  substitute  "u"  in  many  words,  a  process  which  has  already  taken 
effect  in  Pampangan.  The  diphthongs  are  ao  (ow),  au  (aw),  less  nasal 
than  ao,  and  ua  (wa);  but  there  are-no  triphthongs,  as  each  vowel  in  such 
combinations  preserves  its  own  sound. 

The  native  consonants,  pronounced  (except  rig)  as  in  English,  are  B,  C 
(K  ),  D,  G  ( hard),  H,  L,  M,  N,  NIt,  P,  R,  S,  and  T.  The  sound  of  F  does  not 
exist  in  Tagalog,  and  is  replaced  by  P.  V  is  also  a  foreign  sound  merging 
with  B  to  the  Tagalog  ear.  Z  is  pronounced  like  S,  and  is  found  only  in 
Spanish  words.  The  same  is  true  of  X,  which  is  pronounced  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word  as  H.  W  is  beginning  to  be  used  in  native  papers  as  a  semi- 
vowel in  place  of  initial  ua  (wa)  and  in  ao  (aw).  K  is  also  used  by  many 
in  place  of  hard  C  and  Q.  Y  is  used  as  a  part  of  the  diphthong  ay  (ai), 
and  also  as  an  initial  consonant. 

The  pronunciation  and  construction  of  the  language  will  be  more  clearly 
understood  by  carefully  studying  the  two  versions  of  the  Dominical  Oration, 
or  Lord's  Prayer,  given  below  with  interlinear  pronunciation  and  trans- 
lation. 

[From  the  Vulgate.] 

Tag.    Ama       namin         sungmasalarigit  ka;  sambahfn 

Pro.    Ah-mah  ndlimeen     soong-mali-mh-lahng-eet  Jcah ;  sahm-baJi-heen 
Eng.  Father   our(of  us)  art  in  heaven  thou;  adored  (worshiped) 

Tag.    ang     rigalan        mo;         mapasaamin  ang     kaharian 

Pro.    ahng  ngdh-kihn  moh ;       wali-paJi-sah-dh-meen   ahng  kaJi-hah-ree-ahn 

Eng.  the     name  of  thee;  come  to  us  the     kingdom 

Tag.    mo;         sundin        ang    loob     mo;         dito      sa       lupa      para 
Pro.    moh;      soondeen      ahng  loh-obe moh;       dee-tohsah     loo-pah  pAh-rah 
Eng.  of  thee;  (be)  done  the    will      of  thee;  here    upon  earth    according 

Tag.    nang         sa     larigit;        bigyun         mo         kami      ilgayon     nang 
Pro.    nahng       sah  Wuuj-eet;  beeg-iidhn     moh        kah-mee  ngeye-6hn  nahng 
Eng.  to  (that)  in     heaven;      (be)  given  of  thee  we  (us)  now  of  the 


16  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Tag.    aming       kanin       sa        :irao-arao  at      patawarin  mo 

Pro.    ah-meeng  kdh-neen  sah      uh-roa-dh-row  aht    jxili-toir-ali-reen  moh 
Eng.  our  food  upon  every  day         and  (be)  pardoned    of  thee 

Tag.    kami       nang    aming      maiigu  utang,      para  nang 

Pro.    kah-mee  nahng  ali-meeng  mnhiuj-ah  o6-tahng,  pah-rah     nnhng 

Eng.  we  (us)  of  the  our  (sign  of  plurality)  debts,       according  as 

Tag.    pagpatawad       namin      sa    maiigagkakautang  sa   aniin; 

Pro.    pahg-pa-tow-dd  ndh-meen  sah  mah)~g-ahg-kah-kah-o6-tahngsah  dh-meen; 
Eng.   (are)  forgiven  of  us         to    those  indebted  to    us; 

Tag.    at      houag     mo         kaming       ipahintulot  sa      tukso, 

Pro.    aht    hoo-dhg  moh        kah-meaig  ee-pah-heen-to6-loht  sah    took-soh, 
Eng.  and  do  not    of  thee  (let)  us       (be)  permitted        into  temptation, 

Tag.    at    iadya  mo         kami       sa       dilang     masama. 

Pro.    aht  ee-dydh  moh       kah-mee  salt     (hclahng  mah-sah-mcih. 

Eng.  but  (be)  delivered  of  thee  we  (us)  from  all  evil. 

The  version  from  the  translation  of  the  American  Bible  Society,  follow- 
ing the  authorized,  or  King  James,  version,  is  as  follows: 

Tag.    Ama       namin       nanasalaiigit  ka;      sambahin 

Pro.    Ah-mdh  ndh-meen  naJt-itah-sah-ldhng-eet  kah;     sahm-bah-heen 

Eng.  Father    our(of us)  (art)  in  heaven  thou;  hallowed  (worshiped) 

Tag.    ang      parigalan  mo:  dumating  ang      kaharian 

Pro.    aJtng    paluTg-dhl-ahn    moh:         doo-mdit-teeng    ahng    kaJt-hali-ree-ahn 

Eng.  the      name  of  thee:    to  arrive  the      kingdom 

Tag.    mo.  Gawin         ang    iyong  kalooban,  kung  paano         sa 

Pro.    moh.  Goween        ahng  eeyong  kah-loli-6-hahn,  koong  pali-dh-no  sah 

Eng.  of  thee.     (Be)  done  the    thy       will  if         as  in 

Tag.    liiiigit,       ay  gayon  din     naman       sa    lupa.         Ibigay  mo 

Pro.    IdhiTij-eei,  eye  guy-on  deen    nah-mdhn  sah  loo-pah.     Ee-hig-eye    moh 
Eng.  heaven,     be  thus     truly  also  in    earth.        (Be)  given  of  thee 

Tag.    sa    amin       rigayon  ang   aming      kanin      sa   arao-arao. 

Pro.    sah  dh-meen  iTgeye-ohn  ahng  dh-meeng  kdh-neen  sah  dh-roir-dh-row. 

Eng.  to    us  now(thisday)  the    our  food         on  everyday. 

Tag.    At     ipatawad  mo        sa    amin       ang    aming      maiiga 

Pro.    Aid   ee-pah-tow-dhd  moh       sah  dh-meen  ahng  dh-meeng  mahiTg-dh 
Eng.  And  (be)  pardoned  of  thee  to    us  the    our  (sign  of  plur. ) 

Tag.    utang,        gaya      naman        namin        na      nagpatauad  sa 

Pro.    od-tahng,    guyah    nah-mdhn    ndh-meen    nah     nalig-pah-tow-uhd    sah 
Eng.  debt(s),     as  also  by  us  now   (are)  forgiven         (to) 

Tag.    maiiga  may  litang       sa  amin.  At      houag 

Pro.    mahiTg-dh       my  oo-tahng  sah  dh-meen.     Aht    hoo-dhg 

Eng.  (s.  of  plur. )  those-having  debts        against  us.  And  do  not 

Tag.    mo  kaming  dalhin  sa         tukso,  kungdi 

Pro.    moh  kah-meeng     dahl-heen  sah       took-soh,  koong-dee 

Eng.  of  thee      (let)  us  (be)  brought      into      temptation,      but 

Tag.    iligtas  mo  kami       sa        masama:  Sapagka't 

Pro.    ee-lig-tdss  moh  kah-mee  .sa/i      mah-sah-mdh:   Sah-pdhg-kah't 

Eng.  (be)  delivered  by  thee  us  from  evil:  For  (because) 

Tag.    iyo       ang      kaharian  at       ang      kapangyarihan  at 

Pro.    eeyoh    ahng    kah-hahree-ahn    aht     ahng    kah-pahng-yahrei-hahn  aht 
Eng.  ttiine    the      kingdom  and    the      power  and 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  17 

Tag.   ang      kaloualhatian,  magpakaildn  man. 

Pro.    ahng    kah-luo-ahl-hah-tee-ahn,    mahcj-puhcah-eeWin    malm. 
Eng.  the      glory,  ever  (for  ever)  also 

Tag.    SiyA  nana. 
Pro.    Seeynh  ndiv-ah. 
Eng.   Amen. 

The  same  prayer  may  be  taken  to  show  the  changes  in  the  language 
since  it  wat^  first  reduced  to  Roman  letters  by  the  missionaries. 

From  the  Doctrina  Cristiana  of  1593,  reprinted  by  Hervas  in  "Saggio 
Prattico,"  p.  129.     Also  found  in  Adelung's  "iJithridates,"  Vol.  I,  p.  609. 

"  Anid  namin  nasaldngit  ca,  ipasambn  mo  ancj  ngala  ma;  moui  (return)  sa 
amin  ang  pagiaharl  mo,  Ipasovor  (be  obeyed)  7no  ang  l6ob  mo,  dito  sa  hipa 
paran  sa  l/uTgit.  Big-idn  mo  cami  ngaion  nang  ramin  cacunin  jtara.  nang  sa 
drao;  at  paraualin  vto  ang  amin  cnsalanan  (sins),  yagung  (as)  imianalan 
bahaln  (equally)  namin  sa  loob  ang  casaman  (evils)  nang  7nacas(tsa  (of  exist- 
ence) sa  amin;  houag  mo  earning  {auan  nang  di  cami)  matalo  nang  tocs6; 
datajmua't  (but)  yadia  (be  delivered)  mo  cami  sa  dllan  masamd." 

It  may  be  said  thatthis  last  version  shows  a  comparative  want  of  familiar- 
ity with  the  language,  except  as  might  be  spoken  by  servants,  etc.,  and  it 
has  doubtless  suffered  by  reprinting,  the  proof  having  to  be  read  by  those 
ignorant  of  the  language,  and  hence  unable  to  detect  errors  except  l)y  copy. 

An  example  of  the  folklore  stories  is  given  in  the  "Tale  of  the  Unlucky 
Rat"  from  the  examples  of  Malayan  languages,  published  atBatavia,  Java, 
in  1868,  by  J.  G.  F.  Riedel,  the  Dutch  philologist.     It  is  as  follows: 

Tag.    Ngayon    din  isang      daga     nagwika      sa     kaniyil 

Pro.    Ngeye.-on  deen  eesdhng  dahgd  nahgweeka  sah   kahneeyd 

Eng.  Now  indeed  (one  time)  a  (one)  rat         said  to      himseif 

Tag.    din,       nasakit  ang     atay     niyd:       "  Aydo  na      ako'y 

Pro.    deen,     naiisahkeft  ahng  ahtie     neeydh:  "  Eyeyow      nah    ahkoy 

Eng.   (self),  (being)  pained     the      liver    his:         "Not  wish  now  I 

Tag.    matira  dito,       sa     bayan     ko;    ako'y    paparoon       aakyat 

Pro.    malitelra        deetoh,    sah     buy-an   koh;  ahkoy    paparo-on      ahahkydht 
Eng.   (to)  remain  here,      in      town      my;   I  willgo  (and)  ascend 

Tag.   sa     ano        sa      bundok,  titiiigin      nang     ibang       bayan, 

Pro.    sah  anoh       sah    boondoke,  teeieengeen  nahng  eebdhng    buyan, 

Eng.  somewhere  into  ( the )  mountains,  looking      for         another    town, 

Tag.    sd,an       ako    makakita     nang        kaibigan         ko,    nang   pagkain 
Pro.    sdhahn  ahkomahkakeeta  nahng      kah-eebeegan  koh,  nahng  pahgkdheen 
Eng.  where     I        can  see        some  of  friend (s)         my,  some  food 

Tag.    masarap         sa    daga,      at     nang    pakabiihay        na      mabuti." 
Pro.    mahsahrdhp   sah  dahgdh,  aht   nahng  pahkahboohigli   nah    mahbootee." 
Eng.  agreeable       for  rat(s),    and  some  living  (of)    good." 

Tag.    Pumaruon         ang      daga,        lumakad        arao-arao,         hangang 
Pro.    Poomalirohon    ahng    dahgdh,  loomdhkahd    dhrou'-dlirmr,    hdhiigahng 
Eng.  Went  there      the       rat,  traveling        daily,  until 

Tag.    dumating  sa  baybay,     nakita  isang  taklobo 

Pro.    doomdJtteeng      sah  bvybuy,      nahkeeta        eesdhng       tahklohboh 

Eng.  arriving  at    (the)    beach,        (it)  saw       a  (one)       giant  clam 

Tag.    nakaiTgariga  nang    kaunti.     Nagwika     ang    dagd:       "An6 

Pro.    nahkaiTgdhnga  nahng  kountee.     Nahgweeka  ahng  dahgdh:  "Anoh 

Eng.  opening-the-mouth  (of)     a  little.     Said  the    rat:  "What 

Tag.    ito?       Totuong         wala       pa     akong      nakikita  na 

Pro.    eeloh?   Tolitolt-ohng    irahidh  pah  ahkohng   nahkeekeetn  nah 

Eng.  this?    Truly  not         yet    I  am  seeing  ( have  seen)  now 

6855—06 2 


18  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Tag.    ganiyan."       Ngayon     pumasok      ang    daga       sa       bi'big      nang 
Pro.    gdJtnrtyahn.     )77/n//o/(7(     poomdhsoke  iiltrig  dahr/dh  sah     beebeeg    nahng 
Eng.  the  like.         Then         entered         the    rat  into  mouth    of  the 

Tag.    taklobo,       tinignan        ang     laman       nito,       nguni't     nasipit 
Pro.    iahklohbo,     teeneegnahn  ahng  lahmdhn   neetdh,    /Tgoonee't  nahseepit 
Eng.  giant  clam,  looking  at     the     meat         of  this,  but  was  caught 

Tag.    siyd         hangang        nasiril  ang      kaniyang         ulu,      at 

Pro.    seeij&h      hdlui-gang      nahneera  ahng     kalineeydhng    ooloo,    oht 

Eng.  he  until  was  destroyed    the      his  head,    and 

Tag.    napiitol         ang      kaniyang        liig. 
Pro.    nahpootole    ahng     kahneeydhrtg    leeeeg. 
Eng.  was  cut  off    the       his  neck. 

FREE   TRAXSL.\TI0X. 

Once  upon  a  time  there  was  a  rat  who  said  to  himself,  because  his  liver 
was  out  of  order:  "I  do  not  wish  to  remain  here  in  this  town  of  mine;  I 
will  go  and  ascend  the  mountains,  looking  for  another  town,  where  I  can 
see  some  of  my  friends,  some  agreeable  food  for  rats,  and  some  good  liv- 
ing." The  rat  went  out,  traveling  daily,  until  arriving  at  the  seashore  it 
saw  a  giant  clam  (Tridacna),  with  slightly  opened  mouth.  Quoth  the 
rat:  "What  is  this?  Truly,  I  have  not  seen  anything  like  this  yet."  Then 
the  rat  went  into  the  mouth  of  the  giant  clam  {takloho)  to  look  at  the 
meat,  but  was  caught  (by  it)  until  his  head  was  cracked,  and  it  was  cut 
off  at  the  neck. 

ACCENTS. 

From  the  foregoing  examples  it  will  be  seen  that  there  are  three  accents 
used  in  Tagalog,  the  acute  (^),  the  grave  (^),  and  the  circumflex  (^). 

The  acute  accent  may  fall  upon  any  syllable,  but  in  Tagalog  is  generally 
to  be  found  upon  the  last  (ultima)  or  the  next  to  the  last  syllable  (penul- 
tima).  The  acute  accent  upon  a  word  ending  in  a  vowel  indicates  that 
the  final  vowel  has  an  open,  broad  sound,  and  that  the  suffixed  particles 
'^an"  and  "in"  prefix  an  "/)"  when  joined  to  such  words.  Example: 
Magandd,  "elegant;"  kagandahan,  "elegance;"  bill,  "trade,  barter;" 
ang  bilhin,  "what  bought."  Words  ending  in  a  consonant  take  "«)("  or 
"  in"  only,  even  if  bearing  the  acute  accent,  which  is  only  written  in  such 
words  when  occurring  upon  the  penultima  or  antepenultima.  Example: 
Umutang,  "to  borrow;"  magutang,  ''to  lend;"  magpaiUang,  " to  lend  freely 
(or  with  goodwill);"  kautaiTgan,  "debt;"  pautang,  "credit."  In  many 
cases  the  suffixing  of  " han"  or  "kin"  draws  the  accent  one  syllable 
farther  toward  the  end  of  the  word.  This  also  applies  to  "an"  or  "in." 
Example:  Patau,  "idea  of  killing  or  death;"  kaniatdgan,  "death"  (ab- 
stract noun);  ang  kamataijdn,  "the  place  of  death."  The  acute  accent  is 
not  w^ritten  with  words  ending  in  a  vowel,  unless  the  accent  is  upon  the 
final  vowel.  It  may  be  taken  as  a  rule  that  words  unmarked  with  an 
accent,  if  ending  with  a  consonant,  take  the  accent  upon  the  ultima, 
words  ending  with  n  and  s  being  excepted.  Words  ending  with  an  unac- 
cented vowel  or  "?i"  or  "s"  generally  take  the  accent  upon  the  penultima. 
This  is  also  the  rule  in  Spanish. 

The  grave  accent  in  Tagalog  merely  marks  those  words  ending  in  a 
vowel,  which  take  "an"  or  "in,"  instead  of  "han"  or  "hin."  The  stress 
is  not  laid  upon  the  syllable  marked  with  the  grave  accent,  but  upon  the 
one  preceding.  Example:  Bata,  "child"  (in  general),  pronounced 
"bahta,"  the  final  vowel  having  an  obscure  sound;  kabataan,  "childish- 
ness" (pro.  kah-bah-tdh-an).  The  grave  accent  is  not  used  with  words 
ending  in  a  consonant. 

The  circumflex  accent  is  only  used  upon  the  final  vowel  of  those  words 
ending  with  an  abrupt,  obscure  vowel  sound,  upon  which  the  stress  of  the 
voice  is  placed.  It  admits  only  "an"  or  "i)i"  as  a  suffix.  Example: 
Dumalitd,   "to  suffer,  to  endure;"    kadalitaan,   "suffering,   endurance;" 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  19 

tunwro,  "to  signal;"  katuronn,  "signaling;"  ang  tinuroan,  " person  or  sta- 
tion signaled  to." 

Practice  is  the  essential  requirement  to  become  familiar  with  the  accent, 
which  is  most  important  in  Tagalog,  as  many  words  are  only  distinguished 
by  the  accent,  although  differing  totally  in  meaning.  Example:  As6, 
"smoke;"  «.so,  "dog;"  gdtas,  "milk;"  galas,  "path,  trail;"  mmilang', 
"to  rise"  (as  the  sun);  sumilang  (ultima),  "to  pass  between;"  bumasa, 
"to  read;"  humu^i,  "to  moisten." 

As  has  been  already  mentioned  there  are  some  17,000  "roots"  in  the 
Tagalog  language,  many  of  which  are  nouns,  pronouns,  adverbs,  and  prep- 
ositions, etc.,  in  themselves.  Verbs  are  generally  formed  by  the  use  of 
certain  particles,  of  which  there  are  some  17,  of  which  all  except  one 
{um)  have  a  definite  and  indefinite  form.  Together  with  the  noun  and 
adjective,  forming  particles,  of  which  there  are  several,  the  possible  num- 
ber of  intelligible  Tagalog  words  can  not  be  far  from  50,000  to  60,000,  quite 
sufficient  to  express  any  nontechnical  ideas  of  any  language  whatsoever. 
Yet  with  all  this  there  are  some  curious  facts  about  the  language  and  its 
vocabulary.  Many  general  terms  can  not  be  expressed  in  one  word,  but  the 
modifications  of  a  general  act  have  many  words  to  express  them,  some- 
times far  more  than  exist  in  English  or  Spanish.  A  similar  parallel  is 
offered  by  the  lack  of  a  verb  in  early  English  to  express  the  idea  of  motion 
in  general,  although  Anglo-Saxon  had  many  words  for  different  kinds  of 
motion,  which  are  used  daily  by  all  English-speaking  people.  Upon  this 
point  Brian  H.  Hodgson,  the  noted  oriental  scholar,  says,  in  his  work 
upon  the  aborigines  of  India,  published  at  Calcutta  in  1847,  page  iii: 
<<*  *  *  Home-bred  words  are  all  very  particular,  and  proportionably 
numerous;  while  general  terms,  if  more  conveniently  few,  are  less  charac- 
teristic and  very  apt  to  be  of  exotic  (foreign)  origin;  take  the  English  gen- 
eral term  'to  move;'  it  is  Latin  and  one;  but  of  the  numerous  sorts  of 
special  motion  (to  hop,  to  skip,  to  jump,  to  tumble  down,  to  get  up,  to 
walk,  to  fly,  to  creep,  to  run,  to  gallop,  to  trot),  all  are  'genuine Saxon,  by 
the  soul  of  Hengist.'"  This  idea  will  be  more  fully  explained  under 
"The  verb."  In  addition  to  .such  particularizing  words,  there  are  also 
many  synonyms  or  words  n^eaning  the  same  thing  in  Tagalog,  many  of 
which  are  local  or  provincial  and  are  not  heard  in  the  same  locality.  For 
this  reason  Crawfurd's  remarks  upon  Tagalog  and  Visayan,  as  expressed 
in  his  "Malay  Grammar,"  London,  1852,  page  cxix,  are  still  pertinent. 
He  saj^s: 

"The  languages  of  the  Philippine  Islands  may  be  described,  not  as  copi- 
ous, but  wordy.  In  the  state  of  society  in  which  the  natives  of  the  Philip- 
pines were  formed,  ideas  are  considered  more  in  concrete  than  in  abstract, 
and  by  an  importance  being  attached  to  trivial  matters  a  profusion  springs 
up  which,  in  a  more  advanced  state  of  society,  are  considered  unworthy 
of  retention,  or  which,  if  retained,  would  only  be  productive  of  perplexity 
and  distraction.  *  *  *  In  Tagalog  there  are  12  names  for  the  cocoa- 
nut,  including  its  different  varieties  and  conditions  as  to  maturity  and 
preparation  for  use.  *  *  *  In  the  same  language  there  are  11  words  to 
express  the  verb  'to  boil'  (with  variations),  and  75  (really  about  50)  for 
the  verb  '  to  go.'  " 

It  may  be  added  that  the  verb  "to  carry"  with  its  variations  has  some 
eighty  words  to  express  all  combinations  in  Tagalog,  and  there  are  many 
other  verbs  which  have  been  particularized  in  this  manner,  which  will  be 
more  fully  set  forth  in  the  appropriate  place. 

The  main  object  of  this  work  is  to  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  an  ele- 
mentary knowledge  of  the  Tagalog  language.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind 
that  Tagalog  is  uot  constructed  on  English  or  Spanish  lines,  either  in  gram- 
mar or  syntax.  The  universal  tendency  upon  using  a  new  language  is  to 
translate' one's  own  language  word  for  word,  or  phrase  for  phrase,  into  the 
foreign  one.  The  native  may  understand,  but  the  result  is  not  elegant. 
No  language  can  be  learned  entirely  from  books,  and  to  supplement  the 
special  needs  of  each  person  constant  practice  in  speaking  with  educated  or 


20  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

intelligent  Tagalogs  is  necessary.  Even  with  a  considerable  vocabulary, 
the  American  will  find  difficulty  in  conveying  just  what  he  wants  to  say 
in  Tagalog,  unless  he  masters  the  idioms  and  peculiarities  of  the  language. 
This  will  not  be  a  very  easy  task,  but,  once  mastered,  the  key  is  held  to 
all  the  Philippine  languages,  and  it  might  be  said  to  all  the  Malayan  lan- 
guages of  the  East  Indies. 

To  those  who  have  had  to  depend  upon  ignorant  or  untrustworthy  inter- 
preters, a  knowledge  of  the  local  tongue  will  be  felt  to  be  indispensable, 
and  this  knowledge  will  also  be  a  protection  to  the  people  ignorant  of 
Spanish  or  P^nglish  who  in  many  cases  have  been  so  unmercifully  fleeced 
by  unscrupulous  interpreters. 

This  work  has  been  divided  into  sections,  and  the  use  of  technical  terms 
has  been  avoided  to  as  great  an  extent  as  possible.  Where  cases,  etc.,  have 
been  used,  it  has  not  been  because  such  exist  in  the  Tagalog  language,  but 
as  an  aid  to  the  memorj'  of  those  who  are  more  or  less  familiar  with 
Latin,  French,  Spanish,  "German,  and  other  European  tongues. 

The  essential  peculiarities  of  Tagalog  are  its  "roots,"  which  may  be 
made  into  nouns  by  the  use  of  the  article,  into  adjectives  by  other  prefixed 
particles,  into  adverbs  in  other  cases,  and  finally  into  verbs  l)y  the  use  of 
a  large  number  of  particles;  and  the  great  use  of  the  definite,  which  is 
grammatically  a  "passive,"  and  is  so  treattd  by  all  grammarians  who 
have  been  consulted,  although  many  times  this  "  jiassive  "  must  be  trans- 
lated into  English  by  an  "active"  verb.  For  this  reason  the  terms 
"  definite"  and  "indefinite"  have  been  used  in  the  present  work.  This 
point  is  more  fully  explained  under  the  verb. 

Examples  have  been  given  wherever  possible,  and  the  vocabulary  given 
has  largely  been  founded  on  actual  experience.  It  is  impossible  to  invent 
a  series  of  phrases  which  will  serve  for  any  two  people.  The  questions 
may  be  given  according  to  the  book,  but  the  answer,  coming  from  a  speaker 
of  the  language,  will  be  constructed  out  of  that  vastly  more  extensive 
vocabulary  existing  in  his  brain,  and  the  whole  scheme  be  thrown  out  of 
joint.  For  this  reason  a  careful  study  of  the  examples  of  the  language  and 
the  manner  of  building  up  the  sentences  will  in  the  end  prove  of  more 
solid  benefit  than  the  memorizing  of  a  large  number  of  set  phrases,  which 
may  or  may  not  be  appropriate. 

Some  phrases  suital)le  to  certain  situations  have  been  inserted,  such  as 
matters  relating  to  the  procuring  of  something  to  eat,  directions  to  the 
house  boys,  distances  to  places,  the  weather,  and  other  similar  matters, 
the  careful  perusal  of  which  will  enable  more  complex  sentences  to  be 
uttered  with  success  and  a  mastery  of  the  idiom  acquired. 

SOME    ORDINARY    PHRASES    IX   TAGALOG. 

What  do  you  call  that  (this)  in  the  And   aug  parTr/alan   niyan   (nito)  sa 

Tagalog  language?  vikung  Tagalog/ 

That  (This)  is  called  in  our    Iijdn    (ltd)    ay    iinatdwag  sa 

language.  dming  vika. 


How  are  you?  Komustd  (  Como  esfd)  po  kayof 

Well;  and  you,  sir?  Mahidi;  at  kayo  puf 

Not  as  well  as  you  seem  to  be.  Hindi  luhhung  malmii  napara  ninyd. 

Good  morning,  sir.  Magandang  drao,  pu. 

Good  morning,  sir,  to  you.  Magandang  draopo  namdn. 

Good  morning,  everyone.  Bigydn  p6  silang  lahat  nang  magan- 
dang drao. 

Good  afternoon  (evening),  sir  (used  Magandang  hapon  pd.     (Pu  used  as 

from  noon  to  dark).  Avord  of  respect  to  both  sexes.) 

Good  evening  (night)  (used  either  Magandang  gall p6. 

on  meeting  or  retiring  after  dark). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


21 


How  is  your  father?  (mother?) 
Well,  by  the  grace  of  God. 


Not  very  well. 

Is  that  so?     I  regret  to  hear  (lit., 

"feel")  it. 
How  is  the  sick  one? 

Getting  better  now. 

Is  there  anything  I  can  do  for  you? 

( lit. ,  Have  you  any  orders  for  me?) 
No,  thank  you. 
Sit  down,  sir. 
Thank  you. 
I  am  in   a  hurry.     I  wish  only   to 

speak  to  Pedro. 
I  will  regard  it  as  a  great  favor  if  you 

will   tell   Pedro  that  I  was  here 

to-day. 
Don't  worry  about  it,  sir;  I  will  tell 

him. 
Pedro  just  left  this  minute. 
Where  did  he  go? 
1  think  (It  seems)  he  went  to  buy 

some  cloth. 
I  am  going  away  now. 
Are  you  going? 
Until  later. 
Until  to-morrow. 
Until  day  after  to-morrow. 
Until  we  meet  again  (lit.,  "Until  we 

see  each  other" ). 
Well,  I'm  going  (lit.,  "you  there"). 
Where  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  home. 
When  are  you  going  back  to  Manila? 

On  iSunday. 

When    are    you    going    (down)    to 

IManila? 
When    are    you    going    up    to    La 

Laguna? 
Come  up!     Come  down! 
Couiein!     Get  out  of  here! 
Move  on!     Clear  out! 
Don't  move!    Come  near. 
Move  away,  all  of  you. 
Wait  a  little  way  ])ack. 
Come  here!     Accompany  me. 
AVait  a  moment.     Go  back  (return) 

now. 
Come  back  here.     Go  quickly. 


.1)10  an()  Ingay  nany  ama  (ind)  mof 
(nim/6f) 

Mahuti,  sa  and,  nang  Poong  (Dios). 
{Bat-haJa,  used  by  some,  is  of  San- 
skrit origin,  derived  from  avutdra, 
"descent,"  through  M&Vdy  batdra, 
"a  god."  There  is  no  connection 
with  the  Arabic  word  Allah,  used 
by  the  Moros  for  "God,"  the  lat- 
ter being  derived  from  a  I.,  "the," 
and  lldh,  "God,"  allied  to  the  He- 
brew Eloah;  EloMin.) 

Dt  pa  luhhang  maigi. 

Paldf  Kun  ganiyan  ay  dinadamdam 
ko. 

Maano  ang  may  sakilf  or  And  ang 
lagay  vang  may  sakii? 

(ritiniginlidiia  na. 

Maijroun  kayong  anomang  ipuguutos. 
sa  dkinf 

Hindi  p6,  saldmat. 

Umnpo  p6  kayo. 

Saldmat. 

Ako'y  nagmamadali.  Ibig  ko  Idmang 
kauHipin  si  Pedro. 

Malaking  utang  na  loob  kikilalanin 
ko  sa  inyo  kun  masabi  ninyd  kay 
Pedro  na  akoUj  naparito  ngaydn. 

Magivald  p6  kayo  bahala'  t  sasabihin  ko 
sa  kaniyd. 

Si  Pedro'' y  kaaalis  Idmang. 

Saan  pumaroonf 

Tila  namili  nang  kaniyang  babaroin. 

Yaydo  na  akd. 
Yaydo  kayo  naf 
Hangang  mamayd. 
Hangang  bukas. 
Hangang  makalawd. 
Hangang  tayo  magkitd. 

Diydn  ka  na. 

Saan  ka  paroroonf 

Ako'y  papasabdJiay. 

Kailan   kayo  uimi    (magbabalik)   sa 

Maynild  f 
Sa  Lingo  (Domingo). 
Kailan  kayo  luluds  sa  Maynild? 

Kailan  kayo  susuba  sa  La  Laguna  f 

Piimnnhik  ka!    Manaog  ka! 

Pumdsok  kayo!    Lumabds  ka  dito! 

Lumdkad!    Sulong. 

Honag  kang  gagalao!    Ltimdpit  ka. 

Luniayo  kayo. 

Umurong  ka  nang  kaunti  sa  likurdn. 

Puinariio  ka!    iSamaJian  mo  ako. 

Magantay  ka  sandaii.     Muut  ka  na. 

Bumalik  ka  dini.     Magmadalt  ka. 


22 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Get  out  of  there!    Don't  run! 
They  do  not  wit^h  to. 
I  did  not  wish  to.     He  wishes  to. 
I  don't  know.     I  can  not  understand 
what  you  said. 


Umal'is  ka  diy&n  !    Houag  tumakbd! 
Namiyao  si! a. 
Nayao  ako.     Siyd  ibig. 
Auan    ko.     Di    ako    naalaman    ang 
sinabi  ninyo. 


GOING  ABOUT. 


Driver,  take  me  to  the  ^^'alled  City. 

Go  by  Palacio  street  (Calle  Palacio). 
Straight  ahead.     Look  out! 
Go  to  the  side.     Stop! 
To  the  right.     To  the  left. 
Slowly.     Whoa! 

Let  us  go  by  this  road. 

Which  is  the  shorter  of  the  two? 

This  is  shorter  than  that. 

Are  we  far  away  yet? 

We  are  near  now. 

What  is  the  distance  from  here  to 

the  river? 
Three  hours  riding,  seven  walking. 

What  are  you  doing  there? 

I  am  getting  water,  sir. 

Is  this  good  water?    Yes,  sir. 

What  is  your  occupation? 

Housebuilder,  sir. 

W^here  do  you  live? 

My  house  is  here,  sir. 

W^here  are  you  from? 

I  live  in  the  country. 

I  am  from  the  mountains,  sir. 

Where  is  the  town  (pueblo)? 

I  can  not  tell  3-ou. 

Show  me  the  road  leading  to  the 

pueblo. 
I  want  you  to  go  with  us  to  show  us 

the  road  (trail). 
Don't  be  afraid  and  don't  try  to  run 

away. 
If  you  guide  us  well,  you  will  be  paid 

for  your  trouble. 

Ask  that  person  there  where  there  is 
a  spring  or  well. 

What  are  you  looking  for? 

I  am  looking  for . 

Go  across  the  river  as  far  as  the 

crossroads. 
I  want  a  blacksmith  (horseshoer). 

I  want  a  saddler  (leather  worker). 

I  need  a  banca  (canoe)  with  outrig- 
gers. 

One  large  enough  to  hold  twenty- 
five  people. 


Cochero,  ihatid  mo  ako  sa  loob  yiang 

Maynila. 
Tumidoy  ka  sa  daan  nang  Palacio. 
Matuid  \derecho).     Tabi!    {Quedao!) 
Tumabi  ka.     Huminto  ka  (para). 
Sa  kanan  {mono).     Sa  kaliv:d  (-nlla). 
Hinayhinay   {despacio).      Luayluay. 

(This  latter  to  horse,  etc.) 
Magtuloy  tayo  sa  danng  ito. 
Alin  any  (along  maikst  sa  dalaiva? 
Ito  ang  lalong  maiksi  sa  roon. 
Malayo  pa  ba  tayo? 
Malapit  na  tayo. 
And  ang  tayo  inula  dito  hangang  sa 

ilog? 
Tatlong  oras  hung  cabayohin,  pito  kung 

lakarin. 
And  ang  ginagawd  mo  diydnf 
Ako' y  naigib,  pu. 
Mabuti  ba  itong  tubig?     Opo. 
Alin  kayd  ang  iyong  katungkulanf 
Anloague,  p6. 
Saan  ka  namamayanf 
Ang  bdhay  ko,  p6,  dito. 
Taga  saan  kaf 
Ako'y  namamahay  sa  bukid. 
Taga  bundok  ako,  po. 
Saan  naroon  ang  bayanf 
Hindi  ko  naalamang  sabiJiin  sa  inyo. 
Ituro  mo  sa  dkiii  ang  daang  patungo 

sa  bayan. 
Ibig  kong  sumama  ka  sa  amin  para 

ituro  ang  daan  {gatds). 
Ilouag  kang  matdkot  at  houag  kang 

tiunakbd. 
Kung  ituro  mong  maigi,  ay  magka- 

kamiam  ka  nang  kaupahdn  sa  iyong 

pagod. 
Itanong  mo  doon  sa  tduong  (maind) 

iydn  kun  saan  mayroon  isang  bukal 
.  6  balon. 
And  ang  hinahdnap  mo? 

Humahdnap  ako  nang . 

Tawirin  mo  ang  ilog  at  lumdkad  ka 

hangang  sa  sai~jd-daan. 
Ibig  ko  nang  isang  panday  {taga  pag- 

lagay  nang  bdkal  sa  cabayo). 
Ibig  ko  nang  isang  mananahi  nang 

balat  {talabartero) . 
Kaiknujan  ko  isang  bangkd  na  may 

kdtig. 
I.vxng   malaki   na   makakadald   nang 

isang  dalaivang  poud't  limang  ka- 

fdiio. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


23 


Steer  straight  for  the  ship. 

Land  there  at  that  point. 

Do  not  land  where  it  is  very  muddy. 

Don't  make  a  noise  at  the  landing 

place. 
Port!    Starboard!     Stop! 
Go  ahead!     Astern! 
See  that  everything  of  mine  is  taken 

down  to  the  boat. 
Put  everything  into  the  cart. 
Wrap  something  aromid  that  bundle 

so  it  will  not  get  wet. 
Set  that  basket  down  here;  I  want 

to  get  something  out  of  it. 
Unfasten  this  cord. 
From  here  to  Manila,  how   many 

hours  by  road  (walking)? 


Ituid  mo  ang  sasakyan. 
Isatsat  mo  doon  sa  d&kong  iydn. 
Houag  kang  sumatsat  sa  kaputikan. 
Houag  kang  magingay  sa  pagsatsat. 

Sa  kaliwd!    Sa  kanan!    Hinto  na! 

Sulong  na!     Urong! 

IiTgatnn  mo  na  hihat  ang  dking  knsan- 

knpan  may  jnululd  sa  sasakydn. 
Ilagay  mo  laliut  sa  cun-reton. 
Sapinnn  mo  iydng  balutan  at   bakd 

hasd. 
Ilagay  mo  dito  iydng  lampipi;  may- 

roon  ak6  kukunin. 
Tastax'in  mo  itong  luhid. 
Buhnt  dito  hangang  sa  Maynild,  Hang 

oras  lakar'm  nang  daanf 


THE  WEATHER  (ANG   PANAH6N). 


How  is  the  weather? 

The  weather  is  fine. 

The  weather  is  bad. 

We  are  in  the  dry  season  now. 

We  are  having  the  wet  season  now. 

The  sun  is  becoming  obscured. 

There  is  much  fog. 

Is  it  going  to  rain? 

It  looks  like  it. 

It  has  been  raining  fearfully  all  day. 

The  rain  is  coming  down  now. 
Give  him  the  umbrella. 
It  is  thundering  and  lightening. 
A  bolt  struck  that  tree. 

The  wind  is  increasing. 

It  is  possible  that  this  may  turn  into 

a  typhoon  (hurricane). 
Come  in  under  the  shelter  of  this 

house. 
The  moon  is  rising  now. 
The  stars  are  coming  out. 
Look  and  see  if  it  is  raining,  because 

I  must  go  now. 
Come  back  here  at  sunset  (lit.,  At 

setting  of  the  sun,  return  here). 
It  is  growing  dark. 
It  is  growing  light. 


Maano  ang  panahon? 

Mabuti  ang  panahon. 

Masamd  ang  p)anah6n. 

Na  sa  tagdrao  tayo  ngayim. 

Na  sa  taguldn  tayo  ngayon. 

NagdidUim  ang   drao.      {Arao  also 

means  "day.") 
May  mardming  uJap. 
JJuldn  bagdf 
Tila  p6. 
Katakottdkot    nauldn  sa    maghdpong 

its. 
Bumubugso  na  ang  uldn. 
Ibigay  mo  sa  kaniyd  ang  pdyong. 
Kumukidog  at  kumikidlat. 
Isang  lintik  ay  nahulog  sa  iyang  kdhoy 

iydn. 
Lumalakds  ang  haiigin. 
Mardhil  ito  ay  mauut  sa  bagyd. 

Pumdsok  kayo  sa  s'dong  nitang  bdhay. 

Sumisilang  na  ang  buan. 
Sumisilang  na  ang  mangd  bituin. 
Tigndn  mo  kun  umuuldn,  at  aal'is  na 

ako. 
Paglnbog  nang  drao,  ay  magbalik  ka 

dint. 
Dumidilim  na. 
Lumiliwdnag  na. 


FOR  TAKING  LEAVE  (SA  PAGPAPAALAM). 


I  must  say  good-by  to  you  now. 
Why  must  you  go?    Sit  dowiv first. 

I  can  not  sit  down,  because  I  am  in 

a  hurry. 
And  where  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  to  see  a  friend  who  is 

leaving  for  Manila  to-morrow. 
I  will  come  back  later. 


Padlam  na  p6  ako  sa  inyd. 

Bdkit  ka  nagpapadlamf    Maupo  ka 

)n  una. 
Hindi  ak6  makauupd  sapagka't  ak6  'y 

nagmamadali. 
At  saan  ka  paroroon? 
Makikipagkitd  ako  sa  im  kong  kaibigan 

aalis  pasasa  Maynild  bukas. 
Magbabalik  ak6  mamayd. 


24 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


We  will  see  each  other  in  the  after- 
noon. 
Good-by. 


Macjkikita  tayo  sa  hapon. 
Adios  (Sp. ). 


PIOUS   EXPRESSIONS  OF  GOOD  WILL. 


May  God  guard  you. 
May  God  help  you. 
God  be  with  you. 


Dlos  ang  uminyat  sa  iin/o. 
Dios  ang  tumuUmg  m  iiigo. 
Dios  ang  sumama  sa  imjo. 


FOR   EATING  AND  DRINKING  (SA   PAGKAIN   AT  PAGINUM). 


Get  me  something  to  eat;  I  am  hun- 
gry- 
Get  me  a  drink;  I  am  thirsty. 

What  do  you  wish  to  eat? 

Whatever  you  have. 

Would  you  like  roast  chicken? 

Yes,  and  a  little  wine. 

What  else  would  you  like? 

Give  me  some  eggs,  if  there  are  any. 
Note.— See  list  for  things  to  eat,  pp.  28-29 

The  meal  is  nice. 

Wash  (wipe)  this  plate. 

I  have  eaten  enough. 

Eat  some  more,  sir. 

Just  a  bit  more. 

Only  a  bite  more. 

I  am  satiated  now. 

Don't  give  me  anything  more. 

Bring  some  water  to  wash  the  hands. 


Bigydn  mo  ako  nang  haunting  maka- 

kain;  nagugiitum  ako. 
Painumin  mo  ako;  nauuJiao  ako. 
And  ang  ibig  ninyong  kanin? 
Kun  and  mayroon  diydn. 
Ibig  ninyd  ang  inihao  na  sisiu? 
Oo,  at  kaunting  dlak. 
And  pa  ang  ibig  ninydf 
Bigydn  mo  ako  nang  itlog  kun  mayroon. 
and  39-4(). 
Masarap  ang  pagkain. 
Hugasan  (kuskasiii)  mo  itong  mankok 

{pingdn)  itd. 
Marami  akong  kinain. 
Kumain  pa  kayo  pd. 
Kapiraso  pa. 
Isa  na  Idmang  subo. 
Busog  na  ako. 
Houagna  pd  ninyd  akong  bigydn  nang 

anoman. 
Magdald  ka  nang  tubig  paghugas  nang 

kamay.    ( Idiomatic  expr.  is:  Isang 

tahong  (cocoanut  shell)  tubig.) 


FOR  THE  TOILET    (SA  PAGBIBIHIS). 


Shall  I  get  the  clean  clothes  now? 

No,  bring  me  a  towel  and  soap  first, 
I  am  going  to  take  a  bath. 

Get  some  water  and   put  it  in  the 

bath  tub. 
The  bath  is  ready,  sir. 
Benigno,    put    some   water   in    the 

wash  basin. 
Lay  out  a  shirt,  a  pair  of  trousers, 

and  a  coat. 
Khaki,  sir?    No,  white  clothes. 
Bring  me  my  shoes. 
Hand  me  that  cap. 
Get  a  handkerchief  out  of  the  trunk 

(chest). 
Open  that  door.     Shut  the  window. 


Take  care  of  the  house;  I  am  going 
for  a  walk. 


Ibig  ninyong  ikuha  ko  kayo  nang damit 

na  malinis? 
Honag,  dallidn  mo  muna   ako  nang 

isang  pamdhid  at  sabdn  at  akd  ay 

maliligb. 
KmnuJia  ka  nang  tubig  at  ilagay  mo 

sa  paliguan. 
Ang  paliguan  pd  ay  handd  na. 
Benigno,   lagydn  mo  nang  tubig  ang 

Jiilamosa^i. 
Ikuha  mo  akd  nang  isang  bard,  isang 

salatral  at  isang  aniericana. 
Kaki  )n)f     ITonag,  damit  na  maputt. 
Dalhln  nio  sa  akin  ang  sapln. 
Idbut  mo  sa  akin  iyang  gorra  iydn. 
Maglahds  ka    nang   isang  panyo   sa 

kabdn. 
Buksdn  mo  iyang pinid  iydn.     Pinddn 

{Sarhdn)  mo  angduruiTijauan  {bin- 

t<(na). 
IiTijatan  mo   ang  bdhay;  at   akd   ay 

maglalakadldkad. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


25 


If  anyone  calls,  say  that  I  will  be 
back  soon. 

What  time  is  it? 

It  is  five  o'clock,  sir. 

Wake  uie  up  later,  at  six;  don't  for- 
get what  I  tell  you  (lit.,  "my  or- 
ders " ) . 

Please  get  up,  sir;  it  is  six  now. 

Do  you  know  of  a  good  barber? 

There  is  one,  sir,  I  know  well. 
Then  call  on  him  and  tell  him  to 
bring  a  good  razor. 

Do  you  know  how  to  shave  well? 

Yes,  sir.     All  right,  shave  me. 

Does  it  hurt  you,  sir? 

No,  it  is  all  right. 

Cut  my  hair. 

Do  you  wish  it  very  short,  sir? 

No,  leave  it  a  little  long. 

How  much  do  I  owe  you? 

What  you  like,  sir;  what  you  wish. 

How  much  a  month,  shaving  me 
every  other  day? 

Three  j)esos,  sir.  Then  come,  begin- 
ning with  to-morrow. 

There  is  a  man  downstairs  who 
wishes  to  work  for  you  as  a  serv- 
ant. 

Tell  him  to  come  up. 

Have  you  any  recommendations? 

I  have,  sir. 

Where  are  you  from? 

From  Maloios,  sir. 

How  old  are  you? 

Are  you  married?     Yes,  sir. 

Have  you  father  and  uaother  yet? 

No,  sir.     I  have  not. 

ytay  here  and  I  (we)  will  pay  you 
if  yi>u  care  for  it  five  pesos  a  month, 
and  if  this  does  not  suit  you,  look 
for  another  place. 

You  are  falling  into  bad  habits. 

Look  for  a  substitute  right  now. 

Don't  be  impertinent. 

Keep  still!  or  Shut  up! 

Where  is  your  employer? 

He  is  not  here,  sir. 

Don't  you  know  where  he  went  to? 

No,  sir. 

About  what  time  will  he  be  back? 

Later,  after  eight  o'clock. 

Tell  him,  when  he  comes,  that  I  have 

been  here. 
Are  you  the  tailor? 
This  suit  does  not  fit  well. 


Kun  may  sinomang  pumarito,  mhihin 

mong  va  ako'y  madaling  laUtlik. 
A^nong  oras  nuf 
A  las  cinco  na  p6. 
Gisingin  mo  ako  mamayang  d  las  seis; 

houag  mong  kalilimutan  ang  bilin 

ko. 
Gnmising  p6  kayo;  d  las  sets  na. 
May  nnkikilulM  kang  mahuting  mang- 

aiTjjdhit  {hurheru)f 
May  isd  p6  akong  nakikilalang  mahiiti. 
Kun  gayon  ay  tauagin  mo  at  sabihin 

mongrmagdald  nang  mahuting  labasa 

{pangdhit). 
Marunong  kang  umdhit  na  mahutif 
Opo.    Kun  gayon,  ahitin  mo  ako. 
Nasasaktdn  po  kayof 
Hindi,  ganiydn  nga.  ang  mabuti. 
Gupitin  mo  ang  buhok  ko. 
Ibig  po  ninyong  sagad  na  sagadf 
Houag,  pabayaan  mong  mahabd-habd. 
Magkano  (gaano)  ang  ibabayad  ko  sa 

iyof 
Kayo  po  ang  bahala;  ang  loobinpo 

ninyo. 
Magkanong  ibig  mo  buanav,  sa  tuing 

iknlauKuig  drao  ay  aaliitav.  mo  akof 
Tatlong  piso,  po.       Kun   gayon  ay 

pwnarito  ka  muld  bukas. 
May  isang  tduo  sa  ibabd  na  ibig  mag- 

paalila  sa  inyo. 

Sabihin  mong  pumanhik. 

May  taglay  ka  katunayan? 

Mayroon  ako  po. 

Taga  saan  kaf 

Taga  Maloios,  po. 

Mayroon  ka  nang  Hang  labnf 

May  asdita  ka?     Opo. 

May  amd't  ind  jjaf 

Hindi  p6.      Walu  po. 

Tamird  ka  at  uupahdn  kitd  kun  ibig 

mo  nang  limang  piso  isang  buan, 

at  kun  hindi  hunidnaj)  ka  nang  (bang 

paiTijinoon. 
3Iasuind  ang  pinagkaratihan  mo. 
Humdnap  ka  nang  kahalili  mo  ngaydn 

din. 
Houag  kang  magpayamot. 
Houag  kang  maiiTgay! 
Nasaan  ang  punginoo7i  mof 
W(Ud  pd  rito. 

Di  mo  naalaman  kun  saan  naparoon? 
Hindi  p6. 

Anong  oras  siyd  babalikf- 
Mamayang  makd  d  lasocho. 
Sabihin   mo  kun  dumdting  na  ako'y 

naparito  dito. 
Ikdo  ba  ang  mananahif 
Itong  damit  na  iid  ay  hindt  maigi  ang 

pagkagagaud. 


26 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


That  is  too  dear. 

I  must  have  it  this  week. 


Totoong  napakanmhal  iydn. 
KailaiTrjan  ho  sa  loob   nang  lingong 
Ho. 


MISCELLANEOUS   PHRASE.S. 


Are  you  teaching  EngUsh? 

What  did  you  teach  this  morning? 

I  taught  arithmetic. 

When  did  they  write  any  English? 

They  have  written  some  within  a  few 

days. 
I  wish  to  rent  a  house. 

I  shall  be  here  some  time — several 

months  at  least. 
I  wish  to  rent  from  month  to  mouth. 
I  will  pay  you  in  advance. 
A  long  time.     A  short  time. 

I  will  go  there. 

What  do  these  men  want? 

They  wish  to  speak  to  you. 

What  do  you  (thou)  want? 

What  is  your  name? 

Is  that  work  finished  yet  that  I  told 

you  to  do? 
Not  yet,  sir.     Then,  when? 
To-morrow,  sir. 
How  much  is  this  (all)? 
How  much  for  eggs? 
There  is  no  answer. 
Wait,  I  am  going  to  write  a  letter  to 

your  employer. 
I  am  under  great  obligations  to  you. 

Don't  mention  it  (lit.,  It  is  nothing). 

You  are  mistaken. 

It  is  the  truth. 

It  is  a  lie. 

This  woman,  sir,  is  asking  that  her 
husband  be  released. 

Tell  her  to  state  her  reason  for  ask- 
ing. 

Who,  among  you,  know  this  woman? 

Tell  me  what  you  did  to  Pedro. 

Tell  me  the  truth,  for  if  you  do  not  I 

shall  send  you  to  the  guardhouse 

(prison). 
Why  did  you  leave   the  barracks 

without  permission? 
Tell  Pedro  that  he  is  wanted  by  the 

captain. 
Wliat  you  did  was  far  from  the  duty 

(orders)  of  a  soldier. 


Ungniaarul     {nagtuturo)     kayd  haga 

nang  ingles     {Aug    wikang    nang 

manga  americano) 
And   kayang   inidral   (ilinurd)  ninyo 

sa  ago.  f 
Aug  inidral  (itinuru)  ko'y  arilmetica. 
Kaildn  sungmulat  sild'y  nang  ingles. 
Sungmulat  sild'y  nang  kamakailang 

drao. 
Ibig  ko  isang  hdhay  paupahdn. 

Ako'y  matitird  dint  mardhil  mangd 

Hang  buun. 
Ibig  ko  umupd  bnang-buan. 
Manguuna  ang  bay  ad. 
Mahabang  panahon.     Maiksing  pana- 

hon. 
Paroroon  ako  doon. 
And  ang  ibig  nitong  mangd  tduof 
Ibig  mid  makipagusap  sa  inyd. 
And  ang  ibig  mof 
And  ang  paiTgalan  mof 
Yuri  na  bagd  ang  gawang  ipinaghilin 

ko  sa  iyof 
Hindi  pa,  p6.     At  kaildn? 
Bukas  p6. 
Magkano  iio? 
Magkakano  ang  itlog  ? 
Walang  sagod. 
MaghinUty  ka,  susidat  ako  nang  isang 

sulat  sa  iyong  panginoon. 
Akopo  ay  malaki  ang  pagpapasaldmat 

sa.  inyd. 
Wald  p6  anoman. 
Kayo  pu  malt, 
ltd  ang  katotoohanan. 
Ito'y  kabalaan. 
Itong  babaye  ito  po  ay  namamanhik 

napawaldn  ang  kaniyang  asdua. 
Ipasaysay  mo  sa  kaniyd  ang  katuiran 

na  hinihingi  niyd. 
Sino  ba  sa  inyo  ang  nakakikilala  sa 

babaye  ito  f 
May .^ay say  ka   sa   dkin  nang  mangd 

ginatrd  mo  kay  Pedro. 
Sabihin  mo  ang  katotoohanan,  at  kun 

hindt,  ipapadald  kitd  sa  bilangoan. 

Ano't  ikao  lumabds  sa  cuartel  nang 

walang  sabi. 
Sabihin  mo  kay  Pedro  "-a  siyd'y  kai- 

laiTgan  nang  capitdn. 
lyang  ginawd  mo  iydn  ay  laban  sa 

mawjd  utos  nang  isang  sundalo. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  27 

You  should  always  inspect  the  men's  Dadalaoin  ninyd  tuUuing  ang  maiTgd 

quarters.  kiiudalagi/dn  na^g  manga  sundulo. 

The  rifles  (carbines)  must  be  cleaned  Ddpat  linisin  urao-drao  ang  mangd 

daily.  baril. 

I  especially  warn  you  not  to  be  off  PlwighibUing  ko  sa  iy6  mahigpit  na 

guard   (or  relax   vigilance)   for  a  houag  ka  malihang  isang  mandall. 

moment. 

The  obligation  of  a  soldier  on  duty  Nauukol   sa    sundalo    taga-pagtdnod 

is  to  know  the  orders.  usisain  ang  manga  utos. 

Those  who  disobey  orders  will  re-  Ang  bunahan  sa  utos  ko  ay  kakamtdn 

ceive  severe  punishment.  )i((iig  mahigpit  na  parusa. 

Tell  the  people  here  that  what  we  Sablhin  mo  sa  taga  dito  na  ang  dting 

are  going  to  do  is  for  the  benefit  gagawin  ay  kagalingan  nang  lahat. 

of  all.' 

Section  One. 

vocabulary. 

Thomas.     Tomds.  Father.     Amd. 

Mai-y.     Maria.  Mother.     Ind. 

John.     Juan.  Brother.     Kapatid  na  lalaki.<f 

Joseph.     Jose.  Sister.     Kapatid  na  babaye.^ 

THE    ARTICLE   OF    PROPER    NOl'NS  (si). 

In  Tagalog  a  definite  article,  *S'(,  is  generally  prefixed  to  the  names  of 
persons  related  to  or  well  known  to  the  speaker  or  writer,  as  well  as  with 
names  of  relationship  and  terms  of  affection.  It  may  also  be  used  with  the 
proper  name  of  an  animal  belonging  to  the  speaker.  In  some  of  the  prov- 
inces diminutives  are  much  used,  especially  within  the  family.  There  are 
also  some  terms  of  this  nature  largely  used  in  Sangley,  or  Chinese-Tagalog 
families,  which  are  taken  from  Chinese  and  will  be  discussed  later. 

Older  brother  (first  born).     Koya;  si  koya,  my  elder  brother.     The  pro- 
noun is  understood. 
Elder  brother.  Manung  (Manila  and  southern  dialect). 

Elder  sister.  Kakd;  si  kakd,  my  elder  sister. 

My  father.  Si  amd. 

My  mother.  Si  ind. 

This  article  is  declined  as  follows: 

Nom.  John.  Si  Juan. 

Gen.    John's;  of  John.  Ni  Juan;  kay  Juan. 

Dat.    To,  for  John.  ^ 

Ace.    John.  y  Kay  Juan. 

Abl.     From,  with,  John.  J 

When  a  name  is  to  be  used  in  the  plural,  the  article  of  common  nouns, 
ang,  is  used,  as:  The  Johns,  ang  ma>r/jd  Juan;  or  better,  ang  mangd  tina- 
tdwag  na  Juan  (those  who  are  called  John). 

The  article  of  names  has  a  special  plural  when  coupled  with  certain 
words,  as  of  the  parents,  relatives,  companions,  or  the  home. 

Nom.  John  and  hia .  Sind  Juan. 

Gen.    The  field  of  John  and  his  family.         Ang  bukid  nind  Juan. 
Dat.    To,  for,  Pedro  and  his 


Ace.     The  field  of  Pedro  and  his  family.      |-  Ang  kand  Pedrong  bukid. 
Abl.    From,  by,  Pedro  and  his . 


a  These  two  words  are  derived  from  "  patid  "  and  "  ka,"  meaning  "  tied  with  the  same 
cord."  "  Lalaki"  is  male  and  '■  babaye  "  is  female.  In  Tagalog,  however,  separate  words 
are  used  to  express  "  elder  brother,"  "  elder  sister,"  "  younger  brother  or  sister,    etc. 


28  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Si  is  not  used  alone  before  names  of  persons  unrelated  to  the  speaker 
except  in  a  joking  way;  in  other  cases  the  Spanish  word  Senor,  Mr.,  is 
inserted  as:  /S7  Sp)lor  Blanco,  Mr.  Blanco.  Ginoo  is  the  Tagalog  equiva- 
lent for  "Senor"  and  Gat  for  "Don."  Dayanrj  is  "Doiia."  These  terms 
are  used  by  purists. 

THE    ARTICLE    OF   COMMON    NOUNS. 

The  article  ang  (the)  is  used  with  all  common  nouns,  and  also  those 
proper  nouns  notapplyingto  persons — i.  e.,  the  Pasig,  ang  Fdsig;  the  PhiHp- 
pines,  ang  Filijmias.  Sometimes  this  article  is  prefixed  to  names  of  cities. 
It  is  declined  both  in  the  singular  and  plural,  the  word  maiTgd  (sign  of 
plurality)  being  added  in  the  latter  case. 

DECLENSION    OF    "aNG." 

Nom.  sing.  The.  -■ing- 

Gen.  sing.    Of  the.  Nang;  sa. 

Dat.  sing.     To,  for,  the.  Sa. 

Ace.  sing.    The.  ^''ng;  sa. 

Abl.  sing.    From,  by,  the.  Nang;  sa. 

Nom.  plur.  The.  Ang  maiTga. 

Gen.  plur.   Of  the.  Nang  maiTga;  sa  maiTga. 

Dat.  plur.    To,  for,  the.  Sa  maiTga. 

Ace.  plur.     The.  Nang  manga;  sa  matTgn. 

Abl.  plur.     From,  with,  the.  Sa  maiTgd;  nang  maiTgd. 

The  forms  ni  and  nind  of  the  article  of  names  and  the  form  nang  of  the 
article  of  common  nouns  are  used  when  a  word  in  the  genitive  follows  a 
nominative  in  the  sentence.  Examples:  The  mother  of  John,  ang  ind  ni 
Juan;  the  house  of  Thomas  and  his  family,  ang  hdhay  nind  Tomds;  the 
darkness  of  the  night,  ang  kadilimdn  nang  gab-i. 

The  forms  kaij,  hand,  and  sa  are  used  with  the  genitive  when  inserted 
between  the  nominative  article  and  its  noun.  Examples:  The  mother  of 
John,  ang  krnj  Juan  ind;  the  house  of  Thomas  and  his  family,  ang  kand 
Tomds  hd'hag;  the  darkness  of  the  night,  ang  sa  gab-i  na  kadilimdn.  Ancient 
Greek  has  almost  this  same  construction. 

THE    COMMON    NOUN. 

Nouns  in  the  Tagalog  language  are  of  various  classes;  some  are  root 
words,  whose  derivation  can  not  be  traced;  others  are  built  up  from  roots, 
and  many  are  foreign  words,  mainly  from  Spanish,  although  some  Arabic 
and  Sanskrit  words  are  to  be  found,  as  well  as  a  few  from  Chinese  and 
other  sources.  They  are  indeclinable,  and  the  sign  of  plurality  is  generally 
indicated  by  the  word  maiTgd  placed  before  the  noun  pluralized. 

VOCABULARY. 

Banana  (in  general).  Sdging. 

Bed.  Fdpag. 

Bedquilt.  Ki'imot. 

Beer.  Serbesa  ( from  Sp. ,  cevveza ) . 

Blanket.  Mania  (Sp. ). 

Bread.  Tindpay  (from  tdpay,  idea  of  knead- 

ing, i.  e.,  kneaded). 

Breadfruit  tree.  Antipolo;  tipolo.     Antipolo  is  also  a 

town  in  Rizal  Province. 

Butter-  lard  (Mantica  (Sp.,  manteca). 

'  '  \Ma)itiquilla  (Sp.,  mantequilla). 

Carabao  (buffalo).  Kdlabao;  damulag;  anuang.     First  is 

general. 

Cat,  domestic.  Pu.m.    Musang  is  Malay  for  the  palm- 

cat  ( I'aradoxurus). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


29 


Cheese. 

Chicken;  fowl. 
Child. 

Chocolate. 

Cocoanut. 

Cocoanut  oil. 

Coffee. 

Corkscrew. 

Corn  (maize). 

Cow. 

Cup. 

Dog.      , 

Drinking  vessel. 

Eggs. 

Fish,  dried  salt. 

Fish,  fresh. 

Flour  (in  general). 

Food. 

Fork. 

Goat. 

Grai)e  fruit. 

Hog;  swine,  domestic. 

Honey. 

Horse. 

House. 

Lamp;  light. 

Man  (person). 

Mango. 

Mat. 

Meat  (pulp). 

Milk. 

Native  spoon. 

Orange. 

Pepper. 

Plate. 

Eat. 

Rice  (cooked). 

Rice  (hulled). 

Rice  (unhuUed). 

Salt. 

Sheep. 

Soap. 

Spoon. 

Sucking  pig. 

Sugar. 

Sweet  potato;  vam. 

Table. 

Table  knife. 

Tea. 

Tumbler. 

Vinegar. 

Water. 

Wine;  liquor. 

Woman. 


Qiiiso  (Sp.,  queso). 

Manuk. 

Batcl.     Also  applied  to  house  boy, 

servant  (muchacho). 
Siculnte  (Mex.   Sp.,  chocolate;    from 

Aztec). 
Niog.     Also  applied  to  cocoa  palm. 
Lariijis. 

Oy/x'  (Sp.,  cafe;  from  Arabic,  qahwa). 
TirdhiiHon  (Sp.,  tirahuzon). 
Mais  (Sp.,  malz). 
Baca  (Sp.,  vaca). 
Tasa  (Sp.). 

Aso;  ay  am  (rare),  Bicol  word. 
Lumbo;  inuman  (from  inum,  idea  of 

drinking). 
Itlog. 
Dding. 
Isdd. 

Galapung. 
Pagkatn. 

Panduro  (Sp.,  tenedor). 
Kambing. 
Dalanddn. 
Bdbui/. 
Pulut. 

Cabayo  (Sp.,  caballo). 
Bdhay. 

Ilaoun  (from  ilao,  light). 
Tduo. 
Manga. 

Banig  {Sp.,  petaie.). 
Lamdn. 
Galas. 
Sandok. 
Suha;  lukban. 
Lara;  paminta.    (Possibly  from  Sp., 

pimienta.) 
Pingdn. 
Dagd. 
Kanin. 
Bigds. 
Pdlay. 
Asm. 
Tiipa 
Sabon 


Also  applied  to  the  grain, 
'to  butt"). 


[from  Sp.,  topar, 
[Sp.,  jabon). 
Ctichara  (Sp. ). 
B'dk  ( Manila ) ;  Kidig  ( Laguna ) ;  Biddo 

(]\Iarinduque). 
Amcal    (Sp.,  azucar).       Old     name 

tnbo,  now  "sugar-cane." 
Camote  (Sp. ).    Large  yam,  ubi. 
Dulang;  lamesa. 
Kampit  ( Sp. ,  cuchillo) . 
Sa  (Chinese,  cha). 
Vaso  (Sp.). 
Suka. 
Tubig. 

Alak  (from  Arabic,  araq). 
Babdye. 


30 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


The  definite  and  indefinite  idea  runs  throughout  the  Tagalog  language, 
and  the  words  "  to  have,"  "  not  to  have,"  "there  is,"  "there  is  not,"  etc., 
bring  this  out  plainly. 


VOCABULARY. 


Have  (all  persons;  indef. 

Have  (def.). 

Have  you  (some,  any)? 

Have  vou  (that,  this)? 

I. 

Indeed;  truly. 

Money. 

My. 

No. 

Perchance. 

Perhaps;  some;  any. 

There  is  not. 

What? 

Yes. 

Yes,  sir. 

You  (thou). 


Mayroon  ( lit. , ' 'there  is ; "  from  doon, 

"there.") 
Na  sa. 

iMayroonf  ^Mayroon  ka  hagdf  ^Mayf 
iNci  sa  iyo?  (lit.,  Is  with  you?) 
Ako  (form  with  nominative;  indef. ). 
hga. 

Salapi.     Also  means  half  peso. 
Akin;    ko    (latter  postfixed  to  def- 

inites). 
Hindi. 
Kay  a. 
Baga. 
Wald. 

iAno;  and  bagdf 
0-0. 
Op6. 
Ka  ( form  with  nominative ;  indef. ) . 


Akin  requires  the  article  and  is  prefixed  or  else  is  preceded  by  a 
preposition. 

Ex. :  1.  Have  you  any  rice?  {^Mayroon  kang  higasf)  Have  you  that  rice? 
{iNa  sa  iyo  iyang  higasf)  2.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  some  {Opo,  mayroon  ako). 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  it  ( Opo,  na  sa  Akin) . 

Mayroon  is  used  when  asking  in  a  general  way,  as  in  the  market  or  in  a 
shop  or  store;  na  sa  is  used  when  a  certain  object  is  meant.  Magkano  means 
"how  much;"  ayao  is  "I  do  not  wish  to,"  and  alin  is  "which."  With 
the  foregoing  vocabulary  all  ordinary  comforts  and  supplies,  except  cloth- 
ing, can  be  asked  for  throughout  the  provinces  where  Tagalog  is  under- 
stood, and  these  words  are  generally  understood  throughout  the  island  of 
Luzon  on  account  of  their  general  similarity  to  the  corresponding  words 
in  other  dialects.  The  most  conspicuous  exception  is  tuhig  (water) ,  which 
is  danum  in  Pampango,  Ilocano,  and  other  northern  dialects  of  Luzon. 


VOCABrLARY, 


Afternoon. 
American. 

Bottle. 

Custom;  habit. 
Day;  sun. 
Dress;  clothes. 
Every  day;  daily, 
Ganta  (3  liters). 

Glass;  crvstal. 
Gold. 


Inkstand. 
Large  jar. 
Mirror. 


INlorning. 
Night. 


Hdpon. 

Americano  (Sp. );   Taga  America. 

(Boten  (Sp.,  hotella). 

\Prongo. 

Ugali. 

Arao. 

Damit. 

Arao-drao. 

Salop  (English  equivalent,  3  quarts 
If  pints— 3.1701). 

Bubog. 

Ginto  (said  to  be  from  dialectical 
Chinese,  kin,  "gold,"  and  tieh, 
"of,"  i.  e.,  "golden;"  Malay, 
amas;  native  gold,  balitok). 

Tintero  (Sp. ). 

Tapdyan. 

Salaniin  (Malay,  cJuirmin). 

Aga. 

Gab-i. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  31 

Priest.  Fare  {Sp.,  padre). 

Ring.  Singmig  (Malay,  chinchin). 

Sil  ver.  Pt/«A(  Malay,  perak,  also  place  name ) . 

Son  or  daughter  (child).  Anak. 

Spaniard.  Espnnol   (Sp.);    Taga  Castila  (from 

Castilla,  Castile). 

Stone.  Bato. 

Tagalog.  Tag&log. 

Town.  Bayan. 

Well  (noun).  Bal-6n. 

Sex  is  distinguished  by  the  addition  of  the  words  lalaki, ' '  male, ' '  or  habdye, 
"female,"  with  the  appropriate  "tie"  {g,  ng,  orno).  Ex.:  My  sister  {Ang 
aklng  kapatid  na  babdye — lit..  The  my  female  brother);  my  son  [ang  aking 
anak  na  lalaki). 

A  few  words  indicate  sex  in  themselves,  but  they  are  very  limited  in 
number  compared  with  those  in  Aryan  languages. 

VOCABUL.\RY. 

Aunt.  AH. 

Father.  Ama. 

Girl,  unmarried  woman.  Dalaga. 

Male;  man.  Lalaki.  Itt    ^    i  i-     i.- 

Female;  woman.  Babdye.^^^^  ^^'^^  ^^  adjectives. 

Miss;  young  lady.  Binibini. 

Mother.  Ind. 

I  Amain. 
Mama.     Principally  heard  in  Ma- 
nila. 
Young  man;  bachelor;  youth.  Binatd  (from  bata,  boy,  child). 

Young  man,  unmarried.  Bagongtduo  (lit.,  "new  man"). 

THE  "ties." 

The  Tagalog  ear  dislikes  the  sequence  of  certain  sounds,  and  for  this 
reason  three  ties,  "g,"  "«</,"  and  ''na,"  are  much  u.sed,  more  especially 
when  an  adjective  is  prefixed  to  a  noun  or  a  noun  in  the  genitive  modifies 
another  in  the  nominative. 

The  tie  "g"  is  added  to  such  an  adjective  or  nominative  if  ending  in 
"n,"  the  genitive  following  the  nominative  modified.  The  adjective  may 
precede  the  noun,  as  in  English,  or  follow  it,  as  is  generally  the  case  in 
Spanish.  The  tie  is  added  to  the  noun  in  the  latter  case,  if  it  ends 
in  "n."  Ex.:  (1)  Wisdom  {karitnwTgan) ;  great  (dakild) ;  great  wisdom 
{karunungang  dakild) .  (2)  Silver  (pikA');  imrror  {salamin);  silver  mirror 
(salaming  p'dak ) . 

The  tie  ")*^"  is  added  to  w^ords  ending  in  a  vowel  not  preceded  by 
another  vowel.  U,  as  in  tduo,  is  considered  as  a  consonant,  as  it  sounds 
nearly  like  the  English  "  w,"  and  is  written  with  this  letter  by  many  natives. 
Ex.:  A  dutiful  child  [Batang  mabail);  a  bottle  of  wine  (isang  boteng  dlak); 
a  beautiful  woman  {babdyeng  magandd);  a  Manila  man  (isang  Iduong 
Maynild). 

The  tie  ''  na"  is  used  when  the  first  word  ends  in  any  consonant  (except 
"n")  or  in  a  diphthong.  Ex.:  A  dutiful  child  (Mabatt  na  batd);  a  large 
house  [bdhay  na  malaki);  clear  water  [lubig  na  malinao,  or  malmao  na 
tubig). 

NO    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

There  is  no  special  indefinite  article  (a  or  an)  in  Tagalog,  although  the 
numeral  isd  (one)  may  be  used. 


32  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


THE   VERB    "to    BE." 

The  English  verb  "to  be"  maybe  sometimes  represented  in  Tagalog  by 
the  particle  at/,  changing  to  '?/  for  euphony  after  a  preceding  vowel.  Ex. : 
Is  your  horpe  white?  UAng  cahayo  vk/ij  inaputi:')  The  bird  is  singing 
{Ang  ibon  an  Jiungmuhuni).  Generally  in  questions  the  verb  "to  be"  is 
understood,  as:  iA)wang  sabi  mof  (  What  did  you  say? — lit..  What  the  said 
your?).  The  verb  is  understood  also  when  a  predicate  adjective  is  used; 
as,  ^ly  father  is  good  (Mafiutl  ang  dklng  ama ) .  A //  also  connects  two  clauses 
of  equal  force;  as,  If  John  comes,  go  away  {Kiin  damating  si  Juan,  ay 
umalis  ka). 

FUTrRE   AXD    PAST   OF    "aY." 

The  particle  ay  is  invariable  as  to  tense,  the  idea  of  past  or  future  being 
expressed  by  the  answer  or  an  adverb  of  time.  Ex. :  Beautiful  then,  she  is 
is  ugly  now  {Magandd  siyd  noon,  iTgayon  ay  paiTgit).  You  will  be  sick 
to-morrow  {Bukas  ikdo  ay  masnkit). 

Some  Tagalog  writers  use  ai  in  place  of  ay,  especially  in  newspaper  work. 

THE   CONJUNCTION    "aND." 

At,  changing  to  '/,  under  the  same  circumstances  in  which  ay  changes 
to  'y,  represents  the  conjunction  "and."  It  may  also  stand  for  "because" 
in  compound  sentences  when  a  cause  is  expressed;  as,  I  can  not  read, 
because  I  have  no  spectacles  {Hind!  ako  makalabasa  sa  pagka  't  ivaM  akong 
salannn). 

When  ay  and  at  are  followed  by  a  monosyllable,  as  sa,  the  vowel  is  not 
dropped. 

Section  Two. 

The  principal  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs  are  as  follows: 


What?       ^Anof 

When? 

^Kaildnf 

Who?        iSmof 

How? 

fPapa-andf 

Which?    iAlin? 

How  much  (value)? 

iMagkanof 

Where?     iSadn? 

How  many? 

illanf 

And,  "  what," 

is  declined  as  follows: 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Nom.  What? 

iAnof 

No  change. 

Gen.    Of  what? 

iSa  and?  iNang  anof 

No  change. 

Dat.     To,  for  what?                    iSa  anof 

No  change. 

Ace.     What? 

iSa  and?  ^Xang  anof 

No  change. 

Abl.     (Loc.)In, 

at  what?           /.S'a  andf 

No  change. 

Abl.      (Ins.)  By, 

with  what?     ^'Xayig  andf 

No  change. 

This  pronoun  i 

is  used  only  in  speaking  of  things,  never 

of  persons.     The 

expression  lAno 

kaf  means  "What  do  you  Avant?" 

iSinof,  "who,' 

'  is  declined  as  follows: 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Nom.  Who? 

^Sinof 

sSino-sinof 

Gen.    Whose,  of 

whom.     ^Kaninof  ^Xinof<^ 

^Kanikaninof  ^ 

Other  cases. 

^Sa  kaninof 

/Sa  kanikaninof 

«Used  only  when  the  question  is  not  heard  or  understood. 

6  Not  tcanino-kanino,  as  the  first  form  is  a  trisyllable,  and  in  Tagalog  repetitions  stop  at 
at  the  second  syllable  (or  letter,  as  the  case  may  be).  Kaninong  mangd  and  sa  kaninontj 
are  also  used. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  33 

Example:  /Kaninoitrj  hnk'id  hjanf  (Whose  iield  is  that?);  Sa  capitdn 
(Of  the  mayor  or  presidente) ;  iN'mo^  (Whose?);  *S'a  capitdn  m  hayan  (Of 
the  mayor  of  the  town) . 

From  early  times  the  title  of  the  mayor  of  a  town  or  "pueblo"  was 
"gobernadorcillo"  (little  governor) .  This  name  was  changed  in  1893  to 
"cai)itan  municipal,"  and  in  1898  to  "presidente,"  a  name  retained  under 
American  administration.  Natives  ignorant  of  Spanish  generally  speak  of 
the  "capitan." 

While  (tiio  is  used  for  things  and  »ini>  for  persons,  the  pronoun  al'm 
"which,"  is  used  for  both.     It  is  declined: 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Nom.  Which? 

iAlin? 

iAlin-alinf 

(xen.    (;)f  which? 

sSa  alinf    iNang  aim? 

sSa  alin-aVmf 

Dat.     To',  for  what? 

iSa  al'm? 

sSa  alin-alinf 

Ace.     What? 

sSa  alinf    iNayuj  aVmf 

sSa  alin-alinf 

Loc.     In,  at  which? 

sSa  alinf 

iSa  alin-alinf 

Ins.      By,  with,  etc.. 

which? 

/Nang  alinf 

sNang  alin-alinf 

Sa  with  the  genitive  is  preferable  in  answering  a  question.  ^Aling  manga? 
may  also  be  used  for  the  plural.  The  form  ^Mangd  alinf  is  rather  inele- 
gant. Thus  the  English  "Which  men?"  maybe  expressed  by  "^Alhi- 
aling  tduof"  '^/.Alin  manga  tduof"  or  "^' Manga  aling  tduof" 

THE    INTERROGATIVE    ADVERBS. 

These  adverbs  i)resent  no  peculiarities  and  are  used  as  in  English. 
fllanf  (How  many?)  obviates  the  use  of  the  pluralizing  particle  mam/d;  as, 
illang  tduof  (How  many  men?)  In  inquiring  the  price  of  an  article  in  the 
market  the  restrictive  form  magkakano  is  generally  used;  as,  '' ^Magka- 
kano  ang  )nai~gditlogf"  (How  much  for  eggs?)  But  in  speaking  of  purchas- 
ing the  entire  quantity  magkano  is  right. 

THE   DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

These  are  four  in  Tagalog,  two  being  translated  by  "this,"  another  by 
"that,"  and  the  fourth  by  the  poetic  form  "yon." 

The  first  is  yari,  and  means  "this."  Strictly  speaking,  it  should  be  used 
only  to  indicate  an  object  nearer  to  the  speaker  than  to  the  j)erson 
addressed,  but  practically  this  pronoun  is  dropping  out  of  use.  For  exam- 
ple, Yaring  dking  pmo  (This  heart  of  mine),  while  more  exact,  is  little 
heard,  tlie  following  word  ilo  (this)  being  used:  Hong  dking  puso.  Yeriis 
a  dialectii'al  form. 

Yari  is  declined  as  follows: 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL. 

Nom. 

This. 

Yari. 

These.                    Yaring  maiTgd. 

Gen. 

Of  this. 

Niri;  dini  sa. 

Of  these.               Niring  maiTgd. 

Dat. 

To,  for  this. 

Dini  sa. 

To,  for  these.        Dini  sa  maiTi/d. 

Ace. 

This. 

Niri;  dinisa. 

These.                    Niring  mangd,  etc. 

Loc. 

At,  in  this. 

Ihni  sa. 

At,  in  these.         Dini  sa  manTgd. 

Ins. 

By,  with  this. 

Niri. 

By,  with  these.     Niring  maiTgd. 

The  ordinary  word  meaning  "this"  is  ilo,  and  strictly  denotes  objects  or 
persons  equidistant  from  both  speaker  and  the  person  spoken  to.  It  is 
declined  as  follows: 


SINGULAR. 


Nom.  This.  ltd.  These.  Jtong  maiajd. 

Gen.    Of  this.  Nilo;  ditd  sa.  Of  these.  Nilong  maiu/d,  etc. 

Dat.     To,  for  this.  Dito  sa.  To,  for  these.  Dito  sa  niangd. 

6855—06 3 


34  TAGALOO    LANGUAGE. 


Ace. 

This. 

Dito  sa. 

These. 

Dito  sn  matTgd. 

Loc. 

At,  in  this. 

Dito  sa. 

At,  in  these. 

Dito  sa  matTgd. 

Ins. 

By,  with  this. 

Nito. 

By,  with  these. 

Nitong  mangd. 

"That"  is  expressed  in  Tagalog  by  the  word  iydn,  especially  when 
applied  to  persons  or  objects  nearer  to  the  person  spoken  to  than  to  the 
speaker.     It  is  declined  as  follows: 


SI.VGVI 

.AR. 

PLCRAL. 

Nom. 

That. 

Ipdn. 

Those. 

Jyang  manga. 

Gen. 

Of  that. 

Xii/an;  diydn  sa. 

Of  those. 

Niyaiig  mangd,  etc. 

Dat. 

To,  for  that. 

Diyc'tn  sa. 

To,  for  tho.«e. 

I>iildn  sa  rnaiTgd. 

Ace. 

That.. 

Xiydn;  diydn  sa. 

Those. 

Xiyang  ma)7?/a,etc. 

Loc. 

At,  in  that. 

Niydn  sa. 

At.  in  those. 

Xiydn  .m  maiTgd. 

Ins. 

Bv,  with  that. 

Xiyd)}. 

By,  with  those. 

Xiyang  mat~ga. 

The  fonrth  demonstrative  pronoun,  yaon,  means  "yon,"  although  at 
present  generally  translated  "that."  Yooii  is  a  dialectical  form.  It  is 
declined: 

SINGILAR.  PLVRAI,. 

Nom.  Yon  (that).     Yaoti.  Yon  (those)  Ya6ng,maiTgd. 

Gen.    Of  yon.  Xiyaon;  doon  sa.  Of  yon.  Xiyaong  mangd,  etc. 

Dat.    To,  for  yon.    Doon  .sa.  To,  for  yon.  Doon  sa  mangd. 

Ace.    Y'on.  Xiyaon;  doon  .m.  Yon.  Xiyaong  maiTi/d. 

Loc.    At,  in  yon.     Doonsa.  At,  in  yon.  Doon  sa  manga. 

Ins.     By,  withyon.  AT*/ooH.  By,  with  yon.  Xiyaong  niaiTgd. 

The  particle  sa  follows  the  pronoun  in  each  ca.se  as  given,  but  it,  as  well 
as  the  pluralizing  particle  maiTgd,  belongs  to  the  person  or  object  pointed 
out,  and  not  to  the  pronoun. 

Tiiese  four  demonstratives  have  a  peculiar  idiomatic  use  in  that  they  are 
repeated  in  the  nominative  after  the  person  or  o))ject  modified  as  well  as 
preceding  the  same,  in  the  latter  case  agreeing  in  number  and  case. 
Examples:  This  man  (Itong  tauung  ito),  both  nominative  singular.  That 
boy's  clothes  (Ang  damit  niynng  batang  iydn);  first,  genitive  singular; 
second,  nominative  singular.  That  man  (has)  much  money  {^faraming 
salapiniyang  (niyaong)  tduong  yaon)  \  lit.,  "much  money  of  that  man  that." 
(Generally  with  nominative.)  Itong  hulaJdak  na  itci' y  diydn  sa  batang  iydn 
(This  flower  is  for  that  child).  In  the  second  clau.«e,  the  first  pronoun  is 
in  dative  and  second  in  nominative. 

ADVERBS    OF    PL.'VCE. 

From  the  four  demonstrative  pronouns  the  following  adverbs  of  place 
are  derived: 

Here  (close  to  the  speaker).  Dini. 

Here.  Dito. 

There  ( near  addressee ) .  Diyd  n . 

Y''onder  (there).  Doon. 

AVith  the  particle  na  prefixed  to  this  class  of  adverbs,  the  idea  of  "am," 
"is,"  "are"  is  expressed.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  initial  letter  d  is  soft- 
ened to  r  where  the  particle  na  is  used  alone. 

Am,  is  or  are  here  (close).  Xarini;  nayeri;  nandini. 

Am,  is  or  are  here  (more  distant).     Xarito;  naito;  nandilo. 
Am,  is  or  are  there.  Nariydn;  naiydn;  iiundiydn. 

Am,  is  or  are  yonder.  Naroon;  nayaon;  nandoon. 

The  particle  dt  with  the  same  class  of  adverbs  expresses  the  past  tense. 
For  euphony  the  particle  changes  to  do  with  do6?2. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  35 

Was  or  were  here  (clothe).  Dirini. 

Was  or  were  here  (more  distant).  Dirlto. 

Was  or  were  there.  Dlii/an. 

Was  or  were  yonder.  Dorooti. 

The  particle  p(i  M'ith  tlie  same  adverbs  expresses  the  future. 

AVill  be  here  (close).  Par'nii. 

Will  be  here  (more  distant).  Parito. 

Will  be  there.  Parii/ati. 

Will  be  yonder.  Paroon. 

Ex.  Is  the  man  there?  {Narii/dn  hmja  ang  tduof)  He  is  not  here,  he  is 
yonder  (  ]Vald  rito,  naroon).  Wliere  is  Captain  Tino  (Faustino)?  {/Sadn 
naroon  [or  naandoon]  SI  CapHdn  Tinof)  In  Manila  (Ncmi  Mmjnild). 
When  will  he  come  back?  {/Kctilan  hahalikf)  Possibly  within  a  week 
(  Maraliil  n(t  l.'i(i)u/  lingo) .  Who  is  his  agent?  {^-Sino  ang  kaniyang  kaliwalaf) 
The  Chinaman  Ong  Laico  on  Calle  Real  {Ang  insik  Ong  Laico  su'CaUe  Real). 
Thank  you  (Saldmat). 

THE    PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

The  personal  pronouns  in  Tagalog  should  receive  careful  study,  as  they 
exhibit  several  jieculiarities  of  form  and  use  not  found  in  English. 

All  personal  pronouns  have  two  genitives,  the  first  form  being  prefixed 
to  the  accompanying  noun  or  verb,  and  the  second  form  suffixed.  The 
two  forms  are  not  used  in  the  same  clause,  the  second  form  being  preferred 
with  the  definite  form  of  the  verb.  However,  if  the  sentence  commences 
with  an  ailverb  or  negative  particle,  or  is  a  question,  the  suffixed  forms  are 
placed  before  the  verb. 

The  first  person  plural,  like  nearly  all  Malayan  and  Melanesian  lan- 
guages, has  two  forms,  the  first  corresponding  to  "we"  in  a  general  sense, 
and  including  those  spoken  to,  while  the  second  form,  like  the  editorial 
"we,"  excludes  the  person  or  persons  addressed.  There  are  also  two 
dual  forms,  which  may  be  translated  "thou  and  I."  These  dual  forms 
have  the  same  meaning,  the  first  form,  kiid,  being  more  general  and  used 
in  INIanila,  Kizal,  Laguna,  Batangas,  and  Tayabas,  while  the  second  form, 
katd,  is  fcmnd  in  Bulacan,  Nueva  Ecija,  and  the  Tagalog-speaking  parts  of 
Pampanga  and  Tarlac.  Bataan  probably  follows  Bulacan  in  style,  while 
in  Cavite  the  usage  is  like  that  of  Manila,  etc. 

In  the  use  of  the  personal  pronouns  together,  a  very  different  order  is 
observed  from  P^nglish.  The  Tagalog  order  is  "I  (we),  thou  (you),  and 
he,  she  (they),"  ignoring  the  European  custom  of  mentioning  the  listener 
first,  the  absent  or  third  person  next,  and  the  speaker  last.  The  Tagalog 
says  "I  and  you,  "I  and  John,"  and  with  the  further  peculiarity  that 
he  literally  plnralizes  the  first  pronoun  and  gives  the  pronoun  or  noun 
following  its  genitive  form  in  the  correct  number.  The  examples  will 
explain  the  matter  more  clearly. 

The  use  of  the  word  "it"  is  avoided  by  speakers  of  Tagalog.  It  is  only 
used  when  objects  are  personified,  as  in  stories,  etc.     See  example. 

FIRST    PKRSOX   .SINGULAR. 

Nom.  I.  Ako. 

Gen.  Of  me;  my.  ^Hn  (prefix) ;  Ao  (suffix). 

Othercases.  To,  for,  with,  by  me.         Sa  akin. 

INCLUSIVE   FIRST   PERSON   PLURAL. 

Nom.  We  (and  you).  Tayo. 

Gen.  Of  us;  our  (and  your).  Atin  (prefix);  nalin  (suffix). 

Othercases.  To,   for,   etc.,    us    (and  Saatin. 
you). 


36 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


EXCHTSIVE   FIRST  PERSON    PLURAL. 


Nom.  We  (not  you). 

Gen.  Of  us;  our. 

Other  cases.  To,  for,  etc.,  us. 


Kain'i. 

Amui  (prefix);  namin  (suffix). 

>Sa  arii'in. 


FIRST   PERSON   DUAL. 


Nom. 
Gen. 


We  (thou  and  I). 

Of  us  (-we  two);  our. 


Othercases.  To,  for,  etc.,  us  (we  two).  Sa  kanitd. 


Southern  form.  Northern  form. 

K'lta.  Kata. 

Kanitd  ( p. ) ;  <«  ( s. ) .  Aid(p.);  ta  {a.). 


Sa  atd. 


SECOND  PERSON  SINGULAR. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Other  cases. 


Thou  (you). 

Of  thee,  thy  (your). 

To,  for,  etc.,  thee. 


Ikdo  (prefix);  ka  (suffix). 
Ii/6  (prefix);  mo  (suffix). 
>S«  iyo. 


The  singular  forms  are  still  used  in  Tagalog,  and  when  respect  is  intended, 
instead  of  using  the  plural,  as  in  English,  or  the  third  person  singular,  as 
in  Spanish,  the  particle  p6  is  suffixed.  The  plural,  also  with  pa,  is  used 
in  Manila  in  many  cases,  but  may  be  said  to  be  an  imitation  of  the  Spanish 
vosotros  (ye). 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Other  cases. 


SECOND  PERSON  PLURAL. 


You. 

Of  you;  your. 

To,  for,  etc.,  you. 


Kayo. 

Ill  1/6  (prefix);  iiiiiyo  (suffix). 

Sa  inyo. 


THIRD  PERSON  SINGULAR. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Other  cases. 


He,  she. 

Of  him;  of  her;  his;  her. 

To,  for,  etc.,  him,  her. 


Siyd. 

Kaniyd  (prefix);  niya  (suffix). 

Sn  kaniyd. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Other  cases. 


THIRD  PERSON   PLURAL. 


They. 

Of  them;  their. 

Them  (to,  for,  etc. 


Sild. 

Kanild  (prefix) 

Sa  kanild. 


n  ild  ( suffi  x ) . 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 


These  are  the  same  as  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  and  are 


genei-ally  preceded  by  the  article  ang. 
the  variations: 

My  child. 

Thy  child. 

His  (or  her)  child. 

Our  (of  we  two)  child. 

Our  children  (all  of  us). 

Our  child  (excluding  person  spoken 

.to). 

Your  child. 
Their  child. 


The  following  examples  will  show 

{Ang  dking  anak. 
{Ang  aiiak  ko. 

{Ang  iyong  anak. 
Ang  anak  mo. 
{Ang  kaniyang  anak. 
Ang  anak  niyd. 

(Ang  kaiiilaiiganak.  Ang  atang anak. 
\Ang  anak  ta. 


Aug  anak  ta. 
ik. 
ng  mangd  anak  nafin. 


(Ang  ating  maiTgd  anak. 
\Ang  maiu/d  anak  nc 
(Ang  anting  anak. 
{Ang  anak  nainin. 
(Ang  inyoiig  anak. 
\Ang  anak  ninyo. 
(Aug  kanilang  anak. 
{Ang  anak  nild. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  37 

The  genitive  forms  of  the  personal  i)ronouiis  used  without  a  following 
noun  are  expressed  with  the  article  prefixed  to  the  first  genitive: 

Mine.  Ang  akin. 

Thine  (yours).  Ang  iyo. 

His;  hers.  Avg  kaniyd. 

Ours.  Ang  atin  {incl.) ;  ang  amin  (excl) . 

Yours.  Ang  inyo. 

Theirs.  Ang  kanild. 

The  oblique  cases  with  sa  and  the  article  also  express  this  idea  in  Taga- 
log;  as,  Mine,  Ang  sa  akin. 

Examples  of  two  pronouns,  or  a  pronoun  with  a  noun: 

Heand  I  (lit.  "we  of  hiiu").  Kaminiyd. 

He   and    his   father   (they  and  his     Sild  nang  kaniyang  amd. 

father). 
John  and  I  (we  of  John).  Kami  ni  Juan. 

You  and  they  (you  of  them).  Kayo  nild. 

You  and  we  (we  of  you).  Kami  ninyo. 

In  Manila  and  large  towns  these  forms  are  dying  out  of  use,  the  Spanish 
style  being  used;  as,  John  and  1  {Si  Juan  at  aku). 

To  avoid  the  use  of  sii/d,  "it,"  to  indicate  an  inanimate  object,  the  word 
itself  is  repeated,  or  in  answering  a  question  a  particle  like  m/a  (certainly) 
is  used.  Ex.:  ^Malniti  hagd  ang  lakatdn  [a  species  of  banana]?  (Is  the 
lakatan  good?)     Malmfi  iTga  (Certainly  [it  is]  good). 

The  third  person  plural  is  used  to  indicate  great  respect  for  a  person, 
coupled  with  ])6,  and  for  still  greater  respect  the  word  kamahalan  (ex- 
cellency) is  used.     Your  excellency  (  Ang  inyong  kamaJialan). 

THE    AFFIRMATIVE    PARTICLES. 

This  name  is  applied  to  several  adverbs,  and  also  to  some  words  which 
by  themselves  have  no  signification,  which,  added  to  pronouns,  give  them 
an  intensive  or  indefinite  meaning.  The  following  are  the  ones  most  gen- 
erally used.     None  begin  a  sentence  except  kayd. 

Self;  selves.  Din.     (i?in after  preceding  vowel.) 

Perhaps.  Bagd.     (Generally  with  indef.  verb.) 

Perhaps;  for  that.  Kayd.     ( May  begin  sentence. ) 

Also.  Man. 

Also.  Man  din.     (Southern  Tagalog  only.) 

Now.  Na.     (No  meaning  alone. ) 

Certainly.  Nga. 

Certainly.  ^gani.     (Southern  Tagalog;    Bicol, 

gnani. ) 

Yet.  Pa. 

Actually!    Is  that  so!  Paid.     (Idea  of  wonder  inherent. ) 

At;  in;  to;  for,  etc.  Sa.     (Greatly  used  word.) 

Own.  Sarin. 

Enough  now;  plenty.  Siyd  na. 

Ex.:  Akorin;  akoman  (I  myself).  Siyd  iTga{h.e,  certainly).  Ikdo  man 
(you  also).  Ang  sarili  kong  cabayo  (my  own  horse).  06  tTija  (yes,  cer- 
tainly).    Hindi  iiga  {no,  mdeed) . 

The  particle  man  attached  to  an  interrogative  pronoun  converts  the  lat- 
ter into  an  indefinite  pronoun.  Ex.:  Anuman  (anything;  something). 
Alinman  (whichever;  whatever).  Sinoman  (whoever).  Sinomang  Iduo 
(anyone  whomsoever). 

These  particles  follow  the  monosyllabic  pronouns,  but  precede  the  pro- 
nouns of  more  than  one  syllable,  unless  the  latter  begin  the  sentence,  in 
which  case  the  particle  follows,  as  with  a  monosyllabic  pronoun. 


38  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

Besides  ano))ian,  alinman,  and  sinoman,  there  are  several  words  which 
may  be  used  at  times  as  indefinite  pronouns,  and  at  other  times  with 
adverbial  force.  One  of  these  is  hdkun/,  which  can  lie  used  for  "some,  any, 
and  each."  Ex.:  Bdlang  drao  (someday).  Ang  bdlang  tduo  (any  man). 
Sa  hdlavg  Im  (for  each  one). 

The  numeral  im  (one),  prefixed  to  words  like  drao  (day),  and  tduo 
(man)  gives  the  idea  of  "one  day;  a  certain  man,"  etc.  It  is  also  used 
with  demonstrative  pronouns  as  follows:  Itong  iad  (this  one);  diydn  sa  isd 
(to that  other);  doon  sa  isd  (to  that  other  yonder).  Isd  may  be  said  to 
mean  "other"  among  a  few  persons  or  objects,  and  the  word  ihd  to  desig- 
nate "other"  among  many.  Ihang  tduo  (another  man  completely) ;  ibang 
bdgay  (another  thing  entirely). 

Tanan,  dilan,  and  jmiia  mean  everj'one,  "all"  (persons).  "All"  (the 
adjective)  is  lahat. 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

These  pronouns,  which  in  English  are  expressed  by  "which,"  "that," 
"  who,"  etc.,  are  expressed  very  obscurely  inTagalogby  means  of  the  article 
ang,  and  the  ties  g,  ng,  and  7(0.  The  Tagalog  also  has  a  negative  relative 
pronoun  di,  translated  by  "who  not,"  "which  not,"  "that  not."     Ex.: 

He  who  is  well  Vjehaved  is  esteemed  by  all.  Aug  inabuting  dsal  ag  minuma- 

lial  nang  lahnt. 

The  book  which  you  are  reading  is  mine.  Aug  librong  binabasa.  mo'y  dkin. 

I  did  not  receive  the  letter  that  you  sent  Dl  ko  tinangap  ang  sulat  na  ipi- 

to  me.  nadald  mo  sa  akin. 

The  man  who  does  not  disobey  the  laws  Ang    tduong  dl  siiniasalansaiig 

will  be  protected  in  his  rights.  ipagtatangol  nang  katuiran. 

The  phrase  "each  other"  is  expressed  by  the  particle  nagka  or  magka, 
together  with  the  appropriate  noun  or  pronoun.  Ex.:  Do  they  under- 
stand each  other?     /Naghikaabmi  sild  (from  alam)?. 

The  principal  difficulty  the  student  of  Tagalog  will  experience  here  will 
be  in  the  use  of  the  exclusive  and  inclusive  forms  of  the  first  person  plu- 
ral. The  dual  forms  are  little  used  in  the  nominative,  but  are  quite  fre- 
quently heard  in  the  oblique  and  accusative  cases.  As  has  been  remarked, 
these  exclusive  and  inclusive  forms  are  to  be  found  in  nearly  all  the 
Malayan  languages,  while  in  some  of  the  allied  ]\Ielanesian  tongues,  such 
as  that  of  Fiji,  the  second  and  third  persons  have  not  only  a  dual,  but  a 
triple  form,  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  plural.  The  Fijian  first  person  has 
also  the  dual  and  triple  forms,  each  of  which  are  divided  into  an  inclusive 
and  exclusive  form. 

Section  Three. 

As  has  been  previously  explained,  Tagalog  root  words  may  be  used  as 
nouns,  verbs,  adjectives,  and  adverbs  in  many  cases,  either  by  the  context 
or  particles  affixed  or  suffixed.  Naturally  the  noun  is  generally  the  sim- 
plest form,  especially  the  concrete  noun,  but  secondary  or  derivative 
nouns  may  be  quite  complicated  in  their  construction.  The  noun  is  inva- 
riable in  form,  number  being  expressed  by  the  word  riuuTjjd,  or  such  words 
as  "all,"  "many,"  etc.,  for  the  plural.  Cases  are  expressed  l)y  the  article 
or  prepositions,  and  no  gender  is  known.  A  great  many  connnon  nouns 
in  Tagalog  are  derived  from  the  Spanish,  a  few  from  Chinese,  and  some 
from  Arabic  and  Sanskrit  sources.  All  Tagalog  nouns  may  be  used  with 
the  article. 

The  words  for  meals  and  some  articles  of  food,  cooking  utensils,  etc., 
vegetables,  and  fruits  not  previously  mentioned  are: 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


39 


Breakfast. 

Midday  meal. 

Afternoon  lunch. 

Supper. 

Meat  or  fish. 

Broth. 

Salted  fish  sauce. 

Salty  or  sour  sauce. 


Ang  almuftaJ  (Sp.,  almuerzo). 

Angtanghalinn  ( tanghalt,  midday ) . 

Ang  mininrktl  {Sp.,  merienda). 

Ang  liapunan  {hapon,  afternoon). 

Ang  via m  (Sp.,  vicmda). 

Ang  sahdo. 

Ang  paiis. 

Ang  Haumuan.  {Sum/niKiiK  means  to 
dip  any  viand  into  li(|ni(l.  The 
word  "  chowchow,"  so  often 
heard,  is  Cantonese  or  Hongkong 
"pigeon  English  "  for  food.) 

Ang  acliaru  (Sp.,  achia,  from  Hin- 
dustani, achar,  pickles). 

A)ig  inihao.  (Umihao  means  "to 
roast  or  bake".) 

Ang  )))niigd  hita  nang  palakn. 

Lantdii  nang  biik. 

Lamdti  nung  usd. 

Laman  nang  habuy  damo;  lariidu  nang 
pagil. 

Ang  Inbuyo. 

Ang  itik. 

Papon. 

Aug  gansd  (Sansk.,  ha.m.'ia,  not  from 
Sp.  gnnm,  a  goose). 

Ang  paro  real  (Sp. ). 

Ang  para  (Sp. ). 

Ang  kalajKiti  (Sansk.  pardpdtl;  old 
Tag.,  palapali). 

Ang  hatohato  nmnti. 

Ang  fialonibalonan    (from     balon,     a 

well;  dim. ). 

A)ig  (day. 

Ang  pa  so. 

Ang  c/a /or/  (commonest  lish  in  Luzon ; 
OpJdoceplHdnx). 

The  following  fish  are  much  eaten  in  Luzon,  and,  having  no  English 
names,  the  Spanish  names  are  given  instead: 


Pickles  (bamboo  sprouts,  etc.). 

Roasted  or  ))aked  meat  or  fish  ( what 

baked  or  roasted). 
Frogs'  legs. 
Sucking  pig. 
Venison. 
Wild  pork. 

The  jungle  fowl. 

The  duck. 

The  tree  duck  (Dendrocggna). 

The  goose. 

The  peacock. 
The  turkey. 
The  ])igeon. 

The  dove. 
The  gizzard. 

The  liver. 

The  heart. 

The  mudfish;  walking  fish. 


The  pampano  {Scatophagus). 
The  stiVjalo  (Caranx). 
The  corvina  ((MeochHu.s). 
The  liza. 
The  boca-dulce. 

The  sea  products  eaten  are: 

The  oyster. 

The  shell  of  a  clam,  etc. 


The  lobster. 
The  crab. 
The  small  crab. 
The  shrimp. 


Vegetables. 
The  mongo. 
The  radish. 
The  eggplant. 


Ang  kilang  (best  fish  in  Luzon). 
Ang  butTgon  (large  fish,  common). 
Ang  apdhap. 
Ang  bdnak. 
Ang  nunnall. 


Ang  tabdjd. 

Ang  kabibi.  {Macabebe  is  said  to 
mean  "Where  there  are  clams," 
Pampangan  dialect.) 

Ang  n/a)ig. 

Ang  alimamjo. 

Ang  alimasag. 

A )ig h ipon.  ( Bilarang-hipon,  village, 
northeast  of  Manila,  "shrimp- 
drying  place.") 

Ang  gulag. 

Ang  baldtong. 

Ang  Iqbanos  (Sp.,  rabano). 

Ang  (along. 


40 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Aiig  (jahl. 

Ang  mnn,  Arawak  (We.st  Indian) 
word. 

Ang  duhat. 

Ang  bayahas. 

Ang  dagitp. 

Ang  manmnas  (Sp.,  manzana). 

Ang  pakudn. 

Aug  tagn  pamjosina. 

Ang  pimighdutoan  (from  lutu,  cook- 
ing). 

Mumo. 

Ang  sllid  na  kahinan. 

Ang  Icaldii;  ang  dapoj. 

Ang  palai/ok. 

Ang  anglit. 

Ang  kating-an. 

Ang  kawali. 

Ang  ihaoan  (from  umihao,  to  roast). 

Ang  hdiTgd;  ang  galong. 

Ang  tdhn. 

Ang  mankok. 

Ang  saro  (Sp.,  jarro). 

{Ang  ])alaasinan  (from  asi»,  salt). 
Ang  .sow//:  (without  cover). 
Ang  tuntong. 
Ang  bithay. 
Ang  bUdo. 
Ang  bdkdl. 
Ang  (tpiiy. 
Ang  am  (accent  distinguishes  from 

aso,  dog). 
Ang  kdJtoy  iiaiig  paiTgatong. 

The  names  for  parts  of  a  house,  household  furniture  and  articles,  and 
ordinary  tools,  are  given  in  the  following  list.  Many  of  these  names  are 
borrowed  from  the  Spanish  language: 

The  house.  Ang  W/m»/  (possibly  Sansk.,  r«/fl.!/f', 

an  inciosure,  through  [Malay,  hdlei, 
hall,  court;  ))ut  the  Hawaiian  is 
hale,  and  there  are  similar  words 
in  other  Polj'nesian  dialects). 

Ang  silid. 

Ang paliguan  (lit.,  "loathing  place" ). 

Ang  aunon  (Sp.  word). 

Angpiidn. 

Ang  ptntoaii. 

Ang  linib;  ang  durinTt/auau  (from 
diau/ao,  to  appear  at  the  window); 
ang  bintana  (Sp.) . 

Ang  hagddn. 


The  gabe  root. 
The  peanut. 

The  lomboy  (fruit). 

The  guayava. 

The  lime. 

The  apple. 

The  watermelon. 

The  cook. 

The  kitchen  (cooking  place). 

Crumbs;  scraps. 

The  dining  room. 

The  tireplace. 

Earthen  cooking  pot  (medium  size) 

Small  earthen  pot. 

Large  earthen  pot. 

The  frying  pan. 

The  gridii'on  (})roiler). 

The  pitcher. 

Earthen  pitcher. 

The  bowl. 

The  jug. 

The  saltcellar. 

The  pot  cover. 
The  sieve. 
The  bamboo  tray. 
The  l)asket. 
The  tire. 
The  smoke. 

The  (irewood. 


The  room. 
The  bathroom. 
The  water-closet. 
The  door. 
The  doorway. 
The  window. 


The  ladder  (stairway). 

The  step  (round  of  ladder). 

The  balcony. 

The  post  or  pillar. 

The  kitchen  platform. 

The  roof. 

The  gable. 

The  gutter  pipe. 

The  corner. 

The  window  sill. 

The  balustrade. 


Ang  hailaiig. 

Ang  tanauan  (lit.,  "watchtower"  ). 

Ang  haligi. 

Ang  bataldn. 

Ang  biibtmg. 

Ang  b'llisbisan. 

Ang  alaJitd. 

Ang  mink. 

Ang  palab(d)ahdn. 

Ang  (jnyabndn. 


TA.GALOG    LANGUAGE. 


41 


The  prop  (against  winds). 
The  partition  (wall). 
The  houHehold  furniture. 
The  chair. 

The  table. 

The  clothes  press  (or  cupboard). 

The  bed. 

The  quilt. 

The  pillow. 

The  head  (of  a  bed). 

The  niosijuito  net. 

The  wash  basin. 

The  water. 

The  soap. 

The  towel. 

Tlie  tooth  brush  (foreign). 

The  tooth  brush  (native). 

The  clothes  brush. 

The  pail  or  bucket. 

The  night  vessel. 

The  trunk. 

The  valise. 

The  kev. 

The  padlock. 

The  lock. 

Thread. 

The  needle. 

The  pin. 

Silk  thread. 

The  scissors. 

The  thimble. 

The  eyeglasses  or  spectacles. 

The  picture;  image. 

The  household  shrine. 

Wick  for  cocoanut-oil  lamp. 

Cocoanut-oil  lamp. 

The  lamp  (old  name). 


Matches. 
Fire-making 


sticks. 


The  flint. 

The  steel. 

The  tinder. 

Rice  mill  (hand). 

The  rice  mortar. 

The  rice  pestle. 
The  small  mortar. 
The  small  pestle. 

The  broom. 

The  mop  (cloths) 
The  razor. 


The  sadiron  (flatiron). 


Auf/  sultay. 

Aug  dingding. 

Ang  kasankapan  sa  bahaj/. 

Ang  uupan    (from     amitpo,    to     sit 

down). 
Aug  Idtnesa  ( Sp. ,  r/ie-sa). 
Aug  sitiqxmtm. 
Aug  ])('tpag;  ang  cama  (Sp. ). 
Ang  komot. 
Ang  unan. 

Ang  ololidn;  ang  olondn. 
Ang  kulambo. 
Ang  hilamusan. 
Ang  tuhig. 

Ang  sabon  (Sp.,  jabon). 
Ang  balinda.ng. 
Ang  cepiUo  nang  m^ipin  {cepillo,  Sp. 

for  "brush"). 
Ang  sipan. 

Ang  cepillo  nang  damit. 
Ang  tlmbd. 

Ang  ihidn;  ang  orinoht  (Sp. ). 
Aug  rahdji. 

Ang  tainpipt;  ang  takbd. 
Ang  nisi  (Chinese,  sosi). 
Ang  candado  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  cerrad'ura  (Sp.  word). 
Sinulid,  (spun,  from  sulid,  spin). 
Ang  kardyum. 
Ang  aspiler  (Sp.,  aljiler). 
Sinulid  na  sutld  (Sansk.,  siitra) . 
Ang  guniing. 
Ang  dedal  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  mlainin  sa  rnatd. 
Ang  luranun. 
Ang  altar  sa  bdhaij. 
Ang  tinsim  (from  Chinese  iientsim). 
Ang  tinghoy  (from  Chinese). 
Ang  sombo;  ang  simbo    [I.'aodn  now 

used). 
Apuyan;  posporos  {Sp.,  Josforos). 
Ang  puyosan    (similar   to   those   of 

North  American  Indians). 
Ang pingkian;  ang panliiTijan  (local). 
Aiig  binalon. 
Ang  lulog. 

Ang  gilingan  (from  gding,  to  grind). 
Ang  lusong    (said    to    be   origin   of 

"Luzon,"  but  improbable). 
Ang  halo. 

Ang  lusonghisotTigan. 
Ang    kamay    (lit.,  "the  hand"    or 

"arm"). 
Ang  walls  (verb  walls  means  "to  re- 
move"). 
Ang  paiTgoskos. 
Ang  pangdhit  (from  dJui,  to  shave; 

also  called  ang  labasa,   from  Sp. 

navaja,  razor). 
Ang   j)rinsa    (Sp.,    la    prensa,     the 

press). 


42 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


The  hook. 
The  clothesline. 

The  tahlecloth. 

The  gaff  (used  in  cock  fighting). 

The  bird  whistle. 

The  rope. 

The  twine. 

Chinese  twine. 

The  wire. 

The  chain  (iron  or  gold,  etc.). 

Yard  (of  house). 

Garden. 

Plant  (any  sown  plant  except  rice) 

The  hoe.  " 

The  sickle. 

The  shovel. 

The  spade. 

The  pincers 

The  vise. 

The  wrench 


'  small ) . 


( from    jiokpok,    to 


The  tongs.  Ang  sipit. 

The  balance.  Ang  timbamjan    (from    timbang,     a 

weight);    also    ang   talaro    (local 

word). 
Ang  pangalaml, 
A)ig  sanipin/an  (from  sampcn/,  to  hang 

out  clothes). 
Ang  mantel  (Sp.  word). 
A  ng  tari. 
Ang  pangati  (used  to  lure  or  decoy 

birds). 
Ang  lubid. 
Ang  pid. 
Leteng. 

Ang  kauad;  ang  kauar  (rare) . 
Ang  tanikald  (old  word,  talikala). 
liahayan  (lit.,  "house  place "). 
Halamanan  (lit.,  " plant  place"). 
Ilalanian. 
A  ng  asarol. 
Ang  kdrit. 

Ang  panalok  (from  salnk,  to  stir  up). 
Ang pala  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  tiani  (Chinese  word). 
Ang  goto  (Sp.  word). 
Ang painihit nang tormUo{\it.,  "screw 

turner"). 
Ang  lagari. 
Ang    pamokpok 

strike) . 
Ang  pidhao. 
Ang  palakol. 
Ang  kalam. 
Ang  x>ait. 
Ang  panghutas. 
A.iig  piisod. 
Ang  kikil. 
Ang  lalikdn. 
Ang  palihan. 
Ang  tulos. 
Ang  kalo. 
Ang  panghiknat. 
Ang  dards. 

Ang  panukat    (from  si'ikat,  to   meas- 
ure). 
Ang  piko  (Sp. ,  picn ) . 
Ang  palapakt. 
jAng  araro  (Sp.,  arado). 
(Ang  sudxud. 
Ang  ugit. 
Ang     sugud     (also     means     "fine 

comb") . 
Ang  punntik{iTom  pitik,  to  snap  with 

a  line). 
Ang  pand. 
Ang  pal  ay  an. 

Practically  all  names  connected  with  horses  are  Spanish,  as  that  animal 
was  introduced  by  the  Spaniards,  and  the  Spanish  terms  are  understood 
throughout  the  Tagalog  region.  The  following  words,  however,  are  useful 
in  connection  with  feeding  animals: 


The  saw. 
The  hammer. 

The  hatchet. 
The  ax. 
The  i)lane. 
The  chisel. 
The  auger. 
The  gimlet. 
The  file. 

The  wood  turner. 
The  anvil. 
The  stake. 
The  i)ulley. 
The  lever. 
The  adze. 
The  rule. 

The  pick. 

The  painter's  or  carpenter's  scaffold 

The  plow. 

The  beam. 
The  plowshare. 

The  guiding  cord. 

The  yoke. 
The  rice  field. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


43 


Forage;  grass. 

Rice  and  rife  straw. 

MolasHes  (also  honey). 

Shed;  shelter. 

Stable  with  ^teaked  roof. 


Sacate;  ihonu  (Sp.,  zacnle). 

Palay. 

Pulot  (much  fed  to  native  ponies). 

Tayakad. 

BarorigbarO)ig. 


Nearly  all  names  of  edifices  are  also  Spanish,  l)ut  a  few  are  native,  or 
have  been  invented  from  other  words.     Among  them  are: 


( water    or    steam 


Ang  simhnlian  (from  hIihIki,  to  hear 
inass;  samba,  to  adore  or  worship ) . 
Aug  ti'llniiial  (Sp.  word). 
Aug  cscncia  (Sp.  word). 
Bulla  If  riang  aralan   (from  aral,   to 
teach;  to  learn). 
Aug  kiniia/ig 
Angbigamii  (from  bigds,  hulled  rice). 

Ang  (ililmin. 

Aug  aliikan  (from  alak,  wine). 
Ang  apugan  (from  cipiig,  lime). 
Ang  dampa;    ang  kubii;    ang  saiiong 

(mountain  term). 
Ang  cam po  sanln  (Sp. );  ang  libitTijan 

(Tagalog     word      also     means 

"grave"). 
Ang sahinigan  (from  sabung,  to  fight 

with  gamecocks.) 
Ang  laagsaiTijan.  ■ 
Ang  ddan. 

Ang  ludnas;  agtas  (narrow  trail). 
Bolaos;  onog;  bagnos. 
Ang  pilapil. 

Ang  bukirdn;  ang  hacienda  (Sp. ). 
Tubigan  (from  tilbig,  water). 
Ang  tuiay. 

Ang  inlay  na  kaicayan. 
Ang  tiibdlinn  (from  tubo,  sugar  cane). 
Ang  bi'ikiil. 
Ang  ]>adali(i/an. 
Ang  bUaiTijuun.    {Bilibidisihe  Manila 

prison  only. ) 
A7ig  baniayan  (from  iari/a//,  guard) . 
Ang  tatagudn. 
Ang  patTijao. 
Ang  sdnog. 
Ang  alijmto. 
Ang  siga. 
Ang  niogan. 
Ang  karurukan. 
Ang  labangdn. 
Ang  saliig. 

Words  ])ertaining  to  tlie  office  are  generally  Spanish,  although  a  few 
are  used  of  native  origin.     The  most  useful  are: 


The  church. 

The  townhall. 

The  schoolhouse. 

The  warehouse. 
The     rice    mill 

power). 
The  sugar  mill. 
The  distillerv. 
The  limekiln. 
The  hut. 

The  cemetery. 
The  cockpit. 


The  street. 

The  road. 

The  trail  or  path. 

Trail  (of  animal). 

The  dyke. 

The  plantation. 

Irrigated  land. 

The  briilge. 

The  band)oo  l)ridge. 

The  sugar-cane  field. 

The  field;  the  country. 

The  ditch. 

The  jail  or  prison. 

The  guardhouse  or  sentry  box. 

The  asylum. 

The  stocks. 

The  fire  (conflagration). 

The  spark. 

The  bonfire  (signal  fire). 

The  cocoaimt  grove. 

The  corral  or  inclosure. 

The  manger. 

The  floor. 


Oflice. 

Desk  (writing). 

Book. 

Library. 

Letter. 

Pen. 


Opisina  ( Sp. ,  oficina ) . 

Sulatdn;  escritorio  (Sp. ). 

Libi-o  (Sp. ). 

B'lblioteca  (Sp.). 

Si'dat  (from  Arabic  s'ural,  a  chapter 

of  the  Koran). 
Panulat;  plumn  (Sp. ). 


44 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


I'cncil. 
Ink. 
Red  Ink. 

Mail. 

Post-office. 
Letter  carrier. 
Telegrapli  office. 
Telegram. 

Messenger  (orderly). 
Typewriter. 
Paper  (in  general). 

Blotting  sand  (fine). 

Blotting  paper. 

The  globe  (world). 

The  earth  (ground). 

The  mountain. 

IMountain  country. 

The  precipice. 

The  hill. 

The  crack;  crevice. 

The  cave. 

The  wilderness. 

The  hole. 

The  prairie;  pasture,  meadow. 

The  forest;  timber. 

The  bush;  the  brush. 

The  bamboo  thicket. 

The  reedy  ground. 

The  rocky  place  (quarry). 

The  thorn  bush. 

The  muddy  country. 

The  spring. 

The  stream;  l)rook. 

The  river. 

Source  of  river. 

The  bank. 

Bank  of  river  or  seashore. 

The  pool. 

The  pond. 

The  swamp;  slough. 

The  ravine  or  gulch. 

Tidewater  creek. 

Deep  (unlordable)  river. 

The  depth. 

The  shallowness  (of  river) 

The  ferry. 

The  ferryboat  or  raft. 

The  bend  (of  river). 

Hole  (in  river). 

The  waterlall.w 

The  whirlpool. 

The  bottom  (of  river). 

Muddy  bottomed. 


Jjipix;  lapiz  (Sp. ). 
Tmta  (Sp. ). 
Tiiilmuj  piila. 
j Fudalaltan  (from  ddln,  to  carry). 
\C'07-reo  (Sp. ). 
Administracion  de.  correos  (Sp. ). 
Magdadidd  uangsntat;  cartero  (Sp. ). 
Eslacion  de  ii'lrgrafox  ( Sp. ) . 
Telegranxi  (Sp. ). 
Sugo;  Ordenaiiza  (Sp. ). 
Maqidna  de  esrrihir  (Sp. ). 
Papel  (Spanish  heavy   paper,   papel 

de  barba). 
Margaha  (Sp.,  common  sand  is  bu- 

hangin.  Tag. ). 
Papel  secante  (Sp.). 
Ang  sansinukuban;  sandaigdigan. 
Ang  litpa. 
Ang  bundok. 
Ang  kabundukan. 
Ang  bdiTi/oi. 
Ang  burul ;  gulod. 
Ang  bitak. 

Ang  Inngd;  ang  yungib. 
Ang  Hang. 
Ang  bulas. 
Ang  parang. 
Ang  guhdt. 
Ang  d'Dimhan. 
Ang  kairai/andn. 
Ang  katdlabahdn. 
Ang  batohan. 
Ang  kalinikan. 

Ang  kaputikan  (horn  piUik,  mud). 
Ang  bukal  nung  tubig. 
Ang  batis. 
Ang  Hog. 
Ang  hold. 
Ang  parigpang. 
Ang  dulaiiipdsig. 
Ang  danao  [danum,  water  in  Pam- 

pango,  llocano,  etc.). 
Ang  sdlog  {sdlog,  river  in  Bicol) . 
Ang     l<dl;     ang     labon     {Malabon, 

swampy  place). 
Ang  ilat. 

Sapa  (Sp.,  estero). 
Hog  na  nialdlim. 
Ang  kataliman. 

Ang  mababao  na  'dog  ( also  ' '  ford" ) . 
Ang  taunran. 
Ang  tabdo. 

Ang  likd  (also  "curve"). 
Lungd  (also  " cave  " ) . 
Ang  talon  nang  (I'tbig. 
Ang niiuli;  ang ifniipu;  ang alhnpnijo. 
Ang  ddinn  nang  i/og. 
Ang  ildlim  nang  ilog  na  pulikan. 


a  The  most  famous  Tagalog  regioa  waterfall  is  that  of  Botokan,  near  Majayjay,  La 
Laguiia  I'rovmee. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


45 


Gravelly  or  rocky  bottom. 

Sandy  liottomed. 

Steep  bank. 

Low  bank. 

The  landing  place. 

The  current. 

Strong  current. 

Weak  current. 

Very  weak  current. 

Place  where  there  i.s  a  strong  ('Ui 

rent. 
The  mouth  (of  a  river). 


Aiig  il/Uim  nang  ihg  mt  baiolidii. 

Ang  i/dlim  nang  Hog  iia  buhanginun. 

I'angpang  na  mntarik. 

J'ang/Ming  na  mahabd. 

Aug  dalampasigan. 

A  ng  agos. 

Maagos. 

MaJnnnng  agos. 

Mal'ining  agos. 

Agusan. 


Aug  vava  (algo  "bar. 
means  "mouth"  also; 
bang"). 

Tagalog  is  rich  in  nautical  terms,  the  j)rincipal  ones  being  as  follow 


'       Sdbaiig 
Licol  "«(- 


Ang  Idol  (Malay,  laid). 

Ang  ddgut. 

Dagatan. 

Dagatdugalan. 

Sandagatan. 

Karagalan    (singular    in    Tagalog). 
D.  to  R. 

Malaragal.     T>.  to  R. 

Tuhig  na  dlat. 

Tubig  na  tabang. 

Ang  baybay. 

Ang  baiikota. 

Ang  bat 6  sa  ddgat. 

Ang  doongan  (also  dalainj)a.<iigan). 

Angivawa  (also  "mouth  of  a  river"  ). 

Ang  canal  (Sp.  word). 

Ang  parol  (from  Sp., /aro). 

Aii(/  Loiajos;  ang  Tanguay  is  Cavite 
Point  only). 
The  island.  Ang pulo. 

The  gulf.  A  ng  vald. 

The  bay.  Ang  look. 

The  wave.  Ang  alon. 

The  tide.  Ang  alagouak  {rare);  ang  marea  {i^ii. 

word) . 
High  tide.  Ang  laki. 

Ebb  tide.  Ang  kati. 

The  strait.  Ang  kitid. 

The  principal  terms  for  the  heavenly  bodies,  divi-sions  of  time,  points  of 
the  compass,  and  meteorological  phenomena  are  as  follows: 


The  high  sea;  ocean. 
The  sea  (in  general). 
Lake  (large) . 
Lakelet. 

Everything  in  the  sea. 
The  seas  themselves. 

Warm  water. 

Salt  water. 

Fresh  water. 

The  coast  (sea  or  lake). 

The  reef. 

The  sunken  rock. 

The  port;  anchorage;  landing  place 

The  bar. 

The  channel. 

The  light-house. 

The  cape;  jioint. 


The  sun;  the  day. 

The  moon;  the  month. 

The  year. 

One  year. 

Every  year. 

Each  year. 

Monthly. 

New  moon. 

Full  moon. 
Old  moon. 


Ang  drao.  ( Bayan  is  a  I'are  word  for 
"day."  Ex.:  maldlim  ang  bayan, 
midday  or  a  great  day.) 

Ang  budn. 

Ang  taon. 

Sangtaon. 

Taontadn. 

Manaon;  niamanadn. 

Bnangbudn. 

Bagong  budn. 
(Kabilngan  nang  budn. 
\P(dabang  budn  (rare). 
i  Kamatayan  nang  budn. 
\Bvgtong  (rare). 


46 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Time. 

The  s^tar. 

Venus;  the  evening  star. 

The  Pleiades;  the  seven  stars. 

The  niorninii  star. 

The  shooting  star. 

The  comet. 

The  sky. 

The  break  of  day. 

The  dawn. 

The  morning. 

Midday. 

Afternoon  (evening). 

Night. 

The  daylight;  sunlight. 

Moonlight. 

To-morrow. 

Yesterday. 

Day  before  yesterday. 

A  few  days  ago. 

After  a  while. 

(Three)  days  ago. 

(Ten)  days  ago. 

One  week. 

Every  week,  weekly  (adv.). 


Ang  drno. 

Any  h'lluin. 

Taufjlao    dagal   (lit.,   "light   of    tlie 

sea"). 
Mairjlon. 
Ang  lala. 
Ang  bnlnlakao. 
Ang  hitidn  may  hunlol. 
Ang  laiTgil. 
Ang  liv-ayu'ag. 
Ang  madaUng  drao. 
Ang  umaga;  uga. 

Ang  tmujliali  (Malay,  ((UigaJi-ari). 
Ang  hapon. 
Ang  gahi. 

Ang  s'lnag  nang  drao. 
Ang  sinag  nang  budn. 
Bulas. 
KalKtpnn. 
Kamakalaud. 
Kamakaildn. 
Mamaya-niaya. 
Kamak<datl6. 
Kainakapono 

"days  ago. 
Isang  lingo  (corruption  of  Sp. 

mingo,  Sunday). 
Lingolingo. 


{Kamaka   expresses 
Do- 


The  names  of  the  days  are  Spanish,  Sunday  being  called  Lingo,  corrupted 
from  Domingo.  Lingo  is  also  used  for  "week."  The  word  "minute"  is 
also  taken  from  Spanish,  and  the  word  for  hour  is  a  corruption  of  the 
Spanish  word  Jtora.  The  names  of  the  months,  days,  and  other  divisions 
of  time  from  Spanish  are  given  below  for  convenience  of  the  student. 

Enero. 

Fehrero. 

Marzo. 

Ahril. 

Mayo. 

Junio. 


January. 

February. 

March. 

April. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

August. 

September. 

October. 

November. 

December. 

The  month  of  January. 

Sunday. 

Monday. 

Tuesday. 

Wednesday. 

Thursday. 

Friday. 

Saturday. 

The  beginning. 

The  middle. 

The  end. 

The  hour. 

Watch;  clock. 

Half  hour. 

Minute. 


Jidio. 

Agosto. 

Septiembre. 

Octuhre. 

Noriembre. 

Diciembre. 

Ang  buang  enero. 

Lingo  (from  Sp.,  domingo). 

Lunes. 

Maries. 

Miercoles. 

Jueves. 

Viernes. 

Sdbado. 

Aug  rindd. 

Ang  pagitan. 

Ang  katapnsan;  ang  hawydn. 

Ang  oras  (from  Sp.,  hora). 

Orasdn. 

Kalnhating  orax. 

Minuto.     (Sp.  word). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


47 


Second. 

The  dry  season. 
Tlie  wet  season. 
The  daylight. 


The  darkness. 

The  north. 

The  east. 

The  south. 

The  west." 

The  northeast  wind. 

Wind  or  air. 

The  weather. 

Reasonableness. 


The  heat. 
The  cold. 

The  earthquake. 

The  dew. 

The  earth  smell. 

The  mist  or  fog. 
The  cloud. 


The  rain. 
The  drizzle. 


A  hard  shower. 

The  inundation  (flood). 

The  rainbow. 

The  lightning  flash. 

The  thunderbolt. 

The  thunder. 

The  storm. 

The  hurricane;  typhoon. 

The  cyclone;  tornado. 

The  tempest. 

The  whirlwind. 

The  ice. 


The  hail. 

Heavy  rain  cloud. 
The  snow. 


Segundo  (>Sp.  word). 
Ang  tagarao  (from  drao,  sun). 
Aug  tagiddn  (from  ulan,  rain). 
Ang     kaliv'unagan     (from     lw:miag, 

light;    Ilocano,   Laoag,   capital  of 

Ilocos  Norte),  noun. 
Aug  hadilimdn  (from  dillm,  dark), 

noun. 
Ang  karilimdn.     (D.  to  R. ) 
Ang  Idlaga  (also  "the  north  wind  "  ). 
Ang  silaiTganan  (lit.,  "rising  place," 

sun,  etc.). 
Ang  liahdgat  {a.ho  "the  south  wind" ). 
Avg  kfdtiiiuran  (from  lunod,  drown). 
Ang  ain'ilinn. 
Aug  JuiiUjin. 
Aug  iHOuthon. 
Kapanahouan ;  also  musiu.      [Kujki- 

nahonan    also    means    "opportu- 
nity," in  some  cases.) 
Ang  iuit.    Heat  (abstract),  Kainitan. 
Ang  laviig.    Cold  (abstract),  l-aUuul- 

gan. 
Aug  Hndol. 
Ang  huuiog. 
Ang  allmoom. 

rain. ) 
Ang  ulap. 
Ang  alapadp. 


(Smell  of  earth  after 


Ang  uldn. 
Ang  ambdn. 


Rare  words  arelawnuja, 
a  little  rain;  lawa- 
/o«a,  a  drizzle;  anuta, 
moderate  steady  rain ; 
tikati k,gent\ii,  contin- 
uous rain,  and  louruk, 
a     rain    with    great 


drops. 

Isang  hagsd  nwug  uldu. 

Ang  buhd. 

Ang  bahaghari  (lit.,  "the  king's 
sash"). 

Ang  kldlat. 

Ang  lintik. 

Ang  kidog. 

Aug  ouos. 

Aug  bagyd. 

Ang  bohaui. 

Aug  Kigwd. 

Ang  ipoipo. 

Ang  hielo  (Sp.  word.  Also  tidng 
na  bat 6  malamig  or  "cold-stone 
water.") 

Ang  granizo  {Sp.  word;  rare  in  Philip- 
pines). 

Ang  goot  (rare). 

Ang  niece  (Sp.  word;  known  from 
books  only). 


a  As  the  Tagalogs  were  originally  sea  rovers,  the  heavenly  bodies  sunk  in  the  .«ea  to 
them,  so  they  say,  the  "drowning  place"  for  the  west. 


48 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Navigation  was  considerably  developed  by  the  Tagalogs  prior  to  the 
arrival  of  the  Spaniards,  and  a  considerable  maritime  vocabulary  developed. 
The  words  in  ordinary  use  are: 


The  vessel. 

The  sail. 

The  art  of  sailing;  navigation. 

Anyone  aboard. 

Sailor;  mariner. 

Pilot. 

The  rudder. 

The  compass. 

The  mast. 

The  yard. 
The  outrigger. 
The  bow. 
The  stern. 
The  boat  pole. 
The  paddle. 
The  paddler. 

The  oar. 

The  oarsman;  rower. 

Paddling. 

Rowing. 

Sculling. 

The  cover  (of  boat  or  canoe). 

The  canoe. 

The  prau. 

Political  and  natural  subdivisions  are  as  follows,  in  so  far  as  they  pertain 
to  social  relations: 


Aug  sasaki/un. 

Aug  layag. 

Ang  paglaldi/ag. 

Ang    saka>/    (formerly    "oarsman," 

"paddler" ). 
Tagdragat  (lit.,  "sea  dweller"). 
Malhn  {Arabic);  jyrdctico  (Sp.). 
Ang  ugit. 

Ang  brujula  (Sp. ). 
Ang  palo  (Sp.  word);    (Dig  sundong 

(rare). 
Ang  hatangan  (Batangas  Province). 
Ang  katig. 
Ang  doong. 

Ang  liuli  nang  snf^akydn. 
Ang  tikbi. 
Ang  sagwdn. 
Ang  mananagii'An  (S.   to  N. );    (Fil. 

Sp.,  bnnquero). 
Ang  gdod. 
Aug  maiujagdod. 
Ang  pagaagicdn. 
Ang  pag-gdnd. 

Aug paglndin  (Chinese  word,  Uu). 
Ang  karang. 
Ang  hangkd. 
Ang  parao. 


The  Philippine  Islands. 
The  Visayan  Archipelago. 
The  Tagalog  country. 
The  Visayan  region. 
The  province. 

The  jurisdiction  (of  a  municipality. 

township). 
The  court. 


The  town. 

The  town  proper. 

The  fellow-townsman. 

The  house. 

The  neighbor. 

The  settlement;  hamlet. 

The  barrio  (ward). 

The  head  man  of  a  barrio. 


The  mayor;  alcalde. 
The  secretary. 

The  treasurer. 


Ang  kapuluan  Fillpinas. 

Ang  kapuluan  Bisagd. 

Ang  katagahigan. 

Ang  kabisnydan. 

Ang  lalau-igan   (formerly  this  word 

meant  "anchorage,"  "port"). 
Ang  sdkop. 

Ang  hokuman  (from  hokom,  a  judge; 
Arabic  hakim,  doctor,  philoso- 
pher, judge). 

Ang  bayan  (including  the  rural  l)ar- 
rios) . 

Ang  kabayanan  (excluding  rural  l)ar- 
rios). 

An 'J  kababayan. 

Ang  bahay. 

Ang  kapidbdhay. 

Ang  nayon  (Sp.,  sitio). 

Ang  baraiTijay  (old  word  for  vessel). 
Ang  jjulo  nang  baraiTgay. 
Ang    cabeza    nang    baraiTgay    (Sp. 
term ) . 

Ang preddente;  ang  capitdn  (Sp.). 

Ang  secretario  sa  bayan;  ang  kalihini. 
{Liftim  means  "a  secret."  ) 

Ang  tesorero;  ang  taga  i)ujat  yanian 
(lit.,  the  "  wealth  guarder"). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


49 


Tlie  chief  of  the  town. 

The  upper    part    (of    town,    river, 
country). 


Aug  saiujuni(tn  hnynn  (old  name  for 
the  civic  head  of  a  town). 

Avg  ilaga  (lower  part  of  same  is  ang 
ibahd). 


The  terms  for  metals,  mineral^*,  are  mainly  native,  one  or  two  having  a 
foreign  origin.     They  are: 


Gold. 

Si  I  ver. 

Iron. 

Copper. 

Steel. 

The  loadstone  (magnet). 

Lead. 

Tin.  ' 

Mercury. 

Gold  and  copper  (alloy). 

Lime. 
Ivory. 

Whetstone. 
Horn. 
Rust. 

Tortoise  shell. 
Sulphur. 


dintd. 

P'llak  {Iyovo. peruk ,  Malayan). 

Bdkal 

Tiuig^o. 

Patiilim  (from  talhn,  an  edge). 

Aug  hatohalani . 

Tingd  (from  Sanskrit,  tUra,  tin). 

Tingaputl  (lit.,  "white  lead"  ). 

Azogue  (Sp. ). 

Tiunbaga  (from  bnga,  anything  red- 
hot;  some  say  from  Sansk.  tdmra). 

Apog. 

Gdring  (Malay,  gad'ing;  orig. 
Sanskrit.). 

Balong  tagisan. 

SutTgag. 

Kalaticwg. 

Kala. 

Sanyaua  ( rare ) ;  uzufre  ( Sp. ) . 


The  ordinary  terms  used  bv  fishermen  are: 


Fishing. 
Casual  fisher. 

The  fisherman  (trade). 

The  fish  ])ole. 

The  fish  line  or  line. 

The  liook. 

The  bait. 

The  net  (small). 

The  seine;  large  net. 

The  fish  trap. 

Wicker  basket  for  catching  fish. 

The  arrow. 

The  bow. 

The  principal  jiarts  of  the  human 
animal  bodies,  are  named  as  follows: 

The  head. 

The  body,  the  person. 

The  bone. 

The  fiesh. 

The  ])lood. 

The  pulse. 

The  skin. 

The  pore. 

The  skull. 

The  brain. 

The  nerve. 

The  vein. 

The  membrane. 

The  hair  (of  the  head). 


Ang  mangisdd  (from  isdu,  a  fish). 
Ang    mamhninuit    (from    binuit,     a 

hook). 
Ang  manghTgisdd. 
Ang  balhvdsan. 
Ang  pisi. 

Ang  tagd  (large);  ang  binuit  (small). 
Ang  pain. 
Ang  dala. 
Aug  pukot. 
Ang  baklad. 
Ang  bobo. 

Ang palasu;  ang  pand  (Sansk,  rdna.) 
Ang  busog. 

body,  together  with  some  terms  for 

Ang  lUo. 

Aiig  katauan  (from  tauo,  human  l)e- 

ing,  person). 
Ang  buto. 
Ang  Jamdn. 
Ang  dngo. 
Ang  sanhi. 
Ang  balat. 

Aug  kildbot  nang  balat. 
Ang  biuTijo. 
Ang  lUak. 
Ang  I  it  id. 
Ang  ngat. 
Ang  Idmad. 
Am/  bnhok. 


6855—06- 


4 


50 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Hair  (pubic). 

The  crown  of  tlie  head. 
The  temple. 
The  forehead. 
The  evebrow. 
The  eyelid. 

The  eyelash. 

The  eye. 

The  pupil  of  the  eye. 

The  white  of  the  eye. 

The  tear  duct. 

The  nose. 

The  lip. 

The  mouth. 
The  chin. 
The  cheek. 
The  mustache. 
The  beard. 

The  tongue. 
The  ear. 
The  tooth. 
The  molar. 
The  gum. 
The  hard  palate. 
The  soft  i)alate. 
The  throat. 
The  larynx. 

The  lower  jaw. 

The  stomach. 

The  intestine. 

The  anus. 

The  neck. 

The  nape  of  the  neck. 

The  shoulder. 

The  shoulder  blade. 

The  arm. 

The  hand. 

The  palm. 

The  linger. 

The  thumb. 

The  index  finger. 

The  middle  finger. 

The  ring  finger. 

The  little  finger. 
The  wrist. 

The  elbow. 
The  nail. 
The  knuckle. 
The  armpit. 
The  breast. 
The  bosom. 
The  rib. 


Bulbiil.      (Body    hair    or    feathers, 

b(d(ihiho). 
Aug  hiitnhunaii. 
Aug  jiiUpimn. 
Aug  nod. 
Aug  ViJaii. 
Ang  hubong  nang  mati'i  (lit.,  the  roof 

of  the  eye). 
Ang  pilikmatd. 
Ang  mat&. 
Ang  halintatao. 
Ang  bilig  nang  mata. 
Ang  dalogan  nang  luJin. 
Aug  Hong. 
Aug  I'ibi  (probablv  from  Sp.,  Jabio, 

lip). 
Ang  bibig  (Malay,  bihir,  lip). 
Ang  baba  (Sp.,  barfxi,  chin). 
Ang  pifi)~gi. 

Ang  bigote  (Sp. ;  old  word,  ini^ay). 
Ang  barbas    (Sp. ;  old  words,   guml, 

baaug,  ymTijot). 
Ang  Wild. 
Ang  Idiiu/a. 
Ang  iH/ipin. 
Ang  bagcing. 
Ang  giU'igid. 
Ang  iTgalangcda. 
Ang  gidil. 
Atig  lal((mnna)i. 

Ang  grdnng-gidioTgan   (dim.   of    gu- 
lling, a  wheel). 
Aug  sdutng. 
Ang  .'iikmura. 
Ang  bituka. 
Aug  tmnboug. 
Ang  liig. 
Aug  bi'itok. 
Aug  bdlikdt. 
Ang  balagat. 

Aug  baraso  (from  Sp.,  brazo). 
A)tg  kauiag  (also  "arm"). 
Ang  palud  nang  kamaij. 
Aug  dalin. 
Ang  liudalaki. 
Ang  Idntuturu  {Iroin  tuturo,  Xo   point 

to). 
Ang  data  (the  chief,  dattn;  Malay, 

datoh,  grandfather). 
Ang  .txsuoldng  .vngsing  (from  su.^u(it, 

to  put  on). 
Ang  kaViugkiiTijau. 
Ang  gidanggalaiTjja)!  (from  gakuTljan, 

jewelry). 
Ang  siko. 
Aug  kvko. 

Ang  Jinko  nang  dalin. 
Aug  killkili. 
Ang  dihdlh. 

A)lfl  SllSil. 

Aug  ladiang. 


TAGALOG 

LANGUAGE.                                        51 

The  si<le. 

Any  iagUiran. 

Tlie  iRart. 

Any  puso. 

The  lung. 

Any  bagd. 

The  back. 

Any  likod. 

The  spine. 

Any  yuluyod. 

Tlie  thorax. 

Any  a  an. 

The  abdomen. 

Any  puson. 

The  waist. 

Any  bdywany. 

Tiie  nnibilicus. 

Any  pusod. 

The  lap. 

Any  kcuidunyan. 

The  liver. 

Any  (day. 

Tlie  trail  bladder. 

Any  apdo. 

The  kidney. 

Any  bato. 

The  bliidder. 

Any  panloy. 

The  womb  (uterus). 

Any  bdhay  batd  (lit,  "child  house"  ). 

The  t)lacenta. 

Any  inunan. 

The  vulva. 

Any  puqui. 

The  ))enis. 

Any  till. 

The  testicle. 

Any  bai/ay. 

The  frroin. 

Any  sliTylt. 

The  hip. 

Any  balakany. 

The  l)uttock. 

Any  ply  I. 

The  thijrh. 

Atiy  hild. 

The  leir. 

Any  blnti. 

The  knee. 

Any  tdhod. 

The  calf. 

Any  (dak-alakdn. 

The  shin. 

Any  lo/od. 

The  foot. 

Any  pad  (Sansk.,  pada) . 

The  heel. 

Any  sdkony. 

The  ankle. 

Any  bukonybukony. 

The  sliinbone;  the  tibia. 

Any  bias  iiany  binll. 

The  sole  of  the  foot. 

Any  talamixikan. 

Some  of  the   ordinary  diseases 

known   to  the  Tagalogs  are  named  as 

follows: 

The  cholera. 

Any  colera  (Sp.  word). 

The  bubonic  plague. 

Any  peste  bubonica  (Sp.  -word). 

The  smallpox. 

Any  bidiilony. 

Sickness  (illness);  pain. 

Any  sa  kit. 

The  relapse. 

Any  bhiat. 

The  fever. 

Any  laynat  (Sp.,  calentura) . 

The  chills. 

Any  pangiki. 

The  headache. 

Any  sakit  nany  ulo. 

Blindness. 

Any  kabulaydn  (from  hnldy,  a  ))lind 

person ) . 

Deafness. 

Any  kabirTyihdn   (from  bhTi/l,  a  deaf 

person). 

Lameness. 

Any  kapllaydn  (from   pdaij,    a  lame 

person) . 

Dumbness. 

Any  ktiplplhan   (from  jiipt,  a  dmub 

person) . 

Insanity. 

Any  kaololdn  (from  olol,   an  insane 

person). 

Seasickness. 

Any  Iiilo. 

The  cough. 

Any  ubo. 

The  asthma. 

Any  liikd. 

The  mum)is. 

Any  blkl. 

The  nosebleed. 

Any  Italingoynyoy. 

Strangury. 

Any  ballsdosdo. 

Flatulency. 

Any  kdbag. 

52 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGP:. 


The  swelling;  inflaminatiou. 

The  discoloration;  lividity. 

The  cramp. 

The  hiccough. 

The  corn. 

The  wart. 

The  foot-sore  (similar  to  chilljlains 

The  wound  or  sore. 

The  inflammation  of  the  lymphat 

glands. 
The  boil. 
The  pus. 

The  Aleppo  button  (ulcer). 
The  pimple. 
The  "dhobeitch." 

Articles  of  clothing  have  native 
been  taken  from  other  languages. 

The  clothing;  dress. 
The  style  of  dressing. 

The  hat. 

The  native  helmet. 
The  coat;  shirt. 
The  trousers. 

The  shoe. 
The  drawers. 
The  socks. 
The  stockings. 
The  slippers. 
The  skirt. 
The  underskirt. 
The  petticoat  string. 
The  apron;  overskirt. 
The  ruff;  neckerchief. 
The  handkerchief. 

The  ribbon. 
The  mantilla. 
The  comb. 
The  fine  comb. 
The  button. 

The  ring. 

The  earring. 

The  rosary  (beads). 

The  scapular. 

The  fan. 
The  parasol. 
The  cane;  staff. 
The  staff  of  office. 

The  pipe. 

The  native  pipe  (of  leaves). 

The  coat  of  mail. 

The  breech-cloth;  sash. 


from  seluar  (.\ral)ic), 
"underfoot"). 


Aug  jKiiiiamaga. 

A}ifj  latdjj. 

Arig  pidlkut. 

Ang  xiiiok. 

Aug  li/iak. 

Aug  knlxgo. 
).     Aug  alijiHiTga. 

A)ig  si'igdt. 
ic     Avg  k'llani. 

Ang  pigsn. 

Ang  nand. 

Ang  agihap. 

A)ig  tagiilah'ij/. 

Ang  galls  (Sp.,  S(irna). 

names,  as  a  whole,  l)ut  many  have  also 
The  leading  terms  are: 

Aug  dcnnit. 

Anq  pdnanamit  (from    damit) .     (D. 

t'o  N. ) 
Ang  aomhalllo  {irom  Sp.,  somhrero,  a 

liat). 
Ang  salakot. 
Ang  baro. 
Ang  salavdl   i 

trousers). 
Aug  sapin  (lit 
Aug  calzonciUos  (Sp.  word). 
Ang calcelines  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  medias  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  sinelas  (Sp.,  cinnela). 
Ang  saga  (Sp.,  saga). 
Ang  naguas  (Sp.,  iniagua). 
Ang  pamigk'is. 
Ang  t  a  pi  ft. 
Ang  ahtmpni/. 
Ang  ]>any6  (Mex.  Span.,  pano 

dana). 
Ang  liston  (Sp.  word). 
Ang  Imnhong. 
Ang  snkhiji. 

Ang  myod  (also  "plowshare"). 
Ang  Intone»  (irom  Sp.,  boton,  a 

ton). 
Ang  singsing  (Malay,  chinchin). 
Ang  hikao. 
Ang  auntas  (fromSp.,  cnenta,  a  l)ead 

of  the  rosary). 
Ang cahnen  (troni  Carmen,  "Mt.  C'ar- 

mel"). 
Ang  pnypay. 
Ang  pdj/ong. 
Ang  tungkod. 

Ang  baras    (from   Sp.,    vara,     yard- 
stick). 
Airg  knako. 
Ayig  patnpid. 
Ang  biilii.ti. 
Ang  bahag. 


ban- 


l)Ut- 


TAG A LOG    LANGUAGE. 


53 


The  i)riiKii)al  parts  ul"  treet?,  ])lants-,  etc.,  are  named  as  below: 

Ang  kdhoy  (also  "wood"). 


The  tree. 

The  trunk. 
The  root. 
The  bud. 

The  flower. 

The  shoot;  sprout. 

The  branch. 

Luiul)er;  wood;  timber. 

The  leaf. 

The  l)ark. 

The  sap. 

The  fruit. 


Aiig  }>uno. 
Ang  uga(. 
Aug  liuko  (also  the  young  ccx-oanut 

fruit). 
Ang  hulaklak. 
Ang  Ksbong;  ang  lahong. 
Ang  sufiga. 
KaJioy. 
Any  dahon. 
Ang  updk. 
A  ng  galas. 
Ang  bnnga 


{Galas  is  also  "milk".) 
(also   used   for  fruit  of 
areca  palm). 

The  terms  for  cigar,  cigarette,  and  tobacco  are  of  Spanish  origin,  but  the 
practice  of  chewing  betel  nut,  rolled  with  the  leaf  of  the  betel  and  spiced 
with  slaked  lime,  has  given  some  native  terms. 

The  areca  nut.  Ang  hunga  (fruit  of  Areca  catechu). 

The  betel  leaf.  Ang  itmo  (leaf  of  Piper  betel). 

The  lime  (mineral).  Ang  tipog. 

The  "))uyo"  or  chew.  Ang  hitso. 

The  nutcracker  (long).  Ang  kaVikul. 

The  lime  stick.  Ang  apugan.    (Sainewordfor  "lime- 
kiln.") 

The  following  list  of  dignities,  professions,  and  trades,  etc.,  gives  the 
principal  terms  used  b}'  the  Tagalog  race: 


The  President. 

The  governor-general. 

The  provincial  governor. 

The  judge. 

The  Pope. 

The  archbishop. 

The  bishop. 

The  priest. 

The  general. 

The  colonel. 

The  lieutenant-colonel. 

The  major. 

The  captain. 

The  lieutenant. 

The  second  lieutenant. 

The  sergeant. 

Tlie  corporal. 

The  trumpeter  (bugler). 

The  soldier. 

The  king. 

The  noljle. 

The  noblewoman. 

The  gentleman. 

The  lady. 

The  lawyer. 

The  doctor. 


Ang  President e  sa  America. 

A  ng  gobernador-general. 

Any  gobernador  .sa  lalaidgan. 

Aug  hokom  (Arabic  word). 

Ang  papa  (Sp.  word). 

Ang  arzobispo  (Sp.  word). 

Ang  obispo  (Sp.  word). 

Ang  pare  (from  Sp.,  padre,  a  priest). 

Ang  general  ( Sp. ) . « 

Ang  coronel  (Sp. ). 

Ang  teniente  coronel  (Sp. ). 

Ang  coinandante  (Sp. )  (also  com- 
manding officer) . 

Ang  capitdn  (Sp. ). 

Ang  leniente  (Sp. ). 

Ang  alferez. 

Ang  sargento  (Sp. ). 

Ang  cabo. 

Ang  corneta  (Sp. ). 

Ang  sundalo. 

Ang  hari. 

Ang  gat  (equal  to  Sp.,  Don). 

Ang  dayang  (equal  to  Sp.,  Bona). 

Ang  maginoo  (equal  to  Sp.,  Serior). 

Aug  ginoo  (equal  to  Sp.,  Seiiora). 

Ang  tagapagtangol  (from  tangol,  to 
protect). 

Ang  mangagamot  (from  gamot,  med- 
icine"). 


«All  military  terms  are  t;ikeii  from  Spaiiisli,  except  a  few  like  hoktm,  army, 
is  true  of  naval  terms. 


The  same 


54 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


The  ineicliant. 

The  seller. 

The  Ijuyer. 

The  teacher. 

The  pupil. 
The  preacher. 

The  clerk. 

The  interpreter;  translator. 

The  writer. 

The  reader  (professional). 

The  reader  (casual). 

The  student. 

The  i^rinter. 

The  chief;  head;  boss. 

The  partner. 

The  companion. 

The  carpenter  (housebuilder). 

The  wood  sawyer. 

The  tailor;  dressmaker. 
The  shoemaker. 

The  butcher. 

The  field  hand. 
The  sower. 

The  reaper  (crop  gatherer). 

The  day-laborer. 
The  metal  founder. 

The  smith  (any  metal). 

The  maker  of . 

The  potter. 

The  inventor. 

The  peddler. 

The  washerman  or  washer-woman. 


The  cook. 

The  salt  maker. 
The  oil  maker. 
The  weaver. 
The  dyer. 
The  house  servant. 
The  collector. 


Aii(/  niaiTi/aiTgaldkal  (from  Lulitkid, 
business). 

AiKj  tdfjapaghill  (fr(jm  hi(iijhl/i,  sell- 
ing) • 

A)ig     tagapamili     (from     jinniniiili, 

buying^- 

Aiig  inangaaral  (from  anil,  teach- 
ing, etc. ). 

Avg uralan  {iro\\\  arid,  learning, etc. ). 

Aug  maiTijaiTgdral  (from  ami,  teach- 
ing, etc.). 

Aug  manunuiat  (from  si'ihit,   letter). 

Aug  dalubasa   (from  f^isa,  reading). 

Aug  siivnisulat  (from  Kulat,  letter). 

A)ig  tugabusa  (from  h<isa,  reading). 

Ang  biunabam  (from  basa,  reading). 

Aug  iiagadral  (from  dral,  learning, 
etc. ) . 

Aug  vianlilimbug  (from  Ihiibag, 
printing). 

Aug  pliiiikxipuno  (from  pinw,  trunk). 

^\ng hasa )ud  ( from  mma,  association ) . 

Aug  kasauia  { from sarua,  association ) . 

Ang  anloague 

Ang  manlalagarl  (from  lagan,  a 
saw ) . 

Aug  mananahi  (from  talit,  sewing). 

Anggumagaxidnangsap'iu{iroingaird, 
to  make). 

Ang  mamamataij  )iang  buca  (from 
patai/,  to  kill). 

Ang  Diags^asala  (from   xaka,  to  till). 

Aug  rnagtatunhu  (from  tanim,  to 
sow). 

uing  mangagapas  (from  g<ipa.<,  to 
cut,  reap). 

Ang  npahdn  (from  vj>i(,  pay,  salary). 

Ang  magbububo  (from  bubo,  to  cast 
metals). 

Ang patidai/  (Sansk.,  pau<h1,  science, 
skill). 

Ang  mangagaun  uaug (from 

gawd,  to  make). 

Ang  wagpapalai/ok  (from  puhujok,  a 
jar). 

Ang  mapaglahtng  (from  lahou/,  in- 
vention). 

Aug  mjgkdako  ( from  lako,  to  peddle). 

Ang  tagapaglaba  (from  Sp.,  hiv<ir,  to 
wash). 
Ang  tagapaglulu  (from  bdu  to  cook) . 
Ang  tagapangosina  ( from  '&\).,cucina, 
kitchen) . 

Ang  viagaaKin  (from  asln,  salt). 

Ang  rnaglalarTgis  (from  lanTg'ts,  oil). 

Ang nianhahabi  (from  Jiabi,  to  weave. 

Aug maninina  (from  tina,  to  dye). 

Ang  alila. 

Ang  tugapaniiujil  (from  >^hTgil,  to 
collect,  dun). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


55 


The  cashier;  paymaster. 

The  Iiunter  (professional). 
The  creditor. 

The  debtor. 
The  bearer. 
The  predecessor. 

The  successor. 
The  heir. 

The  grass  cutter. 

The  nurse. 

The  wet  nurse. 
The  midwife. 
The  pawnbroker. 

The  beggar. 
The  thief. 

The  slave. 


Aug  tdtjdpagbujjad  (from  hayud,  to 
pay  a  debt). 

Aug  mdiujaiTijaso  (from  uho,  a  dog). 

Ang  phiitgkakautangan  (from  t'ltang, 
a  debt). 

Aug iwujatang  (from  ntdng,  a  debt). 

Ang  iiKti/dald  (from  d(dd,  to  carrj-). 

Ang  hinulinJuni  (from  halili,  to  fol- 
low). 

Ang  kuhalill  (from  liaUU,  to  follow). 

Ang  iniigmamana  (from  mana,  heir- 
ship). 

A)ig  nutgdadamo  (from  damo,  grass, 
herb ) . 

Ang  tagapagalaga  (from  alaga,  to 
care  for). 

Ang  sisiwa. 

Ang  lulot. 

Ang  niapagpatubo  (from  tubo,  a 
pledge). 

Ang  pulube. 

Ang  magnandkao  (from  nakdo,  to 
steal). 

Ang  alipin. 


Section  Fouis. 


THE   AD.IECTIVE. 


The  adjective  is  a  word  used  in  a  grammatical  sense  to  qualify,  limit,  or 
define  a  noun,  or  a  word  or  phrase  which  has  the  value  of  a  noun,  and  it 
expresses  cjuality  or  condition  as  belonging  to  something:  Thus,  "black- 
ness" is  the  name  of  a  quality  and  is  a  noun;  "black"  means  possessing 
blackness  and  so  is  an  adjective.  The  adjective  is  used  (1)  attributively, 
(2)  appositively,  and  (3)  predicatively.  Examples,  (1)  "A  good  man," 
(2)   "A  man  good  and  great,  (3)  "  The  man  is  good." 

Equally  in  Tagalog  as  in  English,  this  is  the  meaning  of  the  adjective, 
and  owing  to  the  greater  fiexibility  of  the  former  the  construction  of  such 
words  is  much  more  clearly  to  be  seen.  Like  English,  some  root  words 
are  adjectives  by  intrinsic  signification  and  may  be  called  "simple  adjec- 
tives. ' '  Among  the  simple  adjectives  are  bago  ( new ) ,  mahal  (dear,  precious, 
noble),  hdmak  (vile),  hunghan  (foolish),  tahunik  (quiet,  tranquil),  an(l 
iotuo  (true).  But  the  greater  number  of  adjectives  in  Tagalog,  as  in  Eng- 
lish, are  compounds  formed  from  roots,  which  may  be  sometimes  nouns, 
by  means  of  prefixes,  infixes,  and  suffixes  like  the  English  suffixes  "ly," 
"like"  "able,"  etc.,  as  in  "friendly,"  "childlike,"  "  remarkable,"  etc. 
The  ordinary  particle  in  Tagalog  used  in  the  formation  of  adjectives  is  the 
prefix  ma,  undoubtedly  a  contraction  of  mai/,  to  have  or  possess,  as  there 
are  nouns  with  which  nun/  is  still  retained  with  the  noun  to  form  an  adjec- 
tive. Among  such  ma  adjectives  may  be  mentioned  magandd  (beautiful), 
from  gandd,  the  root  expressing  the  idea  of  beauty  or  good  appearance, 
and  marunong  (wise),  from  dunong,  the  root  expressing  the  idea  of  wisdom. 
It  will  be  observed  that  7na,  like  some  other  particles  softens  d  to  r  when 
d  commences  a  word. 

When  prefixed  to  nouns  denoting  things  which  may  be  had  or  possessed, 
ma  denotes  an  abundance  of  whatever  may  be  signified  by  the  noun. 
Examples:  Si  Juan  ag  niaghitu  (John  has  much  gold);  masilid  ang  bdhay 
(the  house  has  many  rooms). 

The  particle  ma  has  at  least  nine  other  functions,  which  will  be  explained 
in  the  appropriate  places. 


56  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

May  is  used  really  as  the  verb  "to  have"  in  the  phrase  Ako'y  may  salit 
(I  am  sick  [ill],  literally,  "I  have  sickness  or  pain"  ).  In  asking  if  a  person 
is  ill  or  in  pain  the  verb  is  sometimes  reduplicated;  e.  g..  May  maymkit  ka? 
(Are  you  ill  [or  in  pain]?). 

Ma,  adjectives  may  be  conjugated  with  the  definite  infix  in  to  exp-^ess 
opinion;  e.  g.,  minamarunong  ko  ito  (I  think  this  is  wise).     Ma  is  redupii  ^ 
cated  to  express  the  present  tense;   minari'mong  ko  itd  would  mean  "I 
thought  this  was  wise." 

Conjugated  with  the  indefinite  particle  may  (nag  in  present  tense),  the 
adjective  assumes  a  verbal  form,  with  the  implied  idea  of  boasting  or  pre- 
tending what  may  be  signified  by  the  root;  as,  itagmamuranony  si  Felipe 
(Philip  boasts  of  being  wise);  nagtnamaganda  si  Loleng  (Dolores  [Lola] 
pretends  to  be  beautiful).  The  idea  may  also  be  conveyed  by  "believes 
himself"  (or  "herself"),  what  may  be  denoted  by  the  root;  e.  g.,  "Lola 
believes  herself  to  be  beautiful." 

The  particle  na  also  forms  some  adjectives,  in  which  the  first  syllable  of 
the  root  is  generally  repeated.  These  na  adjectives  also  have  an  indefi- 
nite verbal  meaning.  Ex.:  Xauuhdo  (thirsty,  to  be  thirsty),  from  iihao; 
napagal  (tired,  to  be  tired);  pagalin  (a  tired  person):  vamatay  (dead,  to 
be  dead,  from  patay).     P  is  here  changed  to  m  for  euphony. 

Some  adjectives  are  also  formed  from  roots  by  the  prefix  rnapag,  as 
mapagtuiTgayao  (abusive,  insulting  [words  or  acts  implied]). 

Others  are  formed  by  the  j)refix  mapa;  as,  mapamansag  (boastful,  vain- 
glorious, ostentatious),  from  bavsag,  ostentation.     B  is  softened  to  m. 

The  indefinite  particles  mag  and  7iag,  when  ])refixed  to  some  roots,  gen- 
erally with  reduplication  of  the  first  syllable  of  the  same,  form  adjectives 
in  some  cases.  Ex.:  Magdarayd  (fraudulent,  cheating),  from  dayd,  the 
initial  d  being  softened  to  r;  and  nagiisa  (sole  unique,  only),  from  isa,  one. 

The  particle  maka,  in  its  signification  of  cause,  forms  adjectives  similar  in 
meaning  to  those  in  English  ending  in  "able,"  "ing,"  etc.,  when  prefixed 
to  roots  capal^le  of  such  significations.  The  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  gen- 
erally reduplicated,  but  not  always.  Ex.:  Makatotoua  (agreeable,  pleasure 
causing),  from  tnua;  makatatdua  (laughable,  comic),  from  Idiia,  and  maka- 
sdua  (disgusting),  iromsdua,  etc. 

A  few  adjectives  are  formed  by  the  prefixed  particles  ynala  and  pala,  as 
malahiniiu/a  (lukewarm,  applied  to  water),  malakoko  (quite  warm),  and 
palaaiidy  (quarrelsome),  from  audy  (quarrel,  enmity). 

Some  adjectives  are  formed  by  the  reduplication  of  a  root  when  the  I'oot 
has  no  more  than  two  syllables.  If  there  are  more  than  two  syllables  the 
first  two  only  are  reduplicated.  This  rule  is  general  in  Tagalog.  Ex.: 
Ildlohdlo  (mixed),  from  halo,  root  of  the  idea  "to  mix;"  sunodsiniod  (con- 
secutive), from  sunod,  root  expressing  the  idea  of  following,  etc.  The 
restrictive  particle  ka  is  sometimes  prefixed  to  these  reduplicated  roots, 
implying  a  lesser  degree  than  with  ma  or  may;  as,  kaxakitsakit  (painful), 
from  sakit,  root  expressing  the  idea  of  illness  or  pain.  An  example  of  how 
far  a  polysyllable  is  reduplicated  is  furnished  by  the  word  kaginhagi»hdua 
(wholesome,  salubrious),  iroiw  ginhdua,  idea  of  relief,  betterment,  rest. 

There  are  a  very  few  adjectives  formed  by  the  union  of  two  words  of 
opposite  meaning,  of  which  urong-sidong  (neutral,  indecisive),  from  urong 
(to  go  back),  and  sulong  (to  go  ahead),  may  be  taken  as  the  type. 

The  particle  in  [liin  alter  an  acutely  accented  vowel)  suffixed  to  many 
adjectives  gives  the  idea  of  a  person  or  object  having  the  quali'y  denoted 
by  the  root.  Ex.:  Masintahin  (a  loving  person),  from  sintd,  love;  (awohin 
(a  useful  [or  available]  article),  from  tamo,  use,  utility,  and  babasagin  (a 
broken  or  frail  thing),  from  basag,  idea  of  breaking,  fracturing,  etc.,  any- 
thing like  glass,  a  plate,  the  head,  etc.  The  first  syllable  of  the  root  is 
here  reduplicated. 

An  (ha)i),  which  is  generally  a  place  suffix,  is  sometimes  added  to 
adjectives  in  which  the  idea  of  place  or  location  is  inherent,  and  occa- 
sionally with  those  which  do  not  admit  the  suffix  in  for  euphonic  or  other 
reasons.    Ex.:  Bt  madaanan  (impas.sable  or  impenetrable),  from  dt  (not), 


TAaALOG    LANGUAGE.  57 

and  ddan  (road),  and  malman  (patient  person),  in  denotinjr  what  may  be 
suffered  when  suffixed  to  inutlix;  as,  niatiisin  (what  suffered  or  endured  ). 
This,  however,  l)eh)ng3  more  properly  under  the  particles,  where  the  dif- 
ference in  the  use  of  in  and  an  is  set  forth  at  length. 

In  when  inserted  after  the  first  consonant  of  some  nouns  gives  the  idea 
of  like,  and  one  at  least  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective.  It  is  bivntd 
(youth),  from  btdd  (child),  and  is  sometimes  used  to  mean  "young," 
although  b(i(/o  (new)  is  sometimes  used  with  the  same  idea,  as  in  the  words 
hacjoufj  tauo  (unmarried  man  or  })achelor,  literally  "new  i)erson"). 

The  English  nouns  and  phrases  which  are  used  as  adjectives  are  ex- 
pressed in  Tagalog  by  means  of  the  ties  g,  vfj,  or  rut,  the  wonl  which  is 
modified  preceding  the  modiiiei-,  the  opposite  to  what  is  done  in  English. 
The  tie  is  attached  to  the  modified  word  and  answers  somewhat  to  the 
P^nglish  "of."  Ex.:  Sdhonimj  plhtk  (a  mirror  of  silver,  a  silver  looking- 
glass)  ((/);  tinterong  huboij  {'AW  inkstand  of  glass,  a  glass  inkstand)  {ng); 
singsingna  ginto  (a  ring  of  gold,  a  gold  ring) ;  buhay  na  bato  (a  stone  house, 
a  house  of  stone),  the  last  two  examples  showing  the  use  of  the  tie  nn. 
Sometimes  the  tie  is  omitted  if  the  modified  word  ends  in  a  consonant 
other  than  n,  but  it  is  not  considered  elegant  to  do  so. 

Adjectives  like  the  P>nglish  "golden,"  "silvery,"  "wooden,"  etc.,  are 
expressed  in  different  ways  in  Tagalog,  generally  by  means  of  the  ties 
or  by  different  jjarticles  indicating  "likeness,"  which  will  be  explained 
hereafter. 

Negative  adjectives  like  those  formed  in  English  by  the  prefixes  un. 
(Anglo-Saxon),  in  (before  b  and  y)  softening  to  m  for  euphony),  im  (Latin), 
a,  an  (Greek),  are  formed  in  Tagalog  by  the  particles  dl  (not),  iratd 
(without),  and  sometimes  hi]idt.  (no).  Ex.:  Di  malapitan  (unajiproach- 
able),  from  lap'd,  idea  of  approaching;  dt  mabilavg  (innumerable),  from 
bllang  (to  number);  di.  viadaa»an  (impassable  or  impenetral)le),  from 
ddan  (road);  walang  bahala  (apathetic,  indifferent,  careless);  iraUnig  hangdn 
(withoutend,  lasting,  eternal,  infinite), and  hindinamumuiTga  (unfruitful), 
from  bniTga  (fruit),  with  na  and  reduplicated  first  syllable  of  root  (softened 
to  m  from  b)  to  indicate  present  tense  (literally,  "not  fruit-bearing"). 
The  use  of  di  and  wald  is  illustrated  by  di  makabayad  and  indang  maybayad, 
the  first  meaning  "notable  to  pay"  and  the  second  "without  means  of 
payment,"  both  being  about  equal  to  "insolvent." 

As  in  English,  there  is  no  variation  in  the  adjective  for  gender  and  case,  but 
the  adjective  may  be  pluralized.  For  the  plural  (the  modified  word  being 
understood  in  some  cases)  the  word  vunTijd  is  used  with  simple  adjectives — 
as,  ang  maiu^d  hunghang  (the  foolish  [persons]  ) — and  the  first  syllable  of  the 
root  is  repeated  if  it  consists  of  one  or  two  letters  for  compound  adjectives. 
If  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  contains  more  than  two  letters,  the  first  two 
letters  only  are  reduplicated.  MaiTgd  is  also  used  by  many  with  the  plural 
compound  adjective.  Ex.:  Ang  marurunong,  or  ang  maiTgd  viarurunovg 
(the  wise  [people] ). 

The  adjective  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun  modified,  and  it  would 
seem  that  the  latter  form  is  to  be  preferred,  as  it  agrees  with  Malay  (as 
with  Spanish)  construction.  However,  with  the  spread  of  English  it  is 
not  unlikely  that  the  custom  of  using  the  adjective  before  the  noun  may 
become  the  usual  construction,  as  it  is  equally  as  correct  as  the  other  way. 
Ex. :  Ang maiTgd  babayeng  vmgandd;  ang  maiTgd magandang  babaye;  ang baba- 
yeng magagandd;  ang magagandang  babaye;  ang mant^d babayeng  magagandd, 
and  ang  maiTgd  magagandang  babaye.  All  six  of  the  foregoing  phrases  mean 
simply  "the  beautiful  women,"  the  first  four  being  preferable. 

The  following  list  of  adjectives  will  give  the  principal  ones  in  ordinary 
use.  The  plan  has  been  followed  of  giving  adjectives  with  certain  mean- 
ings, followed  by  those  of  opposite  significations,  or  at  least  in  well-defined 
groups.  Words  having  substantially  the  same  meHning  are  called  syno- 
nyms; those  of  opposite  meaning,  antonyms.  Words  with  the  same  sound 
biit  different  meanings  are  called  homonyms.  Some  Tagalog  adjectives 
require  several  different  words  in  English  to  express  their  varying  mean- 


58 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


ing,  just  an  occurs  in  translating  English  into  Tagalog  or  any  other  lan- 
guage. Practice  alone  will  fully  instruct  the  student,  owing  to  the  localisms 
and  provincialisms  of  the  language.  As  many  examples  will  be  given  as 
space  justilies. 


Dear;  noble;  precious;  esteemed. 

Cheap,  ignoble,  etc. 
Useful,  available  (thing). 
Useless;  without  benelit. 


(Jood. 

Bad. 

Harmful;  hurtful;  slanderous. 


Strong. 

Weak. 

Large,  big,  grand. 

Small. 

Bulky;  massive. 

Much;  plenty. 

Excessive;  superfluous;  remaining. 

Little;  some. 


Spacious;    ample;    wide    (as   room, 

road,  etc. ). 
Broad;  wide;  level;  fiat. 

Disproportionately  wide  (or  broad). 


Narrow  (as  street,  door,  opening). 

Tall;  high;  noted  (metaph.). 
Deep. 

Low;  shallow;  humble  (metaph.) 
Long;  aLso  gigantic. 
Short;  brief. 


Mahal.  Aug  minumahal,  the  es- 
teemed, dear,  etc.,  person  or  thing. 

Mura. 

Tariiuhln.    Tamo,  use,  utility,  benefit. 

Walang  kabolo/idn.  Ex. :  WaUna/ 
kabolnhdn  ang  gavd  mo,  your  work 
is  without  value;  useless. 

Mahuti.  Mabuting  taiio,  a  good  per- 
son. 

Musamd.     Kasamaan,  evil.' 

Makapapawjanydya.  From  anydya, 
JM171,  and  maka,  with  pa.  A  good 
example  of  the  building  up  of 
words  in  Tagalog.  I'a)Ti/anyayang 
tauo,  a  man  who  destroys  the 
property  of  another. 

Malakds.  Malakds  tia  tduo,  a  strong 
Malakds  na  harTgin,  a  high 


Kahinaun,  weakness. 
Kalak-hdri,  grandeur;  size. 


person, 
wind. 
3{uliind. 
Malaki. 
Maliit. 
Matarubok. 
Marami  (from  dami. )      KaramiJiati, 

plenty;  abundance. 
3radld. ' 
Lubhd    (also  means   "very"   before 
another  adjective. )    Lubhang  sakd, 
serious  illness. 
Kaunti.     ^Marunong   kang   Tagdlogf 
^"Do  you  understand  Tagalog?    Opo, 
yes,  sir.     ^Inglh?    Kaunti,  pu,    a 
little,  sir. 
Mainavg.     Maluang  na  silid,  a  wide 

(or  spacious)  room. 
Maldpad.    Kalaparan, hremlth.    Ma- 

Idpad  "iia  isip,  broad  minded. 
Maluag.     Maiuag  na  loob,  a  magnan- 
imous heart  (metaph.). 
Mak'ipoi.     Makipot  aiig  ddan,  a  nar- 
row road.     Mahpot  na  isip,  nar- 
row-minded.   Kakipotan,  narrow- 
ness. 
^[ak'ttid.     Makitiran,  narrowness. 
Mataas.     Kataasaii,  tallness,  height. 
Ma/dlim.     Kalaliman,  depth.    Mald- 

lim  na  gdlit,  deep  anger. 
Mababd.      Kababaav,    low    ground; 
also  humility.     Mal)aba)>g  loob,  a 
submissive  (humble)  disposition. 
Mahabd.      Mahabang    tulay,   a   long 
bridge.     Mahabang  tauo,  a  gigan- 
tic man. 
Maikli  variation  ( inaikai) .     Maikliiuj 
buhuy,  a  short  life. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE, 


59 


Close;  short  (as  hair,  beard,  etc.) 
Square;  equal  on  all  sides. 


Round;  circular. 

Thick  (as  a  board,  book,  etc.), 
Thick  (as  liquor,  clothes,  etc.) 


Coarse;  rough. 


Rare;  thin. 
Slenrler;  fine. 


Heavy. 

Light  (not  heavy);  easy  (metai^h. 

Strong;  intense;  heavy. 

Solid. 

Pressed;  compact;  packed;  solid. 
Hollow  (as  a  tree,  etc.). 

Clean;  neat. 

Pure;  limpid;  clear. 


Turbid;  muddy  (as  water);  bleared 
(as  eyes) ;  thick  (as  the  speech). 

Pure  (and  without  mixture). 

Light;  fine  (like  chaff,  paper,  etc.). 
Dirty;  filthy;  disgusting;  nasty. 


Dirty;  disgusting,  etc.  (Southern). 

Filthy;  indecent. 

Innumerable;  numberless. 

Full;  complete. 

Insuflicient;  not  enough;  less. 

Empty ;  sometimes  wide. 


Sdffad. 

Parisukat  (from  sukat,  to   measure, 
and  parts,  equal,  as). 
Mabtlog.     Kabilogan,  or  pagkaJi'iUMj, 

roundness. 
MaliiTifm  (rare) . 

Makapnl. 

Mulbnit.  Mallmit  na  dam'd,  thick 
clothes. 

Magdspam/.  Magdspung  rut  ku)un, 
coarsefoo<l.  (Synonym,  mai/dptnig 
hinin. ) 

Madt'ilang. 

ManlpU.  Kanipisan,  slenderness. 
Maiiip'is  na  katauan,  slender 
bodied. 

Mahignf.  Mabigat  mi  looh,  heavy 
hearted. 

Mugadu.  Kagaanan,  lightness.  M<t- 
gadi)  itong  kdhog,  this  wood  is  light. 

Matvuli.  Matinding  gaiiw,  strong 
medicine.  Katindi,  a  counter- 
weight or  balance.  Matinding  hob, 
heavy  hearted. 

Maigting  (this  word  is  provincial  and 
not  generally  used  to-day). 

Musinxin. 

Maguang.  (luangan  itong  Jialigi  itd, 
this  harigue  (house  pillar)  is  hol- 
low. 

Mallnis.  /ia/misan,  cleanliness.  Ma- 
llnis  na  darnit,  clean  clothes.  Ma- 
linis  na  loob,  clean  hearted. 

Malindo.  Tubig  na  malindo,  or  ma- 
Undo  nu  tubig,  pure  or  limpid 
water.  Malindo  na  loob,  pure 
hearted. 

Malabo. 

Tagnnds. 

Wat/a. 

Tahas.     Tahas  na  ginto,  pure  gold. 

A'aio  (a  local  word  is  galbok  or  galbo) . 

Madumi.  Karumlian  (contr. ),  dirti- 
ness, filthiness,  nastiness.  Madu- 
mihan,  dirty,  etc.,  object. 

Madiri.  Madirihin,  dirty,  etc.,  per- 
son. 

Salauold.  Kasalauolaan,  filtii,  inde- 
cency. 

Di  mabUang.  (from  di,  not,  and 
bllang,  idea  of  counting,  number.) 

Puno.  Magpuno  ka  itd,  complete  or 
fill  this. 

Kulang.  Kakidangin,  waste,  lack. 
Kulang  na  banta,  a  lacking  idea. 
PakulatTgin  mo  sa  apuy,  diminish 
the  fire. 

Pouang.  Also  walang  laindn,  with- 
out pulp  or  meat. 


60 


TAGALOG    LAN(}UAGE. 


Contracted;  cramped  (as   a   room), 
IVIixed. 


Conse(;utive;  in  order. 

Entire;  whole;  unbroken,  etc. 
Broken;  fractured,  etc. 


Cooked  (as  food). 

Raw;  crude  (as  food,  fruit). 

Edible;  esculent. 

Poisonous     (as   toadstools,    arsenic, 

etc.) 
Venomous  (as  the  bite  of  the  dahong 

palay,  or  rice  snake). 
Fresh  (as  meat  or  tish,  etc.). 
Spoiled;  putrid. 
Impure;  adulterated. 

Sweet. 


Sour;  acid. 

Bitter. 
Salty;  saline, 


Peppery;  pungent. 

Rancid. 

Nauseating;  unkempt. 

New. 

Old;  stable;  permanent. 

Stale;  musty  (asrice,  tobacco,  wine) 

Drv. 

Wet. 

Thin;  watery;  fluid. 

Thick;  dense;  curdy. 

Sticky;  adhesive. 

Juicy. 

Flesh v;  pulpv;  meaty. 

Hot.  ■ 

Burniuif;  ardent. 


Lukewarm. 

Cold. 
Chilly. 

Hard;  solid;  stiff. 
Soft;  flexible;  bland. 


Maalkip. 

Hdlo-Itdlo.     Kalialo,  mixture.     Afaij 

kahalo    ItoiKj    dlak,    this   wine    is 

mixed. 
Sun6d-f<unad    (from    sunod,  idea   of 

following,  obeying,  etc.) 
Boo. 
Basag.      Babamgin,   broken  article, 

from   basag,   idea    of     fracturing, 

breaking,  etc.,  as  the  head,  a  plate, 

glass,  etc. 
M(Unld. 

Hildo.     Jlildo  pa,  green  yet. 
ifakaiii. 
Gabon;  makamandag. 

Malason. 

Sari  ad. 

Mnbolok.     Bolok  na,  putrid  already. 

Hindi  jmlos  (from  Jinidi,  not,  and 
pulos,  alike;  of  one  color. 

Matamis.  Kalamisan,  sweetness. 
Tinamis,  sap  of  the  nipa  when 
freshly  drawn.  Malanus  na  wikd, 
sweet  speech  (synonym  matamis 
na  mangmap). 

Madsiin.  Kaasiman,  sourness;  acid- 
ity. 

MaiKiit.     Kapaitan,  bitterness. 

Madldl.  Kaalalan,  saltiness.  Ala- 
iaUilan  »10  ang  kanin,  salt  the  food 
a  little  more. 

Mah.angliang. 

(Ala. 

\Maantd. 

Masnklam. 

Bago. 

Malagl.  Palagian  mo  itong  gawd, 
make  this  work  permanent. 

I^aon. 

Maluyo. 

Basd. 

Malabnao. 

Maldpat. 

Malagkit. 

MakalOH. 

Malamdn. 

Ma'imt.  Kainitan,  heat.  Ma'init  ang 
drao,  the  hot  sun  (or  day). 

MadLah.  Houag  mong  paalabalabin 
ang  ningas,  do  not  add  fuel  to  the 
flames. 

MalaliiniiTga.  {Malakoko  expresses 
a  slightly  greater  degree  of  heat.) 

Malamig. 

Magindo.  Maginauiu,  a  chilly  per- 
son. 

Madgda. 

Maldmbot. 


Katigam n,  haril ness. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


61 


Spongy;  porous;  soft. 
Diutile;  Hexihle. 

Sharp. 

Sharp-pointed. 
Sharpened;  ground. 

Dull. 

Hacked;  notched. 


Rusty  (as  iron,  etc.). 


Slippery;  slimy. 

Anything  oily  or  smeared  with  oil 

Rockv;  stonv. 

Muddy. 

Rough;  rugged. 


Sandy. 

Swampy;  lioggy. 
Gradual;  little  by  little. 

Sudden;  abrupt;  hasty;  eager. 

Impassable;  imjienetrable. 
Difficult;  laborious. 

Ditficult;  intricate;  slow. 
Inaccessible;  not  to  be  reached. 

Unapproachable. 

Unfathomable;  abysmal. 


Distant;  far. 
Near. 


Rare;  scarce. 
Common;  ordinary. 


BuJuH/Iiatj.       ITiinU     b\i.!t(irih(ig,     not 

porous;  ini|)orous. 
Makanat.      Also     a    kind     of    taffy 

candy. 
Malalim.     Katdllinoii,  sharpness. 
Matiilis.     KKtiilixdi),  pointedness. 
MatagiH.     Tinayis,  what  ground,  etc. 

1}fnpnrnl. 
Maloiiinl.      Mntomul  iia  siuidcmg,  a 
dull  sword.      This  word  is  often 
applied  to  business,  trade,  etc. 

BirTgdo.  Also  noun  with  forward 
accent.  Mcdaki  avg  hliTi/ao  nilovg 
suvdang,  this  sword  is  very  dull 
(lit.,  great  is  the  dullness  of  this 
sword). 

Nakabdnunm;un  or  Kinnk(dnu<iiig 
( from  kalunang,  rust ) .  A  Iso  name 
of  town  in  La  Laguna  Province 
with  C.  Odanang. 

Mudulas ;  warwM.s. 

Mcddiu/isan  or  Nahalamgisan. 

Ma  bid i). 

Mai/  pdt'ik ;   iiadnsak. 

Fusakal,  (rare).  MnloJci  aiig  kapnm- 
kalan  nung  bundok,  the  ruggedness 
of  the  mountain(s)  is  very  great. 

Mahuhangin.  Kabuhaiy/in,  sandy 
beach,  or  sandy  ground. 

Mnlabon.  Also  name  of  town  in 
Rizal  Province,  Luzon. 

Unfi-uidi.  Unti,  is  probably  a  varia- 
tion olmindi;  kaimti,  means  "lit- 
tle," "small,"  etc. 

Bigld.  Kabiglaan,  eagerness.  Pdl- 
tik,  ayn.  Biglung  gaird ;  paltik  na 
gawd,  quick  work. 

Di  laadaavan  (from  ddan,  road,  and 
dt,  not,  with  ])lace  ending  on). 

Mahirnp.  MaJiirap  gaivln,  a  difficult 
or  laborious  task.  Aug  vxuajd 
maJiirap,  the  Avorking  classes. 

Mal'iuag.  Di  viaUnag,  easy.  Walang 
liuag,  without  difficulty. 

DI  mar<di)il)<in  (from  dating,  idea  of 
arrival,  and  di,  not,  with  place 
ending  an). 

Di  malapifan  (formed  like  the  above 
from  the  root  IdpK,  idea  of  near- 
ness). 

Di  matdrok  (formed  like  the  fore- 
going from  tdrok,  "to  sound  the 
water"  ). 

Malayo. 

Mal&pil  (also  b<ibao).  Babao  bagd 
ang  Pasig  sa  atinf  Is  the  Pasig 
anywhere  near  us? 

Bihira. 

Karaniaan.  Karaniuang  damtin, 
usual  dress.  Karaniuang  ivikd,  an 
ordinary  word. 


62 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Straight. 
Crooked;  bent. 
Curved. 


Fragrant;  odorous. 
Fetid;  stinking. 
Delicious;  pleasant. 

Noxious;  malignant. 


Powdered;  pulverized. 

Sonorous  (as  u  bell). 

Equal. 

Unequal. 

Transparent. 

Opaque. 

Concave. 

Wholesome;  salubrious. 

Horrible. 

Fearful ;  dreadful. 

Past. 

Present. 
Future. 

Right  ( hand) . 


Left  ( hand ) . 

In  the  middle. 
To  one  side. 


Matuuid. 

Buluktot. 

Maliku.  LikoUkong  ddun,  a  road 
with  many  turns.  Minsan  pang 
himiko,  one  turn  (or  bend)  more. 

Mdhainjo. 

Mabului.     KahaJiodn,  fetidity. 

Kuhujod-lugod  (from  liujod,  idea  of 
pleasure,  etc. ) . 

Ilakasasaiiid  (from  mmd,  idea  of  evil, 
the  particle  rnaka  and  tense  redu- 
plication .S(/  for  present). 

Dorug  (means  putrefied  in  some 
localities). 

Matunog  (from  tunog,  sound). 

Kaparis. 

Hindi  paris. 

Maaninag. 

Kogag;  koyap  (both  rare). 

Mulnkoug.  Malukung  na  p'mgan.  a 
deep  plate,  like  a  soup  plate. 

Kagndiagbi.lidnu  (from  ginhdtia,  idea 
of  relief,  rest). 

KakilakiWiot  (from  kildbol,  idea  of 
trembling  with  fear). 

Kdtakottdkot  (from  idkot,  idea  of  fear. 
Kalakotan,  fear,  dread). 

Naknrdan  (from  ddan,  idea  of  pass- 
ing). 

JS'gai/uii. 

Dardting 
riving) 

Kaiiaii. 
right. 


^from   ddtljig,   idea  of  ar- 


Kancwkanan,  a  little  to  the 
Kananknnanin  mo,  go  a  lit- 
tle to  the  right.     Ang  nakakarian, 
what  lies  to  the  right.    Pakanan  ka, 
go  to  what  lies  on  the  right. 
Kultud    (same    compounds    as    the 

above). 
Sa  gitnd.      Gitnang  g<dt-t,   midnight. 
S(i  tab/. 


A  few  of  the  foregoing  are  not  strictly  adjectives,  either  in  Tagalog  or 
English,  but  are  put  here  for  convenience. 


All;  entirely;  wholly. 


All. 


All  (kinds  or  classes). 

Each  one. 
Everyone. 


Paua  (generally  used  with  adjec- 
tives). Pauaiig  magidivg,  wholly 
good.  Paiuivg  imigugaling  did, 
they  are  all  good.  Pauang  inaiitini 
sild,  they  are  all  black.  Houag 
mong  pduahig  tauagln,  do  not  call 
all. 

Lahal  (generally  applied  to  persons ). 
Lahafin  mo  ung  pa)17/u)T<jii.vij>, 
speak  to  all  of  them.;  syn.,  tandu. 
(provincial).  Tatidng  tduo,  all 
men. 

Dllau  (provincial).  Ddang  mging, 
all  kinds  of  bananas. 

Bdlcuig  im.     Bdlang  drao,  some  day. 

Bdnn  t  isd. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


63 


The  following  is  a  lit^t  of  what  colors  are  generally  used  by  Tagalogs, 
with  some  names  also  not  now  ordinarily  heard. 

White. 


Mitputl.  Kaputiaii,  whiteness.  An(/ 
kaputinn  nang  itlog,  the  white  of 
an  egg. 

Mnitlm.     Kaitiman,  blackness. 

Mapnld.  Kapulahnv,  redness.  Ili- 
mulA,  blush;  redness  of  the  face. 

Madilao;  mnrUao  (from  dilao,  a  root 
dyeing  yellow ) .  Marilao  iki  damit, 
yellow  clothing.  Also  name  of 
town  in  Bulacan  Province,  named 
from  same  plant  (ciircuma  delagen). 
Also  name  of  6arr/o  of  Manila  (8an 
Fernando  de  Dilao). 

Bugliciu  ( Bataan  Province ) .  Bak-huo 
(var.). 

Gmidag  (from  gulay,  vegetables, 
herbs). 

Halongtiang  ( rare ) . 

Kagumarigi. 
MamiUlu.     Kajndhtan,  pallor;  pale- 
ness. 
Hiiimdd,  pale,  discolored. 

3Iab(in<i<(g. 

Maiiingning.  Maningning  parang  li- 
u'diprag,  bright  as  the  dawn. 

Maddiiii.  Kaddimav,  darkness,  etc. 
Houag  rnong  ipandilim  hong  cahayo, 
do  not  take  this  horse  while  it  is 
dark. 

Pidun.  Maithn  na  pulus,  l)Iack  all 
over  (as  a  horse). 

The  following  list  comprises  the  majority  of  Tagalog  adjectives  pertain- 
ing to  physical  conditions  of  the  body: 


Black. 
Red. 

Yellow. 


Blue. 

Bluish-green. 

Green. 

Brown;  brunette. 

Pale;  discolored. 

Bright;  clear;  light. 

Bright;  shining  (as  the  dawn,   the 

stars,  gold,  etc. ). 
Dark;  obscure. 


All  of  one  color;  unicolorous. 


Old. 
Young. 


Tall  (in  stature);  high. 

Short  (in  stature). 

Dwarfish;  short. 

Fat. 

Elegant;  beautiful. 

Pretty. 


Ugly;  deformed. 
Stuttering;  stammering. 

Mute;  dumb. 
Blind. 


Matandd.     Katandaan,  age. 

Bago.  Binatd,  youth,  is  sometimes 
used,  as  ang  manga  binatd,  the 
youths  (from  hak),  child). 

Haguay:  mahaguay.  Haguay  na 
iduo,  a  tall  person. 

Lipoto  (rare). 

Pandak. 

Matahd.     Kalahaan,  fatness. 

Magandd.  Kagandahan,  beauty; 
elegance. 

Marik'd  (from  dikh,  idea  of  pretti- 
ness).  Karikitan,  elegance,  pret- 
tiness.  Kar'iktang  u-ikd,  a  graceful 
word. 

Pdmid. 

Magaril.  Garilin,  a  stvitterer;  stam- 
merer.     Utdl-utal  is  another  word. 

Pipi.     KapipUian,  dumbness. 

Pisak,  variation  Lapimk.  Pisak  ang 
isang  viak'i,  blind  in  one  eye. 


64 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGP:. 


Deaf. 


Nasal;  snuffling  (as  in  the  speech). 

Cross-eyed. 

BHnkiiig. 

Big-eared;    long -eared;   flap-eared; 

large-eared;  jnegalotine. 
Thick-lipped  (person). 
Wry-mouthed. 
Toothless. 
Pockmarked. 
Left-handed. 
Lame  in  hand;  one-handed;  unable 

to  use  hands,  etc. 
Bandy-legged ;  bow-legged. 
Lame  (on  account  of  having  legs  of 

unequal  length). 
Quick. 
Slow;     deliberate      (in      work      or 

speech). 
Hairv;  feathered. 


BiiTgl.  KabbujUidv,  deafness.  Bimj- 
htgbing'i,  totally  deaf,  but  hhuji- 
b'mgi,  somewhat  or  a  little  deaf. 
(The  higher  degree  is  formed  with 
the  "tie,"  the  diminutive  without 
it.     This  is  a  general  rule. ) 

Ilmnal. 

Dul.ing. 

Kikirapkirup  (from  kirap). 

Malaki  ang  iahTga. 

Ngusoin  (from  ivjui^o,  lip). 

Ngiwt. 

Tipo.     Munipo,  lacking  teeth. 

Gniol-gatoL 

Kaliuete. 

Kimdo. 


Sakang. 
ITingkod. 

MudaU;  marall. 

Mahinay.  Possibly  a  variation  of 
vialiina,  weak. 

Mabalahibo.  Di  pa  makitd  ang  bala- 
hibo  nang  kamay,  the  hair  of  the 
hand  can  not  yet  be  seen ;  an  ex- 
pression used  to  express  that  it  is 
not  yet  day. 

BaiTglt. 

Ubanin.     Adjective,  muuban. 

Kulot. 

Ikal. 

Upau'm. 

Bolbol'in. 

Walang  buhok. 

Sungay'm.  SthTgai/,  horn,  also  a 
twining  plant  resembling  the  con- 
volvulus or  bindweed. 

3Iay  kaliskif. 

Magutom'm.     Kagulonuvi,  hunger. 

Nauuliao.     Kauhanau,  thirst. 

Sandat. 

Napagal.     K(ipag<ikt)i,  fatigue. 

HivKtnday. 

May  sakit.  Walang  sakll,  without 
illness,  i.  e.,  healthy;  well. 

Kasakitsakit  (from  sakit,  idea  of  pain; 
sickness;  iihiess). 

Sugatin  (from  sugat,  wound). 

Mutd.    Midain,  sore-eyed  person,  etc. 

Mabuhay. 

Patay.  Palayhi,  dead  person,  ani- 
mal, etc.     Namatay,  to  be  dead. 

The  list  of  mental  or  moral  attributes  given  below  does  not,  of  course, 
embrace  all  in  the  language,  but  the  most  usual  are  given: 

Makapangyarihan  (from  yari,  idea 
of  finishing,  etc.,  compounded 
with  pan,  maka,  and  suflix   han). 


Bearded. 

Gray-haired;  gray-headed  (person) 

Curled;  crisp;  curly  (as  hair). 

Curly  or  waving  (hair). 

Bald  (person). 

Hairy  (on  body). 

Hairless  (as  some  animals,  etc.). 

Horned  (animal). 


Scaly. 

Hungry  (person). 

Thirsty;  to  be  thirsty. 

Replete;  satiated. 

Tired;  to  be  tired. 

Numb  or  "asleep,"   as  the  hands, 

feet,  to  become. 
Sick;  ill;  to  be  ill. 

Painful.     ■ 

Wounded  (person) ;  having  sores. 

Sore-eyed. 

Living;  alive. 

Dead. 


Omnipotent;  all  powerful. 


TAG A LOG    LANGUAGE. 


65 


Brave;  valiant. 


Cowardly. 
Timid  (per.«on). 
Abusive  (person  or  act). 

Bashful;  timid;  shame-faced. 


Bashful;  modest  (esiK-cially  in  char- 
acter). 
Modest-eyed. 

IModest  in  sjieech;  moderate  in  play. 
Modest;  quiet. 

Modest;  slow. 

Modest   (in  carriage);    slow;   delib- 
erate. 
Peaceable;  quiet. 
Tranquil;  quiet. 

Gentle;  tame;  quiet  (as  animals). 


Quiet;  pacific. 

Quarrelsome. 

Odious;  rancorous. 

Fierce;  savage;  wild. 
Quiet  (in  sleep,  or  in  eating). 
Abstemious;  moderate. 
Gluttonous;  voracious. 
Bold;  gallant;  elegant. 
Bold;  daring;  insolent. 

Vain;  proud;  haughty;  arrogant. 

Boastful;  vainglorious. 

Neutral;  indecisive;  undecided. 


Influential. 

Famous;    celebrated;    noted;    noto- 
rious. 
Famous;  celebrated;  illustrious. 
Famed;  honored. 

Celebrated;  noted. 
Famed;  honored  (person). 
Dignity;  honor;  fame. 


Matdpanr/  (applied  to  wine, 
"strong,"  matapang  na  cilak, 
strong  wine.  Kutapangan,  brav- 
ery). 

Thidg.     Kaduagaii,  cowardice. 

Miitdlc'itin  (from  t/'ikol,  idea  of  fear). 

Majxigtamimiao  (from  iinTi/ai/ao,  in- 
sulting words). 

MdiTi/ild.  Ang  ikaiu/ili'i,  the  cause  or 
reason  of  timidity,  etc.  Ang 
pdiH/iiTgilalum,  of  whom  or  what 
afraid,  etc. 

Mdli'niiiin. 


'hiirh- 


Maiiumil. 

Muhini. 

M(ttl)ii)tg.      Also       means 
pitched,"  (as  a  voice). 

Mahinahati;  mahandyad. 

MaraJian  (from  dahan,  idea  of  delib- 
eration). 

Malouay. 

Mabagd.  Mahagnng  luoh,  a  tranquil 
heart. 

Mu(uiid.  Kaamoan,  tameness;  gen- 
tleness. Ang  pagkaamu,  the  act  of 
taming,  breaking,  etc.  Maamong 
h'job,  a  gentle  disposition. 

lahhnik.  Katahirnikav,  quietness. 
Itah'nnik.  mo  ang  bibig  iiiu,  keep 
your  mouth  quiet  (shut  up!). 

Paladuay.  Kaduay,  an  enemy.  Ang 
maiTgd  kaduay,  the  enemy.  MmTijd 
kaduay,  enenues. 

Mapagtaribn  (from  taniiii,  idea  of  ran- 
cor, hate,  etc.,  with  inapa(i  })re- 
fixed). 

MaUap.     Kaihipan,  fierceness. 

MatigiJ. 

Matliigting. 

Matdkao. 

Matikas. 

MajiaiTgahas. 
solence. 

Pahdu.  Kapaialoan,  pride,  vanitv, 
etc. 

Mapamansag  (from  banmg,  osten- 
tation). 

Urong-i>ulong  (from  i'iro)ig,  to  go 
back,  etc.;  sulong,  to  go  ahead;  to 
move  on). 

Dakila. 

Mabanlog.  Kabantogan,  fame;  noto- 
riety. 

Mabiun/i  (rare). 

Mar<iiTg<d.  (from  daiTgul,  fame; 
honor). 

Bulatlat. 

Purlltin.     Kapurihan,  fame;  honor. 

Saughaya. 


Kapangahahasan,   in- 


6855— OC)- 


66 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Fame;  noted;  talked  al)out. 

Mean;  vile;  worthless;  unfortunate. 
Mean;  vile;  worthless. 

Loving;  amorous  (person). 
Affectionate. 

Affectionate;  loving. 

Polite  (person). 

Polite;  courteous;  respectful. 


Courteous;  respectful. 


Respectful. 


Ironical;  sarcastic. 

Honest;  right;  straight. 

True;    refined;    perfect;     pure    (in 

body). 
Patient;  firm;  constant  (person). 
Impatient  (person). 

Changeable;  inconstant. 

Treasonable;  treacherous;    ungrate- 
ful. 

Two-faced;   double-faced;    treacher- 
ous. 
Giddy;  thoughtless;  careless. 
Blundering;  wild. 


Balita.  KahaUtnng  tdvo,  a  noted 
person.  Maybahalibalitunff  tduo,  a 
newsmonger.  Ano  cmg  balitcL  sa 
baycm?     What  news  in  town? 

Hamuk.  Ildmak  na  tduo,  a  worth- 
less person. 

T'nnaud  (originally  meant  "f reed- 
man;"  "liberated  slave."  An- 
other word  is  biilisik,  variation 
bidiKikslk,  literally  "slave  of  a 
slave."  Kabulisikan,  slavery; 
servitude). 

Masitiiahin  (from  sintd,  love,  origin- 
ally Sansk.  cJiintd,  thought,  care, 
through  Malay  chinta,  care,  anxi- 
ety, etc.). 

Ma'ibig.  Ka'ibigibig,  amiaijle.  Kai- 
bigdn,  affection.  Kaibigaii,  friend; 
beloved.  (Notice  the  difference  in 
accent. ) 

Mapagpalayao  (from  palayao,  affec- 
tion, and  iinipag,  prefixed).  Irog 
means  "great  love." 

Masagapin.  Aug  sagapan,  person  to 
whom  polite. 

Mapugpltugan  (from  pjilagan,  honor, 
respect,  and  mapay).  Aug  pagpi- 
pilaganan,  the  person  honored 
(from  pitagan,  prefixed  by  pag, 
reduplicated  first  syllable  jji  for 
present  tense  and  suffix  an,  here 
indicating  person,  l)ut  generally 
indicating  place). 

Maalangdlang.  Ang  kinaaalanga- 
ImTganan,  the  person  to  whom 
courteous  (from  ulangaluug,  idea 
of  courtes}',  compounded  with  ka 
and  in  (kina)  prefixed  and  an  re- 
duplicated as  a  suffix). 

Maya  la  ng.  Kay  a  la  iTgan,  respect ,  rev- 
erence. Magalangin,  courteous, 
respectful  person. 

Mapauuyd. 

Maiuid.     Katuiran,  honesty. 

Tun  ay. 

Maliisan. 

Mayayamutin  (from  yamot,   idea   of 

annoyance,  etc.). 
Salauahan.        Sakmahang     loob,      a 

changeable  character. 
MaUlo.     rinagliUloluui  niyd  ang  ina- 

ampuii,    he    is    ungrateful   to  his 

benefactor. 
Sukab. 

Matulig,  variation  maiuVmg. 

Mahild.  Partial  synonym  diiluTyas, 
which  means  "restless,  unquiet" 
more  than  "blundering"  or 
"wild." 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


67 


Restless;  turbulent;  fidgety. 
Restless;  mischievous. 
Restless;  uneasj^;  mischievous. 


Intolerable;  insufferable. 
Unspeakable;  unsayable;  untellable. 
Untouchable. 


Joyful;  contented  (person). 

Contented. 

Happy;  lucky. 

Laughter-causing;  laughable;  comic. 


Waggish;  jesting;  scoffing  (person) 

Sad. 

Just;  fair;  upright. 

Barbarous;  tyrannical;  despotic. 


Cruel;  rigorous;  severe. 

Agreeable;  pleasing;  joyous. 
Indulgent;  generous;  liberal. 


Charitable. 

Merciful;  charitable;  liberal. 

Learned;  wise;  etc. 

Discreet;  able. 

(1)  Accomplished;  (2)  excellent. 


Magasldo.  Magasldo  na  tdno,  a  rest- 
less person. 

Gaso.  Ang  gasohan,  person  dis- 
turbed. 

Magalao.  Probably  variation  of  ma- 
gadao.  Mugaldo  ang  fcainai/  niyd, 
his  hand  is  restless  (said  of  a  thief). 
Kagalauan,  mischief.  Aiiggakmin, 
the  mischief.  Ang  galanun,  person 
annoyed. 

Dt  inadalitd, {from  dalitd,  idea  of  suf- 
fering, and  dt,  not). 

Dt  iiKi^dhi  (from  sabi,  idea  of  tellings 
and  dt  not)., 

Dt  mimdang  (from  salang,  idea  of 
touching,  with  dt,  not).  Latin, 
noli  me  tangere,  taiien  by  Rizal  as 
a  title  to  one  of  his  works.  He 
signed  many  articles  "  Dimas 
Alang". 

Matiiain,  (from  foud,  pleasure;  con- 
tent). 

Kaay(tuya{iromai/a,  variation  Ugaya. 
Kaligayahun,  contentment) . 

Mupdlad.      Waking  pdlad,  unlucky. 

Makahitaud  (from  taud,  laughter, 
with  maka,  and  reduplicated  first 
syllable  ta  to  indicate  present 
tense). 

Mapagbiro;  pakibiro.  Tauong  biro, 
an  inconsiderate  person. 

Malungkot. 

Mardpat  (from  ddpat).  Karapaiaii, 
merit. 

Mabagsik.  Also  "power"  in  some 
cases.  Kabagsikan,  power;  tyr- 
anny; etc.  Ang  j^agbagaikan,  the 
oppressed. 

MabarTgis.  Kabaiujisan,  cruelty; 
severity. 

Mamyd. 

Mapagbigay.  Also  mapamigay.  Both 
words  are  from  bigaii,  idea  of  giv- 
ing. The  second  is  more  properly 
the  adjective. 

Maaud.  Maauuin,  a  charitable 
person.  Kaauaan,  charity,  com- 
passion. 

Mapagblyaya  (from  biyaya,  idea  of 
mercy,  charity.  Mablyayang  td  iio, 
a  merciful  or  liberal  person). 

Marunong  (from  duuong,  idea  of 
wisdom.  Karunoiigan,  wisdom). 
Marunong  kang  Inglesf  {C'astilaf). 
Do  you  understand  English? 
(Spanish?). 

Masikap.  Kasikapan,  discretion; 
ability. 

( 1 )  Faham  na  tduo,  an  accomplished 
man.  (2)  Mapahan  na  dUik,  ex- 
cellent wine. 


68 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Able;  accomplished. 
Fine  (in  bearing). 

Prudent;  judicious. 


Discreet. 
Thoughtful ;  grave. 

Vigilant;  awake;  known. 


Incomprehensible;  inimitable. 
Simple;  silly. 


Stupid;  foolish;  beast-like;  cracked 
(as  a  plate). 


Foolish;  stupid. 


Useless;  stupid. 

Stupid;  foolish;  malicious. 

Foolish;  stupid;  dull;  gaping. 


Childish;  foolish. 
Idiotic;  simple. 


Crazy;  insane. 

Laborious;  diligent;  industrious. 
Lazy;  slow. 

Slow;  tardy;  lasting. 


J'autda.  Pantas  na  t/iuo,  an  able 
man.     Kapaidai'an,  ability. 

Basabns.  Bii-'idfrn-'^ahiis  va  mar/lnoo, 
a  very  fine  gentleman.  Kafntsa- 
hiisdu,  excellence,  etc. 

Mabah.  Mahait  na  tc'nio,  a  prudent 
person.  Dalagang  mahait,  a  j)ru- 
dent  girl. 

Tirntim  (provincial  word). 

Mabigat.  Really  "heavy"  (from 
bigat ) . 

MagiMng  (from  gishig,  idea  of 
awaking).  Definite  is  in  iia)i,  npt 
an.  Xngisnaii  ko  ang  lindol  lagab-'i, 
I  was  awakened  by  the  earthquake 
last  night.  (^inisiuDi  ko  na  kapag- 
f!ii<))ia  ang  asal  na  yiioii,  I  have 
alwavs  known  of  that  custoui. 

Tinka/d. 

Maang.  Timang,  foolish;  stupid. 
Mangmang,  fool,  dunce;  al.'^o  lack 
of  memory,  forgetfulness.  MauTga, 
variation  niai7i;al,  silly,  foolish. 
MamaiTgal,  to  act  foolishly.  Xag- 
■)iiavia)Tgdma)7gahau,  to  feign  stu- 
pidity. This  meaning  of  maiTgd 
must  not  be  confused  with  the 
homonym  indicating  plurality, 
which  is  made  up  of  the  particles 
ma  and  iTljd. 

Bangdo  (rare).     Bangauin,  a  stupid 
person. 
Taksil.     Taks'd    na   tduo,   a    stupid 

person.  KataksUan,  stupidity. 
Bandag.  Kabandai/an,  foolishness. 
A7ig  pagkabandaj/,  the  error. 
Bangakin,  one  regarded  as  a  fool 
or  dunce.  Ilonag  mo  akongbtmga- 
kan,do  not  try  to  fool  me  (n)ake  a 
fool  of  me).  Also  kahaiTi/alan, 
foolishness,  from  JiaiTijal,  foolish. 

TuiTijak,  variation  iuwjag. 

Hitnghang. 

TaiTgd.  MagtaiviaUnuiahaii ,  to  feign 
stupidity.  A  rare  word  for  "fool- 
ish" is  lankas. 

TJnga^,  variation  oiTgd. 

Balifi.  KabaViuaii,  idiocy.  Baliuin, 
a  foolish  or  idiotic  person.  Caba- 
yong  babaliuin,  a  foolish  or  runa- 
way horse. 

Ulid,  variation  olol.  Kaidulan,  in- 
sanity. 

Masipag.     Kasipagan,  industry,  etc. 

Tamad  {Mapagtamad).  Katamaran, 
laziness. 

Maloaat.  Maloaat  na  kahoy,  durable 
wood.  {}raIo>iagi9  "slack,  loose." 
and  mahigpit  is  "tight.") 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


69 


True. 


T-vintr. 


Fraudulent;  cheating. 

Evil-lived;  criminal. 
Drunken. 

Desirous. 


Importunate. 

Obedient  (person). 

Disobedient;  contradictory. 
Bold;  shameless. 
Forgetful  (person). 

Rich;  prosperous. 

Poor;  miserable. 
Miserable;  stingy. 

Miserable. 

Talkative  (as  a  child) . 
Loquacious  (as  many  persons) 

Garrulous  (as  an  old  person). 
Silent;  reserved;  secretive. 

Economical;  stingy. 
Economical;  saving. 


Destructive. 


Totoo.  Tmototoo  ko  ang  nila,  I  am 
keeping  my  word.  Tihidi/  has 
more  the  sense  of  real,  perfect,  rc- 
fined. 

Bxl'iuu.  MahuJmlaannn  na  ii/ang  fii- 
litd  mo,  you  are  lying  in  your  ac- 
count. SiniuTgaling  is  a  '"liar"  or 
"  prevaricator."  Pinagninum/dH- 
ngun  ko,  I  told  him  you  lie. 

Magdaraiid  (from  dago,  fraud  de- 
ceit, with  '.nag  and  reduplicated 
first  syllable  of  root).  Xiidayaan 
itk(')  iiang  luoh  ko,  my  heart  de- 
ceived me. 

Masiual.  Mashial  na  tauo,  an  evil 
doer. 

Losing.  Another  word  is  derived 
from  langd.  KalangoJian,  drunk- 
enness. A  rare  word  is  aslak. 
Nauaslakun  ka  yata,  you  act  as  if 
you  were  drunk.  Drunkenness  is 
a  rare  vice  among  Tagalogs. 

Mapagiiiisa  (from  naiia  and  mapag). 
Another  word  is  derived  from^Jito, 
desire,  longing.  Avao  »ja  kapita- 
pita,  a  longed-for  day.  Magpita 
kat/6  sa  akin  nang  ihig  ningo,  ask 
me  what  you  desire. 

MnpaghiiTiii  (from  hingt,  to  ask  po- 
litely, and  mapag). 

Maxuitorhi  (from  sunod.  See  Con- 
secutive). 

Masouay.     Kasouayan,  disobedience. 

Masuaii. 

MaUmotin  (from  limot,  idea  of  forget- 
fulness). 

Maydman.  Kayamanan,  wealthi- 
ness. 

Ditkhd.     Kadukhaan,  poverty. 

Mardmot  (from  damot).  Ddmot  ako 
nang  salapf,  I  am  short  of  money. 

Makingking.  Tauong  niakingki)ig,  a 
miserable  person. 

Mau'ika  (from  wikd,  word). 

MatabU,  (from  tabil,  idea  of  talking 
much). 

Max(d'dd  (from  suliid,  a  story,  news). 

MatJnip.  Matinip  na  loob,  a  secretive 
character. 

Matipid.     Kalhipdati,  parsimonj'. 

Maarimohanan  ( from  arimohan) .  A ri- 
mohanin  mo  itong  p'dak,  save  this 
money.  Two  rare  words  for  the 
same  idea  are  maimpok  and  maagi- 
mat. 

Makasidrd  (from  sird,  idea  of  destruc- 
tion, and  maka,  with  reduplicated 
first  syllable  of  root). 


70 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Traveling;  peregrine. 


Unbaptized;  infidel;  pagan. 


Belonging  to;  pertaining  to. 

Abandoned. 

Guilty;  culpable;  sinful. 

Fruitful;  to  bear  fruit. 


Other;  different;  diverse;  distinct. 
Sole;  unique;  only. 
Lasting;  eternal;  infinite. 

Perishable. 

Immortal. 

Hopeful. 

Hopeless. 

Public. 

Reserved;  set  aside. 


Secret;  to  be  secret. 
Occupied;  to  be  occupied. 


Idle;  without  work. 
Passionate;    quick-tempered 

son). 
Hasty;  of  a  bad  disposition. 
Thankful;  to  be  thankful. 


Grateful. 

Ungrateful. 


(per- 


Namgibang  hAyan  (from  bdyan,  town; 
town,  77x7,  other,  and  the  redupli- 
cated ])article  mnu,  in  the  present 
tense,  hence  changed  to  nam/  and 
ing.  Literally,  "from  another 
town"). 

Dt  binyngan  (from  binyag,  to  bap- 
tize, and  dt,  not).  Binyag  is  said 
to  have  been  a  Bornese  (Arabic?) 
word  Ijrought  by  Mohammedans 
to  the  Philippines.  Its  original 
meaning  is  said  to  have  been  "  to 
pour  water  from  above." 

JVauukol  (from  ukol).  Nanukol  .sn 
Dios  at  nauukol  sa  Cesar,  belonging 
to  God  and  belonging  to  Caesar. 

Pabayd. 

Nagkakasald  (from  said).  Walang 
sala,  innocent,  not  guilty. 

Navnnmnrga  (from  brriTga,  fruit,  with 
ma  (?«()  and  reduplicated  first  syl- 
lable of  rout,  which  is  here  soft- 
ened to  111  from  h).  Hindi  namu- 
mum/a,  unfruitful.  Bungahan,  a 
fruitful  tree  or  plant. 

Iha. 

JSagiisd  (from  isn,  one). 

Waking hangdn {lit.,  "without end," 
"endless"). 

Katatapus  (from  tapus,  end,  finish. 
Tajjus  na,  finished  now). 

Wabvig  kamatayan  (lit.,  "without 
death"). 

Maasa. 

Waking  asa. 

Mahayag.     Kahayagan,  publicity. 

Nagkakabukod  (from  bukod,  idea  of 
reservation,  setting  aside,  etc. 
Bnkdan  tiio  ako  nang  daknvd,  put 
two  aside  for  me.  Kabukoran,  res- 
ervation, etc.). 

Malik  im .  Li  him  na  gawd,  secret  work 
or  deed. 

Naaahida  (from  ahala,  idea  of  occupa- 
tion; the  particle »a  (present tense 
of  ma)  and  (/,  reduplicated  first 
syllable  of  root  for  present  tense). 
Abalahin  or  Maabalahin,  a  busy 
man. 

Wala)ig  gavd. 

Magalitan  (from  galit,  idea  of  anger). 

GaJiasd.     Kagahasuan,  hastiness. 
Sinasaldmat  (from  sakhnat,  thanks; 

derived     from    Arabic,     saldinat, 

peace;  safety). 
Nakahdugod  ( from  higod,  gratitude, 

naka,   and   the  reduplicated   first 

syllable  of  root). 
Walang  lugod;  also  malilo. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


71 


Licit;  legal. 

Immaterial;  useless. 
Naked. 

Libidinous;  sensual. 
Asleej),  to  be;  sleepy,  to  be. 


Aged;  venerable;  mature. 

Tired,  to  be. 

Alone;  unaccompanied. 

Companioned;  chaperoned. 

Ignorant. 

Married. 

Unmarried. 

Taxed. 

Exempt. 

Present. 

Absent. 

Ready,  to  be. 

Unready,  to  be. 

Salable." 

Unsalable. 

Valuable. 


Clean;  neat. 

Dirty;  unclean  (as  the  clothes). 

Doubtful. 

Certain. 

Lucky. 

Original. 

Copied  (thing,  etc.). 

Methodical  (person). 

Suitable. 

Unsuitable. 
Orderly. 

Disorderly. 

Profitable  (thing). 

Unprofitable. 

Ornamented. 

Plain;  clear  (as  a  room). 

Manufactured;  made  up. 

Raw;  crude  (as  material,  etc.). 

Woven. 

Spun  (also  thread). 

Plaited  (as  a  mat). 


3/a/?(/(/;als()  "right,"  "straight, "etc. 
Hindi  mutuid,  illicit,  illegal,  etc. 

Walang  gam  it. 

Hubad. 

Mallhog. 

Matulog.  Mahdulng  htigd  kagof  Are 
you  sleepy?  ydtutu'log  bagd  sign? 
Is  he  asleep?  Patidognin  mo  siyd, 
let  him  sleep  (or  tell  him,  or  her, 
to  go  to  sleep). 

Magdkuig.  Aug  maiTijd  magulang, 
the  aged;  parents;  ancestors. 

Mapd</od. 

Nagiim;  Wdlung  kasanid. 

Mag  haKU)nd. 

Hindi  tnadlam. 

Mag  asdua., 

Walang  amua. 

Bumahdyad  nang  bouts. 

Hindi  bumubouis. 

Narito. 

Wald  rito. 

Mahandd. 

Hindi  Jtandd. 

Mag  pagbihi/i. 

Hindi  pagbibili. 

Mahalagd.  Walang  halagd,  worth- 
less. Magkuno  ang  halagd  latof 
What  is  tile  value  (price)  of  this? 
Nagkasisinghalagd,  of  the  same 
value,  at  tlie  same  price. 

Masayd. 

Masano.  Mamuong  damii,  dirty 
clothes. 

AlinlaiTgan. 

Tanto. 

Mapdlad.      Walang  pdlad,  unlucky. 

Nauuna  {irom  vna,  first;  notSp. ). 

Sinalin  (from  sa/in,  idea  of  transfer- 
ring, transplanting,  etc.). 

Maparaanin.  Walang  paraun,  with- 
out method. 

iVnoa.vos  (from  agos);  nauukol  (from 
ukol ) . 

Hindi  ayos.     Hindi  ddpat,  unfit. 

Manyos.  Walang  gulo,  without  con- 
fusion. 

Magido.  Kagulohan,  confusion,  dis- 
order. 

MapakinabaiTijin  (from  pakindbang, 
idea  of  making  a  profit,  etc.). 

Walang  pakindbang. 

Gayak. 

Aliualas. 

Ginaivd  (from  gaicd  and  in). 

Hindi  yari. 

Hinabi  (from  habi,  idea  of  weaving). 

Sindlid  {trovasulid,  idea  of  spinning). 

Salusala, 


72  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Cultivated;  plowed.  Naaararo  (from  SY>.,ararJo,  plow). 

Hindi  naaararo,  unruhiyaieA;  im- 
plowed. 

Open.  Buki'is.     B^d-mn  mo  itong  pinto,  open 

this  door. 

Shut;  closed  (thing).  Piminn.      Pinrlan  mo  ang  flururTj/a- 

ridi),  shut  the  window.  Some  na- 
tives say  KorJiai)  mo,  undoubtedly 
a  corrujition  of  the  Spanish  verl) 
cerrar,  to  close. 

Spread;  extended.  Littag.      XaLdlcdUit,  stretched;    taut. 

Folded;  doubled,  etc.  Tiniklop   (from  iikiop,  idea  of  dou- 

bling). 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJF.CTIVES. 

The  Tagaloo;  adjective,  like  adjectives  of  other  languages,  has  the  three 
degrees  of  quality  to  be  indicated — the  simple  form  (which  is  generally 
called  the  positive),  the  comparative,  and  the  superlative.  Of  course,  as 
in  English,  some  adjectives  are  excluded  from  comparison  ])y  their  mean- 
ing, such  as  those  for  "dead,"  "alive,"  "entire,"  and  some  others. 

The  positive  adjective  is  that  form  discussed  in  the  preceding  pages,  and 
the  comparative  will  now  he  taken  up.  Of  this  there  may  be  said  to  exist 
three  varieties,  the  comparative  of  equality,  that  of  superiority,  and  tliat 
of  inferiority.  In  English  the  first  form  is  expressed  l)y  "as  (adjective)  as 
(noun),  "  the  second  l)y  "er"  or  "more,"  and  the  third  by  "er"  or  "less." 

In  Tagalog  there  are  three  ways  by  which  the  comparative  of  equality 
may  be  expressed.  The  first  is  by  using  the  adverb  para  (variation  paris), 
meaning  "as,"  "so,"  etc.  In  some  cases  "like"  expresses  the  Tagalog 
idea  best.  With  adjectives  or  common  nouns  para  (paris)  takes  the  tie  /7//, 
but  with  names  of  persons,  etc.,  and  pronouns  is  followed  by  what  is 
compared,  which  takes  the  genitive  case.  I^x.:  Parang  rnahuti  (how 
good),  ma]ivti  jKtrang  gatas  (as  white  as  milk),  maitiw  parani/  tiling  (as 
blai'k  as  charcoal),  parang  patan  (like  a  tlead  ]ierson),  parang  hi'niop  (like 
a  beast);  Ako'g  paramof  (Am  I  like  you'l)  i^igiV  g  paris  ko  (he  [she]  is 
like  me),  maliit  paris  ko  (as  small  as  I  am  [small  like  me]),  siga  muhait 
para  ni  Juan  (he  is  as  prudent  as  Juan),  ang  Hog  sa  Xaga^y  malnnang 
para  nang  Pasig  (the  river  at  Naga  [Nueva  Caceres]  is  as  wide  as  the 
Pasig).  With  the  particle  ka  denoting  likeness,  piara  indicates  equality, 
the  particle  being  prefixed  to  the  adjective  in  such  cases.  Ex.:  Para 
niyong  mow/a  tduo,  kabuhnti  (equally  good  as  the.'^e  people").  This  word 
para,  which  as  a  root  denotes  "equality,"  "close  resemblance,"  etc., 
should  not  be  confused  with  theSpanish  word  pani,  meaning  "to,"  "for," 
etc.,  as  the  resemblance  is  purely  accidental.  The  Tagalog  word  is  Ma- 
layan, the  Javanese  word  pacVa  having  su])stantially  the  same  signification. 

The  second  way  of  expressing  equality  with  an  adjective  is  by  means  of 
the  particle  s/»^,  which  denotes  this  idea  precisely.  Ex.:  Iti? y  singhahd 
niyan  (this  is  as  long  as  that),  siycVy  singlaki  ko  (he  is  as  large  as  I  am), 
singlaki  si  Pedro  ni  Juan  (Pedro  is  as  large  as  .luan).  It  will  be  seen  l)y 
the  examples  that  the  object  or  person  compared  takes  the  genitive  case 
and  the  subject  the  nominative. 

The  third  way  of  indicating  equality  with  the  adjective  is  by  means  of 
the  consolidated  particles  ka  and  sing,  i.  e.,  kasing,  the  syntax  being  the 
same  as  with  sing  only.  Ex.:  7/o'//  kasinghaba  viyan  (this  is  a.s  long  as 
that),  si  Pedro'y  kasingtaasni  Juan  (Pedro  is  as  tall  as  Juan) . 

When  equality  is  to  be  indicated  for  more  than  two  objects  it  may  be 
expressed  in  two  ways.  The  first  is  by  prefixing  sing  to  the  root,  of  which 
the  first  syllal)Ie  is  reduplicated.  Ex. :  SinghaJmba  (equally  long  [things]  ), 
singbubidi  (equally  good  [persons  or  objects]),  singtataas  ang  magina  ni 
Bangoy  {Maria)  (Maria  and  her  mother  are  the  same  in  height).     The 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  73 

second  is  by  prefixing  ka.^ing  to  the  root,  the  particle  mag  being  prefixed 
to  knuing,  forming  magkasing.  Ex.:  Mcujkanhigdunong  (equally  wise 
[learned]),  magkasingyaman  (equally  -wealthy  [rich]),  coig  rnngind' ni 
Baiigog  (Maria)  a>/  magkaxingtaas  (Maria  and  her  mother  are  the  same  in 
height  [equally  tall]),  ang  viuiTgd  cabaijoat  ang  maiTiid  kalabao  ay  vtag- 
kaxingdami  sa  hai/an  itd  (there  are  as  many  horses  as  there  are  carabao  in 
this  town ),  iiiai/roon  ka)ig  Ixigd  higdfi  na  kanngdaini  nang  palay?  ( Have  you 
as  much  hulled  rice  as  you  have  of  the  unhulled?). 

Eqn;dity  in  cjuantity  may  also  be  expressed  by  magkapara,  magkaparin, 
or  inagkdpniita/i,  the  two  objects  compared  taking  the  nominative,  and  the 
root  denoting  quantity  having  ka  prefixed  to  it.  Ex. :  Ang  bigds  ko  at  ang 
bigds  iilyd  niagkaj)a)'is  karami  {he  and  I  have  the  same  quantity  of  rice). 
Literally  "my  rice  and  his  rice  is  the  same  in  quantity."  Those  influ- 
enceti  by  Spanish  are  liable  to  say  "his  rice  and  my  rice,"  but  the  other 
order  is  that  of  the  ^lalayan  languages  generally. 

The  com{)arative  by  decrease  is  formed  by  the  use  of  the  adverb  kulang, 
(less),  preferably  with  the  negative  particles  dt  or  hindl,  as  /.-///^(»7  alone 
has  many  times  the  force  of  "not,"  "without,"  "un-,"  etc.,  but,  as  in  every 
language,  the  context  serves  as  the  best  guide.  Ex.:  Ituug  b'tgns  na.  ito'y 
kulang  sa  akin  binili  (this  rice  is  less  than  the  amount  I  bought),  ang  kalagd 
ifotig  cabar/o  if<j'y  kulang  sa  halagd  nang  ibd  (the  value  of  this  horse  is  less 
than  the  value  of  the  other),  ang  maiTgd  kabibao  kulang  nang  dami  sa  marTgd 
(■aba  go  sa  bayan  ito  (there  are  fewer  carabao  than  horses  in  this  town),  ang 
mawjd  Tagalog  ay  kulang  nang  tads  sa  nu:u7ijd  Americano  (Tagalogs  are  not 
as  tall  [literally,  "less  in  stature"]  than  Americans),  ang  kakulaiTgan  (the 
difference  in  price,  the  balance,  the  difference  in  amount,  etc. ). 

AlaiTgan  (lacking,  insufficient,  etc.)  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  kulang. 
Ex.:  Ang  kayatnanan  ni  Capitnn  Tino''y  alanujan  sa  kayanuiuan  ni  Capitan 
Luis  (the  wealth  of  Captian  Faustino  is  less  than  the  wealth  of  Captain 
Luis),  ala)Tij(tn  pa  itung  batd  ito  (this  child  is  not  old  enough  yet). 

There  are  three  ways  in  which  the  comparative  by  increase  may  be 
expressed.  The  first  is  by  the  position  of  the  words  only,  what  exceeds 
taking  the  nominative  and  what  is  exceeded  the  ablative  with  kay  or  sa, 
these  two  particles  expressing  "than."  The  particle  ay  is  sometimes  used 
with  the  nominative  word. 

The  second  method  is  by  prefixing  the  adverb  laid  (more)  to  the 
adjective,  with  the  same  construction  as  the  foregoing. 

The  third  way,  which  is  only  used  correctly  for  comparing  qualities,  is 
formed  by  suffixing  pa  (yet,  still  to  the  adjective)  either  alone  or  in 
conjunction  with  laid.  Ex.:  (1)  Matads  ak6  sa  iyo,  or  akd^ y  matads  saiyd; 
(2)  ako^y  laloug  niatads sa  iyo;  (3)  nuifads  pa  akd  sa  iyo,  or  lalong  matads  pa 
ako  sa  iyo.  All  the  foregoing  may  be  translated  by  "I  am  taller  than  you 
are."  (1)  Payat  ka  sa  dati  (you  are  thinner  than  you  were  before),  si 
Pedro'y  rnasipag  kay  Juan  (Pedro  is  more  industrious  than  Juan),  alln  ang 
lualiksi,  kay  Pedro  ni  Juan/  (Which  is  the  more  alert,  Pedro  or  Juan?);  si 
Juan  (Juan);  si  Juan  ay  mabait  sa  kaniyd;  (2)  si  Juan  ay  lalong  mabait  sa 
kaniyd;  (3)  si  Juan  ay  mabait  pa  sa  kaniyd  (Juan  is  more  prudent  than  he 
[or  she]  is).  (1)  Ang  kabanala'y  mahal  sa  kayamanan;  (2)  lalong  mahal 
ang  kabanalan  sa  kayamanan  (worth  is  more  precious  than  w'ealth),  ?Vo'// 
lalong  magaling  .m  diydn  (this  is  better  than  that),  iydn  ay  lalong  maputi  sa 
dito  (that  is  whiter  than  this),  lahmg  maraud  ang  maiujd  cabayo  sa  maiTiid 
kidabao  sa  bayan  itd,  lu/unit  ang  maiTgd  taga  bukid  mayroon  lalong  kalabao 
sa  ang  maiTijd  taga  bayan;  (3)  there  are  more  horses  than  carabao  in  this 
town,  l)ut  the  farmers  have  more  caraliao  than  the  town  people,  si  Ciriaca 
ay  batd  pa  sa  akin,  nTgunVt  ang  kapatid  kong  bahai/e'y  marikitpa  sa  kaniyd 
(Ciriaca  is  younger  [literally,  "more  of  a  child  yet"]  than  I  am,  but  my 
sister  is  prettier  than  she  is),  siyd'y  laid  pang  kayumangi  sa  kaniyang 
iiuVtmaliit  pa  si  yd  so.  akin  (she  is  still  darker  [more  brunette]  than  her 
mother  and  is  shorter  yet  than  I  am). 

A  laconic  but  correct  form  of  comparison  is  expressed  by  using  pa  after 
a  pronoun,  especially  in  asking  a  question.     Ex. :  Hindi  mo  nadbut,  akd  pa? 


74  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

(It  was  not  reached  by  you;  shalll?).     Jliudt  ko  naaalamcnt;  ikao  paf  (Ido 
not  know  it;  do  you?). 

For  the  negative  form  of  the  comparative,  as  in  such  phrases  expressed 
in  English  by  "without  comparison,"  "there  is  nothing  Hke  it," 
"there  is  nothing  resembhng  it,"  etc.,  Tagalog  has  several  expressions 
almost  alike  in  meaning,  which  are  formed  by  prefixing  ka  to  various 
roots;  the  negative  wald,  (there  is  no  [t])  with  the  tie  lu/  preceding  the 
root  and  its  prefix.  An  is  sometimes  found  as  a  suffix  with  these  expres- 
sions.    Ex. : 

Walang  kahalimbdiia,  without  comparison; 

Walnngkahulmtulad,  without  similarity  (generally  in  speaking  of  objects) ; 
Walang  katulad,  without  similarity;  unlike;  both  the  foregoing  from  tulad; 
Walang  kaliambmg,  without  resemblance;  synonym; 
Walang  kawangis,  without  resemblance; 
Walang  kaholi lip,  without  likeness  (this  phrase  is  rare); 
Walang  kamukhu ,  without  facial  resemblance,  from  muk-hd,  face; 
Walang  kapaniay,  without  an  equal;  referring  mainly  to  height,  length, 
rank; 

Walang  katalamilan,  without  resemblance  (a  rare  expression) ; 
Walang  kawangki,  without  resemblance  (also  a  rare  phrase). 

To  ask  questions  as  to  comparative  equality,  inferiority,  or  superiority  is 
done  in  Tagalog  with  ga  (how)  prefixed  to  alin  (which),  or  arto  (what), 
in  conjunction  with  ka  prefixed  to  the  root  of  the  quality.  With  many 
adjectival  roots  ga  and  ka  thus  serve  to  show  that  the  degree  of  the  quality 
is  the  subject  of  inquiry.  Ex.:  Gaalin  kalayof  (About  how  far  is  it?); 
Gaanong  kalakif  (About  how  large  is  it?);  Gaanong  kahabaf  (About  how 
long  is  it?) ;  Gaalin  kaputif  (How  white  is  it?) .  The  answer  may  be  given 
with  the  same  construction,  prefixing  ga  to  a  demonstrative  pronoun  or 
a  noun,  as  the  case  may  be,  but  if  an  adjectival  root  be  used,  it  should  be 
prefixed  by  ka.  Ex.:  Gaito;  gauito  (like  this);  ganq/d)i  (like  that); 
gagatas  kaputi  (as  white  as  milk);  ganilong  kalaki  (about  as  large  as  this); 
ganoong  kahabd  (about  as  long  as  that).  Gaya  is  a  variation.  Ganga, 
another  form,  is  generally  used  to  indicate  plurality.  Ex.:  Ganga  nito 
kalaki  (about  as  large  as  these);  ganga  niydn  kaliabd  (about  as  long  as 
those).  The  noun,  pronoun,  or  adjective  compared  sometimes  takes  the 
nominative  and  sometimes  the  genitive  in  these  answers.  Ga  and  its  vari- 
ations may  be  said  to  express  likenes.'^,  and  is  but  an  offshoot  of  ka.  In 
many  cases  na  is  also  inserted  in  the  sentence.  Ex.:  Gaaling  na  gaito 
kaonli?  (How  small  is  it,  like  this?).  The  letter  n  instead  of  i7g  is  used  in 
some  phrases.  Ex.:  Gnnnn  dkin  (that  which  belongs  to  or  affects  me); 
ganan  inyo  (that  which  affects  you),  etc. 

THE  SUPERLATIVE. 

The  superlative  degree  of  the  adjective  may  be  divided  into  the  simple 
and  the  absolute  forms.  The  first,  usually  expressed  in  English  by  the 
use  of  the  adverbs  "very,"  "extremely,"  "excessively,"  "exceedingly," 
"surpassingly,"  etc.,  is  expressed  in  Tagalog  by  the  folloAving  adverbs: 

(1)  Lnbhd,  very,  very  much,  exceedingly. 

(2)  Masdkit,  extremely,  exceedingly,  hard    (as  in  the  phrase,   "to  rain 

hard").  Distinguished  by  difference  in  accent  from  ?jia.s«A(7,  (ill). 
This  adverb  is  used  more  with  verbs  than  with  adjectives.  In  some 
places  sadyd  has  the  sense  of  "very;"  ex.,  sadyang  linis  very  clean. 

(3)  Di  sapala,  extremely,  exceedingly,  from  di,  not,  and  sapala,  humble, 

unworthy,  the  idea  of  the  adverb  being  that  of  plenty  or  sufficiency. 

(4)  Di  hdmak,  extremely,  from  di,  not,  and  hdiiKik,  vile,  worthless,  mean, 

the  whole  idea  being  "not  paltry,"  "not  mean." 

(5)  Dipalak,  far,  widely. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  75 

(6)  Labis,  too,  too  jmich.     This  adverb  has  sometimes  a  sHght  idea  of 

craft,  cunning,  or  slyness. 

(7)  Toloo,  truly,  exactly,  precisely. 

The  adverbs  formed  with  dt  always  follow  the  adjective  in  the  sentence, 
but  the  simple  adverbs  may  either  follow  or  precede  the  adjective. 
Ex.: 

dl  mpala. 
dt  liamak. 

He  (she)  is  very  old  (extremely,  etc. ) :  j  (  llhht'^' 

(a his. ' 


totuo. 


or 


Lidilid  \ 

Labis    >siyd  matandd:  He  (she)  is  very  old  (too,  truly,  etc.). 

lotoo    J 

The  following  phrases  will  illustrate  the  various  idiomatic  uses  of  the 
adverbs  with  the  adjective:  (1)  Lubhd  aiuj pagkapagal  ko  (I  am  very  tired; 
lit.,  "very  great  is  my  fatigue"  );  (^)  ngani/lalo}ig  masdkit  ang  kaij  Pedro 
(That's  so,  but  Pedro  is  still  more  tired;  lit.,  "but  more  excessive  is  [that] 
of  Pedro  "  ) ;  Iniibig  kutang  masdkit  (  We  like  you  very  much ) ;  Finagsisisdian 
silang  uiasdkit  (They  are  repenting  deeply );  (3)  Maijamandtsapalasiyd  (He 
is  exceedingly  wealthy  [very  rich]);  (5)  Ungiinddn  naitg  labis  (It  rained 
too  much);  (verbalized)  N(ip<(k((labls  ang  kabntihan  mo  (You  are  entirely 
too  good  [honest]);  Linabisaa  ang  idos  ko  sa  inyo  (You  exceeded  your  or- 
ders; youdidmore  than  I  told  you  todo);  (6)  Tinolot6oniydangwikd(He 
is  complying  with  his  word  [verbalized  form  of  fuino]). 

The  absolute  superlative  degree  of  the  adjective  (in  the  singular  number) 
which  is  made  in  English  by  the  suffix  "est"  and  by  the  adverb  "most" 
is  generally  exjjressed  in  Tagalog  by  repeating  the  entire  adjective,  whether 
it  be  simple  or  compound,  by  means  of  tlie  jjroper  tie,  which  is  deter- 
mined by  the  ending  of  the  adjective.  P^x.:  Mabutlrig  niabidi  (best);  via- 
samang  niasaiiid  (worst);  bawd  na  banal  (most  virtuous);  ntasipag na  vta.4- 
pag  (most  diligent);  nailai/,  va  nialial  (dearest,  most  pi'ecious);  ma)niting 
mapuli  (whitest,  very  white);  maltitii  na  viaitim  (blackest,  very  l)Iack). 

The  plural  of  such  superlatives  as  the  foregoing  is  formed  by  using  the 
particle  inaiTijd  with  tho.se  formed  from  simple  adjectives,  and  either  with 
■iiiaiajd  or  the  reduplication  of  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  with  those  com- 
pounded with  nia,  the  superlatives  thus  formed,  either  in  tiie  singular  or 
plural,  generally  being  printed  as  two  words  in  order  to  avoid  unnecessary 
length  and  also  to  distinguish  more  clearly  from  some  diminutives.     Ex.: 

The  dearest  [persons  or  ol^jects  understood]  {a)ig  manga  malud  iia  malial). 

The  best  [persons  or  objects  understood]  {ang  maiTgd  mabiding  mabuli; 
ang  mabubnting  mabubtdi). 

The  worst  ( persons  or  things  understood ) ,  ang  manga  masamang  masamd; 
ang  masasamang  masasamd. 

The  bravest  men  {ang  niaiTgd  matdpang  na  matdpang  na  Udaki;  ang  matatd- 
jjang  na  matatdpang  na  laluki). 

The  ugliest  animals  {ang  maiTgd  pangit  na  pangii  n«  lidpop). 

What  may  be  called  the  relative  superlative  degree,  made  in  English  by 
atlding  the  expression  "of  all"  or  a  similar  phrase  to  the  superlative,  is 
formed  in  Tagalog  by  adding  the  words  sa  Udiat  (of  all),  sa  kanild, 
(among  them),  etc.  Ex.:  Sino  sa  kanild'y  ang  lalong  matdpang.''  (Which 
of  those  two  is  the  braver?) ;  Sino  sa  kanild'y  ang  matatdpang  na  ni((tatdpa)ig/ 
(Which  of  them  is  the  bravest?);  Ang  maliit  sa  laJiat,  si  yd' y  matdpang  sa 
lahat  (The  smallest  of  all;  he  is  the  bravest  of  all). 

Superlatives  are  also  formed  by  prefixing  ka  and  suffixing  an  {han)  to 
reduplicated  bisyllabic  words,  and  in  the  same  manner  with  polysyllabic 
words,  in  the  latter  case  only  the  fii-st  two  syllables  being  reduplicated. 


76  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Ex.:  Katamistamisan  (sweetest),  iroin  tdniis;  kabunalhanxilan  (most  virtu- 
ous), from  banal;  kar/inhagiiiliaaahan  (luos^t  wholesome),  from  ginhaua. 
The  first  two  roots  have  two  syllables  and  the  last  has  three.  This  form 
may  also  be  applied  to  abstracts  formed  with  ka  and  an  [han),  and  inten- 
sities them.  Kx. :  Kaiamisan  (sweetness) ;  katamlstainisa  a  {^\\  guineas  itself) ; 
kalianalan  (virtue);  kabanalbunalan  (virtue  itself);  kulainaran  (laziness); 
kataniarta)iiaran  (laziness,  laziness  itself). 

Verbs  have  a  certain  superlative  form,  which  may  be  mentioned  here 
for  the  sake  of  association.  It  is  made  by  repeating  the  verbal  root  united 
by  nang.  Ex. :  IliiTgl  naiig  IdiTgl  (ask  and  ask  over  again) ;  lakad  nang  lakad 
(walk  and  walk);  "j/es"  nang  "//''■"«"  f"':7  "'ikain  mo  (say  yes  over  and 
over).     This  form  is  also  found  with  nouns,  etc. 

ShX'Tiox  Five. 

THE    XUMEKAUS. 

The  numerals  form  a  small  noun-group  by  themselves,  having  the  three- 
fold character  of  substantive,  adjective,  and  adverb.  While  the  distinction 
between  adjective  and  noun  is  not  so  sharp  as  with  some  other  words,  yet 
it  is  clear  that  the  cardinals  in  Tagalog  are  nouns,  as  they  show  by  always 
preceding  the  noun  affected  that  "of"  must  be  understood.  Thus  limang 
kalabao  literally  means  "five  (head)  of  cattle,"  and  this  holds  good  in  all 
cases. 

In  Tagalog  there  are  four  classes  of  numerals^cardinals,  ordinals, 
adverbials,  and  distributives. 

Tlie  cardinals  are: 


I  sail'/ 


As  in  English,  decimal  numeration,  by  tens,  is  that  used  in  Tagalog  and 
throughout  the  Malayan  family  of  languages.  But  Tagalog  uses  a  peculiar 
form  in  the  numerals  from  eleven  to  nineteen,  inclusive,  which  differs  from 
the  method  followed  in  every  other  language  of  Luzon.  Labi,  meaning 
"adding,"  and  a  variation  of  labis,  is  prefixed  to  the  digits  by  means  of 
the  euphonic  tie  iTg;  jwuo,  ten,  being  understood. 

Eleven.  Labing  im.  Sixteen.  Labing  6nim. 

Twelve.  Labing  dalawd.  Seventeen.  Jjabing  pito. 

Thirteen.  Labing  latlo.  Eighteen.  Labing  walo. 

Fourteen.  iMhing  apat.  Nineteen.  Labing  siijarn. 

Fifteen.  Labing  lima. 

The  multiples  of  ten  below  one  hundred  are  formed  by  prefixing  the 
digit  used  as  the  hiultiplier  to  the  word  pouo,  united  by  the  proper  tie. 

Twent}'.  Dalairang  pouo.  Sixty.  Aninina  pouo. 

Thirty.  Tatlong  pouo.  Seventy.  Pitong  poao. 

Fortv".  Apat  na  pouo.  Eighty.  ]Valong  pouo. 

Fifty.  Limang  jMUO.  Ninety.  Siyamnapouo. 

The  intermediate  digits,  when  used  with  the  foregoing,  are  joined  by 
means  of  't,  a  contraction  of  at  (and). 

Twenty-one.      Dalawang  pono't  isd.      Fifty-five.  Limang  pouo' I  lima. 

Thirty-three.      Tallong  pono't  tatlo.        Sixty-six.  Animnapouo'tdnim. 

Fortv-four.         Apat  napouo't  apat. 


One. 

Lsd. 

Seven. 

Pito. 

Two. 

Dalawd. 

Eight. 

Walo. 

Three. 

Tatlo. 

Nine. 

Siyam. 

Four. 

Apat  (accent  on  first  svlla- 

Ten. 

Sangpouo    (contr.    of 

ble). 

pouo,  "one  ten"). 

Five. 

Lima. 

Six. 

Anim  (accent  on  first  svlla- 
ble). 

' 

TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  77 

The  word  for  "hundred"  is  daaii,  whicfi  has  a  lioinonyin  meaning 
"road."  It  is  always  j)receded  by  the  api)roi)riate  nmlti})Her,  to  which  il 
is  connected  by  the  proper  tie,  d  softeninji;  to  /•  before  7in. 

One  hundred.        Isang  duan;   sang-  Five  hundreth  Limang  duan. 

daan.  Six  hundred.  Aniin  rin  man. 

Two  hundred.        Dalawang  ddan.  Seven  hundred.  P'dong  daan. 

Three  liundred.      Tatlong  daan.  Eight  hundred.  Walong  daan. 

Four  hundred.       Apatnardan.  Nine  liundred.  Siyam  na  rdan. 

Numbers  below  twenty  added  to  hundreds  are  united  with  'I,  the  n  of 
ddan  being  dropped. 

One  hundred  and  one.  Sangddu't  isd. 

Two  hundred  and  eighteen.  Dalawang  dda't  labing  ivalo. 

The  n  is  retained  with  multiples  of  ten. 

Two  hundred  and  fifty-three.  Dutaaaug  ddan  Umang pouo' t  tatld. 

Six  hundred  and  sixty-six.  Anim  na  rdan  dnim  napou<yi  dnim. 

Eight  hundred  and  eighty-eight.  Walong  ddan  iv(durig  pouu't  ualo. 

Nine  hundred  and  ninety-nine.  Sigam  na  rrian  siyam  na  pouo' I  siyam. 

The  word  for  "thousand"  is  libo,  which  is  found  as  ?-(7joand  i-ihu  in  other 
Philippine  languages. 

It  is  governed,  like  dda)i,  by  multipliers  and  suffixed  numbers.  The 
purely  Malayan  numerals  end  with  libo,  those  for  higher  numbers  being  of 
foreign  origin.  Some  higher  numbers  are  said  to  have  Malayan  names,  but 
it  is  doubtful  as  to  whether  their  values  are  definite  or  not.  They  are  noted, 
however. 

One  thousand.  Sanglibo. 

One  thousand  and  eight.  Sanglibo' t  walo. 

Nineteen  hundred  and  five.  Sanglibo  siya)u  na  rda't  limd. 

Two  thousand.  Dalawang  libo. 

Six  thousand.  Anim  na  libo. 

For  "ten  thousand"  the  term  laksd  is  used.  This  is  from  the  Sanskrit 
lakslui  (one  hundred  thousand),  through  the  Malay  sa-laksa  (ten  thou- 
sand), the  latter  people  mistaking  its  value.  LakJi,  with  the  original  value 
of  "one  hundred  thousand,"  is  used  by  Anglo-Indians,  as  in  the  phrase 
"a  lakh  of  rupees." 

For  "one  hundred  thousand"  another  Sanskrit  term  is  used,  also  with 
altered  value.     This  is  yida,  from  the  Sanskrit  ayuta  (ten  thousand). 

"One  million"  is  now  expressed  by  sangpouong  yvia,  or  "ten  one  hun- 
dred thousands."  Gatos  and  a)rgao-a)~gao  are  givtni  in  old  dictionaries  as 
equivalent  to  "million,"  but  the  former  is  the  word  used  for  "hundred" 
in  most  Philippine  dialects,  and  the  latter  seems  to  have  more  the  idea  of 
"uncountable,"  "infinite,"  etc. 

In  expressing  numbers  Tagalogs  sometimes  give  a  round  number,  less 
the  few  taken  off,  as  "three  hundred  and  sixty  less  two"  for  "three  hun- 
dred and  fifty-eight;"  e.  g.,  kulang  nang  dalaivd  sa  tatlong  ddan  dnim  na 
pouo. 

Cardinals  may  be  preceded  by  ang  (the),  when  a  concrete  noun  is  modi- 
fied, as  in  the  j)hrase  Ang  dalawang  pisos  na  ibinigay  mo  sa  akin  (the  two 
dollars  which  you  gave  me). 

Mawjd  i)receding  a  numeral  indicates  the  idea  of  "about,"  ".some," 
etc.,  as  in  the  phrase  maiTgd  pitong  tdno  (about  seven  men).  When  the 
exact  number  is  indicated  H/ruI^u  is  omitted  as  a  sign  of  plurality.  Ex.: 
MaiTgd  tdno  (men,  people);  pitong  tduo  (seven  men,  persons). 

By  reduplicating  the  first  syllable  of  the  cardinal  the  idea  of  "only"  is 
brought  in.  Ex.:  Jisd  (only  one,  alone,  etc.);  dadalawd  (two  only,  only 
two),  etc.  For  greater  emphasis  upon  the  idea  of  limitation  the  number 
may  be  repeated  with  the  initial  syllable  reduplicated.  li,x.:  Jisdisd  (one 
only);  dadaladalawd  (only  two).     The  adverb  Idmang  (only)  may  also  be 


78  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

used  for  this  same  idea,  the  adverl)  foUowinj^  the  cardinal  affected.  Ex.: 
Isd  lamang  (only  one) ;  dalaivd  h'unanrj  (only  two),  etc.  It  will  be  observed 
that  the  rirst  two  syllables  only  of  polysyllabic  numerals  like  c/aZaw-'ti  are 
repeated,  followin<j  the  general  rule  in  Tagalog. 

The  question  "How  many?"  is  expressed  in  Tagalog  by  ildnf 

Tagalog  has  no  abstracts  like  "a  dozen,"  "a  score,"  etc.,  these  phrases 
requiring  roundabout  means  of  expression.  "A  dozen"  may  be  translated 
by  isang  kapisanan  nang  labing  dulawd,  which  literally  means  "a  join- 
ing of  twelve."  The  same  is  true  of  English  abstracts  like  "monad," 
"decade,"  etc. 

"More,"  with  a  cardinal  following,  is  expressed  by  labis  or  higif,  which 
precede  the  numeral  and  are  united  with  it  by  m,  which  expresses  "than." 
Ex.:  Labis  sa  lima,  or  higit  sa  lima  (more  than  five).  Labis  i.s  the  more 
correct,  as  higit  has  an  idea  of  excess  in  weight  rather  than  in  number. 
Kulang  (less)  is  used  in  the  same  way. 

The  indeterminate  numeral  "some,"  "a  few,"  is  expressed  in  Tagalog 
by  il'tn.  With  the  first  syllable  reduplicated  or  Avith  lamang  the  idea  of 
"only"  is  expressed;  as,  Ulan  or  ildn  lamang  (only  a  few). 

"Much,"  "many,"  and  similar  words  are  expressed  by  marami  (from 
dami),  and  "a  great  many"  may  be  translated  by  maramiyig  marami. 
By  making  an  abstract  of  dami  and  prefixing  the  definite  article  of  com- 
mon nouns  is  expressed  "the  most,"  "the  majority,"  etc.  Ex.:  Aug 
karamiliai). 

For  the  meaning  of  the  numerals,  see  the  work  by  T.  H.  Pardo  de 
Tavera,  entitled  "Consideraciones  sobre  el  Origen  del  Nombre  de  los 
Niimeros  en  Tagalog,"  published  at  Manila  in  1889. 

ORDINALS. 

The  ordinals,  which  are  the  numerals  designating  the  place  or  position 
of  the  object  in  some  particular  series,  have  more  of  the  character  of  adjec- 
tives than  have  the  cardinals.  They  answer  the  question  Ikaddn?  (In 
what  order?)  and  are  formed  in  a  very  simple  manner  in  Tagalog  for  all 
numbers  except  "first,"  which  is  quite  irregular,  ika  being  prefixed  to  the 
cardinal.  It  should  also  be  noted  that  the  first  syllable  of  daluwd  (two) 
is  omitted,  as  well  as  the  initial  letter  of  tatlo  (three)  and  dpat  (four) 
when  preceded  by  ika.  "Twentieth,"  however,  is  formed  with  il-« and  the 
entire  cardinal. 

The  ordinals  up  to  "tenth  "  are: 

The  first.  Ang  naona. 

The  second.  Ang  ikalawd. 

The  third.  A7ig  ikatlo. 

The  fourth.  Ang  ikdpat. 

The  fifth.  Ang  iknlimd. 

The  sixth.  Ang  ikdnim  (initial  letter  dropped). 

The  seventh.  Ang  ikapito. 

The  eighth.  Ang  ikawaU. 

The  ninth.  Aug  ika.nyam. 

The  tenth.  Ang  ikapouo;  ang  ikasangpouo. 

In  the  southern  provinces  ang  ikapolo  is  sometimes  heard,  due  to  Bicol 
and  Visayan  influence.  Polo  and  pol-lo  is  also  to  be  found  in  the  dialects 
spoken  to  the  north  of  the  Tagalog  region,  and  this  form  may  be  found  in 
the  north,  but  should  be  regarded  as  extraneous  to  the  language. 

The  following  synopsis  of  the  ordinals  above  "tenth"  will  give  an 
accurate  idea  of  their  formation: 

The  eleventh.  Ang  ikalnbing  isd. 

The  twenty-fifth.  Ang  ikadalawang  pouo^t  limd. 

The  thirtieth.  Ang  ikatlong  pouo. 

The  fortieth.  Ang  ikdpat  na  pouo. 

The  forty-fifth.  Ang  ikdpat  napouoH  limd.. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  79 

The  fiftieth.  Ang  ikalimang  pou6. 

The  sixtieth.  Ang  ikdnim  nu  puuo. 

The  seventieth.  Ang  ikapitong  pouo. 

The  eightietli.  Ang  ikawalong  pouo. 

The  ninetieth.  Ang  ikasiyam  na  pou6. 

The  one  hundredth.  Ang  ikasangdaan. 

Tiie  one  thousandth.  Ang  ikasmiijliho. 

The  one  ten-thousandth.  Ang  ikasatiglaksu. 

Nouns  following  ordinals  are  tied  to  them  according  to  the  ending  of 
the  numeral.  Ex. :  AngikaUrnang  tduo  (the  fifth  person) ;  ang  ikatlong  drao 
(the  third  day). 

In  Tagalog,  contrary  to  what  obtains  in  Spanish,  the  ordinals  are  used 
for  all  days  of  the  month,  and  thus  agreeing  with  English.  Ex.:  Ikaildn 
drao  ngajion  nan  g  bnayig  ilof  (Whatdayof  the  month  [is]  this?);  angikada- 
lawang  pom? t  jnto  ( the  twenty-seventh ) .  Anong  drao  kayd  iTgayon  sa  sung- 
lingof  (What  day  of  the  week  is  to-day?);  Ngai/o'y  viernes  (to-day  is  Fri- 
day). Anongiaonf  (What  year?);  sangliho,  s iyam  na  rda' t  I'nnd  (nineteen 
hundred  and  iive).  Anong  buan  iTgaydn  nang  tann  f  (What  month  is 
this?);  ang  buan  nang  enero,  po  (the  month  of  January,  sir).  And  ang 
panga,lan  mof  (What  is  your  name?);  GHcerio,  po  (Glicerio,  sir).  Angika- 
lauang pamjalan  (The  second  name  [surname]?);  Manalo,  p6  (Manalo,  sir). 
Taga  sadn  ka?  (Where  are  you  from?);  Batangas,  po  (Batangas,  sir). 
Ildn  ka  nang  taonf  (How  old  are  you?) ;  Mayroon  akong  daknvang  pouoH 
limd  (I  am  twenty-five  years  old) .  Sadn  naroon  ang  presidenie?  (Where  is 
the  presidente  [mayor]?) ;  Nariydn  sa  ikalawang  bdhay  (There  in  the  second 
house) . 

Fractions  are  expressed  by  the  use  of  ang  (the)  if  the  numerator  is  one, 
the  denominator  being  the  ordinal  desired,  and  bahagi  (a  part)  following 
the  denominator  either  expressed  or  understood.  Numerals  may  replace 
ang.  Ex.:  Aiig  ikalawang  bahagi  (the  second  part);  ang  ikdpal  (the 
fourth),  etc.  Also  Isang  bahagi  (one  part);  iatlong  bahagi  (three  parts). 
Where  the  numerator  is  greater  than  one  it  is  placed  in  the  nominative 
and  the  denominator  in  the  genitive,  the  two  being  connected  by  nang  and 
the  phrase  followed  by  bahagi.  Ex.:  Tatlo  nang  dpat  na  bahagi  (three- 
quarters);  dalaivd.  nang  iatlong  bahagi  (two-thirds). 

"Half"  is  expressed  by  kalahad,  as  kalahating  tindpay  (half  a  loaf  of 
bread).  The  noun  "a  half"  is  expressed  by  ka'hati,  meaning  generally  a 
a  half-salapi  or  25  centavos. 

It  should  be  mentioned  that  unauna  means  "in  the  first  place,"  and 
when  made  an  al)stract  and  preceded  by  the  definite  article  of  common 
nouns,  as  in  the  phrase  ang  kannaunahan,  means  "the  very  first."  In  like 
manner,  hull  (last),  when  made  an  abstract  in  the  same  way,  as  ang  kahuli- 
hulihan  means  ' '  the  very  last. ' ' 

ADVERBIAL    NUMERALS. 

Adverbial  numerals,  expressed  in  English  by  "once,"  "twice,"  etc.,  and 
answering  the  question  Nakaildn?  (past  tense)  and  Makaildn  (present 
and  future  tenses),  "How  often?",  "How  many  times?"  are  formed  like 
the  ordinals  except  that  maka  is  prefixed  instead  of  ika  to  the  cardinals. 
The  word  for  "once"  is  wholly  irregular.  In  some  districts  these  adver- 
bial numerals  also  express  the  idea  of  "fold,"  as  "twofold,"  "threefold." 
As  with  the  cardinals  the  sense  of  "onlj'"  may  be  imparted  by  redupli- 
cating either  the  first  syllable  of  the  prefixed  particle  or  following  the 
adverbial  numeral  with  Idmang. 

Once.  Minsan,  var.  ninsan    Nine  times.  Makasiyam. 

(rare).  Ten  times.  Makasangpouo. 

Twice.  Makalawd.  Fourteen  times.  Makalabing  dpat. 


80 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Thrice.  Mahdatlo. 

Four  times.     Mithiiapal,  var.  vm- 

bii/Hil  (rare). 
Five  times.      Makalimd. 
Six  times.        Makaanim. 
Seven  times.  Makapito. 
Eight  times.    Makawulo. 


Twenty  times.  Makadalnvuing 

pouo. 
Twenty-tive  times.      M n k adalaivaug 

pniiut  lima. 
One  hundred  times.    Mukasangdaan. 
A  thousand  times.      Ma  k asa  n g  lib  o; 

mukalibo. 


Naturally,  as  in  all  languages,  the  restrictive  form  is  not  used  for  very 
high  numbers. 


Only  once.       Mitninsan. 
Onlv  twice.     Maniakalatrd. 


Onlv  three  times.      Mamakdlntlo. 


In  this  connection  it  should  be  rememliered  tliat  ktiiUnif  means  "  when?" 
used  intemjgativelv. 


DISTRIBUTIVE    X  T.M  EKA  LS. 


These  numerals,  expressed  in  English  with  "l:)y"  between  tiio  numerals, 
as  "one  by  one,"  "two  by  two,"  etc.,  answer  the  question  Ihin  llau  f  (How 
many  at  a  time?)  and  are  formed  in  Tagalog  by  tlie  simple  rei)etition  o; 
the  cardinal  if  bisj'Uabie,  or  the  first  two  syllables  thereof  if  longer,  no 
tie  being  used. 


One  by  one. 

Two  by  two. 

Three  by  three. 

Four  by  four. 

Five  by  five. 

Six  by  six. 

Seven  by  seven. 

Eight  by  eight. 

Nine  by  nine. 

Ten  by  ten. 

Eleven  by  eleven. 

Twelve  by  twelve. 

Twenty  by  twenty. 

One  hundred  by  one  hundred. 

One  thousand  by  one  thousand. 

Nouns  repeated  in  this  manner  acquire  the  idea  of  "  every." 


Isdisa. 
Dcdudalawd. 
Tatlolatlo. 
Aputdpat. 
Limulbna, 
Aniindnim. 
Pitopito. 
Widdicald. 
Sigamsiyam. 
Sangpomngpouo. 
Labilabing  isd. 
Labilabing  dalavxi. 
Da/ado /aircDig  pouo. 
Sangdcisangdi'i'in. 
Sanglisnngliho. 


Every  day;  daily. 
Weekly  (also  every  Sunday). 
Yearly;  annually. 
Hourlv. 


Arao-drao. 

Lingo-lingo. 

Taon-taon. 

0'-<ts-oras  (from  Sp.,  hora). 


The  Tagalog  word  for  "every"  is  tiuri,  which  may  also  be  used. 

Distributives,  answering  the  question  Tigiildn/  (How  many  to  each  one?) 
are  formed  by  prefixing  the  particle  tig  to  the  cardinals,  the  first  syllable  of 
the  latter  being  reduplicated  in  those  greater  than  "four".  The  first  syl- 
lable is  dropped  from  dalawd  and  the  initial  t  from  tatlo. 

One  to  each  one.  TIgisd.  Six  to  each  one.  Tigaanim. 

Two  to  each  one.  Tigalaivd.  Seven  to  each  one.  Tigpipito. 

Three  to  each  one.  Tigullo.  Eight  to  each  one.  Tigwaurild. 

Four  to  each  one.  Tig'ipat.  Nine  to  each  one.  Tigsislyani. 

Five  to  each  one.  Tigidimd.  Ten  to  each  one.  Tigsasangpond. 

These  may  be  also  translated  by  "one  apiece,"  etc. 

Tig  prefixed  to  cardinals  may  also  express  the  stamped,  coined,  or  fixed 
value  of  money,  stamps,  etc.  In  this  case  the  initial  syllable  of  those 
numerals  above  four  is  not  redu})licated.     Xa  is  now  more  generally  ust'd 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


81 


than  tig  for  this  purpose.  Ex.:  Seiiong  ligulawang  centavos  (a  two-cent 
stamp);  salaping  tiglimxmg pisox  (a  tive-peso  bill  or  gold  piece);  tigdalinntng 
■jiouong  pisoa  (a  twenty-peso  bill  or  gold  piece).  It  must  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  Philippine  peso  is  ecjual  to  u  half  dollar  United  States  cur- 
rency, and  that  it  is  the  legal  currency  in  the  islands.  Hence  the  old  de- 
l)atea  over  "gold"  and  "mex."  should  be  relegated  to  the  past. 

In  the  southern  dialect  tig  is  sometimes  used  to  express  the  time  at 
which  something  may  l)e  done  or  has  been  done,  as  in  tigaga  (to  do  some- 
thing in  the  morning);  tighapon  (to  do  something  in  the  afternoon). 

The  particle  num,  prefixed  to  nouns  denoting  money,  weights,  and 
mea.sures,  imparts  the  idea  of  "each,"  "apiece,"  etc.  This  particle  causes 
euphonic  changes  with  some  initial  letters  of  roots,  as  follows:  h  and  p 
change  to  m,  the  final  n  drop))ing  from  the  particle;  initial  c  (k),  and  q  drop 
out,  modifying  n  to  iTij;  s  and  t  drop  out;  d  drops  out  in  most  cases;  initial 
m,  n,  and  i~g  also  dro[)  out,  and  an  initial  vowel  («,  i,  o,  and  u)  modifies 
the  final  n  of  the  particle  to  ?7y. 

The  former  monetary  system  was  founded  upon  the  salapi,  or  half  peso, 
nominally  worth  25  cents  at  a  gold  basis,  and  now  restored  to  that  value. 
Sdldpt  also  means  money  in  general.  The  peiio  of  one  hundred  centavos 
ia  worth  two  salapi.  In  the  old  system  the  salapi  was  divided  into  80 
cuartos,  and  upon  these  the  people  reckoned  their  market  and  other  minor 
transactions.  As  these  values  and  terms  will  linger  for  some  time  to  come, 
especially  in  districts  where  Tagalog  only  is  spoken,  the  following  examples 
will  13 rove  of  use: 


A  peso  each  or  apiece. 
A  lia1f  peso  each  or  apiece. 
A  iialf  (salapi)  each  or  apiece. 
A  real  (  12j  centavos)  each,  etc. 


A  half  re\\  (6\  centavos)  each,  etc. 


Mamisos. 

Manalapi. 

MangahatX  (from  kaJiatl,  25 centavos). 

ManiJcapat  (from  sikdpat,  a  contrac- 
tion of  sa  ikapat,  to  the  fourth  of 
a  salapi). 

Manik-ol6  (from  sikolo,  a  contraction 
of  sa  ikaivalo,  to  the  eighth  of  a 
salapi). 

Mangaliu  (from  aliu). 

Mawjualta  (from  ciialta,  a  corruption 
of  cuarto). 


A  cuartillo  (5  cuartos  or  §0.03125,  or 

P0.0B25)  each,  etc. 
A  cuarto  ( e0.00625,  or  ?=0.0125 )  each, 

etc. 

The  only  measure  of  weight  incorporated  into  Tagalog  appears  to  be  the 
t'lhil  (from  the  Chinese  tael,  which  was  a  very  uncertain  standard).  By 
treaty  the  lutikwan  tael  or  customs  tael  of  China  is  now  3|  ounces  avoir- 
dupois. As  a  monetary  unit  the  haikii-an  tael  varies  from  55  to  60  cents, 
but  is  only  quoted  in  banking  operations  and  is  not  used  by  Tagalogs. 

The  Philippine  taliU  may  lie  regarded  as  slightly  heavier  than  a  troy 
ounce,  weighing  509.75  grains,  the  troy  and  apothecaries'  ounce  weighing 
480  grains,  and  the  avoirdupois  ounce  437i  grains. 

One  tiihil  each.  Mandltil. 

One  pound  Spanish  each.  Manlihrn     (1.014-1      United     States 

pounds) . 
One  kilogram  each.  Mamplogramo  (2.2046  United  States 

pounds). 
One  arroba  (dry )  each.  Mangaroba  (25  lil)ras or  25.36  United 

States  pounds). 
One  "fardo"  each.  Mamardo  (33  Sp.  or  33.475  United 

States  pounds;  used  in  weighing 

toliacco ) . 
One  quintal  each.  MioTgintal  (4arrobas  orlOl.44  United 

States  pounds). 


6855—05- 


-G 


82  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Rice  and  grain  is  sold  bythecaviinand  its  fractionn,  which  areas  follows: 

One  "apatan"  each.  Mangapatan  (0.1981  of  a  pint,  dry). 

One  "chupa"  each.  Mangatang  (4  apatan  or  0.7925  of  a 

pint). 

One  "ganta"  each.  Manalup  (8  chupas  or  3.1701  United 

States  quarts)  (from  salop). 

One  "cavan"  each.  MaiTgaban    (25   gantas  or  19.81  gal- 

lons). 

There  are  8  gallons  to  the  United  States  bushel.  United  States  dry 
measure  is  slightly  different  from  British  imperial.  To  reduce  United 
States  to  British  divide  same  named  measures  by  1.031516,  and  to  reduce 
British  to  United  States  multiply  by  same.  For  common  purposes  use 
1.032,  which  is  close  enough.      Trautu-ine. 

A  "cavdn"  of  rice  weighs  133  "libros." 

One  "picul"  each.  J/«m!A-t<Z(137.9United  Statespounds. 

Two  piculs  constitute  a  "bale"  of 
hemp,  abakd). 

The  metric  system  is  now  official  in  the  Philippines,  and  its  use  is  gradu- 
ally spreading  to  all  sections. 
Among  the  native  measures  of  length  used  W'ith  man  are  the  folloM'ing: 

One  inch  each.  Mananall  (from  sangdali,  which  in 

turn  is  contracted  from  sang, 
' '  one, ' '  and  daliri,  ' '  inch  " ) . 

The  Spanish  inch  is  0.91  of  an  inch.  Daliri  also  means  finger  or  digit, 
and  the  length  of  a  Tagalog  "inch"  almost  exactly  corresponds  to  the 
"digit"  of  the  early  Hebrews,  which  was  0.912  of  an  inch. 

One  "span"  each.  Manangcal  {irom.dangcal,a.'^pRlm" ). 

The  American  "span"  is  9  inches, while  the  Tagalog  dangcal  is  one- 
fourth  of  a  vara,  hence  8.25  United  States  inches. 

One  "vara"  each.  Mamara     (from     vara,    a     Spanish 

yard,  equal  to  33  United  States 
inches,  approximatelv,  and  actu- 
ally 0.914117  of  a  yard). 

One  "braza"  each.  Mandipd  (from  dlpd,  a  braza,  equal 

to  5  feet  5.8  inches  United  States, 
approximately  Si  feet). 

To  express  the  idea  of  "at  such  a  price  apiece"  the  former  monetary 
units  were  used  with  in  {liin)  suffixed  to  the  unit,  of  which  the  initial  syl- 
lable was  reduplicated.  The  article  or  object  of  which  the  price  was  to  be 
denoted  ])receded  the  unit  of  value,  the  two  words  being  linked  with  the 
appropriate  tie,  according  to  the  ending  of  the  first  word.  Ex.:  Pipi- 
sohiii  (at  a  peso  each),  librong  sasalapiin  (books  at  a  half  peso  each),  tind- 
pay  na  sisicapatin  (bread  at  a  real  a  loaf),  iabacong  aaliuhin  (cigars  at  a 
"cuartillo"  apiece). 

These  terms  will  now  onlj'  be  found  used  with  those  people  still  unfa- 
miliar with  the  new  currency,  but  as  these  people  speak  only  Tagalog  as  a 
rule  they  will  naturally  retain  the  old  terms  the  longest. 

The  following  dialogue  fairly  represents  what  may  be  said  in  making  a 
purchase  in  the  market: 

A.  Magkano  bagd  ang  halaga  nitof     (What  is  the  price  of  this?) 

B.  Isang  pisos,  p6  (a  peso,  sir). 

A.  MaJial  na  iotoo  iydn  (that  is  too  dear). 

B.  Hindi  p(jt  mnra  (no,  sir;  cheap). 

A.  Ariong  muraf     (How  [is  it]  cheap?) 

B.  Kayo  na'y  tumauad  (you  set  a  price,  sir). 


TAGALOG    LA.NGUAGE.  83 

A.  Tailong pesetas  ang  ibibiguy  ko  (I  will  give  3  pesetas  [60  centavos]). 

B.  Hindi  pong  mangyayari;  Apat  na  pesetas,  p6  (I  can  not  do  it;  4  pesetas, 
sir). 

A.  Mabtiti  (very  well  [offers  a  peso]). 

B.  Wa/d  akorig  sukll,  p6  (I  have  no  change,  sir). 

A.  Ikdd  ino  mja  sa  am'mg  baliay,  doau  babayaran  kitd  (bring  it  [them]  to 
our  house,  we  will  pay  [vou]  there). 

B.  Maluyoyatdf      (Is  it  far?) 

A.  Hindi,  at  doon  Idmang  sa  may  niarlel  (no,  it  is  there  close  to  the  bar- 
racks [quarters]). 

It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  "magkakano"  is  used  when  pricing 
objects  of  which  a  part  only  is  desired,  such  as  eggs,  bananas,  etc. 
"Magkano"  indicates  that  the  entire  quantity  is  priced. 

The  verbalized  forms  of  the  numerals  will  be  given  under  the  respective 
particles,  as  too  lengthy  explanations  would  be  required  in  this  place. 

Section  Six. 
the  adverb. 

By  the  name  of  adverb  is  distinguished  that  class  of  words  used  to  modify 
the  sense  of  a  verb,  adjective,  participle,  or  other  adverb,  and  usually  placed 
near  what  is  modified,  as  he  writes  icell,  I  readily  admit,  you  speak  correctly, 
very  cold,  naturally  brave,  very  generally  acknowledged,  much  more  clearly. 
(All  but  one  of  the  foregoing  are  from  the  Century  Dictionary.) 

Adverbs  may  be  classified,  according  to  the  same  authority,  as  follows: 
(1)  Adverbs  of  place  and  motion,  as  ]iere,  there,  up,  out,  etc.  (2)  Of  time 
and  succession,  as  now,  then,  often,  ever,  etc.  (3)  Of  manner  and  quality, 
as  so,  thus,  well,  truly ,  faithfully ,  etc.  (4)  Of  measure  and  degree,  as  much, 
more,  very,  enough,  etc.     (5)  Of  modality,  as  surely,  not,  perhaps,  therefore,  etc. 

According  to  P^arle,  one  of  the  most  distinguished  authorities  on  English, 
there  are  three  kinds  of  adverbs,  the  flat,  fiexional,  and  phrasal. 

(1)  The  flat  adverb,  which  is  a  noun  or  adjective  used  in  an  adverbial 
position,  is  not  considered  as  correct  in  books  and  papers,  but  is  to  be 
heard  daily  in  conversation,  as  in  walk  fast,  walk  slow,  speak  loud,  speak  low, 
etc.  In  German,  this  form  of  the  adverb  is  also  literary,  as  einganzschones 
Haus  ( a  wholly  beautiful  house) ;  er  schreibt  gut  (he  writes  well  [lit. ,  good] ). 
Adjecti\es  of  certain  classes  may  be  used  this  way  in  Tagalog,  and  espe- 
cially those  of  manner  or  degree,  such  as  magaling  (well);  masaind  (badly); 
niadalt  (quickly,  briefly),  etc.,  which  are  also  adjectives.  There  are  also 
flat  adjectives  by  signification,  which  are  explained  under  the  section  to 
which  they  l)elong  by  meaning. 

(2)  The  flexional  adverb,  which  is  that  distinguished  by  a  termination 
in  English  and  allied  languages  like  ward,  ling,  long,  meal,  and  ///,  as  in 
backward,  darkling,  headlong,  piecemeal,  and  the  great  number  in  ly,  such 
as  quickly,  quietly,  rapidly,  etc.  Tagalog  has  no  particle  which  thus  marks 
out  an  adverb  from  other  parts  of  speech. 

(3)  The  phrasal  adverb,  wdiich  is  also  called  an  adverbial  phrase,  ia 
greatly  used  in  English,  and  is  to  be  found  in  abundance  in  Tagalog. 
Among  English  examples  may  be  cited  at  bed,  at  length,  by  all  means,  for 
good  and  all,  on  every  side,  etc. 

There  are  also  both  in  English  and  Tagalog  what  may  be  styled  the  ad- 
verbial pronouns,  such  as  yes  and  7io,  together  with  the  negatives  not,  nor, 
and  neither. 

Unlike  English  adverbs  nearly  every  Tagalog  abverb  may  be  made  into 
a  verb  if  the  proper  particle  is  used,  and  the  border  between  adverbs  and 
prepositions  is  very  indefinite  in  some  cases  and  must  be  determined  by 
the  aid  of  the  context. 

As  the  form  and  composition  of  a  word  is  subordinate  to  its  meaning,  the 
Tagalog  adverbs  hereafter  considered  will  be  classified  according  to  mean- 
ing, irrespective  of  form. 


84  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

I.  Adverbs  of  place  and  motion  which  answer  the  question  manf 
"where?"  are  usually  expressed  in  Ta^alog  bysa  followed  by  a  root.  This 
root  sometimes  has  the  expulsive  particle  *  prefixed. 

Where.  Sdan. 

Where?  Sdan? 

Where  indeed?  Sdan  nga. 

Anywhere,  wherever,  somewhere.  Saan  man. 

Evervwhere.  Sdansdan  man.     Sdan  reduplicated. 

Nowiiere.  Sdnn  ma'y  wald. 

From  all  parts,  may  also  mean  to  or  Sa  man  man. 

in  all  parts. 

Where  are  you  from?  Taga  man  knf    Sh/d^'he"  and  .s/7rt 

"  they  "  may  be  used  in  placeof  ka. 

Sdan  may  be  verbalized  with  um  inserted,  forming  Kumnan  (to  be  some- 
where permanently),  and  also  with  ma  (no),  in  the  latter  case  taking  the 
idea  of  to  be  somewhere  either  temporarily  or  permanently,  as  the  case 
may  be.  Ex.:  Nasdan  ung  miibahao  na  Hog?  (Where  is  the  ford  of  the 
river?);  Masasdan  siyd  hagd?  (Where  will  he  be?). 

S'lan  may  be  further  verbalized  by  pa,  in  which  case  "to  go"  is  inherent 
in  the  meaning.  Ex.:  Napaman  siydf  (Where  did  he  go?);  Xapamman 
siyd?  (Where  is  he  going?);  Pamman  siyd?  (Where  will  he  go?). 

Sdan  has  been  corrupted  to  hda)i  in  some  districts,  owing  to  Bicol  and 
Visayan  influence,  the  former  using  haen  and  the  latter  liain. 

Sdan  has  an  entirely  different  meaning  with  pa  following  or  even  alone 
in  some  cases,  expressing  a  negative  idea  similar  to  "not  yet,"  etc.  In 
Ilocano  sdan  is  also  the  negative  participle  "no." 

S 'tan  pa?  a\so  means  "where  then?"  in  rather  a  sarcastic  manner.  With 
di  added  to  scian  pa  an  affirmative  interrogative  meaning  is  expressed,  as 
Sdan  pa  di  totno?  (How  can  it  not  be  true?). 

It  must  also  be  noted  that  in  Manila  and  places  where  Spanish  is  largely 
spoken  that  some  particles  are  used  in  a  different  manner  than  is  the 
custom  in  rural  districts.  Thus,  "Where  are  you  guing?"  is  expressed  in 
the  country  by  sdan  ka  paroroon,  but  in  3Ianila  l)y  sdan  ka  paparoon. 
Other  expressions  of  like  nature  are  Sdan  ang  paroroonan  mo?  in  which 
the  definite  is  used,  and  sdan  ka  nagmnld?  (VVhere  did  you  start  from?). 
Another  similar  question  is  Sdanka  natTgagdling?  (Where  are  you  coming 
from?).  The  answer  is  generally  given  with  .sa  in  the  sense  of  from:  Sa 
Mnlabon  (from  Malabon);  sa  Jmus  (from  Imus);  sa  bdhay  ko  (from  my 
house),  etc. 

There  are  four  simple  adverbs  of  place,  which  have  heretofore  been 
explained  at  length,  and  here  only  .some  idiomatic  uses  will  be  set  forth. 
These  adverbs  are  dini,  dito,  dlydn,  and  dooi}. 

Dini,  meaning  "here"  (toward  the  speaker),  is  verbalized  by  um,  in 
the  sense  of  taking  a  place  near  the  speaker,  etc.  Ex.:  Ihonini  ka  (take 
your  place  here);  dungmidini  ako  (I  am  taking  mj'  place  here^;  dangmini 
ako  (I  took  my  place  here);  dirini  ako  (I  will  take  my  place  here). 

AVith  mag  (nag)  it  is  verbalized  in  the  transitive  sense,  requiring  an 
object.     Ex.:  Magrini  ka  niyang  iindpay  (put  some  bread  here  by  me). 

With  pa  the  idea  of  motion  toward  the  speaker  is  expressed.  Ex.: 
Pariin  ka  (come  here  toward  me).  This  last  form  may  be  further  com- 
pounded with  the  particle  ])a,  definite,  corresponding  to  magpa,  indefinite, 
to  express  the  idea  of  commanding,  requesting,  etc.  Ex.:  Paparinihin  mo 
si  Carlos  (tell  Carlos  to  come  over  here).  "Over  there"  is  expressed  by 
sa  rini. 

Dito,  meaning  "here"  (equally  close  to  both  sj^eaker  and  person  ad- 
dressed), is  verbalized  in  the  same  way  as  dini.  Ex.:  Dumito  ka  (take 
your  place  here) ;  parito  ka  (come  here) ;  pa))arUohin  mo  si  Carlos  ( tell  Carlos 
to  come  here) ;  Piu<tparit6  mo  siyd?  (Did  you  tell  him  to  come  here?).  The 
four  adverbs  under  discussion  admit  thedefinites  of  /  and  an.  That  in  /  is 
compounded  with  ka,  forming  ika,  ikina;  and  //;  may  be  used  when  united 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  85 

with  pa,  the  definite  of  magpa,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  last  two  examples. 
The  future  is  J'dpariritoldn  mo  sii/a'!  (Will  you  tell  him  to  come  here?)  and 
the  present  Fiuaparirito  mo  .uijuf  [Are  you  telling  him  to  come  here?) . 
Reason  or  cause  is  expressed  by  ika,  ikina  prefixed  to  the  adverb  as  a  rule, 
although  "why?"  can  also  be  expressed  by  anof  as  in  Aauo  kn  rilu/  (Why 
are  you  here?).  The  more  idiomatic  way,  however,  is  with  ikina,  as  Ano 
anr/  ikinnparito  mo?  (What  was  the  reason  you  came  here?).  Hun  is  used 
if  the  idea  of  place  is  to  be  made  emphatic,  as  H'lno  huga  ang  ]>inaritoIian  mo? 
(Who  did  you  come  hereto  see?).  "Time"  is  generally  expressed  hy  pa- 
naJio»,  which  also  means  "weather,"  as  Ano't  di  ka  iiaparito  sa  kapanaho- 
nan?  (  Why  tlidn't  you  come  here  in  time?) .  "What"  isexpressed  hy  and, 
as  Xagaaiio  ka  diio?  (What  is  your  business  here?);  Magua)i6  sii/d  dito? 
(  What  is  he  going  to  do  here?);  AnJun  hagdJ  (What  of  that?)  or  (What  is 
there  to  do?);  Ivaan6  ka?  (What  is  being  done  to  you?);  Inuno  ka?  (What, 
was  done  to  you?);  Hindtka  waaano  (nothing  can  be  done  to  you).  Du- 
mito,  with  the  particle  magka  and  its  variations,  signifies  "to  come  here  for 
a  particular  reason  or  cause."  Ex. :  Ay  at  nagkadumilo  ka?  (For  what  par- 
ticular reason  did  you  come  here?);  Aug  ipinagkakadamito  ko'y  si  Cabesang 
Toiiias  (the  "cabeza"  Tom;is  is  particularly  responsible  for  my  being  here). 

The  fh-st  of  these  two  sentences  is  indefinite,  grammatically  speaking,  and 
the  last  definite.  For  their  grammatical  construction  see  the  particle 
magka,  which  is  used  with  this  signification  with  all  four  of  the  simple 
adverbs  of  place  under  discussion.  For  a  tabular  conjugation  of  dito  see 
the  tables  of  verbs.  To  express  simply  the  time  or  reason  for  " coming 
here,"  i  with  pa  may  also  be  used,  although  ikina  is  more  correct.  Ex.: 
And  ang  ipinarito  mo?  ( Why  did  you  come  here?).  The  indefinite  is  more 
usual  with  kailnn,  "when."  Ex.:  Kailan  ka  naparitd?  (When  did  you 
come  here?);  Kahapon  (yesterday). 

Digi'tn,  "there"  (near  at  hand),  has  the  same  construction  as  the  fore- 
going adverbs.     Ex. :  Magdiydn  ka  nang  tubig  (put  some  water  over  there). 

Doon,  there,  yonder,  is  perhaps  more  commonly  used  in  its  various 
modifications  than  the  other  three  simple  adverbs  of  place.  It  may  be 
verbalized  with  um,  pa,  puma,  and  magka  as  they  are,  with  the  same  effect 
upon  the  root.     Fa  and  magka  modify  the  d  to  r. 

Ex.:  Dumoon  ka  (station  yourself  there).  Pardon  ka  (go  there).  Papa- 
rooninmo  si  Carlos  (tell  Carlos  to  go  there).  Pinaparoon.  rno  siyd?  (Did 
you  tell  him  to  go  there?)  Snan  ka  paroroon?  (Where  are  you  going?) 
Some  localities,  notably  Manila,  repeat  the  particle  ]>a  with  the  present 
and  future  of  the  adverbs  of  place;  but  this  is  irregular  and  incorrect.  It 
is  unknown  to  the  early  writers.  Aling  bayan  ang  paroroonanmo?  (What 
town  are  you  going  to?  Lit.  "Which  town  will  be  your  going  place?") 
Ano  ang  ikinaparoroon  mo  sa  Maynild?  (Why  are  you  going  to  Manila? 
Lit.  "What  the  cause  of  going  there  your  to  Manila?")  Ay  at  magka- 
dumoon  ka?  (For  what  particular  reason  are  you  going  there?)  ying  iki- 
naparordon  ko' y  dalauin  ang  dking  kapatid  na  babaye  (I  am  going  there  to 
visit  my  sister). 

Magka  prefixed  to  ddon  alone  means  "to  have." 

Ex.:  Ktmg  magkaroon  sand  ako  nang  maraming  jrdak,  ay  hind!,  ako  mag- 
kakaganito  (If  I  had  plenty  of  money,  I  would  not  be  in  this  fix).  Ang 
pinagkakaroonan  niyd.  ang  Pulacdn  (He  has  considerable  property  in  Bu'a- 
cdn) .  Ang  ipinagkakaroon  niyd  ang  pamana  sa  kaniyd  nang  ind  niyd.  ( He 
[she]  has  plenty  on  account  of  the  inheritance  to  him  [her]  from  his  [her] 
mother.) 

The  foregoing  illustrates  the  indefinite  idea  of  the  third  singular  personal 
pronoun,  which  may  mean  either  "he"  or  "she."  In  English  this  is  con- 
fined to  the  plural,  "they"  indicating  either  sex,  as  Tagalog  sild,  while 
Spanish  distinguishes  by  ellos,  "ellas."  Man  gives  the  idea  with  dooyi,  "to 
be  there,"  "to  have  there,"  magka  indicating  really  "to  have  plenty." 
Ex.:  Bigydn  mo  sild  nang  mandoon  (take  one  of  those  over  there),  isang 
mandoon  (sangddon)  (one  out  of  many  things  over  there);  sa/7rfoo?;r/  lami- 
tang  sukd  (a  small  bottle  of  vinegar);  isang  madoroon  (a  person  who  has 


86 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


plenty).  The  word  may  prefixed  to  doou.  forms  the  well-known  and  much- 
used  indefinite  viayroon,  to  have.  Ex. :  Mai/roon  kaiig  haga,  nurig  tind- 
payf  (Have  you  any  bread?)  Mayroon  kang paroroonan?  (Do  you  have 
to  go  there?)  06  nga,  mayrdon  akong  paroroonan  (Yes,  indeed,  I  have  to 
to  go  there?) .  Mayroon  ka  nnng  Hang  taonf  ( How  old  are  you?  Lit.  Have 
you  of  how  many  years?)  Mayroon  akong  dalawang  pono  (I  am  twenty; 
lit.  Have  I  twenty.)  With  some  suffixed  particles  doon  is  modified  as 
follows:  Doon  din  "(in  the  same  place  there);  doon  sa  iba;  doon  dao  (in  an- 
other place);  sa  doon  (over  there);  sn  doon  man  (anywhere  over  there). 

Many  phrasal  adverbs  are  made  by  the  particle  .sa  which  means  among 
other  things  at  and  in  when  placed  before  a  root.  Among  the  most  impor- 
tant phrasal  adverbs  of  place  with  sa  are: 


In  front;  facing. 


In  the  presence  of;  before;  opposite; 

to  the  front. 
Behind;  back  of. 


Joined  to. 

At  the  edge  or  side  of. 

On  the  other  side  of;  beyond. 


Outside. 
Inside;  within. 


Above;  up. 
Below;  down. 


Sa  iapat;  iapat  sa.  Ex. :  Ilong  hahay 
ay  taput  sa  sdangan  (this  house 
faces  the  east) .  Iapat  has  also  the 
idea  of  setting  out  in  rows,  regular 
order,  etc.,  such  as  trees,  plants, 
etc. 

Sa  harap.  Sa  hdrap  nang  capitun 
(before  the  captain). 

Sa  likod.  Ex.:  An g  manga  bahay  sa 
Ukod  nang  cuartel  (the  houses  back 
of  the  barracks).  Ang  likod  (the 
back) . 

Sa  piUng. 

Sa  tabi;  synonym  sa  s'lping. 

Sa  kabild.  With  mag  the  idea  of 
"both"  is  brought  in.  Ex.:  Sa 
magkabild  (on  both  sides);  and  by 
the  reduplication  of  the  first  two 
syllables  of  the  root  the  idea  of 
"all"  is  expressed.  Ex.:  Sa  mag- 
kabikabild  (on  all  sides).  Napa- 
roon  Slid  sa  kabild  nang  Hog  ( they 
Avent  over  there  beyond  the  river). 
Sa  magkabdd  nang  katauan  (on 
both  sides  of  the  body).  Kabild 
has  also  the  idea  of  "partly"  and 
is  used  idiomatically  when  speak- 
ing of  rice.  Ex.:  Itong  kanin  ay 
kabildn  (this  rice  is  but  half 
cooked ) .  In  speaking  of  anything 
else,  with  the  same  idea  in  mind, 
the  usage  is  quite  different.  Ex. : 
Itong  sisiu  avg  koltild'y  luto't  ang 
kabilu'y  hindi  (this  chicken  is 
partly  cook  and  partly  not). 

Sa  labds. 

Sa  loob.  This  phrase  is  much  used 
to  express  the  idea  of  the  heart, 
speaking  in  a  moral  sense.  Ex.: 
Sa  tanang  loob  (whole-heartedly; 
with  all  the  heart). 

Sa  itdas  (from  tdas  and  expulsive 
particle  ;')• 

Sa  ibatid  (from  babd,  idea  of  low, 
humble,  with  expulsive  particle  i). 
This  word  should  not  be  confused 
with  the  following. 


TAGALOa    LANGUAGE. 


87 


Upon;  on;  above. 


Under;  beneath;  at  the  bottom  of. 
Halfway  (between  two  points). 

In  the  middle. 

Around;  about;  close  to. 
As  far  as;  up  to. 


Sa  ibahao  (from  babao  and  i) .  Ex.: 
Sd  ibabao  nang  bundok  (upon  the 
mountain  [mountains]  ).  Babao, 
with  accent  upon  the  last  syllable, 
means  past,  as  babao  .sa  hating 
gab-i  (past  or  after  midnight).  It 
also  means  "near"  in  some  places. 
Ex. :  Babao  baga  ang  bagan  na. 
atinf  (Are  we  perchance  near  the 
town?)  Malapit  is  now  the  ordinary 
word  used  for  "near." 

Sa  ilalim  (from  Idlim,  root  of  idea  of 
depth  and  expulsive  particle  i). 

Sa  gltiiu.  Ex.:  Nasagitnd  tayo  sa 
paglakad  (we  are  halfway  in  the 
march  [trip  or  journey]). 

Sa  pagitan  (from  gitnd).  Sa  pagitan 
nang  lansangan  (in  the  middle  of 
the  street).  Also  means  "term." 
Ex.:  Walong  bnan  ang  pagitan 
(a  term  [period]  of  eight  months). 

Sa  may.  Ex. :  Sa  may  (cartel  (close 
to  the  barracks). 

Hangan.  Ex. :  Saan  ang  tungo  mo? 
(Where  is  your  trip  to?)  Hangan 
Maynild.  Hangan  dito  (up  to 
here).  Also  has  the  meaning  of 
"until."  Ex.:  Hangan  biikas 
(until  to-morrow). 

Sa  kanan. 

Sa  kaliwd. 

Pahdrap. 

Patalikod. 

Sa  bdhay. 

Sa  bayan. 

Sa  bukid. 

Sa  bundok. 


To  the  right. 

To  the  left. 

Forward. 

Backward. 

At  home;  in,  to,  or  from  the  house. 

In,  to,  or  from  town. 

In,  to,  or  from  the  country. 

In,  to,  or  from  the  mountains. 

These  adverbial  phrases  can  be  indefinitely  increased  by  the  use  of  sa 
with  the  proper  root. 

Toward.  Dako.     Ex. :  Dako  saan  ang  tungo  ni 

Juan?  (Toward  where  is  John's 
trip?)  Dakong  Maynild,  (toward 
Manila) .  Dako  saan  ang  tungo  mo? 
Toward  w^here  is  your  trip?)  Da- 
kony  bayan  ko^y  ang  tmTgo  ko  (my 
trip  is  toward  my  town).  Taga 
sdan  ka?  (Where  are  you  from)? 
Bosoboso,  pd  (Bosoboso,  sir).  Da- 
kong kanan  (toward  the  right). 
Dakong  kaliivd  (toward  the  left). 

Approaching.  Ddpit.     Ex.:     DdpU    Maynild    (ap- 

proaching Manila).  Ddpit  ibabd 
(approaching  the  lower  country). 
Ddpit  sa  iyo  (approaching  you). 
Ddpit  has  also  an  idea  of  "be- 
yond," "on  the  other  side  of." 

II.  Adverbs  of  time  and  succession,  which  generally  answer  the  ques- 
tion kaildnf  (when?),  are  quite  numerous  in  Tagalog,  showing  that  the 
conception  of  time  was  well  developed  for  a  primitive  people,  only  the 
hour  and  its  subdivisions  being  unknown  to  the  language,  except  as  de- 


88  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

rived  from  Spanish.  However,  the  day  was  quite  minutely  subdivided 
according  to  the  position  or  absence  of  the  sun,  and  while  now  generally 
out  of  use  these  terms  are  also  given. 

When?  Kalian f  Ex.:   Ka'ddn  sila  naparitof 

(When  did  they  come  here?) 
KaUan  man  (always).  With  neg- 
ative,   translated   by  never.     Ex.: 

Ka ilan    man Iiindi ( always 

not  or  never).  Kalian  man  siyd'y 
hlitdi  ungmiiniua  nang  cape  (he 
[she]  neverdrinks  coffee) .  Kalian 
pa  man  (no  more),  also  kalkallan 
ma'yhlndi.  Dl  mamakalldn  (many 
time$). 

When  (used  relatively).  (1)  Kun.  Commonly  used  only  with 

present  and  future  tenses,  but  may 
l)e  used  with  past  indefinite  if  ac- 
tion is  represented  as  custoniary. 
Ex.:  Ki(n  dardtlng  aug  capltdn, 
alaniin  vio  ako  (when  the  captain 
comes,  let  me  know  [future]). 
Kun  ako'y  naroroon  sa  Maynlld 
napasusaluneta  akong  malimlt 
(when  I  was  in  IManila  I  often 
went  to  the  Luneta  [past  time  with 
customary  action]).  Kiin  tmcl 
( whenever) .  Kung  mlnsan  (some- 
times).  Kun  is  also  used  as  a 
preposition,  "if".  See  under  "if". 

(2)  Xang.  Used  with  both  definite 
and  indefinite  past  tenses.  Ex.: 
XangalkV  !l  dlndlao  nh/d  kagabi,  wald 
rltd  slid,  (when  he  came  to  vi.sit 
them  last  night,  they  were  not 
here) .  Xang  dnmatlng  slyd  aaka- 
kaln  na  ako  (when  he  came  I  was 
through  eating). 

(3)  Xoon,  niyon,  nlydon.  These 
words  mean  really  "in  those 
days,"  "at  that  time,"  etc.  Ex.: 
Noon  imng  drao  ay  nangyari  ang 
pagbabakd  sa  Imns  (on  that  day 
the  fight  at  Imus  took  place). 
Xoon,  narltd  pa  sa  Mai/inld  ang 
manga  Castila  (while  the  Span- 
iards were  yet  here  in  Manila). 
Perhaps  "then"  in  some  cases 
would  be  the  best  translation. 

Then.  Doon.     Ex.:  Kan  kamaln  ka,  ddon 

maaalaman  mo,  kun  and  ang  kanin 
(when  you  eat  then  you  will  know 
what  you  are  to  have) .  With  jja 
following  ddon  has  an  idiomatic 
use.  Ex.:  Bald  pa'' y  gumagaicd 
nang  ganito,  ddon  pa  kun  lunuiki? 
(A  boy  yet,  and  doing  so,  what 
will  he  be  then  when  grown  up?) 

Always;  constantly  (sometimes  Tuwi.  Ex.:  Tuwlng  tuui  {tavinang 
' '  whenever  " ) .       '  luwi )  mayrdon  kang  ga ud  ( you  have 

something  to  do  always).  Tawing 
sumiUat      ka (whenever      you 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


89 


Never. 

Sometimes. 


Seldom. 


Often. 
Since. 


Ago;  since. 


As  soon  as. 


write ).      As     adjective     tuwi 

means  ' '  every. "  Ex. :  timing  cirao 
(every  day).  In  some  cases  it 
means  "as  lontjas."  Ex.:  Timing 
di  inajioul  aiig  pagkaiauo  (as  long 
as  manhood  is  not  extinct). 

Among  other  expressions  may  be 
mentioned  tixdang  liampai/,  with- 
out end ;  valang  lihtt,  without  fail ; 
iralaiig  tuhaii,  without  stop,  inces- 
santly; valang  tugot,  without  rest. 

There  are  two  expressions  used  for 
"eternally,"  formed  with  the  pre- 
fix magpa  to  a  root  which  is  fol- 
lowed by  man  saan.  Ex.:  Mag- 
patuloy  man  sdav;  and  magpardling 
{dating)  man  saan.  Another 
jihrase  is  magpakailan  man,  or 
magpasakailan  man,  both  of  which 
signify  always. 

Kaildn  man hindt. 

Knng  minsan.  Maminsanrninsan, 
( from  time  to  time ;  now  and  then) . 
^fisandouu  [rarely).  Ex.:  Misan- 
doua  lamang  ang  pagparito  mo 
(your  coming  here  is  rare). 

Bilnra.  Ex.:  BiJiirang tungmataiTijis 
itong  batang  ito  (this  child  seldom 
cries). 

Malim'it.  Ex.:  Malunit  akong  siuig- 
musulat  ( I  write  often ) . 

Tamhay.  Ex. :  Tamhay  kang  nalis 
(ungmal'is)  (since  you  left). 

Mnla.  Ex.:  Muld  kahapon  (since 
yesterday).  The  particle  pagka 
sometimes  denotes  "since,"  as  in 
the  phrase  pagkahatd  ko  (since  my 
childhood).  "From"  would  be 
an  equally  correct  translation. 

Kaniakai  from  ka  and  waka) .  Kama- 
kailang  drao  ( some  days  ago ) .  Be- 
fore a  cardinal  followed  by  drao, 
"day,"  kamaka  indicates  the  num- 
ber of  days  which  have  elapsed. 
Ex. :  Kantakala uu  {day  before  yes- 
terday ) ,  lit. , '  'two  days  ago ;' '  kama- 
kalimang  «coo  (five  days  ago).  Ka 
prefixed  with  jxi  following  a  root 
also  indicates  "since."  Ex.:  Ka- 
hapon pa  (since  yesterday).  Ka 
alone  indicates  past  time,  with 
some  roots.  Ex.:  Kahapon  (yes- 
terday), from  hapon  (afternoon). 
Kagatn  (last  night),  from  ka  and 
gain  (night). 

Sa,  used  adverbially,  denotes  imme- 
diate action,  u.sually  beginning  a 
su))ordinate  clause,  which  refers  to 
a  principal  clause.  Ex. :  Sa  pag- 
kamdlay  niyd  nang  lindol  siyd'y 
tungmakho  sa  labds  (as  soon  as  he 


90 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Now. 


Already. 


Yet. 


Before;  withal;  as  it  may  be. 


Before;  a  while  ago. 


Anciently. 


he  felt  the  eartliquake  he  ran  out- 
side. Sapagmhi  viya  nitong  nuingd 
tvika  ay  na)iiatay  (as  soon  as  these 
words  were  sai(l  by  him,  he  died). 
Pag,  thedefiniteof  «iop',  sometimes 
indicates  this  idea.  Ex.:  Pagsahi 
ko  sa  kanlla  (as  soon  as  I  told  them) . 
Pagka  may  also  have  the  same 
meaning,  as  pagkapagaaral  ko,  mag- 
papasial  ko  (as  soon  as  I  have 
^studied,  I^will  go  for  a  walk). 

Ngayon.  Ng<vj6n  din  (rigiit  now). 
This  is  also  expressed  by  iTi/ayon 
iTgayon.  Xag]>a)ujay6n  or  itagpa- 
kai~gayun{u\)  to  now ).  ^Magpanga- 
yon  (for  the  future).  Ngayong  drao 
(this  day). 

Na.  This  particle  is  in  constant  use, 
and  is  always  placed  last.  Ex.: 
Naparoon  tia  siyci  ( he  has  gone 
already).  There  are  many  other 
uses  of  na  in  Tagalog,  which  will 
be  set  forth  as  they  occur  in  the 
examples. 

Pa.  This  particle,  as  an  adverb,  is, 
like  na,  always  ])laced  after  the 
word  modified.  Ex.:  /sa  pa  (one 
yet);  may  rian  paf  (Is  there  any- 
thing there  yet)?  It  is  also  used 
speaking  ironically.  Ex.:  Ako  pa 
ang  paroroonf  (Will  I  have  to  go 
there  yet?).     Indi pa  (not  yet) . 

Pago.  Ex. :  Bago  kang  biunasa, 
icali.tan  mo  ang  silid  (before  you 
read,  sweep  the  room). — L.  Bago 
pa  (a  while  ago).  Bago,  as  an  ad- 
verb of  time,  always  precedes  the 
verb  it  modifies. 

Kawjina,  variation  kanina.  Kangi- 
nang  langhali  ( beforenoon) ;  kaiigi- 
narig  umaga  (this  morning  a  while 
ago).  Balanain  nio  yamig  sinahi 
kaiTgina  ( go  back  to  what  you  were 
talking  about  before).  [Keturnto 
the  thread  of  your  story.  ]  Kangi- 
kaiTgina  pa  (a  little  while  ago,  a 
short  time  ago).  Ex.:  Kangi- 
kamjina  naritu  did  (they  were  here 
a  short  time  ago). 

Sa  una.  tSa  una  pang  sa  una  (very 
anciently).  Ex.:  Sa  unang  drao 
(in  the  days  of  old).  J/H«a,  which 
always  follows  it.s  verb,  means 
"first"  either  in  time  or  place. 
Ex.:  Mdsok  ka  inuna  (you  enter 
first  [polite  expression]).  Bago 
kumain  ka,  vianhinao  ka  rniina  (be- 
fore you  eat,  wash  first  [i.  e.,  your 
hands]). — L.  Gavin  mo  muna  (do 
it  first  [def.]).     Uintay  ka  muna 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


91 


Formerly;  anciently. 
Afterwards. 


Later;  presently;  by  and  by. 


At  once;  immediately. 


At    once;    immediately;    suddenly 
abruptly. 

Instantly;  at  once. 


Instantly;  like  a  flash. 


Suddenly;  in  a  moment. 


Offhand;     suddenly.      (Used    with 

verbs  of  doing  and  speaking. ) 
After  beginning;  upon  starting,  etc. 


(M'ait  first  [indef.]).  Mima,  used 
with  a  pronoun  without  a  verb, 
comes  first,  and  governs  the  nomi- 
native. Ex.:  Mima  knyo  (you 
first);  muna  ka  na  (you  ahead). 

Sa  dati. 

Sukd.  Ex. :  Ginamt  ang  PaiTijinoon 
Dios  ang  lawjit,  sakd  ajtg  litpa  (the 
Lord  God  made  the  Heavens, 
afterwards  tlie  earth).  Bib.  Na- 
taud  siyd  (she  laughed);  at  sakdf 
(and afterwards?)  L.  Sukarrtsakd 
(long  afterwards).  Manakanakd 
(after  a  long  delay).  Nagsasakd- 
sakd  (one  who  is  dilatory  in  his 
work  or  duties). 

Maniayd.  Ex.:  'Svsdlat  akd  maviayd 
(I  shall  write  by  and  by). — L. 
Mamaynvg  hdpon  (later  in  the  af- 
ternoon). Mamayaniayd  (onetime 
or  another,  little  by  little).  Ex.: 
Itu'y  minamayamayd  ko  (I  did  this 
little  by  little).  Magmayd  (to  do 
anything  little  by  little).  Mugpa 
imparts  the  idea  of  waiting  to  this 
root  and  its  combinations.  Ex.: 
Nagjjapamayamayd  ako  (I  am  go- 
ing to  wait  a  little  while). 

Tambhig.  This  word  is  out  of  use  in 
Manila.  Ex.:  Kumain  ka  lambing 
[indef.];  tavibiiTgin  vio  kumain 
[def.]  (eat  at  once).  Tambingin 
mong  kunin  ( take  it  at  once) ;  itam- 
hing  mong  ibigaj/  (give  it  at  once). 

Agad.  Ex.:  Agarin  mong gaivin  {do 
it  at  once).  Commonly  used  in 
Manila. 

Alipala.  Ex. :  Alipala  nagdlit  siyd 
(he  became  angry  at  once).  Also 
means  "one  by  one"  in  some 
places.  Ex.:  Alipala. 'taking  kunin 
(I  will  take  them  one  by  one). 

Kagiat.  Ex.:  Kagiat  nagtagibulag 
siyd  sa  aking  maid  (like  a  flash 
he  disappeared  from  my  view;  he 
was  out  of  sight  instantly ).  Tagi- 
bulag,  idea  of  disappearing  or  be- 
coming invisible. 

Kaginsaginsa  ( from  ginsa,  repetition 
of  root  and  prefix  ka).  Varia- 
tion kahinsahivsa.  KaaJamalam 
sometimes  means  suddenly  (from 
alam  reduplicated,  and  prefix /;o). 

Karakaraka. 

Kapag  .      Ex. :    Kapagkain  ko 

(after  I  commenced  to  eat).  Ka- 
pagpagdral  ko  (after  I  began  to 
study). — L.  Kapagdaka  (from  the 
beginning),  syn.  kapagkoudn. 


92 


TAGALOQ    LANGUAGE. 


After  fininishing;  upon  finishing. 


Until;  while. 


While;  in  tlie  meantime. 
Early;  soon. 


Late;  tardy. 


Yesterdaw 

Last  night. 

To-day, 

To-morrow. 

Midday;  noon. 


To-morrow. 


Midnight. 

The  ancient  Tagalog  divisions  of 

Cry  (crow)  of  the  chicken. 
Commencing  to  be  light. 
Breaking  of  day. 
Becoming  morning  now. 


Kupnr/ka .     Kapagkapngdral  ko 

(after  I  had  fini.^^hed  studying). — 
L.  Kdpagkardka  (from  the  begin- 
ning; since  time  eternal). 

Hangan.  Ex.:  Hangdn  hukas  {xrntW 
to-morrow) .  Hangdn  nahuhuhag 
sigd  (while  he  [she]  is  living). 
Bagknti  also  means  "until". 

Sa  iiniiitala. 

Miutgd  (from  aga,  morning).  Ex.: 
Magtqion  kcmg  uuiaga,  knng  dniiid- 
ting  atig  drao,  houag  kang  i~gnma- 
patTijapa  (get  ready  early,  so  when 
day  breaks  you  will  not  be  grop- 
ing around  looking  for  anything). 
Ngapa,  root  of  "to  look  around 
in  haste  for  something". — T.  P.,  3. 

Htili.  Ex.:  Xahidi  siijd  (he  was 
late).  Ang  huling  drao  (the  last 
day). 

Kahapon.  Kahapon  sa  hapon  (yes- 
terday afternoon). 

Kagah'i. 

Ngayon  drao. 

Bukas.  Bukus  sa  aga  (to-morrow 
morning ) . 

TangJiaU  (evidently  from  ]\Ialay, 
tanga  ari,  with  the  same  meaning) . 
Ex.:  Anong  lioras  ang  idindting 
niydf  (What  time  [hour]  did  he 
[she]  come  [arrive]?)  Ang  idi- 
ndting vigd  ang  tanghuU  (he  came 
[arrived]  at  midday  [noon]). 
Magpukatangliall  (to  wait  until 
noon).  Ang  ipinagpokuiangliaR 
(the  cause  of  having  been  delayed 
until  noon ) .  MananghaU.  ( to  work 
or  eat  at  noon) .  A  ng  pananghaiian 
(what  done  or  eaten  at  noon). 
But  nununigludi,  with  acute  accent, 
means  to  travel  at  midday. 

Bukas.  Ang  kabukasan  (the  follow- 
ing day).  Walang  buhukasin 
(without  care  for  the  morrow). 
Ex. :  Bukas  kung  makalipas,  sa  lingo 
hung  niakala  in  jias  {to-morrow  when 
passed,  on  [Sunday  when  gone). — 
T.  P. ,  1 60.  Really  means  ' '  to-mor- 
row and  to-morrow  and  to-mor- 
row," Shak.,  when  there  is  no 
reason  to  beheve  that  it  is  intended 
to  do  anything.  Bukas  is  the  root 
of  the  verb  "to  open,"  and  is  only 
distinguished  by  the  accent. 

Haling  gahi. 

the  day  were: 

Tu)igmikim  ang  manuk. 
Magniamaraling  drao. 


Magniamaraitng  ai 
Bukang  liwagway. 
Magumaga  na. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  93 

Morning  now.  Umaga  na. 

Day  now.  Arao  na. 

The  sun  is  rising  now.  Sisilang  na  ang  arao. 

Risen  now.  Swupnilang  n<i. 

A  little  up  now  (the  sun).  Matluftxt/i'is  nn. 

About  9  a.  m.  IpaiTghTj/illug  tnumtk  (lit.,  "egg  laying 

of  the  hen"). 
About  10  a.  m.  Mnsaxaoli  na  ang  arao  (lit.,  "return 

now  of  the  sun"). 
Midday;  noon.  Tangha/l. 

About  half  past  12.  Bagomj  nakding  ang  arao  (lit.,  "the 

sun  inclines  again" ). 
About  1  p.  m.  Lampds  na  (lit.,  "past  now"). 

About  5  p.  m.  Hampasin  tikhi  ang  arao  (lit.,  "to  be 

touched  by  the  'tiquin'   or    pole 

used  by  casco  men  "  ). 
About  sunset.  KauHin  palacol  (lit.,  "to  be  caught 

by  an  ax  " ) . 
Sun  is  beginning  to  set.  Bagong  svsnksuk  ang  arao. 

Set  now.  Lungmulmgna.    Another  expression 

is   lungmunod  na  (lit.,  "drowned 

now"). 
Between  daylight  and  dark.  3fasilim  na.     Also  takip  silim. 

Night  now.  Gabi  na. 

Midnight.  Kahoong  gabi.     The  usual  word  at 

present  is  hating  gabi. 

The  following  adverbs  of  time  are  also  used  in  Tagalog: 

Hourly.  Oras-oras  ( from  Sp. ,  Aora,  "hour"). 

Daily.  Arao-arao. 

"Weekly.  Lingo-lingo    (from    lingo,    "week," 

which  also  means  "Sunday,"  and 
is  derived  from  Sp.,  Domingo, 
"Sunday"). 

Monthly.  Buan-buan  (irombuan,  "month  and 

moon  " ) . 

Yearly.  Taon-iaon  (from  toon,  "year"). 

Continually.  Parati.     \'erbalized,  this  word  has 

the  idea  of  "perseverance,"  and 
in  the  phrase  magparating  man 
sa an  means  "eternally."  A  syn- 
onym for  parati,  in  the  sense  of 
"continually,"  \spalagi. 

Some  day.  Baking  arao. 

The  particle  maka,  in  addition  to  its  meanings  as  a  verV)al  particle,  sig- 
nifying power,  ability,  cause,  etc.,  indicates  completed  verbal  action  with 
verbs  of  doing,  saying,  etc.,  translated  by  the  word  "after"  with  the  verb. 
Ex.:  Makayari  ni'to'y  paroon  ka  (alter  you  do  this,  go  there). 

III.  Adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  which  generally  answer  the  ques- 
tion maanof  "how?"  are  numerous  in  Tagalog,  many  adverbs  of  manner 
being  the  corresponding  a<ljectives  used  adverbially,  especially  those 
compounded  with  ma.  Not  all  mn  adjectives  can,  however,  be  so  used, 
and  neither  can  adjectives  which  are  roots  by  themselves  be  used  as 
adverbs.  Thus  adjectives  Wke  mnnnnnig  (wise),  mabait  (prudent,  etc.), 
ulul  (crazy)  are  not  used  as  adverljs  in  Tagalog. 

How?  Maanof     'E.:s..:  Maano  kaydf     (How 

are  you?)  Magaling  (well). 
Maann  ang  ama  ninydf  (How  is 
your  father?) 

So;  thus;  in  this  way.  Ganito  (ivom  diti'>) . 


94 


TAGALOQ    LANGUAGE. 


So;  thus;  in  that  way. 

So;  thus;  in  that  way. 
Like  (requires  genitive) 


thus. 


Like;  as;  so. 

How  large;  how  much  in  extent? 


Intentionally;  purposely. 


Voluntarily;  willingly. 


Ganiy6n  (from  diyun).  Gumaniydn 
(to  act  in  that  manner). 

Oanoon  (from  doon). 

Gay  on  (from  yaon).  Gumayon  (to 
act  in  that  way).  Ex.:  Gayon  ni 
Pedro  si  Juan  (Juan  is  like  Pedro) . 

Gaya. 

Gaal'i.n?  Ex.:  Gaal'mkalayo?  (How 
far?  [about]).  Isang  lioras,  j)6 
(one  hour,  sir.) 

Ga  has  been  quite  fully  explained  under  the  comparative  of  adjectives, 
to  which  the  reader  is  referred.  Among  some  examples  may  be  quoted 
ga  huto  ang  loob  mo  (your  heart  is  like  stone),  and  gaiioJdn  mo  (make  it 
like  this).  "Both  alike"  is  expressed  by  kapoua,  as  may  be  seen  by  the 
examples:  sauahi  mo  kapoua  silang  dalawa,  (prohibit  them  both  alike); 
ang  kapoua  mo  tauo  (like  you,  a  person  [fig.,  your  "neighbor"]);  ako 
wari  kapoua  mo,  walang  bait/  (Am  I  perhaps,  like  you,  without  judg- 
ment?) 

Paksd.  Ex. :  Pinaksd  nild  (they  did 
it  intentionally).  Syn.,  sadiyd. 
Another  word  is  tikis.  Ex.: 
Tinikisnild  (they  didit  purposely). 

Kusct.  Ex.:  Kinusd  bagd  nii/daf 
(Did  he  [she]  do  it  wilhngly?) 
Kinusd  niya  (He  [she]  did  it  wil- 
lingly). With  verbs  kusd  follows 
the  same  construction  as  to  the 
particles  as  do  the  verbs.  Ex.: 
Kusain  mong  tauagin  siyd  (call 
him  purposely,  i.  e.,  do  not  for 
get  to  call  him).  I  kusd  mong  ita- 
pon  ito  (throw  this  out  purposely, 
i.  e.,  you  should  have  thrown 
this  out  yourself).  Pagkusaan 
mong  bigydn  si  Juan  (give  it  to  John 
voluntarily).  Kusd  is  intensified 
by  reduplication.  Ex.:  Waldkang 
kusakusang  gumawd  nang  anoman 
( you  do  not  do  anything  with  the 
least  willingness). 

Sa  iiilitan  ( from  pUit ) .  Ex. :  Pilit  na 
akiVyjwroon  ( I  am  going  perforce). 

Bukod.  Ex. :  Bukod  siyang  natduag 
(he  was  [has  been]  summoned 
especially).  Bukod  ka  sa  lahat 
(you  are  the  only  one  among  all). 
Marami  man  ang  ginoo'y  bukod 
mayaman  si  Capitan  /yM/s  (there  are 
many  "principales,"  but  the  only 
rich  one  is  Captain  Luis). 
Tawjt  is  sometimes  used  in  this 
sense. 

Akbay,  var.  agbay;  agahay;  agapay. 

Sabay.  Ex. :  Ang  lalaki  kasabay  nang 
bayabe  (the  man  as  well  as  the 
woman,  or  the  male  as  well  as  the 
female). — L. 

Sinasandopikd  (from  sandopikd,  idea 
of  punishing  another). 


By  force. 
Especially;  only. 


As  well  as,  etc. 

As  well  as;  conjointly. 


Hurriedly  or  more  quickly  (said  to 
be  applied  only  to  whipping). 


TAGALOG    LAIS au AGE. 


95 


Quickly;  hastily. 


Except;  besides. 


Except;  excuse  me;  by  permission. 


Hardly;  scarcely. 
Scarcely;  hardly. 


Nearly;  almost. 

Accordingly. 
Agreeably. 

Inside  out. 

Upside  down;  reversed. 

Slowly;  smoothly;  noiselessly. 


BigM.  Ex. :  Kamatay  siyang  hiyld 
(he  died  quickly). — L.  Verbal- 
ized .  Ex.:  lit  (/la  in  mo  ang  lulol  mo 
(hasten  [abbreviate]  your  account 
[or  story]). 

Liban.  Ex.:  Lihan  sa  iy6,  walang 
ibang  makaparoroon  (except  you, 
there  is  no  other  person  who  can 
go  there) .  Libdn  sa  iyo  ang  muha, 
ay  dill  ko  ibibigay  (except  that  you 
are  to  be  the  one  taking  it,  I  should 
not  give  it). 

Tabi.  Ex. :  Tahi  p6,  ako'y  dardan 
(excuse  me  [for  going  before  you, 
for  leaving  first,  etc.  ] . )  This  is  the 
shout  "cocheros"  use,  7abi!  It 
literally  means  thus:  "Aside." 
Tabi  is  also  used  for  a  polite  cor- 
rection or  contradiction:  Singtabi 
sa  iyo,  hindi  gay  on  {yon  will  pardon 
me,  but  it  is  not  just  like  that). 
Tabiltan,  refuse  heap,  rubbish 
heap,  etc. 

Bahagyd,  var.  bahagid.  Ex. :  Ba- 
hagid  na  makasiya  (it  is  hardly 
sufficient). — L.  A  synonym  is 
btdinyd. 

Bihird.  Syn.  ara;  dat-ha.  Ex.: 
Datlia  kong  inabutan  (I  scarcely 
reached  it).  Bihird  also  means 
"seldom."  Ex.,  as  "hardly:" 
Binibihii-d  ko  na  ang  nagsipai'ito  (I 
think  scarcely  anyone  has  come 
here  yet).  Bihirang  dt  iiaparoon 
(scarcely  anyone  was  not  there); 
i.  e.,  nearly  everyone  was  there). 
Mahina  pa  siyd^y  bihirang  makald- 
kad  (she  [he]  is  weak  yet,  and  can 
hardly  walk  [is  hardly  able  to 
walk] ).  Bihird  is  verbalized  with 
mag andmagka.  Ex.:  Pagbihirain 
mo  ang  kaiiin  (change  the  food). 
Nagkffkabihird  sild  nang  pagda- 
ramit  (they  differ  in  their  manner 
of  dressing). 

Hdlos.     Ex.:  Halosnamataysiyd{h.e 
[she]  almost  died) . 
Ay  on. 

Alinsunod  (from  sunod,  to  follow, 
obey). 

Baliktad.  Ex. :  Baliktad  ka  niydn 
(indef. );  baliktarin  mo  iyan  (turn 
that  inside  out). 

Touarik  (from  tou'ad).  Syn.  touandik. 
Ex.:  Touarik  na  bantd  (light- 
headed; injudicious). 

Marahan  (from  dahan).  Marahan 
dahan  or  dahan  dahan,  very  slow- 
ly. Dumahan,  to  go  away  slowly. 
Magdahan,  to  go  slowly.  Magpa- 
karahan,  to  go  very  slowly.     Ex. : 


96 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Well. 

Carefully:  in  an  orderly  maimer. 


Badly. 

Hard;  roughly;  yigorously. 


Briefly;  quickly. 


Strongly. 


Magpakarahan  hang  lumdkad  (go 
very  slowly  [indef.]).  Pakara- 
hanin  mo  ang  pagJiila  (throw  it 
deliberately  [def.]).  Mapakara- 
lian,  to  go  yery  smoothly;  slowly, 
etc.  Ex.:  X'tpakaraluoi  )ia  (it 
has  slowed  up  already;  it  has 
quieted  down  already,  etc.). 
There  is  also  a  definite  with  an. 
Ex.:  Dnhanan  mo  iijcmg  gauu  mo 
(do  that  work  quietly,  etc. ).  Met. 
adject.  Ex. :  Marahan  ang  looh 
niyc'i  (he  has  a  magnanimous 
heart),  hmt  inot,  yery  slowly; 
"little  by  little"  is  not  much  in 
use.  LouG)/  louag,  little  by  little, 
is  about  equal  to  t'-Jioa,  etc.,  and  is 
used  generally  calling  to  animals. 

Mahiiti.  Mahuting  mabutl,  yery  well. 
Syn.  Maigi. 

Mahusay.  Mahusay  na  maliusay, 
very  carefully;  in  a  yery  orderly 
manner.  Ex.:  Jd? i/ gauinnini/nvg 
vialn'isai/  (do  this  carefully). 
Bnloiin  mong  maJii'isay  (wrap  it  up 
carefully).  Humnmy,  to  put  in 
order;  to  arrange;  to  disentangle. 
3Iagpak(thusa>/,  to  arrange  well;  to 
settle  things  with  care.  Adj.: 
"well  kept,"  etc.  Ex.:  Husaynn 
buhok  ( well  kept  hair) .  Ang  hinii- 
my  ( what  disentangled  or  set  in 
order).  ITumy  na  usap  (a  care- 
ful conyersation). 

Ma^iiiiin.  Masamang  masamd,  very 
badly.  Ex. :  Xatulogakong  )/tammd 
kagab't  (I  slept  badly  last  night). 

Malakas.  Ex.:  Houag mo  akong  lak- 
kamn  nang  panguiTgnsap  (do  not 
talk  to  me  so  much  in  such  a 
rough  manner) .  Kalalakas  kang 
liunakdd  (walk  ■with  vigor).  Iti- 
noJnk  niya  nang  malakds  ang  hangka 
(he  pushed  the  banca  [canoe] 
vigorously). 

Madali,  var.  marali.  Combined  with 
both  um  and  m.ag,  an  anoma- 
lous verb  is  formed,  inngdumaU, 
to  make  haste,  and  in  turn  thi.s 
is  used  with  a  noun  to  indicate 
time.  Ex.:  M(igdnm<diiig  drao  (a 
short  ^vhile,  or  time).  Examples 
as  an  adverb  of  niddtdt  are:  (unr'tn 
mong  madali  (do  it  quickly  ) ;  sabi- 
hin  mong  madali  (tell  it  quickly). 

Matihay.  Ex.:  Talian  mong  maiibay 
(tie  it  strongly).  Walang  nunang 
tibay  pagkasira'y  Jtalinhan  (there 
is  no  repairing  stronger  than  to 
rejilace  what  is  destroyed). — T.  P., 


TAGALOG   LANGUAGE. 


97 


Finely. 


Frequently;  often;  closely. 


Wisely. 


Swiftly. 


Judiciously ;  prudently. 
Customarily;  commonly. 

Openly;  publicly. 
Secretly. 


Do  you  understand  ? 
6855—05 7 


822.  Manibay,  to  prop  up;  to  sup- 
port; to  sustain.  Ex.:  Ji/a)if/  ha- 
tong  ang  pinaninibayannnng  f/uliai/ 
(that  stone  is  the  i)rop  of  the 
house). 

Magaling.  Magaling  na  niaguliug, 
very  finely.  Ex. :  Kiingmain  ukong 
magaling  (I  ate  finely).  Ang 
nagagaling,  person  improving  (as 
from  an  illness).  Gumaling,  to 
grow  better  (as  a  sick  person). 
Maggnling,  to  prepare.  GuliiTgin, 
what  prepared.  Mangalmg,  to 
improve  greatly.  Makagaling,  to 
do  good.  Ex.:  Ang  mawja  gamot 
ay  siyang  ikinagagallng  naxg  iiiiDTija 
may  sakit  (medicines  are  what 
cause  the  sick  to  recover) .  Mag- 
pagaling,  to  prosper.  Magpakaga- 
ling,  to  improve;  reform,  or  cor- 
rect one's  self.  Ex. :  Magpakaga- 
ling  kayo  nang  maiTjjd  asal  ninyo 
(improve  yourselves  in  manners) . 
Kagali)Tgan,  goodness.  Ang  pina- 
gagaling,  thing  bettered  (present 
tense) . 

Malimit.  Ex. :  Malimit  akong  naUiigo 
(I  bathe  often).  Also  name  of  a 
close-woven  basket  made  around 
BosoboHO,  Rizal  Province. 

Not  expressed  by  a  single  word,  but 
by  phrases,  the  adjective  inaru- 
nong,  wise,  being  expressed  with 
the  subject  in  the  nominative,  and 
the  verb  in  the  infinitive.  Ex.: 
Marunong  siyang  umdral  (he 
teaches  wisely),  not  ungmadral  si- 
yang marunong,  which  wouhl  be  a 
proper  construction  if  marunong 
were  an  adverb. 

Matulin.  Tumulin,  to  do  anything 
swiftly.  Magtulin,  to  go  swiftly. 
Ang  ipagtulin,  the  cause  of  going 
swiftly.  Ex.:  Papagtulininmoang 
bangkd  (make  the  banca  [canoe] 
go  swiftly) .  Mataling  tumakbo  to 
run  swiftly).  Katulinan  [abst. )] 
swiftness). 

Sa  bait. 

Sa  ugali,  also  with  abstract,  sa  kau- 
galian. 

Sa  hayag. 

Sa  lihim.  Lihim  na  gawd,  a  secret 
deed.  Ang  gawang  lihim  ay  naha- 
hdyag  din  (secret  deeds  are  the 
very  ones  found  out). — T.  P.,  515. 
Ang  lihim  ay  siyang  hdyag  (the  hid- 
den is  what  is  discovered). — T.  P., 
414. 

Hanif  var.  "hanidf" 


98 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Differently. 


Iba.  This  word  also  means  "other," 
"different,"  etc.  In  .some  phrases 
it  has  the  idea  of  "better."  Ex.: 
Iha  an;/  jHjgoiig  Jtull  tut,  sa  suiTfjai^an 
dadakpin  pa  ( better  a  quail  already 
caught  than  a  horned  animal  yet 
to  be  caught).— T.  P.,  443;  i.  e., 
"a  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two 
in  the  bush." — Cervantes.  The 
earliest  form  in  English  says,  "bet- 
ter one  byrde  in  hand  than  ten  in 
the  wood,"  Heywood,  abt.  1565. — 
T.  P.,  442,  is  ibd  ang pogong  Jiull  na, 
sa  huhiilihin  pa  (better  the  quail 
already  caught  than  the  one  still 
to  be  caught).  This  is  found  in 
Greek:  "He  is  a  fool  to  let  slip  a 
bird  in  the  hand  for  a  bird  in  the 
bush." 

Sampuii..  When  followed  by  nang, 
nito,  naman,  etc.,  the  final  n  is 
dropped.     Syn.,  pail. 

Gagaunti.  { from  7(ni(,  idea  of  a  little) . 
Ex. :  Mnntlng ttWig  (alittle  water). 
Kaunti,  a  little,  as  in  speaking  a 
language,  etc. 

Sa  sandali.  Ex. :  Houag  kang  ma- 
balam  doon,  sumandali  man  lamang 
(do  not  delay  there  more  than  an 
instant).  Saisang  kisap  maid  (in 
the  twinkling  of  an  eye). 

Saanpa  dU  var.  Sadlf  Sdan  pa  di 
gayonf  (Why  not  that  way?) 

At  anof  Ay  and?  (  Who  doubts  it?) 
At  or  ag  joined  with  certain  parti- 
cles means  "why?"  Ex.:  At  dif 
(Why  not?) 

Mahanga.  Si maham/a (better).  Ka- 
hniTgahaiTga  (admirable). 

Kua  daiTgan.  PakundanTgan  (for  the 
sake  of). 

Tantd.  Verbalized  tantd  means  to 
iindertstand.  Ex.:  Xatatanto  mo f 
(Do  you  u nderstand  it? )  Dili  ko  pa 
natatanld  (I  don't  understand   it 

yet)- 

Totdo  mandin.  Also  totdo  din ;  totdo 
nga ;  totoong  totdo  ( very  truly ) .  To- 
tdo manding  totdo  (very  truly,  in- 
deed). 

nga,  var.  iTganit.  Ex. :  Siyd  nga  ang 
nagnakao  (he  is  certainly  the 
thief). 

Din.  (Changes  to  ri)i  after  some 
words. ) 

IV.  Nearly  all  the  adverbs  of  measure  and  degree  have  been  fully 
explained  under  the  comparative  and  superlative  of  the  adjective.  It  may 
be  noted  here  that  the  adverb  is  made  superlative  by  the  reduplication  of 
the  adverb,  with  the  proper  tie,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  adjec-tive. 
Many  examples  have  l)een  given  on  the  foregoing  pages.  The  only  adverbs 
noted  here  will  be  Mmon^,  "only;"  sigdna;  and  sukat  na,  "enough." 


Jointly. 
Inasmuch. 

Forthwith ;  instantly. 

Why  not? 
Why? 

It  would  be  better. 
If  it  were  not. 
Certainly. 

Truly. 

Certainly;  indeed. 
Truly;  really. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  99 

V.  Adverbs  of  modality,  such  an  "surely,"  not,  "perhaps,"  etc.,  have 
been  treated  under  otlier  adverbs  or  will  be  included  with  the  adverbial 
pronouns  and  expressions  of  affirmation,  negation,  and  doubt. 

Affirmative  adverbs  are  fairly  numerous  in  Tagalog.     The  principal  are: 

Yes.  Oo.      Opo   (yes.   sir   [or  madam]). 

Oo  ivja  aad  60  iTganit  (yes,  in- 
deed). Pado  (to  say  yes).  Anff 
ipaoo  ( what  said ) .  Jbig  pinaoohau 
(person  to  whom  yes  has  beea 
said). 

Indeed;  without  doubt.  Pala.     Siyd  pala  (it  is  he,  indeed). 

This  word  is  used  in  asserting 
when  a  thing  is  certain.  Ex.: 
Indi  pala  si  Pedro  ang  nagnakaof 
(Is  Pedro  the  thief  without 
doubt? )  >SV?/(?,  p(da  ( he  is,  i ndeed ) . 
Kapala  pa  (it  is  clear).  Ex.: 
Kapala  pa'y  paroruon  akn  (it  is 
clear  that  I  am  going  there). 
Kapala  pa^y  dt  paroroon  al:6  (it  is 
clear  [of  course]  that  I  am  not 
going  there). 

Also;  likewise;  as  well.  Namdn.     Man  (even). 

Should.  Disin.     Ex.:    Kun  slyd'y  siisulat  dl- 

sin,  ay  paroroon  sana  ako  (if  he 
should  write,  I  would  go  there). 

Would;  should;  could  (idea  of  com-  Sana.  Ex.:  Ibig  ko  sana^y  sumulat, 
pulsion).  wjuni't    wald   akong   kapanahonan 

(I  would  like  to  write,  but  I  have 
no  time).  Ako  ang  paroon  sana, 
bago  ikao^y  naparitS  (I  had  to  go 
there,  before  you  came  here). 

The  principal  negative  adverbs  are  as  follows: 

No.  Hindu 

Not.  Indi.     Indi  pa  {not  yet) .     Indi  man, • 

indi rm  (neither;  noteither).  Indi 
na  (not  now).  Indi  Idmang  (not 
only,  solely ) .   Indi  iydn  f not  that) . 

I  don't  want  to.  Aaydoako.    yl'  [pronounced  abrupt- 

ly] (I  don't  like  it).  Kaayauan 
[abst.]  (dislike).  Aug  inaayauan 
(what  disliked  or  refused). 

Not.  Di.     Ex. :  Di  isu  man;  di  vnm  naud 

(in  no  way).  Dimaii;  di  pa  {not 
yet).  Di  anhinf  (What  matter?) 
Di  anhin  dao  na  (for   it    is  said 

that ).     i)t  nmmio  (it  is  said). 

Di  and  pa?  (How  can  it  be?)  Di 
nga  salamat  (may  it  be  thus). 
Ito'y  di  maigi  (this  is  not  good). 
Di  sino  ( to  who  else).  Ex. :  Disino 
ang  daiiTgan  mo,  kiindi  ang  capilanf 
(To  who  else  should  your  com- 
plaint be  made  except  the  cap- 
tain?) 

Not.  Dili,  varia.   diri.     Mapadiri,   to  say 

no.  Aug  pinadiririan,  person  to 
whom  no  is  said  (present  ten.«e). 
Magpadiri,  to  say  "no' '  repeatedly. 
Ang   pinagdirian,    the    person  to 


100  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

whom  "no"  has  been  said  many 
times  (past  tense).  Padili  ka, 
say  no.  Dili  rin,  no  indeed.  At 
the  end  of  a  sentence  dili  some- 
times means  "  or  not. "  Ex.:  Ba- 
huynd  sHa,  ddi.^  (Will  they  pay  or 
not? ) 
No  (forbidding).  Honor/.     Ex.:  Houag  va  (do  not  do 

it  now  [presupposes  previous  com- 
mand]). //oufr(;i ///d/t  (leave  that! 
drop  that!)  Houagan  moii/dn  (let 
that  alone).  Houngan  mong kunin 
(do  not  take  it).  Houagan  mong 
itapoii  (do  not  throw  it  out). 
Houagan  mong  tiiTijnan  (do  not 
look  at  it).  Honag  kang  par6o7i 
(do  not  go  there).  Pahouagin  mo 
iyang  iauo  niynn  (tell  that  man  not 
to  do  that).  Pahoungan  mo  hjan 
d'ti/an  sa  lata  (forbid  that  to  that 
child). 

There  are  a  few  adverbs  of  doubt  in  Tagalog,  as  well  as  some  phrases 
meaning  the  same.     They  are: 

Perhaps.  Baga. 

Possibly.  Kayn.     Kaya  iTga  (just  because,  just 

for  that  reason).  Used  with  af- 
firmative sentences.  Kayd  iTganit 
(as  soon  as ) .  Kaya  iTijgam  (since ) . 
Used  with  negative  sentences. 
Makakaya,  to  be  able  (in  a  phys- 
ical sense).  Kaya  is  also  any 
hunting  or  fishing  utensil  or  in- 
strument. 

Why?     For  what  reason?  Wari.     Ex.:     At   ako  wari    pardon? 

(Why  do  I  have  to  go  there?) 
With  neg.,  At  di  vari  ako  pardon? 
(Why  don't  1  have  to  go  there?) 

Perhaps.  Upan.     It    is  never   put    last    in    a 

sentence. 

I  don't  know.  Ara'in.     Do   not  confuse  with  aayao 

(I  don't  want  to). 

If  it  could  be  thus.  Naua.     Siyu  nana.   { it  may  be  this 

way) .     Used  for  ' '  amen. ' ' 

THE    PREPOSITIOX. 

The  preposition,  which  serves  to  connect  a  noun  to  the  sentence,  in  the 
same  manner  that  the  conjunction  introduces  or  attaches  sentences,  is  not 
as  highly  developed  in  Tagalog  as  in  English,  and  for  this  reason  thesame 
preposition  means  what  it  would  take  several  different  ones  to  express  in 
English.     The  principal  Tagalog  prepositions  are: 

In;  to;  from;  against;  at;  by;  on;  Sa.  Ex.:  (in)  Sa  hayan  (in  town); 
per;  between;  with;  of;  among;  sc  bdhay  (in  the  house);  (to)  sa 
for;  across.  ali  ko  (to  my  aunt);  sa  amain  ko 

(to  my  uncle);  sa  ama  ko  (to  my 
father);  sa  ind  ko  (to  my  mother), 
these  also  mean  "for"  my  aunt, 
etc.;  sa  bdhay  (to  the  house);  sa 
iydn  bdhay  (to  that  house) ;  (from) 
sa      bdhay     (from      the    house); 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  101 

(ag;ainst )  lahan  sa  kamiay  (against 
the  enemy);  (at)  sa  huhuy  (at  the 
houye);  "(per)  ialU)  sa  sungda  (8 
per  cent);  (between)  sa  magaling 
at  iiiaKamd  ( between  good  and  bad ) ; 
(with)  sama  sa  kaniydtig  unak 
(she  is  going  with  her  child) ;  (of, 
rare);  (among,  unusual);  (for) 
patuMjo  ko  sa  America  ( I  am  leav- 
ing for  America);  (across,  rare). 
Sa  is  verbalized,  the  veri)s  thus 
formed  being  explained  later. 
Without.  Walii.     P^x.:    Wald   akong  salapi  (I 

am  without  money).    Magvald,  to 
runaway;  to  get  rid  of.     Mawald, 
to  lose;    to  miss.     Ex.:   Nnwaldn 
ako  nang  lakus  ( I  lost  the  strength ) . 
Makaimld,  to  be  able  to_run  awav. 
Ex. :  Hindi  makaimld,  vgujion  (it  is 
not  possible  to  run  away  now). 
Magpawald,    to    pardon,    forgive. 
Wald  with  in  also  means  to  remit 
or  cancel.     Ex.:   Walinmovaang 
utang  ko  sa  iy6  (cancel  the  debt  I 
owe  you) .    Magkawald,  to  go  apart, 
to    break    away.     Ex.:  Fapagka- 
walin  mo   kami   (let   us   quit    [as 
partners] )   ( excl. ) .     Sinong  imld  f 
(Who  is  absent?)      Wald  ka  kaha- 
pon  (you  were  absent  yesterday). 
May  ikinawawald  ka  nang  balang 
naf    (Is  there  anything  you  lack?) 
Walang  wald  (absolutely  nothing) . 
Narval'd  sa  kamay  ko   (it  escaped 
from    my    hand).     Mawald    man 
isang  anuang  kalakian,  houag  ang 
isang  snlitaan  (better  to  lose  a  cara- 
bao  bull  than  a  moment  of  conver- 
sation.—T.  P.,  869.     Ibd  ang  may 
ay-ay  sa  wald  (it  is  better  to  have 
a  scarecrow  than   to    be  without 
one). — T.  P.,  866.   Nagmamayroo'y 
wald  (they  pretend  to  have  some- 
thing, but  are  destitute).— T.  P., 
867.     Mapipilit  ang  mardmot,  ang 
wakVy  hindt  (the  miser  may  be 
forced  [to  give  something],  but  he 
who  has  nothing,  no).— T.  P.,  868. 
Walang  masamang  kaniyd,  walang 
maigi  sa  ibd  (faultless  what  is  his,_ 
good     for    nothing    what    is    of 
another).— T.  P.,  870.      Wald  also 
means  "  the  open  sea,  a  gulf,"  etc. 
Magpawald  (to  put  to  sea).     Ex.: 
Nagpaivald   ang   Moro  nang  kani- 
yang  samsamin  (the  Moro  put  to 
sea  with  his  booty). 

Of (and  family  or  associates).        Kand.     Ang  bnkid  kand  ali  ko  (the 

field  of  my  aunt  and  her  family). 
Paka  nd  sa  Juan  kand  (go  to  Juan 
and  his  family). 


102  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Of  (genitive  of  si).  ^^i-     Ex.:  Ang  ni  off  an  ni  Luis  {homs' 

cocoan u t  pal m  gro ve ) .  Ang  ha h ay 
ni  Toinus  (Thomas'  house). 

Of  (gentitive  of  a»/;).  Nang.     Ex.:  Ang  bdhay  nang  amd  ko 

(my  father's  house). 

To  (dative,  etc.  of  si).  Kay.     Ex.:  Ilong     tungkod    ay    kay 

Juan  (this  cane  is  John's  [is  to 
John] )_. 

Against.  Ldban;  Idhan  na.     Ex.:  Ikao^yldban 

sa  akin  (you  against  me),  hang 
hokbo ldban namdn  sa  ibd  (one  army 
against  another).  Magldban  (to 
resist  or  struggle  against). 

From.  Bdhat.      Ex. :    Sdan     ha    nagbuhat? 

( Where  did  you  come  from?) 

From.  Muld.     Ex. :  Mvla  iTijayon  ( from  now 

on).  8a  muld  (from  the  begin- 
ning). Ex.:  Muld  so  Idnes  hangdn 
sa  viernes  (from  Monday  until 
Friday).  Mnldsa  3fay)uld  ha))gdn 
sa  Santa  Mesa  (from  Manila  as  far 
as  Santa  Mesa).  Magmuld  (to 
start;  to  commence). 

THE   CON.JUNCTION. 

Genuine  conjunctions  are  rather  scarce  in  Tagalog,  but  many  other  words 
may  be  used  as  a  conjunction  would  be  in  English  to  join  sentences  together. 
The  principal  ones  are: 

And.  At.     This  loses  the  vowel  in  many 

cases,  being  pronounced  with  the 
word  preceding  as  a  final  /,  and  in 
such  cases  is  written  '<. 

Together  with.  Kasnmd  (from  ka  and  sama) . 

Not  only — but.  Hindi  Idmang — kundi  bagkus. 

Unless.  Ilouag  U'unang. 

Even;  as  well  as.  Sabdy. 

Or.  Kayd. 

Or  not.  Dili.     Also  man. 

Either — or.  Magin — magin. 

Or.  0  (Sp.) 

The  foregoing  are  called  binding  conjunctions  as  to  the  first  four  and 

alterative  conjunctions  as  to  the  last  four.     The  following  are  called  adver- 
sative conjunctions.     They  are: 

But.  Nguni;  ku»di;  datapoua;  subali;  alin- 

tana.  Nguni  never  begins  a  i)rin- 
cipal  clause,  but  always  a  sul)ordi- 
nate  one,  and  generally  in  an  an- 
swer. Ex.:  Ibig  kvsanaiig  kit  main, 
lujunVl  hindi  akd  mangyayari  (I 
would  like  to  eat,  but  I  am  not 
able  to). — L.  '^  from  at,  is  almost 
invariably  joined  to  iTT/jn;?.  Kundi 
is  used  for  subordinate  clauses,  gen- 
erally when  the  principal  one  has 
a  negative  meaning.  Ex.:  Hindi 
Idlaki,  kn)idi  babayc  ang  ibon  (the 
bird  is  not  a  male,  but  a  female). 
Thitapoua,  which  generally  take  '/, 
means  "but"   still   stronger  than 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


103 


P>nt  rather. 
Neither — nor. 

Although;  though. 

Although  (more  formal  than  above). 


Ever  so  much,  although  (giving  a 
reason  or  making  an  excuse). 


Although. 


Since;  whereas. 


No  matter  if;  even  if. 


AVhat;  because 
But;  vet. 


Some  conjunctions  may  be  styled 
Tagalog  are: 

Why? 


Because  (giving  reason). 


kundi,  denoting  a  sharper  contrast, 
as  between  rich  but  miserable,  etc. 
Subiili  means  "but  for,"  etc.,  as 
conditional.  .  I /<;//«»((,  which  takes 
V  in  beginning  a  clause,  means 
"but  for  all  that,  "etc.  Verbalized 
the  two  foregoing  words  mean  "to 
except,"  Bago  is  sometimes  used 
in  the  sense  of  "but."  Ex,:  Tnn- 
ghallna,bago'' ij vnld  pa  siya  (noon 
already,  but  he  is  absent  yet), 

Kundl  hiujkus.  These  wonis  may  be 
used  alone  in  this  sense,  and  may 
also  be  joined  together. 

Man  —  man.  Man  —  manJdiidi  rlti. 
Ex. :  Wald  kami  hi  gas  man,  illog 
man  (we  have  nothing,  neither 
rice  nor  eggs. 

Baganidn.  Ex.:  Bagaman  dukhd  si 
Juan,  sa  piiri  nama'y  maydman  slyd 
(though  Juan  is  poor,  he  is  rich  in 
a  good  name ) . 

Bistd't.  Bistd't  napojjoot  siyd  sa  akin, 
uy  bibigydn  din  ako  (although  he  is 
angry  at  me,  it  will  be  given  to  me). 

Mataymdn.  Ex.:  Matayindnakoynaa 
ka'ibig  paritd,  ay  dt  ko  makayanan, 
(although  I  wished  to  come,  I  was 
not  al)le  to  [I  had  no  strength]). 

Kahl,  var.  kahimat,  kaliinyd,  kalii- 
nyd  man,  kahi'i.  Ex.:  KahiinaH 
di  mdyag  sild,  paroroon  din  ako, 
(although  they  do  not  consent,  I 
shall  go  there). 

Palibhasa  (from  Sanskrit,  paribhd- 
shd,  sentence,  reprimand,  etc.) .  It 
is  followed  by  ' y  in  sentences.  As 
an  adverb  it  is  equal  to  kayd  r~ga  ; 
kayd  pala,  as  well  as  to  "since" 
and  "whereas."  As  a  noun  it 
means  "irony."  Magpalibhasa  (to 
speak  ironically). 

Sukddn.  Ex.:  Magpapakahusog  mnna 
siyd,  sukddn  siyd'y  magkasakif  (he 
will  gorge  himself  first,  even  if  he 
makes  himself  sick). 

Maijapd,  var.  mayapd'f,  little  heard. 

Bago.  Ex,:  Sild' yang may sala,bago 
ako  ang  pinarusahan  (they  are  the 
ones  at  fault,  but  I  am  the  one  who 
has  been  punished). 

"causative,"     The  principal  ones  in 

Bakin?  \ar.  bdkit.  Bdkit  dif  (Why 
not?)  Bdkit  also  means  "as," 
"how,"  etc,  in  sentences.  As  a 
noun  bdkit  means  an  old  monkey 
with  developed  teeth.  Ano'tf  also 
means  "why?" 

Sa  pagka't. 


104 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


A  fifth  group  of  conjunctions  is  generally  that  called  "conditional." 
The  significations  of  the  members  of  this  group  are  self-explanatory. 

If;  rather.  Kun. 

Unless.  Ku7i   diri  Idmang;    kun  dt  lamang; 

liban  na. 

As  if  it  were.  Kun  sana  sa. 

Were  it  not  for.  Kun  danyan;  daiTgan. 

Provided.  Kun  lamaug;  houag  Idmang. 

Lest.  Baka,  var.  makci. 

The  sixth  and  last  group  of  conjunctions  is  that  of  the  cla.«s  called  "con- 
clusives"  in  some  grammars  and  "illatives"  in  others.  In  Tagalog  the 
principal  ones  of  this  class  are: 


That  (relative) . 


That. 


Consequently;  that  is  to  say. 
Therefore  (consequently). 


In  order  that. 
Inasmuch;  in  so  far  as. 


Nang.  Ex. :  Mngpagamot  ko,  nang 
ikdo  ag  gumnling  (allow  yourself 
to  be  treated,  so  that  vou  mav  be 
better).— L. 

Na.  Ex.:  Xagsabi  siya  na  ako'y 
natulog  (he  said  that  I  was  asleep). 

Di  yata. 

Sa  makatouid  ( lit.  "  in  other  words ' ' ) 
Ex. :  Xakila  ko  sild  kagab-i,  sa  ma- 
katouid hindi    sild   sungmakay    (I 
saw    them    last    night,    therefore 
they  did  not  embark). 

Upan.     It  is   never   put   last    in    a 

clause. 
Yamang,  var.  yai/amang;  yayang; 
hayumang;  hamaug.  Ex.:  Mang- 
yayaring  gawln  niyd  yayaman  siyd'y 
goberno dor-general  (he  is  able  to 
do  it,  inasmuch  as  he  is  governor- 
general)  . 


THE    EXCLAMATION. 

The  exclamation,  or  interjection,  can  hardly  be  regarded  as  a  part  of 
speech,  compared  with  verbs,  nouns,  adjectives,  etc.,  but  for  want  of  a 
better  classification  they  may  Ije  treated  here.  They  are  generally  self- 
explaining,  and  many  seem  to  be  roots  used  as  imperatives  of  the  verb. 
The  most  characteristic  Tagalog  interjections  are: 

Abd> 

Aroy!     Aray! 

Ayad!  (mostly  used  by  women). 

Bapda.       May    be    used     together, 

bapda  preceding.     Bapda  is  more 

in  use  by  men. 
Buti  ruga! 
Kaaudaud! 
Kahimanuaril    Xaud!     Maano! 


Dear  me!     Alas! 
Ouch!     Wow! 

Oh  how ! 

Oh  how ! 


(Always  follows.) 
(Always  follows.) 


Good!     Fine! 

Poor  thing! 

Would    that    it    mav  be  so!       Oh 

that ! 

Quick! 

Be  silent  (to  one)! 
Xo  talk!    Silence! 
Lightning!     (Oh,  hell!) 
My  mother! 

What  a  pity! 

Move  on!     Go  ahead! 


Dali! 

Houag  kang  magiiTgay! 

Houag  kayong  magiiTgay! 

Lintik! 

Nako!     Naku!     (Contraction 

ind  ko.) 
Sayang! 
Sulong! 


from 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  105 

Look  out!     Aside!     Take  care!  Tabi!    Hag! 

Stand  hack!  Urong! 

Look!     Behold!     Here  it  is!  Manad! 

Tagalog  cursing  is  rather  pecuHar.  It  has  evidently  been  derived  from 
native  sources  and  not  from  contact  with  the  Spaniards.  Among  the  most 
usual  expressions  are: 

May  a  crocodile  eat  you!  Kanin  ka  nang  huaya! 

May  the  earthquake  swallow  you  up!  Lamunin  ku  -iiang  I'mdol! 

May  a  snake  bite  you!  Tukain  ka  nang  alias! 

May  the  lightning  strike  him!  Tinamadn siyd  nang liniik! 

Section  Seven. 

THE    VERB. 

I.  ' '  The  verb  is  distinguished  from  all  other  words  by  marked  characteris- 
tics and  a  peculiar  organization." — Earle.  The  eminent  philologist  speaks 
thus  of  the  English  tongue,  but  his  remarks  apply  equally  to  Tagalog.  He 
further  defines  a  verb  as  '"the  instrument  by  which  the  mind  expresses 
its  judgments,"  a  definition  which  was  first  enunciated  by  the  Danish 
philologist  Madvig,  in  his  Latin  grammar  (Copenhagen,  1841,  8th  ed., 
1889).  Madvig  calls  a  verb  udsagusord,  literally  "out-saying-word." 
Other  characteristics  of  the  verb  have  been  noted  and  have  given  names 
to  the  class,  such  as  the  German  Zeilwort  (time- word),  and  Ewald's 
Thatiiorl  (deed- word).  But  in  Tagalog  the  line  between  nouns  and 
verbs  is  much  less  than  in  English,  where  it  is  still  less  than  in  Latin, 
Greek,  and  other  languages  of  southern  Europe. 

IL  The  simplest  verbal  form  is  the  imperative,  which  consists  of  the 
root,  followed  by  ka  (thou)  or  kayo  (you;  ye).  An  adverb  of  time  is  some- 
times added  to  the  phrase  for  emphasis.  Ex.:  Ldkad  ka  na!  (walk 
on,  now!)  Mp  ka!  (Think!)  Aral  ka!  (Teach!)  Dald  mo  d6o7)  (take  it 
there).  I)akl  mo  dllo  (bring  it  here).  As  in  English,  many  of  the  roots 
used  as  imperatives  may  be  used  as  nouns  also.  Aral,  as  a  noun,  means 
"doctrine"  or  "teaching."  Ex.:  Aug  ural  ni  Monroe'  y  ang  dral  nang 
America  wjatjon  (the  Monroe  doctrine  is  now  the  doctrine  of  America). 

ni.  By  prefixing  ka  to  the  imperative,  and  reduplicating  the  first  sylla- 
ble of  the  root  at  the  same  time  (sign  of  the  present  tense)  the  idea  of 
quickness,  intensity,  care,  etc.,  is  imparted  to  the  command.  Ex.: 
Kalalnkud  ka!  (Goquickly!  [to  one]) .  Kaluldkad  kayo!  (Goquickly!  [j'e]  ). 
Kai'ixip  ka!  (Consider  it  well!)  KadadaJd  mo  doon  (take  it  there  care- 
fully). As  a  general  thing  the  agent  takes  the  indefinite  form,  as  will 
be  seen  by  the  examples,  but  the  definite  is  used  when  necessary.  7v« 
with  the  reduplicated  first  syllable  of  the  root  has  a  very  different  mean- 
ing with  any  other  person  than  the  second.  With  the  first  and  third  per- 
sons it  has  the  idea  of  "timejust  past,"  when  followed  by />o, as  will  be  seen 
by  the  following  examples.  Sometimes  pa  may  be  omitted.  Di7i  may 
also  take  the  place  of  pa,  as  may  also  Idmang.  In  English  the  time  may  be 
expressed  by  "  has  "  or  "  had,"  according  to  the  contex.  Karardting  ko  jta  (I 
have  [had]  just  arrived).  Karardting  ni  Gat  Tomds  (Don  Tomiis  has  just 
arrived),  ibig  mong  makakain  sa  dminf  (Do  you  wish  to  eat  with  us?) 
Saldmat,  aydoako'tkdkdkain  kopa  (thanks,  Idonotcareto,  I  have  just  eaten) . 
Kagagd ling  nang  kapatid  na  babaye  ko  sa  bayan  (my  sister  has  just  come 
from  town).  Kahihigd  ko  din  (I  had  just  lain  down).  Kapapanaog  ko  din 
at  hapapanhik  Idmang  nild  (I  had  just  gone  down  and  they  had  just  gone  up 
[i.e.,  the  house  ladder]  ).  Kapapdsok  Idmang  niyd  sa  bdhay  (he  had  just 
entered  the  house) .  Kapapdsok  din  ngayon  ni  Esleban  sa  basahan  ( Esteban 
[Stephen]  has  just  entered  the  reading  place  [i.  e.,  the  master's  place]). 
Kasusdlnt  ko  (I  had  just  written  it).  A'o^otopws/.o  (I  have  just  finished  it). 
Kaialagpi  ko  ( I  had  just  mended  it).    Kauutas  na  ko  (I  had  already  finished 


106  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

it).  Kaaalix  Inmancj  n'nja  (he  has  just  gone  away).  Knnalis  pa  nang  aking 
amd  (my  father  has  just  gone  away).  Kaaalls  din  iTgayon  nang  capitan 
(the  captain  just  now  left).  With  roots  hke  dral,  which  have  several  dis- 
tinct meanings  according  to  the  verbal  particle  i^refixed,  ka  does  not 
require  the  first  syllable  to  be  repeated.  Ex.:  Kapanijangaral  din  ngayon 
nang  pare  (the  priest  has  just  finished  preaching).  In  this  case  the  prefix 
is  reduplicated,  maiTijdral  meaning  "  to  preach."  Kapagal'm  din  ni  Benigno 
nang  damit  (Benigno  just  took  the  clothes  away).  Magalis  means  "to 
take  away." 

IV.  Ka  has  many  other  functions,  which  will  be  taken  up  later.  It  is  a 
most  important  particle  and  should  be  carefully  studied.  It  should  be 
noted  that  the  pronouns  with  the  imperative  are  mostly  in  the  nomina- 
tive, while  with  the  first  and  third  persons  they  are  in  the  genitive. 

V.  All  such  sentences  are  in  the  definite  or  so-called  "passive,"  which 
is  by  far  the  most  usual  form  in  Tagalog,  but  which  would  look  very 
strange  many  times  if  translated  by  the  English  passive. 

VI.  The  foregoing  form  is  also  used  to  express  opposites,  the  words 
being  linked  l>y  ay.  It  may  be  expressed  in  English  by  "now,  again," 
or  "  now,  then."     Ex.: 

Now  he  sleeps,  then  he  wakes.  Kalutulog  ay  kagigising  niya. 

He  comes  in  and  goes  out.  Kapapasok  ay  kalalabas  niya. 

He  is  coming  and  going.  Karartaing  ay  kaaalis  niya. 

Sometimes  he  walks,  then  he  rests  a    Kalalakad  ay  kahihiniohinto  niya. 

little. 
Now  she  laughs  and  then  she  cries.       Katataua  ay  kaiiyak. 

VII.  When  a  prefix  changes  the  meaning  of  a  word,  it  is  retained  in  the 
imperative.  Ex.:  Aral  ka  (teach);  pagdral  ka  (study);  pangaral  ka 
(preach). 

VIII.  With  the  exception  of  the  forms  already  cited,  the  verb  is  always 
accompanied  by  particles,  which  sometimes  modify  the  I'oot  itself  for 
euphonic  reasons.  Nearly  every  word  in  the  language  can  be  made  a  verb 
of  some  kind  or  another  by  the  use  of  these  particles,  which  are  the  strik- 
ing peculiarity  of  the  Malayo-Polynesian  languages,  but  have  been  re- 
tained in  the  primitive  tongues  of  the  Philippines  much  more  than  in  the 
Malay,  Javanese,  or  other  cognate  dialects.  There  are  some  twenty  of 
these  verbalizing  particles,  of  which  seventeen  are  used  as  prefixes  to 
roots,  and  three  are  the  definite  auxiliary  particles  in,  i,  and  an.  Of  these 
particles,  which  are  tabled  at  the  end  of  the  handbook,  the  most  impor- 
tant are  in,  i,  an,  um,  mag,  and  ma,  the  last  three  being  indefinite  particles. 
Pag,  corresponding  as  a  definite  to  mag,  is  also  important.  The  mastery 
of  these  particles  is  the  mastery  not  only  of  Tagalog,  lint  of  every  other 
Philippine  dialect,  as  well  as  a  valuable  aid  in  learning  Malay  or  any  simi- 
lar tongue  of  the  family. 

IX.  The  root  with  any  one  of  the  indefinite  particles  prefixed  maj'  be 
translated  as  the  infinitive,  provided  the  particle  is  merely  attached  to 
give  the  meaning  of  the  root  so  modified,  but  whenever  a  tense  is  expressed 
the  particle  or  the  root  is  modified,  and  sometimes  both.  Besides  the 
imperative  and  infinitive, Tagalog  has  really  but  one  other  mode,  the  indic- 
ative, as  the  subjunctive,  including  those  modifications  known  in  various 
European  languages  as  the  optative,  conditional,  dubitative,  potential,  etc., 
is  expressed  by  certain  words  corresponding  to  the  English  "could, 
should,  would,  may,"  etc. 

X.  Strictly  speaking,  there  are  l)ut  three  tenses  in  Tagalog,  the  past, 
present,  and  future;  but  it  is  possi))le  to  render  the  imperfect,  pluperfect, 
and  future  perfect  tenses  by  means  of  auxiliary  particles.  The  first  three, 
however,  are  those  in  common  use.  The  participle  is  also  in  use,  CDrre- 
sponding  literally  to  the  English  participle  in  some  cases,  and  in  others 
must  be  rendered  by  a  phrase.  The  same  remark  may  be  made  of  the 
gerund  in  English,  which  is  variously  rendered  in  Tagalog.  One  tense 
is  sometimes  used  for  another,  when  the  context  clearly  indicates  the  ti)ne 
of  the  event,  as  happens  in  English. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  107 

XI.  As  in  English,  Tagalog  verbs  may  be  transitive,  requiring  an  object 
to  complete  the  meaning;  or  intransitive,  in  which  the  meaning  is  com- 
j)lete  within  the  verl).  These  do  not  always  correspond  in  the  two  lan- 
guages, and  a  Tagalog  root  may  sometimes  be  intransitive  with  one  ])refix 
and  transitive  with  another,  which  may  reverse  or  modify  the  meaning. 

XII.  Within  the  tense  the  verb  does  not  change  for  the  penson  or  num- 
ber, and  requires  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  to  indicate  the  same. 

XIII.  The  eminent  Indo-Tibetan  philologist  Bryan  H.  Hodgson  (ISOO- 
1894),  in  his  Monographs  upon  the  Tribes  of  Northern  Ti))et,  reprinted  in 
Part  II,  pages  73-76,  of  "  The  Languages,  Literature,  and  lieiigion  of  Nepal 
and  TiV)et"  (London,  1874),  gives  it  as  his  opinion  that  the  Gyarung  dialect 
of  Eastern  Tibet  has  a  very  similar  structure  to  that  of  Tagalog,  quoting 
Leyden  and  W.  von  Humboldt  (the  latter  at  secondhand  )  in  support  of  his 
views.  Rockhill,  the  Tibetan  scholar,  now  United  States  minister  to 
China,  who  has  a  wide  acquaintance  with  Tibetan,  says  that  Gyarung  is 
merely  a  variation  of  ordinary  Tibetan,  and  this  being  the  case  there  can 
be  no  possible  atfinitj'  between  the  two  languages.  As  Hodgson's  error 
has  been  given  wide  publicity  by  its  incorporation  as  a  footnote  to  the 
article  by  de  Lacouperie  upon  Tibet  in  the  Encyclopedia  Britannica,  it 
should  be  corrected  as  far  as  possible  1iy  any  sttident  of  Tagalog. 

XIV.  As  quoted  and  corrected  by  Hodgson,  the  remarks  of  Leyden,  as 
taken  from  the  Researches  of  the  Bengal  Asiatic  Society,  Vol.  X,  page  209, 
upon  Tagalog  are  as  follows:  "Few  languages  present  a  greater  appearance 
of  originality  than  the  Tagala.  Though  a  multitude  of  its  terms  agree  pre- 
cisely with  those  of  the  languages  just  enumerated  (western  Polynesian), 
yet  the  simple  terms  are  so  metamorphosed  by  a  variety  of  the  most  sim- 
ple contrivances  that  it  becomes  impossil)le  (difficult — B.  H.  H.)  for  a 
person  who  understands  all  the  original  words  in  a  sentence  to  recognize 
them  individually  or  to  comprehend  the  meaning  of  the  whole.  The  arti- 
fices which  it  employs  are  chiefly  the  prefixing  or  postfixing  (or  infixing — 
B.  H.  H.)  to  the  simple  vocables  (roots)  of  certain  particles  (serviles), 
which  are  again  (may  be)  combined  with  others,  and  the  complete  or  par- 
tial repetition  of  terms  in  this  reduplication  may  be  again  combined  with 
other  particles." 

XV.  Hodgson  notes  upon  the  foregoing  as  follows:  "  I  may  add,  with 
reference  to  the  disputed  primitiveness  of  Ta-gala,  owing  to  its  use  of  the 
'artifices'  above  cited,  that  throughout  tiie  Himalaya  and  Tibet  it  is  pre- 
cisely the  rudest  or  most  primitive  tongues  that  are  distinguished  by  useless 
intricacies,  such  as  the  interminable  pronouns,  and  all  the  perplexity  caused 
by  conjugation  by  means  of  them,  with  their  duals. and  plurals,  and  in- 
clusive and  exclusive  forms  of  the  first  person  of  both.  *  *  *  The 
more  advanced  tribes,  whether  of  the  continent  or  of  the  islands,  have, 
generally  speaking,  long  since  cast  away  all  or  most  of  these  'artifices.'  " 
As  has  already  been  noted,  the  Tagalog  pronouns  do  not  modify  the  verbs, 
which  have  the  same  form  within  the  tense  for  all  persons  and  numbers. 
As  compared  to  tongues  like  Fijian  and  other  Melanesian  dialects,  Tagalog 
lias  made  long  strides  toward  becoming  a  vehicle  of  a  much  higher  culture 
than  it  now  enjoys. 

XVI.  W.  von  Humboldt  says  in  his  Kawi  Sprache,  Vol.  II,  page  347: 
"The  construction  of  the  ^Malayan  verb  (to  speak  of  the  entire  linguistic 
stock)  can  be  fully  recognized  from  the  Tagalog  verl)  alone.  The  Malagasy 
and  true  Malay  contain  but  fragments  thereof,  while  the  Polynesian  lan- 
guages have  a  more  primitive  scheme  of  the  verb — fewer  in  forms.  It 
therefore  seems  appropriate  to  present: 

First,  the  Tagalog  verb  comj^lete  without  any  regard  to  the  other 
languages; 

Second,  the  Malagasy  (verb),  which  has  in  itself  very  much  of  the  same 
construction ; 

Third,  to  show  what  the  Malay  language  in  its  discarding  and  grinding 
of  grammatical  forms  has  still  retained;  and 


108  TAGALOCi    LANGUAGE. 

Fourth,  to  make  a  research  as  to  how  the  simple  hut  uncultivated  Poly- 
nesian verbal  construction  stands  in  relation  to  the  partially  cultivated 
Tagalog. 

THE   DEFINITE. 

I.  As  has  been  stated  before,  the  definite  form  of  the  verb,  which  is  really 
a  verbal  noun  with  tense-indicating  particles,  is  more  common  than  the 
indetinite  form,  which  is  more  of  a  true  verb  in  construction.  One  of  the 
great  ditticulties  to  be  overcome  by  speakers  of  non-Malayan  tongues  is  the 
improper  use  of  the  definite  and  indefinite.  It  is  as  easy  to  begin  right  as 
wrong,  and  if  attention  is  paid  to  the  conditions  existing,  an  idiomatic 
mastery  of  Tagalog  may  readily  be  required. 

II.  The  true  definite  particles,  in  {liin  after  the  final  vowel  with  acute 
accent,  and  nin  in  a  few  cases  for  euphony),  /,  and  an  {han  after  a  final 
vowel  with  acute  accent),  are  used  either  alone  or  in  combination  when 
emphasis  is  to  be  placed  upon  the  object  or  there  is  a  special  idea  implied. 
These  three  particles  are  further  combined  with  pug,  the  definite  verbaliz- 
ing particle  corresponding  to  tlie  indefinite  mag;  i,  in,  and  pa^many  times 
commencing  a  definite  verb  with  the  combinations  ipag  and  ipinag.  The 
root  begins  after  these  combinations,  subject  to  tense  reduplications,  as 
will  be  seen  by  the  table  at  the  end.  The  subject  takes  the  genitive  with 
the  definite,  the  object  taking  the  nominative  case.  Ex.:  Root  gatni  (idea 
of  making  or  doing) .  Gumawd  (to  make  or  do).  And  ang  gawd  mof  (What 
is  your  work?;  i.  e.,  What  are  you  doing  or  making?).  This  is  an  indefinite 
question,  with  the  verbal  idea  almost  absent,  the  verb  "to  be"  beingunder- 
stood.  With  an  adverb  of  time,  such  as  kahapon  (yesterday),  ngayon 
(now),  or  bukas  (to-morrow)  the  verb  could  be  "was,"  "is,"  or  "will 
be."  But  the  more  usual  form  is  with  the  definite  particle  in  and  the  proper 
tense.  And  ang  ginavu  ino?  (What  did  you  do?  [or  make?]).  For  the 
past  tense  in  is  inserted  with  consonant  roots  between  the  initial  con- 
sonant and  the  rest  of  the  root.  Ano  ang  ginagawd  mo  ditof  (What  are  you 
doing  here?)  As  will  be  seen,  the  present  tense  is  formed  by  the  redupli- 
cation of  the  first  syllable  of  the  root,  in  which  in  is  infixed.  A)i6  ang 
gaguida  mof  (What  are  you  going  to  do?  [or  make?];  what  will  you  do?; 
what  will  you  make?)  The  future  of  this  verb  is  formed  by  reduplicating 
the  first  syllable  of  the  root  and  suffixing  in.  Ano  ang  gagauinnang  amain 
mo  niyang  kahog  na  iyan?  (What  is  your  uncle  going  to  do  with  that  lum- 
ber?) Amain,  from  amd,  father,  with  in  as  a  suffix,  also  means  "step- 
father," as  well  as  "uncle."  Kdhoy  also  means  "tree."  Isang  bahay 
ang gaganinniyd  (He  is  going  to  put  up  a  house).  The  imperative  is  formed 
by  suffixing  m  to  the  root.  Ex.:  Jto'y  gan/in  ninyong  maliusuy  (Do  this 
carefully  [in  an  orderly  manner]). 

III.  in  is  the  principal  definite  particle  in  Tagalog,  corresponding  to  the 
same  i)article  in  Ilocano  and  to  on  in  Bicol  and  Visaya,  the  two  last  men- 
tioned also  using  in  in  combination  with  other  particles. 

WHICH  DEFINITE. 

IV.  While  it  is  not  so  very  hard  to  lay  down  fairly  clear  rules  as  to  when 
the  definite  and  indefinite  should  be  used  [the  former  laying  stress  upon 
the  object  and  the  latter  upon  the  subject  or  the  action),  it  is  extremely 
difficult  in  some  cases  to  say  which  one  of  the  several  definite  particles 
should  be.  As  ageneral  rule,  in  signifies  motion  toward  the  atrent,  orsome- 
thing  by  which  the  agent  obtains  control  of  something;  i  indicates  motion 
away  from  agent,  or  an  action  by  which  the  agent  loses  control  of  some- 
thing, and  an  generally  has  either  the  idea  of  place  or  of  person  connected 
with  its  use.  /joined  with  ka,  resulting  in  ika,  and  further  combined  with  in 
to  produce  ikina,  denotes  cause,  etc.,  with  roots  when  joined  to  them,  either 
alone  or  with  verbalizing  particles.  For  this  reason  the  jirojier  definite  to 
be  used  in  sentences  having  a  definite  object  without  other  modifying  cir- 
cumstance is  determined  by  the  nature  of  the  action,  subject  to  some 
exceptions,  mainly  for  euphonic  reasons.     Such  words,  however,  as  require 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  109 

an,  for  example,  in  place  of  in.  are  not  numerous.  F  can  not  be  replaced 
by  in  or  an,  and  an  only  replaces  in  as  a  suffix,  never  as  a  prefix  or  infix. 
The  following  examples  will  show  the  different  use  of  the  same  verb: 
'Root,  paiihik.  Panhik  Aa.' (Go  up!  Come  up!).  Panhikin  mo  ako  sa  hag- 
dan  (come  up  [to  me]  by  the  ladder).  Ipanliik  mo  sa  balmy  itong  marTgd 
sar/hig  (Put  these  Itauanas  up  into  the  house).  Panhikan  mo  ako  nitong 
mai~g('t  waging  (Put  these  bananas  up  there  for  me).  Piouanhik  (to  ascend). 
Magpiirihik  (to  hoist,  or  put  something  upstairs  [or  up  a  ladder]).  Aug 
panhikin  ( the  jierson  upstairs).  Ang  ipagj)(iiiliik{whsLthoisted  or  taken  up). 
Ang  panlnkan  (the  ladder  [stairs  or  place]  ascended). 

V.  With  sentences  containing  but  one  direct  object  which  is  directly 
connected  with  the  action,  the  prevalence  of  cause,  instrument,  or  time 
requires  i,  and  place  an.  Ex.:  Ihanap  ningo  ako  isang  cabayong  mabnfi 
(look  out  for  a  good  horse  for  me).  Ang  bayan  ang  hahanapan  mo  nang 
cabayo  mo  ( You  will  have  to  look  around  town  for  your  horse).  With  in  a 
proper  use  would  be:  JIanapin mo  a)uj  cahayongnawald  (Look  for  the  horse 
which  has  disappeared).  Ang  pinaglianapan  ko  ang  corral  nang  cabayo,  po 
(Where  1  did  look  for  the  horse  was  at  the  corral,  sir).  Hinanap  ko  ang 
aking  cabayo  sa  bayan  ay  nahdnap  ko  (I  looked  for  my  horse  in  town  and 
found  him ) .  Humdnap,  ( 1 ,  to  look  for)  ( 2,  to  claim ) .  Manhdnap  ( to  scout, 
to  reconnoiter).  J??gr^xm/(aria;mi  (what  scouted  for).  Ang  paglidnap  (the 
act  of  seeking) .  Ang  paghanapan  ( the  place  of  seeking) .  Ang  panhanapan 
(place  scouted  or  reconnoitered  over).  Ang  hinanap  (what  sought  for 
[past  tense]).  Aug  hinahanap  (what  is  being  sought  for).  Ang  hanapin 
(w'hat  is  to  be  sought  or  looked  for).  Ang  hanapan  (person  from  whom 
something  is  claimed  or  sought).  Ang  ihanap  ( the  means  for  something  to 
be  looked  for).  Aug  ihindnap  (the  means  with  which  something  was 
sought).  The  foregoing  illustrate  the  ease  with  which  verbal  nouns  can  be 
formed  from  verbs  and  vice  versa. 

VI.  When  a  sentence  has  more  than  one  indirect  object,  and  stress  is  to 
be  laid  upon  one  or  the  other  object,  the  nature  of  the  action  determines 
the  particle  to  be  used.  The  following  examples,  taken  from  Lendoyro, 
show  this  excellently:  Sulatin  mo  ito)ig  sulal  sa  lamesa  nang  ki'nnay  mo 
("Write  this  letter"  yourself  at  the  table  [i.  e.,  with  your  own  hand]). 
Isulal  mo  nitong  saint  ang  iyong  kdtnay  sa  itong  lantesa  (Write  this  letter 
"with  your  own  hand  "  at  this  table).  Sa  lamesa  ang  sulatati  mo  nitong  sdlat 
nang  iyong  kdniay  (write  this  letter  with  your  own  hand,  using  the  table  as 
a  writing  desk).  It  will  be  seen  from  the  foregoing  that  many  of  the  defi- 
nite verbs  are  verbal  nouns  with  ang  (the)  left  off.  Bearing  this  in  mind 
the  use  of  the  definite  is  made  much  easier. 

VII.  Circumstantial  members  connected  with  the  action  should  be  care- 
fully distinguished  when  using  the  definite  from  adverbs  or  adverbial 
expressions.  Some  examples  of  the  definite  with  adverbs  or  adverbial 
expressions  are:  iSadiyang  ginnwd  niyd  ito  (He  did  this  willfully).  Dina- 
lohong  nild  siyd  nang  boong  bagsik  (They  assaulted  him  [her]  with  great 
barbarity ) . 

VIII.  Jpag,  ipinag,  and  ipinn,  the  two  first  being  coml)inations  with  pag 
and  the  last  of  i  with  pa,  the  definite  verbal  particle  corresponding  to  magpa, 
confuse  the  student  at  first,  but  are  simple  when  analyzed.  Ijnna,  ipa, 
when  followed  by  a  root  commencing  with  g,  should  not  be  confused  with 
ipag  and  ipinag,  as  the  idea  of  ^xt  is  "to  order  to  do"  what  is  signified  by 
the  root.  Combinations  with  other  particles,  like  magka,  are  also  found, 
iorming  ipugka  (imp.),  ipngkaka  (fut.),  ipinagka  (past),  and  ipinagkaka 
(present).  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  last  syllable  of  the  particle  is  redu- 
plicated with  pagka  for  the  future  and  present  tenses.  Ex.:  Ipagabutan 
ninyo  iyang  maiTijd  libra  (Pass  those  l)Ooks  from  hand  to  hand).  Ang  abn- 
tan  (the  person  reached  for  or  overtaken).  Si)io  ang  ipinaglulutb  mo?  (  Who 
are  you  cooking  it  for?)  Ano  kayd  ang  ipinagntos  nio  sa.  kaniydf  ( What 
were  your  orders  to  him?)  Ipaghnliugas  sana  kild  nang  itong  damit  iTg^inVt 
%vald  akong  sabon  (I  would  wash  your  clothes,  but  I  have  no  soap).  Kitd 
is  really  "we  two,"  but  here  means  "I."     Jpaglagd  mo  nang  sa  itong  ofi- 


110  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

cial  ito  (Make  some  tea  for  this  officer).  Ait(i  inihu/n  ( what  boiled  or  made 
[as  tea,  coffee,  etc.]).  Aug  ipaglujd  (the  person  for  wiioin  boiled,  made, 
etc.).  Anrj  lagudn  (the  teapot,  coffeepot,  etc.).  In  the  foregoing  exam- 
ples pag  is  used  because  the  sentence  expresses  the  person  for  whom  an 
act  is  performed.  Fag  is  also  used  with  in  and  an  combined  in  like  cases. 
Ex.:  Jtong  bahuy  na  ito^ g  ang  pinagauayan  nild  (This  house  is  where  they 
quarreled).     Root,  duay. 

IX.  Fag  must  also  be  used  with  the  definite  whenever  the  sentence 
expresses  plurality  of  acts  or  agents,  or  of  feigning  or  reciprocal  actions. 
The  article  being  generally  used,  the  idea  of  a  verbal  noun  is  most  promi- 
nent. Ex.:  Ang  ipinagsakitsakitan  niyd'y  ang  hindi  dusahin  (He  was 
malingering  so  as  to  escape  punishment).  Root,  sakit  (illness).  (Diminu- 
tives made  by  repeating  a  bisyllabic  root  or  the  first  two  of  a  polysyllabic 
one,  add  an  to  impart  a  scornful  or  contemptuous  meaning).  Ang  caartel 
ang  pinagmurahan  nild  (They  insulted  each  other  in  the  barracks). 
Finagsird  nang  maiTjjd  tulisdn  iyang  rnaiTijd  bdhag  (The  ladrones  have 
destroyed  many  of  those  houses).  Maraining  bdhay  ang  j)inagsird  nild 
(Many  houses  have  been  destroyed  by  them). 

X.  With  verbal  roots  which  have  different  meanings  with  um  and  mag, 
the  definite  is  accompanied  by  pag  when  the  verb  formed  by  mag  is  used. 
Ex.:  Root,  bili  (idea  of  trade,  barter,  etc.)  Bumili,  (to  buy).  Magbill  (to 
sell).  Itong  bdhay  ang  ipinagbili  ko,  or  Ipinagbil'i  ko  itong  bdhay  (I  have 
sold  this  house).  Itong  bdhay  ang  binili  ko,  or  Binili  ko  itong  bdhay  (I 
have  bought  this  house).  Fag  { pinag)  prefixed  to  6(7t  with  /c^r/*  suffixed 
indicates  the  purchaser;  the  place  or  the  price  (past  tense).  For  the  pres- 
ent tense  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated.  Ex.:  Ang  pinag- 
bilihan  (past);  ang  pagbibilihan  (pr. ).  Ang  dking  kapatid  na  lalaki  ang 
pinagbilihan  ko  nitong  bdhay  (Isold  [have  sold]  this  house  to  my  brother 
[lit.,  "my  brother  was  the  purchaser  from  me  of  this  house"]).  Root, 
utang  {debt).  Thnutang  (to  borrow).  Magutang  (to  lend).  Magpautang 
(to  lend  willingly).  Magkautang  (to  owe).  Ex.:  Finagutang  ko  iyang 
salapi  sa  kaniyd  (I  lent  him  that  money). 

XI.  The  use  of  the  particles  gives  a  great  freedom  in  Tagalog  for  the 
variation  of  sentences,  which,  however,  have  the  same  idea.  Thus  the 
English  "Didn't  I  order  (or  tell)  you  to  do  this?"  may  be  rendered  by  the 
following  with  equal  accuracy:  Hindi  ko  ipinagutos  sa  iyo  iia  gairin  vio  ito? 
(def. ).  Hindi  ako  nagutos  sa  iyong guinawd  nitof  (indef.,  stress  on  action). 
Hindi  ako  nagpagawu  sa  iyo  nitof  (indef.,  stress  on  action).  Hindi  ko 
pinagaicd  nit 6  (def. ).  Hindi  ko  ipinagawd  sa  iyo  itof  (def. ).  Bi  ipinagaivd 
ko  saiyo  itof  (def.). 

XII.  Ju  and  i  are  combined  with  each  other  also.  Ex.:  And  angilinulutd 
mof  (What  are  you  cooking?)  For  euphony  the  verb  with  this  combina- 
tion is  much  varied,  there  being  also  found  the  forms  inalulutb,  inilulutd, 
and  even  niluluto. 

XIII.  The  verbs  mayroon  and  may  (to  have)  and  vald  (not  to  have) 
require  the  definite  form  of  a  verb  following  them  in  a  sentence  which 
expresses  what  is  had  or  done,  or  vice  versa.  Both  subject  and  object, 
however,  take  the  nominative  in  such  cases.  Ex. :  Mayroon  kang  gagaainf 
(Have  you  anything  to  do?)  Wald  p6,  wald  akong  gaga  win  ( J^o,  sir;  I  have 
nothing).  May  silang  ginaicd?  (Have  they  done  anything?)  ]\ald  p6, 
wald  silang  ginavu  (Xo,  sir;  they  have  not  clone  anything). 

XIV.  Tlie  definite  is  also  used  in  sentences  having  a  person  for  the 
object,  or  in  which  the  object  is  modified  by  an  attribute  or  attributive 
adjunct.  Ex.:  Tauagin  mo  si  Fedro  (Call  Pedro).  DaUun  mo  rito  iyang 
librong  binasa  kov.g  kagab-i  (Bring  me  that  book  I  was  reading  last  night). 
Houag  mong  ivikain  iyiin  (Don't  say  that).  Lutoin  mo  itong  manuk  (Cook 
this  chicken).     Dalian  mo  iyang  tdbig  (Bring  that  water). 

XV.  Further  discussion  of  the  definite  particles  is  reserved  until  tlie 
indefinite  has  been  explained. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  Ill 

THE    INDEFINITE. 

I.  The  indefinite  particles  most  in  use  are  um,  mag  {nag),  and  ma  (na), 
which  will  be  explained  in  detail  hereafter.  These  are  called  active  par- 
ticles by  the  Spanish  grammarians,  but  indefinite  seems  to  be  more  appro- 
priate and  correct. 

II.  Sentences  in  which  the  subject  is  emphasized  have  this  in  the  nomi- 
native, the  verb  bein^  expressed  with  the  proper  indefinite  particle  which 
is  sometimes  preceded  by  the  article  of  common  nouns.  The  imperative 
indefinite  does  not  require  tlie  article  in  any  case.  Ex.:  Sigd'y  ha'basa 
niloug  lihro  (He  is  going  to  read  this  book).  Ihao  iTga  nagsahi  niychi  (You 
said  that  yourself).  The  object,  it  will  be  noted,  takes  the  genitive.  Sigd 
ang  magpapasial  (He  is  going  for  a  walk  [lit.,  "He  will  be  the  walker]). 
Ikao  ang  tumduag  hay  Juan  (Call  Juan  [be  you  the  caller  to  Juan]).  Si 
Juan  ay  ang  vagndkao  (Juan  was  the  thief). 

III.  The  indefinite  is  generally  used  in  an  intransitive  sentence,  where 
an  o!)ject  is  not  required  to  com{)lete  the  meaning.  Ex. :  Sungmumlat  ako 
(I  am  writing).  Sungmulal  ako  (I  wrote).  Susulat  ako  (I  shall  write). 
Nagaaral  kayo  (You  are  learning).  Magadral  kayo  (You  will  learn). 
Kungmakain  slyd  (He  is  eating).  Kungmain  kami  (We  were  eating  [but 
not  you]  ).     Kakaia  tayo  (We  will  go  eat  [all  of  us]  ). 

An  object  may  be  called  indefinite  when  the  idea  of  "a,  an,  some,  any" 
is  inherent,  or  an  undetermined  part  of  the  whole  is  indicated,  provided 
that  there  are  no  modifying  circumstances  of  time,  cause,  purpose,  instru- 
ment, or  place  in  conjunction  with  the  action.  Ex.:  (1)  Marnnong  ka 
nang  wikang  castilaf  (Do  you  understand  any  of  the  Spanish  language?) 
Marunong  ako  Idmang  nang  wikang  tagdlog,  hindt  marnnong  ako  mawjusup  sa 
tcikang  castila,  po  (I  understand  the  Tagalog  language  only;  I  do  not  know 
how  to  talk  in  Spanish).  Magsalitd  ka  i~ga  sa  wikang  tagdlog  (Then  speak 
in  Tagalog).  (2)  Maglahas  kanang  maiTga  silla  (Bring  out  some  chairs). 
Magdald  ka  dito  nang  j'oxfoms  ( Bring  some  matches  here).  Magdald  ka  dito 
nang  tahacos  (Bring  some  cigars  here).  Magdald  ka  dilo  nang  tdbig  (Bring 
some  water  here).     Maglutb  ka  nang  isang  manuk  (Cook  a  chicken). 

IV.  The  indefinite  is  also  used  with  sentences  having  a  definite  object  if 
a  part  and  not  all  of  the  object  is  meant.  In  some  cases  the  place-particle 
"  an  "  is  used  for  this  purpose,  as  it  does  not  indicate  an  object.  In  or  i  would 
be  used  if  all  the  definite  object  were  to  be  indicated.  Ex. :  Akd'y  knngmain 
na  nitong  lamangkati  (I  have  already  eaten  some  of  this  meat) .  Uminum  kayo 
nitong  tuhig  na  malindo  (Drink  some  of  this  clear  water) .  (1)  Magbiqay  ka 
sa  akin  niyang  tuhig  (indef.)  (1,  Give  me  some  of  that  water).  (2)  Bigydn 
mo  ako  iyang  tdbig  (def. )  (2,  Give  me  that  water).  Ihig  ninyong  magbili 
nitong  higdsf  (Do  you  wish  to  sell  some  of  this  rice?) 

V.  Actions  expressed  by  intransitive  verbs  Avhich  do  not  require  an 
object  take  the  indefinite  unless  there  are  modifying  circumstances  of 
cause,  purpose,  means,  instrument,  or  time  in  conjunction  with  the  action. 
Ex.:  Natif^od  ako  (I  stumbled).  Ano't  Idndi  ka  lungmaldkad  nang  matulinf 
(Why  don't  you  walk  quicker?)     Tnngmataud  siyd  (He  is  laughing). 

VI.  A  sentence  commencing  with  an  interrogative  pronoun  takes  the 
indefinite  if  the  subject  of  the  inquiry  is  an  agent,  and  the  definite  if  a 
determinate  object  is  asked  about.  Ex.:  Sino  ang  nagdald  nitong  viangd 
kdltoy/  (Who  brought  [was  tlie  bringer]  of  this  lumber  [timber]?)  Akoang 
nagdald,  p6  (I  brought  it,  sir  [was  the  bringer]  ).  Ani'i't  di  ka  nangungusapf 
(AVhy  don't  you  talk?)  Nahihiyd  ka  bagd/  (Are  you  ashamed  to?)  Sino 
ang  nagsalitd  nang  sinabi  mosa  dkin?  { Who  related  to  you  what  you  have  told 
me?)  [indef.].  Anong  ihig  mo?  (What  do  you  want?)  Anong  cabayo  ang 
hinilinild?  (Which  horse  did  they  buy?)  'Anong  is  a  contraction  for  ayjo 
ang  ( def. ) . 

VII.  The  indefinite  is  also  u,«ed  with  complex  sentences  in  which  the 
subject  is  amplified  by  an  adjectival  clause.  Ex.:  Any  tdno  gungmagana 
nang  kabanala'y  magkakamit  nang  kapalaran  (The  person  who  does  right 
will  obtain  happiness  [be  happy]). 


112  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

VIII.  It  must  be  noted  that  maka  in  the  sense  of  cause,  used  with 
roots  denoting  conditions,  wrongs  (torts)  and  betternients,  has  a  different 
construction  from  all  other  particles,  even  rnnkn  with  other  meanings.  In 
the  definite,  which  only  exists  with  /,  combined  with  in  in  the  past  and 
present  tenses,  the  agent  takes  the  nominative  and  the  ol)ject  tlie  genitive, 
like  indefinites  of  other  particles.  In  the  indefinite  the  agent  remains  in 
the  nominative,  but  the  object  takes  the  accusative,  which  is  always  pre- 
ceded by  sa  (not  by  nang).  Some  other  verbs  have  this  use  of  sa  also. 
Roots  conjugated  by  mag  and  man  retain  the  definite  forms  ^jar/  and  jjan 
with  maka. 

IX.  The  Tagalog  verb  demands  that  the  subject  of  a  sentence  shall  be 
expressed,  the  tense  being  indicated  by  tlie  A'erb  or  verbal  noun.  The 
subject  may  be  omitted,  liowever,  when  a  number  of  verbs  depend  upon 
the  same  subject,  except  in  the  first  clause,  where  tlie  verb  must  have  a 
subject.  As  will  be  seen  by  the  examples,  the  syntax  of  Tagalog  is  very 
simple,  but  care  must  be  taken  to  use  the  right  particles  and  tenses.  If 
not,  some  annoying  errors  are  liable  to  be  made  in  conversation. 

V.  For  any  common  verb  see  the  vocabulary  (English-Tagalog).  It 
must  be  borne  in  mind  that  Tagalog  has  many  words  expressing  variations 
and  modiiications  of  the  general  verb  as  well  as  other  languages.  These 
will  be  noted  in  the  proper  place. 

THE    DEFINITE    PARTICLE    "iN." 

I.  The  plain  root,  if  capable  of  being  verbali-ed,  is  sometimes  used  with- 
out a  definite  particle  if  an  adverb  of  time  or  the  context  makes  the  tense 
clear.  The  definite  particle  may  also  be  used  with  an  adverb  of  time,  but 
as  a  rule,  if  the  tense  is  to  be  emphasized  or  the  context  is  not  clear,  tense 
particles,  according  to  the  rules  of  the  language,  are  vised  in  the  verbal 
forms.  And  ang  sahi  mo  kaJiapon/  (What  did  you  say  yesterday?)  Ano 
ang  sah'i  mo  ngayoiif  (What  do  you  say  now?)  Ann  ang  sabi  mo  hukaa? 
(What  will  you  say  to-morrow?  [with  adverbs  of  time]  ).  Ano  ang  sinabi 
mo?  (What  did  you  say?)  Ano  ang  sinasabi  mo?  (What  are  you  saying?) 
Ayio  ang  sasabihin  mof  (What  will  you  say?)  Ang  sabihin  (the  person  or 
thing  mentioned).  Ano  bagd  ang  sasabihin  ko  kay  Ignacio?  (What  shall  I 
say  to  Ignacio?)  Sabihin  mo  sa  kaniya  na  tinduag  ko  siyd  (You  say  to  him 
that  I  have  been  calling  him).     Ang  sabilian  (the  conversation). 

II.  In  [Jiin  after  acute  final  vowel,  and  nin  in  some  cases)  is  the  true 
definite  particle.  In  is  prefixed,  infixed,  or  suffixed,  as  the  case  may  be; 
Itin  and  vin,  are  suffixes  only.  In  is  prefixed  to  a  vowel  root  and  infixed 
between  the  initial  letter  and  the  first  vowel  of  a  consonant  root  for  the  past 
(perfect)  and  present  tenses.  It  is  sufhxed  for  the  imperative  and  future 
tenses.  The  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  in  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  The  tenses  called  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  may  be 
expressed  in  Tagalog  in  two  ways.  The  first  pluperfect  is  formetl  1  )y  abiding 
nn  to  the  past  tense,  and  the  second  pluperfect  by  prefixing  na  to  the  root. 
The  first  future  yierfect  is  formed  by  adding  na  to  the  future  tense,  and  the 
second  future  perfect  by  prefixing  vui  to  the  root.  These  tenses  are  little 
used  in  conversation.  Na  and  ma  correspond  to  the  indefinite  verbalizing 
particles  uaka  and  maka  respectively. 

III.  The  subject  of  a  verb  conjugated  with  a  definite  particle  takes  the 
genitive,  except  in  the  cases  already  noted.  If  the  subject  is  a  pronoun,  it 
may  either  precede  or  follow  the  verb,  the  latter  usage  being  much  more 
common  than  the  former.  If  the  subject  is  a  noun  or  phrase  it  always 
follows  the  verb. 

IV.  For  the  conjugation  of  a  root  with  in,  whether  a  vowel  verb,  or 
a  consonant  one  see  the  type-scheme  folder  at  the  end  of  this  handbook. 

V.  Jn  prefixed  to  or  infixed  with  roots  of  the  following  classes  forms  words 
denoting  a  showing  of  the  properties  of  the  root  or  a  resemblance  thereto, 
as  the  word  "  like"  does  as  a  suffix  in  English.  (1)  Roots  denoting  flow- 
ers, fruits,  or  other  objects  imitated  in  gems  or  precious  metals  by  jewelers, 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  113 

denote  ornaments  or  jewels  of  the  shape  or  pattern  of  the  o])ject  named, 
when  in  is  used  as  above  explained.  Ex.:  Balingbing,  an  octagonal  l)errv; 
hliKiliiighIng,  a  jewel  with  eight  sides  like  the  berry.  Sanipaga,  Arabian 
jasmine;  sinampaga,  a  jewel  imitating  the  sampaga  flower.  (2)  With 
roots  of  colored  objects  in.  denotes  the  color.  Ex.:  Dumero  (Sp.  romero), 
rosemarj-;  iVmnntero,  rosemary-colored.  Gulag,  verdure,  vegetables;  gi- 
nukig,  greenish.  (3)  With  some  objects  in  denotes  rice  which  resembles 
the  object  in  the  shape,  taste,  or  smell.  Ex.:  Kand/i,  a  lily-like  flower; 
kinand'i,  rice,  with  an  odor  like  the  kanda.  Karayor.i,  needle;  kinardgom, 
needle-shaped  rice.  Kamalig,  warehouse;  Lalauigan  KamaUgan,  Aiiibos 
Camarines  (province) ;  kinamdlig,  Camarinesrice.  Kashdi,  musk  (fromSan- 
skrit  kaMurt,  through  Malay);  kinastidi,  rice  with  musky  odor.  Ang  kafo, 
tlie  carabao  tick;  kinatu,  rice  of  a  variegated  appearance,  resembling  the  k(d6. 
Kdstiht  (  Sp.  ),  white  person:  kinastifa,  a  white  class  of  rice.  AkuTgiliu),  a  tree 
with  fragrant  flowers  (<  'aiunigd,  odunda),  the  ilang-ilang;  inalaiTijilan,  rice 
with  this  odor.  Bumbang,  an  herb;  binambang,  aclass  of  rice  which  resem- 
l)les  the  bambnng  when  growing.  Angdulong,  a  very  small  fish;  dinnlang, 
rice  shaped  like  the  dulong.  Batad,  a  kind  of  pea-like  vegetable;  bincdri'd, 
rice  so  shaped.  Bnlaklak,  flower;  binulaklak,  rice  which  opens  like  a  flower 
when  heated,  or  like  pop  corn.  Porak,  the  flower  of  the  pungdan  or 
sabidnu;  jjiuorak,  rice  resembling  this  flower.  Sankt,  the  Chinese  anise; 
sinangk't,  rice  resembling  anise.  SumbUang,  a  species  of  sea  fish  without 
scales;  sinnmblhuH/,  rice  of  this  shape.  Tama,  body  louse,  grayback; 
tinama,  rice  shaped  like  a  tiunu.  Tumbaga,  copper;  tinvmbaga,  rice  with  a 
metallic  luster.  T^/^/^ajfa  is  copper  alloyed  with  a  small  amount  of  gold; 
it  is  from  Sanskrit  tdmraka  (copper),  through  INIalay  tambaga;  tembuga 
Tali'tliih,  common  reed  grass;  tinalahih,  rice  which  resembles  taldhib  when 
growing.  There  are  many  other  names  for  different  classes  of  rice,  but  the 
foregoing  are  the  principal  terms  derived  with  in  following  the  rule  cited. 
(4)  With  names  denoting  relationship  in  expresses  the  idea  of  persons 
occupying  the  place  of  such  relative  to  vsome  degree.  As  this  condition  is 
regarded  as  permanent,  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  to  ex- 
press present  tense.  Other  nouns  also  follow  this  rule,  with  some  excep- 
tions. Ex. :  Ali,  aunt;  inacdi,  uncle's  wife.  Amd,  father;  inaamd,  godfather. 
Amain,  uncle;  stepfather;  inaamain,  avmt's  husband.  Anak,  child  (son 
or  daughter);  inaanak,  stepson  or  stepdaughter,  also  godson  or  goddaugh- 
ter, ^l.sawo,  spouse  (husband  or  wife) ;  inaasdxa,  \o\er  or  mistress  (con- 
cubine). Bayan,  brother-in-law;  binabayao,  husband  of  sister-in-law. 
Biandn,  father-in-law  or  mother-in-law;  binibiandn,  wife  or  husband  of 
father-in-law  or  mother-in-law  (not  parent  of  wife  or  husband).  Manu- 
gang,  son-in-law  or  danghter-in-law;  minwnanugang,  one  regarded  as  such. 
Kapatid,  brother  or  sister;  kinakapatid,  half  brother  or  half  sister,  or  foster 
brother  or  foster  sister.  Ilipag,  sister-in-law;  hinihipag,  wife  of  brother-in- 
law.  BilAs  is  the  equivalent  fijr  binabayaoor  hinihipag.  Xitnd,  grandparent; 
tunntnino,  one  regarded  as  a  grandparent;  kanununuan,  ancestors.  Ajio, 
grandchild;  inaapo,  descendant.  Apo  sa  tuhod,  great-grandchild;  ap6  sa 
talampakaii,  great-great-grandchild.  Paina»gkin,  nephew  or  niece;  pina- 
pamani/kin,  one  regarded  as  such.  Pinsdn,  cousin;  pinipinmn,  one  regarded 
as  a  cousin.  Pinmng  bo.),  first  cousin;  pinsang  makalavd,  second  cousin, 
etc.  (5)  With  verbal  i-oots  denoting  the  preparing  of  food,  etc.,  in  denotes 
the  food  so  prepared,  provided  the  root  is  conjugated  in  the  infinitive 
indefinite  with  titn,  although  there  are  some  exceptions.  Ex.:  Maglngd, 
to  cook  with  a  spit;  such  as  camotes,  etc.;  Linagd,  vegetables  so  cooked. 
Magsigang,  to  cook  meat  or  fish  with  a  spit;  sinigang,  meat  or  fish  so 
cooked.  Lumugao,  to  stew,  to  boil  meal;  ang  linugao,  the  mush  or  stew. 
Maglugao  is  more  usual.  Samaing,  to  boil  rice;  ang  sinaing,  the  boiled 
rice.  Magi^ai)ig  is  also  more  usual.  Magtambong,  to  cook  fish  entire;  nng 
tinambong,  the  fish  so  cooked.  Tnmdpay  or  magldpay,  to  knead;  ang  tind- 
;)f///,  what  kneaded;  bread.  (6)  With  verbal  roots  conjugated  by  »;»,  the 
product  of  such  action  is  denoted  by  in,  prefixed  to  a  vowel  root  or  infixed 

6855—05 8 


114 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


with  a  consonant  root.  Ex.:  Sumidid,  to  spin;  sinulid,  thread,  anything 
spun.  Some  viag  roots  also  have  the  product  denoted  by  in.  Ex.:  Mchi- 
pipig,  to  press,  to  i-rack  rice,  etc.;  pinipig,  roasted  and  cracked  rice.  (7) 
With  some  roots  in  forms  adjectival  nouns,  the  tirst  syllable  of  the  root 
being  reduplicatd.  Ex.:  Kuan,  known;  ang  kinuknan,  the  person  known. 
Mdhnl,  dear;  ang  minamahal,  the  esteemed  (person).  Sinti'i,  love  (from 
Sanskrit,  rhiiitd,  thought,  through  Malay);  ang  .^inisintd,  the  beloved  (who 
loves  in  return).  Ang  nasintd  indicates  a  person  loved  without  being 
aware  of  the  fact. 

VI.  As  in  has  the  idea  of  attraction  inherent  within  it,  there  are  many 
classes  of  verljs,  conjugated  in  the  indefinite  infinitive  by  um,  which  take 
in  to  form  the  direct  object.  (1)  According  to  this  rule  verbal  roots  of 
taking,  asking,  and  appropriating  something  take  in.  There  are  some 
verbs  conjugated  with  mag  which  also  admit  in.     Ex. : 


To  buy  (general  term  ] 


To  take  (general  term ) ,  bring  or  take. 
To  carry;  bear,  etc.  ( bring  or  send) . 


To  scoop  out,  or  take  anything  out 
of  a  hole,  or  insert  the  hand  into  a 
hole. 

To  use. 

To  choose  (between  good  and  bad). 


To  select  (from  among  good  things). 


To  pillage;  to  plunder;  to   loot;   to 

despoil  the  enemy. 
To  seize;  to  snatch. 


To  pray  for;  to  plead. 


To  complain;  to  entreat;  to  implore, 
to  pray  (as  to  a  judge). 


To  request. 


To  borrow. 


Bumili.  Ang  binili,  what  was  bought. 
Gumutang,  to  buy  rice  b}^  the  ga- 
tang  or  chupa.  Unuhnot,  to  buy 
one  thing  out  of  many.  Umangkat, 
to  buy  on  credit.  Umaajnn,  to 
buy  fruits  of  the  country. 

Kuiiiidia.  Aug  kinidia,  what  was 
taken  or  obtained. 

Magdald.  Angdinald,  what  brought. 
Ang  ipinadala,  what  sent  (lit., 
"  what  was  ordered  brought"  ). 

Duinukoi.  Ang  dini'ikot,  what  taken 
out,  or  what  liand  was  inserted  in. 

Gumdmit.     Ang  gindmit,  what  used. 

Pumili.  Ang  pinin,  what  chosen. 
Ang pinilian,  what  rejected  (singu- 
lar). Ang  pinagpilian,  what  re- 
jected (plurality  of  objects). 

Hum'irang.  Ang  hinirang,  what  se- 
lected. Aug  hinira)~gan,  what  left 
out. 

SnnKunsam.  Ang.nnamsam,  thespoil; 
loot;  plunder. 

Uniagao.  Ang  inagao,  what  seized 
Agao  nang  tamis,  inagao  nang  asim, 
somewhat  of  sweetness,  and  some- 
what of  sourness  (said  of  any  sub- 
stance which  has  this  taste,  like 
some  fruits)  (idiom). 

DumaldiTf/in.  Ang  dinaldngin,  what 
prayed  or  asked  for.  Ang  dalang- 
inan,  the  deity  prayed  to  or  person 
pleaded  with. 

Dumaying.  Ang  dinai/ing,  what  re- 
lief asked.  Ang  idaging,  the  com- 
plaint. Ang  daiji)~gan,  the  person 
entreated,  implored,  or  prayed  to. 

Humim/i.  Ang  hiniiup,  what  re- 
quested. Ang  hi)Tgdn,  person  re- 
quested. 

Unmtang.  Ang  inutang,  what  bor- 
rowed. Ex. :  Inutang  ko  iyang 
salapt  ibinigay  ko  sa  kaniyd  kahapon 
(I  borrowed  that  money  which  I 
gave  him  yesterday ) .     Ang  iutang, 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


115 


To  borrow  (anything  except  money). 

To  demand  a  treat  (as  at  a  celebra- 
tion). 


To  catch  hold  of;  to  catch  on   the 

wing. 
To  absorb. 


the  cause  of  borrowing.  Ang 
utamjnti,  the  person  borrowed  from 
the  lender. 

Ilnmlram.  Avg  hiniram,  what  bor- 
rowed.    Ang  hibnan,  the  lender. 

Tinnarahan.  Ang  tinaruhan,  what 
received  as  a  treat.  Ex.:  Tlnu- 
(uruhan  namin  itong  kakanin  (we 
are  getting  these  s  weets  as  a  treat ) . 

Dumaklj).  Ang  dmakip,  what  seized 
thus. 

IliunitJiit.  Ang  hinithit,  what  was 
absorbed. 

VII.  Under  this  section  may  be  considered  in  prefixed  to  or  infixed  with 
the  personal  jiroimuns,  with  which  it  implies  the  idea  of  possession.  As  a 
suffix  with  these  pronouns,  in  [kin)  expresses  the  sense  of  regarding,  hold- 
ing, reputing,  etc.,  in  some  cases.     Ex. : 

Your.  Inyo.     Ang  iniinyo,  your  property; 

your.  Ini/ohin  mo,  consider  it  as 
your  own;  take  it  for  your  own. 

Kaniyd.  Ang  kinakaniyd,  his  [her] 
property.  Kakaniyahhi  ko  (I  will 
hold  it  as  his  [her's]). 

Kanild.  Ang  kinakanUd,  their  prop- 
erty. Katiilahin  mo,  regard  it  as 
belonging  to  them. 

Attn.  Ang  inaatin,  our  property. 
Inatin  niyd,  he  regarded  it  as  ours. 

Kanitd.  Ang  kinakanitd,  our  prop- 
erty. KinakanUd  ko,  I  regard  it 
as  yours  and  mine. 

Amin.  Ang  inaamin,  our  property, 
but  not  yours.  Aminin  ninyo  (you 
[plural]  regard  it  as  ours,  but  not 
yours). 

Akin.  Ang  inadkin,  my  property; 
mine.  Indkin  ko  (I  held  it  as 
mine).  Inadkin  ko  (I  am  holding 
it  as  mine).  Adki7iin  ko  (I  shall 
hold  it  as  mine). 

VIII.  Verbs  of  calling,  whether  by  voice  or  signs,  also  follow  this  mode 
of  conjugation.     Ex.: 


His;  her. 


Their. 


Our  (all  of  us). 
Our  (you  and  I). 

Our  (but  not  you). 
My. 


To  call. 


To  call;  also  to  bring;  to  fetch. 
To  make  signs  for;  to  motion  to. 


Tumduag.  Ang  tinduag,  who  or  what 
called.  Ang  itduag,  the  call,  in- 
strument, or  cause.  Ang  tauagan, 
the  person  called  in  order  to  be 
given  something.  Ex.:  iSino  ang 
tinatduag  mo?  ( Who  are  you  call- 
ing to?).  Tinduag  ko  si  Pedro,  p6 
(I  was  calling  to  Pedro,  sir). 
Tauagan  mo  siyd  nang  isdd  (Call 
him  to  come  and  get  some  fish) . 

Kumaon.  Ang  kinaon,  what  called, 
or  brought,  etc. 

Kumauay.  Ang  kauayin,  what  mo- 
tioned for.  Angikauay,  what  mo- 
tioned with,  or  the  cause.  A7ig 
kauaydn  the  person  motioned  to. 


116 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


IX.  Verbs  of  "searching  for  "  also  take  in  for  the  direct  object.     Ex. ; 


Humanap.       Ang    hindnap,      thing 

sought  for. 
Simialihao.      Ang    hinalihno,    what 

searched  for. 
Sumallksik.      Ang     sinaUksik,    what 

looked  for  in  this  manner. 
Sumungdo.      Ang    sinungdu,    person 

sought  by  another. 
Vmapohap.      Ang    inapdhnp,    what 

groped  for. 

X.  Verbs  of  moving,  when  not  due  to  turning  away  of  what  is  moved, 
also  take  in  for  the  direct  object.     Ex. : 


To  look  for. 

To  search  about. 

To  look  in  every  corner  for. 

To  go  in  search  of  another. 

To  grope  for  (as  in  the  dark  or  like 
a  blind  person). 


Kumiho.  Ang  kinibo,  what  moved. 
Synonym:  Kumislot;  umiho. 

Giunalao.  Ang  ginaldo,  the  mis- 
chief done  through  restlessness. 
A7ig  galauan  the  person  disturbed 
thereby.  Magalao  ang  kamay  niya, 
his  hand  ia  restless;  i.  e.,  he  is  a 
pickpocket  or  thief  (idiom).  Kag- 
alnuan,  mischief. 

Umugd.  Ang  inugd,  what  moved 
thus). 

Tumugoy.  Ang  iinugoy,  what  moved. 
S3'nonyms:  Urnugoy;  iimngd  (some- 
times). Uniugoy  also  means  to 
stagger,  to  totter. 

Umugug.  Ang  mugug,  what  shaken 
or  rocked. 

Lhimlog.  Ang  inulog,  what  shaken 
down. 

Umiling.     Ang  iniling,  what  denied. 

Lumuglug.  Ang  Imuglug,  what  sha- 
ken, as  a  tree. 

Kvmunday.  Ang  kimmday,  the  wav- 
ing thus.  Ex.:  Kinunday  nlyd 
(she  waved  her  hands  while  she 
was  dancing) . 

XI.  In  is  also  used  to  express  the  result  of  the  action  of  verbs  which 
signify  carrying,  cutting,  measuring,  or  weighing,  when  the  result  is  con- 
sidered on  the  side  of  the  agent  or  ended  therein.  Urn  is  generally  the 
indefinite,  but  mag  and  other  verbalizing  particles  are  to  be  found.  When 
the  result  of  a  verb  necessarily  falls  upon  a  person,  m  is  used  to  signify 
the  person.     Ex.: 


To  move. 

To  move  restlessly. 


To  shake  (like  objects  badly  packed) 

or  to  move  (like  loose  teeth). 
To  move  anything. 


To  shake  (as  something  in  a  sieve) ; 

also  to  rock  or  dandle  ( as  a  child ). 
To  shake  a  basket  or  measure  so  it 

will  hold  more. 
To  shake  the  head  in  negation. 
To   shake  anything,    as    a    tree   to 

gather  the  fruit. 
To  wave  the  hands  while  dancing. 


To  carry  (general  idea). 
To  drag  along. 

To  carry  on  the  shoulder. 


To  carry  a  child   on  or  suspended 
from  the  shoulder. 


Magdald.  See  under  verbs  of  bring- 
ing, taking,  etc. 

Humild.  Ang  hinild,  what  dragged 
along.  Means  also  "to  arrest." 
Ang  hinild,  the  person  arrested ;  the 
prisoner. 

Pumasdn.  Ang  pinasdn,  what  car- 
ried on  the  shoulder.  Ang  pasa- 
nan,  the  person  who  carried  any- 
thing on  the  shoulder. 

Magsahi.  Ang  sinabi  or  ang  sabihin, 
the  child  carried  thus.  The  cloth 
by  which  the  child  was  supported 
is  denoted  by  ang  isabi. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


117 


To  carry  on  the  head. 
To  carry  in  the  arms. 

To  carry  a  child  in  the  arms. 

To  carry  under  the  arm. 

To  carry  anything  in  the  lap. 


To  carry  l)y  the  mouth  (as  a  dog, 
cat,  bird,  etc.,  carry  food). 

To  carry  in  or  by  the  hands  (as  a 
basket,  jar,  etc.). 

To  carry  hanging  from  the  hand  (as  a 
pail,  etc.,  by  meansof  the  handle). 

To  carry  anything  along  (by  or  in 
the  hand). 

To  carry  on  a  pole  (palanca). 


To  cut  (general  term). 


To  cut  clothes  (as  a  tailor'). 


To  tear. 

To  chop,  to  hew,  to  cut  with  an  ax. 

To  cut  down;  to  fell  (as  a  tree). 


To  cut  into  pieces  (as  sugar  cane) 


To  cut  the  tuba  ]>alm  (to  obtain  the 
sap). 


MagKuriuiig.  Ang  sunotTi/in,  what 
carried  thus;  the  burden. 

MagjHuigko.  Ang  pinwngko,  what 
carried  in  the  arms.  Pangkohin 
mo  ilo  (carry  this  in  your  arms). 

Kumaloiig.  Ang  kinalong,  the  child. 
KaloiTgin  mo  siyn  (carry  him  in 
your  arms).  Ang  kahmjan,  the 
mother,  nurse,  or  bearer. 

Magkilik.  Ang  kinUik,  what  carried 
thus.  (With  accent  on  last  sylla- 
ble), magkilik,  to  carry  much 
thus. 

Magcandong.  Ang  kinandong,  what 
carried  in  the  lap.  Kinakandong 
niyd  (she  is  carrying  it  in  her  lap). 

Magtangay.  Ang  tinangay,  what  car- 
ried thus. 

Magsapo.  Ang  sinapo,  what  carried 
thus.  Sapohin  moiydn  (carry  that 
in  your  hands). 

Maghitbit.  Ang  bimtbit,  what  carried 
thus,  i.  e.,  the  pail. 

Magtaglay.  Ang  tinaglay,  what  car- 
ried along.  /Ano  ang  tataglayin 
mof     What  will  you  carry  along? 

Umusong.  Magusong,  to  carry  on  a 
palanca  between  two.  Ang  inu- 
song,  what  carried  thus,  as  a  pig, 
bundle,  etc.  Synonym  of  magu- 
song;  rnagluang.  Ang  tinuang, what 
carried  thus.  Usorigin  {(tiarTgin) 
ninyo  i(6  (carry  this  on  a  pole  be- 
tween you). 

Magpuiol.  Mamutol,  to  cut  up  (as 
cloth,  etc. )  Ang pim'dol,  what  cut 
or  cut  up,  as  the  cloth,  etc.  Ex. : 
Piitlin  mo  ltd  nangpahabd  (Cut  this 
lengthwise) . 

Tumabc's.  Magtabds,  to  cut  much. 
Ang  tinabds,  what  cut  out,  i.  e., 
the  cloth  or  suit,  etc.  Ang  tina- 
basan,  what  left  over,  also  place. 
Ang  pinagtabasan,  the  cuttings, 
clippings,  remnants,  or  places  of 
cutting  out. 

Gumisl.  Ang  ginisi,  what  torn,  i.  e., 
the  cloth  or  clothes. 

Tumagi.  Ang  tinagd,  what  chopped, 
e.  g.,  the  tree,  etc. 

Sumapol.  Mngsapol,  to  fell  much. 
Ang  sinapol,  what  felled  or  cut 
down.  Ang  isapo/,  the  means  of 
cutting  down,  e.  g.,  the  axe.  Ang 
pinagsapolan,  what  remained, e.g., 
the  stump. 

Umirid.  Ang  inirid,  the  sugarcane 
thus  cut  up.  Kairid,  a  piece  of  the 
cut-up  cane. 

Umarad.  Ang  araran,  the  palm  thus 
tapped. 


118 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  cut  into  pieces. 


To  cut  into  equal  pieces. 
To  cut  up  into  e(|ual  lengths  (as  sugar 
cane,  etc. ). 


To  cut  poles  or  bamboo  into  pieces; 
also  to  cut  at  a  distance. 


To  cut  into  pieces  (as  a  log). 


To  cut  water  grass  in  order  to  catch 
the  iish. 


To  cut,  as  with  scissors;  to  snip  off, 
applied  generally  to  cutting  hair, 
metals,  etc. 


To  split  open  (as  bamboo);  to  cut 
against  the  grain;  to  peel  off,  as 
shavings;  to  go  against  the  cur- 
rent; (flg.)  to  oppose. 

To  cut  or  break  a  roj^e,  cord,  or  sim- 
ilar object. 


To  cut  off  the  ears  or  nose. 


To  measure  (eithergrains  or  liquids). 


To   gauge;  to  measure    liquids    by 

means  of  a  rod. 
To  measure  by  palms  (8.22  inches). 


Magpalus.  Atkj  pinalas,  what  cut  up 
thus.  Manga  palaspalas  na  taluki, 
pieces  of  pure  silk.  Ayig  ipalas, 
tool  used  for  cutting  up. 

Umalus.     Ang  iualas,  what  cut  thus. 

Puminlid.  Magpinlid,  to  cut  much 
in  this  way.  Ang pininlid .  what  cut 
into  equal  lengths  thus.  Angpinag- 
pinlid,  the  large  amount  cut  thus. 
Ang  ipinlid,  the  utensil  used. 
Ang  ipagpAnlid,  the  utensil  used 
much. 

Pumidpid.  Ang  pinidpid  (1)  what 
cut  up  thus;  (2)  who  cut  thus. 
Aug  ipyidpid,  the  tool  or  weapon 
used.     Ang  pidpiran,  the  place. 

GumUing.  Ang  giniling,  the  wood 
thus  cut  up.  Ang  igi/ing,  the  tool 
used.  A.ng  mangigUing,  the  wood 
cutter. 

Magtalds.  Ang  iinalas,  what  cut  thus. 
Ang  pinagtalds,  the  large  amount 
cut  thus.  Ang  iktlos,  the  tool  by 
which  cutting  was  done.  Aug 
ipWftalns,  the  tool  by  which  much 
cutting  was  done.  Ang  pinagtaln- 
sun,  the  place  where  much  cutting 
was  done. 

Gum  ipit.  Maggupit,  to  cut  one' sown 
hair.  Ang  ginupit,  what  cut,  i.  e., 
the  hair  ormetaL  Angginupitan, 
the  person  whose  hair  has  been 
cut;  or  object  from  which  some- 
thing has  been  cut  off. 

SumaJtoTijat.  Ang  sinaliuTgat,  what 
split  open  or  peeled  off  thus.  <SV(- 
/iJiTijatin  nw  ilong  kanayan,  split 
this  bamboo. 

Magpatid.  Ang  pinalid,  what  cut 
thus.  Patarin  {Patda)i)  nw  iyang 
lubid,  cut  that  rope.  Mapntid,  to 
part;  to  break  in  two;  to  cease 
(tig.).  Napatid  ang  kaiiigavg  hi- 
niivja,  he  exhaled  his  last  breath; 
he  ceased  to  breathe.  Magkapatid- 
patid,  to  break  up  completely  (as 
a  cord  or  rope);  or  into  several 
pieces. 

PumoiTgos,  variation  Pundwjus.  Aug 
jnnowjos,  what  cut  off,  as  the  se\  - 
ered  ear  or  nose.  Pingas  has  the 
same  idea,  but  is  geneially  applied 
to  cutting  inanimate  objects. 

Tumakal.  A)tg  tinakal,  what  meas- 
ured. Takalin  mo  itong  bigds, 
measure  this  rice.  Ang  takaldn, 
the  measure. 

Tunidrol.  AngiindroJ,  what  gauged. 
Ang  itdrol,  the  gauge. 

Dunidngkal.  Ang  dinangkal,  what 
measured  thus. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


119 


To  compare  measures. 


To  weigh. 


To  balance,  to  consider  (f) 
To  verify  a  weight. 


Sumubok  or  marjsuhok.  Avgshmbok, 
( 1 )  one  of  the  measures^  thus  com- 
pared. (2)  Also  to  observe  closely; 
to  "shadow."  Ex.:  ISabukun  ino 
siyd  (watcii  him  closely).  An;/ 
pinagsiibok,  the  two  measures  thus 
compared.  Kambok,  equal  to  an- 
other thing.  Ex.:  Kasi'ibok  tuao 
fthg  ti'ibig  (the  water  is  the  depth 
of  a  man).  Magkusubok,  to  have 
an  understanding.  Ex.:  Nugka- 
kasubok  sila  ang  bait  (they  have  an 
understanding  with  each   other). 

Tumimbavg.  Ang  tininibaiig,  what 
weighed  thus.  Ang  timbanijan, 
the  scales  or  counterweight.  Ka- 
timbavg,  equal  in  weight.  Ako'y 
kalimbang  mo  (I  am  of  the  same 
weight  as  you  are). 

Tvmalard.  Ang  tinalarb,  what  bal- 
anced or  considered. 

Titmaya.  Ang  imai/a,  what  verified 
(obs.). 


XII.  Verbs  which  signify  destruction,  or  change  or  transformation  of 
the  object  as  a  result  of  the  action,  take  in  to  express  the  result  of  such 
action,  if  no  modifying  circumstances,  such  as  of  cause,  instrument,  etc., 
are  implied. 


To  destroy. 

To  tear  down;  to  raze. 
To  kill;  extinguish. 


Sumird.  Ang  sinira,  what  was  de- 
stroyed. 

Gumiba.     Ang  ginibd,  what  razed. 

Pumaiay.  Ang  jmiatay  ( 1 )  person 
or  animal  killed;  (2)  What  ex- 
tinguished. Aitg  ipatay  or  }>inag- 
paiay,  the  weapon  or  means  of 
killing.  Ang  pinagpatayan,  the 
place  where  a  nmrder  was  com- 
mitted. Siyd  pinalay  niya,  he  kill- 
ed him.  Ang  ipinatay  viyd  sa 
kaniyd  ang  baril,  the  gun  was  what 
he  killed  him  witli.  Pinntny  niya 
siyd  nang  baril,  he  killed  him  with 
a  gun.  Mamatay,  to  die.  Ang 
kamatayan,  death  (abstr. ).  Ang 
kinamaiaydn,  the  place  of  death 
(past  time).  A)ig  ikinamatay,  the 
cause  of  death  (past  time).  Ex.: 
Fatay  na  siyd  (he  is  dead  now). 
Namalaydn  uko  nang  amd  (I  have 
been  bereaved  of  my  father  by 
death).  Aling  bdhay  ang  kinavia- 
taydn  niydf  (In  which  house  did 
he  die?)  And  ang  ikinanmtay  niyaf 
( What  was  the  cause  of  his  death?) 
Nahirinan  siyd  nang  tinik  (he  was 
choked  by  a  fish  bone).  Magpa- 
iay,  to  sentence  to  death;  to  have 
another  put  to  death.  Mamdiay, 
to  kill  habitually.  Tigapagpatay, 
butcher  or  executioner.  Man- 
himatay,  to  faint  away.     Magpaka- 


120 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


matny  (1)  to  allow  one's  self  to 
be  killed;  (2)  to  commit  suicide. 

Sumuiwg.    A)igsi7iuuoy,what\mrned. 

TumastAs.  A  ng  tinastds,  what  ripped 
up,  undone,  etc. 

Pumalit.  Aug  pinalit,  what  ex- 
changed or  bartered. 

Humii.say.  Aug  hiniisay,  what  dis- 
entangled or  set  in  order.  M<ig- 
pnhihusay,  to  arrange  well,  to  set- 
tle things  with  care;  also  to  be- 
have well. 

Muglthn.  Ang  initim,  what  black- 
ened. Aug  iitim,  the  blackener. 
Kaitiman,  blackness.  Umitim,  to 
become  black. 

XIII.  Verbs  of  receiving  take  in  for  the  object  of  the  action;  some 
taking  in  for  the  thing  affected  and  an  for  the  person  affected,  as  will  be 
seen  from  the  examples. 


To  set  fire  to. 

To  rip;  to  unseam;  to  undo. 

To  exchange;  to  barter. 

To  arrange;  to  disentangle. 


To  blacken. 


To  accept;  to  receive. 


To  go  out  to  meet  anyone; 
come  bv  meeting. 


Tumangap.  Ang  tinangap,  what  re- 
ceived or  accepted.  Angktngapdn, 
the  person  from  whom  accepted 
or  received;  also  the  place.  Ang 
itangap,  the  cause  of  receiving,  etc. 
to  wel-  Sumaluhong.  Ang  sinali'ibong,  the 
person  met  or  welcomed  thus. 
Magsisalitbong,  to  be  received  by 
many,  as  a  governor,  etc.  Mag- 
kasalubong,  to  meet  accidentally. 
Ex. :  Nagkasalubong  ang  dalauxing 
rnagkapatid  na  babaye  sa  Maynila, 
(the  two  sisters  met  accidentally 
[by  chance]  in  JNIanila). 

XIV.  In  also  denotes  the  object  of  verbs  of  "inviting,"  etc. 


To  invite. 


To  invite  a  person  to  eat. 


Umdkit.     Ang  indkit,  who  invited. 

Umanyayd.  Ang  anyayahnn,  the 
person  invited. 

Pumiging.  Ang  jnniging,  the  person 
invited. 

Magpdnig.  Ang  pindnig,  the  person 
invited. 

Magtduo.  Ang  tinduo,  the  person  in- 
vited. Tauohin  mo  siyd,  invite 
him.  Tauotanohin  mo  ang  pagka- 
kain,  divide  the  food  for  each  one 
of  the  guests  (i.  e.,  put  it  on 
plates). 

Umalok.  Ang  inalok,  the  person  so 
invited. 


XV.  In  generally  denotes  the  person  affected  by  the  action  of  a  verb, 
with  those  verbs  which  necessarily  have  a  person  for  the  object,  on  account 
of  their  nature  and  meaning. 


To  prevail  upon;  to  persuade  with 

blandishments. 
To  wait  for. 


Magarogd.  Ang  inarogd,  the  person 
so  prevailed  upon. 

Humintay.  Ang  hinintay,  the  per- 
son waited  for.  Hintin  mo  sild, 
wait  for  them.  Maghintay  (1)  to 
wait  and  guard  something  for  an- 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


121 


To  carry  in  the  anna,  (as  a  child); 

(2)    to   aid,  to  succor,  to  protect 

(rare in  Manila). 
To  reprehend;  to  reprimand;  to  find 

fault  with. 


other;  (2)  to  delay.  Ex.:  Hovag 
moug  ildntay  sa  In'ik-as  ang  pug])ii- 
roon  mo  (do  not  delay  your  fj'Mng 
until  to-morrow). 

Suviaklidu.  Ang  .vnaklulu  ( 1 )  child, 
etc.,  carried  thus;  (2)  person  aided, 
etc. 

Sumalu.  Ang  sinald,  the  person  rep- 
rimanded or  found  fault  with. 
Ex.:  Saluhhi.  mu  sif/d  iiaug  kmii- 
yang  ginagawd  ( reprimand  him  for 
what  he  is  doing)  [ginawd,  what 
he  has  done].  Magsald,  to  find 
much  fault,  or  for  many  to  find 
fault,  etc.  Magkasald,  to  err,  to 
connnit  a  fault,  to  sin.  Ex.: 
Ilouag  moiig  ipagkasald  iio  (do  not 
commit  this  error  [sin].  Ipinag- 
sam/d  ko  ang  pakikipagauay  sa  inyd, 
(I  am  doing  wrong  in  quarreling 
with  you).  Ipinagsald  niyd  ang 
pakikipagauay  sa  inyo  (he  did 
wrong  in  quarreling  with  you). 
Ipagkasasald  nild  angpakikijmgauay 
sa  kaniyd  (they  will  err  in  quarrel- 
ing with  him).  Magkakasald,  ^-'ith 
reduplication  of  last  syllable  of 
particle,  means  ' '  to  forbid. ' ' 

Tumanong.  Ang  tinanong,  what 
asked;  the  question.  Magtanong, 
to  ask  about.  Ang  ilinanong,  what 
has  lieen  asked,  or  the  reason  for 
asking.  Ang  mapagtanong,  per- 
son fond  of  questioning.  Ang 
matanoiTgin,  the  questioner.  Ang 
tinanongan,  the  person  questioned. 

XVI.  In  generally  denotes  the  catch,  result,  or  quarry  with  verbs  of 
hunting  and  fishing.     A  few  other  verbs  also  follow  this  rule. 


To  ask;  to  inquire. 


To  hunt  (in  general). 

To  hunt  with  dogs  or  hounds. 


To   hunt   with   a   "bating"  or   net 
(generally  for  deer). 


To  hunt  with  a  shotgun;  to  use  a 
shotgun. 


To  catch  birds  by  means  of  a  bird- 
call, or  bv  a  snare,  or  with  another 
bird. 

To  fish  with  a  hook. 


Umdkad.     Ang  indkad,  what  hunted. 

Mungaso  (from  a.so,  dog).  Ang  inaso, 
the  chase,  the  game  caught.  Ang 
ipiiiaiTgaso,  the  dog  used  thus. 
Ang  niangangaso,  the  hunter  with 
dogs. 

Bumuting.  Ang  binating,  the  deer 
or  game  thus  caught.  Ex.:  Ang 
binating  ko  ang  bundok  (I  was  net 
hunting  in  the  mountains).  Ang 
binatingan,  the  place  of  "net 
hunting." 

Mainaril  (from  baril,  shotgun).  Ang 
maniamaril,  the  hunter  with  a 
shotgun.  Ang  pinamaril,  what 
shot  thus. 

Mamfali;  magpangatt  (from  katt. 
Ang  pinangati,  what  has  been 
caught  thus. 

Maminuit.  Angblninuit,  whatcaught. 
Ang  ibinuit,  the  hook.  Ang  ma- 
miminuit,    the    fisherman.      Ang 


122 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  fish  with  the  seine  or  net,  called 
"  lam  bat." 


To  fish  using  a  light  (as  also  to  hunt 
with  a  Hare). 


To  tish  (in  general). 


To  sweep. 


XVII.  In  is  also  used  to  denote  the 
swallowing,  and  analogous  acts. 

To  eat. 


To  drink. 


To  swallow  (food)  greedily. 


To  swallow  (gulp)  liciuids. 

To  sip  (as  soup). 

To  suck  at  (as  sugar-cane). 

To  bite. 


pivmnimnmiUtu,  the  canoe  or  place 
from  which  such  fishing  is  being 
done. 

ManldtJibat  (from  lamhal.)  Aug  li- 
nanibat,theratch;  the  haul.  A)ig 
ipdnUnnbat,  the  means  for  fishing 
thus,  i.  e.,  the  seine  or  net. 

MaiTijilao.  Ang  p'lnaiUj'dauan,  the 
place  where  such  fishing  or  hunt- 
ing was  done.  Ang  pinamjUao, 
what  caught  thus. 

Matigisdd  (from  isdd  fish).  Ang 
pmangisdd,  the  fish  which  have 
been  caught.  Ang  mungbTgisdd, 
the  fisherman. 

Magu'cdls.  Ang  inwalis,  the  sweep- 
ings; what  was  or  has  been  swe^it 
up  (from  walls,  broom). 

object  with  verbs  of  eating,  drinking, 

Kumain.  Ang  kinain,  what  was 
eaten.  Ex. :  Kinain  ang  kapatid 
na  lalaki  mo  ang  tindpay,  your 
brother  ate  the  bread.  Kanin, 
food  (cooked  rice).  Kakaniii, 
delicacies.  Ang  kandn,  the  eating 
place.  Aug  kakandn,  the  dining 
room;  or  platter.  Magkain,  to  eat 
much  or  by  many. 

Uminum.  Ang  ininum,  what  was  or 
has  been  drunk.  Inumin,  drink. 
Ang  inuman,  the  drinking  place; 
trough;  cup  (drinking  vessel). 
Maginum,  to  drink  much  or  by 
many.  Magpainum,  to  give  an- 
other something  to  drink;  (2)  to 
water  animals  or  fowl.  Ex.:  (1) 
Paiiinimrn  ko  siyd.  nang  tubig/ 
(Shall  I  give  him  some  water?) 
Houag,  painumin  mo  siyd  nang 
alak  (No,  give  him  some  wine.) 
(2)  Pbiainuni  ninyo  bagd  ang 
maiTgd  cabayof  (Did  you  water 
[give drink  to]  the  horses?)  Opo, 
(Yes,  sir).  Papaimim  ka  kay 
Toiuds  (Ask  Tomas  to  give  you 
something  to  drink).  [indef.] 

Lumamon.  Ang  linamon,  what  was 
or  has  been  swallowed  thus.  Var. 
Lumonlo». 

Lumagok.  Ang  linugok,  what  gulped 
down. 

Humigop .     A  ng hinigop ,  w hat  sipped . 

Pumangos.  Ang  pinangos,  what 
sucked  at. 

Kumagat.  Ang  kinagnt,  what  bitten. 
Magkagatun,  to  bite  mutually  (as 
two  dogs.)  Magkngatkagata»,  to 
pretend  to  bite  mutually,  ^'og- 
kakagalkagat  ang  dalawang  aso  ( the 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


123 


two  (logs  are  only  preUuiding  to 

l)ite  each  other).       MatTj/ai/af,    to 

run  around  biting,  as  an  animal  in 

a  rage. 
Siniiiiiglial.     Aug  xiiiitigJial,    who  or 

what  snapped  at. 
Kurii'ilikab.     Aug  kinabkub,    who  or 

jvhat  bitten  by  a  pig  thus. 
i^gumoyd.       Aug      i~ginoi/d,       wliat 

chewed. 

XVIII.  Acts  of  the  senses,  either  general  or  modified,  admit  in  to 
express  the  definite  results  of  such  acts,  with  two  exceptions.  These  are 
tumingin  (to  look  at)  and  tumimtim  (to  taste  liquor)  which  take  cm  as  a 
suffix  for  reasons  of  euphony. 


To  snap  at. 

To  bite  (as  a  pig  at  people). 

To  chew. 


To  see;  to  look  at. 

To  look  at. 

To  watch  for;  look  out  for;  to  sight. 


Kumitd.  Ang  kinitd,  what  seen  or 
looked  at. 

TuiirhTgin.  Ang  thujn&n;  ang  tining- 
ndn,  what  looked  at. 

Tnmando.  Ang  tinanno,  what  sighted. 
Tanauan,  watchtower;  lookout- 
place. 

Manando,  watchman;  lookout. 
To  look  attentively,  turning  the  eyes     Ltun'nTijdn.      Ang     liningdn,      what 
or  head.  looked  at  thus.      Ex.:  IH  mu  ako 

linhTijon.  (you  did  not  turn  your 
head  to  look  at  me). 

Umaninao.  Ang  inaninuo,  what  in- 
spected. 

Sumuliyap.  Ang  sinuHijap,  what 
looked  at  sideways. 

Panood.  Ang  pinanood,  what  be- 
held. 

Dumingig.  Ang  diningig,  what 
heard.  Ang  dingdn,  person  lis- 
tened to. 

Magklnyig.  Ang  kiningig,  what 
heard. 

Bnmatgag.  Ang  binntyag,  what  lis- 
tened to.  Var.,  kbianiatyag  and 
malyag. 

Umamoy.  Ang  inamoy,  what  smelled, 
i.  e.,  odor.  Amoifin  mo  Ito  (smell 
this). 

Sumangliod.  Ang  f^imtngliod,  what 
scented. 

Lumasap.     Anglinusap,  what  tasted 

Numamnam.  Ang  ninamnam,  what 
relished. 

Tumikin.  Ang  tiknu'in,  what  sam- 
pled. 

Tumijnng    (r. ).     Ang  tipiiTi/an,  what 
tasted  thus. 
To  taste  liquor  without  swallowing     Tumimtim.      Ang      Ibntinmn,    what 

it.  tasted. 

To  feel;  to  touch  (general).  Ilumipb.     Ang  hinipd,  what   felt  or 

touched.  Ex.:  W(dangninliilii))uKn 
kaniyang  bdhay.  [idiom]  (there  is 
nothing  to  touch  in  his  house,  i.  e., 
he  is  very  j)oor). 


To  Look  much  at  things,  noting  and 

considering  them;  to  inspect. 
To  look  sideways. 

To  behold;  to  view. 

To  hear. 

To  hear. 

To  listen  to;  to  pay  attention  to. 

To  smell. 

To  scent;  to  perceive  a  strong  odor. 

To  taste. 

To  relish ;  to  like  a  taste. 

To  sample;  to  try;  etc. 

To  taste  without  swallowing. 


124 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  presss  down;  also  to  clo^^e  or  seal 

a  letter. 
To  touch  lightly. 


To  touch  any  part  of  the  body  lightly 

l)ut  snddenl}'. 
To  touch  suddenly. 


To  run  into;  to  collide  with. 

To  touch  carelei^sly  and  affectedly. 

To  touch  with  the  lips. 

To  feel  f(jr  in  the  dark. 

To  pinch;  to  soften. 

To  rub:  to  soften;  to  annoint. 


To  pick  (as  a  guitar) ;  to  pluck  at  (as 
a  sleeve). 


Magd'dt.  Ang  diitav,  what  pressed 
or  closed.  Pandiit;  seal ;  wax ;  gum. 

Tumamjko  (r. ).  Ang  tinangko,  what 
touched     Syn.  Tumanghil. 


Humipik  (rare). 

son    touched. 

rare). 
Dwnantik  ( rare ) . 


To  play  any  instrument  or  ring  a  bell 
(by  strokes). 

XIX.  In  also  expresses  acts  of  the  will  or  nnnd 

To  remember. 


Ang  lilpikan,  per- 
Syn.  taghiu    (also 

A7ig  duntikan,  the 
person  thus  touched. 

Magparoriroii,  var.  magparorong.  Ang 
])lii(tgpayoirro)i,  what  touched. 
Aug  ipinugparonroii,  the  cause  of 
having  touched  thus. 

Sumagi,  var.  Suinagoy  (latter  rare). 

Gumnm'd  (rare).  Variations  of  this 
root  are  gamil,  gohil,  and  gomhU. 

Magdungd  (rare).  This  is  not  the 
verb  "to  kiss,"  which  is  Jivmalik. 

Hundkap.  Ang  hinikup,  what  felt 
for  thus. 

PumisU.  Aug  plnlsil,  what  rubbed, 
etc.  Pisl'in  mo  i(6  nang  kamay  mo 
(rub  this  with  your  hand). 

Humilot.  Ang  hhdlot,  what  rubbed, 
etc.  Ang  hilotan,  the  person 
rubbed,  etc.  Hilot  (n.),  midwife; 
maidt  ill  dot,  massageur. 

MagkalaJiU,  var.  rnagkalbit.  Ang  pi- 
nagka/nhit,  what  plucked  at  or 
picked  thus,  i.  e. ,  the  sleeve  or  the 
strings.  Ang  Ipinagkalabit,  the  in- 
strument or  means,  i.  e.,  the  fin- 
gers or  plectrum  (pick).  Ang 
paivjaltbit,  the  instrument  played 
upon  thus. 

Tiimugtng. 


To  calculate;  to  consider. 
To  desire;  to  like. 

(To  caress.) 
To  love. 


To  think. 


Umalaalo,  to  remember  (^jurposely). 
Maknalaala,  to  remember  (cas- 
ually ) .  Ang  inaalaalu,  what  is  re- 
membered purposely. 

MagbiUay.  Ang  pinagbubiday,  what 
is  being  calculated,  i.  e.,  the  result. 

Umibig.  Ang  innbig,  the  person  who 
is  liked  (and  reciprocates  the  lik- 
ing); (2)  what  is  liked;  also  ang 
ibigin. 

Undrog.  Ang  iniirog,  the  person  be- 
ing caressed. 

Suminta.  Ang  sinisintd,  the  person 
who  is  loved  and  who  loves  in  re- 
turn. Aug  naslsi7iid,  the  person 
who  is  loved,  but  who  is  unaware 
of  the  fact  or  does  not  return  it. 
Magsuituhan,  to  love  mutually. 

Maglsip.  Ang  inusij),  what  is  t)eing 
thought  of.  Ang  inisip,  what  was 
thought  of.  Ang  iimpin,  what  will 
be    thought    of.     3iagisipisip,    to 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


125 


To  esteem;  to  love. 

To  tliink. 
To  explain. 


To  inquire;   to  assure  one's  self; 
verify. 

To  verify,  etc. 


think  deeply;  profoundly.  Ang 
pagkamp,the  opi nion  ( act) .  Kaihi- 
pnn  (abst. ),  opinion,  thought. 

Ln)niiiag  (rare).  Aug  linUiyag,  what 
or  who  esteemed  or  loved.  Sintd 
is  more  common,  but  is  a  Sanskrit 
word  derived  through  Malay. 

Punimdim.  Aug  pi  iKipanimi  I  iui ,  what 
is  thought. 

Magsdlagsuy,  var.  magrngsui/.  Ang 
sinasalaysag,  what  is  being  ex- 
plained. Salaymyin  mo  ito  (ex- 
plain this), 
to  Uinnlitsithd  (r. ).  Ang  inimlusithd, 
whatisbeinginquired,  etc., var.  alo- 
i<il]id,  idea  of   verifying,  etc.,  also. 

Umusisd.  Aug  'innunisu,  what  is  be- 
ing verified.  Tcnmng  walnng  iinisd, 
a  person  without  carefulness;  a 
careless  person. 

XX.  The  making  of  something  from  raw  or  crude  material  is  expressed 
by  using  the  finished  product  verbally  or  as  a  verbal  noun  with  in,  the  ma- 
terial used  taking  the  nominative,  if  there  are  no  limitations  of  cause,  time, 
place,  etc.,  connected  with  the  action. 

Magbdhay  (from  hdhay,  house).  This 
word  iias  been  given  as  derived 
from  Malay  balei,  hall;  (;ourt,  from 
Sanskrit  valaya,  an  inclosure,  but 
it  would  seem  rather^  to  be  a  Ma- 
layan name,  as  in  Ngela  ( Florida 
or  Anudha)  Island  of  the  Solomon 
Group  the  word  is  vale  and  far 
away  in  Hawaii  is  hale.  There 
may  be  said  to  exist  intermediate 
words  throughout.  Ex.:  Bafiay'm 
mo  itong  kdhuy  (Put  up  a  house 
with  this  lumber).  Maghdhfiyha- 
hayun  (dim. ),  (to  play  at  building 
houses  [as  children  do]  ).  Naghd- 
lutyhdlKiyan  ang  manga  batcl  (the 
children  were  playing  at  building 
houses). 


To  put  up  a  house. 


To  roll  one's  self  up  in  a  cloak  or 
"baUlbal." 


To  put  a  shirt  on;  to  wear  a  shirt 
(occasionally),  from  hard,  a  cloth 
used  to  make  shirts,  and  also  mean- 
ing a  shirt  itself. 


To  wear  trousers. 


To  wear  shoes  (occasionally 
a  pair  of  shoes  on. 


to  put 


Maghal&bal  BaJabalin  mo  itong  kayo 
ho  (make  a  cloak  out  of  this  cloth; 
or  wrap  yourself  in  this  cloth). 

Magbard,  Itong  kayong  ito' y  babaroin 
niyd  (lie  [she]  will  make  a  shirt 
out  of  this  cloth).  An  indicates  a 
person  as  the  object  of  the  action. 
Ex.:  Baronn  mo  iyang  batd  iydn 
(put  a  shirt  on  that  child).  Ma- 
maro,  to  wear  a  shirt  habitually. 

Magsalau(d,  from  salaual,  trousers 
(Arabic,  Seluwar) .  Itong  kayong 
ito'y  sasalaualin  ko,  I  will  make 
trousers  out  of  this  cloth. 

Magsapin  (from  sapin,  a  shoe  or  san- 
dal). Itong  balat  na  ito'y  sasapinin 
nild  (they  will  make  this  leather 


126  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

into  .«hoes).  Mauaj/m,  to  wi-ar 
shoes  habitually. 

To  put  an  apron  (tapis)  on;  to  wear  Magtujiit'.  Ljavg  hnjottri  iijnn  a;/  (n- 
a  lapis  occa^ioualiy.  pi'<i»-  >"'//''  (let  her  make  an  apron 

out  of  that  cloth).  Manapis,  to 
wear  a  tapis  haltitually. 

To  carry  a  cane,  or  Imii/kad.  Marjlunkod.     Ttong  knlioj/  na  itijiitlnu- 

tiingkod  ko  (I  am  making  a  cane 
out  of  this  wood). 

XXI.  In,  used  with  the  name  of  a  destructive  agent,  denotes  the  present 
or  past  result  of  the  destructive  action.  It  is  prefixed  to  vowel  nouns  and 
infixed  with  those  beginning  with  a  consonant  {w  is  counted  as  a  vowel). 

White  ant  (termite).  Anaij.     Inanay  ang  nuuTjfd  Uhro  (the 

books  were  destroyed  by  the  white 
ants  [were  white-anted]). 

Locust.  Baking.     Binabalang  ang  pnluy  {the 

rice  is  being  destroyed  by  the  lo- 
custs). 

Rat.  Dagd.     Diin.idagd  ang  higus  (the  v'lve 

[hulled]  is  being  destroyed  by  the 
rats  [lit.  is  being  "ratted"]). 
Mandaragd ,  rat-catcher. 

Qrow,  TJak.    Liuuak ang saging (thehiw&wAf^ 

are  being  destroyed  by  the  crows 
[being  "crowed"]). 

XXII.  In,  prefixed  or  infixed,  used  with  words  denoting  parts  of  the 
body  indicates  past  or  present  pain  or  suffering  in  the  part  named.  The 
first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  to  indicate  the  present  tense. 

Head.  Ulo.     Inula  ako  (I  had  a  headache). 

Inuulo  niyd  (she  [he]  has  a  head- 
ache). Masukll  ang  ulo  ko  (my 
head  aches). 

Chest.  Dibdih.     D'mibdlh niyd  ( he  had  a  jiain 

in  the  chest). 

Stomach.  Sikmuru.      Sinisikmura     kaf     (Does 

your  stomach  pain  you? )  Op6,  xin  i- 
sikinura  ako  (yes,  sir;  I  have  a  pain 
in  the  stomach). 

.Vbdomen.  Tiydn.      Tiniydn  ako  (my  abdomen 

pained  me).  Tinitiydn  ako  (my 
abdomen  pains  me) . 

XXIII.  In  like  manner,  in,  prefixed  to  or  inserted  with  roots  signifying 
diseases  mav  denote  the  past  or  i>res('nt  state  of  the  disease.  The  first 
svUable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  Ui  indicate  the  present  tense.  If  a 
chronic  state  of  the  disease  is  to  be  expressed,  the  patient  is  denoted  t)y 
the  suffixing  of  in.  {hin)  to  the  root.  (The  future  tense,  it  must  be  remeni- 
beredi  reduplicates  the  first  syllable  of  the  root.)  The  suffix  in  may  also 
denote  a  physical  defect  or  tiie  result  of  a  disease. 

Smallpox.  Bulntong.     Angbinubulutong,  the  per- 

son who  is  having  smallpox.  Ang 
binulntong,  the  person  who  has  had 
smallpox.  Ang  bululoin/in,  the 
marks  of  smallpox.  Magbnldlong, 
to  become  marked  by  smallpox. 
Magkabnldtong,  to  have  an  epi- 
demic of  smali]iox. 

Asthma.  Hikd.     Ifikain,  asthmatic  person. 

tiout.  Piy<'>-     I'iyohin,  gouty  person. 

Abdomen.  Tiydn.      tiyanin,   cqrpulent  person. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


127 


Hawk  (several  «pecies). 


"IN  (hin;  nin)"  suffixed. 

XXIV.  la  [hin)  suffixed  to  names  of  birds  denotes  gamecocks  of  the 
general  color  of  the  bird  named.  Some  words  change  l!ie  accent  of  the 
root,  while  others  retain  the  original  accent.     Ex. : 

Laivin.     Lalawinin,  game  cock  of  a 
brown  color,  like  a  hawk. 
Crow.  Uol:      f/xaHn,  black  game  cock.     It 

will  be  seen  that  the  first  syllable 
of  the  root  is  reduplicated. 

XXV.  In  (hin)  denotes  the  completed  action  or  result  of  a  verb  which 
requires  an  object  if  suffixed  to  a  verbal  root  of  this  nature;  provided  the 
root  admits  in  for  the  direct  object.     Ex. : 


To  drink. 
To  eat. 


To  sew  (occasionally). 


Uminum.     Inumin,  drink. 

Kumain.  Kanin,  food.  Kakanin; 
kakain,  refreshments,  sweets,  nuts. 
These  last  words  formed  with  ka 
mean  "food-resembling." 

Tumaht.  Tahiin,  anything  sewed; 
tailor  work.  Magtahl,  to  sew  in 
company  (many)  or  to  sew  much. 
Manahi,  to  sew  for  a  living.  Man- 
anahi,  tailor;  tailoress;  seamstress, 
needlewoman  ( dressmaker ) .  J/or/- 
pataht,  to  order  to  sew.  Ex.:  Jto 
ang  pataht  niyd  sa  akin  (this  is 
what  she  told  me  to  sew). 

Sumabsab.  Ang  sabsab  in, what  grazed, 
i.  e.,  the  grass.  Ang  sabsaban,  the 
grazing  place;  pasture,  etc. 

XXVI.  In  used  with  verbal  roots  capable  of  expressing  qualities  which 
may  be  acquired  or  extended  to  persons,  animals,  etc.,  indicates  the  object 
of  the  action.     Ex.: 


To  i^raze. 


To  look  out  (as  from  a  window- 


To  swim. 


DumuiTijao.  Ang d?t*I7;«Hm, whatseen 
by  looking  out.  This  and  similar 
forms  contain  no  tense  idea.  Ang 
dinuiTgao,  what  was  or  has  been 
looked  at  thus.  Ang  dinuruugao, 
what  is  being  looked  at  thus.  Ang 
duruwjuiian,  the  window.  Man- 
uiTgao,  to  look  by  many  thus  or 
sometimesto  appear  at  the  window 
(also  idea  of  habit  thus).  Ex.: 
Honag  kang  manumjao  sa  diirumj- 
anan  (do  not  look  out  of  [or  appear 
at]  t h e  w i ndo w ) .  MarwTgao,  to  be 
at  the  window.  MiruruiTi/Ko  sii/a, 
he  is  at  the  window.  MakanuTiido, 
to  look  out  of  a  window  casually. 
3Iai/jindinH;ao,  to  order  to  look  out. 
MakiduiTijao,  to  join  another  in  thus 
looking  out.  Magkapadnm/an,  to 
look  out  suddenly,  moving  quickly 
in  order  to  do  so. 

Lnmamjoy.  Magi  :>~goy,  to  swim  car- 
rying something.  Ang  laiTgoyin, 
what  gained  by  swimming,  or  ob- 
ject swam  for.  Ang  iUnigoy,  what 
carried  while  swimming,  e.  g.,  the 
clothes;     also     by    what    means. 


128  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Laiigoi/ioi,  a  buoy.  Lanr/oyfhi,  a 
place  for  swimming;  wiiere  swim- 
minginay bedone.  P'niuglamjoymi, 
place  where  swimming  was  done 
while  carrying  something.  Ex.: 
Murunovg  kang  lumcnTijogf  Hindi 
pu.  (Do  you  know  how  to  swim? 
No,  sir. )  Ano  !  Tagnlog  hi  'f  hindl 
marunoiig  kcmg  luincuH^n;!?  (  What! 
You  a  Tagalog  and  don't  know 
how  to  swim?)  Toga  suan  kaf 
(Where  are  >ou  from?)  Taga 
bundok,  pu  (I  live  in  the  moun- 
tains, sir).  Paid  (I  did  not  know 
it). 

To  fly.  Lum'ipad.     Ang   liparm,  the   object 

of  the  flight.  Aug  i/lpad,  the 
wings,  or  instrument  of  flight. 
Ang  lipanin,  place  of  flight.  ^I((g- 
lipad,  to  fly  much,  or  to  and  fro. 
Magpallpad,  to  cause  or  teach  to 
fly.  Ang  pinalipad,  what  set  or 
taught  to  fly. 

To  dive  for;  to  dive  (occasionally).       Saniiskl.      Ang   sisirin,    what    dove 

for.  The  reason  for  diving  or  the 
body  submerged,  ang  ihtisid.  Ang 
si-^lran,  the  diving  place.  MagsUid, 
to  dive  much.  Ang  pinag.^yifJ, 
what  dove  for  much.  ManUid,  to 
dive  professionally  (for  a  living). 
Muninlsld,  diver. 

To  run.  Tumakho.     Ang  takhohin,  what  may 

be  run  for.  Takhohin,  runaway. 
Magtakhn,  to  run  much.  Ang 
itakhu,  the  cause  for  running  or 
what  is  carried  while  running. 
Ang  takhohan  ( 1)  the  place  of  run- 
ning; (2)  the  person  run  away 
from;  (3)  the  person  for  whom 
something  may  be  carried.  Tn- 
makhutakho,  to  rove  about;  to  run 
around;  to  gad  about.  Makatakho, 
to  be  able  to  run. 

XXVII.  In  used  with  ma  adjectives  which  have  an  attributive  sense 
imparts  the  idea  of  holding,  considering,  reputing,  etc.,  according  to  the 
meaning  of  the  adjective.  This  has  been  fully  explained  under  the  adjec- 
tive (q.  v.). 

XXVIII.  /);  suffixed  also  expresses  the  act  of  causing  emotion  or  sensa- 
tion in  others  when  used  with  roots  which  require  no  object,  and  form  the 
class  of  verbs  called  neuters,  which  are  generally  expressed  in  English  by 
"  to  be  "  followed  by  an  adjective.     It  may  also  be  prefixed. 

To  be  hungry.  MagiUvm.     Ex.:  Nagugutum  ang  ca- 

bayo  ( the  horse  is  hungry) .  Ilonag 
mong  gnlnmin  ang  cabayo  (don't  let 
the  horse  go  hungrj') .  Kagutu- 
nian,  hunger. 

To  be  thirsty.  Manhao.     Houag  mong  inuuhao  ang 

aso  (don't  let  the  dog  remain 
thirsty,  or  be  suffering  from 
ttiirst. ).      Ex.:    Nagugutum   baga 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  129 

hay 6^    (Are  you  hungry?)    Hindi'' I 
naui'thao  Inmaw/  akn     (No,  I  am 
only  thirsty). 
To  be  afraid.  Matakot.     Natatahot  kaf     (Are  you 

afraid?)  Op6  nga,  ako'y  natatahot 
( yes,  sir,  I  am  afraid ) .  Makatdkot, 
to  cause  fear.  Anr/  ikat/ikot,  the 
cause  of  fright.  Any  katukotau,  the 
person  feared,  also  tiling  feared. 
Ex.:  Anc)  any  kinatdtakolan  mo? 
(What  are  you  afraid  of?)  Avg 
kinatakotan  ko'y  amj  nuoTyd  tulim'in 
(I  was  afraid  of  the  ladrones 
[bandits]).  Tumakot,  to  iughten 
or  scare  another.  Any  takotin,  the 
person  frightened.  Takotin  ino 
siyd,  frighten  (scare)  him. 

XXIX.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  foregoing  that  in  is  not  used  with 
roots  conjugated  with  )ii<i,  except  in  certain  senses,  as  shown  by  the  above 
examples. 

XXX.  In  suffixed  to  terms  for  money  forms  words  denoting  an  object 
or  material  costing  the  amount  represented  by  the  money  quoted.  The 
first  syllable  of  the  root  is  duplicated,  but  the  accent  does  not  change. 
Ex.: 

Half  peso  (25  cents  U.  S.  currency).     Salapi.     Sasalapiin,    a    half- peso's 

worth. 
Peso  (50  cents  U.  S.  currency).  Pisos.     Pijnsosin,  a  peso's  worth. 

XXXI.  In  suffixed  to  some  nouns  when  paying  compliments,  etc., 
Indicates  that  the  party  addressed  resembles  or  partakes  of  the  qualities 
expres-sed  by  the  word  used. 

The  Candti  (which  has  a  sweet  odor).     Kandd.     Kandahiii,  a  sweet  person. 
Honey.  Pulot.     Pulotin,  honey  (term  of  en- 

dearment ) . 

XXXII.  Suffixed  to  roots  capable  of  being  expressed  with  the  idea  of 
plurality,  in  denotes  something  to  have  taken  place  many  times.  The 
accent  of  the  root  changes  invariably.     Ex. : 

Idea  of  whipiiing.  Hampds.     i/awj^asai,  whipped  many 

times. 

To  lose;  to  miss.  Matvald.     IFaZam,  to  lose  many  times. 

To  sue  another;  to  litigate.  Magusap.      Usapin,a  suit  tried  many 

times.  Palausap,  barrator  (one 
who  is  continually  engaging  in 
causeless  litigation). 

XXXIII.  Nin,  when  prefixed  to  class  names  of  human  beings  signifies 
a  resemblance  to  the  class  named.     Ex. : 

Woman;  female.  Bahaye.     Bahaynin,  eUeimnaie  luan. 

Binabaye,  has  almost  same  mean- 
ing. 

Man;  male.  Lalaki.    Zo7rtA-//(m,  masculineorman- 

nish  woman  or  girl. 

XXXIV.  The  object  to  obtain  possession  of  which  an  intransitive  action 
is  performed  sometimes  takes  in,  if  not  otherwise  expressed.     Ex.: 

To  go  or  come  out;  to  take  out.  Lumabds.     Any  lahasin,  who  or  what 

sought  thus;  object  for  which  ac- 
tion performed.  Maglahas,  to  take 
out.     Any   labsdn,  what  may   be 

6855—05 9 


130 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


taken  c»ut,  (an  fund  from  the  cook- 
ing iiot ),  or  what  may  flow  out  of 
the  body  (as  blood,  etc.).  Ex.: 
Labsun  mo  ak6  nang  kauin  (take 
some  rice  out  for  me).  Maghihaa- 
labds,  to  go  out  and  come  in. 

Lumokso.  Ant/  /o/.'.*o/(/»,\\  hat  jumped 
for.  Ang  lokmhan,  the  place  of 
jumping.  Maglokso,  tojumpmuch, 
or  by  many.  Magloksohan,  to 
jump  by  many  in  competition. 

Ltimut'ong.  Ang  lusowjin,  oV)jecl 
leaped  down  for  or  alighted  for. 
Ang  lusoiTgan,  the  place  of  lighting. 
Idiom.  Lusong  na  palad,  a  leap 
(stroke)  of  luck.  Maglusong,  to 
throw  down  or  push  down. 

Puinanaog.  Angpanaogin,  theobject 
for  which  action  may  be  per- 
formed. Ang  panaognn,  the  place 
or  person  for  whom  action  may  be 
performed.  Ex.:  Panaognn moako 
nang  iubig  (bring  me  some  water 
down  here).  J/ap'^(a;(ao(7,  to  bring 
something  down  thus,  or  to  go  or 
come  down  much. 

XXXV.  Some  transitive  (requiring  an  object)  verbs  do  not,  and  some 
intransitive  verbs  do,  admit  in. 


To  jump. 


To  leap  or  jump  down;  (2)  to  aUght. 


To  go  or  come  down  (the  stairs  or  a 
ladder,  etc.). 


XXXVI.  In  prefixed  to  or  infixed  with  a  root  to  which  an  is  suffixed  at 
the  same  time  is  used  to  express  the  result  of  an  action  when  the  said  result 
is  a  concrete  object.     Ex: 


To  embroider  mats  (petates). 

To  do  fine  needlework;  to  do  fine 
sewing. 


Magsdbat.  Sinabatan,ai\ embroidered 
mat  (petate). 

Suniulani.  Sinulaman,  fine  needle- 
work, as  a  handkerchief  or  other 
article  of  fine  sewing. 

XXXVII.  The  same  construction  is  also  used  to  express  the  following: 
(1)  Things  prepared  for  food  from  the  raw  material.  (2)  Acts  done  with 
the  object  expressed  by  the  root.  (3)  The  refuse  caused  by  some  actions. 
Pluralitv  with  the  last  is  expressed  by  the  use  of  the  definite  prefix  pag  in 
connection  witli  in  (pinag).     Ex.: 


Egg. 
Honey. 

To  peel  rattans  (bejuco). 
To  thresh. 

To  saw. 

To  sort  cotton  or  silk;   to  cull;   to 
pick  over. 


Itlog.    Initlogdn,  anythingmade  from 

eggs,  as  cake  or  an  omelet,  etc. 
Pulot.       Pinulotdn,    anything   made 

Avith  honey  in  it.     PnloU'in,  sweets 

made    from    honey.       Pulot-gatd, 

honey  and  cocoanut  milk. 
Kumayds.      Kinayamn,  the  peeling 

(sing.).      Ang  pinagkayasan,  the 

peelings  (plur. ). 
Gumiik.       Giniikan,    straw.      Pina- 

giikan,   much   straw.      Magiik,   to 

thresh  much. 
Lnmagnri.     Plnaglagarian,  sawdust. 

Ang  manlalagari,  the  sawyer. 
PinniU.      Ang  pinilihan,  the  refuse; 

waste. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  131 

MA— IN    (HIN). 

XXXVIII.  Jn  (Jiin)  suffixed  and  ma  prefixed  to  roots  signifying  mental 
emotions,  passions,  and  involuntary  actions  form  adjectival  nouns  which 
generally  require  to  be  expressed  in  l^^nglish  by  an  adjective  and  a  noun. 

XXXIX.  If  the  root  admits  of  contraction,  begins  with  /,  or  an  intensive 
degree  is  to  l)e  expressed,  the  lirst  syllable  of  the  root  may  be  reduplicated. 
These  words  have  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable  as  a  rule.  For  examples 
see  under  ina. 

XL.  It  may  be  repeated  here  that  acquisition  or  assimilation  is  generally 
denoted  ))y  in;  the  instrument,  if  allowable,  and  the  reason  for  the  carry- 
ing out  of  the  action  by  i;  and  the  place,  or  the  person  from  whom,  by  an. 
Additional  examples: 

To  reach;    to  overtake;  (2)  to  con-     Umuhul.     ylj?5r  o6u«/n,  what  reached, 
dude  (as  a  meeting).  etc.    .4n9iH((6i(<,  whatwasreached, 

etc.  Aug  ubutan,  the  person  over- 
taken or  thing  reached  for.  TJtna- 
Imt,  to  reach  for  one's  self.  Maga- 
hul,  to  reach  for  another.  Ang 
pagi'ihut,  the  act  of  reaching.  M<tga- 
butan,  to  reach  for  each  other  rnu- 
tually.  Magahiiiabi(t(tn.  to  reach 
many  things  or  pass  things  from 
hand  to  hand  in  numbers.  Maka- 
dbut,  to  take;  to  be  able  to  reach. 
Makidbiit,  to  ask  another  to  reach 
for  something.  Ex.:  Nakiabul  ako 
kay  Juan  navg  tubig  ( I  askf  d  Juan 
to  reach  me  [get  for  me]  some 
water) . 

To  buy.  Bumili.   Ang  bilhin  or  a )n/  nabiU,\\ha.t 

bought.  Aug  ibili,  the  purchasing 
agent  ( money  or  article ) .  A  ng  bil- 
hdn  or  ang  nabilhan,  the  person 
from  whom  bought,  i.  e. ,  the  seller. 
Ang  binilhdn,  the  person  from 
whom  something  was  or  has  been 
bought.  Angibinill,  (1)  the  money 
with  which  something  was  or  has 
been  bought;  (2)  the  person  for 
whom  something  was  or  has  been 
bought.  Ang pagbili,  the  buying; 
purchasing  (act).  Mamili,  to  buy 
much.  Ang  pamimili,  the  buying 
of  many  things  (act).  Ang  nami- 
mili,  the  buyer  by  wholesale,  or 
liberal  buyer.  Ex.:  PinamUi  ko 
iyang  manga  kalakal  (I  bought 
those  goods  at  W'holesale).  Maka- 
bili,  to  be  able  to  buy.  Ang  naka- 
bili,  the  person  able  to  buy  (past) . 
Ang  ipinabili,  the  time,  reason,  or 
price  in  or  for  which  something  is 
or  has  been  bought.  Ang  mai~gd 
pinabilhan,  thesellersthus  (many). 
Ang  kabiU,  the  person  with  whom 
a  purchase  has  been  agreed  upon. 
Ang  nagkabUihan,  the  buyer  and 
seller  thus  agreed  (past  teUvse). 
Ang  pagkabilhan,  the  cost  (past 
tense).     Ex.;  Pagkabilhan  ko  man 


132  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

nang  hidiay,  parordon  ako  (even 
if  it  should  cost  me  my  life,  I  will 
go). 

To  sell.  Magbili.     Ang    ipagbiU,  what    sold. 

Ang  ipinagbili,  what  was  or  hag 
been  sold.  Ang  pinagbilhan,  the 
person  to  whom  sold  (past  tense) ; 
the  place,  or  the  price.  Aug  nal- 
pagbU'i,  what  has  been  sold  by  error. 
Ang  iiapugbilhdn,  the  money  real- 
ized from  what  has  been  sold.  Aug 
j)agbibi!i,  the  act  of  selling.  (The 
.  act  of  buying  is  ang  pagbili. )    Mag- 

bibili,  to  sell  by  wholesale. 

To  snatch;  to  pull  up  by  the  roots;  to  Kumamkam.  Ang  ktnamkavt,  what 
take  by  force.  snatched,  etc.,  thus  (past  tense). 

Ang  kamkamin,  what  snatched, 
pulled  up,  etc.  (no  tense  idea). 
MatTgamkam,  to  go  about  pulling 
up  things  (as  a  gardener  pulls  up 
weeds). 

To  take.  Kumuha.     Ang  kinuha,  what  was  or 

has  been  taken.  Ang  ikuha,  the 
means  for  taking  (no  tense  idea). 
Ang  kunin,  what  taken  (no  tense 
idea) .  Ang  iklnulta,  the  means  by 
which  something  was  or  has  been 
taken.  Aug  kunun,  the  place  or 
person  from  whom  taken. 

To  request;  to  ask  for.  HrimiiTgt.     Ang  liiningi,  what  asked 

for.  Ar)g  nuhlngi,  what  obtained 
by  asking.  Ang  huTgln,  what  asked 
for  (no  tense  idea). 

To  close  the  hand.  Kumimkim.     Magkimkim,    to  grasp; 

to  close  the  hand  upon.  Ang  kitn- 
kimin,  what  grasped.  Ang  kinhn- 
kim ,  what  was  or  has  been  grasped. 
^iyig  ikimkim,  the  grasping  instru- 
ment; e.  g.,  the  hand. 

THE    PARTICLE    I. 

I.  The  definite  particle  i,  which  is  almost  invariably  a  prefix  and  found 
as  an  infix  with  a  very  few  words  for  strictly  euphonic  reasons,  is  used 
with  sentences  or  phrases  by  which  the  subject  is  represented  as  losing  con- 
trol of  something,  expulsion,  cause,  means,  instrument,  time  (not  tense), 
and  verbs  of  adjusting,  copying  into,  transferring,  translating,  transplant- 
ing, etc.,  in  the  latter  case  indicating  the  object  of  the  verb. 

II.  Sentences  or  phrases  including  a  verb  with  i  have  the  agent  in  the 
genitive,  the  direct  ol)jec't  in  the  accusative  (if  there  is  a  direct  object), 
and  the  word  denoting  the  instrument,  time,  or  cause  in  the  nominative. 
The  nominative  word  is  emphasized  by  being  placed  at  the  l)eginning  of 
the  sentence  or  phrase. 

To  pinion;  to  tie  the  hands.  Gnmapos.     Ang  igapos,  the  means — 

i.  e.,  the  rope.  Ex.:  Igapos  mo  sa 
bilangohi  itong  pnntaU  ( Pinion  the 
prisoner  with  this  rope).  Em- 
phatic: Itong  pantali  igapos  mo  sa 
bilangohi  (with  this  rope  pinion 
the  prisoner) . 


TAGALOG    LANGirAGE.  133 

III.  /,  meaninfi;  cause,  is  generally  combined  with  ka,  the  definite  form  of 
maka,  forming  ika;  ami  further  with  in  for  the  past  and  present  tenses,  ikina. 

To  come  here.  Pumarito.     Ang  ipinarito,  the  reason 

or  time  of  coming  here.  Aug  iki- 
naparitu,  the  reason  or  time  tluis 
(past  tense).  Ex.:  And  ungikluu- 
jjarilo  viof  (What  did  you  come 
here  for?)  Si  Juan  ang  ikinaparito 
ko  (Juan  was  the  cause  of  my 
having  come  here ) .  Sino  ang  pina- 
ritohan  mof  (  Who  did  you  come 
to  see  here?)     Si  Juan  (Juan). 

ly.  Some  verbal  roots  have  the  idea  of  going  away,  leaving,  etc.,  inherent 
in  themselves,  and  therefore  have  the  definite  in  either  in  or  i.     Ex. : 

To  go  away;  to  leave.  Utnalis.      Ang    inalis,    the     leaving 

(pref.  to  ang  ialis).  Kahapon,  ang 
inalis  ko  (yesterday,  I  left).  Ang 
pagalis,  the  act  of  leaving.  Maga- 
lls,  to  take  something  away.  Ang 
pagaalis,  the  action  of  taking  some- 
thing away.  Kapag<ialis  ko  nito 
ngayon  (I  have  just  finished  tak- 
ing this  away).  Makaalis,  to  be 
able  to  go  away.  Makapagalis,  to 
be  able  to  take  away. 

V.  An  indirect  object  following  a  preposition  takes  the  genitive  with  a 
sentence  or  phrase  using  i,  but  the  construction  of  the  rest  of  the  sentence 
or  phrase  is  unchanged.     Ex. ; 

To  buy.  Bumill.    Ibili  mo  ang  hatd  nang  kaka- 

nin  (Buv  some  sweets  for  the 
child). 

To  carry;  to  accompany.  Humatid.     Ihatid  mo   ako  sa  ha  hag 

nang  amd  mo  (Accompany  me  to 
your  father's  house  [to  the  house 
of  your  father]).  Maghalid,  to 
send;  to  remit.  Maghatidhatiran, 
to  send  to  each  other  mutually. 

To  look  for.  Humanap.    Ihdnap  mo  akd  nang  isang 

mabiUing  cabayo  { Look  for  a  good 
horse  for  me).  Ihdnap  mo  ako 
nang  maiTgd  itlog  (Look  for  some 
eggs  for  me). 

VI.  The  person  for  whom  some  act  is  done  and  the  indirect  object  of 
an  action  benefiting  or  performed  for  the  benefit  of  another,  take  the 
nominative;  the  verb  being  used  with  i  and  the  proper  tense  forms.  The 
foregoing  sentences  are  also  examples  of  this,  as  well  as  the  following 
examples: 

To  cook ;  to  make  by  cooking  or  like     Maglutb.     Ex. :  Ipaglutb  mo  ang  capi- 
process.  idn  nang  sicolate  ( Make  some  choc- 

olate for  the  captain).  Tpagluto 
mo  ako  nang  kanin  (Cook  me  some 
rice). 

To  build  a  house.  Magbdhay.    Ipagbdhay  mo  ako  (Build 

me  a  house). 


134 


TAQALOG    LAKOUAGE. 


VII.  /  generally  replaces  in  with  verl)s  which  admit  both  direct  ami 
indirect  objects,  i  ))eing  used  to  express  the  direct  object  (accusative) 
and  an  exjiressing  the  indirect  object  (dative,  etc.)- 


Ex. 


To  recommend. 


To  make  a  gift;  to  present  with. 


To  advise. 


To  give  back;  to  restore. 


To  tell;  to  narrate;  to  report. 


To  talk;  to  speak. 


Maghilin.  Ang  ipagbilin,  the  rec- 
ommendation. Ang  ijmiughilin, 
what  was  or  has  been  recom- 
mended. Ang  pai/hUuKtn,  the  per- 
son recommended  (no  tense  idea) . 
Ang  pinagbilinan,  the  person  who 
was  or  has  been  recommended. 

Maghiyaya.  Ang  ipinngbiyayn,  what 
was  or  has  been  given,  i.  e.,  the 
gift.  Ang  pinagbiyayaan,  the  per- 
son to  whom  something  was  or  has 
been  gi\-en.  Mabiyayang  to  no,  a 
liberal  person. 

Maghdtol.  This  verb  also  means  in 
some  cases  to  procure  women. 
Ang  ihatol,  the  advice.  Ang  ihi- 
natol,  what  was  or  has  been  ad- 
vised. Ang  hntolan,  the  person 
advised.  Ang  hinatolnn,  the  per- 
son who  was  or  has  been  advised. 
Ang  rpnghi'ttol,  the  woman  pro- 
cured. Mupnghatol  na  lalaki,  pro- 
curer; panderer.  Mnpaghi'itol  na 
babaye,  procuress. 

Magmoli.  This  verb  also  means  to 
go  back,  to  return  to  the  place  of 
starting.  Ang  Isinaoll,  what  was  or 
has  been  restored.  Ang  ■^indolian, 
the  person  to  whom  something 
was  or  has  been  restored.  Ang 
pagsaoldn,  the  place  returned  to. 

MagsaUtd.  Ang  mlilin,  what  told  or 
reported  (no  tense  idea).  Ang 
sinalitd;  ang  islnalitu,  what  was  or 
has  been  told,  etc.  ^Ing  sinasalitd; 
ang  ifdnasalltd,  what  is  being  told, 
etc.  Ang  samlitnt;  ang  isasalild, 
what  will  be  told  or  reported. 
Ang  pagsalitaan,  the  person  told 
or  reported  to  (no  tense  idea). 
Ang  plnagsaUlaun,  the  person  told, 
etc.  (past  tense).  Ang  pinagmsa- 
litadn,  the  person  being  told  or 
reported  to  (present  tense).  Ang 
pagsamlitadn,  the  person  to  be 
told  or  reported  to  (future  tense). 
Ang  ipinagi^nlitd,  what  was  told 
and  the  reason  for  telling.  Ang 
nagsalitd,  the  teller  (past  tense). 
Ang  nagmsahid,  the  narrator 
(present  tense).  Ang  magsasalitd, 
the  teller  (future  tense).  Ang 
kasalitaan,  the  companion  in  tell- 
ing; the  coreporter.  Masalitd, 
garrulous,  like  an  aged  person. 
iSumabi.  Ang  tiabilih),  what  saifl  or 
the  person  or  thing  mentioned. 
Magsabi,    to    converse;     to     say. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  185 

A  III/  isahi,  the  reason  or  cause  of 
the  conversation.  Anc/  isinabi, 
what  was  or  lias  been  said.  Ang 
iphiaysabi,  what  was  or  has  been 
said  and  the  reason  or  cause.  A^ig 
nafiilnni,  tlie  conversation  or  story. 
A)ig  piungsdhiliini,  what  said  to  a 
certain  person  or  said  at  a  certain 
place. 
To  signal.  Tumurb.     Magturu,  to  point  out;  to 

show;  ({. )  to  teach.  Ang  itinuro, 
what  signaled,  pointed  out  or 
taught.  Aug  tinurocni,  person 
shown  (taught)  or  signaled  to. 

Other  verbs  which  have  two  objects  like  the  foregoing  are  unidral,  "to 
teach;"  maghalM,  "to  report;"  magbigay,  "to  give;"  and  magbiii,  "to 
sell, "  which  have  been  or  will  be  explained  in  otlier  places. 

VIII.  In  tlie  majority  of  cases  i  expresses  the  means  or  instrument  by 
which  an  action  is  brought  about.  It  is  prejired  d'lreMy  to  the  root  for 
those  conjugated  with  uin  in  any  manner,  and  to  the  verbalizing  jiarticle 
in  the  other  conjugations.  Tliis  applies  to  all  tenses.  The  first  syllable 
of  the  root  or  the  last  syllable  of  the  particle,  as  the  case  may  be,  redupli- 
cate in  the  present  and  future  tenses.  In  the  second  pluperfect  and  second 
future  perfect  tenses  the  particle  /  is  inserted  between  the  particle  na  or 
via  and  the  root,  whether  the  latter  be  simple  or  compound.     ( See  tables. ) 

IX.  The  root  denoting  an  instrument,  if  capable  of  conjugation,  may 
denote  the  indirect  object,  if  there  is  no  nominal  direct  object  in  the  sen- 
tence. Ex.:  Alio  ang  ipimttin/niydf  (AVhat  was  he  killed  with?)  Ib'mdril 
niyd  (he  was  killed  with  a  gun).  With  in  the  sentence  would  be:  pinaiay 
niyd  nang  bnril  (he  was  killed  with  a  gun).  In  the  last  example  the  nomi- 
nal snl)ject  hdril  is  expressed.  (See  tables  for  the  conjugation  of  an  instru- 
ment with  /,  and  with  means  for  accomplishment  of  an  action. ) 

X.  /is  also  used,  as  has  been  stated,  to  express  the  means  for  the  ac- 
complishment of  an  action.  Ex.:  Wald  siyang  ibili  nitong  bdhay  (he  is 
without  the  means  to  buy  this  house) .  Maijroon  ako  ibabayad  sa  iyo  ( I  have 
the  means  to  pay  you). 

XI.  /  combined  with  in  may  express  the  direct  object  (accusative)  of 
actions  performed  for  the  benefit  of  others,  which  may  also  be  expressed 
by  m  alone;  an  expresses  place  in  general  with  such  verbs;  and  i  com- 
bined with  pag  and  pinag  according  to  the  tense,  expresses  the  person  who 
is,  was,  has  been,  or  will  be  the  beneficiary  of  the  action. 

To  roast  (meat);  to  bake  or  fry  (fish  Magihao.  Anginiihao,  what  is  being 
or  meat).  fried  or  roasted.     Ang  ipinagiiJiao, 

the  person  for  whom  something  is 
being  roasted,  etc.  Ang  ihaoan, 
the  frying  pan  or  roaster.  Ang 
pinagiltaaan,  the  place  of  roasting. 

To  scald  or  make,  as  tea;  to  boil  (as  Maglaga.  Aug  inilagd,  what  boiled 
potatoes,  etc.).  or  made  thus.     Ang  ipaglagd,  the 

person  for  whom  to  be  made.  Ang 
lagadn,  the  cooking  pot,  teapot, 
etc.  Ex.:  Ipaglaga  mo  ako  nang 
na  (make  me  some  tea). 

To  cook.  Maglutd.     Ang  Infoin,  what  cooked. 

Ang  inihitb,  what  cooked  (see  next 
paragraph).  Ang  lutodn,  the  cook- 
ing utensil.  Ang  paglntodn,  the 
cooking  place. 

XII.  When  roots  beginning  with  /t,  I,  or  a  vowel  (including  ir)  are  con- 
jugated with  in  and  instrumental  /,  etc.,  the  Tagalog  reverses  the  particle 


136  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

in  to  ni  or  changes  it  to  na,  in  orderto  avoid  the  har^h  f?ound.sof  the  double 
i,  espei'lally  with  roots  commencing  with  i.     Ex.: 

To  throw  down.  Maghulog.     Aug  ihulog,  what  dashed 

to  ground  or  thrown  down  (no 
tense  idea).  Aug  Udnulog  or  an g 
inahiUog,  what  was  or  has  been 
thrown  down,  etc.  Aug  ihinuhnlog 
or  ang  imiliuhulog,  what  is  being 
tlirown  down,  etc.  Aug  ihuJu'dog, 
what  will  be  thrown  down,  etc. 
(See  tables  for  these. ) 

To  place;  to  put.  Maglagag.     yln^  ?7a(7ai/,  what  placed. 

Ang  ilinagay;  ang  inilagag  or  airg 
inalagag,  what  was  or  has  been 
placed. 

To  get  rid  of;  to  disappear,  Magicald.     Ang  iniirald,  what  was  or 

has  been  gotten  rid  of,  etc. 

XIII.  With  certain  classes  of  verbs  such  as  (1)  those  requiring  two  com- 
plements, e.  g.,  magmlitd,  "to  tell;"  magutang,  "to  lend;"  magbigay,  "to 
give,"  etc.,  and  (2)  with  those  expressing  expulsive  or  dispersive  action, 
e.  ^.,magtapon,  "to  throw  away;"  ^nagsabog,  "to  scatter  seed,  etc.,"  i  forms 
a  true  passive,  which  may  be  so  expressed  in  English. 

XIV.  With  verljal  roots  not  included  in  the  foregoing  classes  i  forms  an 
expression  peculiar  to  Tagalog  and  allied  languages  by  denoting  either  the 
instrument,  cause,  or  time  of  the  action.  In  these  cases  the  cause,  reason, 
instrument,  or  time  becomes  the  subject  of  the  sentence  in  the  nominative 
case,  especially  if  the  sentence  should  include  an  indirect  complement  ex- 
pressive of  such  instrument,  cause,  time,  etc.,  in  addition  to  a  direct  object. 
Ex.: 

(1)  To  give.  -  Magbigay.     Ang  ihinigay,  what  was 

or  has  been  given.  Ex. :  Ihinigay 
ni  Juan  iyang  salapi  (that  money 
was  the  gift  of  Juan). 

(2)  To  throw  away.  Magkipon.      Tnmapon,  to  cast  (as  a 

net).  Ex.  with  magtapon:  Ilina- 
pon  ko  angsnlut  ( I  threw  the  letter 
away).  And  ang  gagawin  ko  nitong 
isiMf  (What  shall  I  do  with  this 
fish? )  Itapun  mo  ( throw  it  away ) . 
Ex.  with  tnmapon:  Minsang  itapon 
naliull  ko  itong  isdd  (I  caught  this 
fish  with  one  throw  [of  the  net] ). 
Ang  taponan,  the  fish  line;  also, 
where  anything  may  be  thrown; 
the  scrap  hole  or  heap. 
To  plant;  to  sow.  Magtanim.      (2)  Also  to  bear  hate  or 

rancor  toward  another.  Aking 
ilinatnnim  itong pdlay  (I  am  plant- 
ing this  rice).  Ang  tamnan,  the 
place  of  planting.  As  will  l)e  seen, 
besides  being  contracted,  there  is 
a  transposition  w  ith  m  and  n  with 
this  word  with  suffixed  aa. 

(See  tables  for  conjugation  of  mmdbog,  to  sow,  with  ;. ) 

XV.  If  the  instrument  is  expressed  in  full  with  a  verb  using  the  expul- 
sive i,  the  instrument  takes  the  proper  preposition  in  the  genitive.  Ex.: 
Itinapon  niyu  ang  buhangin  nang  panln'ikay  (he  threw  the  sand  away  with 
a  hoe). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


137 


XVI.  (1)  Roots  whi(;h  take  viag  for  the  primary  idea  in  the  indefinite 
generally  have  i  for  the  corresponding  definite,  combined  with  in  for  the 
past  and  present  tenses.  Um  roots  generally  take  in  only  for  the  simple 
definite  (direct  object).  (2)  Roots  which  vary  in  meaning  according  to  the 
verbalizing  prefix  or  infix  xiin,  mag,  etc.,  generally  retain  the  definite  form 
oi  ma;;,  in<ii/lca,  etc.,  with  (,  forming  rpag,  ipimig,  Ipa,  i/jlwi,  etc.,  as  pre- 
fixes to  the  root.  (See  tables  for  conjngation  of  hinmbtt,  to  spread,  to 
propagate  (of  its  own  accord);  rnagkuhtt,  to  spread  widely  (by  outside 
airencv).     Ex.: 


(1)   To  sun ;  to  put  in  the  sunshine. 


To  pour  out. 


To  scatter. 


To  add. 


To  heap  up;  to  lay  in  layers. 


(2)  To  spread;  to  propagate  (of  its 
own  accord). 


To     spread 
agency) . 


widely      (by     outside 


To  V)orrow  (money  only). 


Magbilad.  Ang  ibivilad,  what  was 
or  has  been  put  in  the  sunlight, 
as  clothes  to  dry.  A  ng  hllaran,  the 
place.  Ang  bilaran,  the  mpe  b}' 
which  suspended,  etc.  Ang  ibilad, 
what  sunned,  dried  in  the  sun,  etc. 

Magbuhos.  Angibuhos,  whati)Oured 
out.  Ang  ibinuhos,  what  has  been 
poured  out.  Minnuhon,  to  spill 
out;  (2)  fig.  to  spread  out  or  run 
to,  as  a  road.  Ex.:  Sdannunuhos 
itong  daan  ?  (Where  does  this  road 
run  to?)  Nunuhos  sa  bai/an  (it 
goes  to  town).  Magkabuhos,  to 
run  together  (as two  roads).  JSlag- 
kakabidios  ang  da/aivang  daan,  the 
two  roads  run  together.  Kabu- 
hos  diigu,  of  the  same  l>lood,  as 
children  of  the  same  mother, 

Magbulagsak,  var.  niagbidaksak.  Ang 
ibulagsak,  what  scattered.  Ang 
ib'bmlagsak,  what  was  or  has  been 
scattered.  Ang ibin ubulagsuk, what 
is  being  scattered.  Ang  ibubu- 
lagsak,  what  will  be  scattered. 

Magdagdag.  Ang  idagdag,  what 
added.  Ang  idinagdag,  what  was 
added.  Ang  dagdagan,  what  has 
been  added  to.  Ang  mandaragdag, 
the  adder. 

Magpalong.  Ang  ipdtong,  what 
heaped  up  or  laid  in  layers.  Also 
used  for  generations.  Ex.:  Ildn 
ang  patong  ang  nagmida  sa  Lakan- 
dnlaf  (How  many  generations 
liave  there  been  since  Lacandola?) 

Knmdlat.  Ang  ikdlat,  what  may 
spread.  Ang  ikindlat,  what  has 
spread. 

Magkdlat.  Ang  ipagkdlat,  what  may 
be  spread  thus.  Ang  ipinagkdlat, 
what  was  or  has  been  so  spread. 
Ex.  (indef. ):  Nagkakdlat  .si  knan 
nnng  wikang  nakasasamd  sa  kapoua 
tauo  (what's  his  name  has  been 
spreading  bad  reports  all  over 
about  his  neighbor).  Kdlatkdlat 
ang  dild  niyd  (he  has  a  most  tat- 
tling tongue). 

Umntang.  Ang  uiangin,  the  loan. 
Ang  tUaiu/an,  the  person  from 
whom  borrowed.  Ang  inUtng,  the 
cause. 


138  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

To  lend  (money  only).  Magutang.     (Also  to  borrow  much. ) 

Ang  ipinagulaug,  the  loan. 

To  lend  willingly.  Mugpautang.     Ang  ipatUaiig,  theloan 

made  thus.  Aug  pautaiTgin,  the 
person  lent  to  thus.  Ex.:  Pau- 
tamjin  mo  ako  nang  pl.sos  (lend  me 
a  peso).  Iftdiig  salapt  lam  f  nig 
,  ang  ipauutang  ko  sa  it/u  { I  will  only 

lend  you  a  half  peso).  IpinaiUang 
ko  sa  igo  ang  salapt  ko  (I  have  lent 
my  money  to  you).  Bdkithindt 
mo  ako  pinaui'dang  nang  salapt? 
(Why  won't  you  lend  me  some 
money?)  Sa  pagka't  wald,  (be- 
cause I  have  none).  Pautang, 
credit.     Kautangan,  debt. 

XVII.  This  is  also  .shown  by  humili,  "to  buy;"  and  maghili,  "to  sell," 
already  explained). 

To  buy  by  retail  (on  a  small  scale).      Umutag.     Ang     inutay,     what     was 

bought  thus. 
To  sell  on  a  small  scale.  Magntni/.     Ang  iplnagutai/,  what  was 

sold  thus. 

XVIII  (1)    Ika  {ikina  for  past  and  present  tenses)  is  generally  used  to 
express  cause  or  reason,  and  also  time  (for  the  latter  see  under  ma). 

To  destroy.  Sumird,.     Magsirci,  to  destroy  much. 

Makasird,  to  be  able  to  destroy. 
Ex. :  Ang  ikinasird  nang  kanigang 
ari  ang  pagsusugal  (gambling  was 
the  cause  by  which  he  lost  his 
property ) . 

To  be  sad.  Mahapis.     MakaMpb,  to  cause  sad- 

ne.«s.  Ang  ikaliapis,  the  cause  of 
sadness  (no  tense  idea).  Ex.: 
Ikinahdpis  ko  ang  pagkamatay 
niyci  (I  was  saddened  by  his  dying 
[death]  ) .  Ikinahahapis  ko  ang  pag- 
kamatay niya  ( I  am  saddened  by 
his  death).  Ikaluihapis  mo  ang 
pagkamatay  id  Gat  Juan  (You  will 
be  saddened  by  the  death  of 
Don  Juan).  K(iha})isan,  sadness 
(abstr. ).  KaJidpishapis,  sad  or  sor- 
rowful object  or  spectacle;  also 
great  sorrow. 

(2)  Jka  {ikina)  also  expresses  well-perfected  acts  resulting  from  a  slow 
process  or  development. 

To  become  better.  Gumaling.      Maggaling,     to    adorn. 

Ang  galiiTgin,  what  adorned. 
Magaling,  to  be  better;  also 
"good,"  "clever."  MangaUng,  io 
become  much  better.  Makagaling, 
to  do  good.  Ang  ikagaling,  the 
cause  of  betterment.  Ex.:  Ang 
matTgd  gamot  ay  siyang  ikinagaga- 
ling  nang  nuuTgd  may  sakit  (medi- 
cines are  what  cause  the  recovery 
of  those  who  are  ill).  Ang pana- 
hd'y    ang    ikinagaling    niyd     (the 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  139 

weather  caused  his  improvement). 
Ang  pagiyvum  nitony  r/ainot  aiuj 
ikinacjaliiiff  nila  (the  taking  of  this 
medicine  was  what  caused  them  to 
recover).  Ma<jpariaUng,  to  pros- 
per. Aug  jnvagagnling,  person  or 
thing  prospering.  A  ng  migagaling, 
person  improving.  Magpakaga- 
ling,  to  improve  one's  self;  to 
correct  one's  self.  Ex.:  Mngpaka- 
gnlitig  kago  n<(>ig  maiTga  dxal  vinyo 
(Improve  yourselves  in  your  cus- 
toms [or  manners]).  KagaJhTgan, 
goodness;  improvement. 

(3)  Ikn,  as  well  as  i  alone,  prefixed  to  intransitive  verbs  indicate  time 
as  well  as  cause  or  reason.     Ex. : 

To  repent.  Magsisi.     Ang  ipinagslsi,    the   time, 

cause,  or  reason  of  repentance 
(past  tense).  Su7nisi,  to  quarrel 
with  openly.  Ang  isii^i,  the  cause. 
Magpakasisi,  to  repent  deeply. 

To  be  asleep  or  sleepy.  Midulog.     Natutdlog  baga  kugof  ( Are 

you  sleepy?)  06;  ihig  ko  scmu  iTga 
matulog  {Yes;  I  would  like  to  go  to 
sleep) .  Makati'dog,  to  fall  asleep. 
Ang  ikatulog,  the  time  or  cause  of 
falling  asleep. 

XIX.  /  is  generally  used  alone  to  express  cause  or  reason  with  verbs 
which  do  not  require  an  object  to  complete  the  meaning  (intransitives): 

To  obey;  to  follow.  Sumunod.      Ang  isxinod,  the  cause  of 

obedience  or  following.  Ex.:  Ano 
ang  ifsbinsunod  vang  nuuTgd  sundalo 
sa  kanilang  pimof  ( Why  do  sol- 
diers obey  [follow]  their  com- 
manding officer  [chief]?).  A7ig 
panunumpa  't  pifagan  ay  ang  isinii- 
sunod  nild  (Their  obedience  is  on 
account  of  their  oath  and  also  their 
respect). 

To  weep  (purposely).  Tumam/is.    MagtaiTgi a,  to  weep  much 

or  by  many.  MataiTgh,  to  weep 
(invol. ) .  Ang  itaiTijis,  the  cause  or 
reason  of  w'eeping.  MagpataiTijis, 
to  weep  excessively.  MakitaiTgis, 
to  join  another  in  weeping.  Ex. : 
Bdkit  nananangis  yaong  bahayef 
(Why  is  that  woman  weeping 
[crying]?) .  Ang  itinatanljis niyd^y 
ang  kannitayan  nang  a.nak  ( Her  cry- 
ing is  caused  by  the  death  of  [her] 
child) . 

To  remain  behind  (letting  others  go  Tmjiird.  Magtird,  to  allow  some- 
ahead),  thing  to  remain.     Ang  itinird,  what 

was  or  has  been  left  behind;  also 
the  remaining  behind.  Ex. :  Ikao 
ang  itinird  ko  d'lto  (I  have  re- 
mained here  on  your  account) . 
ifatmf,  to  be  left  behind.  Walang 
naiird,  not  one  remained. 


140 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  embark  or  travel  (also  to  mount; 


To  eat. 


XX.  In  like  manner  intransitive  verbs  also  express  time  (not  tens=e).  If 
the  expression  for  the  time  is  lietinite,  it  may  either  precede  or  follow  the 
verb,  but  if  the  time  is  indefinite  it  should  always  precede.  Verbs  which 
require  ika  ( ikhiu )  for  cause  or  reason  likewise  have  the  same  combination 
to  express  time: 

To  arrive.  Dumating.     Ang  idatlng,  the  time  of 

arrival.  Ex.:  Ano  ang  oras  ang 
idinaiiug  7iiyuf  (What  time  [hour] 
did  he  [she]  come?).  Ang  idmullng 
niyd  ang  lanyhull  (He  [she]  came 
at  noon).  Ano  ang  urao  na  idara- 
ting  nildf  (What  day  will  they 
come?).  Ang  ikalimang  arao  nang 
bouan  (The  fifth  [day]  of  the 
month). 
Sumakay.  Ang  sakaydn,  what  em- 
barked on  or  mounted.  Ang  isina- 
kay,  the  reason  or  time  ( past  tense ) 
of  em  barking,  mounting,  etc.  Ex. : 
Ang  taung  isinakay  ko  sa  Fdipinas 
(The  year  [in  which]  I  embarked 
for  the  Philippines). 
Kumain.  Angikinain,  the  reason  or 
time  of  eating  (past  tense) .  Ex.: 
Dt  ikinakatn  ang  buiTgang  Idlao 
kailan  man  (green  fruit  should 
never  be  eaten). 

To  die.  Mamatay.     Ang  oras  na  ikinamalay 

niyd,  the  hour  at  which  he  died. 

XXI.  /is  also  used  with  verbs  of  adjusting,  conforming,  copying  into, 
transferring,  translating,  transplanting,  etc.,  to  indicate  what  has  been 
thus  transferred,  translated,  etc. 

Magbdgay.  Ang  ibindgay,  what  was 
or  has  been  made  suitable.  Ex.: 
Ibagay  ito  doon  (Make  [do]  this 
like  that) .  Magbdgay  ka  nang 
VKuTija  bata  magsasaydo  (Get  the 
children  ready  for  the  party). 
Mabdgay,  to  be  proper  or  suitable; 
also  to  be  proportioned.  Ex.  (1) 
Nababdgay  bagd  sa  uang  dalaga 
ang  lunidkad  na  nagiisd  sa  manga 
lansanuj  an  f  ( Is  it  proper,  then,  for 
a  young  woman  to  go  alone  about 
the  streets?)  Mababagdyan  nang 
hirap  ang  laki  nang  kasalanan  (The 
punishment  will  be  suitable  for 
the  gravity  of  the  offense).  [The 
punishment  will  fit  the  crime.] 
(2)  Dili  nababdgay  siyd  sa  kanilang 
kataasan  (He  [she]  is  not  propor- 
tioned to  his  [her]  height).  The 
act  of  making  suitable,  ang  pag- 
kabugay.  Ex.:  And  ang  pagkabd- 
gay  nito  doonf  (What  has  this  to 
do  with  that?)  As  a  noun,  bdgay 
means  "thing,  matter,  subject, 
size,  proportion,  appearance." 
Ex. :  .4/10  bagd  ang  bdgayf  (  What, 
then,  is  the  matter?)     Ayicdn  ako 


To  conform;  to    make    suitable;  to 
get  ready. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


141 


To  compare. 


To  equalize. 


To  (1)  transfer;  (2)  translate;  (3) 
transplant;  (4)  copy  out,  and  (5) 
to  change  from  one  vessel  to  an- 
other; to  empty. 


(I  don't  know.)  Ano  ang  bdgay 
niyu,  A)iierirano  Litng  Vustila? 
( What  does  he  look  like,  an  Amer- 
ican or  a  Spaniard?)  Americano 
2JU  (an  Ameri(;an,  sir. )  Bi'igag  sa, 
"as  for, "  "  as  to. "  Ex. :  Bdgay  sa 
akin  ( as  for  me ) .  Bagay  xa  kaniyd 
(as  for  him  [her]).  Biigny  sa 
ibang  bcigay  (as  to  other  matters), 
etc.  Bdgaybdgay,  different  things 
(in  class;  species,  etc. ).  Mngkaba- 
g((i/hdg(iy,  to  differ  much.  Ex.: 
Ndi/kaknhdgdi/bdgay  .svV/r  .vc  jxigda- 
raniit  (Tliey  differ  much  in  their 
manner  of  dress) 

MagJutlltiibaud.  Ang  ipinaghalim- 
baad,  what  was  or  has  been  com- 
pared. Jlwiinihnbaud,  to  imitate 
another.  Ang  liaUmbftuann,  the 
person  imitated.  Kahnlhnbaud, 
like,  alike  (object).  Kahalim- 
bauaan,  resemblance. 

Magpard.  Ang  ipinard,  what  was  or 
has  been  equalized. 

Magsalin.  Ang  isinalin,  what  has 
been  or  was  transferred,  trans- 
lated, etc.  (2)  Isalin  mo  iio  sa 
wikang  Tagdlog  (translate  this  into 
Tagalog).  (5)  iMtUn  vio  ang  la- 
mang  nitong  buslo  (empty  out  the 
contents  of  this  basket). 


THE  PARTICLE  AN   (HAN). 

I.  An  {han  after  acute  final  vowel),  sometimes  nan,  is  suffixed  with  all 
tenses  of  the  verb.  The  particle  in,  either  alone  or  in  combination  with 
pag  ipinag),  etc.,  is  retained  in  the  past  and  present  tenses.  For  the  con- 
jugation of  roots  with  an  and  Jiaii  see  the  tables  at  end  of  book. 

II.  An  usually  represents  place,  or  expresses  the  case  called  locative  in 
many  European  languages,  replacing  an  adverb  of  place  or  the  preposi- 
tion which  would  l)e  employed  witii  another  form  of  conjugation.  Thus, 
if  a  sentence  with  a  verli  other  than  those  which  admit  a  i)erson  or  place 
as  the  direct  oi)ject,  or  those  requiring  an  for  euphonic  reasons,  includes  an 
indirect  com]^lement  of  place  relating  to  the  action,  the  use  of  an  with  the 
verb  expresses  the  relation  of  case  expressed  in  English  by  a  preposition. 


To  gather;  to  pluck  (as  flowers);  to 
])reak  off. 


To  die. 


Pumitds.  Ex.:  And  ang  pinipitdsmo 
dii/diK^  (What  are  you  gather- 
ing there?)  Akd^ y  jningvii pitas 
nang  bulaklak  (I  am  gathering 
some  flowers).  Ang  Jiahnnnna'y 
ang  liigar  (Sp.)  na  pinipitasan  ni 
Ambrosia  nang  mangd  bulaklak 
( Ambro.sia  is  gathering  the  flowers 
in  the  garden);  lit.,  "the  garden 
is  the  place  where  are  being  gath- 
ered l)y  Andjrosia  the  flowers.)" 

Mamutay.  Ang  kamatagdn,  the  place 
of  death,  distinguished  by  the 
final  accent  from  kamatdyan,  death 
(abstract).  Ex.:  Jtong  bahay  na 
ifd  ang  kinamataydn  ni  amd  (father 


142 


TAGALOa    LANGUAGE. 


died  in  this  house);  lit.,  "this 
liouse  wasthedying  placeof  (my) 
father." 

III.  If  a  verbal  action  admits  of  a  j^lace  for  its  direct  object,  the  latter  is 
generally  expressed  by  av. 


To  (1)  open;  (2)  uncover. 


To  sprinkle  from  the  mouth  (as 
Chinamen  do  clothes);  also  to 
bubble  up  (as  water  from  a  foun- 
tain or  spring). 


To  fill;  to  make  up. 


To  line. 


To  plant;  to  sow. 


To  cover. 


Maghvkus.  si  tig  Jmkasin,  whatopened 
or  uncovered.  Aug  ipaghukm, 
the  means  by  which  opened  or 
uncovered.  Aug  hukasan,  the 
place  opened  or  uncovered;  also 
the  person  or  object  uncovered. 
Contracted  many  times  to  buksan, 
especially forthe  imperative.  Ex.: 
Buksfut.  mo  ang  pinto  (open  the 
door). 

Magbugd.  Ang  hugh/m,  the  place  of 
such  sprinkling,  or  the  object  so 
treated.  Ex. :  Hindi  huglu'tn  mo 
ling  mawjd  ddimf.  (don't  sj^rinkle 
the  clothes  from  the  mouth). 
There  is  also  an  idiom:  Bnghan  mo 
natin  itong  bago  mong  dcunit  (treat 
us  on  account  of  your  new  clothes) ; 
"wet  down  your  new  stripes." 

Magpuno.  Aug  pundn.,  tiie  placeof 
lining,  or  making  up.  Ex. :  Mag- 
puno ka  nang  labing  dalaird  (make 
up  twelve  [a  dozen]  ).  Pundn  inu 
ang  niangd  tasa  (fill  the  cups). 
Pupundnko  bagd  ang  mamjdvasof 
(Shall  I  fill  the  glasses?)  Magpuno. 
with  grave  accent,  stress  on  next 
to  last  syllable  means  to  begin;  to 
govern;  to  head;  to  lead;  to  pre- 
side. Mamuno,  to  go  ahead  or  in 
front. 

Magsdpin.  Ang  sapndn,  the  place  of 
lining,  etc.,  also  the  imperative. 
Ang  impin,  the  material.  iSap'm, 
shoe  or  sandal.  Kasapin,  a  leaf 
(of  a  book)  or  sheet  (of  paper). 
Sapinsapin,  many  leaves,  sheets, 
or  folds  of  lining. 

Magtanhn  (2)  also  to  bear  hate  or 
rancor  toward  another.  Ang  tam- 
ndn,  the  place  or  manner  of  plant- 
ing. P]x. :  T'lnumndnnlTomdsang 
kanlyang  bdkid  nang  7ndkina  {md- 
quina)  (Thomas  planted  his  field 
by  machinery).  As  has  been 
noted  before,  besides  a  contrac- 
tion, there  is  a  transposition  be- 
tween n  and  ni  with  this  definite. 

Tuinaklp.  Magiakip  (1)  to  cover 
up;  (2)  to  fish  from  many  canoes, 
getting  the  fish  in  between.  Ang 
takpdj),  what  covered  or  the  place. 
Takpdn  mo  ang  tapayan  (cover  the 
jar). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE 


143 


IV.  An  is  generally  used  to  indicate  the  person  affected  by  an  action 
with  verbs  which  require  a  person  as  the  direct  object. 


To  menace;  to  threaten. 

To    frighten   by   rushing 
hiding  and  shouting. 


To  diminish  (oi  itself). 


To  give. 


To  trade  or  sell  rice. 


McK/hala.  Aiir/  jHKjhalaan,  the  per- 
son menaced  or  threatened, 
out  from  Bu}iud(igd.  Magbalaga,  to  frighten 
much.  Ang  fxilaghbi  or  ang  bal.a- 
gJtan,  the  person  thus  frightened. 
KahabalagluDig  g(iica,a  marvelous 
work.  Kahahtbalagd  itoug  gcnuang 
ito  (this  [is]  a  most  wonderful 
work ) . 

Bumauas.  Magbaiut^,  to  diminish 
by  outside  agency.  Ang  b<ma>^in, 
what  diminished.  Ang  bauasan, 
the  place  (corresp.  to  rim).  Aug 
pagbauamn,  place  (corresp.  to 
mag) ,  the  person  to  whom  some- 
thing is  given  thus.  Mabauax,  to 
diminish  (inan.  action).  Ang  na- 
mauas,  what  taken  from.  Maka- 
bauas,  to  cause  to  diminish.  Mag- 
pabauas,  to  order  or  request  to 
diminish.  Ex.:  Bmiasanmoiymig 
manga  tapayan  (take  something 
out  of  those  jars).  Magbauas  ka 
nang  halaga,  reduce  the  price. 
Hindi  mabuamn  ko  sa  Ibnayig  jyixof^, 
I  can  not  let  it  fall  below  F5. 
Nabanas  na  ang  hangin  (the  Mdnd 
has  diminished  now). 

Magbigay.  A  ng  ibigay,  the  gift.  A  ng 
ibinigay,  what  was  or  has  been 
given,  ^ing  bigydn,  the  person  re- 
ceiving a  gift.  Aug  binigydn,  the 
person  to  whom  something  was  or 
has  been  given.  Mapagbigay,  gen- 
erous; liberal;  indulgent.  Maud- 
gay,  to  give  much;  to  lavish.  Ex. 
And  ang  ibinigay  mof  (What  did 
you  give?)  Bigydn  mo  ako  nang 
kau7iting makakain,  gi\e  me  a  little 
refreshment  [to  eat] .  Bigydn  mo 
ako  nang  itlog  kan  mayroon  (give 
me  some  eggs  if  there  are  any). 
Si  Juan  angbinigyang  ko  (I  gave  it 
to  Juan).  (S'i  Tonids  ang  bibigyang 
ko  (I  will  give  it  to  Tom;is).  Ang 
ipamigay,  what  lavished.  Ex.: 
Ipinamigay  niyd,  itong  laliut  (he  has 
lavished  all  this).  Ipinamiinigay 
nild  itong  lahat  (they  are  lavishing 
all  this).  Ipumindgay  nim/6  itong 
lahai?^     (You  will  'lavish  all  this?) 

Magbigds.  Angpagbignsan,ih^  seller 
or  dealer  in  rice.  lyang  pUak 
ang  pinagbigasan  niyd  (he  made 
that  money  selling  (trading)  rice). 
Makibigds,  to  ask  for  a  little  rice 
(see  particle  maki). 


144 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  guard;  watch;  look  out. 


To  charge  against  (as  a  debtor). 


To  dress  one's  self. 


To  deceive. 


MaghanUiy.  Also  means  to  make  a 
bird  snare  from  bamljoo.  Ma- 
mantaij,  to  catch  birds  with  a 
"bantay."  Ang  namantaii,  what 
caught.  Ang  hinabantay  or  ang 
pinapaghahantaji,  the  jierson  stand- 
ing guard,  watching  or  looking 
out.  Ang  bantayan,  the  sentry 
box,  post;  watch  tower;  look  out 
p^ace.  Also  Ang  ]>agh(tntaynn. 
Ang  bantayan  (1),  thing  or  person 
guarded  or  watched;  also  imjjera- 
tive  without  art.  Ex.:  Bantayan 
mo  itong  baliay  itn  (watch  this 
house).  Binaydayan  ko  ang  cnar- 
iel  (I  was  on  guard  at  the  bar- 
racks). Binabantayan  niyn  ang 
cuariel  (he  is  on  guard  at  the  bar- 
racks). (2)  arms  or  scales  or 
correctness  of  the  balance.  (3) 
A  bamboo  bed  for  sick  persona 
under  which  a  fire  may  be  made. 
Magbantayan,  to  make  such  a  bed. 
Ang  bantay anln,  the  material;  ang 
bantayanan,  the  place  of  such  a  bed. 

Magblntang.  (2)  To  bear  false  tes- 
timony against  another.  Ang  pag- 
binta)Tt'/an  (1),  the  person  charged; 
(2)  the  person  sworn  against 
falsely.  Aug  ipagbinfajig,  what  so 
sworn,  1.  e.,  the  testimony.  Ex.: 
(1)  PinagbintaiTgan  ako  nang  sam- 
pouong  2)>^os  (I  was  charged  up 
with  ten  pesos).  (2)  Binagbin- 
taiTgan  nlyd  ako  (he  bore  false  tes- 
timony against  me).  Ang  pagbi- 
bintang,  the  act  of  swearing  falsely. 
Angbinta)7</an,anginabinlatn/ln,ang 
mapagbintang,  the  person  who  ha- 
bitually swears  falsely;  perjurer. 

Duniaynit.  Daranit'in,  clothes  (pres. 
tense).  Ang  danddn,  the  person 
dressed  or  clothed.  Magdandt,  to 
dress  or  clothe  another.  Ang  pag- 
daramit,  the  act  of  dressing  (pres. 
tense).  Magparamit,  to  cause  or 
order  to  be  clothed.  Ex.:  Parain- 
tan  mo  ang  valang  daniit  (clothe 
those  who  are  without  clothes). 
Bdkit  hhidl  mo  jdnadaramian  ang 
anak  niof  (Why  don't  you  clothe 
your  child?)  Sapagka'tuald  akong 
maibili  nang  damit  (because  I  have 
nothing  to  buy  clothes  with). 

Magdayd.  Ang  pagdayaan,  the  per- 
son deceived.  Angpagdarayd,  the 
act  of  deceiving.  Magparayd,  to 
permit  deception.  Magparayd  ka, 
permit  the  deception.  Parayd,  to 
consent  or  allow  one's  self  to  be 
deceived.  Magdarayd,  fraudulent; 
cheating  (adj.). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


145 


To  kiss. 


To  l)c  sorry. 


To  steal. 


To  listen  to. 


To  teach. 


To  be  charitable. 


llumalik.  Aug  JiagMn,  the  person 
kissed.  MagJailik,  to  kiss  each 
other  (dual).  Atig  rnar77/d  ])iiiag- 
hagkan  {the  two  who  have  kissed 
each  other. )  Pahalik,  to  request  to 
kiss.  Ex. :  Pahalik  pu  kayo  sa 
kamay  (permit  me  to  kiss  your 
hand).     (Sp.  Q.  B.  S.  M.) 

3fahin(iyang  (from  myang,  idea  of 
sorrow ) .  .1  ng kinalt  inayain/an,  the 
person  for  whom  sorry,  or  for  what 
reason  sorrow  is  felt.  Ex. :  Khia- 
hiJi'mayatujan  ko  siyn  (I  feel  sorry 
for  him — lit.,  he  is  the  person  I 
am  sorry  for. )  Maitliindyung,  to 
be  very  sorry.  Ang  panlmia- 
yarigan ,  the  person  for  wh  om  felt,  or 
the  cause  of  much  sorrow.  Magpa- 
hindyavg,  to  regret  a  loss  of  any 
kind. 

Magndkao.  Ang  plnagndkao,  what 
was  or  has  been  stolen.  Ang 
magnandkau,  the  thief.  Aiig  pag- 
nakavan,  the  person  robbed.  Ex. : 
Sino  ang  magnandkaof  (Who  is 
the  thief? )  Sino  ang  pinagnakavan 
mof     (Who  did  you  steal  from?) 

Pakinig.  Ang  pakingnn,  the  person 
listening.  Ex. :  Pakingdn  ninyo 
ang  dral  (listen  [ye]  to  what  is 
taught). 

Urndral.  Ang  aralan,  the  person 
taught.  Ang  idral,  what  taught — 
i.  e.,  the  lesson.  Ang  inidral,  what 
was  or  has  been  taught.  Ang 
ungmadral,  the  teacher.  Angpagd- 
ral,  the  act  of  teaching.  Mngdral, 
to  stud  y ;  to  learn.  .1  ng  pagaraldn, 
the  source  of  learning — i.  e.,  the 
teacher  or  the  book,  etc.  Ang 
magdral,  what  learned.  Ang  pa- 
gadral,  the  act  of  studying.  (Note 
that  the  "act  of  teaching"  is  ex- 
pressed without  reduplication  of 
the  initial  sylable  of  the  root.) 
Aral  is  said  to  l)e  from  8ansk. 
dchdra,  custom;  habit;  rule;  by 
Kern,  Isut  Pardo  de  Tavera  thinks 
it  doubtful.  Ajar  is  Malay,  "to 
teach  or  to  learn"  from  JaA-anese. 
AsaJ,  custom;  habit;  is  more  likely 
to  be  from  Sansk.  dcltdra.  For 
further  modifications  of  dral  with 
particles,  see  under  nran. 

Maana,  also  compassionate;  charit- 
able (adj.).  Maauain;  majxtg- 
kaaud,  a  humane  or  charitable  per- 
son. Ang  anaan,  the  recipient  of 
compassion  or  chanty.  Ang  pag- 
kaaud,  the  act  of  charity  or  com- 
passion. Kauuaan,  (abst. )  charity, 


6855—05 


146 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  hear  (casually). 


compassion.  Ex.:  Kaauan mo siyd 
(have  charity  [or  compassion]  for 
him) .  Aug  kinaauadii,  what  given 
in  charity  or  extended  in  compas- 
sion. Ang  ikinaaua,  the  cause  of 
giving  in  charity  or  extending 
compassion.  Makaaucl,  to  move  to 
compassion.  Magmalcaaud,  to  be 
able  to  move  to  compassion.  {Aud, 
is  generally  reduplicated.  Ex.: 
Naginainakaayaauct  ako  itong duklnl 
(this  poor  [person]  moves  me  to 
compassion).  Aug  ipinagiunma- 
kaaud,  the  cause  of  being  able  to 
move  to  compassion.  Paand,  to 
ask  for  charity;  to  plead  or  beg  for 
mercy,  etc.  Ex. :  Nupacmd  siyd  sa 
akin  ( he  begged  me  for  mercy ) . 
Maringig.  Dumingig,  to  hear  pur- 
posely. Ang  nar'uTgig,  what  heard 
casually.  A^^g  dh~g'm,  what  heard 
jmrposel}-,  as  conversation  directed 
to  person.  A)ig  ditTgdn,  the  per- 
son listened  to.  An  indicates  per- 
son, in  tlie  thing,  with  this  verb 
and  the  following  one,  also  others 
which  will  be  seen  in  other  places. 
Makaringiy,  to  be  able  to  hear. 
MagkariiTgig,  to  be  deceived  by  the 
hearing.  Magparhupg,  to  force 
another  to  listen.  Ex. :  Widd  ukong 
diiTgig  (I  heard  nothing);  lit.,  "I 
(was)  without  hearing."  Nuriwjig 
mo  ang  shiabi  kof  (Did  you  hear 
what  I  told  you? )  Hi))  di  ko  na  ritTijig 
( I  did  not  hear ) ;  "  I  was  not  able  to 
hear. ' '  Xakadi)-ii~gig  ka  hagdf  ( Did 
you  hear?)  Lit.:  "Are  you  hear- 
ing?" NagkariiTijan  ako  (myhear- 
.  ing  deceived  me). 

Kumalag.  A))g  kalgin,  what  untied 
or  loosened.  A))g  kalgdn,  person 
set  at  liberty  or  absolved.  Ang 
kalagpa)~gao,  the  jailor's  fees  in 
former  times,  when  set  free. 

V.  In  actions  by  which  the  subject  tries  to  draw  something  to  himself, 
a)i  stands  for  the  person  from  whom  that  something  is  drawn. 

To  ask  for;  to  reqiiest.  FIu)niiTgi.     Makahi)Tgt,  to  obtain  by 

requesting.  MakihirTiji,  to  thank 
for.  Ang  hi)T!ji)),  what  asked 
for.  Ang  hini)vjt,  what  was  or  has 
been  asked  for.  Ang  hi)ujdn,  the 
person  from  whom  asked.  Ex.: 
Ako' y  }t)n))i)T(jt  nang  n)a)Tgd  Innvja 
'y  nnkahi)7iji  ako  (I  asked  for  some 
fruit  and  got  it  for  the  asking). 
MapngJ)iiTg),  an  importunate  per- 
son. See  also  )))aghHi,  to  sell; 
kumuha,  to  take;  d)tmning,  to  en- 
treat; hiundnap,  to  look  for;   and 


(1)  To  untie;  to  loosen;  (fig.)  to  set 
free;  (2)  to  absolve. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


147 


tumangap,  to  accept  or  receive 
which,  among  others,  use  these 
same  forms. 

VI.  Roots  which  express  the  ideas  of  coming  or  going,  when  verbal- 
ized, take  an  iot  the  person  affected  by  the  action,  and  i  or  ika  {ikina)  for 
the  reason  or  time  of  sucli  action.     Ex. : 

To  come  here.  Pumarito.     Parito,  come  here.     Arig 

ipinarito,  the  reason  or  time  of 
coming  here  (past  tense) .  Also 
ang  ibinaparito.  Ang  pinaritohan, 
the  person  (or  the  place)  who  was 
the  object  of  the  action.  Ex. : 
And  ang  ikinaparito  mo  aa  Pa- 
sig?  (Why  did  you  come  here  to 
Pasig?)  Aling  hahay  ang  pinari- 
tohan mo?  (Which  house  did  you 
come  to? )  ( Pumarito  has  been  dis- 
cussed previously.  Pumaroon  fol- 
lows the  same  rule  as  pumarito  and 
has  also  been  explained.) 

YI.  An  is  rare  as  an  ending  to  the  direct  object  of  a  verb.  Some  verbs, 
however,  which  would  naturally  take  in  for  the  direct  oVjject  substitute  an 
therefor  on  account  of  euphony,  as  the  words  are  contracted. 


To  salt;  (2)  to  make  salt. 


To  pay  for. 


To  note;  to  experience;  to  perceive. 


To  pierce. 


To  grasp;  to  hold. 


Magasin.  Ang  asndn,  what  salted; 
inasndn,  what  was  or  has  been 
salted.  Ang  paktasinan,  the  salt 
pan;  also  the  saltcellar.  Ang 
nagaasin,  the  person  who  eats  salt 
on  rice  or  food.  Makiasin,  to  ask 
for  a  little  salt. 

Maghayad.  Ang  bayaran,  what 
paid  for;  the  obligation.  This 
verb  also  has  the  idea  of  covering 
up,  and  originally  meant  "to  buy 
or  sell  slaves."  Ex.:  lyong  baya- 
ran ang  lUang  mo  (your  obligation 
is  to  pay  your  debt  [pay  what  you 
owe]). 

Magmasid.  Ang  pagmasddn;  ang 
masddn  (def. );  ang  namasid  (in- 
def. )  what  noted,  etc.  Magpa- 
masid,  to  order  to  note.  Ang 
papagmasddn,  the  person  ordered 
to  note.  Ang  papagmasd'm,  what 
ordered  to  be  noted.  Mapagmasid, 
one  who  notes,  perceives  or  ex- 
periences a  great  deal. 

Tumalab.  Aug  tahlnv,  what  pierced. 
TumalabiB  also  "to  become  dull" 
(as  a  knife).  Magtalab,  (1)  to 
penetrate  deeply;  (2)  to  dye  with 
the  talab  root.  Aug  pagtalaban, 
what  pierced  deeply.  A ng  talabin, 
what  dyed.  Ang  iialab,  the  instru- 
ment. 

Magtangan.  Ang  tangdn  or  ang  tang- 
anan,  what  grasped  or  held.  Ang 
pagtam/ndn,  what  held  much.  Ang 
itamjan,  the   hand  or  instrument 


148 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


(1)  To  try;     (2)  to  sample; 
understand  a  person  well. 


To  look  at;  to  view. 


used  to  grasp  or  hold  with.  Syn. : 
Maghaudk,  which  means  generally 
to  hold  or  grasp  by  two.  Plx.: 
May  hmiak  ako  wjayon  (I  am  busy 
now  [or  to-day] ). 
(3)  to  Tumikim.  Any  iihnan,  what  sam- 
pled. (Admits  in  combined  with 
pa.)  Ex.:  Paiikmin  mo  iTga  ako 
nitong  dlak  (allow  me  to  try  this 
wine).  lYbndn  wio  ( taste  it ;  sam- 
ple it). 
TumiiTgin,  (2)  Magting'm,  to  look  at 
much  or  by  many.  MagtiiTgina)», 
to  look  at  each  other.  MagtiiTjiin- 
tbTghtan,  to  look  at  each  other 
closely.  Ai)g  tiningm,  what  was  or 
has  been  looked  at.  AngtinitiiTipn, 
what  is  being  looked  at.  Any  tiiTy- 
nan,  what  looked  at;  alone  impera- 
tive. AngpagtbTijnan,  whatlooked 
at  much  or  by  many.  A  ng  itiiTljin, 
the  cause  or  with  what,  i.  e.,  the 
eye.  A  rig  ipag-{ipinag)-tiiu)in,  the 
cause  of  much  looking  or  by  many; 
also  the  eyes  of  many,  etc. 
To  learn.  Magaral.     Any  pagaralfin,    what    is 

learned.  Aug  pagarak'in,  the 
source  of  learning,  i.  e. ,  the  teacher 
or  book,  etc. 

VII.  Some  roots  used  with  in  with  urn,  mag,  etc.,  take  an  when  conju- 
gated with  magpa. 

To  treat  well;  to  prosper.  MagpagaUng.    Y,x.:  GaUiTganmosiya, 

(treat  him  [her]  well). 

VIII.  An  sometimes  replaces  the  preposition  sa  when  the  latter  means 
"to,"  as  an  implies  that  the  subject  parts  with  something,  in  the  following 
examples.  Acquisition  with  the  same  construction  (  "for"  )  is  expressed  by /. 
Ex. :  Binigydnnildakoniujnybigds  [they  ga.\e  me  this  rice) .  Also  expressed: 
ako'y  ang  binigydn  nild  nitong  bigds.  It  will  be  clearly  seen  that  the  defi- 
nite is  a  verbal  noun.  Sino  bagd  ang  pinagbilhdn  niyd  nang  iyony  cabayo 
(to  whom  has  he  sold  [did  he  sell]  your  horse?)  Pinagbilhdn  niyd  ang  knni- 
yang  kaibigan  (his  purchaser  was  a  friend  of  his).  Also  expressed:  ^1»^ 
kaibigan  niyd  ang  pinagbilhdn  niyd. 

IX.  An  with  certain  noun  or  verbal  roots  indicates  place.  The  first  syl- 
lable of  the  root  is  reduplicated  for  roots  admitting  contraction  or  begin- 
ning with  /. 


Buyo-leaf  (piper  betel] 
Bamboo  (bambusa). 


Cocoanut  palm 


Itnitj.     Itmohiin,  buyo-leaf  garden. 

Kauayan.  Kauayanan,  bamUioo 
grove  or  thicket,  yfay  kanayanf 
(Have  [you,  or  is  there]  any  bam- 
boo?) Kumauayan,  tothrow bam- 
boo weapons  at  another.  Atig 
kanayanin,  the  object  or  person. 
Mangauayan,  to  cut  bamboo.  Ang 
pangauayan.  the  instrument,  i.  e., 
the  bolo  or  hatchet,  etc. 

Niog.  Ningan,  cocoanut  grove. 
Kaniugan,  place  of  many  cocoanut 
palms.  Kajnmong  niog,  a  single 
tree.     Kaboong  niog,  a  cocoanut. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


149 


Pasture;  grazing  place. 


Banana.      (Mu?a  par.    and  others, 
both  the  tree  and  fruit. ) 


Sugar  cane. 


Stone;  rock. 


Water. 


Numiog,  to  throw  a  cocoanut  at 
another.  A)ig  niogin,  the  person 
or  object  thrown  at.  A7ig  iniog, 
the  nut  thrown.  Magniogcm,  to 
throw  cocoanuts  at  each  other. 
There  are  many  names  for  cocoa- 
nut,  according  to  its  age  and  con- 
dition. 

Sabsaban.  Ang  sabmbin,  the  grass 
eaten  (no  tense  idea),  or  what 
eaten  as  animals  eat  (by  the 
mouth).  Sumabsab,  to  graze,  eat 
(as  animals).  Magmbsab,  to  eat 
much.  Magxisabsab,  to  graze  in 
herds,  flocks,  etc.  Pasabsab,  to 
allow  to  graze.  Ex.:  Pumbsabin 
mo  itong  cabui/o;  viay  sabsabi7i 
diyan  sa  Jiarapdn  (Let  this  horse 
graze;  there  is  grass  there  in  the 
yard) .  Sungmasabsab  ang  cabayo, 
p6  (The  horse  is  grazing,  sir). 
Parang  is  a  large  pasture.  Sabsa- 
ban is  more  a  grazing  or  eating 
place  for  animals. 

Saging.  SagiiTgan,  banana  grove. 
KasagirTgan,  large  banana  grove 
or  place  where  there  are  many 
bananas.  Magsdging,  to  eat  ba- 
nanas. 

Tubo.  Tubohdn,  cane  field.  Tubo- 
hanan,  sugar-cane  land.  Magtubo, 
to  plant  sugar  cane.  There  is  no 
Tagalog  name  for  sugar,  asnkal, 
from  Sp.  azdcar,  Ijeing  used.  The 
Malay  uses  shakar  and  gula,  the 
latter  from  Sansk.  guda. 

Batu.  Batohan,  quarry.  Kabatohan, 
place  of  stones;  rocky  ground. 
Mabatong  bukid,  a  stony  field. 
Bato  also  means  rice  which  does 
not  open  when  toasted;  and 
kidney.  Magbato,  (1)  to  cut 
stone;  (2)  to  lay  stone;  (3)  to 
build  out  of  stone.  Ex.:  (3) 
Nagbabato  si  Juan  nang  kaniyang 
hahay  (Juan  is  building  his  house 
out  of  stone).  Maginbato,  to  turn 
into  stone.  Ex.:  Ang  asdua  ni 
Loth  ay  nagivbatong  asm  (Lot's 
wife  became  a  pillar  [rock]  of 
salt) . 

Tubig.  Tubigan,  irrigated  land. 
Katvbigan,  place  where  water  may 
be  had.  Magi u big,  (1)  to  put 
water  into  anything;  (2)  to  water 
an  animal,  etc.  Mandbig,  to  go  for 
water  in  a  canoe  or  on  an  animal. 
(To  go  for  water  with  a  pitcher  is 
uniigib).  Angpaiinbignn,  theplace. 
Panubig,  to  make  water.  Makitu- 
big,  to  ask  for  water.     Si  Juan  ay 


150 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Church. 

Cockpit. 


Head. 


Foot. 


Stern;  last  part. 


Bow;  first  part. 


To  make  port  ( as  a  vessel ) . 


To  bathe;  to  take  a  bath. 


iKikibiti'tbif/  Ka  (ikbi  (Juan  asked 
me  to  help  him  get  water). 
Patublgin  mo  ako  (Give  me  some 
water).  Tubig  na  hihilamosin, 
wash  water. 

Siinbahan.     Snmunbn,  to  worship. 

SaboiTgan.  Snmabong,  to  fight  (one 
gamecock  against  another).  Mag- 
saboiig,  to  fight  against  each  other; 
also  to  play  one  against  the  other. 
Avg  sdsabongiyi,  the  game  (cock- 
fighting).  Ang  i-{i]xtg)-S(iboiig, 
the  gamecock  (s).  Pnlasabong, 
cockfighter  by  occupation. 

JJlo.  Vhihan,  head  of  the  bed;  also 
a  large-headed  person.  Ulundn, 
the  head  place  (pillow).  Unan  is 
the  word  for  pillow  itself.  Ex.: 
UmuM  ka  rixi  (Put  your  head 
here).  Uluhln  vio  ynri  (Put  your 
head  here  toward  me).  Ululicm 
mo  ilo  (Put  your  head  on  this). 

Pad  (from  Sansk.  pada,  foot).  The 
English  is  also  from  the  same 
Sansk.  word.  The  English  paiv 
does  not  seem  to  be  from  Sansk., 
l)ut  to  be  of  Teutonic  origin,  but 
remotely  may  be  the  same.  Paa- 
lian,  the  foot  of  a  bed;  place  of  the 
feet.  Magpad,  to  set  the  foot 
down;  to  step  in  or  on. 

Ang  hull.  Hamuli,  (1)  to  steer;  (2) 
to  remain  behind  purposely.  3/«- 
huU,  to  be  left  liehind.  Ang  hu- 
lihdn,  the  last  or  hinder  part.  A'a- 
hulihdn,  tardiness.  Ang  knhulihu- 
lihdn,  the  very  last.  Humull  is  to 
catch,  etc.  (note  the  difference  in 
accent). 

Una.  Umund,  to  lead.  Houag  kang 
mund,  do  not  go  ahead.  Anguna- 
hdn,  the  fore  part  or  place.  Kau- 
nahdn,  priority.  Undund,  firstly. 
Ayig  kaunnunahdn,  the  very  first. 
Sa  und,  anciently.  Sa  una  pang  sa 
und,  very  anciently.  Sa  unang 
drao,  in  the  days  of  old.  Maiiij- 
und,  to  precede;  to  guide  (in  per- 
son); to  lead,  as  a  guide. 

Dumoong.  'Aiig  idoong,  the  vessel 
put  into  port.  Ang  doongan,  the 
place.  Lalaiiigan  is  another  name 
for  port.  Magkapadoong,  to  make 
port  suddenly.  Madoong,  to  be  in 
port. 

Paligo.  Ang  paliguan,  the  bathing 
place.  Ang  ligoin;  ang  paligoin, 
the  water  for  bathing.  MagJigb; 
magpaligb,  to  bathe  another. 
(See  the  phrases  on  p.  24  for  use 
of  these  words).  Pambo  is  a  rare 
svnonvm. 


TAQALOG    LANGUAGE. 


151 


To  make  a  mudhole  under  the  house. 
To  wound. 


To  scratch  or  scrape  tlie  ground  with 
the  hands,  claws,  feet,  etc. 


Mac/pumli.  "The  place,"  anc/  kn- 
pumlian.     Pusalian,    "mudhole." 

Su)nH(]ut.  Ang  sugntin ,  the  wounded 
person  or  animal,  etc.  Ang  ikasd- 
gat,  the  cause.  Ang  sugatan,  the 
place  or  what  part  wounded .  Ex. : 
SinuHugotan  vii/d  sa  kamcn/  (he  is 
wounded  in  the  arm  [hand]). 
There  is  no  separate  word  for  arm 
and/u7.;/'ZinTagalog.  Buraw,  from 
Sp.  brazu,  is  sometimes  used.  J'dd, 
foot,  is  also  a  foreign  word.  Rus- 
sian has  exactly  tlie  same  peculiar- 
ity, riika  meaning  both  hand  and 
arm,  and  noga  both  foot  and  leg. 
Magsugat,  to  wound  much ;  makasil- 
gat,  to  cause  to  be  woun( led .  Sugdt 
(note  the  accent)  is  another  root, 
with  the  idea  of  trading  at  retail. 
Sumugat,  to  buy  at  retail,  or  go  to  a 
retail  market.  Magsugat,  to  sell  at 
retail.  Ang  sugatan,  the  place,  i. 
e.,  the  market.  Tiangi,  a  Spanish- 
Aztec  word,  is  the  usual  name  for 
a  market. 

Kamotkot.  Magkotkot,  to  make  a 
ditch  or  trench.  Ang  kotkotin,  the 
earth  scratched  up,  or  (2)  thrown 
out  of  a  ditch.  Ex.:  [2)  Kinotkot 
nangmangd  sundalo  ang  lupa  nang 
A:amcf;(/(thesoldiers  threw  the  earth 
out  with  their  hands) .  Ang  Ikot- 
kot,  the  means,  i.  e.,  the  hands, 
claws,  etc.  Ex.:  Ang  kamay  ang 
ikinotkot  nang  maiTijd  suvdalo  nang 
lupa  (with  their  hands  tlie  soldiers 
threw  out  the  earth  [or  dug  the 
trench] ).  Ang  kotkotan,  the  place. 
'Ex.:  ltd  ang  kinotkotan  nangmangd 
sundalo  (this  was  where  thesoldiers 
dug  the  trench).  PanTgotkot,  the 
instrument  used  for  digging,  as  a 
spade,  shovel,  etc. 

SunilUd,  from  sUid,  a  room.  Aug 
sidldn  (c),  the  room  entered  (no 
tense  idea).  Ang  sisidldn,  the 
room.  Magsilid,  to  put  into  a  room 
or  to  enter  much.  Masilid,  to  be 
in  a  room.  Ang  pagsisidldn,  the 
room  entered  much.  S_vn.,  lindoh, 
from  Idob,  within;  inside. 

Hinnigd.  Ang  hihigdn  (c),  the  place; 
the  bed.  Mahigd,  to  be  lying  down, 
or  in  bed.  Ex. :  Sino  kayd  yaong 
nahihigd/  (who  is  that  lying  down 
there?). 

X.  Verbs  in  which  the  idea  of  expulsion  is  inherent  do  not  admit  of  in 
as  an  ending  for  the  direct  object,  which  is  replaced  by  an,  han,  etc. 

To  place.  Maglagdy    {I   root).     Ang  lalagydn, 

the     place.       Aug     ilagdy,     what 
placed.     Ang  ilinagay;  ang   in'da- 


To  enter  a  room. 


To  lie  down;  (2)  to  go  to  bed. 


152 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  sow  ( as  rice,  corn,  etc. ) . 


To  use  or  make  soap. 


To  tVirow  awav. 


To  erect;  to  set  up. 


To  pay  a  salary  or  wages. 


gay;  ang  inalagay;  what  was 
placed,  or  has  been  placed.  Mal- 
agdy,  to  be  placed.  Aug  kinala- 
lagycin,  the  place.  Magpalag&y, 
to  desert,  to  abandon.  { Root  gen. 
redup. )  Ex. :  Phmlalagaylaga y 
ang  mawja  snndalo  ang  bayan  (the 
soldiers  are  leaving  tlie  town). 

Sumdhog.  Aug  iscibag,  what  sown, 
i.  e.,  the  grain.  Ang  sabugan,  the 
place,  the  field,  rice  paddy.  Ex. 
as  verbs:  Isdbog  mo  i(6  (sow  this). 
Isdbog  mo  ito  fa  iyong  bnkid  (sow 
this  in  your  field).  Sabugan  mo 
nito  ang  iyong  bdkid,  or  ang  iyong 
bnkid,  sabugan  mo  nito,  same  trans- 
lation as  with  /,  except  in  the  first 
the  empha.'^is  is  on  the  act,  and  rtn 
the  place  in  the  second.  Magm- 
bog,  to  sow  much.  Ang  ipagsd- 
bog,  what  sown  thus.  (See  tables 
for  conjugation  of  sdbog. ) 

Magsabon,  from  fip.jabon,  soap.  Ex. : 
And  ang  sinasabon  mof  (what  are 
you  washing  with  soap?).  Sabonan 
mo  ang  dainit  (use  soap  with  the 
clothes).  Wald  akong  sabdn  (I 
have  no  soap).  Mili  ka  nang  m- 
bdn  (buy  some  soap).  It  will  be 
seen  thata-ssimilated  foreign  words 
follow  the  same  rules  as  native 
ones  in  all  respects. 

Magtapon.  Ang  itapon,  what  thrown 
away.  Ex.:  Itapon  mo  do  (throw 
this  away).  Itapon  mo  itd  sa  tubig; 
taponan  mo  ang  tubig  nito;  or  ang 
tubig  ang  taponan  mo  nito  (throw 
this  into  the  water  [in  order  to  get 
rid  of  it] ). 

Magtayo.  Ang  i{pag)tay6,  what  set 
up  thus.  Angpagtayoau,  the  place. 
Ex.:  ()')  Itayo  nio  itong  mdiTgd  ha- 
ligi  (set  these  posts  [pillars]  up- 
right). Itong  loobang  it<7y  siyd 
kong  ])agtatayoan  nang  dking  bdhay 
(I  am  going  to  put  up  my  house  in 
this  3'ard).  Tnmayo,  to  stand  erect 
(animate  Vjeing).  Ex.:  Aug  suu- 
dalo  tnngmalayo  sa  harap  nang 
kaniyang  punb  (the  soldier  is 
standing  [stands]  erect  in  front  of 
[before]  his  commander) .  Matayo, 
to  be  erect  (inanimate  object). 
Ang  matTgd  haligi  nang  dk  ng  bdliay 
natatayo  (the  posts  of  my  house 
stand  [are]  upright).  Matonid 
also  means  upright,  but  generally 
in  a  moral  sense. 

Vmvpa.  Ang iiipa,  the  wage  or  pay. 
Ang  itpahan,  person  paid  or  what 
paid  for,  as  a  rented  house,  etc. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  153 

Ang  pagupahan,  the  place.     Ex.: 
,  Magkano  ang  pagaupahan  sn  Ma- 

viiilaf  (how  much  is  being  paid 
in  Manila?). 

XI.  With  some  nouns  denoting  parts  of  tlie  body  an  expres.ses  personal 
adjectives  with  an  idea  of  augmentation. 

Shoulder.  Balikat.     Balikalan,    broad-shoul- 

dered. Ex.,  verbalized:  Baiikatm 
mo  ilong  kauagan  (carry  this  bam- 
boo on  your  shoulder ) .  Isabalikat 
mo  itong  panjio  {spread  this  hand- 
kerchief over  your  shouldeis). 
Balikalan  mo  siya  (catch  him  by 
the  shoulders). 

Mouth.  Bibig.     Bihif/an,  large-mouthed,  also 

great  or  reckless  talker.  Ex. :  Pi- 
naghihlgan  niyd  ako  (he  talked  a  lot 
about  me). 

Nose.  Ilong.     Ilongan,  large-nosed. 

For  places  expressed  with  jxtg — an  and  ka — an,  see  underpay  and  kn. 

COXSTRtCTION. 

XII.  With  an  the  direct  object  takes  the  accusative  and  the  agent  the 
genitive.  Ex. :  Hinahagkdn  nang  anak  (agt. )  ang  kaniyang  ina  (dir.  object) 
(the  child  is  kissing  his  [her]  mother).  Lit.,  "Is  being  kissed  by  the  child 
the  his  [her]  mother."  Takuran  mo  iyang  kdhoy  (prop  up  that  tree).  Lit., 
"Let  be  propped  up  by  you  that  tree." 

XIII.  If  an  indirect  object  expressing  place  is  included  in  a  sentence, 
however,  it  takes  the  accusative  case,  and  the  direct  object  the  genitive  or 
other  oblique  case,  the  agent  remaining  in  the  genitive,  as  explained  in  the 
preceding  paragraph.  Ex. :  Tinatamnun  ni  aind  nang  sarlsaring  kdhoi/  ang 
halamanan  (Father  is  planting  different  kinds  of  trees  in  the  orchard  [gar- 
den])— lit.,  "The  garden  (ace.)  is  being  planted  with  different  kinds 
(abl.)  of  trees  (gen. )  by  father  (ins.)."  Pinaghanapan  mo  hagd  sa  cabayo 
ilong  daang  ito?  (iMd  you  look  for  the  horse  on  this  road?) — lit.,  "  Was- 
looking-place  your  perhaps  (gen.)  for  horse  (dat. )  this  road?  (nom.  as 
trans.,  same  form  as  ace. )." 

XIV.  If  an  is  used  modifying  a  place  or  person  in  which  to,  for,  from, 
by,  on,  in,  etc.,  precedes  the  place  or  person  when  translated  into  English, 
the  place  or  person  should  be  exjiressed.  In  these  cases  the  agent,  as  usual, 
takes  the  genitive  and  the  direct  object  the  accusative.  The  indirect  object 
may  either  precede  or  fallow  the  verb,  except  interrogative  pronouns  or 
adverl)s  of  place,  which  always  precede.  The  person  or  place  is  empha- 
sized by  being  placed  before  the  verb  in  the  sentence.  Ex.:  Mnulat  niyd 
ang  akin  g  sdlat  (He  wrote  my  letter  for  me) — lit.,  "Was  written  by  him 
(her)  the  my  letter."  Sinnmlalan  ko  Hong  papel  (I  am  writing  on  this 
paper) — lit.,  "  Is-the-writing-place  my  this  paper."  Pagsusulatan  ko  ilong 
papel  ilo  (I  will  write  on  this  paper).  Same  construction  as  foregoing, 
with  future  tense;  Sino  ang  pinagbilhdn  mo  nitong  cabayo.^  (To  whom 
have  you  sold  this  horse?)— lit.,  "Who  (was)  the  purchaser  your  of  this 
horse?"  Ang  anak  nang  kapidbahay  ko  (To  the  son  of  my  neighbor)  "The 
son  of  the  neighbor  my." 

THE   INDEFINITE    P.\RTICLE    "UM." 

I.  Um  is  called  the  first  verbalizing  particle  by  the  Spanish  writers  on 
Tagalog,  and  is  generally  used  to  verbalize  roots  when  the  action  is  primary 
or  expressed  as  the  act  of  the  subject  without  special  reference  to  the  object. 
Ihn  also  has  the  idea  of  action  toward  another  person.     Some  roots  differ 


IS-J-  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

radically  in  their  meaning  with  inn  and  mac/,  or  rather  in  opposite  ways 
from  a  neutral  point.  With  other  roots  mag  expresses  intensity  of  what  is 
expressed  jmrnarily  with  urn.  Um,  which  is  found  in  the  so-called  indefi- 
nite, changes  to  wu/tn  in  the  past  and  present  tenses,  and  drops  out  in  the 
future  tense.  There  are  also  pluperfect  and  future-perfect  tenses,  but  they 
are  not  generally  used.  For  the  conjugation  of  a  root  with  run  see  the 
tables.  There  are  some  irregularities  with  some  roots  which  are  noted  in 
the  proper  ])lace.  In  the  mechanical  structure  of  the  language  xim  is  pre- 
fixed to  roots  beginning  with  a  vowel  and  infixed  between  the  first  letter 
and  the  following  vowel  of  a  consonant  root. 

II.  The  philologist  Keane  gave  G.  W.  Parker,  author  of  the  Grammar 
of  the  jMalagasy  Language  (London,  1883),  the  following  information  as  to 
the  use  and  origin  of  infixes,  which  applies  to  Tagalog  as  w'ell: 

"The  infix  syllable  om  {um,  am,  om)  is  a  feature  which  Malagasy  has  in 
common  with  Khmer  (Cambojan),  Javanese,  Malay,  Tagala  (sic)  (Philip- 
pine Archipelago),  and  no  doubt  other  members  of  the  Malayo-Polynesian 
family. 

"Khmer:  Slap,  dead;  samlap,  to  kill.  Javanese:  Hunih,  flame;  humu- 
rub,  to  inflame.  Malay:  FilUi,  to  choose;  pam'dihan,  choice.  Tagala: 
Basa,  to  read  (idea  of  reading);  bumam,  to  make  use  of  reading  (to  read). 

"Originally  a  prefix,  as  it  still  is  in  Samoan  (Ex.:  Moto,  unripe;  momoto, 
to  die  young),  this  particle  seems  to  have  worked  its  way  into  the  body  of 
the  word  by  a  ])rocess  of  metiithesis  analogous  to  tlie  transposition  common 
to  most  languages  (comjiare  Anglo-Saxon  thridda  with  third)." 

III.  As  has  been  stated,  lun  is  generally  used  to  express  tlie  simple  un- 
reciprocated a(;t  of  the  agent,  either  toward  himself  or  others,  provided  the 
action  is  not  modified  by  conditions  of  time  (not  tense),  manner,  instru- 
ment, number  (plurality),  or  otherwise  carried  away  from  its  simplest 
sense.  IMany  roots  admit  both  um  and  mag  with  little  difference  in  mean- 
ing, and  hence  it  is  often  difficult  to  decide  upon  a  choice  between  them, 
but  it  is  generally  safe  to  use  um.  Again,  many  roots  differ  widely  with 
the  two  particles.  Cm  refers  more  to  subject  and  his  action,  mag  to  the 
object  and  the  action  of  the  verb  upon  it. 

CLASSES  OF  "UM"    ROOTS. 

For  convenience  of  reference  the  roots  conjugated  by  um  have  been  ar- 
raged  into  numbered  paragraphs,  those  following  the  regular  conjugation 
being  given  in  Par.  I-XVII,  and  those  having  irregularities  coming  under 
Par.  XVIII-XXI.     Diminutives  are  treated  in  Par.  XXII. 

I.  Roots  which  denote  qualities  capable  of  being  slowly  assimilated  by 
the  agent  form  the  first  class.  There  are  some  adverbs  which  are  verbal- 
ized by  um  in  certain  cases. 

To  grow  dark.  Dttrndim.     MagdRim,   to  grow  very 

dark.  Ang  dUhnan,  what  is  ob- 
scured by  darkness.  {Ang  dilimdn, 
the  osier  with  which  fish  corrals 
are  tied.  DUunan  is  also  the  name 
of  a  village  near  Manila).  Ex. 
with  wn:  Dungmidilini  ang  gabl 
(The  night  is  growing  dark ) .  Ang 
pagdiddim  nang  arao,  the  eclipse 
of  the  sun.  Madilun,  to  be  over- 
taken by  darkness;  also  adj.  dark, 
obscure.  Ex.:  Naddiman  kami 
(excl.)  sa  daan  (We  were  over- 
taken by  darkness  on  the  road). 
Maddim  na  (It  is  dark  already). 
Maddim  pa  ( It  is  dark  yet).  Man- 
dilim,  to  travel  in  darkness.  Ex.: 
Houag  ipanddim  iyang  cabayo  (Do 


TAGALOG    LANGUA(4E. 


155 


To  grow  up;  to  become  large,  etc. 


To   grow  cool 
drink). 


or  cold   (as   food  or 


not  travel  in  the  dark  with  that 
horse).  Makndilim,  to  become 
dark  ( not  limited  to  a  slow  process, 
as  with  vm. )  TagdUim,  time  or 
season  of  darkness.  Twilight, 
t(ihij)silim. 

Liuiiak'i.  Ex.:  Lungmaki  ak6  m 
MairnUa  (I  grew  up  in  Manila). 
Mag.'aki,  to  increase ;  to  make  some- 
thing larger.  Aiuj  lakJu'vn,  what 
made  larger.  Ang  naglalaki,  the 
agent.  Makalaki,  to  cause  or  to  be 
able  to  grow  larger.  Ang  ikalaki, 
the  cause.  Aug  pokalakihw,  what 
is  to  be  made  larger.  Kalnkhan, 
(abs. )  size.  Ang  bdakUnklhan, 
the  very  largest.  Majiakaluki,  to 
grow  greatly;  or  too  large.  Mag- 
jmlaki,  to  rear  (as  a  cliil(l) ;  to  edu- 
cate. Ex. :  Sino  ang  nagpapalaki 
saii/uf  (Who  reared  you?)  Ang 
aking  nnno'y  sigang  nagpalaki  sa 
akin  (My  grandparent  was  the  one 
who  reared  me).  Malaki  (adj.), 
])ig;  large. 

Luinarnig.  Ex.:  Lalamig  ang  sa 
(The  tea  will  become  cold).  Ang 
nakakDitig  (indef. ),  aug  ikalamig 
(def.),  the  cause.  Maglamig,  to 
cool  any  th ing.  A ng  lam  igan,  what 
cooled.  A7ig  pakalarnlgiii,  what 
put  to  cool.  Magpalavvg,  to  put 
out  to  cool.  Malamig  (adj. ),  cold ; 
(fig.)  Malamig  na  banta  or  na  loob, 
cold-hearted. 

Pumuti.  Ex. :  Pungmuputi  ang  hu- 
laklak  (The  flower  is  growing 
white).  Augpudri,  whatbleached. 
Magputi,  to  whiten  anything.  Ang 
■ipntt,  the  means  or  the  whitening 
material.  Ang  jmtian,  what  whit- 
ened, as  the  wall,  etc.  Ang  pag- 
kapiUin,  what  whitened  greatly. 
Ang  kaputian  naiig  itlog,  the  white 
of  the  egg.  Kaputian,  whiteness 
(abs.). 

Lunmblid,  from  lubhd,  very  (adverb). 
Ex.:  Ana  ang  lagay  nang  ama  mof 
(How  is  your  father?)  Lung- 
nudnbhd  ang  kanit/ang  sakit  (His 
illness  is  increasing).  Nalulubhd 
nasigd  ( He  is  near  death's  door) — 
lit,  "He  is  exceedingly  ill."  Mag- 
lubhd,  to  increase  much;  (fig.)  to 
be  impudent.  Sagluhdiltd  ka  sa 
akin  (You  are  too  forward  with 
me;  you  are  impudent  to  me). 

II.  Um  is  used  to  indicate  intentional  acts  of  destruction,  damage,  etc., 
by  the  agency  of  an  animate  being.  If  caused  by  an  inanimate  agency, 
such  destruction  or  damage  is  expressed  by  maka' {yiaka).     Ex.:  Ang  lin- 


To  grow  white;  to  bleach  out. 


To  increase,  etc. 


156  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

dol  (1 11  nakaslrd  sa  bdhni/  (the  eartliquake  destroyed  the  house).     Examples 
in  this  class  with  uin  : 

To  kill;    (2)  to  extinguish;    to  put     Pumalay.     Ex.:  Ako  bagd  ang  papa- 
out  (as  a  light).  tay  ituiig  ilaof     (Shall  I  put  this 

light  out?  {Hindi,  ako  mja  ang 
papalay  (no,  I  will  put  it  out  my- 

To  destroy.  Sutnird,.    ^Ijig^  strain,  what  destroyed. 

Ex. :  And  ang  Kimgmird  nang  mangd 
Imlaman?  (What  has  destroyed 
tlie  jilants?)  Ang  maiujd  baking 
ang  figaiig  lunginipol  nang  lahat 
(the  locusts  have  wiped  out  every- 
thing). {Lumipol,  to  devastate; 
exterminate;  wipe  out;  lay  waste; 
destroy).  Ang  isird,  the  cause  of 
destruction.  Magsird,  to  destroy 
much.  Ang  pagsirain,  what  thus 
destroyed.  Ex.:  Pinagsird  nang 
niangd  babug  itoiig  mmTgd,  halaman 
(the  pigs  have  destroyed  these 
plants  greatly).  Maraming  hala- 
man ang  jjinagslsird  nild  (many 
plants  are  heing  destroyed  [by 
them] ;  or  they  are  doing  much 
damage  to  the  plants) .  Masird, 
to  be  <lestroyed;  to  spoil.  Sird, 
spoiled.  Sird  nu  angmataims  (the 
preserves  are  spoiled  already). 
Makasird,  to  cause  to  destroy. 
Makasisird,  destructive.  Ang  ika- 
sird,  the  cause  of  spoiling  {ang 
ikinasisird.,  present  tense).  Ma- 
nird,  to  destroy  irreparably;  com- 
pletely; or  (2)  "by  many.  (Idiom. ) 
Manirang  pari,  to  destroy  the 
honor  of  another;  to  dishonor. 
Magkasirdsird,  to  be  destroyed 
completely.  Ex. :  Ang  pinagkaka- 
airdsiraan  nang  niaiTgd  baya^ g  ang 
pagbabakd  (war  destroys  towns 
[fig.,  countries]  completely). 

To  set  fire  to.  Sumunog.     Sino  bagd  ang  sungmnnog 

nitong  balmy  na  itof  ( Who  I)urned 
this  house?)  Aywaan  ako,  j>6  (I 
don't  know,  sir).  Ang  sini'inog 
(what  was  or  has  been  set  fire  to). 
Magsunog,  to  burn  up  (intention- 
ally). Ang  pinagsdnog,  what 
burned  up  thus.  Masunog,  to  burn 
up;  to  be  burned.  Ex.:  Nagsunog 
siyd  ang  dining  bdhay  (he  burned 
our  house).  N^asdnog  ang  dming 
baliay  (our  house  burned  down). 
Maknsihiog,  to  cause  to  set  fire  to; 
also  to  be  burned,  as  from  another 
house,  etc.  Mitgkasunog,  to  suffer 
(many )  from  a  conflagration.  Su- 
nog,  conflagration  (note  accent). 

III.  As  a  general  rule,  nm  verbs  have  a  corresponding  definite  with  in. 
The  reverse  is  not  always  true,  as  the  acts  of  causing  emotion  in  others, 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  157 

expressed  by  hi  with  definite  s^entences,  take  the  indefinite  with  mn  {na). 
Certain  other  routs  used  witii  magiia  {n<i<ip(i)  in  the  indefinite  take  the 
definite  in  an.     These  will  be  noticed  in  the  proper  places. 

IV.  r*H,  with  roots  denoting  weapons,  tools,  and  instruments,  expresses 
the  use  of  such  objects. 

Dagger.  Iwa.     Umhvct,  to  stab.     Ang  iwaan, 

the  person  stabbed.  Mar/ina,  to 
wear  a  dagger.  Mam/iwd,  to  use 
a  dagger  on  one's  self.  Magpa- 
jimTgiivd,  to  wound  each  other  with 
daggers  (as  in  a  melee). 

Spear.  Sihat   (syn.,    tandos).      iSumihat,    to 

spear  or  to  throw  a  spear,  jing 
slbativ,  the  object.  Any  ii^ihat,  the 
spear  thrown.  Magsihat,  to  carry 
a  spear.    A ng pagsibatan,  the  place. 

Adze.  Dams.      Dumards,  to  use  an  adze. 

Ang pandards,  the  adze  itseli.  Ang 
mandarards,  the  user.  Ex. :  Dara- 
sin  mo  ito  (plane  this  off). 

Scissors.  Gunting.      Gumunting,   to  cut  with 

scissors;  to  shear.  Ang  giadiiTgin, 
what  cut  off.  A  ng  gitntiiTgan,  from 
what.  Magnnting,  to  use  the  scis- 
sors on  one's  hair,  etc.  Magupit 
is  the  better  word  for  this  last. 

Plane.  Katain.    Ku)  na  tarn,  to  \i\2ii\e.    Maiig- 

atn/atam,  planer. 

Drum.  Gimbal.     Guniinibal,  to  drum.     Man- 

gigimbal.,  drummer. 

V.  Uin  is  used  with  roots  denoting  postures  to  express  such  postures  or 
positions  when  taken  voluntarily. 

To  stand  up;  to  go  to  the  defense  of     Tumindig.     Angtindigan,  the  Tperf'on 
another;  (3)  to  go  to  get  married.        before  whom  standing;  the  place 

or  (3)  the  woman  to  be  married. 
Magtindig,  to  stand  up  much. 
Ang  tindigan,  ( 2)  is  the  person  gone 
against  in  the  defense  of  another, 
and  ang  itindlg  the  cause.  Mag- 
tindigan  (dual)  two  on  foot  facing 
each  other,  as  warriors,  etc.  A'a- 
tindigan,  one  of  two  opponents 
thus.  Ang  ipagtiadigan,  the  cause 
of  thus  facing  each  other.  Ang 
pagtindiganan,  the  j)lace.  Ang 
tinindigan,  the  scene  of  war;  field 
of  battle.  Matindig,  to  be  on  one's 
feet;  (2)  to  be  risen.  Ako'gnati- 
tindig,  I  am  on  my  feet.  Ak(?y 
natindig,  1  had  risen.  Magpatin- 
dig,  to  stand  another  on  liis  feet, 
or  to  stand  something  ujiright. 
Ang  pafliidig,  the  position  of  l)eing 
on  one's  feet  or  being  upright. 
Ex.:  Patindigin  mo  Hong  tduo  (tell 
this  man  to  stand  up).  Ipatindig 
mo  itong  tduo  (stand  this  man  on 
his  feet).  Patindigan  mo  sa  itong 
lamesa  niyang  larauan  (stand  that 
image  [statuette;  picture]  upright 


158  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

on  this  table).  Ang  ipatindig, 
what  stood  up,  or  who.  Manindig, 
to  raise,  as  the  hair. 

To  place  one's  self  in  front;  to  face  Tumapat:  (2)  Ang  tapatin,  the  word 
the  front;  (2)  to  keep  one's  word.         kept,     (l)  aiig  tapxitmi,  the  person 

fonf rented;  also  tapatan,  a  cutoff, 
yard,  etc.  Maglapat,  to  travel, 
talk,  or  do  in  a  direct  course  or 
manner.  (2)  Ang  ipagtapat,  what 
just  in.  Ang  pagtapaian,  before 
whom.  ( 1 )  Pagtapatin,  two  things 
placed  facing  each  other.  Magta- 
pat  nawika,  straighttalk.  Matapat, 
to  be  facing;  (2)  to  belong  to  some 
one.  y<datapat  siyd  sa  asaucmg 
ivalang  bait,  he  (she)  has  a  wife 
(husband)  without  judgment. 
Manapat,  a  just  measure.  Ex.: 
Manapat  na  gawd  (a  just  deed). 
Magputumapat,  to  feign  to  be  just. 
Ang  nagkatatapat,  the  couple  fac- 
ing each  other  (dual).  Ang  nag- 
kataputtapat,  the  persons  facing 
each  other  (plural).  Ex.,  with 
magtapat,  in  the  sense  of  planting 
in  rows,  as  trees,  etc. :  Bdkit  hindi 
mo  piinagtapat  ignng  manga  hala- 
inaiif  (Why  didn't  you  set  out 
those  plants  right?)  Pagtapatin 
mo  namda  ang  maiTgd  kdhoy  (put 
the  trees  in  rows,  too). 

To  kneel.  Lumuhod.      Aug    luluhoran,    before 

whom  or  what  place.  Luhoran, 
cushion.  Magluhod,  to  kneel 
much;  or  by  many;  to  cause  an- 
other to  kneel;  to  kneel  with 
something.  .  Ang  ihihod,  the  ob- 
ject knelt  with.  Maluhod,  to  kneel 
involuntarily  or  unconsciously;  to 
be  kneeling;  also  adj.  kneeling;  to 
be  on  the  knees.  Xaluluhod  sild, 
they  are  on  their  knees.  Mapalu- 
hod,  to  remain  kneeling.  Magpa- 
tihihod,  to  kneel  suddenly.  Ang 
paluliod,  the  position  of  kneeling. 
Ang  tnhod,  the  knee.  Tumuhod, 
to  tdurh  with  the  knee  purposely. 
Mali'iliod,  to  touch  with  the  knee 
accidentally  or  casually.  {Mali'i- 
hod,  to  be  humble. )  Tumikluhod, 
to  kneel  (down).  Magtikluliod,  to 
kneel  down  much.  Ang  tikluho- 
ran,  the  place  or  the  person  knelt 
to.  Ang  ikapntUduhod,  the  cause 
of  many  kneeling.  Also  inanikhi- 
hod,  to  kneel  down.  Ang  paniklu- 
horaii,  the  place  or  pcr.^on  knelt 
to.  Ang  ip'tnikhdtod,  the  cause. 
Magpanikluhod,  to  kneel  much. 
Angpagpapaniklulioran,  the  kneel- 
ing people  (many).  See  conjuga- 
tion of  nuiniklii]iod. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


159 


To  lean  upon;  to  recline. 

To  lie  down. 

To  lie  face  downward. 

To  prostrate  one's  self. 

To  lie  on  the  side  (action);  to  place 
one's  self  on  one's  side. 


To  lie  on  the  back  (action);  to  place 
one's  self  on  the  back. 


To  crouch  on  hands  and  feet  (not 

bending  knees). 
To  sit  down;  to  take  a  seat. 


To  sit  down  to  rest  ('oriefly). 


Hum 'dig.  Ang  ihilig,  what  part  of 
the  body  leaned  upon.  Ang  hiii- 
gan,  the  place;  couch,  etc.  (//«- 
milig  is  "to  weave."    Note  accent. ) 

Humiga.  (Previously  explained  in 
detail. ) 

Tumaob.  Magtaob,  to  place  another 
face  downward. 

Dumapd.  Marapd,  to  fall  prostrate 
(accidentally). 

Tamag'did.  Magtitgilid,  to  be  lying 
on  the  side  ( state ) .  Ang  jyalagUid, 
the  position  of  lying  on  the  side. 
GUid  is  side;  also  entrance  to  a 
house. 

Tutu  ihayd.  MatihaycL,  to  be  lying  on 
the  back  (state).  Ex.:  Bdtit  ka 
nalitihagd?  (Why  are  you  lying  on 
your  back?)  Mapatlhuyd,  to  fall 
on  the  back.  Aug  patihagd,  the 
position  of  being  on  the  back. 

Tuinuad.  Magpatuad,  to  stand  on 
all  four  feet  (as  an  animal). 

Umupo  (one).  Magiipo  (more). 
Maupu,  to  be  seated  (state).  Ang 
paiipo,  the  sitting  position.  Ex.: 
Ito'y  gngau-'in  inong  nang  paupd 
(This  will  have  to  be  done  by  you 
while  sitting  down). 

Maglikmu.  Ang  likmoan,  the  resting 
place. 

VI.  I'm  is  used  to  express  voluntarily  or  involuntarily  (but  consciously) 
performed  life-supporting  actions  and  organic  functions  of  the  body,  except 
some  which  are  used  with  mag,  and  a  few  with  man.  Some  actions  of 
inanimate  objects  also  follow  this  rule. 


To  eat. 


Kumaln.  (Partly  explained  before. ) 
Magkain,  to  eat  much ;  or  by  many. 
Magkainkalnan,  to  nibble  (dim.). 
Ex. :  Nagkakainkainan  siyd,  he  is 
nibbling  (pretending  to  eat). 
MaiTgain,  to  eat  continually;  to  de- 
vour. J/rtA'ai/i,  edible  (adj.).  3/«- 
kakain,  able  to  be  eaten.  Magpa- 
kain,  to  give  food  to  another  person 
or  animal.  Ang  pakanin,  who  or 
Avhat  fed.  Ang  ipakain,  the  food 
given.  Ang  pakaninun,  the  place. 
Ex.:  Papakain  ka  kny  Juan  (ask 
Juan  to  give  you  something  to  eat) . 
Ipapakain  mo  sa  "cociyieru"  itong 
batcl  ( Tell  the  cook  to  give  this  boy 
(child)  something  to  eat).  Bdkit 
hindt  mo  pinakakain  itong  manga 
<auo.^(  Why  aren't  you  feedingthese 
people.)  Pakanin  }no  iTija  .<(*7a,  feed 
them.  And  ang  ipinakakain  mo  sa 
kanild?  (What  are  you  giving 
them  [to  eat]?)  Pina'kain  ko  sUd 
nang  kamn,p6.  ( I  havegiven  them 
some  rice,  sir. ) 


160 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  swallow  food. 

To  swallow  pits  or  seeds  of  fruit. 

To  drink. 


To  swallow  liquids. 

(b.) 
To  show  the  teeth;  to  grin. 


To  smile  bashfully. 
To  laugh  (voluntarily). 


To  sob. 


To  shed  tears;  to  cry  quietly, 


To  weep. 
To  snore. 


Lumamon.     (Already  explained.) 

Lumunok.  Ang  lunokin,  what  swal- 
lowed. 

U}ni7inm.  Maginum,  to  drink  much 
or  by  many.  (Partly  explained 
before.)  Aug  piiiainnm,  who  or 
what  given  adrink.  Ang  Ipninum, 
the  drink  given.  Palainum,  ha- 
bitual drinker,  l^ninum  has  an 
irregular  form  of  conjugation  like 
nmalis. 

Lumagok.  Kalagok,  a  swallow.  Ka- 
kalagok,  only  one  swallow. 

jS'gumisi.  Also  magiTgiisl  and  iTgingi- 
siiTgisi.  Ang  iiTgisi  or  ang  ip<i- 
iTijisi,  the  cause  of  showing  the 
teeth,  or  the  mouth  and  teeth. 
Ang  i7ij'nwvjmhan,  the  person  or 
animal  the  teeth  shown  to.  Syn., 
Ngumisngis.  The  wild  hog  is  called 
i\'^i!>i'  when  the  tusks  begin  to  show. 

Xgu  m  it  I.  A  ng  iiTljitt,  the  smile  or  the 
mouth.  AiTg  i7gitian,  the  person 
or  object  smiled  at  thus. 

Tuniaua.  Magtmia,  to  laugh  much, 
or  by  a  few.  MaiTgagtaua,  to  laugh 
(by  many).  Tataua  nang  tataua, 
to  laugh  and  laugh  over  again. 
Magtauanan,  to  laugh  at  each 
other.  Angtauanan,  what  laughed 
at  by  one  or  a  few.  Ang  pagtau- 
andn,  what  laughed  at  by  uianj-. 
Aug  ilaud,  the  cause  (one  orfew). 
Ang  ipagtaua,  the  cause  of  many 
laughing.  Mataua,  to  laugh  invol- 
untarily; to  giggle.  Biikit  hi  na- 
tatauaf  [  Why  are  you  giggling  so?) 
Makataua  or  niagpotaua,  to  cause 
laughter.  Ang  katand,  the  com- 
panion in  laughter.  Matauanin, 
laughing  person. 

Humibik.  Also  hibikhibik.  Ang 
ihibik  or  ang  ikahibik,  the  cause. 
A  variation  is  humvnbik  or  himhik- 
himbik. 

Lumuha.  Ang  nagluluha,  the  eyes 
shedding  tears.  Ang  ilulid,  the 
tears.  Ang  linuluJiaan,  the  person 
before  whom  teai"s  are  shed,  etc. 
MagkaluJia,  to  shed  tears  uncon- 
sciously. Lnngmalngoslus  angluhd, 
the  tears  are  trickling. 

Tumaiujis.     (Already  explained.) 

HuntiUk.  Ang  Jiilik,  the  snorer. 
Also  IhunikaJ),  var.  Juonigab. 
These  last  words  al.>^o  mean  "to 
yawn."  Maghilik,  to  snore  much. 
Ang  paghilik,  the     great    snorer. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


161 


To  spit;  to  expectorate. 


To  bite. 

To  scratch  another. 


To  blow  the  nose. 
To  "Sneeze. 

To  make  Avater  (voluntarily). 

To  stool. 

To  drip;  to  run  through  a  pipe  (as 

water  and  other  liquids). 
To  trickle;  to  run  in  a  small  stream. 


Also  mcu/hikab.  Ex.:  NaghUdkab 
amj  makukatulog  (the  sleejier  is 
snoring  a  great  deal ) .  Hihikahh i- 
kah,  to  breathe  with  great  ditfi- 
culty,  as  a  dying  man. 

Lumuru.  To  i)ertV)rm  the  same  act 
as  a  sign  of  disgust  at  anyone,  man- 
hird.  Lulunht,  spittoon;  cuspi- 
dor. 

Kumagat.     (Already  explained. ) 

Kum&mot.  Magkdmot,  to  scratch 
one's  self.  Ang  paw/c'tmot,  the 
scratcher  (instrument). 

Sumin/a. 

Bumahin.  Palahahlu  or  mapug'ua- 
hii),  a  person  who  sneezes  much. 

VmUii.  I'anuhtg  is  a  more  polite 
term. 

Tumae.  Saan  ang  kumon?  (Where 
is  the  water-closet?) 

Tuviulo. 

Liimagoslos.     (Idiom) 


VII.  Roots  which  express  objects  which  may  be  produced  by  slow  self- 
sustaining  processes  generally  take  tun  to  indicate  the  process,  although 
some  important  ones  take  vian  (q.  v. ),  the  latter  usually  commencing  with  6. 


To  come  up,  to  grow  up  (as  plants); 
to  bear  (to  give  birth  to),  as  ani- 
mals. Manganak  is  "to  bear  a 
child." 


To  put  forth  shoots. 


6855—05 11 


Tiimuhb.  Tuhoan,  plant  already 
sprouted  (usually  applied  to  cocoa 
palm).  Magtubo,  to  gam;  to  win. 
KatiUubo,  of  the  same  age;  born 
at  the  same  time  (no  relationship 
idea).  Magpatubo,  to  invest;  to 
put  out  at  interest.  Ex.:  Bdkit 
hindt  mo  siya  pinauutang  nang  sa- 
laptf  (Why  don't  you  lend  him 
some  money?)  Sa  pagkaH  imM, 
at  ang  dking  salapt  a>/  pinatuboan 
ko  (Because  I  have  none  [to  lend], 
and  my  money  has  ]>een  invested ). 
iS'a  limang  piso  va  inntang  ko  kay 
Juan,  ag  pinatntnhb  ako  niyd  sa 
isa)ig  salajn  (for  live  pesos  which 
I  have  borrowed  from  Juan  he  is 
now  asking  me  a  half  peso  as  in- 
terest). And f  (What?)  Isaitg  sa- 
lapt ang  ipinatutubd  ni  Juan  sa 
dking  sa  limang  piso  ita  inutang  ko 
sa  kan iyd  ( A  half  peso  is  the  inter- 
est asked  me  by  Juan  on  five  pesos 
which  I  borrowed  from  him). 
Ex. :  "  To  come  up. ' '  Tungmutubb 
hagd  ang  maiTgd  silif  (Are  the 
peppers  [chiles]  coming  up?) 

Sumibol.  hungmisibol  na  ang  manga 
halaman  sa  lialanuxnan,  the  plants 
in  the  garden  are  already  putting 
out  shoots.  (2)  Also  applied  to 
the  growth  of  the  beard  and  other 
actions  of  like  nature.    Masibol,  to 


162 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE, 


To  bud. 


well  out,  as  water  from  a  well  or 
spring.  AiKj  sihol^'iu,  the  inonths 
during  which  the  rice  sprouts,  etc. 

Umusboiiij,  from  usbong,  bud.  Magus- 
bong,  to  have  buds.  iiyn.,usb(')sa.nd 
ugbiU.  Uinugbiis,  to  bud,  to  sprout. 
Ex.  with  usbung:  Unginuusboug  na 
ang  mumja  knliog  (the  trees  are 
budding  out  now). 

Sinnnlol,  irom  stUol,  a  sprout. 


Samupling.    Ang  suplhTgan,  the  tree. 


To  sprout  (especially  of  tubers,  like 

the  gabi  and  the  camote). 
To  sprout  (as  suckers  from  the  trunk 

of  or  at  the  foot  of  a  tree). 

VIII.  Um  expresses  (1)  meteorological  phenomena,  provided  the  root 
does  not  commence  with  b:  and  (2)  astronomical  transitions,  if  the  change 
is  represented  as  occurring  and  the  phenomena  are  not  otherwise  expressed. 

Ex.  (1): 


To  rain;  to  be  raining. 


To  blow;  to  be  blowing;  to  be  windy. 


To  lighten;  to  be  lightening. 

To  be  struck  by  lightning. 

To  thunder. 

Ex.  (2): 
To  dawn. 


To  shine  (as  the  sun) 
(2)  to  grow  light. 


to  be  sunny 


Vtnulan.  Unmlunulnn,  to  drizzle. 
Magulan,  to  sow  seed  or  to  do  any- 
thing in  the  rainy  season.  Ang 
tagulan,  the  rainy  season.  Puna- 
gulan,  land  which  is  planted  in 
the  rainy  season.  Ang  uL'in,  the 
rain.  Maulan,  to  have  many  rains; 
also  to  be  caught  in  the  rain.  Ex. : 
Naglalakad  kanii'y  naulanan  (We 
were  walking  along  and  were 
caught  in  the  rain). 

IlumaiTgia  (from  hawjiii,  wind). 
M(ighaiT</tn,  to  blow  continuously 
or  much.  MagpaliaiTijin,  to  wait 
until  the  wind  changes;  also  to 
put  anything  out  in  the  wind. 
MagpaJiaiTi/in,  to  place  one's  self 
where  the  wind  is  blowing.  ( Note 
accent. ) 

KiunidUit  (from  kidkd,  a  flash  of 
lightning) .  Magkidkd,  to  lighten 
much.  ()\<\ioTm,kirl(d.  Syn., kdat 
( rare) . 

Liimintlk  (from  llntik.  The  "thun- 
derbolt") 

Kumulog.  Mngkulog,  to  thunder  a 
great  deal. 

Umagd  (from  agd  morning).  (2)  to 
rise  early.  Magagd,  to  rise  early 
(many ),  as  a  regiment,  etc. ;  (3)  to 
eat  early.  Ang  agaan,  what  eaten 
thus,  i.  e.,  the  breakfast.  Paagd, 
to  come  early.  Naagd  sigd,  he 
came  early.  Aiig  Ipaagd,  M^hat  is 
to  be  done  early. 

Vmdrao  (from  arao.  (1)  Sun;  (2) 
day;  (3)  weather.)  Mugarao,  to  hQ 
very  sunny.  Madrao,  to  be  over- 
heated by  the  sun.  Houag  kang 
mal'is  i~gaij(V g  maaaraudn  ka't  niaii- 
nUan  (Don't  go  out  now,  because 
the  sun  will  be  out  and  you  will 


TAOALOG    LANGUAGE. 


163 


To  become  late. 


To  become   night;    to  do  anything 
at  night;  to  be  overtaken  by  night. 


To  grow  dark. 

To  grow  cloudy;  dark. 


To  grow  dark;  to  become  twilight. 


To  eclipse  (lit.  "to  be  dragoned"'). 


get  overheated ) .  Mangdrao,  to  use 
daily.  Ang  pamjdraodrao,  what  is 
used  daily  or  something  for  daily 
use.  Magpadrao,  to  wait  until  the 
sun  shines;  (2)  to  wait  for  day; 
(3)  to  sun  one's  self;  (4)  to  put  an 
object  in  the  sunshine.  Ex.:  (3) 
Houag  kang  magpadrao  (Do  not 
sun  yourself).  (4)  Magpadrao  ka 
nang  darnil  (Sun  the  clothes). 
Magpakadrao,  to  continue  at  a 
thing  until  daylight.  Ex.:  Nag- 
pakadrao  siydng  vuigdral  (He 
studied  until  daylit^ht). 

Humapon  (from  hapon,  the  time  be- 
tween noon  and  dark;  afternoon 
(Northern  United  States);  even- 
ing (Southern  United  States). 
(2)  To  go  to  roost,  as  chickens. 
Magliapon,  all  day.  Kahapon, 
yesterday.  K.  nang  umagd,  yes- 
terday morning.  A',  nang  hapon, 
yesterday  afternoon  (evening). 
K.  sa  gabi,  last  night.  Mamayang 
hapon,  later  in  the  afternoon 
(evening).  Mahapon,  to  eat  sup- 
per. Ang  haponan,  the  meal. 
Manighapon  (from  tighapon),  to 
do  something  in  the  afternoon  or 
evening  (generally  applied  to 
looking  after  plants,  etc. ). 

Ginnabi  (from  gabi),  night.  P^x.: 
Magmadali  ka't  gagabihin  sa  gubal 
(Make  haste  or  you  will  be  over- 
taken by  night  in  the  timber). 
Nagahihan  siyd  sa  ddan  (Night 
overtook  him  on  the  road).  Mag- 
pakagabi,  to  continue  at  a  thing 
until  night.  Ex.:  Nagpakagabi 
silang  magdral  (They  studied  until 
night). 

Dumilim.     (Already  explained.) 

Lumimlim  (from  limlim).  Malimlim, 
to  be  cloudy,  etc.  Lumimlim  also 
means  to  cluck,  as  a  hen  when 
she  lays  an  egg.  Ang  linilimliman, 
the  egg  laid.     Magpalimlim,  to  set 

Sumilim.  Ex. :  Pasilimin  ta  muna  bago 
Jumdkad  (I^et  us  wait  for  dusk  be- 
fore we  march ) .  Lit.  ' '  Walk  on  " . 
(2)  To  penetrate  (as  the  cold). 
(2)  SinisUim  ako  nang  lamig  (I  am 
chilled  through  by  the  cold). 

Lumahb.  Lumamon,  "to  swallow," 
and  kurnain,  "to  eat,"  are  also 
used.  Ex.:  Linainon{kinain)nang 
laho  ang  bouan  (The  moon  has  been 
swallowed  [eaten]  by  the  eclipse 
[dragon]).  Rahu  is  the  dragon 
of  Hindu  mythology  which  tries 


1(34 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  rise;  to  shine  out. 


to  eat  the  sun  and  moon  from 
time  to  time. 

Suiinlang.  Sungmilang  i>a  ang  drao 
(The  sun  has  already  risen ) .  Susi- 
huig  (Dig  boiKnig  madali  [  The  moon 
will  rise  quickly).  Snvgminkmg 
ang  mai~ja  bitnin  (the  stars  are 
shining).  Aug silcnTijim,  the  East. 
Ang  fiinilaiTgan,  what  was  lit  up 
by  the  rise  of  the  sun  or  the 
moon,  or  the  shining. out  of  the 
stars.  MagpaK'dang,  to  wait  until 
one  of  above-mentioned  Ijodies 
rise.  Ex.:  Batit  liind'i  mo  pinam'i- 
lang  muna  ang  drao?  ( Why  don't 
you  wait  until  sunrise?)  PasilarTgin 
tn  muna  ang  drao  (Let  us  wait  until 
the  sun  rises). 

Sumikat.  Ex.:  (1)  Sisikat  no  a7ig 
drao  {bouan)  (the  sun  [moon]  will 
rise  soon).  (2)  Suniisikai  (na-nsi- 
katan)  ang  bdhay  vang  tduo  (The 
house  is  filling  [filled]  with  peo- 
ple). Magjmg'ikat,  to  wait  until 
rising  of  sun,  moon,  etc.,  takes 
place.  Ex. :  Pasikatin  mo  ang  drao 
(Wait  until  the  sun  rises). 

Lumunod.  Ang  A'aZiotoi'fm,  the  West; 
lit.  "the  drowning  place."  Ex.: 
Lungmunod  ang  drao  (The  sun  has 
set).  Lungmulunodangtduo  (The 
man  is  drowning  himself) .  Mab'i- 
nod,  to  be  drowned.  With  urn. 
volition  may  be  understood,  and 
with  ma  accident. 

Lumubog.  Lumubog  ang  arao  (The 
sun  basset).  Lit.  "dived."  Mag- 
h'lbog,  to  jjlunge  another  or  an  ob- 
ject under  the  water. 

IX.  Um  is  used  with  roots  when  attraction  toward  the  agent  is  expressed, 
or  when  the  agent  gains  control  of  something.  The  opposite  idea  of  los- 
ing control,  etc.,  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  same  root,  and  in  other 
cases  with  different  roots,  the  particle  ?/i«^  being  then  the  verbalizer. 

To  buy.  Burnil't.     Maghili,  to  sell.      (Both  of 

these     have    already     been     ex- 
plained. ) 
Umutang.  Magdiang,  to  lend. 


To  come  out;  to  rise;  as  the  sun, 
moon,  or  stars.  (2)  To  fill  up 
with  people;  as  a  church,  house, 
etc. 


To  set  (as  the  sun);  jirimary  mean- 
ing, "to  drown."  Application  as 
to  sun  from  fact  that  sun  sets  in 
the  sea  to  Tagalogs. 


To  dive;  to  plunge  into;  to  go  to  the 
bottom.  ( 2 )  To  set,  lit.  ' '  to  dive, ' ' 
as  the  sun. 


To  borrow. 

To  exchange;  to  barter. 
To  take. 

To  redeem;  to  ransom. 


(Both 
partly  explained  before.)  Ex.: 
Uutamjan  ko  d  Tomds  nang  limang 
piso  (i  will  borrow  5  pesos  from 
Tomds).  Kautangan,  (abs. )  debt. 
Pautang,  credit. 

Pumalit.  Ang  jyinalit,  what  ex- 
changed or  bartered. 

Kn)nn}ia.  Aiig  jiagkuha,  the  act  of 
taking.  (Forms  with  in,  i,  ika, 
ikina,  and  an  have  been  explained 
heretofore. ) 

Sumdkop.  Magsdkop,  to  redeem 
mui'h.     Masdkop,  to  be  dominated. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


165 


To  encounter;  to  strike. 

To  purloin;  to  filch;  to  steal. 


To  catch;  to  yeize;  etc. 


Ang  sdkop,  the  vasHel  or  follower. 
Makasdkop,  to  be  able  to  dominate. 
Nasasakopun  niyd  any  buyan  (The 
village  [town]  is  under  his  rule). 
Lit.:  "The  town  is  ruled  by 
him." 

Sumumpong. 

Umumit.  Ang  umitin,  what  pur- 
loined. Maumitin  or  mapagumit, 
purloiner. 

Humidi.  Ex.:  Iha  ang  pogong  huli 
na,  sa  huhnlihin  pa  (Better  the 
quail  caught  already  than  that 
which  has  yet  to  be  caught ) . — T.  P. 
Manhul'i,  to  live  by  robbery. 

Among  other  words  coming  under  this  cla.«s  may  be  mentioned  tuman- 
gap,  "to  accept  or  receive;"  (/fOHoA;*/;,  "to  seize  or  catch  hold  of;"  umdbut, 
"to  overtake;  to  reach;"  and  sumaluhong,  "to  go  out  to  meet  anyone;" 
all  of  which  have  been  explained  before. 

X.  Urn  exj)resses  voluntary  acts  of  agents  upon  others  when  mutuality, 
duality,  or  plurality  is  not  denoted.  The  latter  are  expressed  by  »»"</,  an 
being  generally  suffixed  for  mutuality.     Examples: 


To  accompany, 


To  leave  another. 


To  join  with;  to  unite  with. 


To  talk   to;    (2) 
bring  suit. 


to  sue  another  or 


Sumama.  Magsama,  to  accompany 
each  other  (two  or  more).  Ang 
kasama,  the  companion  (servant). 
Ang  kasaniahan,  the  person  accom- 
panying another.  Makimma,  to 
thrust  one's  self  into  the  company 
of  another.  Magkasama,  togather, 
as  a  crowd.  Svmamd  is  "to  go 
into  partnership,"  and  Snmamd  is 
"to  become  bad  or  evil."  These 
examples  show  the  great  impor- 
tance of  accent  in  Tagalog. 

Hiimiwalai/.  Ang  hhvalayan,  the 
person  left.  Maghhcalay,  to  sepa- 
rate mutually.  Mahiwnlay,  to 
part  accidentally  or  casually,  etc. 
Syn.  tiwalag,  with  the  same  com- 
binations and  meanings  as  above. 
Both  probably  from  iralu,  without; 
not  to  have,  etc.  Tiwalag  is  often 
used  in  the  sense  of  divide,  but 
watak  is  better.  Magkawalakwalak, 
to  be  divided  into  many  parts. 

Punilsan.  Magpisanor  magkapisan, 
to  associate  together.  Ex.:  Ang 
plnagkakapimnan  nang  maiTgd  ka- 
runongan,  the  uniting  place  of  the 
sciences  (knowledge,  diinong), 
i.  e.,  scientific  society,  imiversity, 
etc.  Fimn  as  an  adjective  means 
"merely;  purely."  There  is  a 
noun  pisan  meaning  "  sudden 
death."  ^fakaplsan,  to  kill 
another  suddenly. 

I'mdmp.  Ang  iisapin,  the  person 
sued.  Ang  kausap,  the  compan- 
ion in  conversation.  Magusap,  to 
converse  (two  or  more);  (2)  to  sue 


166  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

one  another;  to  litigate.  Maruju- 
sap,  to  talk  much;  to  talk  to  an 
audience.  Ex. :  Houag  mo  akong 
lakasan  nang  paiujiuTgi'isap  (don't 
talk  to  me  so  much  in  such  a 
rough  way).  (As  the  variations 
of  the  idea  "  to  sue  "  are  derived, 
they  will  be  omitted).  Makipagu- 
sap,  to  converse  with  another;  (2) 
to  thrust  one's  self  into  a  conversa- 
tion. FjX.:  Ibig  mongmakijmgi'isap 
sa  akin?  (do  you  wish  to  have  a 
talk  with  me?).  Opo  (yes,  sir). 
NgaipVy  hbuU  mangyayari,  it  is  not 
possible  just  now).  Makipakiusap, 
to  rush  uninvited  into  a  conversa- 
tion between  others.  Palausap,  a 
barrator  or  perpetual  bringer  of 
groundless  suits.  Maghipakmsap, 
to  become  a  barrator.  Ex. :  Na- 
ginpidai'tsap  siyiVt  iiaglnmalalavgo- 
hin  (he  has  become  a  barrator  and 
common  drunkard).  The  first 
vice,  barratry,  is  very  prevalent 
with  Tagalogs;  the  second  is  very 
rare.  It  would  be  unusual  to  find 
the  combination  set  forth  above, 
but  grammatically  it  is  an  excel- 
lent example  with  inagin. 
To  reprove.  Umauuy.    Magamnj,  to  quarrel  with. 

Kaduay,  antagonist;  enemy. 
Ang  ipaguuay,  the  cause  of  quar- 
rel. Ex. :  Atig  ipinaganay  mnig 
manga  kapidbdhay  namin  ay  ang 
aso  ni  Feliciano,  pu  ( a  dog  of  Fe- 
liciano  was  the  cause  for  the  quar- 
rel of  our  neighbors ) .  Jtong  bdhay 
na  Ho  ang  pinaganaynn  nUd  (this 
house  is  where  they  have  been 
quarrelling  [or  where  they  quar- 
reled]). Makipagduay,  to  pick  a 
.  quarrel  or  to  interfere  in  a  quarrel. 

Magkaduay,  to  quarrel  (two  or 
more).  Nagkaduay  a  tig  dalairang 
magasaua  sa  tiangi  (the  husband 
and  wife  quarrelled  in  the  market 
place). 

XI.  Uin  also  expresses  movement  in  itself;  movement  from  an  outside 
agency  being  expressed  by  mag,  except  for  the  root  ha)~go,  which  takes 
um.     Ex. : 

To  walk;  to  pass  on;  to  march;  to     Lumdkad.    Ang  lakann,vi\\a.\.\\a\^v{\ 
travel  (on  foot).  for,  i.  e.,  the  object  of  walking. 

Ex.:  AniVt  h'lndi  ka  Inngmaldkad 
nang  mahdinf  (why  don't  you 
walk  more  quickly?).  Magldknd, 
to  walk  much  or  quickly;  to  carry 
something  while  walking.  Ang 
ildkad,  the  means  of  walking,  as 
the  foot,    or    the    object  carried 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


167 


along.  .Ing  lakaran,  the  person 
walked  to,  or  the  place  walked  to. 
Ang  jxKjlakdri'iu,  the  route,  path, 
or  road,  etc.,  walked  over.  Ang 
maglalakad,  the  walker;  traveler. 
Maglabidldku'l  (dim.),  to  stroll. 
Avg  paglakadlakarnn,  the  ground 
strolled  over.  Mag/xddkad,  to  or- 
der or  cause  to  walk  uj)  or  go 
ahead.  Makalukad,  to  be  able  to 
walk.  Ex.:  Palakarinmo >Ti/n iycmg 
cabaijo  it/an  (make  that  horse  walk 
up ) .  Hindi  viakula  kad  sign '  tjnUuj, 
p6  (he  is  not  able  to  travel;  he  i.s 
lame,  sir).  Nukahddkadako  (I  am 
able  to  walk).  Nakalalnkad  siyci 
Sana  (he  may  be  able  to  walk). 
Lumakhay  is  "  to  go  a  longways 
on  foot;"  "to  make  a  hike."  It 
has  the  same  changes  and  varia- 
tions as  Idkad.  There  are  several 
other  variations  of  the  idea,  all 
rare. 

Tumakbo.     Already  explained. 

Lumokso.     Already  explained. 

Tumalon.  Ang  trdonan,  the  place. 
Ex.:  Tumalon  ka  sa  tubig  (jump 
into  the  water). 

Lnmusong.     Already  explained. 

LwnaiTgoy.     Already  explained. 

Lumubog.  Already  explained;  syn., 
sisid. 

Tiiinahdn.  Magtalidn,  tostopanother; 
Magtahanan,  to  stop  each  other 
(two).  Nagtalian sXreeixn  Manila 
means  "stopping  place,"  as  it  ends 
at  the  bank  of  the  Pasig  River. 

Hnmumpay.  Walang  humpay,  end- 
less. 

Tiimanau. 

Tiunakas.  Ang  magtatakas,  mataka- 
sin,  or  palatakas,  the  hider  (person 
hiding). 

HitmatTgo.  This  form  originally 
meant  to  redeem  another  from 
slavery,  and  um  has  been  retained 
while  the  meaning  has  changed. 
MaghaiTijo  (now  out  of  use)  meant 
to  redeem  one's  self  from  the  same 
condition. 

Gumapang.     Ang  bakX  ay  nakagagd- 
pang  (the  child  is  able  to  crawl). 
XII.    Vm  is  used  with  voluntary  actions  vapon  or  against  another.     Ac- 
tions affecting  the  subject  are  exjjressed  with  mag.      Vm  is  not  used  with 
involuntary  actions,  as  matisod,  "to  stumble."     Ex.: 


To  run. 

To  jump. 

To  leap  down. 


To  leap  or  jump  down;  to  alight. 
To  swim. 
To  dive. 


To  stop. 


To  cease;  to  end,  etc. 

To  run  away. 

To  hide  (from  fear). 


To  pull  out;  to  takeout;  to  draw  out. 


To  crawl;  to  walk  on  all  fours. 


To  wash  the  face  of  another. 


Ilumilamos,  evidently  from  damos; 
amos,  idea  of  dirtiness  of  the  face. 
Ex.:  Amosamosan  ang  mukhd  mo 
(your  face  is  very  dirty).  Ang 
hilamosan,    the    person    washed. 


168 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  comb  the  hair  of  another. 


To  shave  another. 


To  cut  hair. 


To  cure  another. 


To  scratch  another. 
To  whip  another. 


lYibig  na  hihilamosin,  wash  water. 
Magldlamo»,  to  wash  one's  face 
(occasionally).  Manhilamos,  to 
wash  one's  face  (habitually).  Ang 
ipanJiikunoSjihemeani^,  i.  e.,  hands, 
sponge,  wash  rag,  water  used,  etc. 
Ang  pnnhilamosan,  the  place,  i.  e., 
the  wash  basin,  etc. 
Siimuklay.  Magi^uklay,  to  comb  one' s 
hair.  Ang  snklayin,  what  combed, 
i.  e.,  the  hair.  Ang  jxigsuklnyin, 
what  combed  much.  Ang  pagsu- 
klayan,  what  combed  upon.  Ang 
isuklay,  the  means,  etc.  ^ing  su- 
klay,  the  comb.  Magpasuklay,  to 
order  to  comb;  also  to  allow  one's 
hair  to  be  combed. 

Umaldt.  Magakit,  to  shave  ones- 
self.  Ang  pagaJut,  the  act  of 
shaving  (another).  Angpagadhit, 
the  act  of  shaving  ones-self. 
Mam/dhit,  to  shave  (as  an  occupa- 
tion). Ang  manadldt,  the  barber. 
Ang  jiandhit,  the  means,  i.  e.,  the 
razor.  Magpadhit,  to  order  to 
shave;  also  to  get  shaved.  Ex.: 
Magpadhit  ka  kuy  Juan  (Tell  Juan 
to  shave  you).  M.igpadlul  kay 
Juan  si  Pedro  (Tell  Juan  to  shave 
Pedro).  Aug  jti  nagaaldtan,  the 
place  of  being  shaved,  1.  e.,  the 
barber  shop.  Ang  ahitan,  the  per- 
son shaved.     (See  phrases  also. ) 

Gmmtpit.  Maggvpit,  to  cut  one's 
own  hair.  Aog  guntjjit,  what  has 
been  cut,  or  the  person  whose  hair 
has  l)een  cut.  Ganmpit  also  means 
to  cut  metal.  The  use  of  shears  is 
implied  in  all  cases.  (See  the 
phrases  for  examples. ) 

Gumamot.  Maggamot,  to  cure  ones- 
self.  Mangamot,  to  cure  profes- 
sionally, i.  e.,  to  practice  medicine. 
Kagamotan  (abs. ),  medicine. 
Ang  mangagamot,  the  physician. 
Ang  pangamoHn,  the  person  cured. 
Magamot,  to  have  much  medicine, 
or  to  have  many  kindsof  medicine. 
(Idiom:)  Wahtug  gamol  ang  limot, 
there  is  no  cure  for  the  forgetful. 
Ex.:  Bago  dumdthig  ang  sakit, 
lagydn  nang  gamot  (Before  illness 
comes,  apply  the  remedy). — T.  P. 
362.  This  seems  to  be  an  adapta- 
tion from  the  Spanish. 

Kumdmot.     (Already  explained.) 

Humampds.  Maghampds,  to  whip 
ones-self  (as  in  penance).  Ang 
hampasm,  the  person  whipped. 
Ang  hampdn  sa  kalabao'y  sa  cabayo 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  Ifi9 

aiKj  latay  (the  lash  to  the  carabao 
and  the  welt  to  the  horse). — T.  P. 
376. 
To  cane  or  clul)  another.  Pumalb.     Magpaloan,  to  cudgel  each 

other.     Ang  pamalo,  the  garrote. 

XIII.  Um  is  also  used  to  express  voluntary  acts  of  the  senses,  except 
with  those  roots  which  commence  with  b.     Ex. : 

To  look  for;  to  see  by  so  looking.  Kumila.     Magk'dd,  to   look  at  each 

other  (two  or  more).  Magkitd,  to 
look  at  intently,  or  atmany  things. 
Makild,,  to  be  seen.  Makakila,  to 
see  (casually).  Ex.:  AkiVynaka- 
kikitd  (1  am  able  to  see).  Ako'y 
nakakitcl  nang  isang  tauo  diydn  (I 
saw  a  person  there).  Nakitd  mo 
hagd  siydf  (Did  you  see  him 
[her]  ?)  Hindi,  tiguvi't  makikitcL 
ko  Sana,  (no  but  I  may  be  able  to 
[see] ) .  Magkakitd,  to  be  deceived 
by  the  sight.  Ex.:  Nagkakak'mi 
kitd  ako?  (Do  I  see  visions?) 
Nagkakakinikitaan  akd  (My  sight 
deceives  me).  Nagkak'mitaan  akd 
(My  sight  deceived  me). 

To  hear  (by  listening).  Dumiiigig.     (Already  explained.) 

To  feel;  to  touch.  Humipb.     Maghipo,  to  touch  much. 

Ang  hipoin,  what  touched. 

To  smell  of.  Umamoy.       Ex.:     Amoyin     mo     ltd 

(smeil  this).  Mnamoy,  to  smell 
casually.  Ex.:  Naaamoy  mo  bagd 
ang  haju/ong  isinasainbdlal  nang 
main/d  bidaklakf  (Do  you  smell 
the  fragrance  shed  by  the  flowers?) 
Makaamoy,  to  be  able  to  smell 
something.  Nakaaamoy kaf  (Can 
you  smell  anything? )    Aso,  smoke. 

To  taste;  to  relish  (purposely).  Lnmasap.    Ang  lasapin,  y,-hat  tSLsted. 

Makalasap,  to  taste  (casually ) ;  also 
to  cause  a  relish. 

XIV.  Some  roots  denoting  passions  and  emotions  of  a  certain  kind  are 
conjugated  by  um,  when  the  idea  of  voluntary  action  is  expressed.  Other 
roots  of  this  nature  are  conjugated  by  mag.  When  casual,  ideas  of  emo- 
tions, etc.,  are  expressed  with  ma.     Ex.: 

To  love.  Suminid.     (Already  explained.)     Of 

Sansk.  origin,  through  INIalay.  Ln- 
miyag  is  a  synonym,  now  rare. 

To  care  for;  to  desire;  to  wish.  Umlbig.    Mag 1 1 lig,  to  long  ior.    Magi- 

bigan,  to  like  each  other  (two). 
Ang  in'ibig,  what  liked.  Ang  ini- 
ibig,  the  person  who  is  liked  and 
reciprocates  the  liking.  Angpagi- 
big,  the  wish,  desire,  liking.  Ang 
pagkaibii,  the  act  of  liking,  desire, 
etc.  Ang  pinagibigan,  what  mutu- 
ally longed  for.  Maihig  ( adj. ) ,  lov- 
ing, (2)  capricious,  (3)  to  have 
a  liking  for.  Ang  naibig,  the  per- 
son liked,  but  who  is  unaware  of 


170  TAOALOG    LANGUAGE. 

the  fact.  Maibig'in,  an  amorous 
man;  a  iiirt.  Maknlh'uj,  to  care  for 
naturally.  Kaibif]('in  (abst. ),  love, 
de.'^ire.  Aug  kmhkjan  (note  ac- 
cent) ,  the  friend.  Aug  kinuibigan, 
■what  loved.  Kaibigibig  (adj.), 
amiable;  loving.  Absolute,  ibig. 
And  ang  ibig  mof  { What  do  you 
wish?)  Ibig  viong mnnama  act  akinf 
(Do  you  wif-h  to  go  with  me?) 
MaiTglbig,  ( 1 )  to  like  many ;  (2)  to 
flirt  habitually;  (.'))  to  care  first 
for  one  thing  and  then  another. 
Ex.  with  Ibig,  T.  P. :  A  ng  iunay  na 
pagibig  Itangan  sa  huli  matamis 
(True  love  is  sweet  to  the  end). — 
446.  Kung  tapat  ang  pag'ibig,  mn- 
pait  man  ay  matamis  ( When  love  is 
real  even  bitter  is  sweet). — 447. 

To  caress;  to  fondle.  Umirog.     Ang  irogin,  the  person  ca- 

ressed. Mairugiri,  an  affectionate 
person.  Ang  bii/ihja't  irog  f^igang 
nakalalamug  (gifts  and  caresses 
gain  over  what  can  not  otherwise 
be  gained ).—T.  P.  144. 

To  like;  (2)  to  desire.  Puinita.     Mapitahin,  a  desirous  per- 

son. Ay  ang  pita  nang  loob  ko  (It 
is  the  desire  of  my  heart).  Mag- 
pita  ka  sa  kaniya  nang  anoinang  ibig 
mo  (Ask  him  for  anything  you 
wish).  FitJiaya  is  a  rather  rare 
synonym.  Fumithaya,  to  like;  to 
desire. 

XV.  f'm  used  with  sa,  "at,"  "in,"  denotes  permanency  in  anyplace. 
Ex.:  Ang  marTijd  Americaiio  sungmasa  sangkapuluan  (The  Americans  are 
settling  permanently  in  the  archipelago). 

XVI.  Via  is  also  used  in  some  places  to  express  the  idea  that  what  may 
be  signified  by  the  root  is  taking  place  here,  there,  and  everywhere;  the 
idea  of  confusion  being  inherent.  Ex.:  Umduay  {or  auayan)  doun  (all  is 
quarreling  there).  Umasdua  {asauin)  dito  (everyone  is  getting  married 
here). 

Um  is  also  used  for  the  imperative  in  Manila,  the  tenses  being  distin- 
guished by  adverbs  of  time,  but  this  is  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
speakers  of  Tagalog  in  Manila  generally  have  some  knowledge  of  Spanish, 
which  confuses  their  grasp  of  the  nice  distinction  of  tense  in  pure  Tagalog. 

XVII.  Um,  used  with  some  roots  indicating  certain  actions  means  to  be 
occupied  in  a  matter,  although  perhaps  not  actually  performing  the  act 
indicated.     Ex.:  Sumusulat  si  Juan  (Juan  is  busy  with  writing). 

IRREGULARITIES. 

XVIII.  In  some  parts  of  the  Tagalog  region  the  present  tense  of  the  in- 
definite with  the  primary  idea  (besides  the  regular  formation  with  imgm 
and  the  reduplications  of  the  first  syllable  of  the  root),  is  sometimes  ex- 
pressed by  the  particle  na  prefixed  to  the  root.     Ex. : 

To  read.  Biimasa,  from  Sansk.  wdchd  "word," 

"discourse."  There  are  three 
forms  of  the  present  indef.  with 
primary  idea.  Ex.:  Ak(? y  nabasa 
(I  ain   [or  was]  reading).     Aku'y 


TAQALOG    LANGUAGE.  I7l 

nuhumCy  nakatulog  ak6{\  was  read- 
ing and  fell  asleep).  Nanimi  aki> 
(I  am  reading).  Bungmaham.  uko 
(I  am  reading).  (Stie  tables  for 
other  tenses. )  Aug  basahin,  what 
read.  Ang  basaha»,  the  person 
read  to.  Basuhan,  professor,  lec- 
turer. Magbcu^a,  to  read  much, 
or  by  many.  Aug pagbam,  the  act 
of  reading.  Mababasa,  anything 
legible.  Ex.:  Nabasa  mo  na  avg 
librong  ipinahiram  ko  sa  iyn?  ( Had 
you  [have  you  already]  read  the 
book  1  lent  you?)  Hivdi  ko  pa  tw- 
basa  (I  have  not  finished  reading 
it  yet).  Magjxibasa,  to  order  to 
read.  Ex. :  Nagpapabnsa  ang 
vuuTgaaral  sa  maiTga  butd  (the 
teacher  is  ordering  the  children  to 
read).  Mabasah'm;  viamama.ta  or 
palabasa,  reader.  Tagabasa,  reader 
by  occupation.  Basn  is  also  ap- 
plied to  a  gravestone.  Bumam 
( from  bam ) ,  is  "to  wet, to  moisten. ' ' 
This  last  is  evidently  a  Malayan 
word;  Malay,  busahkun,  to  wet  or 
moisten.  Basa  (from  Sansk. 
wcichd)  means  language,  speech,  in 
Malay,  while  bacha  has  been  se- 
lected to  represent  the  idea  of  read- 
ing. 
To  write.  Sumi'ilat  (from  Arabic  s'urat,  a  chap- 

ter of  the  Koran,  tlirough  Malay). 
This  root  has  been  softened  to  si'ibit 
in  Visayan  and  Tagalog,  but  in 
Bicol  and  Ilocano  it  is  still  surat. 
Ibanag  uses  the  root  tt'irak.  There 
is  also  a  root  iitik  in  Tagalog,  mean- 
ing "to  write,"  "to  record."  There 
is  also  a  word  meaning  ' '  to  print. ' ' 
It  is  magpalamau,  with  a  primary 
meaning  of  being  implanted  in  the 
heart.  Ex.:  Nasulat  siga  (he  is 
writing) .  Sunymusi'dat  s'tya  (he  is 
writing).  Aug  sulalin,  what  writ- 
ten. Ex.:  And  ang  susrdatin  vang 
amci  mo  sa  iyong  kapatid  na  lalakif 
(What  will  your  father  write  to 
your  brother?)  hulat  itiyd  ilong 
paiu'dat  (let  him  write  with  this 
pen)  (means  of  writing).  Jshii'dat 
na  niyd  sa  kaniyd  na  parito  siyd 
pagdaka  (he  has  written  him  al- 
ready to  come  here  at  once).  Ang 
sidaian,  the  paper  written  upon, 
or  the  writing  desk,  place,  etc. 
Ex.:  Sidatan  mo  ilong  pujid  (write 
on  this  paper).  Anubagd  angsinu- 
latun  7110  nang  maw/a  pain/alan? 
( Which  paper  did  you  write  the 
names  upon?)     Jtong  papel  )iait6'y 


172 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  eat. 


To  buy. 


T(.)  obey;  to  follow. 


To  resist;  disobey;  contradict;  con- 
tend with. 


To  show  anger;    (2)   to  tnrn  aside 

from. 
To  stand  up;  to  rise  to  the  feet. 

To  sit  down. 

To  look  at. 


s'nfang  sasulatan  niyd  (this  paper 
is  for  him  to  write  upon  [fut.]). 
Magsulat,  to  write  much  or  1  > y  man}'. 
Magsulatsulatan  (dim.),  to  write  a 
little;  to  scribble.  Ex.:  N<n/.'<n.<m- 
Idti^uhdaii  aku  (I  am  writing,' a  little; 
I  am  scribbling) .  Mani'dat,  to  write 
as  an  occupation.  Ang  7niinunulat, 
the  clerk;  writer.  Ang  pani'dat, 
the  pen,  stylus,  brush,  etc.  (See 
also  under  mata,  magpa,  and  maki). 
Mapagsulnt,  a  person  who  writes 
much. 

Kvmam.  ( Already  explained. )  Ex. 
with  na:  Nakaln  siyd  (he  is  eat- 
ing) .  Kimgmakam  siyd  ( he  is  eat- 
ing [regular  form]). 

Bumil'i.  (Already  explained. )  Ex. : 
Nabili  aku  nung  damil  (I  am  buy- 
ing some  clothes).  Also  bungmi- 
bili  ako  nang  damif. 

Sumnnod.  Nasunod  siyd,  he  is  obey- 
ing or  obeys.  Ang  sundalong  sung- 
nnisunod,  simorin  sii/d.  kun  oficial 
(the  obedient  soldier  will  be 
obeyed  when  an  officer  himself). 
Magsunoran,  to  follow  each  other. 
Magsunodsunod,  to  follow  in  rapid 
succession  (many).  Magsiuinmod, 
to  follow  closely,  also  two  children 
born  in  succession.  Magkasiuini- 
nod,  to  follow  wdierever  another 
may  go,  or  to  obey  implicitly. 
Ex. :  Nagkukusumunod  ang  sundalo 
sa  piniongniyd  (the  soldier  follows 
his  officer  wherever  he  goes). 
Sino  ang  plnagkasumunddn  inof 
(Who  are  you  obeying  so  implic- 
itly?) Ang  punong  ko  (my  com- 
mander). Ano  ang  ipinagkakasu- 
munod  mo  \jtiny6'\  sa  kaniyd? 
(Why  do  you  [ye]  obey  him  so 
implicitly?)  Ako'y  sundalo,  pu  (I 
am  a  soldier,  sir). 

Sum  uay.  Nasuay  siyd ,  he  is  disobey- 
ing. Magsuay,  to  disobey,  etc. 
(much).  Masuay,  disobedient; 
contradictory.  Magsuai/an ,  to  con- 
tradict each  other.  Magsisuay,  to 
disobey  (many).  Kasuayan,  dis- 
obedience. 

Tumdhog.  Ex.:  Xatdbog  siyd  (he 
shows  anger;  he  is  turning  aside). 

Tuniindig.  Natindig  siyd  (he  is  ris- 
ing to  his  feet).  Verb  has  already 
been  explained. 

Umupo.  Naupu  sild  (the}'  are  sitting 
down).  Verb  has  already  been 
explained. 

TumiiTgin.  NatiiTijin  ako  (I  am  look- 
ing). Verb  has  already  been 
explained. 


TAOALOG    LANGUAGE. 


173 


XIX.  Bisyllabic  (two-.syllal)le(l)  roots  comnienfinjj  with  }i,  k,  p,  t,  or  a 
vowel,  generally  admit  of  a  similar  irregularity  in  the  imperative,  past,  and 
present  tenses;  n  l)eing  prefixed  to  vowel  ro<")ts  for  the  past  and  present 
tenses  and  m  for  the  imperative,  while  the  initial  letter  of  h,  k,  p,  and  t 
roots  changes  to  n  for  the  past  and  present  tenses,  and  to  m  for  the 
imperative. 

To  read.  Bumasa.      Ex.:     [Irreg.)  Masa  ka; 

(Reg.)  Binnasa  ka  {read).  (I.) 
^Y«.sa  ako;  (R.)  Bungmasa  uko  (I 
read  [past  tense]).  [I.)  Xanam 
ako;  ( R. )  Bungmaham  aku  (I  am 
reading) .  The  other  tenses  are 
regular.  Ex.:  Nakaham  ako  (1 
had  read).  Babasa  ako  (I  shall 
read).  Makahasaako  (I shall  have 
read).  Ang  pagbasa,  the  act  of 
reading. 

To  capture.  Bumihag.      Kabihagan,      captivity. 

Same  as  foregoing. 

To  take.  A'umw/i a  (partly  explained  before). 

Imp.,  Muha  ha;  kunwha  ka;  kulia 
ka  (take) .  Past,  Nuha  ako;  kung- 
viuha  ako  (I  took).  Pr.,  Nunnha 
ako;  kungmukuha  ako  (I  am  tak- 
ing). 'PXy».,  Nakakuha  ako  {Ih&iX 
taken).  F.,  Knkuha  ako  (I  shall 
take).  F.  P.,  Makakuha  ako  (1 
shall  have  taken).  MaiTjjuJta,  to 
take  habitually.  Aug  pa)Tj/unin, 
what  taken  habitually.  (Note  that 
the  u  is  all  that  remains  of  kuha.) 
Makakuha,  to  be  able  to  take. 
Ex. :  Nakuha  nila  iyang  maiTga 
bunga  (they  were  able  to  take  that 
^fruit  [pi.]). 
Kumaon.  Conj.  Yxkekunniha.  (Al- 
ready explained.) 
^vol-  Pumasok.  Masok  ka;  pumdsok  ka 
(come  in) .  N&sok  sigd;  pungmd- 
sok  siyd  (he  went  in).  Nandsok 
Slid;  pungmapdmk  sild  (they  are 
going  in) .  Nakapdsok  ako  (I  had 
gone  in).  Papdsok  ako  (I  will  go 
in) .  Ang  pagpdmk,  tlie  act  of  en- 
tering. Magpasok,  to  enter  much. 
Magpdsok,  to  put  something  in- 
side. Aug  pasukin,  the  object  of 
entrance.  Avg  ipdsok,  w^hat  put 
inside.  Ang  j)asukan,  the  door 
entered  or  the  house,  etc.  Nasok 
i<ilang  valang  badbatl  (they  came 
in  without  any  ceremony) .  J/o- 
kapdsok,  to  enter  or  go  in  casually; 
to  be  able  to  enter.  Ex.:  (1) 
Ako^i/  nagpapasial  ay  ynakapdsok 
ako  sa  looban  ni  Gat  Luis  (I  was 
out  for  a  stroll,  and  without  think- 
ing went  into  Don  Luis'syard). 
Magpapdsok,  to  order  to  enter;  to 
get  into,  as  clothes.  Ex. :  Si  Juan 
ay  nagpapdsok  hty  Pedro  nang  da- 


To  go  for;  to  bring;  to  call. 

To  enter;  to  come  in;  to  go  in 
untarily) . 


174 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  pluck;  to  gather,  as  flowers. 
To  tempt;  to  try. 


mit  (Juan  told  Pedro  to  get  into 
his  clothes j .  Nufjpapnsok  si  Pedro 
naiif/  dam  it  (Pedro  put  on  the 
clot  lies),  ^[(ikapagpupasiok,  to  be 
able  to  order  another  to  go  in. 

Pumitus.  (Already  explained.) 
Conj.  like  pumasok. 

Turnukso.  Imp.,  Muks6;  tumuksd 
(tempt,  try).  Past,  Nukso;  tung- 
mukso  (tried).  Pr.,  Nunukso; 
tungmutukso  (trying).  Pip.,  Naka- 
tukso  (had  tried).  F. ,  Tutukso 
(shall,  will  try).  F.  P.,  Makatukso 
(shall,  will  have  tried).  Angpag- 
jKtgtakso,  the  trying,  teini)ting. 
Magtiikso,  to  tempt  much  or  many. 
Ang  tuksohin,  the  person  tempted. 
Angpagtuksohiii,  the  person  greatly 
or  many  times  tempted.  Ang 
ituksa,  the  cause  or  means  of  temp- 
tation. ^1»^  ipagtuksu,  the  cause 
or  means  of  great  or  repeated 
temptation.  Ang  tuksohan,  the 
place  of  temptation.  Ang  pagtuk- 
solian,  the  place  of  much  or  re- 
peated temptation.  Mag  t  n  k>io- 
tuksohan  (dim.),  to  tempt  a  little, 
or  in  mockery.  Manuksu,  to  tempt 
haliitually.  Ang  manuuukso,  the 
tempter;  temptress.  Magpanukso, 
to  tempt  frequently  and  a  great 
deal.  Ang  ipanukso,  the  cause  or 
means  of  the  foregoing.  Ang  pa- 
nuksohan,  the  place  corresping  to 
foregoing.  Magpakatuksu,  to  tempt 
strongly.  Ex. :  Ano  ang  ipinagpa- 
katuksolian  ( ipinakapagtuksohan ) 
nilaf  ( Why  were  they  so  strongly 
tempted?) 

Tumukd.  Conj.  like  turnukso.  Ap- 
parently applied  to  bite  of  snake. 
Ex.:  SiycC y  tinukd  nang  alms  (he 
was  bitten  by  the  snake). 

Umal'is.  Imp.,  (I.)  Mails  ka;  (R. ) 
umal'is  ka.  Past,  NaJis  ako  (I.); 
Ungmalis  ako  (R. )  (I  left,  went 
away,  etc.)  Pres.,  Na7iaris  ako 
(I.);  ungmaalis  ako  (R. )  (I  am 
going  awav,  leaving,  etc.).  Pip., 
Nakalis  ak<>  (I  had  left).  Fut., 
Aal'is  ako  (I  shall  leave).  F.  P., 
MakaaVis  ako  (I  shall  have  left). 
Ang  pagaJ'is,  the  leaving.  (This 
root  has  already  been  partly  ex- 
plained. ) 

The  following  roots  are  conjugated  like  alls: 

To  ascend.  Umaki/at.  Ang  inakyat,  what  ascend- 

ed or  the  person  ascending.  Aug 
iakyat,  the  cause.  Ang  akyatdn, 
the  place. 


To  peck  (as  a  bird). 
To  leave;  to  go  away. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


175 


Not  to  wish. 


To  go  for  water  with  a  pitcher. 
To  drink. 


To  turn  back;    to  go  back;    to  fall 

l)ark;  to  retreat. 
To  return;  to  come  back. 
To  lead;  to  go  ahead. 


Umayao.  Ex. :  Paayao  kn  (say  you 
do  not  wish  to).  Bdkit  nit/d  iiap(t- 
ayaof  (Why  did  she  say  she  did 
not  wish  to?) 

Umigib. 

Uminiun.  Imp.,  Muium  hi,  drink. 
Malay  minum  means  "to  drink." 
(This  verb  has  already  been  ex- 
plained. ) 

Um  u  rong. 


Umiiui. 
Utnund. 


(Already  explained.) 


XX.  Some  polysyllabic  (of  more  than  two  syllables)  roots  beginning 
with  h,  k,  p,  t,  or  a  vowel,  are  conjugated  with  the  particle  man  {q.  v.). 

XXI.  Some  sixty-six  j)olysyllabic  verbal  roots  commencing  with  j)a 
replace  the  first  syllable  with  na  in  the  past  and  present  and  with  ina  in 
the  imperative  and  future.  In  the  present  and  future  tenses  the  second 
syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  and  not  the  first.  This  conjugation 
resembles  but  is  not  identical  with  man.  There  are  also  some  euphonic 
vowel  modifications.     (See  tables  for  synopsis  of  conjugation. ) 

The  verbal  roots,  which  are  conjugated  in  this  manner,  are  the  following: 
To  verbalize  these  roots,  change  initial  p  to  n  or  m  as  required  for  tense 
of  indefinite. 


To  rise  early. 

To  profit;  to  make  (in  business). 


To  listen  to  ( with  attention ) . 

To  solicit  or  urge  (for  good  or  evil). 

To  bathe  one's  self;  to  take  a  bath. 

To  swell. 

To  dwell ;  to  live  in  a  house. 

To    swell  up    (as  a  sting);    also  to 

swell  badly. 
To  supplicate;  (2)  to  ascend  into  a 

house  for  important  reasons. 
To  wag  the  tail  (as  a  dog] 


To  incite;  to  provoke. 


Paagd,  from  agd,  "morning." 

Pakindbang.  Probably  from  a  lost 
root  tdbang,  which  still  exists  in 
Bicol  and  Visayan,  with  the  mean- 
ing "to  aid;  help;  succor;"  and 
the  prefix  paki,  def.  of  maki. 

Pakinig.  To  listen  to  much,  magpa- 
kinig. 

Pakiump,  from  usaj»  and  paki,  def. 
of  maki. 

Paligb.  Magligb,  to  bathe  another; 
a\so magpaligo.  Syn.  pambo  (rare). 
Maligbka  (take  a  bath) .  Paligoan 
mo  ang  cabayo  ( wash  the  horse ) . 

Pamagd,  from  bagd,  "a  tumor,  ab- 
cess,"  and  pan. 

Pamdhay,  from  bdhay,  ' '  house, ' '  and 
pan. 

Pamanghid,  from  panghid,  "to 
swell"  (t:he  nerves),  and  pan. 

Pamanhik,  from  panhik  and  pan. 

Pamdijpoy  (rare) .  Seiple  thinks  may 
be  from  lost  root  paypoy,  variation 
oipaypay,  "fan."  Mamaypay,  to 
fan  one's  self  or  another.  Usual 
word  "to  wave"  is  pumaspds. 
Paspasin  mo  ang  bandila  (wave  the 
flag). 

Pamongkahi.  Ex. :  Pinamomongkahtan 
tayo  nang  presidente  municipal  sa 
masamang  gau-d  (The  municipal 
president  [mayor]  is  inciting  us 
to  do  wrong).  (Present  tense, 
reduplication  of  modified  syllable 
mo  and  suffix  an.     From  pongkahi, 


176 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  offer;  to  dedicate. 
To  envv. 


To  8igh;  (2)  to  whistle. 
To  dream. 


To  put  one's  self  under  the  control 
of  another. 


To  pray. 

To  trust;  to  confide. 


To  vanquish;  gain;  conquer;  win. 


T(7  sing  funeral  songs. 

To  descend  by  stairs  or  ladder;  (2) 
to  spend;  to  use  up. 


a  variation  of  pongkd,  "to  in(;ite 
to  a  quarrel,"  and  pan.  This  root 
is  said  to  be  of  Chinese  origin. 

Panagarto.  Seiple  says  from  Vis. 
part,  pnnag  and  ano,  "what." 

PanughUl.  Seijjle  also  gives  this  as 
from  panag  and  hili,  "envy." 
Ex.:  Houag  hing  vianagh'tli  s^a 
kapua  mo  tduo  (Do  not  envy  your 
neighbor).  Syn.  pangimholo 
( rare ) . 

Pnnnghoi/,  from  taglioy,  "to  pant,  to 
breathe  hard,"  and  p«n. 

Panag'niip,  from  g'ni'ip  and  pana,  a 
combination  found  by  Seiple  in 
but  four  words  of  polysyllabic 
structure.  Ex.:  Nananaginip  ka 
bagc'if  (Are  you  dreaming?)  Syn. 
BurTganii'ilog,  from  ti'ilog,  ' '  sleep. " 

Panngi.i)ii/d,  from  lagisin/o  and  pan. 
The  ultimate  root  is  sugd  with  the 
same  general  meaning. 

PanalaiTgin,  from  duUuTijin  and  pan. 

Pandlig,  from  sdlig.  Ex. :  Siyd  ang 
sinasaligan  ko,  kaya  ako  matdpaitg 
(I  trust  in  him,  and  am  brave  for 
that  reason).  PinapmiaUgan  mo 
(panaliganin  mo)  ang  Dios  (let 
vour  trust  be  in  God  [trust  in 
God]). 

Panalo,  from  talo  and  pan.  Sino  ang 
nanalof  (Who  was  the  winner?) 
Ttunalo,  to  dispute  ( one ) .  Magtalo, 
to  argue  ( two,  etc. ) .  Manalo,  ind_ef . 
of  ])a)iaIo.  Magpatalo,  to  allow 
one's  self  to  be  conquered.  Patalo, 
to  consent  to  be  vanquished.  Ma- 
kitalo,  to  interfere  in  a  dispute. 
Ang  mananalo,  the  winner;  con- 
queror. Ayig  talonan,  the  van- 
quished. 

Panambhan,  from  i^ambit,  "funeral 
song,"  an  suttixed  and  pan. 

Pandog.  Seiple  gives  a  Panay-Vi- 
sayan  root  naog,  but  the  Stimar- 
Leyte  dialect  seems  to  lack  this 
word.  Ex.:  (Tag.)  Pnmandng,  to 
descend  a  ladder  (also,  to  go  or 
come  down  stairs).  Magpandog, 
to  do  the  above  much.  Magpapa- 
ndog,  to  order  the  above  to  be 
done;  to  use  up;  to  spend.  Ex.: 
Nagpapandog  nang  an  ang  narn- 
rukhd  (The  property  has  been  used 
up  on  account  of  poverty ) .  Kapa- 
panaogan  ako  nang  Ihnang  pisos  (I 
have  spent  five  pesos).  Also  with 
ma.  Ex.:  Ang  napandog  sa  dkin 
ay  Ihnang  pisos  (The  amount  of  my 
spending  was  five  pesos).  Mag- 
pandog also  means  to  bring  some- 


TAaALOG    LANGUAGE. 


177 


To  sit  down  (with  the  feet  crossed 
and  knees  apart). 


To  2)ronuse;  to  resolve. 


To  persevere;  to  persist;  to  last. 
To  penetrate  (as  water). 


To  be  able  to  do. 


To  kneel  down;  to  kneel. 
To  prop  with  the  hand. 


thing  down  stairs  or  oy  means  of  a 
ladder.  A  luj  ipam'uxj,  what  brought 
down.  Magpopuf/paiiaog,  to  order 
something  to  be  brought  down 
thus. 

Panasilu,  from  sikl,  with  same  mean- 
ing with  mag  and  pan.  Seiple 
thinks  pana  a  root,  but  it  may  also 
be  from  the  indef.  Ayig  ])hiana- 
naHiIaan,  the  person  sat  down  be- 
fore, or  the  place. 

Panata.  Ang panaiahin,  what  prom- 
ised. Ang  panatahan,  the  person 
promised.  Syns.  Paiujaku;  Tu- 
mandang.  The  roots  talagd  and 
panuan  have  somewhat  similar 
meanings. 

Panatili,  from  till,  idea  of  propping 
up ;  and  pana. 

Panimtim  (from  timtbnf  and  pan). 
Seiple  gives  liyim  as  the  root,  mean- 
ing "to  ooze  into;  to  leak."  No- 
ceda  gives  panayimlim  as  the  word. 
Ex.  Mapanayimiim  sa  loob  ang  ma- 
samang  asal  (The  evil  habit  pene- 
trates the  heart). 

Pangyari  ( from  yari  and  pan).  Ma- 
Icapangyarihan,  powerful;  omni- 
potent. Kapangyarihan,  power; 
faculty;  authority.  Ex.  Mayroon 
si yang kapangyarihan  ( he  has  power 
[or  authority]).  Wald  siyang  /;. 
(He  is  Avithout  a).  Wald  akong  k. 
(1  am  without  a).  Mangyari,  to 
be  possible.  Ex.  Hindi  rnangya- 
yari  (It  can  not  be).  Hindi  mang- 
yaring  di  ako punwroon  (I  can  not 
possibly  keep  from  going  there). 
Mangyari  bagang  di  ako  pumaroonf 
(Is  it  not  possible  for  me  to  keep 
from  going  there?)  AnoH  di  man- 
gyayarif  ( Whyshould  itnotbeso.**) 
May  nangyari  doon  sa  bdhay  niyd 
(Something  has  happened  in  his 
house  over  there).  Snkai  mangyari 
(Suppose  it  may  happen?)  Di 
si'ikat  mangyari  (It  should  not  hap- 
pen). Mangyayaridin  (It will  in- 
deed be  possible).  Yari  alone 
means  done;  finished;  completed. 
Ex. :  Yari  va  ang  sulat  (The  letter 
is  already  finished). 

Panikluhod.  (Already  explained). 
Syn.  Lumuhod. 

Paniin.  Angipinaniin,  what  propped 
thus.  Magiiin,  to  put  out  the 
hands  in  order  to  rise;  (2)  also  to 
stamp  or  print.  Tiinan  mo  ang 
papel,    stamp    or   print  it   on  the 


6855—05- 


-12 


178 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  think;  also  "to  regret.  ' 
To  .«quat. 

To  believe;  to  confide  in;  to  trust. 


To  /juide;  to  lead. 

To  accomplish  the  will. 


To  view  (as  a  spectacle);  to  gaze  at; 
to  sight;  to  behold;  to  look  at 
from  far  off;  to  view  with  astonish- 
ment. 

To  make  water. 

To  lodge. 


To  wait  upon  the  pleasure  of  another; 

to  flatter;  (2)  to  serve. 
To  promise. 


To  dare;  to  venture. 


paper.  Root  tiin  and  pan.  Tiin 
means  "to  prop  oneself  with  hands 
and  feet  in  order  to  ri.se." 

Panimdim  (from  dhnd'nii  and  pan). 
This  root  is  domdom  in  Bicol. 

Paninglcuyad  (from  tinkayad  and 
pan).  Also  tumiiKjkayad,  with 
same  meaning. 

Panhrala  (from  tiwala  and  pan). 
Aug  katiicala,  theconfidant;  bosom 
friend. 

Panogot. 

Panolos  (from  a  lost  root,  tolas,  sug- 
gests Seiple,  who  cites  the  Java- 
nese word  "  <u/((s,  sincere;  faith- 
ful; loyal,  etc."  and  adopted  in 
Malay).  Ex.:  Hindi  akn  manoJos 
kumaiii,  at  ang  nasasakit  ako  nang 
kignat  (I  can  not  force  myself  to 
eat,  because  lam  sick  with  fever). 

Panood  (from  nood  and  pan).  Ma- 
nood,  to  look  at  what  contents  and 
gives  pleasure.  Ang  pnnaw'.od, 
what  beheld. 

Pani'diig  (from  titbig  and  pan). 

PanuUiyan  (from  tuloy  and  jum). 
Ang  ])anuluyanan,  the  lodging 
place;  also  ang  tnloyan.  Ang  ipa- 
nuluyan,  the  cause  or  person  for 
whom  lodging  is  looked  for.  ^lag- 
papanuluyan,  to  give  another  lodg- 
ing. Ang p>apaniduynnin,  the  per- 
son given  lodging.  Tiunuloy  to 
lodge.  Magtuloy,  to  lodge  many 
or  much.  Ang  tuluyan,  the  lodg- 
ing place.  Ang  pagtuluyan,  the 
lodging  place  of  many  or  much. 
Ang  itidoy,  the  cause.  Ang  ipag- 
tuloy,  the  cause  of  many  or  much. 
Magpati'doy,  to  give  lodging.  Ang 
patuluyin,  the  person  given  lodg- 
ing. Ang  patiduyan,  the  place 
where  given  lodging.  Ang  papag- 
tuluyin,  the  person  given  much 
lodging.  A7ig  mawjd  papagtidnyin, 
the  persons  given  lodging.  Ang 
pinagpapatuluyan,  the  lodging 
houses.  Ex. :  Sino  ang  nanunn- 
luyan  sa  huhay  inof  (Who  is  the 
lodger  at  your  house?)  hang  ma- 
liirap  napinatidoy  ko  so  dking  hdhatj 
(a  poor  man  whom  I  have  allowed 
to  lodge  at  my  house). 

Panuyb  (from  suyb  andp(jn).  See 
panagi^iyb. 

PaiTgakb  (def. );  mawjakb  (indef.). 
Syn.,  panata.  From  dko,  "secu- 
rity," and  pan. 

Pangahus;  maiTgahas  (probably  from 
dahas,  "idea  of  bravery,"  and 
pan).     Seiple  points  out  that  the 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


179 


To  become  tired  from  much  standing: 
or  being  in  the  same  i)osition  a 
long  time. 


To  become  thin;  emaciated. 


To  become  numb  (as  tlie  arm  or  leg 
from  inaction);  to  "go  to  sleep." 
To  fold  the  arms. 


To  rest  the  face  upon  the  hand;  to 
burv  face  in  hands. 


To  apprehend;  to  dread. 


To  bear  a  child;  to  lie  in. 

To  be  witli  child  for  the  iirst  time. 
To  dread. 


To  look  in  mirror  or  other  reflecting 

surface. 
To  hurt;  to  damage;  to  malign;  to 

make  ashamed. 


To  talk  in  sleep;  to  dream. 
To  humble  or  almse  oneself. 
To  make  love;  to  woo. 
To  be  jealous. 

To  tremble;  to  shudder. 

To  warn;  to  guard  oneself;  to  sneak 
away. 


regular  formation  should  be  pana- 
hds.  In  Bicol,  dahas  means  vio- 
lence; force. 

Pamjdlay.  Ex. :  Nangangdlay  ha  na? 
(Are  you  tired  already?)  Hindi 
p6  (no,  sir).  The  roots  ngdlay, 
hingdlay,  mjalo,  and  ngimi  have 
about  the  same  meaning. 

Pangalirang  (greater  than  yayul). 
Syn. ,  jxnTgutigang .  Root,  iTgalirang 
and  pan. 

Pawjalo  (from  mjalo,  "idea  of  pain 
from  fatigue").     Syn.,  ngimi. 

Pangalokipkip  (from  fudokipkip,  to 
cross  the  arms).  Var.,  panhalo- 
kipkip.  Ult.  root,  kipkip.  Ex. : 
Kumipkip,  to  lay  the  arm  or  leg 
upon  anything.  Bdklt  ka  nii  ngumj- 
aloktpkipf  (VVhyare  you  folding 
your  arms?)  Seiple  shows  that 
halo  often  prefixes  roots  composed 
of  two  identical  syllables. 

Pamjalumbabd  ( from  mjalumhabd and 
pan).  \a,r.,  i~gaynmbabd.  Tauong 
mapaiTgalumbabd,  a  melancholy 
person. 

Pangamba  (less  than  pangdnib  or 
takot).  From  gambd,  "idea  of 
dread,"  and T^an. 

Panganak  (from  aiiak,  "child,"  and 
pan ) . 

Pangdnay. 

PaiTgdnib  (from  gdnib,  "idea of  being 
in  danger" ).  (Greater  degree  than 
pa)T(jumba.) 

PaiTganino  (from  anino,  "image, 
shadow,"  and  pa»). 

PaiTganyaya  (from  any  ay  a  and  pan). 
MakaparTijanyaya,  to  cause  dam- 
age. Panganyayang  tduo,  a  person 
who  destroys  property,  maligns, 
etc.  Anyayimg  tduo,  a  lazy  j)erson. 
MakapapKiTi/aiiijaya  (adj.),  harm- 
ful; hurtful;  slanderous. 

ParHjdrap  (from  drap,  "idea  of 
dreaming,"  and  jdoji)  . 

Pangayupapd  (from  ngayupajid  and 
pan). 

Pangibig  (from  ibig  and  j)^^''^)-  See 
ibig. 

PaiTgigbogho  (from  boghd,  "idea  of 
jealousy;"  still  found  in  jmni- 
buglid,  "jealousy"). 

Pangildbot  (from  kildbot,  "idea  of 
trembling"). 

Pailg'dag  (def. );  mangilag  (indef. ); 
both  from  ilag.  Umilag,  to  flee. 
Magilag,  to  draw  aside;  to  avoid. 
PaiTgdagan  mo  ang  maiTgd  tduoiig 
iralang  pinagaralan  (avoid  men 
without  education  [breeding]). 


180 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


Pamjiktp.  Seiple  thinks  may  be 
from  silap,  "idea  of  a  wordy  (juar- 
rel,"  and^^aji. 

PaiTffilin  (from  tu/iliitg,  "idea  of  ob- 
serving holidays  [tiestas],  etc.," 
and  p(in).  Seiple  observes  that 
the  final  g  of  the  root  has  been 
dropped,  but  this  may  Ije  acci- 
dental. 

Pangimi  (from  ngimi).   Syn. paiigalo. 

PmTginig  (from  kinig,  really  Jdnyig). 
Kti.minig,  to  tremble  with  coid  or 
fear.  Magkirdg,  to  tremlile  nmch 
thus.  Makinig,  to  be  trembling 
thus  [state].  Maiujinig,  indef.  of 
paiTginig.  MakapaiTginig,  to  cause 
to  tremble  with  cold  or  fear. 

Pai~gii7gil6  (from  jj«/u///y,  itself  from 
irgilo,  a  tingling  pain  in  the  teeth. 

PaiTijiki  (from  iTijiki).  Ak<? y  nan- 
giiTgiki  (I  am  shaking). 

Panguna  (from  una,  "first,"  and 
pan). 

Pangulugi  (from  ngtUugi,  a  loss  in 
business,  and  pan). 

PaiTgusap  ( from  iisap  and  pan).  Ex. : 
Hindi  ka  makopaiiigusap^  (Can't 
you  talk?)  (See  I'lsap,  already 
partly  explained). 

DIMIXrXIVES   IN    "UM." 

Um  verbs  are  made  diminutive  by  the  repetition  of  the  root  if  bisyllabic, 
or  the  first  two  syllables  if  longer.     Ex.: 

To  run.  Tumakbo.    Tumakbo-takho,  tDVumhle; 

to  run  a  little. 

To  rain.  Umuldn.      Umulan-uldn,    to   drizzle. 

In  ordinary  composition  the  hy- 
phens are  generally  omitted. 


To  be  scornful. 
To  keep  holidays. 


To  become  numb  (as  the  arm  or  leg 

from  inaction);  to  "go  to  sleep." 

To  tremble  (much  with  cold  or  fear) . 


To  feel  a  tingling  pain  in  the  teeth. 

To  shake  (as  from  the  ague). 

To  precede  (as   in  room  or  street); 

to  commence;  to  start  or  begin. 
To  lose  in  trade,  business,  or  barter. 

To  talk. 


THE   VERBALIZING    P.\RTICLE        MAG. 

The  particle  mag  is  used  to  verbalize  roots,  as  a  general  rule,  either 
•when  a  definite  object  is  heM  in  view  or  else  when  the  verb  does  not 
require  an  object  to  express  intensity  (sometimes  plurality)  with  roots 
which  are  verbalized  in  the  simplest  sense  with  um.  Mag  has  also  a  recip- 
rocal (mutual)  idea,  an  [lian)  being  usually  suffixed. 

Mag,  which  is  always  a  prefix,  changes  to  nag  in  the  present  and  past 
tenses.  The  Jirst  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  Maka.  and  naka,  which  are  used  to  indicate  the  second 
future  perfect  and  pluperfect,  respectively,  retain  pag,  the  definite  of  mag, 
with  the  root,  as  they  are  also  independent  particles  when  used  alone. 
In  this  respect,  and  al.«o  in  the  retention  of  the  particle  in  front  of  the 
reduplicated  initial  syllable  of  the  root  in  the  future  tense,  all  particles 
differ  from  um.     (See  the  table  for  conjugation  of  )i)ag  roots. ) 

I.  Mag,  prefixed  to  roots  which  admit  inn  and  which  do  not  change  the 
meaning  with  nuig,  signifies  plurality  either  (A  persons  or  acts,  this  being 
the  general  meaning  imparted  by  this  particle.  Mag  {nag)  sometimes 
throws  the  accent  upon  the  last  syllable  of  a  root.     Ex. : 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


181 


To  guard;  watch  for. 


To  sit  down. 


Turiianod.  Magtanod,  to  guard  much 
or  by  many.  Aug  tanorati,  what 
guarded.  Ang  pagtunoran,  what 
guarded  nmch  or  by  many.  Ang 
itanod,  the  cause  of  guarding. 
Ang  ipagtanod,  the  cause  of  guard- 
ing much  or  by  many;  also  the 
person  for  whom  guarded,  if  there 
be  a  person  concerned. 

Umupo.  Magupo,  tositdown  ( many). 


Among  other  verbs  may  be  mentioned  magbasd,  to  read  much  or  by 
many  [bumusa);  magbiiu,  to  eat  much,  etc.  {kumain);  maggiik,  to  thresh 
{gura'dk);  magbinin,  to  drink  much,  etc.  [uminum);  maglakad,  to  walk 
much,  etc.  (Iwudkad);  magsulat,  to  write  much  or  by  many  (s^um'dat); 
magtakbo,  to  run  much  or  by  many  {tumakba) ;  magtmTgift,  to  weep  much 
or  by  many  {tuinai~gis),  and  magtukso,  to  weep  mucli  {tumukso);  all  of 
which  verbs  have  l)een  heretofore  explained. 

II.  Those  roots  which  do  not  admit  inn  as  a  verbalizing  particle  are  not 
pUiralized  by  viag,  but  simply  verbalized  in  the  primary  sense.  Besides 
others,  all  roots  beginning  with  m  fall  in  this  class  on  account  of  caco- 
phony (harshness)  with  um. 


To  grind  (as  grain) 
To  enhance. 


To  think  with  care. 

To  see  well  (purposely). 

To  inherit. 


To  note;  to  experience. 
To  start;  to  commence. 


Magboyo.  Ang  bay'in,  what  ground. 
Ang  bayohaii,  the  grinding  place. 

Magmahal.  Aug  minaniahal,  the  es- 
teemed, etc.,  person.  Ex.:  Ang 
banal  na  tauo  ay  tidnamahal  (the 
just  person  is  esteemed).  Mama- 
lial,  to  rise  in  value.  Ex. :  Nama- 
mahal  ang  lako  (the  merchandise  is 
rising  in  value).  Magpakainuhal, 
to  esteem  highly.  Ex. :  Finagpa- 
pakamohal  ko  sa  kanlyd  (I  do  es- 
teem him  highly).  Also  with 
muka  alone.  Ex. :  Pinakamamahal 
ko  sa  kaniyd.  Makimahal,  to  act 
like  a  noble  person.  Mapakimahal, 
to  arrive  at  a  state  of  being  es- 
teemed. Kamahakm,  dearness; 
nobility,  etc. 

Magmahang. 

Magmalas.  To  see  well,  casually, 
7nakamalas. 

Magmana.  Ang  pagmanahin,  what 
inherited.  Ang  magkantann,  to 
leave  property.  Ang  ipatnana,  the 
estate.  Ang  pamana,  the  inherit- 
ance (verbal  noun).  Ex.:  ltd  ang 
pamana.  sa  akin  nang  amd  ko  (This 
was  my  inheritance  from  my 
father) .  Ang  pagmanahan,  the 
heir.  Makiniana,  to  ask  for  an  in- 
heritance. 

Magmasid.  Ang  mapagmasid,  the 
person  who  notes  or  experiences. 

Magmidd.  Muldn  mo  ito,  commence 
this.  Used  only  thus  in  impera- 
tive and  past  indicative.  As  "pro- 
ceed ' '  it  is  used  in  past  and  present. 


182  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Anci pinagrimmuhhi,  the  point  from 
which  proceedinj^.  Muld  as  prep, 
means  "from;  since." 

To  recall  to  niemor)'.  Marpnull.     Also  means  to  ojjen  the 

eyes  widely;  and  to  look  at  well. 

To  cheapen;  insult;  dishonor.  Marpnuru.        Maiimra,    to   lower  in 

value.  Ang  m?tra/(y??,  what  cheap- 
ened, or  who  insulted,  dishonored, 
etc.  MagpukamurcDnura,  to  despise 
intensely.  Magmurahan,  to  insult 
mutually.  Angliohomanangphtag- 
murahan  nild,  they  Insulted  each 
other  in  the  court  room. 

There  are  comparatively  few  verbal  roots  beginning  with  ?h  in  the  Taga- 
log.  The  foregoing  are  nearly  all  that  are  in  common  use.  A  few  others 
are  to  be  found,  which  will  be  n(jted  later,  used  with  other  particles. 

III.  Roots  which  change  tlie  meaning  with  »»i  and  7nng  are  pluralized 
in  two  ways  with  vwg.  If  the  final  syllable  of  the  root  is  acrented  nor- 
mally the  _/ir.s<  syllable  of  the  ?'oo<  is  added  extra  in  all  tenses,  but  if  the 
accent  is  not  normally  upon  the  last  syllable  of  the  root,  plurality  is 
expressed  by  changing  the  accent  to  the  final  syllable.  It  should  also  be 
noted  that  the  meaning  changes  back. 

To  buy.  Bumili.     Maghili,  to  sell.     Naghibili 

ako,  I  am  selling.  Nugbihibili  ako, 
I  am  buying  much.  Thi.s  form  is 
now  rare,  man  (q.  v.)  being  gen- 
erally used.  Ex. :  Namimili  ako 
(I  am  buying  much). 

To  teach  (as  a  doctrine).  Umaral.       Magdral,    to     learn;     to 

study.  Magaral,  to  teach  much; 
to  preach.  Now  generally  re- 
placed by  77ian.  Ex. :  MatTgdral, 
to  preach. 

The  reduplication  of  a  bisyllabic  root  or  the  first  two  syllables  of  a  poly- 
syllabic root  intensifies  plurality  with  mag  roots.  This  same  construction 
with  um  roots  indicates  diminutives.  Mag  roots  add  an  {ban)  to  express 
diminutives  or  reciprocal  verbal  actions,  which  have  to  be  distinguished 
by  the  context,  meaning,  etc.     Ex. : 

To  think.  Maglsip.       3fagisipisip,      to      think 

deeply;  profoundly. 

To  meditate.  Magnilay.     MagnilaynUaij,  to  medi- 

tate profoundly.  Man'day  natauo, 
a  considerate  person.  Monday, 
also  means  to  fish.  Paninilayan, 
a  fishing  canoe. 

To  follow;  to  obey.  Sumunod.    Magsunodsunod,  to  ioWow 

in  rapid  sequence  (many) . 

IV  (a).  Roots  which  may  admit  the  idea  of  more  or  less  take  an  addi- 
tional repetition  of  the  first  syllable  to  signify  intent  or  plurality.  If  the 
entire  root  be  repeated  the  plurality  is  intensified.  Roots  of  three  or  more 
syllables  repeat  only  the  two  first,  according  to  the  general  rule  in  Taga- 
log.  Ex.:  Nagsusam])d  ako  sa  kapidbahay  ko  (I  have  cursed  my  neighbor 
many  times).  Nagsusumpasumpd  ako  sa  kapidbahay  ko  (I  have  cursed 
[slandered]  my  neighbor  times  without  number). 

{b)  Mag  and  the  doubled  root  in  certain  cases  signify  the  performance 
of  an  act  and  its  opposite.  Verbs  expressing  an  unsteady  motion  or  quick 
change  of  position  are  also  formed  in  a  similar  manner,     (c)  In  the  present 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


183 


tense  nari  may  be  dropped,  V)eing  replaced  by  the  rechiji Heated  initial 
syllable  of  the  primitive  root.    Some  nm  verbs  have  this  form  also.     Ex.(fc) : 


To  pass. 


To  go  or  come  out. 
To  turn  over. 

To  stagger;  to  reel. 


To  shift  about;  to  change  continu- 
ally; to  turn  over  continually. 


To  wander  about  aimlessly,      {urn). 
To  stagger. 

To  tiptoe  about;  to  walk  on  tiptoes. 
To  bend  over. 


To  move  {<:). 

To  walk  with  the  head  on  one  side 
(c). 


Dumaan.  Magdnan,  to  pass  many 
times  or  by  many.  Mat/daandaan, 
to  pass  and  repass  many  times. 
Daanan,  a  made  road.  Di  mfidod- 
ncD),  impassible.  Makarnan,  to  be 
able  to  pass.  Magparuan,  to  allow 
to  pass  Ex. :  Paraanm  vio  ako 
( let  me  pass ) .  Ilindt  ko  pararaanin 
hangan  dl  vio  ako  bibigydn  nang 
kaunting  tubig  (I  will  not  let  you 
pass  until  you  give  me  a  little 
water).  Daan  also  means  "hun- 
dred. 

Lumabds.  MaglahuH,  to  take  out. 
Maglabaslabds,  to  go  out  or  come 
in  (many  times) . 

Magbaligtad.  MagbalibaUgtad,  to 
turnover.  Ex.  (c):  Babalibaligtad 
ang  may  sakit  sa  hihigdn  (the  sick 
man  is  turning  over  and  over  in 
bed). 

Magbalingbuling .  Babalingbdling 
yaorig  tdiio,  that  man  yonder  is 
reeling.  Magpapagbalingbdling,  to 
be  staggering  from  walking,  etc. 
Ex. :  Pinapagbabalingbdling  mo  ako 
nang paghdnap  sa  iyo  (I  am  ready 
to  fall  from  looking  for  you.  Syn. 
Magpal  i)  i  gpdlhig. 

Magbilinghiling.  Ex. :  BibdiiigbUing 
maiidhi  siyd  (he  is  shifting  about). 
Bihilingbilhig  ang  loob  ko  (I  have 
my  doubts) .  BibiUngbUmg  ang 
may  sakit  sa  hihigdn  (the  sick  man 
is  twisting  and  turning  in  bed). 

Sumulingsdling.  tSnsidingsi'ding  siyd 
(he  is  wandering  about  aimlessly ). 

Magsiiraysi'nxiy,  Susuraysdrai/  slyd? 
( Is  he  staggering?)  O/x"),  ang  hislng 
ay  susuraysuray  knng  bnndkad  (yes 
sir,  a  drunken  man  staggers  when 
he  walks) . 

Tioniad.  Magtiadiiad,  to  tiptoe  about 
much.  T'diaj^tiad  ako  ( I  am  walk- 
ing about  on  my  tiptoes). 
Umnkod.  Magukod,  to  bend  over 
much.  Maukod,  to  be  bent  over. 
Magukodukod,  to  walk  bent  over 
or  waveringly.  IJukodnkod  siyd 
( he  walks  bent  over) .  Uukodnkod 
yaong  matandd.  (that  old  person 
walks  haltingly),. 

Kumibo.  Magkibokibo,  to  move 
much. 

MagkilingkUing.  lyang  baid'y  kiki- 
ViugkUing  kunglumdkad  (That child 
holds  the  head  on  one  side  when 
walking). 


184 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  assemble  (purposely.) 


To  assemble;  to  meet  (purposely). 


To  wabble  (c).  Kuminda;/.       Magkindaykinday,     to 

wabble  much.  Syn.  Magkinding- 
kinding. 

V.  Mag  is  also  used  to  express  personal  actions  which  may  be  dual  or 
plural  in  character,  reciprocity  or  mutuality  being  implied.  If  the  plurality 
is  to  1)6  intensified,  the  root  is  repeated,  subject  to  the  general  rule  for  poly- 
syllabic roots.     Ex. : 

To  quarrel;  to  tight.  MugbaUtg.     Ang  pagbabag,  the  act  of 

quarreling.  Mapagbabag,  quarrel- 
some person.  Ang  babagin,  the 
person  quarreled  with. 

Magpi'dong.  Ex. :  Xagpupulong  ang 
maiTgd  maginoo  sa  bayan  (the 
"principales"  of  the  town  are 
assembling).  Ann  ang  phiagpu- 
loiajan  kanilaf  (Why  have  they 
met?)  Avg  ipinagpi'dong  nibVy 
nang  pagusapan  ang  jiagdating 
nang  gobernador-general  (The  pur- 
pose of  their  meeting  was  to  talk 
over  the  coming  of  the  governor- 
general). 

Magtipon.  Tumipon,  to  join  (one). 
Magkatipon,  to  meet  orassemble  by 
chance  (as  a  street  crowd).  Ex.: 
Nagkatipon  ang  maiujci  tauo  sa  ba- 
lmy ko  (Some  people  have  happened 
to  meet  in  my  house).  Ang  kati- 
j)unan,  the  assembly.  Also  the 
popular  name  of  the  well-known 
revolutionary  society,  the  K.  K.  K. 
Ex. :  Ang  pinagkakatlpunan  nang 
manga  marurunong  (The  meeting- 
place  of  the  learned  people — i.  e., 
of  learned  societies,  etc).  Ilouag 
kang  suntama't  hindl  nababagay  sa 
hang  dalagang  pumaroon  sa  pinag- 
kakatipnnan  nang  maraming  lalaki 
(Do  not  accompany  [him,  her,  or 
them]  because  it  is  not  proper  for 
a  girl  to  go  where  there  is  a  meet- 
ing of  many  men). 

Other  verbs  of  this  nature,  all  of  which  have  been  mentioned  befoi-e,  are 
maghiwalay,  to  separate  mutually;  magpisan,  to  associate;  magkiia,  to  see 
each  other;  viagsama,  to  accompany  each  other;  magialo,  to  argue;  and 
magusap,  to  converse;  to  litigate. 

VI.  The  distinction  between  plurality,  intensity,  etc.,  and  mutuality, 
reciprocity,  etc.,  is  sometimes  made  by  a  change  of  accent.     Ex.: 

To  approach  (one).  Lumapit.     Maglapit,    to   draw  near. 

Maglapit,  to  approach  mutually. 
Malapit,  near.  Malapit  siyd  sa  akin 
(He  is  a  relative  of  mine). 

To  look  at.  Kinnitd.     Magkita,  to  look  at  each 

other.  Magkita,  to  look  at  many 
things;  or  to  look  at  intently. 

VII.  Mag  verbalizes  reciprocal  actions  of  a  nature  admitting  competition 
or  rivalry,  provided  that  no  special  emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  conten- 
tion.    Ex.: 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


185 


To  become  reconciled  (two) 


Tostir,  mixingatsametime;  toshake. 


Mayhall  (also  to  speak  in  a  friendly 
way ) .  Magpabati,  to  become  recon- 
ciled (many). 

ITtnnalo.  An;/  Iialoiti,  what  shaken; 
stirred.  Mcujhalb,  to  mix  two  (or 
more)  things  together.  Angihnlo, 
what  mixed.  Ang  haloan,  the  mix- 
ing place,  etc.  Ang  hinalb,  what 
shaken  (past).  Ang  Ui'malb,  wh&i 
mixed  (past). 

VIII.  Voluntary  reciprocal  actions  of  certain  classes  are  also  conjugated 
witli  mag  prefixed'  lo  the  root  and  an  (Imh)  {nan)  suthxed.     Ex.: 


To  mock;  jeer  at. 


To  suffer;  to  endure. 


To  kick. 


To  curse. 


To  help;  to  aid  (another). 


Magbiro.  Magbiroan,  to  mock  each 
other.  Makipagbiroan,  to  mock 
greatly;  to  jeer  atanother  viciously. 
Birohiro,  mapagbiro,  palabirn,  all 
stand  for  degrees  of  being  a  jester, 
etc.  Magpalabiro,  to  jest  with  a 
good  deal.  Tauong  biro,  an  incon- 
siderate person. 

Dumalitd.  Magdalitaan,  to  suffer  for 
each  other,  or  mutually.  Magpa- 
Jcadalidalitu,  to  suffer  intensely. 
Mapagdalitd,  sufferer.  Kadalitaan, 
suffering.  1)1  inadalitd,  intoler- 
able; insufferable. 

Sumikad.  Mag.vkad,  to  kick  much. 
Magsikaran,  to  kick  each  other. 
Manikad,  to  kick  habitually.  Also 
magsumlkad,  to  work  with  rapidity. 
Synonyms  for  kicking:  Tuma- 
dyak,  magtadijak,  magiadyakan, 
tumindak,  ntagtindak,  magtinda- 
kan. 

Sumumpd.  Ang  sumpain,  who  or 
what  cursed.  A)ig  isnmpd,  the 
reason  or  cause  of  cursing.  Mag- 
sumpd,  to  curse  much;  also  many 
at  same  time.  Ang  pagsumpain, 
who  or  what  cursed  thus.  Ang 
ipagsumpd,  the  cause  or  reason  for 
cursing  thus.  Magsumjiaan,  to 
curse  each  other.  Mamunpd,  to 
curse  habitually;  also  to  take  an 
oath.  Ang  palasumpd,  the  habit- 
ual curser;  also  the  witness.  Aug 
panunum2:)d,  habitual  cursing,  or 
the  oath  taken.  Ang  paiiumjjaan, 
the  person  administering  the  oath; 
also  the  place.  Ang  ipanumpd, 
the  testimony  given;  also  what 
sworn  habitually. 

Tumulong.  Magtidong,  to  help 
another  much.  MaglidoiTgan,  to 
help  each  other.  Manulong,  to 
help  another  often.  Manvlongan; 
magpanulongan,  to  help  each  other 
much  or  often.  Ang  katulong,  the 
aid;  assistant;  helper. 


186  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

Touse  insulting  or  indecent  language;     MagturTgayao.      Magtuiuiayauan,    to 
to  say  such  words.  abuse  each  other  thus.     ManmTg- 

ayuo,  to  abuse  or  insult  thus  con- 
tinually or  habitually.  Mapag- 
tmigayao,  abuser;  insulter. 

Among  other  verbs  of  this  description  may  be  cited  magkagatan,  to  bite 
each  other;  magibigan,  to  like  each  other;  magpaloan,  to  cudgel  each 
other;  mngsinlahan,  to  love  each  other;  i))ag><unoran,  to  follow  each  other; 
and  inagtawman,  to  laugh  at  each  other.  All  of  these  have  been  mentioned 
before. 

IX.  In  the  use  of  mag  to  verbalize  actions  admitting  reciprocity,  care  is 
necessary  in  noting  their  nature  and  the  intent  and  purpose  for  which  the 
actions  may  be  executed,  as  there  are  local  differences  in  this  respect. 
Reciprocal  verbs  require  an  oljject  which  returns  the  action.  (A)  Thus, 
luftg  prefixed  and  an  sutiixed  with  a  root  which,  admits  competition 
expresses  rivalry.  (B)  If  the  action  requires  an  object  and  rivalry  is  to 
be  expressed,  the  suffix  an  should  be  repeated. 

To  jump.  Lumulso.     Magloksu,  to  jump  much 

or  by  many.  MagJoJcsohan,  to  jump 
in  competition.  (This  verb  has 
already  been  explaiiied. ) 

To  look.  Turniwjht.     MagtuTgiu,    to    look    at 

much  or  by  many.  AfagtiiTj/inan, 
to  look  at  each  other.  (Hereto- 
fore explained. ) 

To  push;  to  shove  off  (as  a  boat) .  Tumulak.      Magti'dak,  to  push  hard 

or  by  many.  Magtulakan,  to  push 
against  each  other.  Maghdakanan, 
to  push  in  rivalry  or  competition. 

X.  Mag  and  the  reduplicated  root  form  intensive  reciprocal  verbs  which 
can  oniy  be  distinguished  from  diminutives,  verbs  of  feigning,  mockery, 
imitation,  etc.,  by  the  context.  As  usual,  polysyllabic  roots  repeat  the 
first  two  syllables  only.     Ex.: 

To  embrace.  Yumakap.     Magyakap,    to    embrace 

each  other;  to  tie  up  to  a  post. 
Magyakapyakapan,  to  embrace 
each  other  warmly;  also  means 
"to  embrace  a  little,  to  pretend  to 
embrace,  to  imitate  embracing," 
etc. 

Other  verbs  already  cited  are  magabutabutan ,  to  reach  many  things;  to 
pass  many  things  from  hand  to  hand,  etc. ;  niagltaildltatiran,  to  send  to  each 
other,  etc.,  and  magtii~gintir~ginan,  to  look  at  each  other  closely;  to  pretend 
to  look,^tc. 

XL  iVigro  may  also  be  infixed  with  mag,  forming  maiiijag,  the  particle  thus 
made  imparting  the  idea  of  great  plurality  when  prefixed  to  a  root.     Ex. : 

To  converse.  Mugusap.     Mangagusap,  to  converse 

(as  a  great  crowd). 

XII.  Roots  with  m.ag  may  be  used  both  with  and  without  an  object,  the 
meaning  varying  more  or  less  in  such  cases.     Ex. : 

To  divide  into  equal  ])arts.  Bumahagi.      Magbcdiagi  kayo/    Dis- 

perse! Mayb(diagi  kayo  nitong  ga- 
Inpi  (divide  this  money). 

XIII.  Movement  caused  l)y  an  outside  agency  is  expressed  by  mag.  As 
will  be  remembered,  self-movement  is  expressed  by  um  (Par.  XI,  um). 
Ilumango,  to  pull  out,  take  out,  etc.,  is  an  exception  to  the  rule.     Ex.: 


TAGALOO    LANGUAGE. 


187 


To  fell  trees;  to  blow  trees  down  (as 
the  wind) . 


To  part  from  another;  to  go  to  a  dis- 
tance. 


To  rise  (voluntarily,  as  a  l)ird) 


Maghual.  Anghualm,ihe  tree  felled. 
Aug  ibual,  the  person  felling,  or 
wind,  ^-l?;*/ /;Ha/an,  the i)lace.  -h?^ 
pamual,  the  instrunu-nt,  i.  e.,  ax. 

Luiiutyu.  Lni»ai/n,  to  remain  left  far 
away  (by  another).  Mai/Iiiyo,  to 
part  (two);  also  to  remove  any- 
thing to  a  distance.  Malai/o,  dis- 
tant; far. 

Til  muas.  Magtaas,  to  raise ;  to  lift  up. 
Mataa.i,  high;  tall;  noted.  Katau- 
san,  height.  KatanMaasan,  ex- 
treme height. 

Among  other  verbs  of  like  nature,  which  have  already  been  explained, 
are  magal'/s,  to  take  away;  maglaph,  to  draw  something  near;  mag/tayuiog, 
to  take  or  let  anything  downstairs  or  a  ladder;  magpavhik,  to  take  any- 
thing upstairs  or  up  a  ladder,  etc.;  viagsilid,  to  put  anything  in  or  into; 
magtayu,  to  set  up;  and  mngtiiidig,  to  stand  anything  upright. 

XIV.  Bodily  voluntary  actions  affecting  one's  self  only,  or  those  per- 
mitted to  be  done,  are  expressed  with  mag.  Those  actions  of  like  nature 
performed  upon  another  take  uin  (Par.  XII,  um).     Ex. : 

To  whip  one's  self  (as  in  penance).      Maghampa».     Humanijx'i.^,    to    whip 

another.  Mngpohdinpas,  to  allow 
one's  self  to  be  whipped,  etc.  Pa- 
hampas,  to  consent  to  he  whipped. 
Ex. :  Houag  kang  DaJxmipas  sa  siiw- 
man  (don't  let  anyone  whip  you). 

Other  verbs  following  this  rule  are  fulh'  explained  in  Par.  XII  under 
nm. 

XV.  As  has  been  noted  mag  expresses  for  the  indefinite  the  idea  of  los- 
ing control,  as  ?uu  expresses  the  idea  of  acquiring  the  same.  What  is  lost 
control  of  is  expressed  in  the  definite  with  /,  combined  with  In  for  the 
past  and  other  tenses  where  necessary.  For  the  aid  of  the  memory  it 
may  be  said  that  verbs  of  throwing  away,  throwing  at,  etc.,  sowing,  scat- 
tering, pouring  out,  mixing,  placing,  putting,  giving,  and  selling  follow 
this  rule.     Ex.: 

To  throw  away. 

To  throw  or  dash  down. 

To  throw  at  (as  with  a  rock). 


To  throw  at;  to  pelt. 

To  throw  up  (much). 
To  scatter  rice  seed. 


To  scatter  in  the  air;  to  emit. 


To  scatter  seed. 


To  transjilant. 


Magtapou.     (Already  explained.) 

Maghnlog.     (Already  explained.) 

Magpukol.  Angpuli'in,  what  thrown 
at,  or  stoned.  Ang  ipukol,  what 
thrown. 

Maghagis.  Ex. :  Nagliagis  ako  nang 
halo  (I  threw  a  stone). 

Magnaka.     Sumuka,  to  throw  up. 

Maghasik.  Manhasik,  to  sow  much 
rice  thus  or  by  many  working  to- 
gether. 

Magmmhidat.  Ang  isambi'dat,  what 
scattered,  as  grain,  etc.  Simiain- 
bulat,  to  scatter,  disperse,  as  a 
crowd  of  its  own  volition.  Ma- 
nambulat,  to  scatter  much,  either 
by  inside  or  outside  agency. 

Magsabog.  (Already  explained.) 
Syn. ,  vmgvalat.  Magkalat, aXre&dy 
set  forth ;  means  to  spread,  prop- 
agate. 

Magpunld.  Magtanbn,  to  plant,  to 
set  out  (already  explained). 


188 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  scatter. 

To  break  up;  scatter  (as  parts  of  a 

house  torn  down). 
To  pour  out. 


To  pour  out;  ^hakeout  (not  liquids). 

To  saturate  with  water. 
To  mix. 


To  stew;  to  boil  meal,  etc. 
To  jiut  wood  on  the  fire. 


To  place. 

To  put  in  the  sun. 

To  place  in  layers,  etc. 

To  give. 

To  present  with;  to  make  a  gift. 

To  grant;  to  give. 

To  give;  primarily,  to  hand  to  an- 
other bv  reaching  out  the  arm. 


To  sell. 

To  sell  goods. 


To  trade  on  a  small  scale;  to  sell  at 

retail. 
To  sell  at  cost. 


Maghulagsak. 
Mar/wasak. 


(Already  explained.) 


Maghobo.  Ang  boban,  what  poured 
into.  Ang  ibobo,  what  poured 
out.  Syn.,  magbuhos  (already  ex- 
plained). 

Maghoho.  Ang  iliohu,  what  poured 
or  shaken  out,  as  grain,  etc. 

Maghi»tk,  var.  mugbaysak. 

Mughalu.  (Already  explained.) 
Syn.s.,  vnigsahog;  maglahok.  Lu- 
mahok,  to  join. 

Magh'iguo.  Ang  ihigao,  the  material. 
Ang  liinugao,  the  mush;  stew. 
Ang  lugauan,  the  stewpan,  etc. 

Maggatong,  also  to  stir  up  the  fire. 
Magpagntong,  to  ask  that  the  fire 
be  stirred  up.  Makigalong,  to  ask 
for  a  few  coals  to  start  a  fire.  Ang 
igdiung,  the  poker,  etc.  Ang 
gatoiTijin,  w  hat  burned.  Ang  ga- 
toiTgan,  the  place. 

Maglagay.     (Already  explained.) 
(Already  explained.) 

( Already  exi)lained. ) 
(Already  explained).) 
(Already  explained.) 
Ang     ipagkaluob,    the 


Magbilad. 

Magpatong. 

Magbigay. 

Mngbiyaya. 

Magkaluob. 

grant. 
Maggaudd. 

the  arm 


Gumduad,  to  stretch  out 
in  order  to  reach  some- 
thing.   Ang  ganarin,  what  reached. 
Angigdnad,  w'hat  given  or  handed 
over.     Ang  iginduad,  what  was  or 
has  been  given,  etc. 
Magbili.     (Already  explained.) 
Maglakb.     Mciglako,  to  peddle  from 
town  to  town.      Ang  ilaku,  what 
sold.      Ang  ilako,   what  pieddled 
from  place  to  place. 
Magutay.     (Already  explained.) 


Mngdmot. 
at  cost. 


Ang  ipagdmot,  what  sold 


Verbs  of  "permitting,  sending,  restoring,"  etc.,  also  follow  the  iiutgand  i 
conjugation.     Ex.: 

To  permit.  Magtulot.   ^Ing^rfif/o^  what  permitted. 

To  send;  to  remit.  Maghatid.     (Already  explained.) 

To  restore.  Magsaoli.     (Already  explained.) 

XVI.  Being  of  like  nature,  verbs  of  "speaking,  relating,  telling,"  etc., 
are  conjugated  by  vuig  in  the  indefinite  and  /  in  the  definite.  A  few,  how- 
ever, have  um  with  i  for  the  object.     Ex.: 


To  tell;  narrate;  report. 

To  report;  to  announce;  to  tell  the 
news. 


MagsalHd.  (Definites,  already  ex- 
plained.) 

Magbalitd.  Ang  ipinagbalild,  the 
news  announced  or  reported;  also 
the  cause  or  means  (past  tense). 


TAGALOO    LANGUAGE. 


189 


To  converse  (two). 

To  converse  (two  or  more). 

To  speak ;  pronounce. 
To.explain. 


To  speak  in  a  low  tone;  also  to  mut- 
ter; grumble;  talk  about  another 
in  al)sence,  etc. 

To  ask;  to  inquire. 


Aug  pin(u/halitaaii,  the  person  to 
whom  told,  etc.  (past  tense). 
Makimalita,  to  ask  for  news. 

Magmbi.  Totalk  (one),SM»ur>'n.  To 
talk  much,  magsab'i.  (This  verb 
has  already  been  explained.) 

Magi'isap.  (Already  explained.) 
MaiTjjilsap,  to  talk.  Ex.:  Maka- 
paiTijiisa})  ka?  (("an  you  talk?) 
Hindi  ka  makapaiujiUctp?  (Can't 
you  talk?) 

Magwlkd.  Hindi  ko  mawikcl  (I  can 
not  pronounce  it). 

Magsalaysaii.  ( A  Iready  explained. ) 
Another  word  is  mdf/mi/xag,  which 
with  vm  has  als(j  the  meaning  of 
to  arrange,  as  the  hair  of  another, 
and  with  mag  to  arrange  some- 
thing for  one's  self,  as  the  hair, 
etc.  Ex.  with  ma.:  Hindi  ko  ma- 
sagsay  (I  can  not  explain  it). 

Maghulong.  Ex.:  May  ihidndang  ak6 
sa  iyo  (1  have  samething  for  your 
ear  only). 

Tumanong.  Magtanong,  to  ask  about, 
or  concerning.  Aug  tanongin,  the 
person  questioned.  Ex.:  Sinoang 
tinanong  mof  (Wliom  did  you  ask, 
01'  of  whom  did  you  inquire?) 
Ang  itanong,  what  asked.  And  ang 
ithumong  mo  (what  did  you  in- 
quire). 

Maganas.  Ex.:  lands  mo  (tell  it 
gently). 

Mag.vimhong.  Mapagsumbong,  tat- 
tler. 

Magbald.  Ang  ibald,  what  said. 
Mabala  ka  (say  something).  Ba- 
habalin  mo  ang  mam/n  tnno  nito 
(notify  the  people  of  this).  It 
should  be  noted  that  the  definite 
here  takes  an  extra  ba. 

Magbaual.  Ang  ibaual,  what  forbid- 
den. Ang  baualan,  the  person  to 
whom  something  may  be  forbid- 
den. Ang  pagbabdual,  the  act 
of  forbidding  (present  tense). 
BroTijang  bdual,  forbidden  fruit. 

XVII.  ilfrt.9  prefixed  to  roots  signifying  nations,  races,  conditions,  etc., 
means  to  behave  to  some  degree  as  the  root  signifies,  but  if  a  complete 
assimilation  is  to  be  implied,  the  particle  maki  (paki)  is  used.     Ex.: 

To  be  somewhat  Americanized.  Magamericano.    Ex. :  Nagaamericano 

siyd  nang  damit  (he  [she]  is  quite 
Americanized  in  dress). 
Mageastila.      Nagcacastila  sild  nang 
dsal  (they  are  quite  Spanish   in 
custom). 

XVIII.  (a)  Mag,  with  natural  objects,  signifies  to  produce  them;  (b) 
with  artificial  objects,  to  make  them;   (c)  with  articles  of  barter,  to  trade 


To  speak  gently. 

To  tattle. 

To  say  something;  accuse,  denounce, 
notifv. 


To  forbid. 


To  be  quite  Hispanicized;  to  be  like 
a  Spaniard  in  some  ways. 


190 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


or  sell  them;  (d)  with  edible  things,  etc.,  to  eat  them;  {e)  with  property, 
to  possesss  it;  (/)  with  names  of  relatives,  to  know  how  to  aet  toward  them; 
and  (g)  with  the  possessive  pronouns,  to  have: 

Ex.   (a): 
To  put  forth  leaves  (as  a  tree,  etc.).     MagdaJiun.     Also  means  to  put  the 

food  on  leaves,  as  when  out  of 
doors.  Ang  tagapagdahon,  the 
cook.  Arig  daJionan,  the  eating 
place  thus. 


Ex.  (/>)■ 
To  build  a  house. 
To  make  soap. 

Ex.  (c): 
To  sell  or  trade  rice. 
To  sell  or  trade  unhulled  rice. 

Ex.  (rf): 
To  sell  or  eat  pickled  fish. 
To  eat  fruit  or  to  sell  it. 

To  eat  or  sell  tish. 


To  eat  or  sell  eggs. 

To  eat  bananas  or  to  sell  them. 
To  drink  chocolate. 


To  use  tobacco. 

Ex.  (e): 
To  have  property. 


To  have  anvthing  of  one's  own. 

Ex.  (/):' 
To  know  how  to  treat  a  father. 


To  know  how  to  treat  a  child,  i.  e., 
how  to  be  a  good  parent. 


Ex.  ((/): 
To  have  as  yours. 
To  have  as  theirs. 
To  have  as  mine. 

XIX.   Words  signifying  articles  of  wearing  apparel  may  be  verbalized 
with  'mag  to  express  the  wearing  of  the  same.     Ex. : 

Mirror;  (2)  spectacles;  glasses.  Salamin.     3fagsalamin,  to  look  in  the 

mi  r ror ;  ( 2 )  to  wear  glasses  or  spec- 
tacles. Aug  salaminan,  what  seen 
in  the  mirror. 

Trousers.  Salawal.     Magsalawal,  to  wear  trou- 

sers. 


Magbdhay.     (Already  explained.) 
Magsahon.     (Already  explained). 

Magbigns.     (Already  explained. ) 
Magpalay.     Ex. :  Magpdlay  la  nang 
pulot  (trade  palay  for  some  honey ). 

Magbagoon. 

MagbuiTija.  Ex.:  Nagbubunga  siyd 
(she  is  selling  fruit). 

Maglsdd.  Ex.:  Nagiisdd  sild  (they 
are  selling  fish).  Umisdd,  to  have 
fish  once  more  in  a  river  or  creek, 
etc.  Ungmii.sdd  ngayon  sa  Hog 
(there  are  fish  now  in  the  river). 

Magitlog.  Ex.:  Nagiitlog siyd  {she  is 
selling  eggs). 

Magsaging.     (Already  explained). 

Magsiculale  (from  Mex.-Sp.,  cJioco- 
late;  from  Xahua ( Aztec) ,  chocolatl, 
choco,  cacao;  and  littl,  water). 

Magtabaco  (from  Sp.  and  originally 
a  West  Indian  word). 

Magari.  Muari,  landowner.  Arkt- 
rian,  small  farm;  also  household 
furniture. 

Magsarili. 

Magamd.  Ex.:  Si  Juan  ay  maalam 
magamd  (Juan  knows  how  to  treat 
a  father  [i.  e.,  how  to  be  a  good 
son]  ).  Magamd  also  means  father 
and  child. 

Maganak.  Ex.:  Si  Juatt. ay  marunong 
maganak  (Juan  knows  how  to  treat 
a  child  [i.  e.,  how  to  be  a  good 
parent]  ).     Also  child  and  parent. 

Magiyo. 

MagkaniUi. 

Magakin. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  191 

Hat.  SamhalUo    (from     Span,    sombrero). 

Matjs(uiil)(tlllo,  to  wear  a  hat  (occa- 
sionally). Manamhalilo,  to  wear  a 
hat  habitual!}-. 

Shoe,  sandal.  Sap'in.     Magsajvn,    to    wear    shoes; 

also  to  line. 

Apron.  Tapis.     Magiapis,  to  put  on  or  wear 

an  apron. 

XX.  Maff  generally  governs  all  Spanish,  English,  and  other  foreign  words 
not  incorporated  into  the  language.     Ex. : 

To  play  baseball.  Magbesbol.     Ex. :     Nagbebeshol     avg 

marTgd  bald  (the  boys  [children] 
are  playing  baseball.) 

To  gamble.  Maglnigal  (iromf^pan.  jiigar).     Sugal 

is  the  usual  term.  Jjird  is  the  na- 
tive word  and  means,  like  the 
Spanish,  either  to  play  or  togamble. 

XXI.  Roots  denoting  officials  may  take  mag  to  express  the  dis(;harge  of 
duties  pertaining  to  the  office  named.     Ex. : 

To  be  governor.  Maggoberuador. 

To  be  mayor  (presidente).  Magpresidente. 

To  be  a  councilman.  Magconsejal. 

To  be  secretary.  Magsecretario. 

To  be  treasurer.  Magtesorero. 

To  be  prosecuting  attorney.  Magfiscal. 

XXII.  Mag,  prefixed  to  abstracts  beginning  with  ka.  and  ending  in  an, 
signifies  to  do  what  is  expressed  by  the  abstract.  Such  words  are  used 
only  in  the  infinitive,  and  should  be  clearly  distinguished  from  those  root^ 
prefixed  by  the  particle  magka,  which  hick  the  suffixed  an  with  the  in- 
definite infinitive.     Ex.: 

To  do  deeds  of  virtue  or  justice.  Magbanalan  (from  kabanalan,  virtue, 

justice). 

To  do  right.  Magkatuiran  (from   kaiuiran,   right, 

justice).  Ex.:  Hatolanmosildnang 
katuiran  (.Vdvise  them  what  is 
right). 

To  act  chastely  or  in  a  cleanly  man-  3fagkaMnisnn  {irom  kalinisan ,  clesin\\- 
ner.  ness). 

To  behave  obscenely.  Magkahalayan  (from  kahalayan,  ob- 

scenity). 

XXIII.  With  adjectives  formed  by  prefixing  ma  to  the  root,  mag  signi- 
fies to  assume  or  boast  of  what  is  expressed  by  the  adjective,  if  the  mean- 
ing permits  such  assumption  or  boasting.  In  some  cases  mag  means  to 
regard  as  signified  by  the  adjective.     Ex.: 

To  boast  of  good  judgment.  Magmabait.      Ex.:    Xagniamabait  si. 

Juan  (Juan  boasts  of  his  good 
judgment  [or  prudence]).  Ma- 
bait,  judicious,  prudent. 

To  boast  of  knowledge.  Magmarunong.      Ex. :     NagmamanX- 

noyig  si  Andres  (Andres  boasts  of 
his  knowledge).  .  Marunong,  wise, 
learned  (from  dnnong).  Kanino- 
ngan,  wisdom,  knowledge. 

To  boast  of  beauty.  Magmarikit.     Ex. :   Xagmamarikit  si 

Biangoy  (Maria  boasts  of  her 
beauty).  Marikil,  pretty  (from 
dikit).  Dumikit,  to  grow  pretty. 
Magdikit,  to  beautify. 


192 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  boast  of  elegance,  beauty. 


To  boast  of  bravery;  to  swagger. 


MagiiuKjanda.  Ex.:  Nagnunnaganda 
si  Lolevg,  Dolores  (Lola)  boasts 
of  her  elegance;  beauty.  Ma- 
gandi'i,  elegant,  beautiful.  Kagan- 
dahan,  elegance,  l:)eauty. 

MagiiKiU'ipaiuj.  Ex. :  Nagmatupang 
.si  Fuustiiio  (Faustino  boasted  of 
his  bravery;  or  Faustino  swag- 
gered). Matapang,  brave.  Kata- 
pcuTgan,  bravery. 

XXIV.  If  an  action  does  not  admit  of  boasting,  mag  used  with  a  m« 
adjective  denotes  becoming,  growing,  etc.,  what  may  be  signified  by  the 
adjective.  The  definite  particle  in  is  generally  suffixed  to  the  roots  in 
these  cases.     Ex. : 

To  become  forgetful.  Magmalimotin.     Lumimot,  to  try  to 

forget.  MakaUmot,  to  forget.  Ma- 
I'lmot,  forgetful.  Aug  naliinolan, 
w hat  forgotten.  Mnlilimotin,  a  for- 
getful person.  Kallinotmi,  forget- 
fulness. 
Magniasakihi.  Ex.:  Nngmainasakt'm 
siyd{\le  isgrowing  infirm).  May 
sakit,  to  be  ill.  Masasakl'm,  an  in- 
firm, sickly  person.  Sumakil,  to 
feel  pain  anywhere.  Ang  sakitan, 
theseatof  pain.    (SeePar.  XXVI). 

XXV.  Verbs  with  mag  are  made  diminutives  by  repeating  a  bisyllabic 
root  or  the  first  two  of  a  longer  one,  and  suffixing  an,  han,  or  nan,  as 
required.     Ex.: 

To  write  a  little;  to  scribble.  ^fags ula tsi daian  {Ivom  sulat.).     (Al- 

ready used). 

To  cry  a  little;  to  snivel.  Magiyakiyakan    (from    iyak).      Ex.: 

Nagiii/akiydkan  iynng  batang  iydn, 
that  child  is  sniveling. 

To  nibble.  Magkainkuinan.     (Already  used.) 

XXVI.  The  same  form  as  the  above  also  signifies  feigning,  inntation, 
mockery,  playing  at,  etc.  Both  these  and  those  mentioned  in  Par.  XXV 
can  only  be  distinguished  by  the  context  from  intensive  reciprocal  verb.s 
formed  in  the  same  way.     (See  Par.  X). 


To  grow  infirm. 


To  affect  virtue,   i.  e. 
hypocrite. 


to  play  the 


To  play  at  building  houses  (as  chil- 
dren). 
To  play  at  biting  (as  dogs). 

To  malinger;  feign  illness. 


To  tempt  a  little  or  to  pretend  to 

tempt. 
To  sham  insanity. 


To  feign  deafness. 


Maghanalhanalan  ( from  banal).  Ex . : 
Nagbahanalbanalan  siyd  (He  is  a 
hyixjcrite). 

Magbaltaybaliayaii  (from  bi'iliay). 
(Already  used.) 

J\[iigk(igatkagaktii  ( from  kagat).  ( Al- 
ready used.) 

Afagsakitsakilan  (from  sakit).  Ex.: 
Nagsasakitsakita)!  ka  (you  are  ma- 
lingering). 

Magtuksotuksohan  (from  tukso). 
(Used  V)efore. ) 

MagabdiduUin  (from  I'dul).  Vmnlul, 
to  drive  another  crazy.  Mai'dnl,  to 
become  insane.  Ang  ikai'did,  the 
cause  of  insanity.  Kaulidan,  in- 
sanity. 

MagbingibiyTijihan  ( from  bingi).  Ex. : 
Houag  kang  ma^jbiiTgibiirgihan 
(Don't  try  to  sham  deafness). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


193 


XXVII.  Some  vm  verbs  admit  prefixed  may,  the  combination  denoting 
the  action  to  be  executed  with  earneistnessj  endeavor,  enterprise,  etc. 
(//)  Snrne  roots  with  vxikd  also  take  the  prefix  ma;/,  with  the  same  signifi- 
cation.    The  infinitive  form  of  tlie  root  with  um  or  ma ku  is  always  retained. 

Ex.  («): 


To  make  haste. 

To  force,  oblige,  compel. 

To  exert  one's  self;   to  work   etfi- 
ciently. 


To  follow  closely,  etc. 

To  l)e  able  to  move  to  compassion.  (6) 

To  be  able  to  shame  greatly.  (/;) 


MagduiiiaJi  (from  dumalt,  to  do 
quickly).  J/ado^t,  quickly.  Mag- 
madali,  to  do  sometliing  quickly. 
(Idiom.)  Magdumaling  drao,  a 
short  while. 

Magp'dif.  In  Manila,  putnUit.  Mag- 
pumlUt,  to  endeavor. 

idagsakit.  Suinakit,  to  oblige  another 
to  work;  to  use  force  toward  an- 
other. Magsnmdkit,  to  exert 
greatly  for  the  carrying  out  of  an 
object.  Ex. :  Ang  tauong  nagsusu- 
mdkit  matutu  navg  mabiihuting 
kaasalan,  ay  igagalang  navg  lahat 
(the  man  who  exerts  himself 
greatly  to  learn  good  manners  will 
be  respected  by  everyone).  (-S'»- 
makit  regarded  as  a  new  root. ) 

Magsumimod.     (Already  explained. ) 

MagmakaauCi.  (Already  used. )  See 
aud. 

Magmakahli/d  (from  makaliigd,  to 
make  ashamed).  Ex.:  Bdkit  mo 
ipinagmamakahiyd  ang  manga  ma- 
gulangf  (What  is  the  reason  you 
cause  so  much  shame  to  your 
parents?)  Wahmg  ]iii/d,  without 
shame,  shameless.  (See  Par.  VI, 
under  ma. ) 

Magmakaamoamb  (from  amb,  idea  of 
placating).  Ex.:  Nagmamakaa- 
moambang  iauotig  ito  sa  inyo  (This 
man  is  supplicating  you).  Amb  is 
generally  reduplicated,  and  it  will 
be  seen  that  mokaanKKunb  is  re- 
garded as  a  new  root,  the  ma  of 
maka  being  reduplicated  for  the 
present  tense. 

XXVIII.  Mag  also  forms  nouns  indicating  plurality,  totality,  and  agency, 
which  have  been  used  many  times  heretofore.  The  article  is  usually  pre- 
fixed to  the  compound  word.  Mag  is  the  antithesis  (or  opposite  in  inean- 
ing)  of  ka,  which  limits  the  idea  to  unity. 

XXIX.  Mag  prefixed  to  noun  roots  which  are  generally  used  with  the 
dual  sense  denotes  such  duality  without  the  use  of  maiTgd  or  other  particles, 
which  rather  indicate  plurality.    Ex. : 


To  be  able  to  placate  another;  to 
supplicate.  (6) 


The  married   couple,  the  husband 

and  wife. 
The  brothers-in-law  (two). 
The  two  enemies. 

The  parents;  ancestors. 


Magasdua,  to  marry, 
XV,  under  man.) 


Aug  magasdua. 

(See  also  Par, 
Ang  magbaydo. 
Ang  magdtoay. 

with  each  other, 
Ang  magulang,  from  gulang.     Kagu 

langan,  ancestry,  descent.    Gumu 

lang,  to  grow  old. 


Magdurty,  to  quarrel 


6855— OS- 


IS 


194  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

The  two  pi?terp-in-]aw.  Ang  maghipag. 

The  betrothed  couple;    the  sweet-    A^ig  magihigan.     Mngihigan,  to  like 
hearts.  each  other.    ( See  next  paragraph . ) 

XXX.  A  root  capable  of  expressing  plurality  is  strictly  limited  to  the 
dual  sense  by  the  insertion  of  ka  between  mag  and  the  root.     Ex.: 

The  two  friends.  Ang  magkaibigan. 

The  two  companions.  Ang  magkasama. 

XXXI.  If  plurality  is  to  be  indicated  with  words  sometimes  used  in  the 
dual  sense,  ka  is  reduplicated.     Ex. : 

The  friends  (several).  Ang  magkakaibigan. 

The  companions  (several).  Ang  magkakasama. 

XXXII.  Correlative  nouns  are  expressed  with  mag  prefixed  to  the  root 
of  the  principal  word.     (See  also  Par.  XVIII.)     Ex.: 

Father  and  child.  Magama. 

Mother  and  child.  Magind. 

Father  (or  mother)  -in-law  and  son  Magbiandn. 

(or  daughter)  -in-law. 

Master  and  man.  Magpanginoon. 

XXXIII.  If  the  second  correlative  is  expressed,  especially  by  a  proper 
noun,  jointly  with  the  first,  the  particle  is  prefixed  to  the  principal,  the 
subordinate  taking  the  genitive  case.     Ex. : 

John  and  his  father.  Magama  ni  Juan. 

Jose  and  his  father-in-law.  Magbianan  ni  Jose. 

Lola  and  her  mother.  Magind  ni  Loleng. 

XXXIY.  J/or/ denotes  totality  with  some  roots  of  time.     Ex.: 

The  whole  night;  all  night.  Magdamag.     Ex.:  Magdamag  akong 

natidog  ( I  slept  all  night).  Gobi  is 
the  usual  word  for  night. 

The  whole  day;  all  day.  Maghapon.     7/i"r;>o?i  alone  means  the 

time  from  noon  until  dark. 

XXXV.  Mag  prefixed  to  roots  conjugated  with  if  m  and  mag  forms  verbal 
nouns  signifying  the  agent.  The  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated 
and  the  article  generally  used.     Ex. : 

Tlie  thief.  Ang magnandkao.     (Already  used.) 

The  laborer.  Ang  magsasaka.     Magsaka,  to  work 

in  the  fields. 

XXXVI.  Mag  retains  pa^  with  the  definite  in  certain  cases,  but  with 
these  exceptions,  which  have  been  pointed  out  from  time  to  time,  the 
definite  of  mag  roots  follows  the  same  rule  as  the  definite  of  um.  (See  Par. 
II,  under  pag.) 

THE   DEFINITE    PARTICLE    "PAG." 

I.  As  true  auxiliary  verbs  are  not  found  in  Tagalog,  the  participle  as- 
sumes as  many  forms  as  there  are  tenses,  the  imperative  excepted.  By 
prefixing  the  article  of  common  nouns,  a7ig,  "the,"  or  a  demonstrative 
pronoun  to  the  proper  tense  of  a  verb  a  particle  is  formed  which  may  be 
translated  in  several  ways,  even  by  a  clause  in  P^nglish. 

Pag  and  pagka  are  commonly  used  in  Tagalog  where  the  idea  would  be 
expressed  in  English  by  the  indefinite  particle,  but  the  best  way  to  obtain 
a  clear  understanding  of  the  variations  to  which  Tagalog  verbal  nouns  may 
be  subjected  is  to  make  a  close  study  of  the  examples  following  or  referred 
to.     Ex. : 

To  die.  Mamatay.      Ang pagkamatay,  the  act 

of  dying. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  195 

To  fall.  Mdhulog.     Ang  pagkahiilog,  the  act 

of  falling. 
To  eat.  Kumain.     Ang  pagkain,  the   act   of 

eating. 

II.  Pag  (definite)  corresponds  to  mag  (definite)  in  certain  cases.  As  a 
rule  verbs  with  mag  have  the  same  definites  as  urn,  except  as  noted.  When 
pag  is  prefixed,  in  is  inserted  for  the  present  and  past  tenses,  forming 
pinag.  Pag  only  is  prefixed  for  the  imperative  and  future  tenses,  in  being 
suffixed  at  the  same  time.  The  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated 
for  the  present  and  future  tenses.      (See  the  tables. ) 

III.  Pag  sometimes  expresses  place  in  combination  with  suffixed  an, 
where  an  alone  is  used  to  express  the  person  who  may  be  the  object  of  the 
action.     (See  ha napan  and  paghanapan,  Par.  V,  the  definite. ) 

(b)  This  rule  also  applies  where  the  object  takes  an  instead  of  in. 

To  collect;  to  dun.  SumirTgil.     Ang  sim/ilan,  the  unpaid 

debt.  Ang  pag  sing  Han,  the  place  of 
asking  for  a  debt.  Maningil,  to 
collect  or  dun  as  an  occupation  or 
habitually. 

IV.  The  particle  pag  is  also  used  with  the  definite  when  place  is  directly 
expressed  in  the  sentence,  but  not  when  implied  or  metaphorically  (fig- 
uratively). This  use  of  ^^a//,  however,  is  only  with  those  verbal  roots  which 
admit  an  for  the  person  or  object  of  the  action  of  the  verb,  and  with  other 
verbal  roots  pag  is  not  used  in  this  sense,  even  if  place  be  expressed.     Ex. : 

To  bury;  inter.  Maghaon.     Angpagbaonan,  the  buri- 

al place.  Ex.:  Ill') ang pinagbaonan 
nang  sundalo  (This  was  the  burial 
place  of  the  soldier). 

To  endure  hardships.  Maghirap.  Angpaghirapan,thehard- 

ships.  Ex. :  Ang  bayang  pinaghi- 
rapan  nild  (The  town  in  which 
they  endured  the  hardships). 

To  place.  Maglagay.     Ex. :  Lagydn    mo    nang 

tubig  itong  bangd  (Put  some  water 
in  this  vase).  Wald  akong pagla- 
lagydn  nitong  salam'm  (There  will 
be  no  place  for  me  to  put  this  mir- 
ror). 

To  embark  or  travel.  Sumakay.     Ang  sakaydn  or  sasakydn, 

boat  or  vessel  of  any  kind.  Ex. : 
Ito'y  ang  baiigkang  pinagsasakydn 
nang  marami  (This  is  the  canoe  in 
which  many  have  embarked). 

{b)  See  also  magpulong,  "  to  assemble, "  andmagtayS,  "toeiect,  set  up." 

V.  Pag  is  also  combined  with  i  definite,  forming  ipag,  ipinag,  as  a  pre- 
fix, when  the  person  for  whom  an  act  is  performed  is  mentioned.  (See 
Par.  VIII,  the  definite.) 

VI.  W  henever  the  sentence  expresses  plurality  of  acts  or  agents,  or  of 
feigning  or  reciprocal  actions,  pag  (and  ipag  when  required)  must  be  used 
with  the  definite.  The  article  ang  being  generally  used,  gives  the  com- 
pound the  idea  of  a  verbal  noun  in  the  majority  of  cases.  For  examples 
see  Par.  IX  under  the  definite. 

VII.  Pag  is  retained  with  the  definite  of  the  mag  form  when  roots 
which  differ  in  meaning  with  um  and  viag  are  used.  See  Par.  X,  the  defi- 
nite for  examples. 

VIII.  The  participle  is  formed  from  um  verbs  or  roots  by  prefixing  pa^ 
to  the  root,  the  compound  preceded  by  the  article  or  its  equivalent.     The 


196  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

lirst  syllable  of  the  root  in  reduplicated  for  mag  vferbs  or  roots.     See  also 
under  ma,  pa,  and  pan  for  other  forms  of  the  participle. 

To  teach.  Umdral.     Ang  pagaral,    the    teach- 

ing. 

To  study.  Magaral.    Ang  pagadral,  the  study- 

ing. 

To  descend;  to  fasten  upon.  Humitlog.      Ang  paghnlog,  the  de- 

scending; fastening  upon. 

To  throw  or  das^h  down.  Maghulog.       Ang    paghnhulog,    the 

dashing  down  or  throwing  down. 

IX.  Pag  sometimes  indicates  tlie  present  tense.  Ex.:  Pagsabi  ko  sa 
kaniyct  (as  soon  as  I  told  him). 

X.  There  is  occasionally  a  tone  of  menace  in  its  use.  Ex.:  Paghindl 
siyd  piimarito' y  hindi  ko  siyd  babayaran  (if  he  does  not  come  here,  I  shall 
not  pay  him).  "If"  is  generally  understood,  the  idea  being  a  future 
condition. 

XI.  Pag,  with  verbal  roots  of  some  kinds,  indicates  action  as  transpiring. 
Ex.: 

Light;  clearness.  Liwdnag.    Ang  pagliwdnag,  the  grow- 

ing light  (of  the  day,  etc.).  Aiig 
Ihrdnag  nang  drao,  the  light  of  day 
or  of  the  sun. 

XII.  For  verbal  changes,  see  tables: 

THE    INDEFINITE    PAKTICLE  "mA." 

I.  The  indefinite  verbalizing  particle  ?na  is  used  with  roots  which  do 
not  require  an  object  when  verbalized,  or  with  those  verbs  expressing 
involuntary  action.  J/a  changes  to  na  for  the  past  and  present  ten.ses. 
Tlie  fir.it  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  for  the  present  and  future 
tenses.  Ma  generally  expresses  a  state  or  condition  of  being,  but  there  is 
also  a  possessive  idea  of  "to  have,"  and  hence  many  roots  are  made 
•adjectives  when  prefixed  by  this  particle,  as  is  already  familiar  to  the 
reader. 

II.  Such  adjectives  in  ma  must  express  intrinsic  states  or  conditions, 
and  states  or  conditions  which  may  or  can  be  attained  by  the  voluntary 
effort  of  an  agent  can  not  be  expressed  with  ina. 

III.  Actions  which  require  an  object  when  conjugated  with  other  parti- 
cles may  be  conjugated  with  ma  if  they  take  place  unconsciously  or  by 
chance  on  the  part  of  the  agent. 

IV.  The  conjugation  of  roots  with  ma  (na)  has  naka  and  maka  of  the 
pluperfect  and  future  perfect  respectively  replaced  by  na  and  ma.  Xa  is 
also  repeated  after  the  verb  in  both  these  tenses.  Some  roots  beginning 
with  p  soften  it  to  m  after  ma.     (See  tables  for  examples.) 

V.  Sga  added  to  ma  forms  the  particles  naiTgd  and  manga  used  to 
express  plurality  when  prefixed  to  a  verbal  root.  MaiTgd,  as  has  been 
seen,  is  the  usual  indication  of  pluraUty  when  used  as  a  separate  word 
before  nouns,  etc.     Ex. : 

To  be  liungry.  Magutum.     Ex.:    Marami    nga    ang 

nangagiUum  (many  were  hungry). 
Marami  wja  ang  nawjagugutum 
(many  are  hungry).  Marami  iTga 
ang  mayTgagagutum  (many  will  be 
hungry).  The  root  is  gutum,  the 
idea  of  ])eing  hungry. 

VI.  Ma  is  used  to  express  actions  of  an  involuntary  nature  or  b'-yond  the 
control  of  the  subject.     A  few  anomalous  words  also  take  ma.     Ex. : 

To  fall.  Mahidog.     Ang  nahulogan,  the  per- 

son or  object  on  whom  anything 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


197 


To  fall  on  the  face. 
To  stumble. 


Toslip;  to  slide  (invol.);   (adj.)  slip- 
pery; slimy. 

To  stick  in  the  throat;  to  choke. 


To  lose  one's  way. 
To  go  astray. 

To  loose;  to  miss;  to  lack. 


To  die. 


To  be  proper  or  appropriate. 


falls  accidentally.  Nahulog  siyd, 
ho  fell.  Aug  kaJmlogan,  the  place 
of  falling.  Ang  kcdndogdn,  the 
meaning  (range  of  expression). 
Ang  kaiahulogan,  the  place  where 
something  fell  or  has  fallen.  Ang 
kinahuhulogan,  the  place  where 
something  is  falling.  Angkahuhu- 
logan,  the  place  where  something 
will  fall.  (See  index  for /(»/0^  with 
other  particleH. ) 

Madapd.     (Already  used.) 

Matisod.  Ex.:  Natisod  siijd'lnadapd 
(he  stumbled  and  fell  on  his  face). 
Saan  natisod  siyu'f  (Where  did 
he  stumble?)  lyang  batung  iydn 
ang  kinatisuran  niyd  (that  stone 
was  where  he  stumbled,  or  over 
which  he  stumbled. 

Madulds;  maridds.  Ex. :  Falakarin 
mo  siydng  marahan  makd  mandds 
(tell  him  to  go  slowly  lest  he  slip). 

Mahirin.  Ex. :  Nahirinan  siyd  nang 
tinik,  (she  [he]  was  choked  by  a 
fish  bone). 

Maligdo.  Aug  kaligaoan,  the  place 
of  being  lost. 

Malihis.  Lumihis,  to  be  away  pur- 
posely. PaliJiis  daan,  to  go  out  of 
the  road  for  any  reason. 

Maic<dd.  Nmcaldn  ako  iiang  lakdn  (I 
lost  [or  lacked]  the  strength). 
Nawaldn  siyd  nang  luoh  (he  lost 
heart  [or  the  spirit]).  Magwald, 
to  get  rid  of;  to  flee;  to  put  out  of 
sight;  to  conceal  anything. 

Mamatay.  Ang  pagkamaiay,  the  act 
of  dying.  Ang  mamataydn,  the 
mourner;  the  bereaved.  (See  Par. 
XII,  in. ) 

Mahdgay.  ( See  index  for  examples. ) 
This  verb  is  rather  anomalous. 


VII.  (rt)  Uncontrollable  states  are  generally  conjugated  with  7?ia.  These 
forms  are  also  adjectives  in  the  majority  of  cases.  (6)  Acts  which  are 
more  or  less  controllable  take  the  particle  most  suitable  to  express  the 
degree.     If  uncontrollable,  ma  is  used.     Ex. : 


To  be  angry. 

To  be  cold;  chilly. 

To  be  terrified. 

To  be  afraid. 

To  be  astonished. 
To  be  hungry. 


Magdlit.     (See  index.) 

Magindo.  Also  adj.  Maginauin,  a 
chilly,  cold  person. 

Magalangtang.  Ang  ikagalangtang, 
the  cause  of  being  terrified. 

Matdkot.  Ex.:  JVatatdkot  kaf  (Are 
you  afraid?)  MataUikotin,  a  faint- 
hearted person.     (See  index. ) 

Magulat.  Ex.:  Nagulatsiyd?  (Was 
he  astonished?) 

Magnturn.  Magugutumin,  a  very 
hungry  or  starved  person.  (See 
index.) 


198 


TAGALUG    LANGUAGE. 


Mahiyu.  Mahihiyin,  a  bashful  per- 
son. (See  Par.  XV,  ma.)  For 
Jiiyd  with  other  particles,  see  index. 

Malugod.  Lnmngod,  to  please;  to 
recreate.  A'a/u^oran,  friend;  com- 
panion in  recreation. 

Malnmbay.  Ex.:  Tila  nalulumbay 
kayo,  you  seem  to  be  sad.  (See 
index.) 

Matua.  Ang  katuaan,  the  person  or 
object  over  whom  or  which  one  is 
pleased  or  amused.     (See  index.) 

Matnlog.  Angtulogun,  sleeping  place. 
Matulog'm,  a  great  sleeper;  also 
mapagti'dog.  Ttimidog,  to  go  to 
sleep;  to  sleep  (little  used).  Mag- 
tulog,  to  sleep  a  great  deal.  (See 
index.) 

Mauhao.     (Already  used.) 

Malangis;  manangis.  (Already used.) 

Mataua.  Tnniaua,  to  laugh,  ^fag- 
taua,  to  laugh  (two  or  three). 
Mangagtaua,  to  laugh  (many). 
Magtaua,  to  laugh  much.  Maka- 
taua  or  niagpataua,  to  cause  to 
laugh.  Matauanin,  a  laughing, 
smiling  person. 

VIII.  Unconscious  or  uncontrollable  states  of  the  mind  are  expressed 
with  ma.  Conscious  or  controllable  states  are  expressed  with  um  or  mag. 
Ex.: 

To  forget.  MaUmot.     (Already  used.) 

To  forget  to  do.  Malisun.     Lnmisan,  to  omit  to  do  (on 

purpose). 

IX.  (rt)  Ma  {na)  is  used  to  express  accidental  or  internal  acts  of  a  de- 
structive nature,  or  when  reference  is  made  to  an  actual  state  of  destruc- 
tion.    Deliberate  acts  of  destruction  take  um  or  mag. 


To  be  ashamed. 


To  be  pleased. 


To  be  sad. 


To  be  glad;  amused. 


To  be  asleep. 


To  be  thirsty. 

To  cry;  to  weep  (uncontrollably). 

To  giggle;  to  laugh  uncontrollably. 


To  break  up;  to  split  up. 


To  break  up  (from  internal  causes 
or  accidentally). 


To  spoil;  to  become  putrid. 


To  break  (int.  or  ace). 


To  part;  to  break  in  two. 


MahaJl.  Ex. :  Nahali  ang  tungkod 
(the  cane  broke).  Nabalkin  siyd 
nang pad  (he  dislocated  his  foot). 
MagbaVi,  to  break  up,  to  split,  as 
wood,  cane,  etc.  Ex. :  Baliin  mo 
iyang  tubu  I  ako'y  baliannang  mimti 
(break  up  that  piece  of  sugar  cane 
and  break  me  off  a  little). 

Mabdsag.  Ex. :  Nabasag  ang  vaso 
(the  glass  was  broken).  Magba- 
sag,  to  shatter;  break  up,  as  glass, 
crockery,  etc.  Nagbamg  siyd  nang 
maraming  vaso  (he  broke  many 
glasses  [purposely]). 

Mabid'ik.  Ex. :  Bulok  na  ang  isdd 
(the  tish  is  spoiled  now)-  (See 
magpa. ) 

Malagot.  Ex.:  Malalagot  itong  sinu- 
lid  ( this  thread  will  break ) .  Nala- 
got  ang  sinulid  (the  thread  broke). 
Maglagot,  to  break,  as  thread;  to 
tear  up,  as  vegetables,  etc. 

Mapaiid.     (Already  used.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


199 


To  spoil;  to  be  destroyed. 
To  burn  up. 
To  dry  out. 


Masini.     (Already  used.) 
Masunog.     (Already  explained.) 
Matuyo.     (See  index. ) 


(/>)  Na  following  the  root  with  verbs  of  destruction  gives  the  adjectival 
idea  with  "already"  or  "now."  Other  actual  states  are  also  expressed 
with  the  root  and  mi  if  the  contex  clearly  indicates  an  actual  state  of  being. 
(See  under    baaag,  buluk,  sird,  patay,  tapus,  luyu,  and  yari  for  examples.) 

X.  With  verbs  expressing  situation  of  posture  ma  (na)  indicates  the 
actual  state  of  being  in  such  posture  or  position,  or  else  the  involuntary  or 
unconscious  taking  of  such  position.     Ex. : 


To  be  lying  down;  to  be  in  bed. 
To  be  on  the  knees;  to   kneel 

voluntarily. 
To  be  lying  on  the  back. 

To  be  on  one's  feet. 

To  be  seated. 


Mall  iff d. 
Maluhod. 

dex.) 
Matihayd. 

dex.) 
Matindig. 

dex.) 
Maupo. 


(Already  used;  see  index. ) 
(Already  used;    see   in- 

( Already  used;    see  in- 

(Already   used;    see   in- 

( Already  used;  see  index. ) 


XI.  Conditions  or  states  reached  by  slow  transition  in  most  cases  or  a 
return  thereto  are  expressed  by  ma  (na). 


To  be  deaf. 

To  be  stuttering. 


To  be  insane;  crazy. 


Mahingi.  Ex. :  NahihiiTgi  siyd  he  is 
deaf).     (See  under  magin.) 

Magaril.  Ex.:  Nagagaril  siyd  (he  ia 
beginning  to  stutter  again ) .  Mag- 
garil,  to  stutter;  to  stammer.  Ga- 
rilin,  stuttering;  stammering. 

Maulul.  Ex.:  Naulul  siyd  (he  went 
crazy ) .  Nauulid siyd  (he  is  crazy ) . 
Mauulul  siyd  (he  will  go  crazy). 
Nagidulidulan  siyd  (he  was  sham- 
ming insanity). 

Malabo.  Also  adj.  turbid;  muddy; 
bleared  (eyes);  thick  (speech). 
Ex. :  Nalaboan  siyd  nang  pagiisip 
(his  mind  became  clouded). 

XII.  The  use  of  ma  is  sometimes  governed  by  reason  of  the  rationality 
or  irrationality  of  the  agent.     Ex.: 

To  be  upright.  Matayu.     (Already  used;  see  index. ) 

XIII.  Mal-a  (naka)  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  ma  (na),  these  parti- 
cles having  many  analogies.     (See  maka,  Par.  XIX.) 

XIV.  Other  uses  of  ma  have  been  explained  under  the  adjective,  q.  v. 

XV.  Jl/rt  prefixed  and  in  (fiin,  nin)  suffixed  to  roots  signifying  mental 
emotions,  passions,  and  involuntary  actions  form  adjectival  nouns,  which 
generally  require  to  be  exjiressed  in  English  by  an  adjective  and  a  noun. 
Ex.: 


To  lose  the  mind  (lit.,  to  become 
turbid). 


A  humane  person. 
An  irascible  person. 
A  loving  person. 
An  affectionate  person. 

A  loving  person. 

An  obedient  person. 

A  weeper;  a  weeping  person. 

A  smiling  person. 

A  sleepy  person. 

An  affectionate  person. 


Maaiiain  (irom  and).     (See  index.) 
Magalitin  (irora.  gdlit,  wrath;  ire). 
Maibigin  (from  ibig).     (See  index.) 
Mairogin  (from  irog,   affection;  ca- 
ressing). 
Masintahin  (from  sintd,  love). 
Masnnorin  (from  sunod). 
MataiTgisin  (from  tam/is). 
Matauanin  (from  taua). 
MatuJogin  (from  tdlog). 
Mawilihin  (from  wili,  affection). 


200 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


XVI.  If  the  root  admits  of  fontraction,  begins  with  /,  or  an  intensive 
degree  is  expressed,  the  first  syilaVjle  of  the  root  may  be  reduplicated. 
Ex.: 


A  bashful  i)erson. 
A  feverish  person. 
A  forgetful  person. 
A  joyful  person. 
An  infirm,  sick  person. 
A  faint-hearted  person. 


Mahild'in  (from  hiyd).  (Root  con- 
tracts. ) 

Mdlnlagvnlin  (from  la(/7iut,  fever). 
(L.  root.) 

Malilimotin  (from  Umot,  forgetful- 
ness).     (L.  root.) 

Malulugdin  (from  lugo<l,  joy;  pleas- 
ure).    (L.  root.) 

Mas(isakt'm  (from  sakit).  (Con- 
tracted root. ) 

Malatakotin  (from  iakol).  (Intensive 
degree. ) 


THE    DEFINITE    PARTICLES        MA        AND        KA. 

I.  From  the  fact  that  ma  verbs  do  not  generally  require  an  object,  there 
is  little  use  for  some  forms  of  the  definite.  Every  action,  however,  may 
have  a  reason,  time,  or  place,  and  thus  i  definite  and  an  definite  are  to  l)e 
found,  ma  being  replaced  by  ka  as  a  rule,  and  always  with  i  definite. 

Ka an,  as  has  been  seen,  forms  abstracts  and  places,  as  well  as  standing 

for  persons  and  objects  of  the  action.     Ex. : 


To  be  glad;  amused. 


To  die. 
To  1)6  afraid. 
To  stuml^le. 
To  be  deaf. 

To  be  blind. 


To  be  poor. 


To  be  ruined  (as  in  Imsiness). 


To  be  lame. 

To  faint  away;  to  swoon. 


To  drop  off;  to  drop  something  ac- 
cidentally. 


Matua.  Aug  kaluaan,  the  person  or 
object  over  which  one  is  glad,  etc. 
A)ig  ikutnd,  the  cause  of  gladness 
or  amusement.  Ex. :  Katuaan  mo 
aiig  viamjd  hath  (amuse  yourself 
with  the  children).  Kuiatuaan 
niyd  any  maiTga  butd  (she  amused 
herself  with  the  children).  Kina- 
tuluaan  riihi  nng  mamia  hath  (they 
are  amusing  themselves  with  the 
children).  Katutuaan  ko  ang 
mauga  hata  (I  will  amuse  myself 
with  the  children). 

Mamalay.     (8ee  index.) 

Matakot.     (See  index.) 

Matisod.     (See  index.) 

MahliTgi.  Aug  ikabiiu/i,  the  cause  of 
deafness.     KabiiTyihan,  deafness. 

Mabulag.  Ex.:  Nahulagansiydnang 
ydlil  (he  was  blinded  by  wrath). 
Kahnlagan,  blindness. 

Madukhu.  Ang  ikadiikltd,  the  cause 
of  poverty.  KadukJtaan,  poverty. 
Dumukhd,  to  become  poor.  Ang 
dukhain,  the  person  becoming 
poor  thus.     (See  index.) 

Maliigi.  Ang  ikaliigi,  the  cause  of 
being  ruined.  Lumnyi,  to  decline 
(as  from  age  or  natural  causes). 

MapUay.  Ang  ikapihjy,  the  cause  of 
lameness.     KapUayun,  lameness. 

Mahilo.  Ex.:  Xahi/u  i^i yd  {ahe  fainted 
away).  Nahihilu  siyd  (she  is  faint- 
ing away ).  Ang  kah  ilnan,  the  place. 

Malaglag.  Ang  kalaglagan,  the  place 
of  dropping.     Ang  ikalaghig,   the 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  201 

cause.  Maglaglay,  to  drop  some- 
thing purposely.  Ang  Ua(jl<tg,\\hsit 
dropped.  Ang  laglagan,  the  place 
or  the  person  to  whom  dropped. 
Lumaglag,  to  drop  down  pur- 
posely. Ang  luglagin,  the  person 
thus  dropping  down. 

To  be  drowned.  Mah'mod.   .hi^A-o/wnorcni,  the  drown- 

ing place;  hence  the  we^t,  "the 
drowning  place  of  the  sun." 

To  be  tired  out.  Mapdgod.     Ang  ikapdgod,  the  cause. 

Ex.:  Ann  ang  ikinnpapdgod  mof 
(Why  are  you  tired  out?  [Lit., 
"  What  is  the  cause  of  your  being 
tired  out?"] ).  Syn.  palcang.  The 
word  ugod  means  great  weakness, 
and  looks  as  if  it  were  a  variation. 

To  be  included;  to  be  contained.  MasalJiio.    Aug  kasakianan,  the  \)\&ce 

where  contained.  Ex. :  Aug  manga 
utos  nang  Jiokho' g  kinasasaklaiian 
ititong  lihrong  ito  (the  orders  [reg- 
ulations] of  the  army  are  con- 
tained in  this  book). 

To  be  finished;  also  concluded  and  ^fautds.  Var.  liitds.  Maglutds,  to 
extinguished.  finish  or  conclude  anything.  Mag- 

kaluiaslutds,  to  finish  completely. 
Ang  kalutasan,  the  place. 

II.  Ka  is  omitted  with  an  when  the  person  affected  is  meant,  and  not 
the  place  or  deliberate  act.  See  mahirin,  mamatay,  and  mavulA  for 
examples. 

III.  Pagka  is  generally  used  to  form  verbal  nouns  for  roots  conjugated 
by  ma,  although  jjag  may  be  used  with  some  roots  and  pagkaka  is  occasion- 
ally found.  Ex.:  Ang  pagkati'dog  or  ang  pagtidog,  the  act  of  sleeping. 
(See  tulog.) 

THE    INDEFINITE    VERBALIZING    PARTICLE   "mAN." 

I.  This  particle,  known  as  the  third  to  Spanish  writers  on  Tagalog,  has 
pan  for  the  definite  and  is  one  of  the  most  important  of  the  modifying 
verbal  particles.     It  admits  //;,  /,  and  an  with  the  definite. 

II.  The  great  attention  paid  by  Tagalog  to  euphony  or  smoothness  in 
sounds  is  well  illustrated  by  the  changes  demanded  of  the  initial  letter  of 
a  root  when  man  (pa)))  is  prefixed.  This  grammatical  peculiarity  is  found 
most  fully  developed  in  western  languages,  in  Irish  and  Scottish  Gaelic,  in 
which  it  is  known  as  "ellipsis."  English  has  this  tendency  to  a  slight 
degree,  as  shown  by  a,  an,  according  to  a  following  vowel  or  consonant 
sound. 

III.  When  preceded  by  man  the  following  changes  take  place  in  initial 
latters  of  roots,  the  final  n  of  the  particle  being  either  dropped  or  modified. 

B  and  P  to  M. 

K  (and  hard  Cor  Q)  to  Ng. 

S,  T,  and  i> ^generally)  to  K 

M,  N,  and  Xg  cause  final  n  to  drop  out. 

A,  I,  0,  U inod'iiy  n  to  )Tfj. 

IV.  Man  has  nan  for  the  present  and  past  tenses,  the  first  syllable  of  the 
root  being  reduplicated  for  the  present  and  future  tenses.  There  is  a  I  and 
a  II  pluperfect  tense,  the  former  adding  na  to  the  past  tense  and  the 
latter  prefixing  naka  to  the  root.  The  future  perfect  has  also  two  forms, 
the  first  formed  by  adding  na.  to  the  future  tense,  and  the  second  by  prefix- 
ing maka  to  the  root.     The  present  particijile  (verbal  infinitive)  is  formed 


202 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


by  prefixing  pan  to  the  root,  the  first  syllable  of  which  is  reduplicated. 
The  use  of  the  definite  particles  in,  i,  and  an  follows  the  general  rule. 


To  ridicule;  mock;  scoff;  hoax;  abuse, 
etc. 


Manlibak.  Aug  llbakin,  what  or 
whom  ridiculed,  abused,  etc.  Aug 
libakxm;  also  ao)g  mapagllbak,  the 
scoffer,  hoaxer,  mocker,  etc.  For 
indef.  with  man  see  tables.  Ex. : 
Baku  ka  nanlilibak  sa  kaibigan  mof 
(Why  are  you  ridiculing  your 
friend?)  Syns.  Uroy;  uyam,uyao, 
and  tlyan. 

Mamigay  (from  bigay).  For  definite 
with  i  see  index,  also  the  tables. 

Mamil'i  ( from  bil'i).  For  definite  with 
in  see  tables. 

Mandiri.  For  definite  with  han  see 
tables. 

V.  Man  is  used  to  express  plurality  of  acts  rather  than  of  persons  with 
those  roots  which  denote  the  simple  action  with  um  or  mag.  With  some 
roots  of  colors  man  denotes  intensity,  and  with  some  other  roots  indicates 
continuousness.  It  is  essential  for  these  ideas  that  the  meaning  shall  not 
be  changed  by  man  from  what  it  is  with  uvi  or  mag. 

Ex.  (B  roots): 


To  give  much;  to  lavish. 

To  buy  much. 

To  be  nauseated  or  disgusted. 


To  divide  up  among  others. 


To  habituate;  to  accustom. 


To  pull  up  continually  or  continu- 
ously. 

Ex.   (Droot): 
To  pray  constantly. 

Ex.   (G  roots): 
To  imitate  much  or  habitually. 

To  mix  habitually  (as  a  druggist). 


3Iamahagi  {from  bahagi).  Ex.:  Ano 
kai/a  ang  ipinamamahagi  mof 
(What  are  you  dividing  up?)  Ang 
ipinamamahagi  ko^y  naaalaman 
nang  maiTgd  piiiamama  haginan  ko 
(What  I  am  dividing  up  is  known 
to  those  for  whom  I  am  dividing). 

Mamihasa  (from  bihasa).  Ex.: 
Houag  kang  mamihasang  mamintds 
sa  ma)7gd  kapidbdhay  mo  (Do  not 
accustom  yourself  to  complaining 
about  your  neighbors). 

Mamunot  (from  bunot).  Bumunot,  to 
pull  up.  Magbunot,  to  pull  up 
much. 


Manaldngin  (from  daldngin). 
dex. 


See  in- 


To  clear  off  (as  land). 


Mangagad.  Gumagad,  to  imitate. 
Maggagad,  to  imitate  (many). 

Mangamao.  Ang  pangamauin,  what 
so  mixed.  Ang  ipangamdo,  what 
used  to  mix  with  thus.  Ang  pan- 
gamaudn,  the  place  of  habitual 
mixing.  Gunianido,  to  mix.  Ang 
gamanin,  what  mixed.  Ang  ig- 
amdo,  what  added  or  the  instru- 
ment used  to  mix  with.  Ang 
gamauan,  the  place;  the  mortar; 
dish,  etc.  Maggamdo,  to  mix 
much.  Ang  paggamauin,  what 
mixed  much.  Aiig  ipaggamdo,  the 
instrument  thus.  Ang  pagga- 
maudn,  the  place  of  much  mixing. 

Gumamas.  Ang  gamasin,  what 
cleared    off.     Ang    gamasan,    the 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


203 


To  reap;  to  cut  rice. 


To    quarrel     with;     to     reprimand 
lo'udly. 


To  cut  down  underbrush;  to  clear 
off  land;  also  to  speak  freely. 


To  thresh  (by  many). 

Ex.  (H  roots): 

To  scout. 

To  sow  much  rice;  or  by  many. 
To  wash  one's  face  (habitually). 
To  predict  habitually. 


Ex.  (I  roots): 

To  like  (many);  also  to  flirt. 
To  avoid  entirely. 

Ex.  (K  roots): 

To  devour;  to  eat  continually. 
To  take  habitually. 
To  cling  to  with  hands  and  feet  (as 
a  monkey  does). 


To  nibble  much;  to  bite  with  the 

front  teeth . 
To  tremble  much  or  frequently  with 

cold  or  fear. 
To  break  off  (as  flowers  or  fruit)  as 

an  occupation. 


Ex.   (P  roots): 

To  pluck  or  break  off  much;  or  by 
many. 


land  cleared  off.  Maggamds,  to 
clear  off  (l)y  many).  Mangamas, 
to  clear  off  much.  Ang  panga- 
masan,  the  land  thus  cleared. 

Gumapas.  A ng  gapasin,  what  reaped. 
Ang  gapasan,  the  field.  Aug  gin- 
apasan,  the  stubble  left.  Magga- 
pds,  to  cut  or  reap  much.  Maii- 
gapas,  to  cut  or  reap  (many). 
Ang  pangapas,  the  sickle.  Ang 
mangagapas,  the  reaper,  harvester 
(person). 

(rnmasci.  Ang  gasaan,  the  person  so 
quarreled  with  or  reprimanded. 
Maggasd,  to  quarrel  with  nrnch,  or 
to  reprimand  much  or  many. 
Mangasd,  to  quarrel  with  or  to 
reprimand  habitually. 

Gumasak.  Ang  gasakin,  what  clear- 
ed, i.  e.,  the  underbrush.  Ang 
gasakan,  the  place.  Ang  gasakin 
is  also  the  person  spoken  to  freely. 
Mangasak,  same  actions  as  fore- 
going by  many. 

Mangiik.     (See  index:  giik.) 


Manhdnap.     (See  index:  hdnap.) 
Manhasik.     (See  index:  hasik.) 
Manhilamos.     (See  index:  hilamos.) 
Manhuld.      Ang  manhuhuld,  the 
prophet;  soothsayer.     Humuld,  to 
predict;     foretell.        Ang    hnlain, 
what  foretold.     Ang  hulaan,  the 
person  to  whom  told. 


Mangibig. 
Mangilag. 


(See  ibig.) 
(See  Hag.) 


Mangain.     (See  kain.) 

Ma iTguh a.     {i^ee  kidut.) 

Mangnydpit  (from  kuydpit).  Ang 
paiTguyap'dan,  what  clung  to,  i.  e., 
tree,  etc.  Kumdydpit,  to  grasp 
thus.  Ang  ikuydpit,  what  with, 
i.  e.,  the  hands,  feet,  etc.  No  old- 
world  monkeys  have  a  tail  which 
can  be  used  for  grasping,  the  Phil- 
ippine Islands  species  included. 

MatHjibit  (from  kibit).  Kumibit,  to 
nibble. 

Manginyig  (from  kinyig).    See  index. 

Mangitil  (from  kitil).  KumiiU,  the 
simple  action.  MagkitU,  to  break 
off  thus  much.  Syn. :  Puti;  and 
see  also  pdtol. 

Mamitds  {irom  pitds).     See  index. 


204 


TAGALOG    LAKGUAGE. 


To  break  off.  (by  many);  to  gather 
habitually  (as  flowers  or  fruit). 


To  whiten  intensely. 
To  grow  very  pale. 


To  cut  up  (as  cloth). 

Ex.  (S  roots): 

To  disperse;  also  to  scatter  much  in 

the  air. 
To  bite  much  (as  a  mosquito). 


To  destroy  completely. 
To  curse  habitually. 

Ex.  (T  roots): 

To  peck  much  (as  a  bird). 


Mamnii  (from  jnUi).  Punntii,  to 
break  off.  Maf/'puli,  to  break  off 
much.  ManujiKjinitl,  to  break  off 
(by  many).  Syn. :  Kilil;  and  see 
putol.  Ang  pulihin,  what  broken 
off.  Ang  pagputihnn,  the  branch 
from  which  much  is  broken  off. 

Mainnti  {iromputt).     See  index. 

Mumutld  (from  puild).  See  adjec- 
tive. Pnmutld,  to  grow  pale. 
Putlain,  a  person  who  is  always 
pale;  pallid.  Maputld,  a  person 
who  may  become  pale  or  pallid. 
Kaputlaan,  pallor.  Makaputld,  to 
cause  pallor. 

Mamutol  (already  used. )  See  index. 
PiitoL 


Manamhulat  (from  sambidat).  See 
index. 

Manigid.  Ang  sigdin,  the  person, 
etc.,  bitten.  Ang  jxtgsigddn,  the 
place.  Surnigid,  to  bite  (as  one 
mosquito).  Masigkl,  to  be  bitten. 
Ex.:  Naninigid  ang  maiTj/a  hnnok 
(the  mosquitoes  are  biting  hard  [in 
plenty]). 

Manird  (from  sird).     See  index. 

Manumpd  (iromsumpd).    See  index. 


Manuhl  (from  tuM).     See  index. 
To  tempt  habitually.  Manukm  (from  tukso).     See  index. 

VI.  With  roots  which  admit  of  the  idea  of  making  a  living  by  exercis- 
ing the  acts  denoted  by  the  roots,  mem  expresses  the  idea  of  an  occupation, 
trade,  or  profession.     Ex. : 


To  preach. 


To  care  for. 


To  practice  medicine. 
To  milk  (as  occupation). 


Maw/dral  (from  dral).  Ang  maiuj- 
angaral,  the  preacher,  but  ang 
inamjadral,  the  master  or  teacher 
(of  a  doctrine,  etc. ).  Ang  ipanga- 
ral,  what  preached.  Ang  ipi- 
namjadrai,  what  is  being  preached ; 
the  subject  of  the  sermon.  Ang 
pinaiTi/aiujaraldn,  the  persona  being 
preached  to  (the  congregation)  or 
the  pulpit.     (See  index  for  omL) 

Mamahald,  (from  bahald).  This  word 
is  from  Sansk.  bhara,  the  root  of 
the  English  "to  bear,"  Lat.  ferre. 
Kayo  bahald,  p6  (you  take  care, 
sir  [i.  e.,  pay  what  you  like]). 
Siiio  ang  naniainaJiald  sa  bdhagf 
(Who  is  taking  care  of  the  house?) 
Si  Juan  (.luan). 

Mang(niiot{lvo\\\  gamot).     See  index. 

Mangatas  (from  gntas).  Ang  nanga- 
gntai^,  the  milkman  (or  maid). 
Gtuiudaa,  to  milk  (occasionally). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


205 


To  cook  or  do  anything  habitually 

To  live  by  robbery. 

To  sew  nipa  (for  a  living) . 


To  collect  bills  (as  an  occupation) 
To  dive  (as  an  occupation). 
To  write  (as  an  occupation). 
To  spin  (as  an  occupation). 


To  sew  (as  a  tailor). 
To  go  first;  to  guide. 

YII.  Some  roots  with  man  have 
exjiressed  bv  the  verbalized  root 
Ex.: 

To  advance,  clinging  to  something. 


Macjarni.     (See  index;  grm/.vl) 
Manhnl'i  (from  ladi).     See  index. 
Munauid  {horn  pi'ndd).     Ex.:    And 

ang  (finacjawd  nbujo  diydnf  (What 

are  you  doing  there?)  Kaitii'y  va- 

mamduid  (we  are  stitching  nipa 

[thatch]). 
Manimjil  (from  simjil).     See  index. 
Manisid  (from  sisid).     See  index. 
Manidat  (from  salat).     See  index. 
Manulid  (from  siVld).     Aug  manu- 

nulid, thespinner.   iSinuUd, thread; 

anything  spun.     Sumidid,  to  spin 

(simple  act). 
M(in(dit  (from  tahi).     See  index.- 
MuiTgima  (from  una).     See  index. 

the  idea  of  running  around  doing  the  act 
going  about  in  a  certain  manner,  etc. 


MaiTgapit  (from  h'lph).  This  verb 
would  be  used  if  bamboo  rail,  etc., 
was  clung  to  crossing  a  bridge,  etc. 
Kiimdpit,  to  cling  to;  to  support; 
to  hold  up  from  falling. 
To  run  around  biting  (as  a  vicious     Mangagat  (from  kagat).     See  index. 

dog). 
To  go  about  sadly  and  mournfully.       Mangulila  (from  ulUa,  an  orphan). 

VIII.  Man,  with  roots  denoting  animals  or  birds,  expresses  their  chase; 
with  roots  meaning  fish,  etc.,  their  seeking,  and  with  other  animal  or 
vegetable  names,  the  gathering  of  what  is  denoted  by  the  root.  The  idea 
is  generally  that  of  an  occupation  or  habitual  engagement  in  such  hunting, 
fishing,  gathering,  etc.     Ex. : 

To  gather    the  rattan   called    "bil-    Mamaging.     This  is  a  species  of  ivy. 

ging." 
To  hunt  or  catch  birds. 


To  catch  fish;  to  fish  for  a  living. 
To  cut  or  gather  wood. 


To  gather  tortoise  shell. 

To   gather   nacre   or  "kapis" 
shells  used  in  windows). 


To  gather  rattans  (oejuco). 

To  hunt  tortoises. 

To     gather    "  pajos"     (a    kind    of 

mango). 
To  hunt  frogs. 


To  gather  the  rattan  called 

san." 
To  gather  ])alm  leaves. 


Mangibon    (from     ibon).      Ebon    is 

"egg"  in  Pampangan. 
MaiTgv^dd.     (See  index  fsdt:?.) 
Mangdhoy  (from    kdhoy).     KakaJio- 

yan,  woodland,      (ruftai  is  "forest; 

timber,  etc." 
MaiTgala  (from  kala).     Mangangaln, 

tortoise-shell  hunter.     Magkala,  to 

sell  tortoise  shell, 
(the     Ma)7gapis  (from  kapls).      Magkapls, 

to  sell   nacre.      Aug  kapisin,   the 

nacre.      A7ig   kapisan,    the    place 

used,  i.  e.,  the  window. 
Mangioay  (from  vxty). 
Mamagong  (from  pagong). 
Mamaho.     Magpaho,  to  deal  in  "pa- 
jos." 
Muiiudakd  (from  palakd,  frog;  syn: 

Kabkab). 
'pala-     Mamalasan.        Kapalasanan,     place 

where  the  palasan  is  found. 
Mamalaapds  (from  palaspas,   "palm 

leaf").      Magpalaspas,    to    adorn 

with  palm  leaves. 


206 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  fish  for  eels. 
To  hunt  sea  turtles. 

To  gather  or  hunt  for  honey. 


To  gather  oysters. 
To  hunt  deer. 


Mainuli'js  {irova  palos,  eel). 

Mamawikan  (from  pawikan,  sea  tur- 
tle). 

Mamulot  (from  pulot,  honey).  Man- 
pxdot,  to  buy  honey.  Magpulot 
(1)  to  make  honey;  (2)  to  deal  in 
honey.  Ang  pulotin,  the  honey 
made.  Pinulotan,  what  has  been 
made  from  honey  (from  pulutdn, 
sweets  made  of  honey).  Pulotin 
is  also  a  term  of  endearment.  Ex. 
with  an:  llouag  mo  akong  pulotan 
( Don' t flatter  ( honey )  me ) .  Pulot- 
guid,  honey  and  cocoanut  milk. 

Manalabd  (from  talaba).  Katalaba- 
han,  oyster  bed. 

Mangusa  (from  usa,  deer). 


IX.  Similarly  any  instrument,  weapon,  utensil,  or  animal  which  can  be 
so  used  is  verbalized  with  the  idea  of  hunting,  fishing  for,  or  catching  by 
man.     Ex. : 


To  hunt  with  dogs  or  hounds. 
To  hunt  with  or  to  use  a  gun. 


To  fish  with  a  hook. 

To  fish  with  a  small  hook. 


To  fish  or  hunt  with  a  light. 


(from     a^o,     dog).      See 


haril,   a    shotgun). 
Aug  mamamaril, 


To  use  or  hunt  with  a  spear  called 

"kaliiwit." 
To  fish  with  the  hook. 

To  fish  with  a  seine. 

To  fish  with  anything  that  may  be 

used  to  catch  fish. 
To  seine  M-ith  the  large  net  called 

"pangtf." 
To  seine  with  the  net  called  "piikot." 
To  fish  with  rod,  line,  and  hook. 


Mangaso 
index. 

Mamaril   (from 
Malay,    bad'il. 
the  hunter. 

Maminuit  (from  binidt).     See  index. 

J/omm'«s  ( f rom  biwas).  This  means 
to  use  a  rod  and  line.  Bumiwas, 
to  lift  the  hook  by  the  line.  Mag- 
biwas,  to  do  this  much.  Ako'y 
mamimm-as  (I  am  going  fishing 
with  a  rod  and  Une). 

IfaiTijdao  (from  dao,  a  light).  Ex.: 
MniTgiiTjplao  ka  baga  f  (Are  you 
going  fishing  with  a  light?)  06 
(Yes).  Al'ing  bukid  ang  pinang- 
ingUauan  mof  (In  wliich  field 
are  you  going  to  fish  with  a  light?) 
lyang  bukid  igang  malayo  sa  manga 
hdhag  (In  that  field  over  there  far 
away  from  the  houses).  VmHao, 
to  light  up.  Magdao,  to  carry  a 
light.  Ayig  ilauan,  the  lamp  or 
place  of  light. 

Mangalawit. 

Manlambang       (from       lambang,     a 

hook). 
Manlambat.     See  index:  lambal. 
Mumalakaya  (from  palakaya).     Pu- 

malakaya,  to  fish  occasionally. 
MatnangCi. 

Mamukot. 

Maniit  (from  s'dt,  a  thorn  or  hook). 

Magsiil,  to  make  anything  out  of 

thorns  or  liooks;  to  make  abbatis. 

Syn.,  tiriik.     Tinik  also  means  fish 

bone. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


207 


X.  With  roots  denoting  arms,  tools,  or  instruments  man  indicates  the 
habitual  use  or  wearing  of  the  arms  and  the  constant  use  of  tools  or  instru- 
ments.    Ex. : 


Mangiwa  (from  iwa).     See  index. 
Mardilik  (from  lilik,  sickle). 
Mamalukol     (from     palakol,     axe). 

Magpalakol,  to  have  an  axe. 
Manandata     (from     sandatn,     arm, 

weapon).      Magsandala,    to    bear 

arms.      Aug    suiidatahan,    armed 

forces;  levy  en  masse. 
Manumpit  (from  siDiipii). 
Manundang  (from  sundang,  knife). 

Magsundang,  to  carry  a  knife. 
Mannbak.     Magtubak,  to  wear  a  war 

bolo.      Tumabak,  to  cut  off  with  a 

war  bolo. 

XI.  With  roots  denoting  certain  places  man  indicates  the  living  in  such 
places,  earning  the  living  from  the  products  thereof,  or  traveling  in  such 
localitv.     Ex. : 


To  use  a  dagger. 
To  use  a  sickle. 
To  use  an  axe. 

To  use  arms. 


To  use  a  syringe. 
To  use  a  knife. 


To  use  a  "war  bolo"  (tabak). 


To  live  (general  idea). 


To  dwell  in  a  house. 


To  live  in  town. 


To  live  in  the  mountains;  to  wander 
there;  to  gain  a  living  from  the 
products  thereof. 


To  live  in  the  open  country. 
To  lead    a  seafaring  life;   to 
deep-sea  fisher. 


be  a 


To  live  in  the  timber;  to  lay  the 
timber  waste;  to  wander  in  the 
woods;  to  live  by  wood  chopping, 
etc. 


To  travel  or  live  on  the  bank  of  a 
river  or  the  seacoast. 


Mamuhay  (from  buhay).  Idea  is  to 
reside,  etc.  Magbuhay,  to  live. 
Bumuhay,  to  give  life  to.  Buhay, 
alive;  living. 

Mamdhay  (from  bdhay).  See  in- 
dex. Ex. :  Saan  kayo  nainamayanf 
(  Where  do  you  live?)  Ang  bdhay 
ko,  p6,  dito  sa  bayang  ito  ( My  house, 
sir,  is  here  in  this  town). 

Mamayan  ( from  bayan).  Kababayan, 
fellow-townsman,  also  country- 
man. Magbayan,  (1)  to  look  for 
a  town  site;  (2)  to  found  or  build  a 
town;  (3)  to  apportion  by  towns 
and  not  by  inhabitants.  Bay  an 
also  means  space  between  earth 
and  sky,  day  (rare),  and  weather 
( rare ) . 

Mamundok  (from  bundok).  This 
word  may  also  mean  to  travel  in  the 
mountains.  Taga  bundok,  moun- 
taineer; sometimes  used  insult- 
ingly, as  "hayseed,"  in  English. 

Mamukkl  (from  bukid,  "field"). 

Managat  (from  dagat,  "sea").  Man- 
andgat,  sailor  or  deep-sea  fisher. 
Also  taga  ragat;  tauong  dumdgat. 
Magddgat,  to  travel  by  sea.  Du- 
mdgat, to  flood  the  land. 

Mangnbat  {irom  gubat,  "tunber;  for- 
est"). Ang  ipangubat,  yvha.t  car- 
ried in  the  timber;  or  the  cause  of 
wandering,  etc.  Ang  pangxdjatan, 
the  place  of  working,  devastating, 
wandering,  etc.,  in  the  forest. 
Gumubat,  to  become  a  forest. 
Gubatan,  timber  land  or  forested 
country. 

Manlambay  (from  lambay).  Mag- 
lambay,  to  carry  anything  to  coast 


208  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

or  bank.  Luniamhay,  to  go  to  or 
along  the  bank  or  coast  (single 
act). 

XIJ .  With  roots  denoting  certain  articles  of  wearing  apparel  man  indi- 
cates their  habitual  use  or  wearing.     Ex. : 

To  wear  a  shirt  habitually.  Mamuro  (from   baro).      See  index. 

See  also  sambalilo,  hat;  sap'in, 
shoe;  and  tajyis,  apron. 

XIII.  With  roots  denoting  vehicles,  boats,  or  other  means  of  artificial 
locomotion,  man  signifies  to  travel  by  what  is  denoted  by  the  root.     Ex.: 

To  travel  by  canoe.  Mamangkd.     Ex.;   Hang  arao  bang- 

Team  mula  dito  haiigan  Mayn'ddf 
( How  many  days  by  banka  [canoe] 
from  here  to  Manila?)  Maghajwn 
kayang  bangkain  (Perhaps  all  of 
one  day  by  banka). 

To  travel  on  horseback.  Maiigabago  (from  cabayu,  "  horse"). 

To  travel  by  ' '  quilez. ' '  MangUes  (from  kiles,  a  vehicle  named 

from  Guillermo  Quilez,  of  Vigan, 
Ilocos  Sur,  who  suggested  it  to  his 
carriage  maker,  a  native  of  Yigan). 

XIV.  Man  also  denotes  self-sui^porting  and  slowly  developing  actions 
from  within  such  as  the  growth  of  flowers,  fruit,  etc.  Many  roots  com- 
mencing with  b,  which  would  otherwise  be  conjugated  with  uin,  take  man 
for  euphonic  reasons.      (See  nm,  Par.  VII.)     Ex.: 

To  sprout;  to  put  forth  shoots  (as  Manlabong  (from  labong).  Also 
the  bamboo).  luriiabong.      Maglabong,    to    have 

shoots. 

To  open  (as  a  flower).  Mamukadkad  (from  bukadkad).  Vis- 

ayan,  bukad. 

To  bloom;  to  blossom  (as  a  flower).     Mamuluklak  (from  bulaklak,  flower). 

Visayan,  burak;  also  applied  to 
the  ilangilang.  Ex. :  Namumidak- 
lak  ang manga  halaman  (the  plants 
are  blooming). 

To  bear  fruit.  Mamitmja  {horn  bunga,  irait).     Ex.: 

NamumwTga  na  ang  manga  kcthoy 
(the  trees  are  already  bearing 
fruit). 

To  bear  fruit;  to  be  full  of  fruit.  Mamumksak  {irom  busaksak).     Ex.: 

Namtunusaksak  ifong  punonglukban 
(this  lukban  tree  is  full  of  fruit). 

XY.  Some  roots  have  differing  meanings  with  um,  mag,  and  man.  In 
some  cases  the  variation  is  great,  but  in  others  little  or  none.  Maii,  how- 
ever, looks  to  the  effect  or  result  more  than  to  the  simple  action,  which  is 
expressed  by  um  or  mag.  The  examples  will  best  show  these  differences 
and  resemblances.     Ex. : 

Words  differing  in  each  case: 

To  teach.  Umdral.    Magdral,  to  study.    MangA- 

ral,  to  preach.  (See  index:  dral; 
also  talo  and  sahunin.) 

Words  agreeing  with  um  (if  used)  and  man;  but  differing  with  mag: 

To  intrude  or  steal  in.  Dumikit;  manikit.     Magdikit,  to  fas- 

ten; to  paste  together. 

To  throw  a  lasso  or  rope.  Snmild.     Manilo,  to  lasso;    to  rope; 

to  ensnare.  Magsilo,  to  make  a 
lasso  or  snare. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


209 


To  drag  along;  to  arrest. 

To  shake  (as  a  tree  to  get  the  fruit). 


Words  agreeing  with  ton  and  man,  mag  being  Httle  used: 

To  a(hnire;  to  *vonder  at.  Gumilalas;  mang'dalas.     Ex.:    Ahing 

pinangigilalasan  ang  kunkUan  nang 
mamjd  bituin  sa  latTijit  (I  admire 
[my  admiration  is]  the  beauty  of 
the  stars  in  the  sky). 
Jlumik't;  manhilu.  (See index:  hila.) 
Lumoglog;  mavloglog.  (See  also  in- 
dex for  libak,  idea  of  ridicuhng, 

Words  differing  witli  um  and  man,  mag  being  httle  used: 

To  afflict.  Dumaig    (from   daig).     Manaig,    to 

overcome;  to  surpass;  to  vanquish. 

To  kill.  Pumatay.     Mamatay,   to   die.      (See 

index:  patay.) 

XVI.  Some  few  words  which  do  not  admit  of  frequency  have  the  simple 
idea  with  man.  Others  are  generally  used  with  the  particle  in  a  seemingly 
arl)itrary  manner.     Ex. : 

To  bear  a  child.  MaiTganak 

To  die.  Mamatay. 

The  following  are  arbitrary: 

To  allow  light  to  pass  (as  glass  or 

anything  transparent). 
To  feel  nauseated. 
To  have;  to  possess. 
To  originate  from;  to  come  from;  to 

descend  from :  to  arise. 


To  look  at  wrathfuUv, 


To  lind  fault  with;  to  complain  of. 


Manganinag.  Maaninag,  transpar- 
ent (from  aninog). 

Mandiri  (from  diri). 

Mandoo)!  (iromdoon).     (See index). 

Mangdling.  Ang  pinangalingan,  the 
place  or  source  of  rising;  origin; 
etc.  Ang  galing  na  drao,  the  sun- 
rise. Galing  is  the  idea  of  doing 
good.     (See  index.) 

Manlisik.  Ex.:  Naydilldk  ang  matd 
nang  poot  narilat  (fixing  the  eyes 
wide  with  anger). 

Mamintds {trom pintdf:).  Ex.:  IJindi 
mo  hagd  alam  na  mahdlay  ang  pam- 
imintds  sa  ibdf  (Don't  you  know 
the  dishonesty  of  complaining 
about  others?)  Ang  pintasin;  ang 
pintasdn;  ang  mapamintds,  the 
critic;  thefault-finder;  complainer. 
Ang  pamintasdn. ^/vh.o  or  what  found 
fault  with.  Ang  pagpintasdn,  who 
or  what  found  much  fault  with. 
(See  also  index:  iilawa,  to  confide 
in.) 

XVII.  Although  pan,  the  definite  corresponding  to  man,  generally  has 
a  verbal  meaning,  there  are  several  instances  in  which  pan,  prefixed  to  a 
root,  signifies  an  instrument,  utensil,  or  article.  These  roots  then  admit, 
although  they  do  not  always  require,  the  euphonic  changes,  as  have 
already  been  explained  in  Par.  III.     Ex. : 


The  razor. 
The  auger. 
The  mop. 


AngpangdMt  ( from  nunTguhit).     ( See 

index:  dhit.) 
Ang  pamutas  (from  butas).     Magbu- 

tas,  to  bore;  to  make  a  hole  in. 
Ang panguskus  (from  kuskits).      Ku- 

mtiskus,  to  mop  up. 


6855—05- 


-U 


210 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


The  sickle. 

The  8pa(le. 

The  Ijrush,  ruler,  etc. 

The  pocket   handkerchief,   napkin, 

towel,  etc. 
The  hammer. 

The  pen,  pencil,  etc. 

The  string,  cord,  rope,  etc. 


A)ig  pangapas  (from    gnpns).     (See 

index :  gapas. ) 
Ang  punhukay  (fn^in  hnkag).     (See 

index. ) 
Ang  pangi'ilih  (from  giiliit).     Guma- 

Jiit,  to  line,  mark,  or  paint. 
Ang  puinnhiil  (iron). pumdhid,  to  rub; 

to  clean). 
Ang  paniiikpuk  (from  piunnkpnk  or 

magpnkpuk,  to  strike). 
Ang  piini'ilat  (from  niani'ilat,  to  write, 

[fora  living] ).    (See  index:  si'ilal. ) 
Ang panull  (from  tali).     Magtall,  to 

tie,  fasten,  bind. 

XVIII.  With  names  of  the  days  and  nouns  like  "arao"  (day)  pan 
denotes  something  used  daily  or  on  the  day  named.     Ex. : 

Something  for  daily  use.  Ang  pangaraodrao.     (Noun  redupli- 

cated. ) 
Something  for  use  on  Mondays.  Ang panh'ines. 

XIX.  In  like  manner,  man,  with  the  reduplicated  initial  syllable  of  the 
root,  indicates  the  habitual  agent  with  those  roots  capable  of  denoting 
occupation,  trade,  or  profession.  It  n)ay  also  be  used  with  some  other 
roots.  In  some  cases  the  particles  are  repeated  with  occasional  euphonic 
changes.     Ex. : 

The  following  have  a  simple  reduplication: 

Barber. 


Hunter  (with  gun). 

Sailor. 

Physician. 

Reaper. 

Weaver. 

Tinsmith, 


plumber,  etc. 


Sawyer. 


Manadh'd  (from  dhit),  usually  Muwj- 
aiTgdhit  in  Manila. 

Mamamaril  (from  baril). 

Manandgat  (from  ddgat). 

Mangagamot  (from  r/amot). 

Mangaga]}as  (from  gapas). 

Manliahabi  (from  liabi).  Iluinabi,  to 
weave. 

ManliUi hiang  ( from  h inang).  Hum'i- 
nang,  to  solder. 

Manlalagarl  (homlugari).  (See  in- 
dex.) 

Manunulat  (from  sulut). 

Manundlid  (from  sulid). 

Mananaht  (from  talit). 

Mananalo  (from  talu). 

Mununubus  (from  tnbdi^).  Tumubos^, 
to  rescue,  to  redeeni  (simple  act). 

Ma)iunusksu  (from  ^d-.so). 


Writer;  clerk. 

Spinner. 

Tailor;  seamstress. 

Winner;  conqueror. 

Rescuer;  redeemer. 

Tempter. 

In  the  following  examples  the  root  as  conjugated  with  man  has  the  ini- 
tial syllable  of  the  new  word  inserted  between  the  nia  and  the  iTg  of  the 
particle.     Ex. : 

Mam/aiTgdral    (from    matTlidral,     to 
Preacher.  preach). 

Hunter  with  dogs  or  hounds.  MaiTijuiTgaso  (from  matigaso,  to  hunt 

with  dogs). 
Fisherman.  MamjliTijii^dd  (from  mangisdd,  to  fish. 

for  a  living). 

XX.  With  weights,  measures,  and  similar  nouns,  man  prefixed  signifies 
"to  each,"  or  "apiece,"  amounts  as  may  be  denoted  by  the  noun.  (See 
under  the  numerals. ) 

XXI.  With  many  roots  man  signifies  a  resemblance  to  what  may  be 
denoted  by  the  root,  which  is  redui)licated.     Ex.: 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE..  211 

Hurricane;  typhoon.  Bagyu.     Ex.:    Manbagyobagyo  ilong 

hangia  (This  wind  seems  Uke  a 
typhoon) .  NagUilnyag  slk'i'y  bina- 
gyo  sila  sa  dagat  (They  were  coast- 
ing and  were  caught  at  sea  by  a 
typhoon). 

Anger.  Gdlit.      Ex. :      MangalitgdlU     yaong 

pangungusap  (That  way  of  talk- 
ing resembles  anger). 

THE    IXDEFIXITE    PARTICLE    "jIAKA." 

I.  This  particle  {naka  in  the  past  and  present)  has  two  distinct  mean- 
ings, the  first  being  that  of  cause  and  the  second  that  of  power,  ability,  etc. 
For  this  reason  there  are  two  definites,  that  corresponding  to  the  idea  of 
cause  being  ka,  and  that  to  the  idea  of  power  being  ma  (na). 

In  both  cases  the  true  pluperfect  and  future  ])erfect  tenses  are  formed  by 
na  following  the  verb  as  existing  in  the  past  and  future  tenses,  respectively. 

The  idea  of  cause  is  indicated  by  )iiaka  with  roots  denoting  conditions, 
torts  (wrongs),  and  betterments,  which  have  only  one  definite;  that  with 
i,  which  has  in  with  the  past  and  present  tenses,  forming  ika,  ikina.  Ika 
and  ikina  also  indicate  time  (not  tense)  in  certain  cases.     (See  index.) 

II.  The  difference  in  syntax  between  the.se  maka  verbs  in  the  sense  of 
cause  and  all  others  must  be  noted.  In  the  definite  these  verbs  have  the 
agent  in  the  nominative  and  the  recipient  or  o])ject  of  the  action  in  the 
genitive.  In  the  indefinite  the  agent  is  in  the  usual  nominative  also,  but  the 
recipient  or  object  takes  the  accusative,  which  is  invaria})ly  preceded  by  s« 
(never  by  nun;/).     This  use  of  sa  is  also  found  with  some  other  verbs. 

III.  Mag  and  man  roots  retain  the  definite  forms  pag  and  pan  when  con- 
jugated with  niaka,  as  will  be  seen  from  examples. 

To  be  able  to  learn  or  study.  Makapagaral.    Ex. :  Nakapagdral  ako 

(I  was  able  to  study).  Nukapa- 
gadral  siyd  (He  [she]  is  able  to 
study).  Makapagadral  sild  (They 
will  be  able  to  study).  Hindi  ako 
makapagadral  (I  shall  not  be  able 
to  study).  Napagdral  ko  ung  idral 
(I  was  able  to  learn  the  lesson). 
Napagadral  niyd  ang  idral  (He 
[she]  is  able  to  learn  the  lesson). 
Mapagadral  nild  ang  idral  (They 
will  be  able  to  learn  the  lesson). 

To  be  able  to  teach.  Makadral.     Ex.:    Nakadral    ako    (I 

was  able  to  teach).  The  other 
tenses,  both  of  the  indefinite  and 
the  definite  are  formed  in  the 
same  way. 

To  be  able  to  preach.  Makapa)Tgdral.      Nakaparu/dral    ako 

(I  "was  able  to  preach).  Naka- 
paiTgaiTgdral  siyd  (He  is  able  to 
preach).  MakapangaiTgdral  siyd 
(He  will  be  able  to  preach).  The 
definite  is  formed  in  the  same  way 
as  with  jmgdral. . 

IV.  Roots  verbalized  by  maka  reduplicate  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  in 
the  present  and  future  tenses.  In  some  districts  the  second  syllable  of  the 
particle  is  reduplicated,  but  this  is  a  provincialism.     Ex. : 

To  cause  damage.  MakapaiTganyayd  (from  unyaycL  and 

pan).     See  index. 
To  cause  anguish.  Makaballsa. 


212 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  cause  satiety. 

To  beautify  or  adorn. 

To  cause  disgust. 


To  do  good. 

To  hinder. 

To  adorn;  to  embellish. 


To  cause  relief. 


To  cause  sadness. 

To  hinder. 

To  cause  another   to   tremble  with 

fear. 
To  cause  to   tremble  with   cold  or 

fear. 
To  cause  (jr  do  evil. 


To  cause  disgust;  weariness;  annoy- 
ance. 

To  dazzle  (as  the  sua  or  lightning). 

To  cause  anxiety. 

To  cause  nausea. 

To  wound  (lit.,  to  cause  to  be 
wounded). 

To  cause  to  be  set  afire. 

To  cause  loathing  (as  food). 

To  cause  fear. 

To  cause  laughter. 

To  cause  pleasure. 


Makabutiog.  Busog  is  a  bow 
(weapon). 

MdkabiUi.  Burmdi,  to  grow  hand- 
some.    (See  huti  in  index.) 

3fakadimarim  or  makurimdrim. 
Mandbnarim,  to  disgust.  Ex. : 
Nandimdrim  aku  sa  pagkain  niyd. 
(His  manner  of  eating  disgusted 
nie). 

Makafjaling.     (.See  index:  galing.) 

Makagamhald. 

Makagandd.  Ex.:  Ang  kahinhina'y 
nakagagandd  sa  maiTga  dalaga 
(Modesty  is  a  beauty  in  girls). 
(Def. ):  Ang  kalimhinun  aij  i^igang 
ikinagagandd  nang  maiTj/n  dalaga. 

Makaginhdua.  Ex. :  Makaginhdiia  sa 
inj/o  ang  gamot  (Let  the  medicine 
relieve  you ) .  NakaginJidua  sa  akin 
ang  gamot  (I  was  relieved  by  the 
medicine).  Nakagiginhdua  sa  ka- 
niyd  ang  gamot  (He  is  being  re- 
lieved by  the  medicine).  Makagi- 
ginhdua  sa  inyo  ang  gamot  (You 
will  l)e  relieved  by  the  medicine). 
Ang pagkagbihdua,i\iereVwi  (act). 

Makahdpis.     (See  index:  hd/il.^.) 

Makalibang.     (See  index:  libang.) 

Makapangildbot  (from  kildbot  and 
pan).     Kakilakildbot,  horrible. 

Makapanginijig.   (See  index:  kinyig). 

Makasamd.  Makasasamd,  noxious; 
malignant.  Also  future  tense. 
Ex.:  Houag  mong  kavjn  Hong 
buiTgiV t  makasasamd  sa  iyo  (Don't 
eat  this  fruit,  because  it  will  in- 
jure you  [be  noxious  to  you,  in- 
def. ]).  Ang  ikinasasamd  nang 
dking  loob  ay  ang  kaniyang  pag- 
mumurang  walang  ligil  (  What  puts 
me  in  bad  humor  is  his  everlasting 
slanderinsf  [lit.,  Tlie  cause  of  my 
bad  humor  is  his  slandering  with- 
out cessation,  def.  J  ).  Sumamd,  to 
become  bad  or  evil.  (See  index: 
samd. ) 

Makasaud. 

Makasilao.     ( Syn :  pidag. ) 

Makasukal. 

Makasuklam. 

Makasdgat.      (See  index:  siigat.) 

Makasunog.     (See  index:  sunog.) 
Makasuyd.     (Syn.  smtok.) 
Makatdkot.     (See  index:  tdkot.) 
Makatana.     {See  tana:  index.) 
Makatuu.     (See  index:  iud.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


213 


V.  The  indefinite  forms  will  be  clearly  seen  by  the  conjugation  of 
VKikai/inhnua  in  the  i)rece(ling  paragraph,  there  being  no  irregularities 
and  there  is  but  one  definite  with  Act,  forming  ilea  as  a  prefix  to  the  root 
for  the  infinitive  and  future  and  ikina  for  the  past  and  present  tenses,  in 
being  inc()rporated  in  the  latter  cases.  For  the  conjugation  of  this  definite 
see  liapis  in  index. 

VI.  Prefixed  to  roots  denoting  actions  maka  signifies  power  or  ability  to 
perform  what  may  be  denoted  by  the  root.  Roots  which  are  conjugated 
in  the  simple  idea  by  mag  or  man  retain  pag  or  pan  before  the  root  in  all 
tenses. 

VII.  Ma  is  the  corresponding  definite  to  maka  potential,  and  when  used 
with  the  idea  of  attraction  toward,  etc.,  suppresses  in  completely.  Ma 
becomes  na  for  the  past,  pluperfect,  and  present  tenses.  Pag  and  pan  are 
retained  with  those  roots  requiring  it  to  preserve  the  meaning,  as  explained 
in  the  preceding  paragraph.  The  definites  with  i  and  an  also  exist.  The 
particle  i  is  inserted  between  the  particle  n/o  (na)  and  the  root,  contrary  to 
its  use  with  ka,  where  it  is  prefixed  to  the  latter  particle.     Ex.: 


To  be  able  to  go  away. 
To  be  able  to  teach. 


To  be  able  to  do  or  make. 
To  be  able  to  take. 


To  be  able  to  go  or  come  out. 
To  be  able  to  walk;  march;  etc. 


To  be  able  to  write. 


Makaal'is.  Makapagalis,  to  be  able 
to  take  away. 

Makadral.  Makapagdral,  to  be  able 
to  learn  or  study.  Ex. :  Napagd- 
ral  ko  ang  idral  ( I  was  able  to  learn 
the  lesson).  Napugdral  na  ko  ang 
idral  (I  had  been  able  to  learn  the 
lesson).  Napagadral  ko  ang  idral 
(I  am  able  to  learn  the  lesson). 
Mapagadral  ko  ang  idral  (I  shall 
be  able  to  learn  the  lesson).  (See 
dral  in  index. )  To  be  able  to 
preach,  makapangdral. 

Makagawd.     (See  index:  gawd.) 

Makakuha.  With  idea  of  attraction 
toward,  in  is  suppressed.  Ex. : 
Nakuha  ko  iijang  huiuja  (I  was  able 
to  take  that  fruit) .  Nakukuha  niyd 
iyang  huiTga.  (He  [she]  is  able  to 
take  that  fruit).  Makukuha  ko 
iyang  bwTj/a  ( I  shall  be  able  to  take 
thatfruit).   (See  also  index:  kiUia.) 

Makalahds.  Makapaglabds,  to  beable 
to  take  out.     (See  index:    lahds. ) 

Makaldkad.  (See  index: /('/Ayu/.  )  Ex. 
with  maka.  (indef. ) :  Nakaldkad  ako 
(I  was  able  to  walk).  Nakalaldkad 
siyd  (He  is  able  to  walk).  Maka- 
lalakad  sild  (They  will  be  able  to 
walk). 

Makusidat.  With  i  inserted  between 
ma  (na)  and  root  with  definite. 
Ex.:  A\dsulat  ko  itong  panulat  (I 
was  able  to  write  with  this  pen). 
Naisusulat  ko  Hong  panulat  (I  am 
able  to  write  [can  write]  with  this 
pen).  Maisusulat  ko  Hong  panulat 
(I  will  be  able  to  write  with  this 
pen).  Bukas  maisusulat  ang  si'dal 
na  ipadadald  mo  sa  iyong  anui  sa 
Mayndd,  (To-morrow I  will  beable 
to  write  the  letter  which  you  will 


214 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  be  able  to  run  away. 


have  to  send  to  your  father  in 
Manila).  Aalis  ako  nang  maisnlat 
na  viya  anr/  inintos  ko  .sa  kanii/d 
(I  will  go  when  he  writes  down  the 
orders  I  have  given  him).  (8ee 
index:  sulat. ) 
Makatakho.     (See  index:  takb'i). 


Wl\.  With  negative  particles  the  imperative  is  largely  used  instead  of 
the  present  tense,  although  the  meaning  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  latter, 
i.  e.,  hiiidt  akong  tnakasi'dui,  I  cannot  write;  1  am  not  able  to  write;  instead 
of  ]tini:li  ukong  iiakasusi'dat.  The  definite  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
way  with  the  negative,  and  even  with  the  afhrmative.  Examples:  Hhtdi 
akong  makapagdral  (I  can  not  [am  not  able  to]  study  [or  learn] ).  Hindi  mo 
madampotf  (Can' t  you  pick  it  up  [grasp  it]  ?)  Hindi  ko  malpahdjiag  ( from 
hayag,  ma,  i,  andj^a)  (I  cannot  reveal  it  [make  it  public]).  Hindi  ako 
makaluds  sa  3faynllcVt  aku'y  may  saklt  (I  can  notgo  down  to  Manila,  because 
I  am  ill).  With  um  this  may  be  expressed  hlndi  ako  mangyarlng  Inmndssa 
MaynilaH  ako  may  sakit.  Hindi  kayo  makajmiTijusapf  (Can't  you  talk?) 
Hindi  ko  matclkd,  (I  can  not  pronounce  it).  Hindi  ko  masaysay  (I  can  not 
explain  it).     Hindi  ko  masahi  (J  can  not  tell  it). 

IX.  Maka  (lutka)  with  the  indefinite  and  ma  (na)  with  the  definite  sig- 
nify to  do  what  is  denoted  by  the  root  mechanically,  casually,  involun- 
tarily, or  suddenly  (occasionally),  especially  acts  of  the  mind  and  physical 
senses.     Ex. : 


To  smell. 


To  feel. 


To  hear. 

To  taste. 
To  see. 


Acts  of  the  mind: 
To  know  (something). 

To  think. 


To  comprehend  somewhat;  to   feel; 

to  untlerstand. 
To  understand  (naturally). 


Makaamoy.  Nakaaamoy  kayof  (Do 
you  smell  anything?)  Naaamoy 
ninyo  bagd  ang  hamjonglslnusambu- 
lat  nang  mangd  bulnklakf  (Do  you 
smell  the  fragrance  shed  by  the 
flowers?) 

Ilakaranidani,  from  damdam.  Na- 
ramdamdn  nio.^  (Did  you  feel  it?) 
On,  nadaramdamdn  ko jxi  (Yes,  1 
feel  it  yet). 

MakarliTijlg  (from  dhigig).  See  in- 
dex: dliTgig. 

Makalasap.     (See  index:  lasap.) 

Makakltd.  Ex.:  Ako'ynakakitd  nang 
imng  tauong  diydn  (I  saw  a  person 
there).  Naklld  bagd  slldf  (Did 
you  see  them?)  Hindi  m/unl'trna- 
kiklid  ko  sana  (No,  but  I  may  be 
able  to  see  [them]). 

Makadlam.  Walang  nakaadlam  (No 
one  knows).  Hindi  ko  naaalaman 
(I  do  not  know  it. ) 

Makalslp.  Hindi  ma'islp,  incompre- 
hensible. Ex. :  And  ang  isip  mo 
or  A^aiislp  mo  or  Nailslpan  inof 
(What  do  you  think  about  it?) 
Kalslpan,  opinion.  Ang pagkaisip, 
the  act  of  thinking. 

Makamalay. 

Makatalaslds.  Ex.:  Natatalasids 
ninyd  bagd?  (Do  you  underetand 
it? )  Walang  nak  at  at  a  la  fit  da  ( No  one 
understands).  Titmalastds,  to  un- 
derstand (by  an  act  of  volition). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


215 


To  remember  (casually,  etc.  )• 
To  forget. 

Miscellaneous: 

To  like  (naturally). 

To  ascend  or  go  up  (cas. ). 


To  enter  (casually). 
To  fall  asleep. 


Malualmda.     (See  index:  uluulu.) 
Makolimot.     (See  index:  limot.) 


MakaiJjig.     (See  index:  ibi;/.) 
Makapanltik.     Ex.:    N(i])an}iikan   ko 
cmg  baltay  nang  kaihii/aii  -ixithi.  (I 
went  up  by  chance  into  the  house 
of  our  friend). 
Makapu^ok.     (See  index:  pnsok.) 
Makaiulog.       Ex.:    Jlmujuinxa    akny 
riakati'ilog     ako     (I    was     reading 
and   fell   asleep).      Ang  ikatulog, 
the    cause   or    time    of    sleeping. 
Ang  ipagti'dog,  the  cause  or  time 
of  sleeping  a  great  deal. 


X.  Ma  (na)  is  used  in  connection  with  an  (sometimes  in)  to  express 
being  overtaken  by  wind,  weather,  night,  etc.,  and  also  to  express  the 
casual  advent  of  a  season,  date,  etc. 

Some  phrases  of  this  nature  are  used  with  in  only. 

The  definite  onlv  is  found. 


To  be  caught  out  in  the  sun. 
To  be  overtaken  \)y  night. 


Mai'irao.     (See  index:  urao  and  init 

for  exs. ) 
Magah'i.     Ex.:   Gagabihin  ka sa  daan 

(You  will  be  overtaken  by  night 

on  the  road). 
Mauh'in.     (See  index:  uh'm.) 
Mabulag.     (See  index:  bulag.) 
Mainlt.     Ex.:   KaUnitan  aku   (I  am 

warm).       Unnnit,  to  become  hot. 

Maginit,   to   heat.      Magpainit,   to 

allow  to  become  hot. 
Malabo.     (See  index:  labo.) 
Majulio.     Ex.:  Kam?y  najidiohaa  sa 

Tarlac  (July  found  us  in  Tarlac). 

(Any  month  may  be  used  in  this 

manner.) 
Mapascua;   mapasko.      Ex. :   Napas- 

kuhan    ako    sa    MaynUd     (Easter 

found  me  in  Manila). 

XL  Maka  also  signifies  the  possible  accomplishment  of  a  purpose  with 
the  indefinite;  7/»/ being  used  with  the  definite.  (Naka;  na.)  The  accom- 
plishment of  the  end  sought  is  always  expressed  in  the  past  tense. 


To  be  caught  in  the  rain. 
To  be  blinded. 
To  be  hot  (warm). 


To  be  clouded;  turbid. 
To  be  overtaken  bv  Julv. 


To  be  found  at  Easter. 


To  be  able  to  lift. 


To  be  able  to  overtake  by  running. 


To  be  able  to  find. 

To  get  by  asking. 

To  be  able  to  catch  fish. 


To  be  able  to  i)ass  an  examination. 


Makahuhat.      Makabubuhal,  liftable. 
Ex. :    Bubuhatin    ko  itong   bayong 
kuvg  viabt'that  (I  will  lift  this  sack 
if  it  be  liftable). 
MakaJiabol.      JJtuiidbol,  to  run  alter 
another  in  order  to  overtake  him 
(her).      Ex.:    Hinubol    ko    siyd'y 
hindi,  nahdbol{l  ran  after  him  [her] 
but  could  not  overtake  him  [her]  ) . 
Makahdnap.     {See'hdnap:  index.) 
MakahbTgi.      (See  hl)~gi:  index.)    _ 
Makapanglsdd.      Ex.:    Ako'y  niang- 
iniijisda  kung  makapangisdd  ( I  am 
going  to  fish  if  it  is  possible  to 
catch  any  fish). 
Makasulit.      Ex.:   Sinulit  siyd   nang 
siiperintendenle  ay  {hindi)  nakasi'dil 


216  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

(He  was  examined  by  the  superin- 
tendent and  ]iassed  [did  not  pass] ) . 
MakasuKulif.  kdijnl  (Will  you  be 
able  to  pas8?)  Snmnlit,  to  examine; 
to  give  an  account  of. 
To  l)e  able  to  hit  with  arrows.  Mal:apaua.    PHmc/nd,  to  shoot  at  with 

bow  and  arrow.  Ex. :  Pungmand 
siyil  sa  mawja  ihon,  in/ioii't  hindt 
nakapana  siiji't  ( I  le  shot  at  tlie  birds 
with  bow  and  arrow,  but  was  not 
able  to  hit  them). 

XII.  Makn,  correctly  used,  expresses  physical  power  or  ability  as  a 
general  rule,  snkat  and  iiiangi/ari  being  used  to  express  moral  ]jower  or 
ability.  By  the  uneducated,  these  words  are  used  almost  indiscriminately. 
(See  sdka  and  mangi/ari:  index.) 

XIII.  Maka  is  also  used  to  verbalize  kaya;  "perhaps,  may  be,"  etc., 
which  is  conjugated  as  in  the  following  examples: 

Dili  ko  makaydnang  dalh'in  (I  do  not  know  if  I  will  be  able  to  carry  it). 
Dili  ako  makakayd  ibigay  Ho  sa  kaniyd  (I  do  not  know  if  I  will  be  able  to 
give  this  to  him).  Wald  akong  ikakuyd  (I  have  no  way  to  do  it).  Maka- 
kayd ka  bagd  bumili  nituf  (Will  you  be  able  then  to  buy  this?)  Di  ko 
makayanang  labanan  kayo  (I  am  not  al)le  to  fight  against  you  [plural]). 
linnmin  ko,  kun  makayanan  ko  (I  will  drink  it,  if  1  can). 

Bagd,  "perhaps,  by  chance,"  etc.,  has  a  stronger  meaning  than  kayd. 

XIV.  Maka  (ma)  is  sometimes  used  in  reluctantly  admitting  afact  or  in 
avoiding  too  direct  an  injury  to  the  feelings  of  another.  Ex.:  (Indef. ) 
Nakapagnakao  siyd  (he  may  have  stolen);  (Def. )  napagnakao  niyd  ito  (he 
may  have  stolen  this). 

XV.  3faka  is  also  used  colloquially  in  conversation  as  follows:  Makata- 
nong  kayd.^  (Is  there  anything  more  to  be  asked  about  it?)  Makakitd 
bagdf  (Is  there  anything  more  to  be  seen?) 

A  more  usual  form  is  made  with  lalo,  "more,"  and  the  root  with  ///, 
viz:  Lumalo  sa  tono)7^iH.^(  Is  there  anything  more  to  ask  aboutit?)  Luiiuilo 
sa  kitain/  (Is  there  anything  more  to  be  seen?) 

XVI.  Maka  forms  certain  adjectives  in  Tagalog,  which  have  the  inher- 
ent idea  of  potentiality.  These  adjectives,  which  in  English  are  generally 
formed  by  the  suffixes  able  and  ible  or  hy  ful,  have  three  distinct  forms  in 
Tagalog. 

XVII.  (a)  Roots  expressing  qualities  which  maybe  felt  by  the  mind 
are  made  adjectives  by  prefixing  ka,  the  casual  definite  of  maka,  to  the 
root,  which  is  reduplicated  to  the  second  syllable.  Ex.:  Kaayaaya  {aya) 
"delightful";  kaginliaginhdua  (ginhdua),  "wholesome;  salubrious;"  kaibi- 
gibig  (ibig),  "amiable;"  kakilakildbot  (kildbvt),  "horrible;"  katakoUdkot 
(tdkot)  "fearful;  dreadful." 

(6)  Adjectives  of  similar  meaning  are  also  formed  by  maka  with  the 
future  indefinite.     Ex. : 

Makahililyd  {hiyd),  "bashful;"  makamamatay  {matay),  "mortal"  (death- 
causing);  makasisird  (sird),  "destructive;"  makatataitd  (tana),  "laugha- 
ble;"  riiakatulud  (titd),  "pleasant,  agreeable." 

(r)  When  the  roots  may  express  aptitude  or  inaptitude  or  facility  or  dif- 
ficulty in  doing  anything;  if  affirmative  the  adjective  is  formed  with  the 
future  definite  of  the  potential  particle  nut,  and  if  negative  with  the  impera- 
tive ma  (without  reduplication  of  the  first  syllable  of  the  root),  which  is 
generally  preceded  by  the  negative  particle  di,  "not."  Ex. : 
Makakain,  "edible;"  di  mukain,  "unedible,  uneatable;"  magagawd, 
"practicable;"  dl  magaicd,  "impracticable;"  inaiinum,  "potable,  drinka- 
ble;" dimainum,  "undrinkable;"  makikitd,  "visible;"  dt  makild,  "invisi- 
ble;" masasabi,  "tellable;"  dimasabi,  "untellable,  unspeakable;"  man- 
gyayari,  "possible;"  dl  mang;/ari,  '^imponi'ihle;"  di  mabala,  "intolerable;" 
dtmakalag,  "indissoluble;"  dt  magamit,  di  malapitan,  "inaccessible;"  dt 
mntiis,  "insufferable;"  di  matingkala,  "incomprehensible;"  dt  masalang, 
"untouchable." 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  217 

(d)  Adjectives  of  the  classes  above  described  take  the  "tie"  ng  when 
united  to  a  following  noun  or  verb  if  ending  in  a  vowel,  l)ut  remain 
unchanged  if  ending  in  a  consonant.  The  following  verbs  take  the  defi- 
nite imperative,  which  is  best  translated  into  English  by  the  infinitive 
with  "to."  Ex.:  Kagakmygnlanc)  ama  "respected  father;"  kadnmaUh'i- 
mal  tignan,  "disgusting  to  see;"  kangaayang pakingdn,  "  delightful  to  listen 
to;"  madaling  gaiv'm,  "easy  to  do  or  make;"  ma?h«agf  saiZ/tm,  "difficult  to 
say;"    mahirap  kcimtdn,  "hard  to  accomplish." 

XVIII.  Maka  may  be  compounded  with  mag,  resulting  in  rnagniaka, 
denoting  the  idea  of  a  great  or  excessive  degree  of  what  may  be  indicated 
by  the  root,  which  is  generally  reduplicated.     (See  par.  27,  mag.) 

Ex. :  Magmakaauaaud  (niid)  "  to  be  able  to  move  to  compassion;  "  magma- 
kagalitgdllt  (gdlit),  "to  be  able  to  njove  to  anger;"  magniamakngaUtgdlit 
ako  iyang  tado,  "that  man  will  be  able  to  anger  me;"  makagalit,  "to 
cause  anger;"  mugmakahiyd,  "to  be  able  to  shame  greatly  "  (see  par.  27, 
mag ) ;  magmakalurnhaylumbay  ( iumbay ) ,  "  to  be  able  to  move  to  grief ; ' '  7iag- 
viakahimbaylumhay  ako  ang  baliid,  "the  notice  was  enough  to  move  me  to 
grief;"  makalumbay,  "to  cause  sadness;  to  make  melancholy;"  bdkit  vio 
ikinalulumbay  ang  mami<amang  balituf  or  Ano't  wikalulumbay  sa  iyo  ang 
masasamang  baliid!'  "Why  does  the  bad  news  sadden  you?" 

XIX.  Muka  (naka)  is  sometimes  used  in  the  place  of  ma  (na)  indefinite, 
the  two  particles  having  many  analogies.  Ex.:  Nakabukds  ang  pinld, 
"the  door  is  open;"  nakal'tmot  s'lyd,  "he  forgot;"  nakatayu  siyd,  "he  is 
standing  up;"  nakaiipo  siyd,  "he  is  sitting  down." 

XX.  Mahd  and  its  synonym  bakd  express  fear  or  apprehension  of  pos- 
sible danger,  hurt,  or  injury.  They  are  written  as  separate  words  and  not 
as  prefixes.  Bakd  is  more  common.  These  two  words  may  be  best 
rendered  into  English  by  "lest,"  "for  fear  that,"  etc.  Ex.:  Ako' y 
nagdalaiig  tnkut,  bakd  marimjig  (I  was  afraid  lest  I  should  be  heard.) 
Houag  mong  gawin  iydn,  makdmapalMinak  ka  (do  not  do  that,  because  you 
may  lose).  Houag  kavg  magdaan  sa  bundok,  makd  hararu/in  ka  nang  m.ar~gd 
tulisdn  (do  not  travel  in  the  mountains,  because  you  might  be  stopped  by 
the  "ladrones").  Ilumarang,  to  stop  another  on  the  highway.  Makd 
may  tuuo  diydn  (lest  there  be  people  there). 

(b)  Makd  also  denotes  partial  resemblance,  as  in  comparing  speech, 
fruit,  flowers,  etc.  Ex.:  Makd  Tagdlog  ang  capiidn  nang  paiTguiTgusap 
(the  captain  is  like  a  Tagalog  in  his  speech).  Makd  bulaklak  sa  A») erica 
itong  bulaklak  nang  amoy  (this  flower  is  like  an  American  flower  in  odor). 

XXI.  In  addition  to  the  meanings  of  maka  as  a  verl)al  particle,  it 
indicates  completed  verl)al  action,  best  translated  by  the  adverb  "after" 
and  a  verb.     Ex.:    ^^akamisa    nang  pare    (after    he  had   said  mass  the 

priest ).     Makai/ari  nito'y  paroon  ka  sa (after  you  do  this  go  there 

to ). 

It  is  also  used  idiomatically.  Ex. :  Makasakdling  may  dangmaling, 
bumili  ka  nang  kakanin  (in  case  anyone  should  arrive,  go  buy  something 
[for  him]  to  eat). 

THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    "mAGPA." 

I.  This  particle,  signifying  the  ordering  to  do  or  make  or  permitting  to  be 
done  what  is  denoted  by  the  root,  reduplicates  the  last  syllable  of  the 
particle  for  the  present  and  future  indefinite  tenses.  The  definite,  pa, 
being  a  monosyllable,  causes  thefrst  syllable  of  the  root  to  be  reduplicated 
for  the  same  tenses.     The  definite  has  all  three  forms  of  in,  i,  and  an. 

Mag  and  man  roots  retain  this  between  magpa  and  the  root.  Pag 
sometimes  precedes  magpa  in  the  definite  form  (pagpa). 

Sa  is  generally  used  before  the  person  commanded.     Ex. : 

To  order  to  teach.  Magpadral.     Magpadral  ka  kay  Pe- 

dro, order  Pedro  to  teach.  Mag- 
papagdral,  to  order  to  study. 
Magpapagdral  ka  kay  Juan,  order 
Juan   to  study.     Papagaralin  mo 


218 


TAGA*LOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  order  to  read. 

To  order  to  do  or  make. 


To  order  to  come  or  go  out;  (2)  to 
order  to  take  or  bring  out. 


To  order  to  ascend. 


To  order  to  go  or  come  down;   to 
order  to  descend. 


To  order  to  get  into  or  enter. 
To  order  to  write. 


ang  iyoivj  anak  (order  your  child 
to  study).  PinajKujdral  pa  ako 
nmuj  akinij  iiid  (my  mother  or- 
dered me  to  keep  on  studying). 

Mag})(i]>aillj(\r(d  (1)  to  order  to 
preach;  (2)  to  request  to  preach 
(if  not  competent  to  order). 

Magpabusa.  Nngixijiuhasa  aiig  vuiesi- 
tro  sa  tnmlgd  batd  (the  teacher  is 
ordering  the  children  to  read). 

Magpagaml.  Nagjxiganu  ako  (I  or- 
dered [something]  done  or  made). 
Nagpajjagavd  ^ii/d  (he  [she]  is  or- 
dering [something]  to  be  done  or 
made).  Nakapagpagand  ako  (I 
was  able  to  order  [something]  to 
be  done  or  made).  Magpapagaicd 
ako  (1  will  order  [something]  to  be 
done  or  made).  Makapagpagaicd 
ako  (I  shall  have  ordered  [some- 
thing] to  be  done  or  made).  The 
definite  with  /  is:  Tpagawd  mo  itosa 
kanigd  (order  him  to  do  [make] 
this).  Jpinagavd  ko  sa  igo  iio  (I 
ordered  you  to  do  [make]  this). 
Iphiugagaud  niya  sa  iyo  ito  (he  or- 
ders you  to  do  this).  Ipagagau-d 
ko  sa  iyo  ito  (I  shall  order  you  to 
do  [make]  this).  (See  index: 
gau'd. ) 

Maf/jHilabds.  Magpalabds  ka  kay  Juan 
(order  Juan  to  get  out).  Magpal- 
abds ka  kay  Juan  nang  darnil  (order 
Juan  to  get  the  clothes  out).  Fal- 
abasin  mo  Hong  aso  (have  this  dog 
put  out). 

Magpapanhik.  PapanJtlkin  mo  ang 
maiTgd  batd  (tell  the  muchachos  to 
come  up).  Makapugpapanliik,  to 
be  al)le  to  order  to  ascend.  Xaka- 
pagpapanhik  ako  (I  was  able  to 
order  to  ascend).  Nakapagpapa- 
panhik  ako  (I  am  able  to  order  to 
ascend ) .  Makapagjiapapa nh  ik  ako 
(I  will  be  able  to  order  to  ascend). 
Magpapagpanhik,  to  order  some- 
thing brought  upstairs,  hoisted, 
etc.  Papagpanhikin  mo  ang  maiTjjd 
batd  nang  tubig  (tell  [order]  the 
muchachos  to  bring  up  some 
water).     (See  index:  panhik.) 

Magpapandog.  A Iso  means  to  spend ; 
to  use  up.  Magpapagpandog,  to 
order  something  to  be  brought 
down.     (See  index:  pandog.) 

Magpapdsok.  (For  examples  see  in- 
dex: pdsok.) 

Magpasdlat.  A)ig  manajddral  ay  nag- 
pasi'i/at  sa  iyo  (indef. ) ;  pinasdlat  ka 
nang  maiTgddnd  (def. )  (the teacher 
ordered  you  to  write).  The  definite 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  219 

with  mis:  I'asnhtiin  mo  8uid  nilong 
sulnt  (order  him  to  write  tiiis  let- 
tei).  The  dual  (two)  is  used  in 
the  followinji;  exuiii]>ie.s,  l)nt  they 
are  translated  as  usual  into  Kn<:lish'. 
P'masi'il<it.titariitm)</si'ihil{l  ordered 
you  to  write  this  letter).  Phia.vi- 
sulat  lata  lutoiKj  Hulut  (I  am  order- 
ing you  to  write  this  letter).  Pa- 
susnlatin.  l-ala  nilunr/  sulat  (I  will 
order  you  to  Avrite  this  letter). 
(See  index:  sulat.) 

To  order  to  lock.  Magpunusi.     To  \o{:\i;  magsusl.     Su- 

sifln  mo  lYo  (lock  this).  Iloimg  mo 
susinn  itt)  (don't  lock  this).  Ito 
hindi  nal-asud  (this  is  not  locked). 
Alisln  mo  avg  j^fdrisusl  nito  (un- 
lock this  [lit.,  "release  this  condi- 
tion of  being  locked"]).  Susian 
mo  ang  jnnto  (lock  the  door).  Ang 
isu-v,  the  key.  Ang  siisidn.,  what 
locked.  A ng  pagsusl,  what  locked 
much,  or  the  act  of  locking.  Ang 
ipagsusi;  what  used  to  lock  much 
with.  Sufil,  derived  from  Chinese, 
is  distinct  from  snsl,  meaning  clear, 
pure,  or  neat,  which  comes  from 
the  Sanskrit,  cnchi. 

To  order  to  sew.  Magjudnlu.     Ito  ang  paiahi  nigd  sa 

akin  (this  is  what  she  told  me  to 
sew).     (See  index:  iaJti.) 

II.  Magpa  reverses  the  meanmg  in  sentences  where  an  inferior  addresses 
a  superior,  or  in  which  the  subject  has  no  power  to  command,  the  ])article 
then  meaning  "to  request,  ask,"  etc.  Ex.:  Magpagavd  ka  nito  sa  ingong 
amd  "a.sk  your  father  to  do  this,"  not  "order  your  father  to  do  this." 
Magpadrul  kagd  pa  m.  inyong  anak  sa  escvelahan  (indef. )  or  Papagaralln 
n  1711/ 6  pa  ang  anak  ninyd  sa  escnelahan  (def. )  (let  your  child  study  for  a 
while  yet  at  school). 

III.  The  indefinite  form  will  be  seen  by  the  conjugation  of  magpagaud 
"to  order  to  do  or  make;"  there  being  but  one  irregularity  of  note,  viz: 
In  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  tenses  naka  and  maka,  with  pagpa  pre- 
fixed to  the  root  and  na  following,  express  these  tenses,  respectively.  (See 
tables  for  conjugation.) 

'IV.  Pn,  the  corresponding  definite  verbal  participle  to  magjia,  and 
formed  by  dropping  the  first  syllable  of  the  latter,  forms  the  three  defi- 
nites  regularly.  The  examples  given  in  the  tables  are  magpasuktt  (sdlat), 
"  to  order  to  write  "  (in);  magpagawd  {gawd),  "  to  order  to  do  or  make" 
(/);  and  hiagpalanini  {taiiini),  "  to  order  to  sow  "  (an). 

V.  Magpa  may  be  preceded  by  maka,  forming  niakapagpa,  the  com- 
pound giving  the  idea  "  to  be  able  to  order  to."  (See  under  magpaixxn- 
hik  in  Far.  I,  magpa.) 

VI.  Magpa  also  denotes  what  is  suffered  willingly  or  what  is  done  with- 
out restraint  by  others  upon  the  subject;  to  allow  or  permit,  with  those 
roots  which  admit  such  ideas.  The  context  serves  generally  as  a  guide  to 
distinguish  the  idea  of  "to  order  to  "  from  "  to  permit  to."     Ex. : 

To  allow  deception;  cheating.  Magparagd  {Ivomdayd).  (See index: 

dayd. ) 
To  allow  oneself  to  be  crucified.  Magparipd  (from  dipd).   (See  index: 

dipd. ) 
To  allow  oneself  to  be  whipped.  3fagpahampds.    (See  index :/i(irmp«.s".) 


220 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  allow  oneself  to  be    flatly  con- 
tradicted. 
To  allow  one's  hair  to  be  combed. 

To  allow  oneself  to  be  slapped. 


To  allow  to  become  putrid. 


To  order  to  throw  down;  raze;   (2) 
to  allow  to  fall  into  ruin. 


To  allow  to  become  hot. 


To  allow  to  become  cool;  to  cool  any- 
thing. 


Magpaxuat. 

Magpasitklay.  Also  "to  order  to 
comb."     (See  index:  siikkuj.) 

MagpaUimpal.  Tmnampal,  to  slap. 
Magtampal,  to  slap  much. 

Vil.  Magpa,  with  a  root  denoting  a  state  or  condition  resulting  from 
gradual  intrinsic  action,  indicates  the  purpose  of  the  subject  either  to  accel- 
erate or  allow  the  transition. 

Magpabulok.  Houag  mong  kabulokin 
ang  matTgd  sdging  (don't  let  the 
bananas  rot). 

Magpagibd.  Gumibu,  to  do  away 
with;  to  level;  to  throw  one's  self 
down.  Angginibd,  (1)  what  thrown 
down  or  leveled;  (2)  what  done 
away  with.  Maggibd,  to  throw 
down  many  things. 

Magpaiiiit  (from  init).  Magpapaginit, 
to  order  something  to  be  heated. 
(See  index:  iuit.) 

Magpalamig.  Palamigin  natin  ang 
drao  (let  us  wait  until  the  day  is 
cooler).  Magpalamig  ka  nang  tubig 
(let  some  water  cool  [i.  e.,  put  some 
water  out  to  cool]).  Ipa/amig  mo 
ang  tubig  (put  the  water  some- 
where to  cool).  Baku  hind  I  ka 
nagpapalamig  nang  tnbig:'  (Why 
don't  you  cool  some  water?)  Saan 
ako  magpapalamig  nang  tubig? 
(Where  shall  I  put  the  water  to 
cool?)  Iijang  batalang  iydn  ang 
pagpapalamigdn  mo  nang  tubig  (let 
the  water  cool  out  there  on  that 
porch ) .  Kahapon  ay  ang  ibang  silid 
ang  pinagpalamigdn  ko  nang  tubig 
(yesterday  I  let  the  water  cool  in 
the  other  room  )•  Magpapaglamig, 
to  order  something  to  be  cooled). 

Magpatuyo.  Houag  mong  patuyoin 
ang  matigd  halaman  (don't  let  the 
plants  dry  up).  Tuyo  na  p6  (they 
are  dried  up  already,  sir).  Hindi 
ko  wja  pinatutuyu  (indeed,  I  am  not 
letting  them  dry  up).  Patuyoin  mo 
iydn,  dry  that  or  let  it  dry. 

VIII.  Magpa  is  also  used  to  express  acts  of  the  Creator;  of  nature,  and 
of  persons  beyond  the  control  of  the  speaker,  mainly  with  the  idea  of 
cause.     Ex.: 


To  allow  to  dry  up  or  out;  to  put  out 
to  drv. 


To  cause  waves. 


To  cause  the  flowers  to  bloom. 

To  cause  it  to  thunder. 

To  rear;  bring  up  (as  a  child). 


Magpadlon.  Am'»  ang  nagpapadlon  sa 
ddgatf  (What  causes  the  waves 
at  sea?)     Ang  haiTgiti  (the  wind). 

Magpa  bula  kla  k. 

Magpakulog. 

Magpalaki.     (See  index:  laki.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


221 


IX.  Magpa,  used  with  reference  to  tlie  effect  of  such  actions  as  the  fore- 
going, which  are  beyond  the  power  of  a  human  agent,  signifies  "to  ex- 
pose to;"  "to  put  in,"  etc.     Ex.: 


To  expose  to  the  sun;  to  sun  one- 
self. 
To  expose  to  the  wind  or  air. 
To  expose  to  the  rain. 


Magpaarao  (accent  on  the  last  sylla- 
ble).    (See  index:  arao.) 
Magpahangin.     (See index:  hangin.) 
Magpaulan.     (See  index:  ulun.) 


X.  Magpa  coupled  with  meteorological  phenomena  and  astronomical 
occurrences,  connected  with  a  human  agency,  denotes  a  waiting  on  the 
part  of  such  agent  until  the  condition  has  changed  or  the  event  taken 
place.     The  context  generally  serves  to  give  the  correct  idea.     Ex. : 


To  wait  until  the  typlioon  ceases. 

To  wait  for  a  change  of  wind. 

To  wait  for  the  day  to  become  cooler. 

To  wait   until   the   sun  (or   moon) 

rises. 
To   wait   for  a   change   (as   in   bad 

weather). 


Magpahagyo. 

Magpahangm. 

Magpalamig  nang  arao.     (See   Par. 

VII.) 
Magpasilang.     (See  index:  sUang.) 

Magpatila.  Patllain  mo  muna  ang 
uldn  (wait  until  the  rain  ceases). 
The  root  is  iila,  which  alone  means 
"to  seem."  Tild  tauo  or  anaki 
tduo  (it  looks  [seems]  like  a  per- 
son ) .  Tiki  naparoon  sila  ( it  seems 
they  went  there ) .  Tilci  napaparito 
Slid  (it  seems  they  are  coming 
here). 

Magpaulan. 

Magpaiimaga  (from  nmaga,  "to 
dawn;"  root,  aga). 

XI.  With  roots  expressing  the  indefinite  idea  of  what  may  be  given 
viagpa  expresses  acts  which  benefit  another  than  the  agent.  These  roots 
are  generally  those  conjugated  primarily  with  um.     Ex. : 

Magpakain.     (See  index:  kain.) 

MagiKtdala.  ltd  ang  padald  nigd  .>-•« 
akin  (this  is  what  he  ordered  me 
to  bring  [carry] ) .  Iti')'}/  padald  sa 
akin  ni  i»((  (this  is  what  my  mother 
sent  [brought]  me).  Aug  ipina- 
dald  (what  was  ordered  brought 
[i.  e.,  what  was  sent]  ).  Magdald, 
to  carry,  bear,  bring  or  take  (over). 
Ang  dinald,  what  so  brought,  etc. 
(See  index:  dald.) 

Magparamit  (from  dam  it).  (See  in- 
dex: damit.) 

Magpainum .     (See  index:  init m . ) 


To  wait  until  the  rain  ceases. 
To  wait  until  davbreak. 


To  give  food;  to  feed. 
To  send;  to  forward. 


To  clothe;  to  furnisli  clothing. 

To  give  something  to  drink;  to  wa- 
ter (as  animal  or  fowl). 
To  put  at  interest;  to  invest.  Magpatubo. 

To  give  lodging.  Magpatidoy. 

To  lend  willingly.  Magpautang. 

There  may  be  mentioned  magpakild,  to  restore  the  sight. 

XII.  With  roots  expressing  definites  with  mag  in  the  primary  verbal 
sense,  magpa  expresses  the  idea  of  compulsion,  exaction,  or  request,  as 
shown  by  the  intrinsic  meaning  or  the  context.  Definites  exist  with  in,  i, 
and  ail.     Ex. : 


(See  index:  tubu.) 
(See  index:  ti'doy.) 
(See  index:  I'ltang.) 


To  collect  taxes;  to  demand  (or  col- 
lect) tribute. 


Magpabuis  (from   buiii,    "poll  tax," 
etc. ) .    Pabuis  ko  si  Pedro  nang  piso 


222  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

(I  asked  Pedro  to  pay  one  peso  in 
taxes) .  Isang piso  ang  iplnabu'iH  ko 
kay  Pedro  (one  peso  was  what  I 
asked  Pedro  to  pay  in  taxes). 
Itong  bnyan  ay  ang  pinagpabuisan 
ko  (this  town  was  where  I  col- 
lected taxes).  Magbuis,  to  pay 
taxes. 

To  beg;  to  ask  for  alms.  Magpalimos  (from  Span.,  Ihnosna). 

To  ask  for  a  pledge  or  pawn.  Magpumnla.     Sangpisos  ang  sanladn 

ko  n itong  singmng  ( I  want  to  pledge 
this  ring  for  one  peso). 

XIII.  Actions  in  which  the  agent  has  a  passive  part  are  also  explained 
by  mngpa.     Ex. : 

To  hear  confession.  Magpacumpisal  (from  Sp.  confesar). 

Saan  naroon  ang  pare  f    ( Where  is 
the  "  padre? ' ' )     Nagpapacumpisal 
siyd  (He  is  hearing  confessions). 
Magcumpisal,  to  confess. 
To  pardon.  Magpatauad.     (See  index:  tawac?.) 

To  get  shaved.  Magpadli'd.     (See  index:  ahit.) 

To  have  the  hair  cut.  Magpagnpit.     (See  index:  gupit.) 

To  have  cleaned  (as  shoes).  Magj)almis.     (See  index:  Unix.) 

XIV.  Magpa  also  expresses  the  idea  of  repeating  something  many 
times,  or  reciting  the  same  much,  and  sometimes  by  many.  Pagpa  is 
treated  grammatically  in  many  cases  like  magpa — i.  e.,  the  last  syllable  of 
the  particle  is  reduplicated  for  the  j^resentand  future  tenses.  Ex.:  Magpa 
"we"  kaigu  (All  of  you  say  ''we"  many  times).  Xagj)adiablo  ako  sakaniyd 
(I  called  him  a  devil  many  times),  ^ino  o)tg  ipiiiagpapadiablo  ninyof 
(Why  do  you  say  devil  so  much?)  Jloiiug  ninyong  jiagpapadiablohan  ang 
kapoua  ti'nio  (Don't  say  devil  so  much  to  those  around  you). 

XV.  In  some  cases  magpa  signifies  to  do  voluntarily  what  is  denoted  b)- 
the  root.     Ex. : 

To  adorn  one's  self.  Magpamuti  (from    buti).     Nagpapa- 

bidi  yaong  dalaga  (That  girl  is 
adorning  herself). 

To  praise  one's  self.  Magpamuri  (from  pnri).     At  yaong 

isd'y  nagpapanmri  (and  that  one 
is  [doing  the  same]  for  the  praise). 
Ang  malrinliing  dalaga'' y  pi'»»joiu'i 
nnng  lahat  (A  sensible  girl  is 
praised  by  everyone ) .  Kapurihan, 
praise;  honor;  fame.     Syn.-.bunyi. 

XVI.  Magpa  with  some  datives  and  all  adverbs  of  place  signifies  "to  go 
or  come  intentionally,"  where  denoted  by  the  root,  etc.     Ex.: 

To  come  to  me.  Magpasa  akin. 

To  go  to  you.  Magpasa  inyo. 

To  go  (come)  to  the  person.  Magpasa  tduo. 

To  go  to  Pedro.  Magpakay  Pedro. 

To  come  here  (near  by).  Magpadini. 

To  go  there.  Magpadoon. 
To  go  up  the  river,  or  up  country.         Magpa  ilaya. 

XVII.  Mapa,  formed  by  dropping  the  g  of  magpa,  signifies  "  to  go  in  some 
direction  naturally  or  accidentally,  and  without  intention  on  the  part  of 
the  subject."     /generally  precedes  the  root.     Ex.: 

To  run  off  or  lower  (as  water).  Mapaibabd.     Xapapaibabd  ang  tubig 

(The  water  is  becoming  low  [or  is 
running  off]  ).     (See  index:  babd.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  223 

To  ascend  (as  smoke).  Mapaitaas.    jVapapaitaasanga~s6  {The 

smoke  is  rising).  Di  man  viakild 
ang  nttigas,  aso  ang  magpapalu'tyag 
(Althougli  the  flame  may  not  be 
seen,  tiie  smoke  will  reveal  it. — 
T.  P.,  50). 

To  fly  u])  in  the  air  (as  a  bird).  Mapailandang.    Ang  bdnoy  ay  napai- 

landang  sa  impapauid  (The  eagle 
a.scended  into  the  clouds). 

XVIII.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  greater  part  of  the  roots  verbalized 
by  inagpa  require  i  in  the  definite  to  express  "what  is  ordered  done,  given," 
etc.,  and  in  or  an  in  the  same  form  to  express  "  the  person  commanded," 
etc.     Ex. : 

To  give  food  to  another.  Magpakain.     (See  index:  Irdn.) 

To  allow  to  be  punished;  or  to  cause     Magparusa  (ironidusa) .    Ilonagmong 
or  order  to  be  punished.  parusahan  ang    walang   kasalanan 

(Do  not  permit  the  innocent  [not 
guilty]  to  be  punished). 
To  permit  to  pass.  Magpadaan    (from   daan,    "road"). 

See  index. 
To  give  another  something  to  drink;     Magpainum.     (See  index:  inum.) 

to  water  animals  or  fowls. 
To  cause  to  walk  up.  Magpaldkad.    (See  index:  lukad.) 

To  cause  or  order  another  to  stand     Magpatindig.    (See  index:    tindig.) 
up. 

XIX.  A  sense  of  ordering  may  be  given  to  roots  not  having  such  an 
idea  by  inserting  a  second  pa,  although  it  is  clearer  to  use  mag  with  a  fol- 
lowing infinitive.  This  second  pa  ( which  remains  in  all  tenses)  with  roots 
having  the  idea  of  ordering  signifies  to  order  a  person  to  order  another, 
although  simpler  forms  are  generally  used.  Ex. :  Ang  capilan  ay  nagpa- 
painurn  sa  maiTgd  cabayo  (The  captain  orders  the  horses  to  be  watered);  or, 
Ang  capitan  ay  naguidos  uminum  sa  manga  cabayo  [same  meaning].  (2) 
Magpapasulat  ka  kay  Juan  kay  Pedro;  or,  Magidos  ka  kay  Juan  na  magpa- 
sulat.  siyd  kay  Pedro  (Order  Juan  to  order  Pedro  to  write). 

XX.  The  tendency  of  Tagalog,  like  all  languages,  to  simplify  itself,  is 
shown  by  the  use  of  the  root  with  pa  prefixed,  with  the  significance  of  a 
verbal  noun.  The  agent  takes  the  genitive  and  the  object  or  person  acted 
upon  the  dative.  Ex.:  Pabaiu/d,  "perfume;"  pamuti  (buti),  "holiday 
or  parade  appearance;"  padald,  "burden  or  what  carried;"  jmhiyds, 
"jewel;"  jmmana,  "inheritance;"  patago,  "  what  hidden." 

ltd  ang  patago  uiyd  sa  akin  (This  is  what  he  ordered  me  to  hide).  Pan- 
tang,  ' '  credit. ' ' 

THE   PARTICLE    "  PA." 

I.  This  particle  has  many  affinities  with  magpa,  as  will  be  seen  by  the 
examples.  It  reduplicates  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses,  except  when  sa  i»  attached  to  and  incorporated  with  it.  With 
roots  of  place,  which  require  po.so,  the  first  syllable  of  the  particle  is  redu- 
plicated for  these  tenses.  Na  is  prefixed  to  pa  in  the  indefinite  past  and 
present  tenses  with  both  pa  and  pasa.  This  latter  particle  should  not  be 
confounded  with  roots  beginning  with  sa  conjugated  withpa.  (See  tables: 
t  along. ) 

II.  One  of  the  principal  significations  of  pa  is  to  ask  or  beg  for  in  refer- 
ence to  the  subject,  while  magpa  is  generally  applied  under  like  circum- 
stances to  the  object.     Ex. : 

To  ask  for  protection.  Paampon. 

To  ask  for  mercy  or  compassion.  Paaud.     (See  index:  and.) 

To  ask  for  shelter  or  support.  Pakupkup.     Kumupkup,  to  press  to 

the  breast  or  shelter  under  the 

wings. 


224  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

To  ask  for  aid,  succor,  or  a  favor.  rasianguluiuj.     MarjaaiigaUirxj,  to  aid, 

favor,  or  succor. 
To  ask  for  defense.  Patangol.     TumangoJ,  to  defend. 

To  ask  for  help.  Pati'dong.     (See  tables:  ^uZonr/.) 

III.  At  times  pa  signifies  "to  permit"  the  action  indicated  by  the  rcjot 
"upon  one's  self,"  and  sometimes  "to  ask,"  as  above  explained.  It  de- 
notes greater  willingness  by  the  person  affected  than  magpa  does.     Ex. : 

To  consent  to  be  deceived.  Parayd,   (from  daya).      (See  index: 

daijd. ) 
To  ask  to  be  kissed.  Pahalik.     (See  index:  /(a///..) 

To  consent  to  be  whipped.  Pahampds.    (See  index:  humpus.) 

To  consent  to  be  vanquished.  Patalo.     (See  index:  talo.) 

To  consent  to  be  slapped.  Patampal.     (See  index:  tatnjxd.) 

IV.  («)  With  the  adverbs  of  place,  and  roots  expressing  place,  pa  sig- 
nifies movement  to  or  from  what  is  denoted  by  the  root,  {b)  With  roots 
of  place  sa  is  added  to  the  particle,  forming  pum,  which  bisyllabic  parti- 
cle reduplicates  the  last  syllal)le  of  the  particle  for  the  present  and  future 
tenses.  The  initial  d  of  the  advei'bs  changes  to  r  after />«.  Ex.  {(t):  Pa- 
rini,  "come  here;"  ])aritu,  "come  here;"  pariydn,  "go  there;"  jxirooti, 
"go  there."  (See  index:  dim,  d'do,  diyan,  doov.)  These  four  adverbs 
admit  the  definites  i  and  an.  That  in  i  is  compounded  with  ka,  forming 
ika,  ikina.  In  may  be  used  if  compounded  with  magpa,  signifying  "to 
order  to  come  or  go."     (See  tables  and  index:  dito. ) 

Some  localities  are  to  be  found  where  the  last  syllal>le  of  the  particle  is 
reduplicated  with  these  adverbs  of  place  for  the  present  and  future  tenses, 
but  this  is  irregular  and  incorrect.  The  practice  is  unknown  to  the  earlier 
writers. 

The  four  adverbs  which  have  been  considered  are  also  further  conjugated 
with  um,  making  infinitives,  etc.  Ex.:  Pumarini,  pumarito,  "to  come 
here;"  pumariydn,  pumaroon,  "to  go  there." 

(6)  P«s((6d/m//,  "to  go  to  the  house."  (See  tables:  bdhay.)  Pasabukid, 
"to  go  to  the  country"  {^elds) ;  pasaddgat,  "to  go  to  sea;"  pasailog,  "to 
go  to  the  river;"  jjasabundok,  "to  go  to  the  mountains;"  pasa  Anitrica,  "to 
go  to  America;"  pasa  Kast'da,  "to  go  to  Spain."  Xapasaan  siya^  {Saan 
ang  tango  niydf)  (Where  did  he  go?)  Napatumjo  sa  Mayndd  (He  went 
to  Manila). 

V.  Pa  also  indicates  to  say  what  may  be  denoted  by  the  root,  but  with- 
out tlie  plurality  indicated  by  magpa.     Ex. : 

To  say  "yes."  Paoo.    Paoo  ka!  (Say  "yes!")    Na- 

paoo  ka  ,sa  kaniydf  (Did  you  tell 
him  "yes?") 

To  say  "no."  Paddi.     Padill     ka.'     (Say     "no") 

Ddl  rin  (No,  indeed);  var.  dlr). 
Ang  piimdiri  ian;  person  to  whom 
"no"  is  being  said.  Magpadiri; 
to  say  "no"  repeatedly.  Aitg 
plnagdirian;  person  to  whom  "  no  " 
has  been  said  often. 

To  say  "no."  Pahlndi.     Pahindl    ka    (kai/d)    (Say 

"no"). 

To  say  not  to  wish.  Paayao.     (See  index:  ayau.) 

To  say  "devil."  Padiablo.     (See  index:  diat/o.) 

To  call  "<!hicky-chicky."  Pakorukid. 

VI.  Pa,  prefixed  to  roots  denoting  bodily  positions,  forms  words  ex- 
pressing the  position  taken.     Ex. : 

Lengthwise;  lengthways.  Pahabd.     Putlin  mo  Ho  nang  paliabd 

(cut  this  lengthwise).  Mahabd, 
long. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  225 

Crosswise;  crossways.  Pahdlang. 

Lying  down;  j)rone  (position).  PaliUja.     (See  index:  lugd.) 

Lying  on  the  side  (jjosition).  Pahtg'did. 

Lying  on  the  face  (position).  Putaoh. 

Joying  on  the  back  (position).  PatUuuin.     (See  index:  tihaya.) 

On  foot;  afoot.  Patindiy.     (See  index:  tindig.) 

Seated  (position).  Paupu.     (See  index:  upu.) 

VII.  Pa,  prefixed  to  roots  denoting  articles  which  may  be  bought,  sent, 
carried,  sewn,  left,  lent,  etc.,  forms  nouns  indicating  what  affected  by  the 
action.  In  composition  these  nouns  take  the  nominative,  the  agent  the 
genitive  and  the  recipient  the  dative.     Ex. : 

What  brought.  Padala.     (See  index:  dala.) 

What  borrowed  or  lent  (not  money) .      Pahiram.    Ito^y  pahiram  .sa  akin  vang 

kaibigan  ninyo  (this  is  what  your 
friend  lent  me). 
What  left  as  an  inheritance.  Pamann.     (See  index:  vuma.) 

What  sewn.  Pataht.     (See  index:  talii.) 

VIII.  Some  roots,  such  as  knin,  eating;  and  /jimhi,  drinking,  are  not  clear 
when  used  with  pa  alone  in  this  sense,  and  are  conjugated  with  both  the 
particle  j>a  and  the  definite  of  magpa  (pa)  forming  papa.  Ex.:  Papakain 
ka  kay  Jiuni  (ask  Juan  to  give  you  something  to  eat).  Papainum  ka  kay 
Tonuts  (ask  Tomds  to  give  you  something  to  drink). 

IX.  Formerly  mapa,  with  roots  indicating  relatives,  signified  to  call 
others  by  such  names.  This  custom  exists  to  some  degree  yet.  Ex.: 
Mapaali,  to  call  "aunt."  }[ap)animo,  to  call  "grandfather"  (or  "grand- 
mother"). 

THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    "MAGPAK.\." 

I.  This  particle,  which  may  be  analyzed  into  paka  with  mag  prefixed, 
generally  signifies  to  do,  suffer  or  voluntarily  allow  what  may  be  denoted 
by  the  root,  and  has  two  forms  for  the  definite,  pagpaka  and  ]>aka.  Mag- 
pakd  and  pagpaka  form  the  present  and  future  tenses  in  a  peculiar  manner. 
The  last  syllable,  ka,  adheres  to  the  root  in  all  tenses,  and  pn  is  redupli- 
cated for  the  present  and  future.  The  Diag  of  vragpaka  changes  to  nag 
for  the  past  and  present  tenses.  When7)((Aa  is  used  with  a  root  it  is  not 
divided,  ihe  first  syllable  of  the  root  being  reduplicated  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  Paka  also  retains  pag  with  verbs  conjugated  primarily  with 
mag,  forming  the  prefix  pakapag.     Paka  admits  in  as  well  as  i  and  an. 

Roots  conjugated  with  magpaka  may  have  either  a  reflexive  or  transi- 
tive meaning,  or  both,  according  to  the  context. 

II.  For  the  conjugation  of  roots  with  magpaka,  see  the  tables:  niatay,  huti, 
sisi,  and  aral. 

JII.  Some  verbal  roots  conjugated  in  the  foregoing  sense  by  magpaka  are: 

To  allow  one's  self  to  be  insulted;     Magpakaapi. 
patronized. 

To  humble;  humiliate  or  lower  one's     Magpakahahd.     (See  index:  hahd.) 
self. 

To  satiate  one's  self.  Magpakabusog . 

To  adorn  one's  self.  Magpakahati.     Aug     kahinhinan    ay 

nagpapakahuti  sa  dalaga  (modesty 
befits  a  girl).  Ang  ipinagpupaka- 
buti  nang  dalagang  iydn  ay  nang 
siyd'y  mapuri  ( the  reason  why  that 
girl  is  adorning  herself  is  to  be 
admired). 

To  impoverish  one's  self  voluntarily.     Magpakadukhd.      Mapakadukhd,     to 

come  to  poverty. 

To  improve  or  reform  one's  self.  Magpakagaling.    (See  index:  j/dZ/m/.) 

6855—05 15 


226 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  diminish  (voluntarily). 
To  esteem  one's  self  highly. 
To  allow  one's  self  to   be    killed; 
(2)  to  commit  suicide. 


To  despise  one's  self. 

To  repent  (deeply). 

To  exert  one's  self;  to  make  efforts. 


To  enrich  one's  self. 


MagpakaVdt.     Mal'dt,  small;  little. 
Mar/pnkamahal.    ( See  index :  maJtal. ) 
Mcuipakamalny.     Ncujpalcamatay  aiit/ 
tdno  kusa  nii/d  (the  man  allowed 
himself  to  be  killed).       Nagpaka- 
matui/  ang  taga  ILtpdn  sa  kaniyang 
sarin    (the    Japanese    voluntarily 
killed    himself    [committed    sui- 
cide] ). 
Magpakammd.     (See  index:  saind.) 
Magpakasisi.     (See  index:  sisi.) 
Magpakatdpang.     TapcoTgan  {pakata- 
pang'in)   mo   ang  looh    mo    (exert 
yourself;  "brace  up").     (See  in- 
dex:  tdpang.) 
Magpakaydman.      (See    index:     yd- 
man.) 

IV.  As  usual,  /  stands  for  cause,  reason,  or  instrument  of  the  action  with 
magpaka,  and  an  for  the  place  or  the  object,  according  as  the  verb  for  the 
direct  object  admits  it  or  not  for  the  direct  object.     Ex.: 

To  take  exact  notice.  Magpakatandd.    Pakatandaan  mo  ang 

sinasahi  ko  sa  lyd  (pay  exact  atten- 
tion to  what  I  am  telling  you). 
(This  word  should  not  be  con- 
founded with  its  homonym  tandd, 
idea  of  age. ) 

V.  The  foregoing  sense  of  magpaka  generally  applies  to  actions  which  do 
not  go  beyond  the  subject  or  to  verbs  which  do  not  require  an  oljject  to 
complete  the  meaning;  but  when  used  with  verbs  admitting  a  direct  com- 
plement other  than  the  subject  or  capable  of  voluntariness,  7nagpaka  gives 
greater  force  or  intention  to  the  root.  In  this  signification  the  particle 
admits  in,  i,  and  an,  the  reduplication  being  generally  from  the  first 
syllable  of  the  root,  as  jmka  is  the  usual  form  of  the  definite  in  such  cases. 
Roots  conjugated  thus  must  be  capable  of  expressing  the  idea  of  more  or 
less.  Pag  is  retained  in  this  sense  with  mug  roots,  forming  pakapag  or 
pagpaku,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  in  certain  cases  pagpakapag  may  be 
formed.     Ex. : 


To  teach  earnestly. 


To  have  great  prudence. 
To  go  very  slowly. 


Magpakadral.  Pakaaralan  ninyo  ang 
maiTgd  batd  (try  to  teach  the  chil- 
dren earnestly ).  Magpakapagdral , 
to  study  earnestly.  Pagpakapa- 
garalan  ninyo  ang  wikang  Tagdlog 
(try  earnestly  to  study  the  Tagalog 
language).  MagpakapaiTgdral,  to 
preach  earnestly. 

Magpakabait. 

Magpakarahan  (from  dahan).  Mag- 
pakaralian  kang  Inmdkad  (walk 
very  slowly).  Pakarahnnin  mo 
ang  paghila  (throw  it  very  delib- 
erately). Dahanan  mo  iijang  gawd 
mo  (do  that  work  of  yours  slowly 
[carefully]).  Mapakarahan,  to 
slow  down;  to  become  quiet. 
Napakarahan  na  (it  has  become 
quiet  already;  it  has  slowed  down 
now).  Dumaftan,  to  go  away 
slowly.  Magdahan,  to  go  slowly. 
(See  index:  dahan.) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  227 

To  love  greatly.  Magpakagillo.      Pinakagigilio     komj 

Icapalid  na  babaye  (my  dearly  be- 
loved sister  J. 
To  guard  one's  self  well.  Magpakahujat. 

To  think  earnestly,  deeply.  Magpakamp.       Magpakauipisip,     to 

think  very  deeply.     (See  index: 
isip. ) 
To  arrange  well.  Magjmkahusay .     (See  index: /(((w?/.) 

To  rectify  well.  Mwipabdiud.     (See  index:  tuid.) 

To  tenqit  greatly.  Magpakatnkso.     (See  index:  tukm.) 

VI.  By  reduplicating  the  root,  roots  capable  of  expressing  the  idea  of 
more  or  less  aotjuire  still  greater  force  or  intensity  with  magpaka.  They 
are  generally  used  in  the  delinite  with  this  construction,  and  the  redupli- 
cation does  not  extend  beyond  the  first  two  syllables  of  the  root,  according 
to  the  general  rule.  Ex.:  }fagpakadaUdali(d,  "to  suffer  intensely  or  to 
endure  greatly. ' '  Paka tKipisipIn  mo,  ' '  think  intensely. ' '  Pakasipagsipagin, 
"take  the  greatest  of  care;  care  for  it  sedulously." 

YII.  Dropping  the  ka  from  jKika,  there  remains  pa,  which  pronounced 
long  and  almost  as  paa,  has  the  same  meaning  as  paka,  but  should  not  be 
confounded  with  pa  (the  definite  of  magpa),  pa  (the  particle),  nor  with 
pa,  "yet."  It  is  generally  used  in  the  imperative.  Ex.:  Pabuksan  mo 
(open  wider  [or  quicker]).  Papalo  mo  (strike  harder).  Pataponan  mo 
(throw  it  with  more  force  [or  quicker]).  (See  index:  Bukds;  paid;  and 
tapon.) 

Vlli.  A  further  use  of  magpaka  with  nouns  or  verbs  expressing  time  is 
to  signify  to  persevere  or  remain  until  such  time,  doing  what  may  be 
denoted  by  the  root  used.     This  signification  admits  of  in,  i,  and  an.     JEx.. 

To until  morning.  Magpakadrao.      (See   index:    drao.) 

To until  evening.  3fagpakahapon.  (See  index:  hapon.) 

To all  night  awake.  Magpakapuyat.     Ang   ipinagpapaka- 

puyat  ko'y  itong  gawd  (This  work  is 
the  cause  of  my  having  to  remain 
awake  all  night).  Itong  silid  ifo'y 
ang  piaagpakapuyatan  ko  (This 
room  is  the  place  where  I  remained 
awake  [or  watched]  all  night). 

IX.  When  an  accidental  or  fortuitous  action  is  to  be  expressed  with 
magpaka  the  g  is  dropped,  making  mapaka,  an  analogous  particle  to  ma. 
Pinaka,  formed  from  paka  and  in,  should  not  be  confounded  with  pinakd , 
used  in  a  very  different  sense.     (See  index:  pinakd.)     Ex.: 

To  multiply.  Mapakarayni  (from  dami).     Applied 

to  animals,  etc.  (See  index:  dami.) 
To  come  to  poverty.  Mapakadukhd.    (See  index:  dukhd.) 

To  grow  greatly.  Mapakalaki.     (See  index:  Za^-?.) 

To  be  delayed  more  than  usual.  Mapakaldwig. 

THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    "mAKI." 

I.  This  particle,  known  as  the  sixth  to  Spanish  grammarians,  has 
^«A-iforthe  definite,  and  reduplicates  the  second  syllable  {ki)  of  the  par- 
ticle for  the  present  and  future  tenses.  The  pluperfect  and  future  perfect 
tenses  are  wanting,  ^faki  changes  to  naki  for  the  past  and  present  tenses, 
and  paki  takes  in  for  the  same,  forming  pinaki. 

II.  The  principal  signification  of  maki  with  roots  capable  of  expressing 
companionship,  etc.,  is  joining  with,  accompanying  another,  interference 
or  intermeddling  in  what  may  be  denoted  by  the  root. 

III.  Maki  may  be  combined  with  mn,  mac,  man,  magpapa,  and  ]>a,  as  well 
as  with  itself  (paki).     There  are  some  verbs  which  resemble  maki  in  form. 


228 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  join  with  in  play  or  gaming. 


To  join  in  fishing  with  a  casting  net 
called  "  dala." 


such  as  pakindbang,  ixtkm'uj,  etc.,  which  are  classed  as  um  verbal  forms, 
and  should  be  carefully  distinguished.     Ex.: 

To  join  with  or  interfere  in  writing.     MaMsulat  (frum  numulat).     Ijnnaki- 

kisuhit  ko  ito  doon  (I  am  putting 
this  in  so  it  may  be  written  there). 
lyang  maiTijd  sulat  in/  pakimilatdii 
mo  nito  (Put  this  in  to  Ije  written 
wdth  those  letters).  Muktj>acj]>(i- 
sulut;  to  join  (or  interfere  with)  in 
ordering  to  write  (from  magpani'i- 
lat). 
Makip<iglur6{irova.7naglar6;  to  play  or 
gamble;  see  tables:  laru).  Also: 
I'akipaglaroan  tiw  si  Pedro  (Play 
with  Pedro).  (With pa)  Papaki- 
laroinmo  si  Pedro  sa  kan'njn  (Tell 
[make]  Pedro  play  with  him). 
Makipandain  (from  mandcda;  to  fish 
for  a  living  thus).  Ditmala;  to  fish 
(occasionally)  with  a  "dala." 
Magdala,  to  use  a  "dala."  Maka- 
dala;  to  be  able  to  catch  anything 
with  a  "dala." 
To  join  with  in  saying  "yes."  Makipauo  {irom  ])a6o;  to  say  "yes.") 

To  join  in  a  conversation  uninvited.      Makij^akiitsap  (from  makiusaj)). 

IV.  See  tables:  nmaral;  magdrcd,  and  siimakai/. 

V.  Maki  by  itself  admits  only  of  i  and  an  in  the  definite,  /represents 
the  reason,  cause,  or  object  of  the  action,  and  an  the  jserson  interfered  or 
meddled  with,  or  joined,  accompanied,  etc.  For  the  conjugation  with  /' 
see  the  tables:  sulat  and  humatid.     For  the  definite  with  an  see  maglaru. 

VI.  In  is  only  used  with  maki  in  combination  with  magpa  (j>a).  Ex.: 
Papakigawhi  mo  ang  alila  mo  sa  vunlgd  tduo  ii/dn  (Tell  your  servant  to  join 
those  men  in  their  task).  See  also  makipaglaru  in  Paragraph  III,  preced- 
ing, and  tables. 

VII.  Some  roots  conjugated  with  the  principal  signification  of  maki  are: 

Mnkidral.  (See  tables.)  Makipagd- 
ral,  to  join  or  meddle  Avith  study- 
ing. (See  tables.)  Makipanijdral, 
to  join  or  meddle  with  preaching. 

Makipagduaij.     (See  index:  duay.)  . 

Makirdmay  (from  ddmay). 

Makihatid.     (See  tables.) 


To  join  or  meddle  with  teaching. 


To  pick  a  quarrel. 

To  claim  a  ]iart  in;  to  participate. 

To  carry  along  with;  to  join;  to  in- 
terfere. 

To  embark  with.  Makisakay.     (See  tables.) 

To    tlirust    oneself    into    the    com-     Makisamd. 
pany  of  another. 

To  thrust  oneself  into  a  dispute  or 
argument. 

To  join  with  in  weeping.  Makilatigis 

To  join  (or  meddle)  in  pleasure.  Makitud. 

VIII.  An  is  sometimes  suffixed  to  roots  conjugated  with  maki  to  express 
intensity  of  the  idea  denoted  by  the  root.  Pag  is  generally  retained  in 
expressions  of  this  class.     Ex. : 

To  mock  greatly;    to  make   fun  of,     Makipagbiroan.     (See  index:    bird.) 

maliciously. 
To  join  eagerly  in  play  or  gambling.     Makipaglaroan. 
To  thrust  oneself   into    an  alterca-     Makipngsagutan. 

tion;  to  answer  with  vehemence 


Makitalo.     (See  index:  talo.) 


(See  index:  taiigis.) 
(See  index:  tud.) 


(See  index:    laru.) 
And^t  nakikipagsa- 


gxdan  sa  kapidbdhay  mof     ("Why 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  229 

are  you  getting  into  an  altercation 
with  your  neighbor?)  Sumuyut; 
to  answer;  to  reply. 

To  thrust  oneself  into  a  conversa-  Makipagmlitaan.  (See index:  saH/tJ.) 
tion ;  to  interrupt  a  report. 

To  hate  intensely;  to  detest.  Makipagtaniman  {iromtanim).     Not 

to  be  confounded  with  its  homo- 
nym, tanim,  "to  sow."  Nakikita- 
nhnan  si  Juan  kay  Pedro  (Juan  de- 
tests [hates]  Pedro  intensely). 
Houag  kaiig  niakipagtaniiiian  sa  ka- 
pidhdhay  7no  (Do  not  detest  [hate] 
your  neighbor  so). 

IX.  The  asking  for  such  articles  of  food,  etc.,  as  are  generally  exchanged 
among  neighbors  for  cooking  and  household  work  is  expressed  by  maki, 
with  the  root  denoting  what  may  be  asked  for.  A  small  quantity  is  always 
understood.  The  cause  is  expressed  with  l  and  the  person  asked  by  an, 
should  the  definite  be  used.  In  is  used  only  in  combination  with  magpa 
{pa).     Ex.: 

To  ask  for  a  little  wine.  Makidluk  (from  dlak).    This  word  is 

from  the  Arabic  araq,  from  araqa, 
"to  sweat;  perspire."  It  is  found 
in  English  as  arrack. 

T(i  ask  for  a  few  coals  (fire).  Maklapuy. 

To  ask  for  a  little  salt.  Makiasin.     (See  index:  asm.) 

To  ask  for  a  little  rice.  Makibigds.     Ankikibigds  ako  sana  sa 

inyo,  pu  (I  would  ask  you  for  a 
little  rice,  sir).  Sino  ang  ipinakiki- 
bigds  mof  (Who  are  you  asking  it 
for?)  Aking  ipinakikibigds  ang  ina 
koiig  may  sakit  (I  am  asking  for  the 
rice  for  my  mother,  who  is  ill). 
Paid/     (Is  that  so!) 

X.  With  roots  verbalized  into  actions,  maki  denotes  asking  that  the 
action  expressed  by  the  root  be  done  for  the  subject.     Ex. : 

To  ask  another  to  reach  something.      Makidbut.     (See  index:  abut. 
To  thank  for.  Matihim]t  {ironxliumimjt;  to  request; 

see  index:  Jringi). 

XI.  With  nouns  denoting  partition  vtakl  signifies  to  ask  for  what  may 
be  denoted  by  the  root;  and  with  ordinal  numbers,  in  using  which  the 
initial  letter  i  is  dropped,  maki  signifies  to  ask  for  the  part  designated  by 
the  ordinal  used.     Ex. : 

To  ask  for  an  inheritance.  Makimana  (see  index:  mana). 

To  ask  for  a  part  or  piece  of  any-  ^[akipi.'^allg.  Magpisavg;  to  break 
thing  (as  bread).  up  and  divide  a  cracker  or  bread. 

Magjiisdtig  kild  (let  us  break  it  up 
and  divide  it). 
To  ask  for  a  fifth,  tenth,  etc.  Makikalima;  viakikapuo. 

XII.  With  roots  denoting  work  which  may  be  joined  in  by  more  than 
one,  maki  sometimes  expresses  the  idea  of  asking  to  join  in  such  work. 
Ex.:  Si  Juan  ayvakikatutig  sa  dkin  (Juan  asked  me  to  help  him  in  getting 
some  water).  The  particle  ka,  expressing  companionship,  is  prefixed  to 
the  root. 

XIII.  Some  roots  commencing  with  h,  p,  s,  and  t  change  with  maki  in  a 
similar  manner  as  with  man]  when  used  in  the  signification  of  "to  ask,  re- 
quest," etc.     Ex.: 


230 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  ask  for  news. 

To  ask  for  a  passage  (as  on  a  vessel). 


MdJdmalitd  (from  halitd;  see  index: 

hnlitd). 
Makinakay  (from  sakay). 


XIV.  With  roots  signifying  nationality,  race,  state,  condition,  occupa- 
tion, profession,  etc.,  maki  is  sometimes  used  to  signify  that  one  acts  like, 
bears  himself  like,  or  resembles  what  is  denoted  by  the  root.  This  idea, 
however,  is  generally  otherwise  expressed,  as  some  roots  used  thus  are  not 
clear  unless  fully  explained  by  the  context. 

XV.  With  ma,  maki  has  a  neuter  meaning  similar  to  that  borne  by  ma 
alone.     Ex. : 


To  appear  like  a  noble  (casually). 


To  act  like  or  resemble  an  American. 
To  act  like  or  resemble  a  Spaniard. 
To  act  like  or  resemble  a  Tagalog. 


To  act  like  or  resemble  a  person. 

To  act  like  a  woman. 

To  act  like  a  man;  to  run  after  men. 

To  act  like  a  beast. 

To  conform  to  in  customs. 


Xapakimnhal.  XapakikimaJuil  ang 
alipin  (The  slave  looks  like  a  noble 
[has  become  so  casually] ). 

Makiamericano. 

Makicastxla. 

Makitagctlog.  Nakikitagalog  Hong 
tauo  sa  pa)7gu)Tl/dsap  (This  man 
resembles  a  Tagalog  in  his  man- 
ner of  speaking). 

Makitauo.  Nakikitauo  ang  amo  (lui- 
goy)  (The  monkey  acts  like  a  j^er- 
son). 

Makibabaye.  Xakibabaye  si  Juan 
(Juan  acted  like  a  woman) .  This 
also  means  to  run  after  women. 

Mukilalaki.  Xakihdaki  Hong  baba- 
ye)ig  ito  (This  woman  acted  like  a 
man). 

Makihdyop.  Nakihayop  itongthio  ltd 
(This  man  acted  like  a  beast). 

MakiugaU. 


THE    INDEFINITE    PAKTICLE        MAGKA. 

I.  Magka,  the  ninth  particle  of  the  Spanish  writers  upon  Tagalog,  may 
be  analyzed  into  inag  and  /.r/,  one  of  the  definites  of  via.  This  particle 
generally  expresses  the  idea  of  having  (or  being)  what  was  not  had  or  pos- 
sessed (or  existed  as  a  state)  before.  As  a  rule,  magka  refers  to  condition 
or  state,  while  man  refers  more  to  the  action  by  which  a  state  or  ccmdi- 
tion  is  brought  about. 

The  second  syllable  of  the  particle  is  reduplicated  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses,  while  m  changes  to  n  for  the  past  and  present,  following  the 
usual  rule.  There  are  a  few  exceptions,  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  being 
reduplicated  in  some  words.     (See  tables:  utang.) 

/definite  expresses  the  cause  or  reason  of  the  action,  while  an  stands  for 
either  place  or  person,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  action.  (See  tallies: 
utang. ) 

Some  very  correct  and  widely  used  expressions  are  made  by  using  an 
with  magka.     Ex. : 


To  look  much  at  things;  to  inspect 
closely. 

To  amuse  one's  self. 


(See  index:  pisan;  tipcm.) 


Umaninao.  Wald  akong  mkat  pagka- 
kaaninaiian  (There  will  be  noplace 
where  I  will  be  able  to  look  at  it 
[inspect  it;  study  it  out]). 

Mtgkalibang.  Waht  siUtng  pinagka- 
libangan  (There  was  no  place  where 
they  could  amuse  themselves). 
Malilibang,  to  be  anuised ;  diverted. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


231 


Some  roots  conjugated  in  the  foregoing  signification  with  iriaijka  are: 


To  have  children. 

To  possess  prudence. 

To  have  crocodiles  again  (as  a  river). 


To  be  laden  with  fruit. 


To  have  (there). 
To  have  reason. 


To  be  lucky;  to  have  luck. 

To  have  rice  again  (also  to  have  much 

rice). 
To  err;  to  sin. 
To  forbid. 

To  have  monev  again. 
To  be  ill. 


To  have  enough. 


To  have  gray  hair. 
To  owe  a  debt. 


Mnykaanak. 

Magkabait. 

Magkahuaya.  Nagkakabuaya  va  itorig 
'dog  (This  river  is  infested  with 
crocodiles  again). 

MagkabuiTija.  NagkabiuTIja  na  liong 
kalioy  iia  itof  ( Has  this  tree  borne 
fruit  already?)  Jlindt  ]>a  nagka- 
buwja  (As  vt't  it  has  not  borne 
fruiit). 

Magkaroon.     (See  index:  doon.) 

Magkaisip.  Nagkakamp  na  Hong 
b(dang  itof  (Has  this  child  reason 
yet?  [i.  e.,  has  it  yet  arrived  at  the 
age  of  reason] ). 

Md'/kdpalad. 

Magkapdlay. 

Magkasala. 

Magkakasala. 

Magkasalapi. 

Magkamkit.  Avg  ipagkasakit,  the 
cause  of  illness.  Ano  ang  ipinag- 
kasakit  mof  ( What  made  you  ill? ) 
Pasaktcui,  to  be  pained.  Ang 
papagkasakt'm,  one  ill  from  his  own 
fault,  also  a  sick  person. 

Magkasiyd.  Waldpu,  hindt  nagkaka- 
siyd  sa  kaniyang  pagkabi'thay  (No, 
sir;  he  does  not  get  enough  to  live 
on). 

Magkai'iban. 

Magkautang.     (See  tables:  utang.) 


n.  The  casual,  accidental,  or  chance  assemblage  of  many  people  or 
things,  even  though  immaterial,  is  sometimes  expressed  by  viagka.  The 
particle  denotes  a  plurality  of  subjects  in  such  cases,  as  opposed  to  a  plural- 
ity of  acts,  as  expressed  by  some  other  particles.     Ex. : 


To  quarrel  (as  two  or  more). 

To  be  equal;  to  coincide;  to  accord. 

To  meet  casually;  to  gather  (as  a 

crowd). 
To  assemble  casually  (as  a  crowd). 
To  meet  casually  (as  a  crowd). 


Magkaauay 
Magkaayon. 
Magkasalubong 

bong. ) 

MagkasciDia.      (See  index:  ftmiia.) 
Magkatipon.     (See  index:  Upon.) 


(See  index:  dnay.) 
(See    index:    skIh- 


III.   Magka  also  indicates  universality  or  plurality  of  subjects  suffering 
from  or  afiected  in  some  way  by  what  is  denoted  by  the  root.     Ex. : 

To  suffer  from  a  typhoon.  Magkabagyo. 

To  suffer  from  an  epidemic  of  small-  ikigkabuli'itong. 

pox. 

To  suffer  from   a  famine   (also  fur  Mugkagidum. 

many  to  be  hungry). 

To  suffer  from  a  conflagration.  Magkasnnog. 

To  enjoy  a  holiday.  M<igk(dud. 

To  have  a  riot  or  tunnilL  Magkagido. 

To  be  squeezed  or  pressed  in  a  crowd.  Magkadagon. 


282 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


IV.  Another  use  of  viagla  is  to  express  an  nnintentional  or  casual  error 
in  what  niaj*  be  noted  by  the  root.  The  imperative  is  made  with  maid 
or  bakd  ((j.  v.).     Ex.: 


To   say  one   thing   accidentally  for 
another. 

To  err  in  counting. 

To  equivocate  accidentally. 


MdCfkaihA.  Nagknihd  siyd  (He  acci- 
dentally said  one  thing  for  an- 
other). 

MagkaUmang. 

Magkumalt.  Nagkaimtli  ako  (I 
equivocated  accidentally). 
Houag  rnoiig  akalaing  ako'y  nag- 
kakaniali  (Don't  you  think  f  made 
any  mistake). 

V.  Magka  is  also  used  to  express  self-deception  l)y  the  sight,  hearing,  etc., 
the  definite  past  tense  with  an  sufhxed  being  taken  as  the  root.  For  the 
present  tense  the  first  syllable  of  the  root  is  reduplicated  and  not  the  second 
syllable  of  the  particle.     Ex. : 

To  be  deceived  bv  the  hearing. 


To  be  deceived  by  the  sight. 


Magkarijigan.  XagkarirhTgan  ako 
(My  hearing  deceives  me).  (See 
index:  diwjig.) 

Magkakita.     (See  index:  kitd.) 


YI.  A  further  use  of  magka  is  with  the  urn  infinitive  of  some  verbal 
roots  and  some  adverbs  of  place,  with  which  infinitives  magka  expresses 
the  idea  of  making  the  said  movement  or  going  to  or  from  the  place  indi- 
cated by  the  adverV)  for  some  particular  reason  or  cause.     Ex. : 


Magkasumunod  (from  sunod).  Also 
to  follow  wherever  another  may 
go.     (See  index:  sunod.) 

Magkaduiiiito.     (See  index:  dito.) 


To  follow  (or  obey)  for  a  particular 
cause  or  reason. 

To  be  here  for  a  i>articular  cause  or 
reason. 

VII.  Doubling   the  root  intensifies   the  meaning  with  magka   in  some 
cases.     Ex. : 

To  be  verv  late  or  tardv. 


To  be  broken  into  very  small  pieces. 


To  be  finished  or  concluded  com- 
pletely. 

To  be  completely  broken  up  (as  a 
rope  or  cord). 

To  be  completely  destroyed. 

To  be  torn  into  tatters  (as  clothes, 
etc.). 

VIII.  Sometimes  ka,  the  definite  of  ma,  combines  with  jxxg  to  denote 
the  source  of  something.      (See  index:  sira. ) 

THE  IXDEFIXITE    PARTICLE    "m.\GIX." 


Magkabdlambdlam.      Xagkakahalam- 

halam    ka     (You    are     very   late 

[tardy]). 
Magkalansaglansag     (from     lansag). 

Litmansag,  to  break  anything  into 

small  pieces. 
Magkalutaslutaa  (from  IuIuk). 

Magkapatidpaiid    (from    patid;    see 

index). 
Magkasirdmra  (from  )ilrd;  see  index). 
Magkawindangiclndang   (from    wind- 

dng). 


I.  Magin,  which  Minguella  thinks  a  "disguised  passive"  in  conception 
reduplicates  the  gi  of  the  last  syllable  of  the  particle  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  It  also  changes  m  to  n  for  tlie  past  and  ]>resent  indefinite. 
It  expre.«ses  the  conversion  or  transformation,  either  gradual  or  sudden,  of 
one  thing  into  another,  as  a  general  rule,  the  root  being  tbat  into  which 
the  other  thing  is  converted  or  transformed.     Magin  is  also  used  to  express 


TAGALOa    LANGUAGE. 


233 


such  ideas  as  "to  beget,"  etc.  Being  a  neuter  particle  generally  there  is 
no  imiierative  in  such  cases,  as  there  can  be  no  volition  in  the  action  ex- 
cejit  with  personal  pronouns. 

II.  For  slow,  self-converting  processes  udi  is  generallj'  used,  but  in  some 
cases  the  use  of  magin  is  correct.  Besides  the  indefinite  the  definites  with 
i  and  an  exist.     (See  tables:  alak.) 

As  magla  generally  denotes  a  state  or  condition,  it  admits  ika  with  some 
roots,  and  in  combination  with  jja,  the  definite  of  magpa,  it  also  admits  i)i 
with  others.     (See  tables:  dapat.) 

III.  As  will  be  noted,  magin  is  commonly  used  to  express  such  acts  as 
the  turning  of  wine  into  water  by  miraculous  agency,  etc.,  as  well  as  natural 
processes.     Some  of  the  roots  usually  conjugated  with  magin  are: 


To  be  converted  into  wine. 

To  be  converted  into  gall  or  bile. 

To  be  turned  into  stone;  to  become 
petrified. 

To  be  converted  into  vinegar. 
To  be  begotten. 


To  be  made  man. 


Maginalak.     (See  tables:  dlak.) 

Maginapdu.  Nagiginapdo  avg  a  king 
bibig  (my  mouth  tastes  like  gall). 

Maginbato.  Ang  asana  ni.  Loth  ay 
naginbatong  asm  (the  wife  of  Lot 
became  a  rock  of  salt). 

Maginsukd.     (See  tables:  sukd.) 

Maginanak  (from  anak,  "child"). 
Naginanak  ni  Abraham  si  Isaac;  at 
naginanak  ni  Isaac  si,  Jacob;  at  na- 
ginanak ni  Jacob  si  Judd  at  kani- 
yang  matTgd  kapatid  (Abraham  be- 
gat Isaac;  and  Isaac  begat  Jacob; 
and  Jacob  begat  Judas  and  his 
brethren)— Matth.  U,  2. 

Magintduo.  Ang  anak  nang  Dios  ay 
nagintduo  (the  son  of  God  was 
made  man).  (But  if  volition  is  in- 
cluded other  jiarticles  or  exjjres- 
sions  must  be  used. )  Ang  anak 
nang  Dios  ay  nagkatauang  tduo  (the 
son  of  God  assumed  the  form  of 
man). 

Magintagdlog.  Nagigintdgalog  ang 
capita n  sa  paiujatTgusap  (the  cap- 
tain resembles  (or  seems  to  be)  a 
Tagalog  by  his  speech). 

IV.  It  should  be  noted  that  nagin  in  the  past  tenses  is  the  only  sense 
which  can  really  be  said  to  denote  complete  conversion,  etc.,  the  present 
and  future  tenses  conveying  the  idea  of  "seems  to  Vje,"  "may  be,"  and 
"might  be,"  respectively. 

V.  Magin  is  also  used  in  a  neuter  sense  to  express  the  assumption  of 
office,  states,  conditions  of  mind,  morals,  or  body,  etc.,  if  intention  is  not 
meant,  in  which  case  other  particles  are  used. 


To  become  a  Tagalog. 


To  become  "presidente." 


To  become  just  or  virtuous. 
To  become  a  miser. 

To  become  worthy. 


Maginpresidente.  Naginpresidenie  si 
Gat  Simeon  at  sakd  nagingobernador 
(Don  Simeon  became  presidente 
and  afterwards  governor). 

Maginbanal. 

Maginmardmot  (from  ruardmot,  mi- 
ser; see  ddinot). 

Maginddpat  (from  ddpat;  see  tables: 
ddpat).  Mardpat,  fair;  just;  de- 
serving. Karaptan,  merit;  deserts. 
Ang  ikapagin ddpat,  the  reason  or 
cause  of  being  worthy. 


234  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

To  be  converted  into  an  animal.  Magi)ili('n/op.     Matjlinyo/),  to  sell,  deal 

in,  or  raise  animals.  Ilayopan,  cor- 
ral for  animals;  j)en.  Knhnyopan, 
))rntishness.  A)ii/  jxigkahtn/aj), 
brntality. 

To  become  an  habitnal  litigant  (bar-  MfKi'nijKdw'isap.  Naghipulausup  sign 
rator).  (he  has  become  an  habitual  liti- 

gant). 

To  become  deaf.  Maginhingi. 

To  become  blind.  Maginbulag. 

To  become  dumb.  Maginpipi. 

VI.  With  some  routs  magin  may  express  the  idea  of  "to  be."     Ex.: 

To  ])e  the  motive  or  cause.  Magindahikhi.      ltd   ang    nagindahi- 

Idn  (this  was  the  reason).     Ito  ang 

nagigindaliilnn  (this  is  the  cause). 
To  befall.  Maginpalad.     An  )  Lagn  (tug  magighi- 

jialdd  kof  (What  will  mv  luck  be? 

[What  will  befall  me'?])" 
To  turn  out  to  be  true.  Maginlotoo.     Xagintotno  ang  sinabi  mo 

sa  akin  (what  you  told  me  turned 

out  to  ))e  true). 
To  be  a  servant.  MaginalUa.     Jtnng  taiio  it(j'y  magigin- 

cdilci  ninyij  (this  man  will  be  your 

servant). 

VII.  The  idea  of  volition  is  sometimes  admissible  with  magin  when  used 
with  personal  pronouns.     Ex.: 

To  be  thine.  Maginiyo. 

To  be  mine.  Magindkin.     Ak(V y  maglginiyo't  iki'io 

ay  magigindkin  (I  will  be  yours 
and  you  will  be  mine). 

VIII.  (a)  Magin  is  also  used  in  combination  with  the  interrogative 
adverbs  ildnf  (how  many?)  and  magkanof  (how  much?)  and  with  the 
answers  thereto,  (h)  With  magin  prefixed  to  a  number  and  na  following 
it  the  completion  of  the  period  named  is  denoted.  Magin  expresses  the 
idea  of  "about"  in  these  cases.  Ex.:  (a)  MagiginiJdn  sUdf  (about  how 
many  will  there  be?)  Magiginildn  ang  puroroonf  (about  how  many  will 
go  there?)  Magigindalavang  puo  (about  twent}-).  ^[agiginmagkano  itdf 
(How  much  will  this  be  worth?)  (/>)  Rung  maginisang  budn  na  (After 
about  a  month).  Nang  maginilang  drao  (after  a  few  days).  Kiing  magin- 
sangtaon  na  (after  about  a  year). 

IX.  Magin    may    be    used    sometimes    in    the    sense    of    "belt"    or 

"either" "or."      Ex.:     Maginito;    maginiydn    (be    it    this    or    be   it 

that).  Maginlalaki  siyd;  maginbabaye  (he  it  man  or  be  it  woman).  Ma- 
gimTgayon;  maginbukas  ay  paroroon  aku  (either  to-day  or  to-morrow  1  will 
have  to  go  there). 

THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    "MAGSI." 

I.  This  particle,  which  changes  initial  m  to  n  for  the  indefinite  past  and 
present,  reduplicates  the  last  syllable  of  the  particle  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  It  has  all  three  definites,  and  may  be  combined  with  all 
other  particles,  which  are  placed  between  it  and  the  root,  except  maka  and 
ma  definite  in  the  sense  of  power,  which  precede  it.  (See  tables:  alis; 
gawd;  tapon,  and  kidia. )  It  has  no  other  signification  than  to  denote  a 
plurality  or  universality  of  subjects  in  connection  with  the  verbal  action. 
Naturally  there  is  no  singular  number.  Xgd  may  be  inserted  after  the 
first  two  letters  of  the  particle  to  indicate  an  extreme  degree  of  plurality. 

See  iahles:  pagdral.     Ex.: 

To  teach  (many).  Magsidral.      Magsipagdral,   to  study 

(many).     ^1»^  ma)~gd  batd  dito  sa 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


235 


To  confi'.-s  (niiiiiy). 

Togo  <uit  (many). 

To  look;  behold,  etc.  (many). 

To  enter;  come  in  (many). 

To  laugh  (many). 


h(ii/<in  ito'j/  magsisipagaral  na  laliat 
(all  the  children  herein  this  town 
are  studying).  Aug  mniTi/d  hala 
nitong  esruelahdnuaiTgagxiaipdgaral 
(all  the  children  in  this  school 
are  learning  [or  studying]).  Mag- 
sipaiu/dral,  to  preach  (many). 
MoigagsipaiTgdral,  to  preach  (by  a 
great  number). 

Magsipagcumjnsal.  To  hear  confes- 
sions (many  priests(;  mag.^lpagpa- 
cumpisal.     (See  index:  ciunpl><ul.) 

Magsilabds.  MagsUahds  haiioiig  laliat 
na  naririto  so  looh  (all  of  you  who 
are  inside  go  out). 

Magsipanood.  Bdkit  ipinagsisipandod 
nild  (dig  ddgat  igavg  mam/d  tdvo 
iydn/  (Why  are  those  men  look- 
ing at  the  sea  for?) 

Magsipdmk.  Magnpdsok  kagong  lahat 
na  naririyang  icalang  ga  wd :  ( Come 
in  all  of  you  who  are  out  there 
doing  nothing  [or  without  work] ). 

MagxiUma. 


THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE         MAGPATI. 

I.  This  particle  is  little  used,  and  besides  the  usual  change  of  m  to  n  for 
the  ])ast  and  present  indefinite  reduplicates  the  second  syllable  {pa)  of  the 
particle  for  the  present  and  future  tenses.  It  is  used  with  roots  express- 
ing the  idea  of  motion  or  positions  of  the  body,  and  signifies  to  perform 
such  motions  or  take  such  positions  voluntaril}-,  and  with  briskness  or 
suddenly.  If  such  sudden  motion  occur  or  jiosition  be  assumed  involun- 
tarily, the  g  is  dropped,  forming  mapaii,  equal  in  meaning  to  majxt.  The 
definites  with  i  (ika)  in  the  sense  of  cause,  and  an  (Jiun)  for  place  exist. 
(See  tables:  luhod.)  Ex.: 


To  prostrate  one's  self  quickly. 
T<i  lie  down  quickly;  to  throw  one- 
self down. 
To  fall  on  one's  knees. 


To  turn  the  back  abruptly. 
To  spring  to  the  feet. 

To  sit  down  suddenly. 


Magpatirapd  (from  dapd). 
Magpatihigd.      Mngpalilugd    ku    (lie 

down  quickly). 
Magpatiluhod.    Ang  ikapagpatilvhod: 

the  cause  or  reason  for  falling  on 

the    knees.     Ang  pagpatduhordn: 

the  place  where  or  person  knelt 

to.     (See  tables.) 
Magpatdalikod.      To    do    the    same 

without  intention,  mapalitalikod. 
Magpatitin  d  ig.     Xagpupa  I  it  in  dig  s  ii/d 

(he  is  springing  to  his  feet).     Xa- 

papafitindig  ako  (I  sprang  to  my 

feet  unconsciously). 
Magpatiupo.     To  sit  down  suddenly 

without  meaning  to:  mapatiupu. 


THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE  "mANHI." 

I.  This  particle  beside  the  change  from  m  to  n  for  the  past  and  present 
indefinite,  reduplicates  the  second  syllable  (/)/)  of  the  particle  for  the  present 
and  future  tenses.  This  particle  is  used  to  express  verbs  of  searching  for 
minutely,  for  those  expressing  the  idea  of  removing  dirt,  etc.,  from  the 
face  or  body,  and  for  miscellaneous  ideas  which  will  be  better  seen  from 
the  examples.  Certain  letters  beginning  roots  are  UKjdified  by  manlii,  the 
same  as  they  are  by  man.     The  definites  with  i  and  panhi,  in  the  sense  of 


236 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


cause,  with  an  and  either  panhl  or  hi  in  the  sense  of  place,  and  with  In 
mid  either  panhi  or  hi  for  ordinary  definite  sentences  exist.  (See  tables: 
matay;  rnalay;  tiny  a.) 

II.  A  reciprocal  form  of  many  of  the  verbs  conjugated  with  manhi  may 
be  formed  with  an  suffixed  or  with  maylii  in  place  of  manhl,  retaining  an  as 
a  suffix,  however.     Ex. : 


To  search  for  carefulh';  to  glean. 


To  peck  here  and  there  (as  a  bird  in 

search  of  grain). 
To  search   for  grains   of   metals  or 

mineral.*. 

To  wash  one'.s  face;  to  remove  stains, 
smudges,  etc. 

To  comb  the  mustache. 

To  pick  the  teeth. 

To  clean  the  ears. 
To  clean  the  eyes. 

To   treat  swelled  eyelids   or   wash 
them. 


To  clean  the  nails. 

To  cleanse  from  head  lice. 


To   follow   by   trailing;   to   hold  in 
memory  (met.). 


To  rebel:  revolt. 

To  avenge  or  take  revenge. 


To  peddle;  to  sell  bad  goods. 
To  act  like  a  child. 


To  tell  the  fortune  l)y  the  palm. 


Manhimalay  (from  pdlay,  "  un- 
husked  rice  "  ).  Panhimalayin  ( hi- 
malayin)  mo  any  iyony  kakanin 
(look  for  [glean]  what  you  have 
to  eat).  Any  gutma  ay  any  ipi- 
nanhihimdlay  niyd  (hunger  is  the 
cause  of  his  gleaning).  Any  biikid 
ni  Juan  ay  any  pinanhimalayan  niyd 
(he  was  gleaning  [he  gleaned]  in 
the  field  of  Juan). 

Manhinukd  (from  tukd). 

Manhimidos  {irom  pulos,  "all  of  one 
color").  Fiilos  also  means  the 
grains  themselves. 

Manhddmos  (from  Idmos,  "stain, 
smudge").  The  root  hildmos  is 
from  this  combination. 

ManJiiinisai/  (from  mviay,  "  mus- 
tache").' 

Manldnim/a  (from  tiiTya,  "what  ad- 
heres to  the  teeth".     See  tables). 

Manhi  nidi  (from  tutuli,  "earwax"). 

Manhimutd  (from  mutd,  "secretion 
of  the  eye"). 

Manhimokto  (from  pokto,  "swelling 
or  inflammation  of  the  eyelids")^ 
Fanioktohin,  a  person  frequently 
afflicted  thus. 

3IanhiiTyok6  (from  koko,  "nail, 
claw"). 

ManliiiTgiita  (from  kidu,  "head 
louse  " ) .  ManhiiTgutuhan  or  may- 
hiiTyiduhan,  to  cleanse  each  other 
thus.     Manhinoma,  to   cleanse  of 

.  body  lice.  Tomahin,  person  af- 
flicted thus. 

Manhimakds  (from  bakds,  "footprint, 
sign,  trail,  etc.").  Bakasin  mo  at 
naito  any  ydpak  (follow  it,  here  is 
the  footprint).  Mayliimakasan,  to 
follow  each  other  on  the  trail,  etc. 

Manhimagsik  (from  bagsik,  "cruel, 
tyrannical"). 

Manhiyanti  (from  ganti,  "reward, 
premium " ) .  Pinanhiyanti  nild 
siya  (they  avenged  him  [her]). 
Sild  any  panhihiyantihan  niyd  (he 
will  take  revenge  on  them). 

Ma)dti/<iko  (from  lako). 

Manlilnio.wti'ts  (from  mosmos, 
"child"),  ^fosm6s  mo  itof  (Is 
this  your  child?) 

Manhimdlad  (trom  pdlad,  "palm"). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


237 


To   pretend    to   work,    or   to   work 
without  purpose. 

To  be  uneasy  on  account  of  solitude. 


To  meddle;  intrude. 


To  faint;  swoon. 
To  suspect  evil. 

To  beat  about  the  bush. 


To  change  color  or  the  expression  of 

the  face. 
To  feel  badly  for  lost  work. 
To  embark  in  the  boat  of  another. 

To  exert  one's  self. 


Mnnhimamhnj  (from  panda;/, 
"smith").  PiDKlay  wlkci,  great 
talker,  "wordsniith." 

ManJumanglao  (from  pawjldo.,  sad- 
ness, fear,  or  uneasiness  caused  by 
being  alone) .  Mapanfjido  na  hdhaii 
(a  lonely  [solitary]  house). 

Manliimdsok  (from  pdsok).  Honatj 
mong  panhimaKuhtn  ang  bi'iJiay 
nang  ibang inaiTgd  tduo  (don't  med- 
dle with  what  passes  in  the  life  of 
other  people). 

Manhimalay  (from  matay,  "idea  of 
dying."     See  tables:  ma<«y.) 

Manhimula  (from  pula,  "idea  of  not 
believing  and  blaming  another ' ' ). 
Puld  is  the  idea  of  redness. 

Manliimilhig  (from  pnling,  "bank, 
shore").  Houag  mo  ako)tg  pand- 
linggmlluigan  (Don't  beat  about 
the  bush  with  me;  don't  tr)'  any 
red  tape  on  me). 

Manh  im  uti  ( homjmti,  ' '  idea  of  white- 
ness"). 

Manh  mdyang  (  from  sdyang ) . 

Manhinaka I/  (from  sakaij,  "boat,  ves- 
sel"). 

ManJdndpang  (from  tdpang). 


THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE        MAGSA. 

I.  As  usual,  this  particle  has  the  past  and  present  indefinite  take  n  in 
place  of  VI,  while  the  xecond  syllable  {m)  of  the  particle  is  reduplicated  for 
the  present  and  future  tenses.  All  three  definites  exist.  See  tables;  msik. 
The  signification  of  this  ijarticle  is  imitation,  adoption  or  following  the 
customs,  dress,  or  language  of  another  people.  It  is  little  used,  maki  being 
more  customary.     Ex. : 

To  follow  American  customs.  Magsaamericano. 

To  follow  Bicol  customs.  Magsahikol. 

To  follow  Visayan  customs.  Magsabisaya. 

To  follow  Spanish  customs.  Magsacastila. 

To  follow  Ilocano  customs.  Magsailoko. 

To  follow  Moro  customs.  Magsakamorosan. 

To  follow  Tagalog  customs.  Magsatagdlog.       Ang     sinasatagdlog, 

what  followed  or  imitated,  etc.; 
Ang  ipagsatagdlog,  the  reason  or 
cause  of  such  adoption.  Pag  is 
dropped  with  in. 

II.  Magsa;  isa;  as  in  the  expressions  magsadrao  ka  nang  damit;  put  the 
clothes  in  the  sun :  isahaiujin  mo  itong  bard;  hang  this  shirt  in  the  wind,  etc. , 
are  not  from  this  particle  but  from  sa,  the  preposition  "in,"  conjugated 
with  mag  and  i  respectively. 

III.  The  signification  of  magsa  may  be  expressed  by  other  particles 
than  mo/./,  among  them  being  ma gka  and  via  with  «?i  suffixed.  Ex.:  Si 
Juan  ay  nagkakasliladn  (Juan  is  very  Spanish  in  his  ways  [speech,  etc.]). 
Nataiagalogan  siyd  ( He  is  very  Tagalog  in  his  ways).  By  doubling  the  root, 
if  a  bisyllabic  one,  or  the  first  two  syllables  thereof  if  longer,  a  diminu- 
tive meaning  is  imparted.  Ex.:  Natatagatagalogan  «i/d  (He  is  somewhat 
Tagalog  in  his  ways). 


238 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    ".MAGKAPA." 

This  particle  changes  initial  m  to  u  for  the  past  and  present  indefinite, 
and  reduplicates  the  last  syllable  {pa)  of  the  particle  for  the  present  and 
future  tenses.  The  sole  use  of  the  particle  is  to  express,  prefixed  to  roots 
denoting  positions  of  the  body  or  motions  of  the  parts  thereof,  the  invol- 
untary remaining  in  such  position,  etc.,  as  the  result  of  fright,  surprise,  or 
other  violent  emotion.  The  definites  with  r,  toexpref^s  the  cause,  and  with 
07I,  to  express  place,  exist.      (See  tables:  ?«?(/«/.)     Ex.: 

To  remain  with  staring  eyes.  Magkapadilat.     Dumllat,  to  open  the 

eyes.  Madilat,  to  be  open  (as  the 
eyes).  Syn.,  riKigJcapantiUa),  to  re- 
main with  the  eyes  open.  Ang 
ipugkapam  /(/o/,  the  cause  of  remain- 
ing with  staring  eyes.  Aug  jiagka- 
parnulutan,  the  place  of  remaining 
thus. 

To  be  left  with  the  mouth  open;  to     Magkapanganga,  from  ngangd.  Xgu- 
stand  with  open  mouth.  rnaiTga,  to  open  the  mouth. 

To  stand  showing  the  teeth  (as  an     MagkapaiTgisi  (from   iTgisi). 
animal,  etc. 

THE    INDEFINITE    PARTICLE    "mAGKAN." 


I.  This  particle  takes  n  in  the  past  and  present  indefinite  in  place  of  ui, 
and  has  the  peculiarity  of  reduplicating  the  initial  syllable  of  all  routs  con- 
jugated by  it.  For  the  present  and  future  tenses  the  second  syllable  {ka) 
of  the  particle  is  reduplicated  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  reduplication  of 
the  ^;  of  ?no(7m.  (See  tables:  luhd.)  Magkan  signifies  primarily  the  in- 
voluntary flowing  out  of  the  secretions  of  the  body,  and  has  the  definites 
of  i  for  tile  cause  and  an  for  the  place.  In  a  metaphorical  sense  magkan  is 
also  used  to  express  involuntary  emotions,  actions,  etc.,  as  will  be  seen  by 
the  examples: 

Magkandudug6{iYomdug6,'''h\ood^^). 
Magkanpapawis  (from  jjd"'(s). 
Magkanlalaway   (from   Idvxtg,    "sa- 
liva"). 
Magkanlidithd  {troni  luhd,  "tear"). 


To  bleed. 

To  sweat  from  fear  or  illness. 

To  slaver;  to  drool. 

To  weep  or  shed  tears  unconsciously 

(as  from  a  wood  fire). 
To  blush. 

To  undress  or  lose  the  clothes   (in- 
voluntarily). 

To  overflow;  to  exceed. 


To  drop  off. 

To  burst  into  laughter. 

To  be  stunned  bv  a  blow. 


Magkanhihiyd  (from  hiyd).  Kahi- 
ydhiijd,  a  shameful  thing. 

MagkanJiohobb.  Nagknkanhohohb  si 
Juan  nang  pagtaxKi  (Juan  is  shak- 
ing his  clothes  off  with  laughter). 

Magkaidalahis.  Linabisan  mo  ang 
utos  ko  sa  iyo  (You  exceeded  my 
orders  to  you). 

Magka  n  lalaglag. 

Magkaiit<itaua. 

Magka  ntit'dap. 


COMBINATIONS   OF    PARTICLES. 


The  combining  of  various  particles  is  called  "transcendency"  by  the 
writers  upon  Tagalog,  and  may  be  said  to  have  the  following  characteris- 
tics: With  two  exceptions,  double  or  triple  combinations  of  particles 
prefixed  to  a  root  demand  that  the  one  immediately  before  the  root  take 
the  definite  form.     (See  tables,  dual;  dlak.) 

First  exception.  Some  roots  conjugated  by  mag  and  magka  admit  um. 
(See  tables,  p'dit;  dull;  sunod. ) 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


239 


Second  exception.  The  particle  maka  precedes  other  particles,  a  prop- 
erty also  possessed  by  magsi,  except  when  in  combination  with  itifikn, 
which  goes  before  magsi  in  such  cases.  (See  tables,  lard;  gmni;  linloq; 
dito;  alls.  It  must  further  be  borne  in  mind  that  roots  which  are  primarily 
conjugatexl  by  via;/  retain  pag  as  a  prefix  invariably,  as  do  also  those  roots 
differing  in  meaning  with  um  and  mag. 


THE   DESIGNATION  OF  PARTICLES. 


For  convenience  of  reference  to  the  Spanish  works  and  also  to  the  work 
of  Hmnboldt,  the  numbers  given  by  the  early  writers  to  the  various 
particles  modifying  roots  are  of  use.     They  are: 

Ist.     Um.  No  def.  10th.  Magin.  Pagin. 

2d.  'Mag.  Pag.  11th.  Magsi.  Pagsi. 

3d.     Man.  Pan.  12th.  Magsa.  Pagsa. 

4th.  Maka.  Ma.  .  .  .  Ka.  13th.   Manhi.  Panhi. 

5th.   Magpa.  Pagpa.  14th.  Magpaka.  Pagpaka. 

6th.  Maki.  Paki.  15th.  Magpali.  Pagpati. 

7th.  Pa.  Pa.  16th.  Magkapa.  Pagkapa. 

8th.  Ma.  Ka.  .  .  .  Ma.  17th.  Magkan.  Pagkan. 

9th.  Magka.  Pagka. 

In,  i  and  an  are  the  three  particles  always  accompanying  the  definite. 

THE    PARTICLES    "KAPACj"    AND    "kaPAGKA." 

These  particles  are  much  used  in  Tagalog  to  express  the  ideas  given  in 
the  following  examples.  The  agent  takes  the  genitive  (or  possessive)  case 
and  the  object  or  effect  of  the  action  the  accusative.     Ex.: 

When  my  father  left,  I  left  also.  KapagaUs  nang  dking   amd'g  ako^y 

uiiginalis  din. 
After  he  finished  his  work,  he  came     Kapagkatapus    niya  nang    kanvjang 
to  where  I  was.  gawd'y  pinaritohan  niyaako. 

THE    PARTICLES    "  PAG  "    AND    "  PAGKA." 

The  same  expressions  as  the  above  may  also  be  rendered  by  pag  and 
pagka.     Ex. : 

When  my  father  had  gone  away,  they  Pagal'is  dito  nang  dking  arnd'y  siyang 

arrived.  pagddting  nild. 

When  it  strikes  twelve,  we  will  rest.  Pagtuglug  nang  a  las  doce  ay  magpa- 

pahingd  tayo. 

After  you  pay  your  respects  to  him,  Pagbati  mo  sa  kaniyd'y  parini  ka. 

come  here. 

After  I  eat,  I  shall  go  for  a  walk.  Pagkakain  ko'y  ako'y  magpapasial. 

THE    PARTICLE    "PINAKA," 

This  particle,  prefixed  to  roots,  signifies  to  be  held  or  reputed  in  what 
may  be  expressed  by  the  roots.  It  may  also  mean  "number  of  times 
made"  in  some  cases.     Ex.: 

Rice  is  considered  to  be  the  bread  of  Ang  kanin  ay  siyang  pinakalindpay 

the  Tagalogs.  nang  maiTgd  tagalog. 

We  regard  you  as  a  parent.  Kayo  po^y  pinakamagulang  namin. 

He  is  regarded  as  their  leader.  Siyd  ang  pinakapuno  nild. 


240 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


FORMATIONS  OF  NOUNS  FROM  ROOTS. 

Nouns  are  formed  in  various  manners  in  Tagalog  from  roots. 
I.   Some  nouns  are  formed  by  prefixing  inapag  to  the  root.     Ex. 


Mocker;  scoffer.  Ma-paghiru. 

Generous  person.  Mapaghij/aija. 

Scoffer;  hoaxer.  Mapaglibak. 

Proud;        arrogant  Mapar/palalu. 
person. 

II.   Paid  prefixed  to  roots  forms  other  nouns. 


Respectful  person. 
Destructive  person. 


Ex. 


Mapagpitagan. 
Mapagsird. 


Blaspliemer. 
Barrator  (litigant   to 

excess). 
Boaster;  great  talker. 


Palasumpd. 
Paldi'isaj). 

Paluwikd. 


Quarrelsome  person.  Palaauay. 

Drunkard.  Palainum. 

Glutton.  Palaknin. 

Loving        (amorous)  Palasintd. 
,  person. 

Some  of  the  above  may  l>e  verbalized  by  changing  the  initial  jo  to  n  or  rn. 
Ex.:  Nalakain  shjd  (he  became  a  glutton).  Naldlainum  sii/d  (he  is  be- 
coming a  drunkard).  Malalairikdsii/d  (he  will  become  a  l)oaster).  This 
is  now  provincial. 

III.  Some  nouns  of  the  classes  under  consideration  are  formed  by  pre- 
fixing ma  either  to  the  imperative  or  future  of  the  root,  as  combined  with 
in.     Ex.: 


Friendly  person. 

Amorous  person. 

Disobedient  person. 

Obedient  person. 

A  jolly  person. 

An  affectionate  person. 

A  timid,  bashful  person. 

A  forgetful  person. 

A  pleasant  person. 

A  sorrowful  person. 

A  delicate,  sickly  person. 

A  timid  person  (cowardh^). 


Maibigin. 

Mairogm;  masintah  in. 
Masua'm  (from  suay). 
Masunorn)  (from  sunod). 
3[atai(aiii»  (from  iaiia). 
MawUiliin. 

Mahihiy'm  (from  Jiigd). 
Malilimutin  (from  livtot). 
Malulugd'm  (from  lugod). 
Maluluinbayhi  (from  linnbay). 
Masasakt'm  (from  sakit). 
Matatakutin  (from  tdkol). 


IV.  Other  nouns  indicating  occupations,  professions,  trades,  etc.,  are 
formed  by  man  with  the  future  tense  of  the  indefinite.  See  list  of  such  at 
€nd  of  section  three. 

V.  Nouns  indicating  a  person  suffering  from  a  chronic  disease  or  fault 
are  to  be  found  formed  by  suffixing  in  to  the  root  denoting  such  disease 
or  fault.  (See  Par.  XXIII,  in.)  These  nouns  may  be  verbalized  by 
in.  Ex.:  Siyd'y  Jiiuihikd  (he  suffers  from  asthma).  Sild'y  tinatamad {they 
are  lazy). 

VI.  Some  nouns  with  an  idea  of  place  inherent  are  formed  with  the 
future  tense  of  some  roots  with  an.  Ex.:  Pagbabaonan,  cemetery;  burying 
place  (from  barm).  Pagbibinyagdn,haY)istry  (irom  binyag).  Pagpaputaydn, 
abbatoir.     Place  of  execution,  Pagbibitaydn  (from  bitay). 

VII.  Some  nouns  indicating  occupation  are  formed  by  taga  combined 
Vi'iih  p)ag  {tugapag)  heiore  a  root.  Ex.:  Tagapagbantaij,  sentinel,  watch- 
man. Syn. :  Tagapaglniiod.  Tagajiagming,  cook  (from  ming,  "cooked 
rice").  Sometimes /«gra  alone  indicates  this.  Ex.:  Ta(/a^<'(;ao,  wanderer, 
stroller. 

MISCELLANEOUS    WORDS. 

The  following  words  arranged  alphabetically  by  roots  in  Tagalog  will 
show  the  use  of  many  idiomatic  phrases,  etc. : 


Occupation ;  employment. 
To  try;  to  intend. 


Abala  (syn.:  garni). 
Magakala  (from  akala). 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


241 


Rancid. 


To  look  after  and  follow  a  person. 

To  heed;  to  note. 

The. 


To  reap  or  cut  rice. 
What? 


Unaccounted   for;    without  reason; 
at  random. 


Rancid  (usual  word). 
To  growl. 

To  sing. 

New. 


To  arise;  to  get  up. 


Widower  or  widow. 

To  change  the  clothes. 

To  launch  or  put  a  vessel  into  the 

water;  also  to  place  a  ladder. 
To  travel  on  horseback  or  by  means 

of  horses. 


To  palpitate. 


To  weigh  anchor. 

A  kind  of  rice. 

To  clear  off  timber  in  order  to  culti- 
vate the  land. 


Ala  (rare).  Ang  plnaala,  what  is 
rancid.  Ang  pagala,  the  rancid- 
ity. Umala,  to  become  rancid. 
Makaala,  to  make  rancid.  Mag- 
papaala,  to  let  everything  become 
rancid. 

Mayaldghni/  (from  alaghay).   [Rare]. 

Umanii)!,  from  amin. 

Ang.  Sometimes  used  as  "be- 
cause. ' '  Hindi  ako makapagharujon, 
ang  aka'g  may  sakit  (I  am  not  able 
to  get  up,  because  I  am  ill). 
Plural  ang  manga. 

Maganl  ( from  ani,  ' '  harvest " ) . 

Ano.^  Ano  hagaf  ( What  then?)  .1  no 
pa.^  (What  else?)  Aii6f  I'ugkak- 
asdlaan  kHaf  (What?  Must  we 
speak  in  Spanish?) 

An(kin6.  Walang  uuoann  ang  salapt 
ito  (this  money  is  unaccounted 
for).  Tinapal  siyu  niyd  walang 
anoano  (he  slapped  him  without 
reason). 

Antd  (same  changes  as  ala). 

UniaiTj/il,  var.  umimjil  (from  aiTijil; 
iiTgil). 

Magawit  (from  auit).  Silang  lahat 
ay  nagawit  (they  all  sang). 

Bago.  Bagonglauo;  bachelor.  Ba- 
gong  damit,  new  clothes.  Kaha- 
gongtauohan,  youthfulness;  bache- 
lorhood. Bagong  paiVjinoon,  ha- 
gong  ugali,  new  lord,  new  cus- 
toms. Magbugo,  to  renovate. 
Mamago,  to  wear  for  the  first  time; 
also  to  renew.  (See  bago,  ad- 
verb. ) 

Magbangon  (from  bangon,  a  Java- 
nese word;  see  tindig).  Mag- 
bangon ka  (get  up).  Also  means 
to  lift.  Hnidi  ako  makabaiTgon 
nang  tapayan  (I  am  unable  to  lift 
the  jar). 

Bauo,  var.  Bala. 

Magbih'is. 

Mabungi<od.  Bungsoran  mo  ako  nang 
hagddn  (place  the  ladder  for  me). 

Mawjabayo  (from  cubayo,  "horse"). 
Derived  from  Sp.  caballo,  which  in 
turn  is  from  L.  Lat.  caballus,  "nag; 
pack  horse." 

A'u»/rt/>o_(7  (from  kdbag).  Nagkakdbag 
ang  di'bdib  ko  (my  heart  [lit.  chest] 
is  palpitating).  Kakabagkdbag,  to 
palpitate  greatly. 

Kuinabag  (from  kabag).  Note  the 
difference  in  accent. 

Kabog. 

Magkaiwjhi  (from  kauujin). 


6855—05- 


-16 


242 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


To  pirk   (as  a  guitar);  to  twang;  to 

pluck  at. 
To  snatch;   to  take  by  force;  to  pull 

up  by  the  roots. 
Iron  or  other  cliain  or  wire. 

"What's  his   name.       What  do  you 
call  it. 

To  catch  on  the  wing. 

Bad  or  stagnant  water  along  a  shore. 


To  seal  or  close  a  letter. 
To  belong  to. 

To  be  restless. 


To  order  to  elect. 
Girdle. 


To  recline;  to  lean  against. 
To  dig  a  hole. 

To  cease;  to  end. 

To  wash  the  hands  or  feet. 

To  speak  nasally. 

To  unite  or  bind  together. 

To  look  blankly  (as  a  blind  person). 

To  sparkle  (as  the  eyes  in  excite- 
ment). 

To  roll  up  (as  sleeves  or  trouser  legs) ; 
to  lift  the  skirt. 

To  give  alms. 

To  look  first  at  one  thing  and  then 

another. 
To  avert  the  eyes. 
To  look  here  and  there  on  account 

of  noise. 

To  look  here  and  there  hurriedly. 
To  glare  in  a  wild  manner. 
To  act  foolishly. 


To  relish. 
To  wish;  to  desire. 
Wmg  (of  bird). 
To  pardon;  forgive. 


Without  respect;  limit  or  considera- 
tion. 


M(ujk<ilithit  (fnjm  kdlahit,  var  kalbit). 
Kumdmkuin  (from  kainkdiii). 

Kduad.  Ma'jkauud,  to  use  a  chain 
or  wire. 

Si  kii/iii.  Ang  kudu.  This  word  can 
be  verbalized  bj'  um,  ma;/,  magpa, 
nuiki,  etc. 

Dumdkit  (from  ddk'tl). 

Dikyi't.  MadiHyd  Idmg  ddlampasig  ito 
(there  is  stagnant  water  along  this 
shore). 

Magdiil.     Pandiit,  seal,  wax,  gum. 

Gumnndn  {Iroia  gavdn).  (kiudnsa 
akin  ito  (This  belongs  to  me). 

Gumaso  ( from  gaso,  rare) .  (jasohan, 
person  disturbed.  Mangaso,  to 
disturb  another.  Gagasohan,  rest- 
lessness. Gayasogaso,  very  rest- 
less. 

Magpahalal  (from  halal). 

Iligpit.  Mahigpit, tight.  Maghigpit, 
to  tighten ;  to  cinch  up  (as  a  girdle, 
strap,  etc.).  Walang  higpithigjiit, 
slovenly. 

Hum  dig  (*'rom  hiUg). 

HiDiiukuy  (from  hnkay).  Ang pan- 
hiikay,  the  spade. 

ITuniuinpay  (from  Jmmpay). 

Maghugas  ( from  hugas ) .  ( See  lamos, 
ligu). 

MaliuhiunaUuimal  (from  Innnal). 

Magltnigkdj)  (from  hiugkap). 

Magldiiug  (from  liking). 

Lumilap  {irora  lilap)  [rare]. 

Maglilis.     Bdkit  kn  naglililis  nang  sc- 

lawaU     (Why  are  you  rolling  up 

your  trousers?) 
Maglimos  (from  Sp.  litnoi^na).     Mag- 

jicdimos,  to  ask  for  alms. 
Lumiwjap  (from  litJgap,  var.   UiTga- 

nap. 
LurniiTgcd  (from  liiTgat). 
LumiiTgingig  (from  liiTgiiTgig,  rare). 

Probably  a  combination  of  diiTgig, 

idea  of  hearing. 
LuuiiiTijos  (from  li)T(/os). 
Ln)iiii/<tp  (from  liyap). 
MainaiTijal.    Magma mai~jdma)~gahan, 

to  feign  stupidity. 
Numamnam  (from  nammnn). 
Magnasa  {see pita). 
Pakpak.     Lumipad,  to  fly. 
Magpaiduad    (from    patduad,    syn., 

tduad).     Magpatauarau,  to  forgive 

each  other. 
]Valang  jmtomangd. 


TAGALOa    LANGUAGE. 


243 


To  choose;  to  select. 


To  pick  up. 

To  become  dull  (as  a  knife  or  i  izor). 


To  boil  rice. 

Pest;  epidemic;  to  suffer  from. 
To  pFofess;  to  vow;  to  believe  in. 

To  pass  between  rocks,  hills,  etc. 
To  peep. 

To  care  for  most  diligently. 
To  grasp;  take  hold  of;  pinch. 

To  put  vinegar  on  anything. 

Can  be. 


To  run  away  from  or  hide  froi  i. 
To  betray. 


To  cut  grass;  to  mow. 

To  patch. 

To  be  gaping  stupidly. 

To  look  upward. 

To  stare  at. 
Friend. 

Pleasure. 


To  do  anything  swiftly. 
To  look  down. 

To  assign  to;  to  turn  over  to. 

To  sprinkle. 
Orphan. 


I'umill.  Ang  pUiin,  what  chosen  or 
selected  out.  Aug  pinilUni  (sing.) 
or  A>ni  pinagpUian  {p\ur.),  what 
selected  or  chosen  from. 

Magpi'iloi. 

Ptuiiorol  {Irom  purol).  Ang  purolin, 
what  dulled.  Taniomal  (from 
tomal),  to  be  dull  (as  business). 
Kaluinalun,  dullness.  Angitomal, 
the  cause  of  such  dullness. 

Summng  (from  sding).  Sinding,  boil- 
ed rice. 

Magkasdlot. 

Su inu mpa lataya.  A  / ig  su nt asa mpa la- 
(aija,  the  creed,  faith  or  believer. 

Sumilang  (from  silang). 

Snmilip  (from  siiip). 

Ifagpakaiiipagsipag  (from  sipag). 

Snm'tpit  {from  sipit,  "tongs").  iSini- 
l»t,  an  anchor. 

Magsuka.  Aug  sukacm,  what  dipped 
in  or  flavored  with  vinegar. 

Sukat.  1)1  siikat,  can  not  be.  Stikat 
hagd  si  gang  pagkaliwalaan?  (Can 
he  be  trusted?)  Sukat  [dt  sukat'\ 
siyang  paniivalaan  (He  can  [can 
not]  be  trusted). 

Tumakds  (from  takas). 

Tvmak.fi/  (from  faksil).  Taksil  na 
tauo,  a  traitorous  or  treacherous 
man.  Kataksilan,  treason,  treach- 
ery. 

Tumagpas  (from  tagpafi). 

Magtagpi. 

TalangutaiTlid.  Magtangatangdhan,  to 
feign  stupidity. 

Tumimjuld  (from  tingald).  Ang 
tingalain,  what  seen  thus. 

Timiillg  (from  titig). 

Katoto.  Katotohin  mo  niyd  (befriend 
him). 

Tud.  Ang  jMgddting  ninyo'y  naka- 
tutud  Ka  dkin  (Your  arrival  causes 
me  jileasure).  Ikindtulud  ko  ang 
pagddting  ninyu  (Your  arrival  is  a 
source  of  pleasure  to  me). 

Tumulin  (from  tulin).  MagtnUn,  to 
go  swiftly.  Ang  ipagtulin,  the 
cause  of  going  swiftly. 

TumuiTiji')  {irom  tungo).  Also  to  bow 
or  incline  the  head.  Ang  twujhdn, 
what  looked  at  thus  or  the  person 
bowed  to. 

Magukol.  Si  Pedro  nagukol  nang 
kaniyang  gagaiv'm  kay  ,hian  (Pedro 
turned  over  the  work  to  be  done 
by  him  to  Juan). 

Magwisik.  Ang  pamvisik,  the 
sprinkler. 

Uiila. 


244  TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 

To  order.  Mar/utos.     Snnd'in  mo  aufj  I'ltos  ko  sa 

ii/d  (follow  my  orders  to  you). 
The  following  example?,  taken  from  the  Tagalos;  edition  of  the  Ilcnari- 
miento,  a  paper  of  Manila,  will  give  an  idea  of  ordinary  Tagalog  composi- 
tion as  applied  to  modern  conditions,  and  the  use  of  foreign  words  in  con- 
nection therewith: 

I.  Singapore,  U:a  12  (dalawd)  ng  (nang)  Abril  {1905).  Ang  paraan  7ii 
Rodjeslvenjtky  ay  makardiing  siya  sa  cabo  {loiTgos)  Padaran  na  nas^a  bagbai/in 
ng  Jndo-China,  at  loO  mUla  ang  agivat  sa  Saigon.  Doon  i~ga  magpipisan  ang 
nagkahiivalay  na  hukbong-dagat  iig  riigd  (matTgd)  ruso,  kun  sakdling  sild'y 
hindi  mahdrang  kapunu  ng  mgd  japon. 

Ang  isang  pangkat  i~g  hukbong-ddgat  na  pinaiTgunguluhan  nl  Rodjedvensky 
ay  nasa  haybayin  ng  Muntok  iTgayon  na  iilang  milla  ang  agwat  sa  Sumatra. 

Ang  ibang  vTga  sasakydn  ay  nasa  pagiian  pa  ng  Banka.  Ang  mgd  sasak- 
yang  iti?y  nasa  raang  tiv:asay  sa  pugitan  ng  Malaca. 

liindi  Slid  nahdrang,  sapagka't  ang  mgd  japon  mardhil  ay  nasa  malapit  sa 
Formosa  na  doon  nild  ibig  makilaban. 

Mardhil  ang  Batavia  ang  susunod  na  daraungan  ng  mgd  ruso,  sapagka't 
doo'y  may  cableng  dbut  hdngang  Rusia. 

[Translation.] 

Singapore,  12th  of  April.  The  plan  of  Rodjestvensky  is  to  try  to  (arrive 
at)  make  Cape  Padaran,  on  the  coast  of  Indo-China,  and  150  miles  distant 
from  Saigon.  There  the  separated  fleets  (sea  armies)  of  the  Russians  will 
unite,  if  the  two  are  not  encountered  by  the  Japanese. 

One  division  of  the  fleet  commanded  by  Rodjestvensky  is  now  off  the 
coast  of  ]Muntok  a  few  miles  from  Sumatra. 

The  other  vessels  are  yet  in  the  region  of  Banka.  The  other  vessels  of 
this  (fleet)  are  remaining  in  the  route  (or  neighborhood)  of  Malacca. 

They  were  not  molested,  because  the  Japanese  continued  to  remain  near 
Pormosa,  where  they  wish  to  commence  the  struggle. 

Russian  vessels  continue  to  follow  each  other  into  Batavia,  because  there 
is  a  cable  connecting  with  Russia  there. 

II.  Newchwang,  ika  7  ng  Abril.  Ang  300,000  kataong  bumubuo  ng  hukbo 
ni  Oyama  ay  sumasalakay  na  maigi  sa  hukbo  ni  Linevilch  na  nakapagtibay  sa 
Kirin. 

Mabull  ang  paraan  iTg  pagkakalusob  mj  m/a  japon  at  ang  habd  ng  kanilang 
lupang  naliahanayan  ay  may  dpat  na  puo  a  limang  puong  milla.  Inaakala 
ni  Oyama  na  itaboy  untiunti  ang  vTgd  ruso  hdngang  sa  kanilang  madaig  na 
lubusan. 

Ang  hukbong  pinamamahalaan  ni  general  Linevitch  ay  hindi  hihigit  sa  bilang 
na  200,000,  sapagka't  bukod  sa  namatayan  siyd  ng  marami  sa  labanan,  ay 
marami  pa  ang  nabihag  ng  mgd  japon. 

[Translation.] 

_  Newchwang,  7th  of  April.  The  500,000  men  composing  the  army  of 
Oyama  are  advancing  in  good  order  upon  the  army  of  Linevitch  now  in- 
trenched at  Kirin. 

The  plan  of  advance  of  the  Japanese  is  good  (excellent)  and  the  length 
of  their  front  (ground)  is  40  or  50  miles.  Oyama  is  trying  to  push  the 
Russians  gradually  until  he  can  vanquisli  them  all  (unitedly). 

The  army  under  the  charge  of  General  Linevitch  does  not  number  more 
than  200,000,  especially  because  l)esides  the  many  who  have  been  killed  in 
battle  there  are  many  also  M'ho  have  been  captured  by  the  Japanese. 

III.  San  Petersburgo,  ika  6  iTg  Abril.  Ang  mgd  japon  ay  nakasu-^ulong  na 
unti-unti  sa  dakong  kinalalagydn  ni  general  Lineritcit  at  mj  kaniyang  hukbo. 
Isang  drao  paH  ang  Harbin  ay  }iindi  na  marahil  jnatidalianan  )Tg  nigd  ruso, 
sapagka't  pinagiislpang  gibain  ng  kadway.     Hindi  na  pinaiTgangalawanan  ng 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  245 

mgd  rusn  avrj  pagpapal-atihai/  sa  Harbin,  sapagka't  may  naldhinikinila  silamj 
malaLiiK/  /miTijiiiiih  na  t<(i.-<(ij)ilin  doon.  Aug  dakuug nuruiTgun  tTijingd  rusoay 
ang  Vladiivxtok  na  hi ii Hang  inamhang  niaj/aglitibai/ang  rnaigi  hangang  sa 
magkarooa  i~g  kapayapaan.  Masamd  ang  iayo  iTg  ragd  hukbong  rum,  data- 
puiva't  Idndl  namdn  niapahi'isag,  il6  daliil  sa  gulong  nangyagari  sa  Rusia. 
Marami  sa-  Rusia  ang  naniniwald  na  madadaig  ang  hukho  ni  general  Llnerilch, 
at  hung  magkagayon  ay  magkakaroon  iTg  kapayapaan. 

[Translation.] 

St.  Petersburf»,  6th  of  April.  The  Japanese  are  advancing  httle  by  Hltle 
upon  the  position  of  General  Linevitch  and  his  army.  One  day  more,  and 
Harbin  may  possibly  not  be  remaining  to  the  Russians,  because  they  think 
it  may  l)e  destroyed  by  the  enemy.  The  Russians  are  making  no  efforts 
to  strengthen  themselves  in  Harbin,  because  they  believe  themselves  to 
1)3  in  great  danger  of  capture  there.  The  place  of  retreat  for  the  Russians 
is  Vladivostok,  which  they  hope  to  fortify  so  well  as  to  hold  it  until  peace. 
The  situation  of  the  Russian  armies  is  bad,  but  it  can  not  be  bettered  on 
account  of  the  riots  taking  place  in  Russia.  Many  in  Russia  believe  that 
the  army  of  (General  Linevitch  will  be  defeated,  and  that  in  that  event 
there  will  be  peace. 

IV.  Manila  ika  14-  i~g  Ahril.  Ibinabalitd  iTg  Gobemador  Dancel  {Lalawigang 
Rizal),  na  noong  umagcl  mj  ika  5  t~g  buuung  lumaJdkad  ay  may  nadakip  sa 
Bagbagin  no  tatlong  tduong  labds  at  siyam  na  kalabao  na  ninanakao  sa  Nova- 
liches,  dalawang  bard  at  dalawang  revolver.  Noong  ika  11  ay  may  nadakip 
na  isnng  tduong  labds  na  may  dalang,  isang  kalabao,  at  isang  rifleng  mauser, 
dalawang  puong  cartucho't  dalairang  puong  rifleng  remington.  Noong  ika  10 
ay  may  nasumpungan  ang  presidente  sa  Taytay  na  isang  remington  na  may 
sampuong  cartuclio.  Ang  vTgd  kalabao  ay  dinald  sa  tosoreria  municipal. 
Noong  ika  11  ay  nakadakip  din  namdn  si  Gobemador  Dancel  iig  isang  nag- 
ngangalang  Pedro  Fio,  na  do  umano'y  si  gang  nangbagabag  na  maigi  sa 
Baranka  at  Mankina  noong  viernes.  Ito'y  ibinigay  kay  mayor  Haskell  ng 
constabulario.  May  nadakip  pa  ring  dalawang  tduong  labds  na  may  isang 
revolver  colt  at  sampuong  cartucho. 

[Translation.] 

It  is  announced  by  Governor  Dancel  (Rizal  Province)  that  on  the  morn- 
ing of  the  5th  of  the  current  month  tiiere  were  captured  at  Bagbagin  three 
outlaws  and  nine  of  the  carabao  stolen  from  Novaliches,  two  shotguns,  and 
two  revolvers.  On  the  11th  there  were  captured  one  armed  outlaw,  one 
carabao,  and  one  Mauser  rifle,  twenty  cartridges,  and  twenty  Remington 
rifles.  On  the  10th  the  presidente  (mayor)  of  Taytay  secured  a  Reming- 
ton and  ten  cartridges.  The  carabao  were  sent  to  the  municipal  treasury. 
On  the  11th  Governor  Dancel  was  also  able  to  capture  one  called  Pedro 
Pio,  said  to  be  the  person  who  made  trouble  at  Baranka  and  Mariquina 
last  Friday.  This  person  was  turned  over  to  Major  Haskell,  of  the  con- 
stabulary. There  were  also  two  outlaws  captured  who  had  a  Colt  revolver 
and  ten  cartridges. 

T'.  Hindi  malalaunan  at  magtatayo  ritd  sa  Maynild,  ng  bagong  hospital. 
Ito'y  isang  ambagannahiningi  ng  Rt.  Rev.  Opispo  Brent  ng  siyd' y  nasa  Estados 
Unidos. 

Ang  salaping  gugugulin  ay  kaloob  ng  limang  universidad  sa  Harvard,  Yale, 
Pnnceton,  Pennsylvania  at  Columbia. 

Ang  maiigangasiiva  nito  ay  ang  Iglesia  Episcopal,  datapuwa't  tantangapin 
ang  sinomang  naukol  sa  ibang  religion. 

[Translation.] 

It  will  not  be  long  until  there  will  be  erected  here  in  Manila  a  new  hos- 
pital. This  will  be  from  a  subscription  solicited  by  the  Right  Reverend 
Bishop  Brent  when  he  was  in  the  United  States. 


240  TAGALOG    LANG TT AGE. 

The  money  to  be  offered  is  from  the  funds  (interior)  of  five  universities: 
Harvard,  Yale,  Princeton,  Pennsylvania,  and  Columbia. 

The  direction  of  this  (hospital)  will  be  under  the  Episcopal  Church,  but 
anyone  will  be  received  belonging  to  another  faith. 

VI.  Ang  gohernador  sa  Bataan  si  G.  Toincis  del  Rosario  aij  nag  ah.ty  sa  Ba- 
langa  i~g  isang  lupang  may  15  hectarea  at  T'4,000,  ang  halagd,  xipang  mapag- 
tayuan  i~g  isang  " secondary  school."  Ang  yaong  lupang  yuan  ay  magagamit 
sa  pagadral  t~g  agricnltura  6  i~g  mga  dnnong  tunglcol  sa pamumukid,  at  magin- 
garalan  din  namdn  iTg  vTgd  pagsasanay  ng  pangpalah'ts  /Tg  katawan. 

Sa  akalarin namdn  mj  Gobernadoray  rnabutingmagkaroonng isang maestrong 
arnericano  sa  bayan  bayan  upang  maitanyag  ang  nTgd  paraan  at  ugaling  ameri- 
cano  sa  nTgd  filipino. 

[Translation.] 

The  governor  of  Bataan,  Hon.  Tomas  del  Rosario,  has  given  a  piece  of 
land  comprising  15  hectares  and  worth  ^"4,000,  in  Balariga,  in  order  that 
there  may  be  a  site  for  the  erection  of  a  "secondary  school."  That  land 
may  be  used  for  teaching  agriculture  or  for  sciences  or  occupations  per- 
taining to  the  land,  and  for  instruction  in  the  means  of  strengthening  the 
body  (manual  training  school). 

The  endeavor  of  the  governor  will  be  to  have  one  American  teacher  in 
each  town  in  order  to  show  the  customs  and  habits  of  the  Americans  to 
the  Filipinos. 

VII.  Di  umano'y  hihilingin  ng  Compania  iTg  tranvia  eledrico  na  tulutun  na 
ang  sasakyang  ito'y  marapdting  jMiratiiigin  hangan  sa  Palani/ag. 

Ipinagbibigay  alam  din  namdn  ngayon  sa  gohernador  general  mj  naiTgawja- 
siwa  sa  tranvia  electrico  na  sa  limes  ay  2ifisisimidang  patakbulian  ang  daan  sa 
Santa  Ana. 

[Translation.] 

It  is  said  that  the  electric  street-car  company  will  ask  that  the  line  be 
permitted  to  be  extended  to  reach  as  far  as  Parafiaque. 

Notice  has  also  been  given  to-day  to  the  governor-general  by  the  man- 
agement of  the  electric  railway  that  on  Monday  it  will  commence  the 
operation  of  the  road  to  Santa  Ana. 

VIII.  Paunawa. — Ipinamanhik  sa  sinomang  nakapulot  iTg  isang  dsong 
lalaki  na  may  balalubong  kulay  cafe  at  may  put i  sa  dibdib  at  sa  dulo  iTg  paang 
kanan  sa  unahdn,  may  taglay  na  collar  sa  liig  at  isang  chapa  na  may  numerong 
{bilang)  196-5,  ay  mangyaring  ibalik  6  isaidi  sa,  daang  Arranque  bilang  {big.) 
158  at  doo'y  kakamtan  ang  isang  pahuya  at  dakilang  pasasalamat. 

[Translation.] 

Notice. — It  is  requested  that  anyone  w'ho  may  pick  up  a  male  dog  with 
coffee-colored  hair  and  with  white  on  the  breast  and  the  end  of  the  right 
front  foot,  bearing  a  collar  on  the  neck  and  a  tag  with  the  number  1965, 
will  be  able  to  return  or  restore  him  to  No.  158  Arranque  street,  where  a 
reward  will  be  given,  together  with  many  thanks. 

IX.  Nairald.  Sa  bdhay  na  bilang  74  sa  daang  Rada,  Tondo,  ay  nawald 
ang  isang  manuk  na  sasahunging  balalubong  lasak,  maitim  ang  tahid,  maputi 
ang  padH  baldado  ang  datu  sa  kanan.  Sinoman  ang  makapagdald  6  maka- 
pagturo  ng  kinalalagydn  iig  naturang  manuk  ay  bibigydn  tig pabuyung  halagang 
walo  6  sampuong  piso. 

[Translation.] 

Lost. — From  the  house  No.  74  Rada  street,  Tondo,  there  has  been  lost 
a  gamecock  with  white  and  red  (lasak)  plumage,  black  spurs,  and  white 
feet,  with  the  middle  claw  of  the  right  frjot  crippled.  Anyone  who  may  be 
able  to  bring  or  point  out  the  whereabouts  of  the  said  fowl  will  be  given  a 
reward  to  the  amount  of  eight  or  ten  pesos. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


247 


A  careful  study  of  the  foregoing  examples  will  enable  one  to  elearly 
understand  the  general  run  of  the  modern  language.  Keading  the  native 
press,  both  for  practice  and  keeping  trac-k  of  what  is  of  interest  in  native 
circles,  is  recommended  to  all  who  may  l)e  stationed  in  the  Tagalog  region. 

Section  Eight. 

The  following  table  of  the  contractions  and  variations  of  the  roots  of 
Tagalog  words  will  be  found  of  use  in  quickly  finding  the  form: 


English. 


To  salute;  hail 

To  remember 

To  be  lazv 

What?..'. 

Spouse;  to  marry 

Salt;  to  salt 

Roof;  cover;  to  roof 

To  carry  on  the  shoulders 

Uneasiness 

To  moisten 

To  suffer;  endure 

To  pound  rice 

To  give 

To  ac:custom 

To  buy 

To  change  the  clothes 

To  open 

To  separate 

To  spill 

To  pass 

To  l)ring;  carry 

To  seize;  arrest;  detain 

To  arrive 

To  stick 

To  stretch  out  the  arms 

To  hear 

Blood 

To  do  one's  duty 

To  work 

To  pull  down;  destroy  thus. . . 

To  awake 

Deposit 

To  kiss 

To  substitute 

Ribbon ;  band  

To  so w ;  scatter  seed 

To  conduct;  escort 

To  lie  down 

To  blow 

To  complain 

To  wait  for '  Unilaii 

To  ask  for '  IlliTl/l  , 

To  borrow  ( except  money ) Jlirmn . 

To  change . Jbd  . . . 

To  go  for  water J</ih  . . 

The  other  side KabUd 


Root. 


AJki 

Alduki 

AH  saga 

Ani')f 

Amu  a  . .. . 

As'ni 

Aiip 

Babd 

Balim 

Bam 

Biita 

Bai/o 

Byjaij  . 

Biha.m 

Bin 

Blh'ts 

Bukds 

Biikod 

Bull  OS 

Daan 

Dald 

Dakip 

Di'ithui 

Dlkit '..... 

Dipd 

DiiTi/'n/ 

DlKJU 

(t'dtxij) 

(lava 

(libd 

Gimng 

Habilin 

Ilalik 

Haim 

I  la))  in 

Ifasik 

Ilatid 

Iligcl 

JliJi  ip 

Jlitiatiakit 


Contraction,  variation, 
etc. 


.46m. 

Akdahdnin. 

AHsagdn. 

AnJdnf 

Asau'm. 

Asndn. 

Aptdn. 

Babhin. 

Kabalisanhdn. 

Basin;  basdn. 

Bathin. 

Bay  in. 

Bigydn. 

Bimnhin. 

Billiin;  bilhdn. 

Bisin;  bisdn. 

Bukmn. 

Bukdin. 

Busdn. 

Dandn;  danin. 

Dalhin;  dalhdn. 

Dakpiii. 

Datnin;  datndn. 

Diktin;  diktdn. 

Dip-Jdn;  dip-hd)i. 

Ding-gin;  ding-gdn. 

Dugin;  dugdn. 

Gampdn. 

Gawin;  gawdn. 

Gibin;  gibdn. 

Gisndn. 

Habinldn. 

Hagkan. 

Halinhdn. 

Hapndn. 

ITaskdn. 

Hatddn. 

Higdn;  hihigdn. 

Hipan. 

IIi)ianaktdn. 

Hintin. 

Hiwjin;  hirTgdn. 

Hirmin;  Idrmdn. 

Ibhin;  ibln'tn. 

Igbin;  igbdn. 

Kabilin;  kabildn. 


248 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE. 


English. 


To  bite 

To  deny ;  cloak 

To  eat 

To  untie ;  loor^en 

Left 

To  obtain 

To  grope  for 

To  grasp;  embrace 

To  nibble 

To  cut  off 

To  know;  be  acquainted  with. 

To  exceed 

To  place 

Strength 

To  grow 

Contents;  pulp 

To  soften  

Far;  distant 

Five 

To  err;  to  make  a  mistake 

To  observe;  experience 

To  begin ;  commence 

To  settle;  appease 

To  contain;  include,  etc 

To  listen 

To  dream 

Name 

To  break  (as  a  rope,  etc.) 

To  squeeze 

To  wring 

To  cut 

To  embark;  to  mount 

To  1)6  ill 

To  err;  sin 

To  tell;  report 

Evil 

To  come  back;  to  give  back  .. 

To  burn  rubbish 

To  devour ;  eat 

To  put  into 

To  follow;  obey 

To  wonder  at 

To  cover 

To  turn  the  back 

Tosow 

To  grasp ;  to  hold  to 

To  stand 

To  taste;  trv 

To  look  . . . ". 

To  redeem 

Todry 

To  move 

To  return;  repeat 

To  sit  down 

To  lack 


Root. 


Contraction,  variation, 
etc. 


Kagat 
Kailci 
Kain  . 
Kalag 


Kagtin. 
Kailau. 
Kanin. 
Kalg'in;  kalgdn. 


Ka/hcd Kaliv/m;  kaliwdn. 


Kamit 

Kapd 

Kapit 

Klbit 

KHil 

K'dala 

Labis 

Lagaij 

Lalas  

Laki 

Laman  . . 

Lata 

Lmju 

Lima 

Malt 

Masid 

Muld 

Pnlagay  . 
Falumdn 


Kamtdn. 

Kap'in;  kapdn. 

Kapt'in;  kaptdn. 

Kihthi;  kibtdn. 

Kitl'm;  kitldn. 

Kdanl'in. 

Ljahhdn. 

Lagydn. 

Laksdn. 

Lakhin;  lakhdn. 

Lamndn. 

Latin;  latdn. 

Laydn. 

Limhdn. 

Malin;  maldn. 

Masddn. 

Muldn. 

Palagydn.     Fr(im  lagay. 

Palamndn.    From  lamdn. 


Pakinig I  Pakingdii. 


Panaqnup 
Pa  i~ Id  Ian  . 

Pati'd 

Pigd 

Pisd 

Pi'dol 

Sakai/ 

>SV,/:y7' 

,Saki 

SalUd  

Samd 

SaoU 

Slgd 

Sild 

Sdid 

Sunod  

Takd 

Takip Takpdn. 

Talikod ;   Talikddn 

Taniin |    Tamndn. 

Taiu/an. 
Tayo  . . . 
Tiicim  . . 
Tinght . . 
Tubos  . . 
Tuyb  . . . 

Uqd.--- 

Uli 

Upu 


Panagimpdn. 

Pam/anld». 

Patddn. 

Pigin;  pigdn. 

Pid'm. 

PuU'm;  jnitldn. 

Sakyd.i. 

Sdktin;  sakldn. 

Saiddn. 

Salitin. 

Samin;  samdn. 

Saolin;  saoldn. 

Sigdn. 

Sit  in;  sildn. 

Sidldn. 

Sundin. 

Takhdn. 


Tampidn. 
Taydn. 
Tikmdn. 
Tingndn. 
Tubs'in;  tubmn. 
Tuy'm;  tuydn. 
Ugin. 

Vl'm;    Uldn. 
Upd)t. 
Wald I    Wal'm;  waldn. 


TAGALOG    LANGUAGE.  249 

II.  For  names  of  animals,  birds,  fishes,  and  invertebrates  not  given  in 
this  work  the  student  is  referred  to  Jordana's  Boxi/uejo  Georjrdjico  (•  Jfis- 
torifo  Natuntl  del  ArdirpHiago  Filipino,  INIadrid,  1885;  to  the  work  of  Friar 
Casto  de  Elera,  Dominican,  entitled  Vatdlogo  iSistematico  de  Toda  la  Farina 
de  Filijiinas,  Manila,  1895;  and  to  the  book  of  Montero  y  Vidal,  El  Archi- 
piiiago  Filipino  y  las  islas  Marianas^,  Carolinas  y  Palaos,  Madrid,  1886.  For 
the  fauna  the  great  work  of  Friar  Blanco,  Augustine,  will  be  of  great  aid, 
as  well  as  the  reports  of  the  forestry  and  agricultural  bureaus  at  Manila. 
The  work  of  Father  Delgado,  S.  J.,  Manila,  1892,  deserves  attention  as 
revised  and  annotated. 

In  conclusion,  it  is  hoped  that  a  careful  study  of  the  language  under  dis- 
cussion will  lead  the  student  to  explore  for  himself,  and  note  the  localisms 
and  changes  in  each  province.  Any  suggestions,  corrections,  or  criticisms 
will  be  welcomed  by  the  author. 


250 


TAGALOO    LANGUAGE. 


(Si 


1^ 

Oh 


s 

^ 

.JJ 

.K 

0 

-5 

'°>N» 

o 

c 

^ 

0) 

§3 

iC 

fs 

1^ 

y 

O   ^    ^"     O     O     O 


r-      C 


i    ^ 


«T'  "^ 


^   2    "2 


c    < 


<1 

a 

;z; 

no 

'S 

03 

5 

■■» 

m 

!z; 

4) 

_o 

X 

<c 

b 

03 

HH 

Ph 

rt 

D3 

■^ 

X 

:; 

K 

■xl 

"oj 

CO 

? 

§ 

P^ 

- 

■-M 

o     ^ 


o 

o    , .    „ 

«   h^    Ph   > 


-<  W  P5 


f 


CO-^J 


I 

iNl 

Iml 

iNll 
iNl 

In! 
1ni 


)ra 


I'l 


,M 


.Vt^ia 


Nil 

Ni 
No 


ISUal         T^fJlSL 


J  and  II  future  perfei 


na. 

aria.     ' 
Maria. 
Maria. 
;  Maria, 
i  Maria. 

iiria. 


la. 

,ria. 

aria. 

klaria. 

[aria. 


1  shall  (will)  1 
'You  will  have 
"He  (she)  wil 
"  We(incl.)  w 
"We(excl.)\^ 
"You  (ve)  w 
"They  will  ha' 


Same  meanin 


IVhat     AnJ'ioim?"  What  will  V 
^j, iTio?     "What  will  you  1 


Im  7agawi 


Ist  »«gaw 


What  1  Ai 


■What 


te  this 


or  "  1 


Ai 


IN  na  niyd.     "H 
rdniyd.    "He  wil  J 


Alio? 


nio  H«?     "What  Willi 
"What  will  have  1 


niny6  na?    or  Ano 
have  taken?" 


Ai? 


o  na  nito?  or  An6  a 
have  written  this  with' 


/al)ng  palay  or   MaiaA] 
ave  sown  this  rice." 


/  .J  a  ito?  or  Mmpagksda^ 


• 


^> 


COKJUUATION  OF  THE  TAGALOG  VEKB  AND  VERBAL  NOltti. 


I'nrt.      AuKibtei»,  •■Ui»lwiD|t"i'U-. 
Virrlnl  oil),     nAp».  "btlOvM."  uU-. 


IvIUt! f!^iii'i^n' AllIriiL  "We (oxci. ) liudlovod Mario!' 
Istthig  ninv6  Ma  n  Marin.  "  You  (ye)  ittd  loved  Maria/ 
UlU^nit&n'iri  Moriv.    "Tbey  hud  loved  Mktja." 

Yarbid  mo  ei  MkriK. 


iKitblRiiIydwMiiri..     "HuCHhi^rMaLlf».- 
iKirbignntinw  Mario.    "Woanel,]  MHluu 

iKlfblg  nlnvO  f i  Marin.     ■■  Vou  (yo)  foaiUrio 


/IblgiH  naUn  «1  Mario.    "We  (ind.l  dinll  like  Macii 
/iMgis  ^h.  d  MatU.    ;■  We  (e.cU «ball  Ukc Mor 

/lblpxSE?alMori^"Thc5^"W^UkoMari»."" 


«hall  («ill)  hav 

/lbl5I"n!E^i«i'5klJlI^'TI.D7'«illl)*vB 

.ir»lblsnfliftlU«rio. 

i'is^\S'^s£'"E,""''^*'™ 


/^ 


A.T 


Ini 


1  and  II  future  perfect] 


Tomds  nang  liniang  p 
j^mang  piso.     "I  will  h 


^  laka&ral  siya.     ' '  He  wil 


^'*  Jfrt/iYf bill  ako.    ' '  I  will  ha> 
-'^  **!  I  or  iMTa/caPAGbili  ako.     ' ' 


CON.TUGATION  OF  THE  TAGALOG  VERB  AND  VERBAL  NOUN— Coitmued. 

L 

K^ 

^ 

-^ 

[■utivil-lp;  Vf^lwl  nilJetUfo;  imjwwiivo.     InDnilivu  \l 

-""-~ 

Pn-enl  (abo  imperiMSt). 

Ftaw™. 

landll  tulQlvpertcn. 

Komarka. 

Pmonilu. 

"'a.si.w.rjss,'"  ■""""""• 

Iniu.    Utai^AmoiiTomAiuuigliinRngiirH),   "11om>w 

Iwiailfean  ko  iii  Tomi!*  nnng  limang  plBo.    "IlKnTowwl  ;  Ixataii^n   niyd    ««   ni    Tomi»  nnns   liinang    niwJ  or 
(or  have  Imrroned)  S  pMoa  Irom  Thomiu."                      ]      JViutangoa  niyd  si  TohiAh  nnnglimang  pbo.    "He  bad 

(cxcl!)  an;  borrowing  6  peeoe  from  ItadM?^^ 

F.1jbufgaitkoriTouiil(.t>ajieiiinang)nn.    "IwlUbomw 

"rai'rSSi^T'  •'TSSS^ZZ'STf^ 

FlMBO*. 

Imp.    SuUtofl  Dio  lleng  pipe).     "Write  on  Ihi*  piper." 

An6  tMKd  <uiB  Nicolata/.  mo  mtne  aiuiipl  ™iIIt.Ia.,T 
"  Where  (on  what)  did  yoa  write-  llio  naml^" 

lyang  papol  na  lyta  ay  ely«ng  «aulalM  uiyd.     "Thai 

VamoMMm. 

Bald.  GaiuoDUilrootuKllneinvowi-lwUhBcuIe 
«i*nt    Jiropb.U.-U.  endure.  mlBer.-oto. 

Imp.    i'UirbataAM  mo  ltd.    "  I^doro  this." 

J*iui£frbalBAanniyiinangniaraniingliUjnivun.    "She  ban 
mBemI  (endured-)  Uiat  tor  nuuiy  years." 

PlwiffftobalaAon  ko  iia.     "I  am  «idufl^lhi*" 

-r  - 

i^.(,^ab.«^■,„mydit^     "He  , -he)  wiU  endure  .hi.- 

PMDUl     ud 

TmiuiianaipdcuDtnKU.    Idutof  planting: 
wtliDR onL     itfutfluiiin.  •■  to  pluiL" 

7iiiatunndn  ui  auid  uangmrinring  kiiioy  ta.balunutan. 

Ini,   «Ic,     Ang  im^HilnJ, ''Ihu  tocher." 
Vmit^- tourney 

i 
1 
( 

'":'"! I'll'!"."  ■■v.,u(j"ii,^hf^ 

'   <'■!...                          Tli.y  UujfliU" 
Tb«i'ton,''"!"""'   .      .'.',      ■■      ■'ll.,v«t«ughl."Blc 

'      i 

s 

■  and  perwn.         "     "*"   "'  """*  *' 

""     '— ^P— ■ 

il«p.lOrilU."lta.rilIllt."    S,„,.,ll.l."l,.»Tll»" 

HungmiMM  ak-       "  1  \\r..u.-r  "  1  liavi'  wrillen."                  iiiinat»AU,ta\(fiua or  XafitiiiA\nl  nki:    "Iluutivrilten." 

.■*„«illal  ako.     "I  eiinll  (will)  write." 

»^..,  ^,-,  „„  „,  .,/»1,™,...  M,.    "I  .lull  h.,.  .«««,.■• 

^*l««d  jfoff 

with  Ktriir.  ''toMlI."     BnmWI.  "to  buy'." 

J)/H(,WIf,  "U.«lll." 

;;,:  ,      ,'„'i',^„"  ...i,.  |,i.^."  ,„ 

!S,s;V'  "1  iK;'",:.,  X!"""""- 

^"^^''■'^"™^'''''^'"*'' 

A'dbiltakA  (irrts-).    "  I  am  buyi-^y." 

Wibiiiakfi.    •■!  «huii  buy." 
Miif/bM»  iik<;     "t  >lin1I»<'ll." 

.l/Htftil.il(uJi.iiiOorJ/HAylr»ubi1(»k.U     "l  «ill  Ti.n. -.M," 

Sjrnopiu*  at  Ihe  IM  polyRylliitilc  nxit«L 

"n'it.nnT.S^RS.'i'.'S  'J!l'"'-^''" •""'"»•    ■■"•• 

ITny  nntitryuri  dtmn,     "i^onicUiliiH  Una  happened  on» 

.V«n«nog(nip  kn  feigd?    ■■Ar-;youdl*       bT"        | 

Miltiffyayari  din.    "  1l  xill  ii«U«i  ■«>  p>mM<--" 

"U.dK«le."    i/rtff.dlm.    Mofm- 

o 

e 

n 

c 

CONJUGATION  OF  THE  TAOALOG  VERB  ANT)  VERBAL  NOUN— Continued. 


^. 

... 

— 

- 

P».„.,..„.H«,. 

^„. 

,.d  .,„„.„,.„. 

Rnuukai 

ma. 

MaaLf,l."\a,H»Aj.U,\tmm:- 

Imp,     Jr«(fii»!It»."Miid)r." 

.V„^»l«k..    ■■I^iea-.r-h.v^.tudl^l.- 

if«,i»l  .k»  ,„.  „  »-„*»„.»»,  .k».   .■■  b.J  «.di,!,- 

HagoinXakt.    "I  amOTudying." 

Jtf Offoiiml  akfiL    "]«h«ll(wm)rtudr." 

Paa:  jitMff. 

"ArSipf.ttir^'i'Wi."" 

J-IN>iffiiAk>io  my&  llfi.     "HeBtolethiik" 

'is'Kaa'i'"" '"°"""""°"""""""- ■■"* 

PWnnnatoiiinlrfHMitAorUijMffnikaODiTtlltd.    "Howill 

'^iSy^'ST.'blS?'" 

Ma. 

'"jJfWltom.  "to  liZ^'.-'^ '"  "'*"*■'■ 

,V«B.it«m  okfiL    ■■  I  wiu  hunjrry,"  o 

iTRiiAliimnaakd.    "I  hwlUwnhongry.- 

iVnir»K<ituni  nku.     "Inm  limiKiy." 

""^ ■■..«b,,,,,,^... 

W«ir«.itom  »»  mU.    "Th.-y  «IN  hoTO  l-n  l.unKry." 

"satn^i!""-  ■■"■"' 

raUjr.    Ocmount  not  Gliui«iiig  tar  eophany 

•'■"■"■■"""■  ""••""'■■■  ""° 

'"■""'•" 

.V.mU.,  nn  rip^    ■•Il-l.-aJW." 

.Vamamata)'  dyd.    "Ilo  tf  ilyinj;." 

JfanmiiMiriMiriTi.    "lUwinhandiad." 

"&-c-'"«'i:i;3 J """ 

— 

«noBlayan  ayk  oMug  Kn&.     "  Ilia  It 

"■""'"-'■■■ 

'"-™*»'"""-"™""'-  ■•■"■"'"'"'■ 

ti.Jn««." 

die" 

IV<d-    Ooaaonant  root  radlog  la  «»■• 
«naoL  Jra|rfaod,"tolwilndouL" 

Sc 

Toi.    Oi>iUoraDt  root  eaAXag  in  vowel  with 

XntiuMinoanemaiikdbtU.   "AmunyoaiMlt  with  the 

"s'ra^:?.""*'""- 

flho  uniiMKl  hciMll 

thcmMtvn  witli  Ui^  ciiiltfi^D." 

■"-"-"' 

Kjjjjmjjtjro-W  m«i»  baU.    "I  n'll  amu.  i 

raall 

Jfnn. 

Monllbrt/'loriiilmlc,"  •••«>«.'•  "mock." 
«lo. 

A.,«;«...i.l.,.lc,     tl.„.K.,.r.d,..hn«. 

J-oi.lll.k  ^i,     ■•!  ri.lln.M"  or  ' 

'""■'  "'"'"'"'■" 

"ml'ri/' ""'"'"  """"""'""'"'''■    """'"'"■ 

AfflM/ilibok  «k6.    "UmrLliculing." 

Jfn.U.TO,kakS.    ■•!  .1,.U  AUcal.." 

JWanjatbak  akA  im  or  MAUfmiiUbak  ak&     "I  «halt  han 
ridfmUrf." 

"srEtx^."  "*•  "^  '^"' 

Pat,. 

BlU.    OoDMiunt  root  fodlnit  in  vowol  with 
•ml*  wx»M.    MamiU.  "to  Irar  tnoch:  to 

"-"o'Sl'"'"      """'«"""" 

have  1iouj;lil)t]ii«  >t 

N*fH»nill  ko  iU..    "1  liad  Ijousbt  lliii  at  wholoaK-." 

PlKdmimilr  niyl  ilA.     "  lie  U  buylsg  lbi« 

Iiibolanle." 

»UiMtmilt  niy«  iiA.    "Ho  wilt  lia»  booitbt  ibi.at  -bulMalt^" 

bii^aaUD.    -'[thajipMnJlhi^IwHil 

(pOM. 

S±>"- ""  "•-■■  *""'"'■  "'" 

An«|W-.imlpr.  "th«»rtol1jrirt.iog.;; 

Imp.    (pamigajrmuitongUhBL     "l.ive»)!  IhU." 

//«isumigBy  ko  iiong  Wiat    "I  U 

fuIicdallthiA" 

NuiMimigayniy&ihinoUIuil.    "HohadKivenalltliu." 

»<.  Vrini,  ail 

/jMimmigay  kn  ilong  lah«l-     "I  «ill  gin  all  Uiia'" 

H UfHim^ nlylitong  lahaL    "II«  will  hav» gjna  all  thla" 

MatS^bA.  "to  pfwth." 

ftm-*^. 

■^..^r-iris-'^ofi-sLSs 

'■■""""'"*"'°"""     """""" 

""'"'"'"'"'-" 

"•"■"'■"-■■ 

/WiJIH*,»  „!,«  lyto.      ■11,  .»,   h,  mu-l. 

J  by 

Aw  »<>4>fi&ina.    ■the  pwhcr" 
pr.^i«d?^L  «..  th»  «ib)«:lof  a»* 

Maka. 

■X"""*"-  "'"*"" "~"'°°'"- 

Ang»apfc«rit.l.iii»."th8«ololbdnBreliov«l." 
reliovi'  you." 

-!2r£^=-"~ 

■''"■""*""""■ 

i\raftairi|rinhdiu  M  kMlyi  Mil  BUnoL    • 

Ha  i.   Llai, 

"aasrsirji-is"» '-'■  ■■'"•"" 

lb, 

idrf^oli.**^'*""'^'""' 

Ikn. 

lUniii    CooMunl  root  ending  in  couonaat. 
U»  ot  Mdn««.    «tatuipi*,   "to   be   md." 
Mofaihtpli^  "to  eaun  «.dnn." 

by  hi«  death" 

y».     ■■Iwuicricv»] 

X-Mi's""""*—""^  • 

laainddaacl 

"^sasfSJarass;?'"'* "''°" 

lib. 

o 


c 


I  and  II  futi 


:aw:l    aku.      "I    sll 


^ 

CONGUGATION  OF  THE  TAftALOG  VERB  AND  VERBAL  NOUN-CoiitiniiPtl. 

1 

rmi^ 

■^. 

PaaUieftwrt)  tonaa 

I  anj  11  |,l»,Hirruvt 

Present  (alao  impertect}.                                                                          F^tore. 

,„.„.„„^ 

H.^^ 

"- 

K„h. 

iVfikuhakoiyaoghaii^    "I  WMibletotakeUiattniit" 

A'«X-uku,«  ko  iyang  buKfe.     ".  «u  able  to  Uk.  .bat     .W«J,l;«hakciy„.gbu«g.    ■•leha.lb.ahUu.Uketh.t 

"'"^ 

•"liSSr"""" "'■"■""-  •■■-"•'*"»•«"-'"■ 

JVu/fliflibt  ko  itong  pnnAUt    "  I  «n  writo  wilh  tbia 

.irnniuillat  nil«  Uanq  jmnQlH.     "They   will  be  bI.Ic- 

(m. 

Jfafnxi^wt,  "toonlertndooraiBke," 

livgpafpapag».iik,    "the    art   ot    onlerinK   .lono   nr 

Afnff/»ng»wAiiki.    "Ion]eTed(fonielhin(t|  Jone." 

»1H^'^srs^f•s".•Jir.S'."„£.r.T- 

Ifagpapa^vli  «iyS.     "Ut  i»  enlcring  tliat  «ouiclhins 

"j^.r""»-"'  ■'■•■  ■■'  -^'  ••"  °*"^  ""•■"" 

rapv- 

P»»tffpa[.hm.xmougniu!^)«UDUWiabig.     "TeU 

Pa. 

.W«flp«rfl«t.  "U.  ord«  k.  Write." 

i:rHii'j;Kj£?f •°'"-  -""  '■""»  ""■"" "- 

J>iiMwuuiliit  kJU  nitong  saint.    "I  (duid)  am  onlrriiiB 
youto»ritolhial«U«rT    Al«,  aakloi."  «c- 

'■STJS;-'""""»"'"^  -..^..^^uu...» 

««. 

«(Walwim,  "to  Older  to  K.W." 

Prttamnan  mo lyang  bUkliL    "Onlertlint  Belli  plantal," 

PiMnUmiidnkaitonglupiL    "I ordered tbatthiagroDnd 
be  plwited." 

PuMtamniln  ko  iysng  lupA.    "  I  iiha.1l  onler  that  gruund 
to  be  planted." 

Pn. 
Pa. 
Ipa. 

Patilong.  ■■  to  Mk  lor  help/^ 

raWlong  ka  kay  '"edro.     "A«k  Pedro  lo  liolp  you." 

JVapnldloQK  ka  bagd  ea  knniydT    "  Have  yon  aaked  him 

to  belpT' 
I^»«tfifoag  niyi  xku,     "  He  told  me  to  help." 

a^t^^«««lo„«niy.kay..^"Whyaid^he„^^^^^^^ 
aak^ratoholpl^'         ^         ^                            ' 

XttjtatntAlous  ukO  aa  inyO.    " I  am  aakiQx  you  to  h«lp." 
J*iHnIuUtl«ng  niyi  kay6.    "  Hu  la  aaklng  you  lo  lielp." 

/'Mlutulonf^nc  ko  myi  b&kan.    "  I  will  a«k  him  to  help  lo- 
BakitUMtutdloDg  niyAakA?    "Why  will  he  oak  me  to 

Wto.    "H««L" 

PtnapatHotno  AyiJ    "Di>l  you  I^ll  bim  to  come  hoM" 

Xaparirito  »yi    "  Ho  i»  wmlng  h<at." 

Sino  bai*  wiK_i»mnriritofan  niyi?    "Who  ia  he  coniinB 

J'nnritosiU.     "Tbcy  wUlcon.ebcre." 

An6 nng  IkapaHrita  nilAT    ■■Why  will  Ihey  wm..  heroT" 

PapH^nlomti  mo  eiydT    "Will  you  l«ll  lilm  to  oomo 

IW 

JIOMbiluy.  "toKotoahouBt" 

jKxrii"' ■!6;'S;Ki«'""°'"'""'" 

SniHuutXMmy  nhi'>.    "I  went  to  a  lioiwo." 

yapOMtuahihuy  eiylL     "He  ingoing  ton  lionw." 

i'ViMiMbillwy  iA6.    "I  will  go  to  B  bouMs" 

Hamaka. 

ooe"»!»»  to  be  killed-" 

yoffpaJuitDMlmynyA.     "HokillMlhinudL" 

^a^^^kam^Uymyi.     -He  iaallowing  hin«.t  tobo 

MaffpapakaaiatAy  aiyii.     "  Ho  will  kill  hinuclL" 

IfVPalu,. 

ro^>ri, ""That  pri  ad^moaXnSir'in  orSw  t^ UJ xf- 

prIUaUomuighefwH,"  cu-. 

'^KsaS"£i,r'J"-^"'  '""■  "■•  '■""" 

.tfaffpntdtoU,  "to  toch  Mrneatt]r.|| 

to  hub  thecbililiw  nmMly." 

TWlog.     "Try  oanwaUy   to  aWdy 
the  Tagalog  tongue. 

aMS-06.    (Tol«,pTO;2ail    Net 

i«ik 

^ 

o 


I  and  II  future 


• 

COKJUGATION  OP  THE  TAGALOG  VERB 

AND  VERBAL  NOUN— Continued. 

^. 

»»u 

]-«rtidplB;  V.T 

U«l  adjective;  imfierative.     loADJUve  if 

— -"- 

'-"""'-"- 

Prewnt  (alio  imperfert). 

r.,.. 

■..„„..„  .^ 

■w^ 

nioim 

SM.     Onumiwit  root  mdios  in  vowel  UkinK 
niH  u>a  tan.    JfaffjM/nwin,  "  b>  repent 
doq.lx." 

/'Hf^fMVniillt* 

moi».   •■B.p.alJ.eplyfcrU.li" 

«,*,,,«„,.„,.„„.,.„     •.,.e,i„^n.U,i, 

dwply 

luie'Sf   "Ii^'l°$c>3|%r^ 

■""*'' 

Stakltnl.  ••  to  loin"  (or  inlntm  «itfa  hnrfa- 
ir«).     A/nA'(wB*t»l."(olt.in"forlnt«Tf.n. 
in    «tadying).     JfoMaby.    ''to  cmbvlc 

A'flftAxwiral'ikfi.     ^°l"ioinrf  in  rtudyina." 

.VoMiuinil  nk6.     •'Iami»inini;<n  leftching." 
!fiiMtipag6n\  to)6.    "You  an.  interferinn  wiUi  study." 
yakltS^y  kaiuf  «a  iDy6.     "Wo  are  cmbwkiog  with 

M»kltpi^y^^,y&  w  kaniyi'    "She  wifl  «TaW 

im"" 

IfuM. 

.tfuMhAlid.  "to  etny  ■rong  with." 

IjnnfikUibilhi  ko  ilong  Billat.     "I  am ukio^  ttit  letter 

/jKiMMiMid  ko  Itong  «dUL    "I  will  tako  Ihli 

,«» 

*fflaissi»"^  ■■'*"' 

.W«*i..l„t."t«Hn».t..«nnt«rfe«i..writ. 

llitttttk-lkis<l\it  ko  itA  doAn.     "I  am  putUnR  this  in  to  it 

mur„-^ 

I.AfA.    CouDDaiit  not  endinji  In  vo«ol  «itfa 
dnumflex  «omiL    Jirflabrt,  "to  nUy  or 

Kw)  in  play  or  g.inLUnB." 

pl.ying*ithlIii.chiW." 

I'lKiiMUpagiiirMttiuyiitongXmlAM.    "She  i»  playing 

'•sfaS'i""  "'•■""-'""■  ■•"■"" 

l|.U,- 

"■«■(a^T^^irz.?-"- 

/,»■0*». 

MaukaAlaag.  •■touitcsilebt." 

XaffkaAtMng  skA.    "I  «wol  ■  dobL" 
mUlimiiaaha&l»ng  ma  Ml  "Why  did  you  owe  thu 

.V«(,frfltadta.,«ri,t    "Ho..«e..JebU" 

''^t^tt*?^"*"'*'^^'"""''^    "Why  a.  you  owing 
i^Ka(/fcafciulaiiftonko«iJiwn.     "I  <,wb  Juan." 

JfdffAnioiitang  ka>(.      "  Y.iu  will  ..«.■  ■  Ji-bL- 

■'^iiSJJES?'""' 

Miffli,. 

"toconvpnintowio.." 

.Vat/hiiiMk  wiB  ttlbig.     "The  water  tamed  into  win^." 

-Vaffl^jwokd  itonp  ilak.     "Tlii»  wiot-Becnu.  to  \k  tum- 

.ira{rimMuk&  itong  lUk.     "Thu  wloo  may  l(u 
viiwuar." 

°'°'° 

!»«<» 

Magln^VK  "to  tun.  tola  vli»^." 

lurn  into  vinr|9trT" 

"^i:^,=«ssJ-"""  ■■"'■-- 

lUkUri»i0f],inwblMieiUI:?    ■■Whym.yll.e«in,.turn 
into  vImvmT" 

MaginiiMk.  "lo  bin  Into  «Ine  " 

Auk  »inn£f(M«li»Vo»  nang  iiibJB  ay  ong  iMyiin  tuuig  Omw 
«(tullk*.    "ThiT  pJuMwborvthif  wnbjrWMttumudinlo 

jr<vta 

Jfo^wUp^  ■■l<.l«»iiiewurtJ.y,' 

kulan.    ^My  Mn   bwam^  worlEy  to  have  Mlliorify 

'«ysi^SirSH'jS 

.^^.,....    .. 

aasA—OA.    (Tniw)«vKsai.i    N,..  n 

_-~v 

<& 

Hunofi 


lese." 


-PrtW./t/inalayiN  mo 
niN.     "Glean  out  1 


/pnnhinhiga,  rao 

teeth  with  this.' 
Jfin'u^^iihan    mo   ai 
"Clean  your  teeth 


Maf/stnuHik  ka.     ' 
like  a  Chinaman.' 


CONJUGATION  OK  THE  TAQALOG  VERB  AND  VERBAL  NOUN— Continued. 


r       

^. 

Put  (peHMt)  tcDML 

,„„.„„.„„,. 

Pment  (alt»  imjwrfect) 

.„. 

Ian. 

11  later.  „««. 

R™«ki. 

.—1^- 

hsKwiiiK-'TsrBsrjaBf)?' ' 

S*a*pnff*faHi.  liyong  lahaL    ^'  We  had  oil  l<-ll." 

VoffitMBlb  Utyono  u>l.at.       W^  ar«  all  leannK-" 

JVogirfralbrflanglahal.    "Thevwillalllnve." 

^Off^UyonolahaL  "Aln««." 
JlfOffai^f(l<a™ng  lah^l.     ■•  All  n( 

Xufl 

».^,^...".,b.™..  „.„„,„. ,„,.■■ 

PlvnirWgKwA  nili  iydn.    ■'  They  all  ilid  that" 

/'iKfif/NbigDwA  nnmin  it^i.      'We  ore  nil  doing  Uiis." 

*«rt 

IpwfltffitWtipoD  niuuin  itonfmangfi  bmay-    "■  We  are  all 

/jMr(r«i)tUpan  niU  ilonfl  mnngd  baf^y.   "They  «ill  all 
thro*  tba»  thing»  away." 

my  lai^  niunher). 

nw>i 

Jirai7iff. 

Piimffirfkunan  niU  \lSi.    "Thui  was  the  place  they  all 

ingthia." 

Aag  mangd  hatd  dito  la  bayan  llo'y 
tkw  town  an.  rtodying  in  8»t  nam- 

Jfoin»» 

/K                                                      y 

•'^Hi»  nwpcct  (SDMid  bim  1«  lall  ddIiIb  knoec  |ar  to 
kneel)  alonc*."                _      ^     . 

ODM  at  the  «liar." 

JVof/^ifljufilulioiltilAy  1  .^-yBD-lulhri); on  their  kiicce" 

.VffjMirniibod  nyi.    -He  («11  oti   hb 
kam"  (aoddcntalty). 

F»ltl(l>L 

B». 

I'M!  (perfect)  lenae. 

Pn^nt. 

I  and  II  plu|«Tf«!t, 

Fb,™. 

.a»lU>„»»p.«..t 

Ram 

,».                                                    Cpaundadr»...!- 

"•"*•■ 

JUanAJD>te;.'-io(ftintBway:"'-b>awooii." 

^KSStSi?'' •*'""'"""'■■"■■""'■" 

JtroMAfhimaiay  aiyi.    "She  la  lainUnj;  away." 

3f  atiAUimalay  aiyi.    "lilie  will  faint  away." 

i>n»/ifnui,layiii  van 
nm.    "lllmnont 

«num. 

JTanAJioilay.  "toelnn.- 

-^Ruth  glcucd  in  thi-  AelL^Bow."         ' 

Ang  gillum  ay  ang  rpiMno/ifhimiilay  ninL    "Uoiieer  ii 
.mudiiKhlmtoeluui.- 

i  , 

iffniilgUan  mo  ai 
"ClwiyuurUwU 

wamrfS»    ,-,.|.„ 

'     '     1   '                      .l.l.l««raohoi»." 

>/.../.-,il.v   .  '            '"  Hn  Morrly  iu  play  (or  cam- 

jrawW' 

JVnffMiinidk.  "to  ncl  (•Irni)  (talk)  Itko  n 

Arn04Htnrikiiiigniu^laeBmil»k  nniifc  llafH^n  m  Mnn- 

.Vnr/wiMiiunk  aiyiL    "  He  is  tnlkii»!  Ilk.- 1>  CliinuN^." 

,Wrtffwi«iinBifc«iW.    "Tt     ,     in<!o]il01iiiiw.>ou»looia." 

"teSlin. 

■'"-""""■" 

Jfairmragilcw.     Like  above  with  TBenlopi 

plMe  where  he «iIopIcdTuBlog  ciutonu." 

M)!(0MbiMyaiuiiigiiiui^Bii«tiiii);;>n>^iiJn3np.    "Thf 
Uimla  rcaoTublf  Viaaysiu  in  tlii-lr  inanner  of  talkine-" 

1 

lOvnpounit  ]>artld(>  ) 

ey««,     from  inulat,  •'to  open  Uie  17«. 

liNKKl  oj»ii-cy«l.*' 

iDf!  with  «tBivc  cya"  (pul  U-nw). 

•taring  ciyci"  {\tA  traiae). 

Au);  fyiiKriplcfljMpiimiSliit    TJiu  nme  u  abovo  (prcMnt 

MnohapafomMvX  niyl     "He  «ill  stand  oi^n-pywl." 

Jfni/Anii. 

,U«ff*ni./..l«l.i.-l...l..-lU«n..»v..Iu..lnrily- 

.Vrt(,ftfln/uliihil«jyii.    "Blwweptuiuioiuiduittly" or "irir 
Anjf  iyH(t(i(»Av(nh,Iiilia,  "Uincaniipof  nlinliliiiR  l««f«iii- 

JViirrbiAvdi/ululiB  kiiy6.    ■■Yoii  an-  «hnltltne  tcsic"  or 
"  Yuiir  ey»  uro  lillvxl  with  Irtir»." 

Mitgh^anhAwXii.  kavA.   «Yod  trill  unconxcituwly  ibud 
Uan." 

rofffain-w. 

tdue)  Irom  .JOBn,  "lilowJ. 

AijB  n™»»fffai/iv(wiliidDgitn.    ftwne  1»  «bo»»;  ■•plo«"— 

An«  |.nffb.to«uludi.gdB.  *8wj.o  a»   fonnoinu   (fulnro 

- 

o 


o 


INDEXES 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX. 

Accent,  change  of,  18. 

Changes  meaning,  19. 

General  rules  of,  18. 
Accents,  18,  19. 

Acute,  18. 

Grave,  18. 

"Circumflex,  18,  19. 
Active  (voice),  20. 
Adjectives,  20,  38,  (full  analysis  of)  55,  5fi,  57. 

Prefixed  to  noun,  31. 
Adjectives,  comparison  of,  72,  73,  74,  75,  76. 

Equality,  72,  73. 

Inferiority,  73. 

Superiority,  73,  74. 

Superlative,  degree  of,  74,  75,  /6. 
Adjectives  (regarded  as  to  meaning) : 

Colors,  63. 

Of  condition,  61,  62. 

Of  phvsical  conditions  of  bodv,  63,  64.  , 

Of  quality,  58,  59,  60. 

Of  quantity,  62. 

Mental,  moral,  or  personal  attributes,  64-71. 

Miscellaneous,  71,  72. 
Adjectives,  negative,  57. 
Adjectives,  plural  of,  57. 
Adjectives,  position  of,  57. 
Adjective,  predicate,  32. 
Adverl)ial  numerals,  79,  80. 
Adverbs,  20,  38,  (with  adjective)  74,  75,  (fully  discussed)  83-86,  (definition 

of)  83,  (verbaUzing)  83,  84. 
Adverbs: 

Aflirmative,  99. 

Negative,  99,  100. 

Of  degree,  72,  75,  98. 

Of  measure,  72,  75,  98. 

"Flat,"  83. 

"Flexional,"  83. 

"Phrasal,'/  83. 

Interrogative,  32,  33. 

Of  doubt,  100. 

Of  manner,  93,  98. 

Of  quality,  93,  98. 

Of  motion,  84. 

Of  place,  34,  84,  (list  of  many)  86,  87. 

Of  time,  87-92. 

Of  succession,  87-92. 
Affirmative  adverbs,  99. 

251 


252  INDEXES. 

Affirmative  particles,  37. 

alangan,  (adverb),  73. 

an  (suffix),  18,  56,  108,  I\^  141,  I,  II  (full  discussion),  142-153. 

Antonym,  definition  of,  57. 

Arabic  element  in  Tagalog,  14,  38. 

Article,  indefinite : 

Substitute  for,  31. 
Article  (of  common  nouns,  places,  countries,  etc.),  28. 

With  possessive  jironouns,  37. 
Article  (of  proper  nouns,  nouns  of  relationship,  etc.),  27,  28. 

Declined,  27. 

Plural,  27. 

Special  plural,  27. 

Syntax,  28. 
Articles,  instruments,  etc.,  -vfiih.  pan  prefixed,  209,  XVII. 
ay  (particle),  32,  (with  antonvms),  106,  VI. 
Be  to,  (verb)  32. 

To  be  there,  85. 
Cardinal  numerals,  76,  77,  78. 
Cases,  20,  38. 

Chinese  words  in  Tagalog,  14,  38. 
Clauses  of  equal  force,  two,  32. 
Comparative  : 

Of  adjectives,  72,  73,  74, 

Of  equality,  72,  73. 

Of  inferiority,  73. 

Of  superiority,  73,  74. 
Conjunctions,  102-104. 

"And"  32. 

Adversative,  102,  103. 

Alterative,  102. 

Binding,  102. 

Causative,  103, 104. 

Conclusive  (illative),  104. 

Conditional,  104. 
Contractions,  247,  248. 
Definite,  the,  20,  30,  (discussion)  108,  I,  II,  III. 

Which  definite,  108,  IV  to  XV. 
Dialects    35. 

Diminutives,  110,  IX,  («?»)  180,  {mag)  192. 
Direct  object,  109,  V,  VI. 

One,  109,  V. 
Distributive  numerals,  80. 
Do  (make)  to,  108,  I,  II,  110,  XI,  XIII. 

Do  not,  100. 
Dual  number,  35,  36,  38. 
Endings,  31. 

Consonant,  31. 

In  diphthong,  31. 

In  "n,"  31. 

In  vowel,  31. 
Euphonic  changes,  32,  34,  81,  (with  man  and  pan)  201,  209. 
Exclamations,  104,  105. 
"Exclusive  (editorial)  we,"  35,  36,  38. 
Future  perfect  tense,  106,  X. 
Future  tense,  106,  X. 
ga  (interrogative  particle),  74. 

gaalin,  74. 

gaano,  74. 

ganga,  74. 

gaya,  74. 


INDEXES.  253 

Gender,  lack  of,  38. 

General  terms,  lack  of,  19. 

Genitives,  douljle,  of  personal  pronouns,  35,  36. 

han  (suflix),  18,  56,  141,  I,  II,    (full  diHcussion)  142-15.3. 

hin  (suffix),  18,  56,. (with  weights,  measures,  etc.)  82. 

Homonym,  definition  of,  57. 

i  [particle],  108,  IV,  (cause,  instrument  or  time)  109,  V,  (combined  with 
in)  110,  XII,  (fully  discussed)  132-141. 

Idioms,  20. 

ika  [compound  particle]  (wdth  adverbs)  84,  85,  (meaning  cause)  108, 
IV,  138,  XVIII,  211,  I. 

ikina  [compound  particle]  (with  adverbs),  84,  55,  (meaning  cause)  108, 
IV,  138,  XVIII,  211,  I. 

ikimqxi  [compound  particle]   (with  adverbs),  85. 

Imperative,  105,  II. 

^  Intensity,  quicknesss,  with,  105,  III. 

Imperfect  tense,  106,  X. 

in  (suflix)  18,  56,  (inserted)  57,  (with  weights,  measures  etc.)  82,  (with 
pa)  84,  85,  (motion  toward  or  control  of)  108,  IV,  (combined  with  i) 
110,  XII,  (discussion)  112,  I,  to  114,  VI  (idea  of  attraction  toward) 
114-115,  (possession)  115,  (verbs  of  calling,  115,  (of  reaching  for)  116, 
(verbs  of  carrying,  cutting,  measuring  or  weighing)  116-119,  (verbs  of 
destruction)  119,  (verbs  of  receiving)  120,  (of  inviting)  120,  (of  eating, 
drinking,  etc.)  122,  (acts  of  senses)  123,  124,  (acts  of  will  or  mind)  124, 
125,  (verbs  of  making)  125,  (of  w^earing)  125,  (various)  126,  (suffixed) 
127-130. 

In cm,  130. 

Inclusive  "we,"  35,  38. 

Indefinite,  20,  30,  (discussed)  111,  I,  to  112,  V 
Principal  particles  of,  111,  I. 

Indicative,  106,  IX. 

Indirect  object,  109,  VI. 

Infinitive,  106,  IX. 

ini  [compound  particle],  110,  VIII. 

Intransitive  verbs,  107,  XI. 

ipa  [compound  particle]  (explained),  109,  VIII. 

ipag  [compound  particle],  109,  IV  (explained),  109,  VIII. 

ipagka  [compound  particle],  109,  VIII. 

ipagkaka  [compound  particle],  109,  VIII. 

ipina  [compound  particle]  (with  adverbs),  85  (explained),  109,  VIII. 

ipinag  [compound  particle]  (explained),  109,  VIII  (example),  110,  IX. 

ipinagka  [compound  particle],  109,  VIII. 

ipinagkaka  [compound  particle]  (with  adverb),  85  (explained),  109,  VIII. 

ka  (particle  expressing  likeness),  72. 

kasing  (compound  particle),  72. 

ka  (imparting  idea  of  intensity,  etc.),  105,  III. 
(linking  opposite  ideas),  106,  VI. 

ka  [particle],  211. 

ka o?i  [compound  particle],  200,  201. 

kapag  [particle],  239. 

kapagka  [particle],  239. 

kiilang  (adverb  meaning  "less"),  73. 

ma  (adjective  forming  particle),  55,  (use)  111,  I,  (fullv  discussed),  196- 
201,  (def.  oimaka)  211. 

ma in  {hin),  131,  132. 

mag  {nag),  56,  (verbahzing  adverb)  84,  85,  (use)  110,  X,  111,  I,  (fullv  dis- 
cussed) 180-194. 

magin  [particle],  232-234. 

maqka  [particle],  38,  85,  (combinations)  109,  VIII,  (use)  110  X,  (fully 
discussed)  230-232. 

magkan  [particle],  238. 


254  INDEXES. 

vuff/Jxdp'i  [particle],  238. 
vtdijka/HUitdi/  (compound  particle),  73. 
iiKujkapard  (compound  particle),  73. 
magkaparis  (compound  particle),  73. 
ma^^asing'  (compound  particle),  73. 
laar/ma  (compound  particle),  56. 

ma'gpa  [particle],  109,  VIII,  (use)  110,  X,  (fully  discussed)  217-223. 
magpaha  [particle],  225-227. 
magpatl  [particle],  235. 
magsa  [particle],  237. 
imgsi  [particle],  235,  236. 

maka   [particle],    201,    IV,    (fully   discussed)    211-217,    (when    meaning 
"cause")  56,  (peculiar  construction  with)  112,  VIII,  (indicating  com- 
pleted action)  93. 
tnaki  [particle],  227-230. 
mala  (forming  adjectives),  56. 
man  [particle],  37,  (with  weights,  measures,  moneys)  81,  (with  adverbs) 

85,  (fully  discussed)  201-211. 
manhl  [particle],  235-237. 
mapa  (as  adjective  forming  particle),  56. 
mapag  (as  adjective  forming  particle),  56. 
may  (use)  110,  XIII. 
mayroon  (vise),  110,  XIII. 

mina  (minama)  [particle  expressing  opinion],  56. 
na  (as  adjective  forming  particle),  56,  (use)  111,  I,  (fully  discussed)  196- 

201,  (def.  of  maka)  211,  (with  irregular  form  of  verb)  171-175. 
nag  [particle]  (with  adverb),  85,  (use)  111,  I,  (fully  discussed)  180-194. 
nagin  [particle],  233. 
nagka  [particle]  (with  adverb),  85. 
nagkaii  [particle],  238. 
nagkapa  [particle],  238. 
nagpaka  [particle],  225,  I. 
nagpati  [particle],  235. 
nagsa  [particle],  237. 
7iagsi  [particle],  235. 

naka  [particle],  201,  IV,  (fully  discussed),  211-217. 
naki  [particle],  227,  I. 
nan  [particle],  201,  IV. 

napa  [compound  particle],  223,  I  (with  adverbs),  85. 
napasa  [particle],  223,  I. 
Negative  adjectives,  57. 
Negative  adverbs,  99,  100. 
Negative  verbs,  30. 
Nominative  case: 

Preceded  by  article  and  followed  by  genitive,  28. 

With  genitive  inserted  between  nominative  and  article,  28. 
Noun : 

In  genitive  modifying  nominative,  31. 
Nouns,  20,  (common)  28,  (exp. ),  38. 

Source,  28,  (from  roots)  240. 
Numerals,  76-80. 

Adverbials,  79,  80. 

Cardinals,  76,  77,  78. 

Distributives,  80. 

Ordinals,  78,  79. 
Occupations  (with  man  prefixed),  205,  210. 
Ordinal  numerals,  78,  79. 
pa,  the  66  roots  beginning  with,  175-180. 
pa  (with  adverbs),  84. 

papa  (do.),  84. 
pa  (yet,  still),  73. 
pa  [definite  of  TO«OT9a],  109,  VIII,  217,  I,  (fully  discussed)  223-225. 


INDEXES,  255 

2xi(j  [particle],  110,  VIII,  IX,  (retention)  110,  X,  194. 

jKvjht  [particle],  194,  201,  III,  230. 

jKigpdkd  [particle],  225,  I. 

j)aka  [jiarticle],  225,  I. 

2xiki  [particle],  227,  I. 

pala  (forming  adjectives),  56. 

pan  [particle],  201,  209,  XVII. 

panhi  [particle],  235,  236. 

para  (particle  of  comparison),  72. 

Participle,  106,  X. 

Particles,  combinations  of,  238,  239. 

Designation  of,  239. 
Particles,  verbal,  19,  20,  (most  important)  106,  YIII. 
Particularizing  verbs,  19. 
Passive,  20. 
Past  tense,  106,  X. 
Phrases,  ordinary,  some,  20-27. 
pinag  [compound  particle],  110,  IX,  195,  II.  . 

pinag an  [compound  particle  and  suffix],  110,  VIII. 

pinagbi  [compound  particle]  (with  adverbs),  85,  (discussed)  230. 

pinakd,  227,  IX. 

pinakd  [particle],  239. 

jnnaki  [particle],  227,  I. 

pinapa  [compound  particle]  (with  adverbs),  84,  85. 

Place  (how  expressed),  141,  II. 

Pluperfect  tense,  106,  X. 

Plural  (of  adjectives),  57. 

Plural  (of  nouns),  28,  38. 

Special  plural  of  si,  27. 
Prefix,  retention  of,  106,  VII. 
Prepositions  (fully  discussed),  100-102. 
Present  tense,  106,  X. 

Pronouns,  demonstrative,  33,34,  (idiomatic  use)  34. 
Pronouns,  indefinite,  37,  (exp. )  38. 
Pronouns,  interrogative,  32. 
Pronouns,  personal,  35,  36. 

dialects,  35. 

idioms,  35. 
Pronouns,  possessive,  36,  37. 

"With  ((/*'/  and  ang  sa,  37. 

Syntax  and  order,  37. 
Pronouns,  relative,  38. 
Proper  nouns  (article  of),  27. 
puma  [compound  particle]  (with  adverbs),  85. 
Eeduplication  of  roots,  56. 

With  ka an  (han),  75,  76. 

(])f  first  syllable  of  numerals,  77. 

To  form  diminutives,  110,  IX. 
Respect,  great,  how  indicated,  37. 
Root  words  in  Tagalog,  number,  13. 
Roots,  reduplication  of,  56. 
Roots,  differing  with  ^^rn  and  mag,  154. 
Roots,  the  66  V)eginning  with  pa,  175-180, 
Sanskrit  words  in  Tagalog,  13,  38. 
Sex,  how  indicated,  31. 
Sing  (particle  meaning  "as"),  72. 
Spanish  element  in  Tagalog,  14,  38. 
Superlative: 

Of  adjective,  74,  75,  76. 

Absolute,  75. 

Relative,  75. 

Simple,  74,  75. 


256  INDEXES. 

S\-nonym,  definition  of,  57. 

Synonyms,  19. 

Tagalog  language,  importance  of,  13. 

Dialects  of,  13,  35. 

Relationship  of,  13. 

Preservation  of  verbal  system  of,  13. 

Number  of  root  words  in,  13. 

Sanskrit  element  in,  38. 

Chinese  element  in,  14,  38. 

Arabic  element  in,  1-1,  38. 

Spanish  element  in,  14,  38. 

English  element  in,  14. 

Lack  of  Japanese  element  in,  14. 
Tagalog: 

Pronunciation  of,  15. 

Structure  of,  compared,  107,  XIV,  XV. 

Verb,  compared,  107,  XVI. 
Tenses,  106,  X. 

Lack  of  change  within,  107,  XII. 
"Ties,"  euphonic,  31. 
Transitive  verbs,  107,  XI. 
f,  when  considered  as  consonant,  31. 

Uni  (particle),  (with  adverb),  84,  (Use  shown),  110.  X,  111.  I,  (Fully  dis- 
cussed), 153-170,  (Diminutives),  180. 
Verb  (understood),  32. 
Verbs,  20,  38,  (discussion)  105-108. 

Completeness  of  Tagalog  verb,  107,  XVI. 

Definite,  108,  I,  II,  III. 

Definition  of,  105,  I. 

Intransitive,  107,  XL 

Modes,  106,  IX. 

Particularizing,  19. 

Superlative  form,  76. 

Tenses,  106,  X. 

Transitive,  107,  XL 
Wold  (with  adjective),  74,  (use)  110,  XIII. 
Words,  number  of  in  Tagalog,  19. 

ENGLISH    INDEX 

Able  to ,  to  be,  211,  III,  213,  VII. 

Able  to  do,  to,  177. 
Accept,  to,  120. 
Accompany,  to,  133,  165. 

Act  like  a ,  to,  230. 

Acts  of  the  senses,  123,  124,  214. 

Acts  of  will  or  mind,  124,  125. 

Add,  to,  137. 

Advise,  to,  134. 

Afraid,  to  be,  129. 

Aid,  to,  185. 

Animals,  domestic,  28,  29. 

Approach,  to,  184. 

Arrange,  to,  120. 

Arrive,  to,  140. 

Ascend,  to,  174. 

Ashamed,  to  be,  198. 

Ask,  to,  121. 

Asleep,  to  be,  198. 

Assemble,  to,  184. 

Attraction  toward,  idea  of,  114. 


INDEXES.  257 


Bathe,  to,  150. 

Bed;  bedding,  28,  29. 

Bed,  to  be  in,  199. 

Bed,  to  go  to,  151. 

Bite,  to,  122,  123. 

Blow,  to,  162. 

Bodv,  parts  of,  49,  50,  51. 

Borrow,  to,  114,  115,  137,  164. 

Breaking,  verbs  of,  198. 

Bridges,  43. 

Bring,  to,  114, 115. 

Build  a  house,  to,  133. 

Buildings,  kinds  of,  43. 

Bury,  to;  inter,  to,  195. 

Buy,  to,  114,  131,  133,  164,  172,  182,  (at  retail)  1.38. 

Calculate,  to,  124. 

Call,  to,  115,  173. 

Calling,  verbs  of,  115. 

Capture,  to,  173. 

Care  for,  to,  169,  204. 

Carrv,  to,  116,  133,  (different  wavs)  116,  117. 

Cause ,  to,  211,  lY,  212. 

Charitable,  to  be,  145. 

Choose,  to,  114. 

Civic  dignities,  53. 

Clothing,  articles  of,  52. 

Cold,  47. 

Come  down,  to,  130. 

Come  here,  to,  147. 

Come  in,  to,  173. 

Come  out,  to,  129. 

Coming  or  going,  20. 

Communication,  means  of,  43,  44. 

Compare,  to,  141. 

Compass,  points  of,  47. 

Compel,  to,  193. 

Complain,  to,  114. 

Conform,  to,  140 

Conquer,  to,  176. 

Consider,  to,  124. 

Contend  with,  to,  172. 

Contradict,  to,  172. 

Cook,  to,  133. 

Cooking  utensils,  etc.,  40. 

Cooking,  verbs  of,  135. 

Country,  character  of,  44. 

Cover,  to,  142. 

Curse,  to,  185. 

Cursing,  Tagalog,  105. 

Cut,  to,  117,  (different  ways)  117,  118. 

Cut  hair,  to,  168. 

Dark,  to  become,  163. 

Dawn,  to,  162. 

Deceive,  to,  144. 

Descend,  to,  176. 

Desire  to,  169,  170. 

Desire,  to,  124. 

Destroy,  to,  119,  138,  156. 

Destruction,  verbs  of,  119,  120. 

Die,  to,  119,  141. 

6855—06 17 


258  INDEXES. 

Dignities,  civil  and  military,  53. 

Directions  (of  compass),  47. 

Disappear,  to,  136. 

Diseases,  names  of,  51. 

Disentangle,  to  120. 

Disobev,  to,  172. 

Dive,  to,  128. 

Dream  to,  176. 

Drink,  to,  122,  127,  159,  175. 

Drinking,  24,  (drinkables)  28,  29. 

Drowned,  to  be,  201. 

Dwell,  to,  175. 

Earthquake,  47. 

Eating,  24,  (materials)  28,  29,  39,  (verbs  of)  122,  127,  159,  172. 

Edifices  (list  of),  43. 

Embark,  to,  140,  195. 

Empty  out,  to,  141. 

Endure,  to,  185. 

Enter,  to,  173. 

Envy,  to,  175. 

Equalize,  to,  141. 

Erect,  to,  152. 

Evil,  to  do  or  cause,  212. 

Exchange,  to,  120,  164. 

Explain,  to,  125. 

Extinguish,  to,  119,  156. 

Faint  awav,  to,  119. 

Fall,  to,  196. 

Fall  back,  to,  175. 

Feel,  to,  123. 

Ferry,  ford,  44. 

Fight,  to,  184. 

Finished,  to  be,  201. 

Fire,  40,  (conflagration)  43,  (signal  fire)  43. 

Firewood,  40. 

Fish,  edible  kinds,  39. 

Fish,  to,  121,  122,  206. 

Fishing,  terms  used  in,  49. 

Fly,  to,  128. 

Follow,  to,  139,  172. 

Foodstuffs,  28,  29,  (cooked)  113,  V. 

Forage,  grass,  43. 

Forbid,  to,  189. 

Force,  to,  193. 

Ford,  ferry,  44. 

Forget,  to,  198. 

Fractions,  how  expressed,  79. 

Fruit  (kinds),  29. 

Game,  names  for,  39. 

'Gather,  to,  141. 

Get  readv,  to,  140. 

Get  rid  of,  to,  136. 

Give,  to,  136,  143. 

Give  back,  to,  134. 

Glad,  to  be,  198. 

Go,  to,  129. 

(Jo  away,  to,  133,  174. 

(io  back,  to,  175. 

Go  down,  to,  130. 

Go  far,  to,  173. 

Cro  in,  to,  173. 


INDEXES.  259 


Goinj?  or  coming,  21,  22. 

Good,  to  do,  212. 

Grasp,  to,  147. 

Grass;  forage,  43. 

Graze,  to,  127. 

Greetings;  salutations,  20. 

Grin,  to,  160. 

Guard,  to,  144,  181. 

Guide,  to,  208. 

Have,  to,  30,  85,  86,  (not  to  have)  30. 

Hear,  to,  123. 

Hearing,  verbs  of,  145,  146. 

Heap  lip,  to,  137. 

Heat, '47. 

Heavenly  bodies,  45. 

Help,  to,  185. 

Horses  and  horse  equipments,  42. 

House,  40  (parts  of)  40,  41. 

Household  furniture,  28,  29,  41,  42. 

Hungrv,  to  be,  128,  196,  197. 

Hunt,  to,  121,  206. 

Inquire,  to,  121. 

Insult,  to,  182. 

Inviting,  verbs  of,  120.. 

Join  with,  to,  165. 

Join  with  in ,  to,  228. 

Jump,  to,  186. 

Jump  down,  to,  130. 

Kick,  to,  185. 

Kill,  to,  119,  156. 

Kiss,  to,  145. 

Kneel,  to,  158. 

Knees,  to  be  on,  199. 

Land  (features  of),  44,  47. 

Laugh,  to,  160. 

Lead,  to,  175. 

Leave,  to,  133,  174. 

Leavetaking,  23. 

Lend,  to  (monej-  onlj'),  1<^8- 

Lend  willingly,  to,  138. 

Lie  down,  to  151,  (various  postuTes  of)  159. 

Like,  to,  124,  170. 

Listen,  to,  123. 

Look,  to,  186. 

Look  at,  to,  123,  148,  172. 

Look  for,  to,  133,  169. 

Looking  for,  verbs  of,  116. 

Look  out  of,  to,  127. 

Lose,  to,  129. 

Love,  to,  124,  125. 

Make  (do),  to,  108,  I,  II. 

Make  haste,  to,  193. 

Making,  verbs  of,  125. 

Malinger,  to;  plav  sick,  to,  192. 

March,  to,  166. 

Maritime  terms,  45,  48. 

Meals;  food,  39. 

Measure,  to,  118. 

Measures,  moneys,  weights,  81,  82. 

Meet,  to,  184. 

Metals,  minerals,  49. 


2<)0  INDEXES. 

Military  grades,  53. 

Miss,  to,  129. 

Mock,  to,  185. 

Moneys,  weights,  measures,  81,  82. 

Months,  names  of,  46;  days  of,  79. 

Moon,  45. 

Motion  to,  to,  115. 

Moving,  verbs  of,  116. 

Mutter,  to,  189. 

Natural  divisions  (of  islands),  48. 

Nautical  terms,  45,  48. 

No,  99. 

Not,  99. 

Numerals,  how  expressed,  76-80. 

Obey,  to,  139,  172. 

Occupations,  etc.,  54,  55. 

Open,  to,  142. 

Order,  to ,  to,  217-219. 

Overtake,  to,  131. 

Pass,  to,  182. 

Pay  for,  to,  147. 

Persevere,  to,  177. 

Personal  possession,  115. 

Physical  acts,  160,  161. 

Pierce,  to,  147. 

Place,  how  indicated,  148-151. 

Place,  to,  136. 

Plant,  to,  136. 

Political  divisions,  48,  49. 

Poor,  to  be,  200. 

Positions,  to  be  in  certain,  199, 

Pour  out,  to,  137. 

Practice  medicine,  to,  204. 

Preach,  to,  204. 

Professions,  53,  54. 

Promise,  to,  177. 

Pronounce,  to,  189. 

Proper,  to  be,  184,  197. 

Provoke,  to,  175. 

Push,  to,  186. 

Put,  to,  136. 

Quarrel,  to,  184. 

Rain,  to,  162. 

Eeach,  to,  131. 

Read,  to,  170, 171, 173. 

Reap,  to,  203. 

Receive,  to,  120. 

Receiving,  verbs  of,  120. 

Recommend,  to,  134. 

Relatives,  kin,  31,  113,  V. 

Remain  behind,  to,  139. 

Remember,  to,  124. 

Remit,  to,  133. 

Report,  to,  134. 

Reprimand,  to,  121. 

Request,  to,  114, 132, 146. 

Resist,  to,  172. 

Resolve,  to,  177. 

Retreat,  to,  175. 

Rice,  kinds  of,  113,  V. 

Rice,  to  trade  or  sell,  143. 


INDEXES.  261 


Rivers,  streams,  44. 

Roads,  trails,  etc,  48. 

Rub,  to,  124. 

Run,  to,  128. 

Sad,  to  be,  188,  198. 

Salutations,  greetings,  20. 

Scatter,  to,  137. 

Scattering,  verbs  of,  187. 

Sea,  45,  (phenomena)  45. 

Searching,  verbs  of,  116. 

See,  to,  123. 

Seize,  to,  114. 

Sell,  to,  132,  (at  retail)  138. 

Send,  to,  114,  133. 

Servant,  hiring,  25. 

Sew,  to,  127. 

Shaking,  verbs  of,  116. 

Shave,  to,  168. 

Shellfish,  kinds,  39. 

Signal,  to,  135. 

Sit  down,  to,  159,  172,  181. 

Sleepv,  -to  be,  139. 

Smelf,  to,  123. 

Snatch,  to,  132. 

Sorrv,  to  be,  145. 

Sow,"  to,  136. 

Speak,  to,  134. 

Speaking,  verbs,  of,  188,  189. 

Spend,  to,  176. 

Spin,  to,  205. 

Split,  to,  118. 

Spreading,  verbs  of,  137. 

Stagger,  to,  183. 

Stand  up,  to,  157,  172. 

Steal,  to,  145,  165. 

Stir,  to,  185. 

Streams,  rivers,  44,  45. 

Stumble,  to,  197. 

Suffer,  to,  185. 

Suicide,  to  commit,  1 20. 

Sun,  45,  (setting  and  rising  of)  164. 

Sweep,  to,  122. 

Swim,  to,  127. 

Tableware,  28,  29. 

Talk,  to,  134. 

Talk  to,  to,  165. 

Take,  to,  114,  132,  173. 

Take  out,  to,  129. 

Taste,  to,  123. 

Teach,  to,  145. 

Tear,  to,  117. 

Tear  down,  to,  119. 

Tell,  to,  134. 

Tempt,  to  174. 

Think,  to,  124,  125. 

Thirsty,  to  be,  128. 

Threaten,  to,  143. 

Throw  away,  to,  136. 

Throw  down,  to,  136. 

Throwing,  verbs  of,  187. 

Time,  divisions  of,  45,  46,  92,  93. 


2(>2  indp:xe8. 

Toilet,  the;  (dressing)  24. 

Tools,  list  of,  42. 

Touch,  to,  123,  124. 

Trails,  roads,  etc.,  43. 

Translate,  to,  141. 

Translations,  244-246. 

Transfer,  to,  141, 

Travel  to,  140,  195,  208. 

Traveling,  22. 

Trees,  plants,  etc.,  53. 

Trench,  to  make  a,  151. 

Turn  back,  to,  175. 

Uncover,  to,  142. 

Untie,  to,  146. 

Use,  to,  114. 

Utensils,  cooking,  40. 

Utensils,  list  of,  42. 

Vegetables,  kinds,  39,  40. 

Verifv,  to,  125. 

AVait'for,  to,  120. 

Walk,  to,  166. 

Watch,  to,  144. 

Water,  29. 

Water  courses,  44,  45. 

Wearing,  verbs  of,  125.. 

Weather,  conditions  of,  23,  47. 

Weep,  to,  139. 

Weigh,  to,  119. 

Weights,  measures,  moneys,  81,  82. 

Win,  to,  176. 

Wish,  to,  169,  (not  to  wish),  175. 

Words,  miscellaneous,  240-243. 

Wound,  to,  151. 

Write,  to,  171,  172. 

Writing  materials,  43,  44. 

Yes,  99. 

TAGALOCi    INDEX. 

Abut,  131. 

AJiit,  168. 

Alaala,  124. 

Anyaija,  120. 

Arao,  162. 

Asin,  147. 

And,  145. 

Auay,  166. 

Ayao,  175. 

Babd  (mababd),  58. 

Bard,  125. 

Binuit,  121. 

Biro,  185. 

Bulag,  200. 

Buti  (mabiiti),  58. 

C  (only  retained  in  words  of  Spanish  origin). 

Daan,  183. 

Dolian  (marahan),  95. 

Bald,  114,  116. 

Dami  {marami),  58. 

Damit,  144. 

Daifd  (magdaraiid),  69. 

Dli7f/ig,  123,  146. 


INDEXES.  263 

Dipd,  82. 

Dito,  34,  138,  147. 

Doon,  34. 

Dnkhd,  200. 

E  (begins  Spanish  words  only). 

GaUng,  138,  148,  VII. 

Gawd,  108,  I,  II,  110,  XI,  XIII. 

GUI;  130. 

Gupit,  118,  168. 

Halik,  145. 

Hainpds,  129, 168, 187. 

Hdnap,  109,  V,  116,  133. 

Hangin,  162. 

Hdpis,- 138. 

Hapon,  163. 

iy«S(A-,  187. 

ffi'srd,  151. 

Hilamo-'i,  167.  * 

ifo5^i,  114,  132,  146. 

Huli,  165. 

f/ii.so?/,  120. 

Ibig,  124,  169. 

J>ii7  {mainit),  60. 

/nwHi,  122,  160. 

/sfM,  122. 

Jsip,  124,  182. 

/co,  157. 

Juan,  27,  37. 

kay  J.,  27,  28. 

ni  J.,  27,  28,  37. 

nina  J.,  27. 

si  J.,  27. 

sind  J.,  27. 
Kagat,  122. 
Kain,  122,  140,  159. 
Klnyig,  123. 
Kith,  123,  169,  184. 
Lahb,  199. 
Ldkad,  166. 
Laki,  155. 
Lambed,  122. 
Limot,  192. 
X??i/s  (malinis),  59. 
X«/iod,  158. 
J/orto,  181. 

/^firf/,  25,30,  (exp.)  37. 
Fanaog,  176. 
Panhik,  21. 
PdsoA-,  173. 
Patoy,  119,  140,  141. 
Fitds,  141. 
Pidi,  155. 
Pa/o?,  117. 

Q  (retained  only  in  Spanish  words  or  foreign  names). 
R  (only  begins  a  word  in  Tagalog  by  reason  of  euphonic  change  from  "d"). 
rin,  37. 
rito,  25,  35. 
Salitd,  134. 
Salubong,  120. 
Sama,  165. 
Snmd  {masamd),  58. 


264  INDEXES. 

iSambulat,  187. 

Silang,  164. 

Sir(l,  119,  138,  156. 

Sid,  139. 

Sugat,  151. 

Saklay,  168. 

Sulat,  171. 

Sumpd,  185. 

;Swnod,  139,  172,  182. 

Sunog,  156. 

To/ii,  127. 

TaA-fed,  128. 

Tcikot,  129. 

71u5^(s,  139. 

Tdpang  {mat&'pang) ,  65. 

Tmta,  160. 

Trn/d,  152. 

TlhiycL,  159. 

T;nrf(>,  157. 

Tipon,  184. 

r«d,  200. 

Tufeo,  161. 

Tidd  (matuid),  62. 

T«M,  174. 

Taksu,  174. 

Titfov,  178. 

Ttiyo  (matuyd),  60. 

C7/(in,  162. 

Una,  150. 

L^d,  159. 

f'7to?i(/,  114,  138,  164. 

V,  Only  retained  in  some  Spanish  words;  generally  changed  to  "  B." 

Ydman  (maydman),  69. 

'v,  32,  38. 

o 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


^989 


19 

.    MAR  0  3 1989 
t  OCTo.5i99J 


fiEC'D  YRL  JtC  0  1  '99 


■  H  BcrjinNAl  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000  138  121     9 


